TopPage

SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZMX6070/S2E

DIGITAL FULL COLOR

MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM

MX-5070N/6070N
MODEL MX-5050N/6050N

CONTENTS

NOTE FOR SERVICING

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

[6] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

[7] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

[9] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

[11] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

[13] OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.

This document has been published to be used

SHARP CORPORATION for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
 CONTENTS

NOTE FOR SERVICING [6] SIMULATION

1. General and purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
1. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 2. Function of each key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
2. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 3. Starting the simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
3. Note for installing site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 4. List of simulation codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
4. Note for handling PWB and electronic parts . . . . . . . . . .ii 5. Details of simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
[7] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE
6. Note for handling the drum unit, the transfer unit,
1. Trouble code and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
the developing unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
2. JAM and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
7. Screw tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
3. Image send communication report code . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE
[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE
1. System diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1. Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
2. Option list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
2. Update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS
[9] MAINTENANCE
1. Basic specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1. Works necessary when executing the maintenance . . 9-1
2. Copy function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2. Display of maintenance execution timing . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
3. Printer function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
3. Maintenance list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
4. Image send function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
5. Dimension and weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 [10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
6. Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 1. Disassembly of Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
2. Disassembly and assembly of each unit . . . . . . . . . 10-32
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS
[11] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
1. Consumable system table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1. Operation panel section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
2. Scanner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
3. Definition of developer/drum life end . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3. Manual paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
4. Production number identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
4. Tray paper feed section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
5. Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
5. Paper registration section (Paper transport section). 11-9
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
6. Paper exit section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
1. External view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
7. ADU section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
2. Internal structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
8. LSU section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
3. I/F connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
9. OPC drum section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
4. Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
10. Toner supply section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
5. DSPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
11. Developing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
6. RSPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
12. Transfer section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23
7. Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
13. Waste toner collection section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26
8. Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
14. Fusing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-28
9. Clutches and solenoids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
15. DSPF section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31
10. Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
16. RSPF section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-37
11. Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
17. Fan and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-43
12. Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
13. Fans and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 [12] ELECTRICAL SECTION
14. PWB/memory device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
15. Fuses and thermostats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 2. Power line diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
3. Actual wiring chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS
[13] OTHERS
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
1. TOOL LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
2. Adjustment item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
2. VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING . . . . . . . . . 13-1
3. Details of adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
3. Necessary steps when replacing the PWB,
HDD and the mSATA SSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
MX-6070N
NOTE FOR SERVICING Service Manual
• Do not damage, break, or stress the power cord.
Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not stress, forcibly
bend, or pull the power cord.
1. Precautions for servicing
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
• When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable, the • Keep the power cable away from a heat source.
network cable, and the telephone line from the machine, except Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet.
when performing the communication test, etc.
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
It may cause an injury or an electric shock.
• Do not place liquids or foreign metallic objects inside the machine.
• There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use extreme
care when servicing. It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
It may cause a burn. • Do not touch the power cord, insert the phone jack, operate the
machine, or perform service on the machine with wet or oily hands.
• There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may cause
It may cause an electric shock.
an electric shock. Be careful when servicing.
• Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective material
such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path.
3. Note for installing site
It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams. Do not install the machine at the following sites.
• When servicing with the machine operating, be careful not to • Place of high temperature, high humidity, low temperature, low
squeeze you hands by the chain, the belt, the gear, and other driving humidity, place under an extreme change in temperature and
sections. humidity.
• Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled. Paper may get damp and form condensation inside the machine,
Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch inside the causing paper jam or copy dirt.
machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or an injury. For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications
• When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink exces- described later.
sively. Do not get them in the eyes.
If toner, developer, or ink enters your eyes, wash it away with water
immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary.
• The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to damage
fingers when servicing.
• Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise, toner
may ignite and burn you.
• When replacing a lithium battery on a PWB, only use the specified
• Place of extreme vibrations
replacement battery.
It may cause a breakdown.
If a battery of different specification is used, it may cause a machine
malfunction or breakdown.
• When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed to it, be
sure to put it in an anti-static-electricity bag.
It may otherwise cause a machine breakdown or malfunction.

CAUTION
DOUBLE POLE/NEUTRAL FUSING

• Poorly ventilated place

2. Warning for servicing
An electrostatic type copier will produce ozone.
• Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that meets
The quantity of ozone produced is designed to a low level so as not
the specified voltage and current requirements.
to affect human bodies. However, continuous use of such a machine
Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electric shock. may produce an ozone smell. Install the machine in a well ventilated
It may cause a fire or an electric shock. place.
• If there is any abnormality such as a smoke or an abnormal smell,
interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug.
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
• Be sure to connect the grounding wire. If an electric leakage occurs
without grounding, a fire or an electric shock may result.
To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening, ground-
ing must be made.
• When connecting the grounding wire, never connect it to the follow-
ing points.
 Gas tube
 Lightning conductor
 A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a
grounding object by the authorities.
 Grounding wire for telephone line
It may cause an explosion, a fire or an electric shock.

i
• Place of direct sunlight. 4. Note for handling PWB and electronic parts
Plastic parts and ink may be deformed, discolored, or may undergo
When handling the PWB and the electronic parts, be sure to observe
qualitative change. the following precautions in order to prevent against damage by static
It may cause a breakdown or output quality problems. electricity.
• When in transit or storing, put the parts in an anti-static bag or an
anti-static case and do not touch them with bare hands.

• Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

The organic photo-conductor (OPC) drum used in the machine may
undergo qualitative change due to organic gases such as ammo-
nium.
Installation of this machine near a diazo-type copier and blue print
machine may result in poor quality output. • When and after removing the parts from an anti-static bag (case),
use an earth band as shown below:
• Put an earth band to your arm, and connect it to the machine.

• Place of much dust

When dust or contaminants enters the machine, it may cause a
breakdown or poor quality output.

• Place near a wall

The machine will require ventilation.
If ventilation is not proper, poor output or machine failure may result.

11-13/16" • When repairing or replacing an electronic part, perform the proce-

(30cm) dure on an anti-static mat.

11-13/16" 17-23/32"
(30cm) (45cm)

• Unstable or irregular surface

If the machine is dropped or tips over, it may cause injury or
machine malfunction.
Use an optional desk or an exclusive-use desk.
When using the optional desk, be sure to fix the adjuster and lock
the casters.

ii
5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU Screw kinds and tightening torques
Normal screws, set screws (including step screws)
When repairing or replacing, be sure to observe the following items.
• When repairing or replacing the LSU, be sure to disconnect the Tightening Tightening Tightening
power plug from the power outlet. Screw Material to be
torque torque torque
diameter fixed
• When repairing or replacing the LSU, follow the procedures (Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
described in this Service Manual. M2.6 Steel plate 0.8 - 1.0 8 - 10 0.6 - 0.7
• When checking the operations after repairing the LSU, keep all the M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
parts including the cover installed and perform the operation check. M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3

• Do not modify the LSU. Tapping screws (for iron)

• When visually checking the inside of the machine for the operation
check, be careful not to allow laser beams to enter the eyes. Tightening Tightening Tightening
Screw Material to be
torque torque torque
If the above precaution is neglected or the LSU is modified, ones diameter fixed
(Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
safety may be at risk. M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
(Plate thickness
6. Note for handling the drum unit, the transfer 0.8mm or above)
unit, the developing unit M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
(Plate thickness
When handling the OPC drum unit, the transfer unit, and the develop- 0.8mm or above)
ing unit, strictly observe the following items. M3 Steel plate 0.6 - 0.8 6-8 0.4 - 0.6
(Plate thickness
If these items are neglected, a trouble may be generated in the copy
less than 0.8mm)
and print image quality.
M4 Steel plate 1.2 - 1.4 12 - 14 0.9 - 1.0
Drum unit (Plate thickness
• Avoid working at a place with strong lights. less than 0.8mm)
• Do not expose the OPC drum to lights including interior lights for a Tapping screw (for plastic)
long time.
• When the OPC drum is removed from the machine, cover it with Tightening Tightening Tightening
Screw Material to be
light blocking material. (When using paper, use about 10 sheets of torque torque torque
diameter fixed
paper to cover it.) (Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
M3 Plastic resin 0.6 - 0.8 6-8 0.4 - 0.6
• Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign
M4 Plastic resin 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
material on the OPC drum surface.
Transfer unit
• Be careful not to leave fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign
material on the transfer roller, primary transfer belt, and the second-
ary transfer roller.
Developing unit
• Be careful not to leave fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign
material on the developing unit.

7. Screw tightening torque

The screws used in this machine are largely classified into three types.
These types are classified according to the shape of the screw
grooves and use positions.
The table below shows the types of the screws and the tightening
torques depending on the use position.
When tightening the screws for repair or maintenance, refer to the
table.
However, for the other conditions of tightening screws than specified
on this table, or under special circumstances, the details are described
on the separate page. Refer to the descriptions on such an exception.

Especially for the screw fixing positions where there is an electrode or

a current flows, use enough care to tighten securely to avoid loosen-
ing.

iii
MX-6070N
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE Service Manual

1. System diagram

MX-PN14
B/C/D
MX-PN15 MX-FN28 PUNCH MODULE MX-5070N MX-5050N
B/C/D FINISHER (1K) MX-UT10
MX-6070N MX-6050N
PUNCH UTILITY TABLE
MODULE DIGITAL FULL COLOR DIGITAL FULL COLOR
MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM

MX-FN27 MX-TR19
EXIT TRAY UNIT
INNER FINISHER

MX-FN29
MX-LT10
SADDLE STITCH
FINISHER (1K) LONG PAPER
MX-RB25 FEEDING TRAY
PAPER PASS UNIT

MX-TR20
JOB SEPARATOR
TRAY MX-LC17
MX-PN16 MX-FN30
LARGE CAPACITY
B/C/D FINISHER (3K) TRAY
PUNCH
MODULE

MX-TU16
EXIT TRAY CABINET

MX-FN31
SADDLE STITCH
FINISHER (3K)

MX-DE29 MX-DE25 MX-DE26 MX-DE27 MX-DE28

LOW STAND/550 STAND/550 SHEET STAND/2x550 SHEET STAND/3x550 SHEET STAND/550&2100 SHEET
SHEET PAPER PAPER DRAWER PAPER DRAWER PAPER DRAWER PAPER DRAWER
DRAWER

MX-PK13 MX-PF10 MX-PU10 MX-FX15 AR-SU1 MX-FWX1

PS3 EXPANSION KIT BARCODE FONT KIT DIRECT PRINT EXPANSION FACSIMILE EXPANSION STAMP UNIT INTERNET FAX
KIT KIT EXPANSION KIT

MX-EB11 MX-FR51U/FR52U MX-USX1 MX-USX5 MX-US10 MX-US50

ENHANCED COMPRESSION DATA SECURITY KIT SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE SHARPDESK 5 LICENSE SHARPDESK 10 LICENSE SHARPDESK 50 LICENSE
KIT KIT KIT KIT KIT

MX-USA0 MX-AMX1 MX-AMX2 MX-AMX3 MX-EB18

SHARPDESK 100 LICENSE APPLICATION APPLICATION EXTERNAL ACCOUNT WIRELESS LAN ADAPTOR
KIT INTEGRATION MODULE COMMUNICATION MODULE MODULE

MX-6070N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 1

2. Option list
MX-5070N MX-5050N
Model name Description Remaks
MX-6070N MX-6050N
Document Feed System ― REVERSING SINGLE PASS FEEDER ― STD
― DUPLEX SINGLE PASS FEEDER STD ―
Paper Feed System MX-DE25 STAND/550 SHEET PAPER DRAWER OPT OPT
MX-DE26 STAND/2x550 SHEET PAPER DRAWER OPT OPT
MX-DE27 STAND/3x550 SHEET PAPER DRAWER OPT OPT
MX-DE28 STAND/550&2100 SHEET PAPER DRAWER OPT OPT
MX-DE29 LOW STAND/550 SHEET PAPER DRAWER OPT OPT
MX-LC17 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY OPT OPT
MX-LT10 LONG PAPER FEEDING TRAY OPT OPT
Paper Exit System MX-TR19 EXIT TRAY UNIT OPT OPT
MX-TU16 EXIT TRAY CABINET STD/OPT STD/OPT *1
MX-TR20 JOB SEPARATOR TRAY OPT OPT
MX-FN27 INNER FINISHER OPT OPT
MX-PN14B PUNCH MODULE OPT OPT For MX-FN27
MX-PN14C OPT OPT
MX-PN14D OPT OPT
MX-RB25 PAPER PASS UNIT OPT OPT
MX-FN28 FINISHER (1K) OPT OPT
MX-FN29 SADDLE STITCH FINISHER (1K) OPT OPT
MX-PN15B PUNCH MODULE OPT OPT For MX-FN28/FN29
MX-PN15C OPT OPT
MX-PNX5D OPT OPT
MX-FN30 FINISHER (3K) OPT OPT
MX-FN31 SADDLE STITCH FINISHER (3K) OPT OPT
MX-PN16B PUNCH MODULE OPT OPT For MX-FN30/FN31
MX-PN16C OPT OPT
MX-PN16D OPT OPT
Printer Expansion MX-PK13 PS3 EXPANSION KIT STD OPT
MX-PF10 BARCODE FONT KIT OPT OPT
MX-PU10 DIRECT PRINT EXPANSION KIT STD OPT
Image Send Expansion MX-FX15 FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT OPT OPT *2
AR-SU1 STAMP UNIT OPT OPT
MX-FWX1 INTERNET FAX EXPANSION KIT OPT OPT
MX-EB11 ENHANCED COMPRESSION KIT ― OPT
Authentication / Security MX-FR51U DATA SECURITY KIT ― OPT
MX-FR52U DATA SECURITY KIT OPT ―
Application / Solution MX-USX1 SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE KIT OPT OPT
MX-USX5 SHARPDESK 5 LICENSE KIT OPT OPT
MX-US10 SHARPDESK 10 LICENSE KIT OPT OPT
MX-US50 SHARPDESK 50 LICENSE KIT OPT OPT
MX-USA0 SHARPDESK 100 LICENSE KIT OPT OPT
MX-AMX1 APPLICATION INTEGRATION MODULE OPT OPT
MX-AMX2 APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE STD/OPT OPT *1
MX-AMX3 EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE STD/OPT OPT *1
Other MX-EB18 WIRELESS LAN ADAPTOR STD OPT *2
― KEYBOARD STD ― *2
MX-UT10 UTILITY TABLE OPT OPT

STD: Standard equipment

OPT: Installable option
*1: Option in some area
*2: No support in some area

MX-6070N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 2

MX-6070N
[2] SPECIFICATIONS Service
(2) BypassManual

50ppm 60ppm
1. Basic specifications Paper size machine machine
Mono Color Mono Color
A. Engine specification A3 23 22 28 27
8K 23 22 27
Photo Conductor OPC (Diameter: Bk: φ30mm, CL (Y/M/C): 11x17 23 22 28 27
φ30mm x3) B4, 8.5x14, 8.5x13, 8.5x13.4, 8.5x13.5 27 26 31
Recording method Electronic Photo (Laser) A4, 16K 49 43 49 43
Development method Dry-Type Dual-Component Magnetic Brush 8.5X11 49 43 49 43
Development
B5, A5 49 43 49 43
Charging method Charged Saw-Tooth Method
A4R, B5R, 16KR, 8.5X11R, 7.25X10.5R 32 36
Transfer method Middle Transfer Belt
A5R, 5.5X8.5R 32 36
Separation method Discharge Separation Method
A3W, 12X18 22 27 26
*Sub Separation pawl is equipped.
SRA4 37 35 44 42
Cleaning method Counter Blade
SRA3 22 27
Fusing method Belt Method
OHP (A4, 8.5x11) 25 21 25 21
Waste toner disposal Toner Collecting Container
OHP (A4R, 8.5x11R) 20 17 20 17
B. Engine speed (ppm) Extra 22 22 27 26
Extra ( - 215.9mm) and the length of main
49 43 49 43
(1) Tray1-4,LCC scanning direction is 257mm and over
Extra (216 - 225mm) and the length of
50ppm 60ppm main scanning direction is 257mm and 37 35 44 42
Paper size machine machine over
Mono Color Mono Color Extra ( - 225mm) and length of main
32 33
A3 26 30 scanning direction is less than 257mm
8K 26 27 Extra (225.1 - 297mm) 32 36
11x17 26 30 Extra (297.1mm - ) 22 27 26
B4, 8.5x14, 8.5x13, 8.5x13.4, 8.5x13.5 28 31 Envelope (Monarch, Com-10, DL, C5) 17 15 17 15
A4, B5, 8.5x11, 16K, A5 50 60 Heavy paper (A3, 11X17, 8K) 15 13 15 13
A4R, 16KR, 8.5X11R, B5R, 7.25X10.5R 33 37 Heavy paper (B4, 8.5X14, 8.5X13,
15 13 15 13
A5R, 5.5X8.5R 33 37 8.5X13.4, 8.5X13.5)
A3W, 12X18 23 28 Heavy paper (A4, B5, A5, 8.5X11, 16K,
25 21 25 21
SRA4 40 48 5.5X8.5R)
SRA3 24 29 Heavy paper (A4R, B5R, 16KR, 8.5X11R,
20 17 20 17
Extra ( - 210mm) and the length of main 7.25X10.5R)
50 60 Heavy paper (A3W, 12X18) 14 13 14 13
scanning direction is 257mm and over
Extra (210.1 - 215.9mm) and the length of Heavy paper (Extra) 14 13 14 13
main scanning direction is 257mm and 50 60 Heavy paper (Extra: - 215.9mm) 25 21 25 21
over Heavy paper (Extra: 216 - 225mm) 25 21 25 21
Extra (216 - 225mm) and the length of Heavy paper (Extra: 225.1 - 297mm) 20 17 20 17
main scanning direction is 257mm and 40 48 Heavy paper (Extra: 297.1mm - ) 14 13 14 13
over Heavy paper (Postcard/High) 25 21 25 21
Extra ( - 225mm) and the length of main Heavy paper (Postcard/Low) 14 13 14 13
33 33
scanning direction is less that 257mm Heavy paper (SRA4) 25 21 25 21
Extra (225.1 - 297mm) 33 37 Heavy paper (SRA3) 14 13 14 13
Extra (297.1mm - ) 23 28
Heavy paper (A3, 11X17, 8K) 16 16 C. Printable area
Heavy paper (B4, 8.5X14, 8.5X13,
16 16
8.5X13.4, 8.5X13.5) Void area Top: 41mm
Heavy paper (A4, B5, A5, A5R, 8.5X11, Rear: 2mm or more, 5mm or less, Total 8mm or less
28 28
16K, 5.5X8.5R) FR total: 4mm2mm
Heavy paper (A4R, B5R, 16KR, 8.5X11R, Max printable area 319mmx1,292mm
22 22
7.25X10.5R)
Heavy paper (A3W, 12X18) 15 15
Heavy paper (Extra: - 215.9mm) 28 28
Heavy paper (Extra: 216 - 225mm) 27 27
Heavy paper (Extra: 225.1 - 297mm) 22 22
Heavy paper (Extra: 297.1mm - ) 15 15
Heavy paper (SRA4) 27 27
Heavy paper (SRA3) 15 15

MX-6070N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 1
D. Engine resolution F. Document feeder
Resolution *1 Copy Writing
(1) RSPF
600x600dpi
9,600 (equivalent)x600dpi Type RSPF (Reversing single pass feeder)
1,200x1,200dpi (BW only) Scan Speed Monochrome (A4/8.5x11) Color (A4/8.5x11)
Print Writing Copy Single: Single:
600x600dpi 80 sheets/minute 53 sheets/minute
9,600 (equivalent)x600dpi (600x400dpi, 4bit) (600x600dpi, 4bit)
1,200x1,200dpi 53 sheets/minute Duplex:
Tone (equivalent to Copy Writing (600x600dpi, 4bit) 22 page/minute
256 levels *2) Duplex: (600x600dpi, 4bit)
600x600dpi 4bit
25 pages/minute
9,600(equivalent)x600dpi —
(600x400dpi, 4bit)
Print Writing 22 pages/minute
PCL 600x600dpi 1bit, 4bit (600x600dpi, 4bit)
9,600(equivalnet)x600dpi — Fax Single: N/A
1,200x1,200dpi 1bit 80 sheets/minute
PS 600x600dpi 1bit, 4bit (200x200dpi, 1bit)
9,600(equivalnet)x600dpi — Duplex:
1,200x1,200dpi 1bit 25 pages/minute
(200x200dpi, 1bit)
*1: Default resolution is 600dpi Internet FAX Single: N/A
*2: The Dither and Error Diffusion methods using 8bit input will be per- 80 sheets/minute
(200x200dpi, 1bit)
formed.
Duplex:
E. Scanner section 25 pages/minute
(200x200dpi, 1bit)
(1) Resolution / Gradation Scanner Single: Single:
80 sheets/minute 80 sheets/minute
Scan Resolution Monochrome Color (200x200dpi, 1bit) (200x200dpi, 1bit)
for Copying (dpi) RSPF model DSPF model RSPF/DSPF Duplex: Duplex:
OC 600x600dpi 600x600dpi 600x600dpi 25 pages/minute 25 pages/minute
(default) (default) (200x200dpi, 1bit) (200x200dpi, 1bit)
600x400dpi 600x400dpi Document setup Upward standard (1toN feeding standard)
RSPF 600x600dpi 600x600dpi Direction
600x400dpi — Document standard Center standard (Rear one-side standard for random
(default) position feeding)
DSPF 600x600dpi 600x600dpi Document transport Sheet-through method
600x400dpi method
—
(default) Mix feeding (same Available (Simplex/Duplex)
600x300dpi AB or inch system,
Exposure Lamp White LED same width)
Scan Levels 10bit Random feeding Available (Duplex is not available)
(different (Combination allowed: A3&B4, B4&A4R, A4&B5,
(2) Document Glass combination of AB/ B5&A5, 11&8.5-inch.
inch system, AMS effective. 2-sided scanning is disabled during
Type Fixing Method (Flat bed) different width) random feeding.)
Scan Range 297x432mm Document weight Single Thin paper: 35 - 49g/m2, 9 - 13- lb. Bond
Original Cover Left back Plain paper: 50 - 128g/m2, 13 - 32 lb. Bond
Standard Location Thin paper mode (A4/8.5x11)
Detection Yes 36 sheets/minute (600x400dpi)
Detection size Auto Detect 25 sheets/minute (600x600dpi)
Heater Service parts Duplex 50 - 105 g/m2, 13 - 28 lb. Bond
(Scanner section) Document capacity Max. 120 sheets (64g/ m2 17 lb. Bond)
Max. 100 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond) or max. 13cm,
1/2 inch or less
Types of document The following documents are NOT allowed;
that may not be OHP, second original drawing, tracing paper, carbon
transported paper, thermal paper, wrinkled / broken / torn
document, document with cuts and pastes,
documents printed by an ink ribbon, and perforated
document except 2-punched / 3-punched (Perforated
document by punch unit is allowed.)
Paper detection Yes
Detectable paper Auto detection
size
Paper Feeding Right hand feeding
Direction
Stamp Option
Power Source Provided from the main unit
Dimensions W 580 x D 465 x H 155mm, W 22 53/64 x D 18 20/64 x
H 6 7/64inch
Weight Approx.6.7kg, Approx.14.8lb.

MX-6070N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 2
(2) DSPF Dimensions H 615 x D 482 x H 159 mm, W 24_1/4 x D 19 x H 2_3/
8inch
Type DSPF (Duplex single pass feeder) Weight Approx.14.8 kg, Approx.32.6 lb.
Scan Speed Monochrome (A4/8.5x11) Color (A4/8.5x11)
Copy Single: Single: G. Paper feed section
100 sheets/minute 53 sheets/minute
(600x300dpi, 4bit) (600x600dpi, 4bit)
(1) Basic specification
80 sheets/minute
(600x400dpi, 4bit) Duplex: Type Standard 1 Tray + Multi bypass
53 sheets/minute 106 pages/minutes Maximum 1 Tray (Std) + Tandem desk + Multi bypass + LCC
(600x600dpi, 4bit) (600x600dpi, 4bit) Heater Service part

Duplex:
Tray Tray 1 Multi Bypass
200 pages/minutes
Paper Standard 550 sheets 100 sheets
(600x300dpi, 4bit)
Capacity paper (80g/m2)
160 pages/minutes
(600x400dpi, 4bit) Paper Size Detection 30/35/40 cpm Available
106 pages/minutes models: Not available (Refer to the section
(600x600dpi, 4bit) 50/60 cpm models: 4.1.19)
Available
(Refer to the section
Fax Single: N/A
4.1.19)
100 sheets/minute
(200x200dpi, 1bit) Paper Type Settings Yes
Duplex: Method to change paper size By user By user
200 pages/minutes Default Inch-system 8.5x11 —
(200x200dpi, 1bit) Paper Size AB-system A4 —
Internet FAX Single: N/A Settings
100 sheets/minute Detection of Remaining None and 3 levels Available
(200x200dpi, 1bit) Paper (100%, 67%, 33%, Detect “None” status
Duplex: None) only.
200 pages/minutes Display of paper remaining No —
(200x200dpi, 1bit)
Scanner Single: Single: (2) Extra Paper Capacity
100 sheets/minute 100 sheets/minute
(200x200dpi, 1bit) (200x200dpi, 8bit) Paper type Feeding Tray Multi Bypass
Duplex: Duplex: Postcard Yes 20 sheets
200 pages/minutes 200 pages/minutes Envelope N/A 20 sheets
(200x200dpi, 1bit) (200x200dpi, 8bit) OHP N/A 20 sheets
Document setup Upward standard (1toN feeding standard) Heavy paper 106 - 220g/m2: 200 sheets, 106 - 256g/m2: 40 sheets
Direction 221 - 300g/m2: 100 sheets 257 - 300g/m2: 20 sheets
Document standard Center standard Tab paper N/A 20 sheets
position Glossy paper N/A 1 sheet
Document transport Sheet-through method Others N/A 1 sheet
method
Mix feeding (same Available (Simplex/Duplex) (3) Feedable Paper Type
AB or inch system,
same width) Multi
Random feeding Available (Simplex/Duplex) Paper feed section Tray1
Bypass
(different (Combination allowed: A3&B4, B4&A4R, A4&B5, Min.paper weight 60g/m2 55g/m2
combination of AB / B5&A5, 11&8.5-inch. AMS effective.) Max.paper weight 300g/m2 300g/m2
inch system,
Thin paper 55-59g/m2 13-16 lb. bond - Yes
Paper Type

different width)
Plain paper 60-105g/m2 16-28 lb. bond Yes Yes
Document weight Single Thin paper: 35 - 49g/m2, 9 - 13- lb. Bond
Recycled Paper Yes Yes
Plain paper: 50 - 128g/m2, 13 - 32 lb. Bond
*Thin paper mode (54 sheets/minute Colored Paper Yes Yes
(600x300dpi), 46 sheets/minute Letter head Yes Yes
(600x400dpi), 36 sheets/minute Pre printed Yes Yes
(600x600dpi) (when A4/8.5x11)) is set up Pre Punched Yes Yes
for the thin paper. Heavy Paper 106-176g/m2 28 lbs bond-65 lbs
Yes Yes
Duplex 50 - 128g/m2, 13 - 32 lb. Bond Cover
Document capacity Max. 180 sheets (64g/ m2 17 lb. Bond) Heavy Paper 177-220g/m2 65 lbs Cover-80 lbs
Yes Yes
Max. 150 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb. Bond) or max. Cover
19.5mm, 50/64inch or less Heavy Paper 221-256g/m2 80 lbs Cover-140 lbs
Yes Yes
Types of document The following documents are NOT allowed; Index
that may not be OHP, second original drawing, tracing paper, carbon Heavy Paper 257-300g/m2140 lbs Index-110 lbs
Yes Yes
transported paper, thermal paper, wrinkled / broken / torn Cover
document, document with cuts and pastes, Embossed paper - Yes
documents printed by an ink ribbon, and perforated Envelope - Yes
document except 2-punched / 3-punched (Perforated
Transparency - Yes
document by punch unit is allowed.)
Label - Yes
Paper detection Yes
Tab Paper - Yes
Detectable paper Auto detection
Glossy Paper - Yes
size
User setting 1-7 Yes Yes
Paper Feeding Right hand feeding
Direction
Stamp Option
Power Source Provided from the main unit

MX-6070N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 3
 Multi Ethernet 1 port
Paper feed section Tray1
Bypass Interface 10Base-T, 100Base-TX,
SRA3 320x450 Yes Yes 1000Base-T
Paper Size

12x18 (A3W) 305x457 Yes Yes Support TCP/IP(IPv4, IPv6): Supported

SRA4 320x225 Yes Yes Protocol IPX/SPX: Not Supported
Ledger (11x17) 279x432 Yes Yes EtherTalk: Not Supported
Legal (8.5x14) 216x356 Yes Yes USB 2.0(High ARM11 Not used
Asian Legal (8.5x13.5) 216x343 Yes Yes speed) (Host) 2 port SOC For Wireless
Paper Size

Mexican Legal (8.5x13.4) 216x340 Yes Yes LAN module

(internal)
Foolscap (8.5x13) 216x330 Yes Yes
USB HUB Front port
Letter (8.5x11) 279x216 Yes Yes
(4 port) For IC card
Letter-R (8.5x11R) 216x279 Yes Yes
reader
Executive-R (7.25x10.5R) 184x266 Yes Yes
(internal)
Invoice-R(5.5x8.5R) 140x216 Yes Yes
Keyboard
A3 297x420 Yes Yes (internal)
B4 257x364 Yes Yes Rear port
A4 297x210 Yes Yes USB 2.0 1port (default off)
A4R 210x297 Yes Yes (High speed) (device)
B5 257x182 Yes Yes
B5R 182x257 Yes Yes MX-xx50 series
A5 210x148 Yes Yes CPU ARM11 600MHz
A5R 148x210 Yes Yes ARM9 400MHz (1W energy
8K 270x390 Yes Yes saving mode 75MHz:)
16K 270x195 Yes Yes SOC Intel ATOM E3827 1.75GHz
16KR 195x270 Yes Yes Interface
Postcard 100x148 Yes Yes IEEE1284 Parallel No
Monarch 98x191 - Yes Ethernet 1 port
COM10 105x241 - Yes Interface 10Base-T, 100Base-TX,
DL 110x220 - Yes 1000Base-T
C5 229x162 - Yes Support TCP/IP(IPv4, IPv6): Supported
Custom-Custom Size Yes Yes Protocol IPX/SPX: Not Supported
Extra - Yes EtherTalk: Not Supported
Custom range Min X 182mm / 140mm/ USB 2.0(High ARM11 Not used
7_1/4 5_1/2 speed) (Host) 2 port SOC For Wireless
inch inch LAN module
Max X 457mm / 457mm/ (internal)
18 inch 18 inch USB HUB Front port
Min Y 132mm / 90mm/ (4 port) For IC card
5_1/4 3_5/8 reader
inch inch (internal)
Max Y 320mm / 320mm/ Keyboard
12_1/2 12_1/2 (internal)
inch inch Rear port
Long paper Width: USB 2.0 1port (default off)
90 - 320mm (High speed) (device)
- Yes
Length:
458 - 1300mm J. MemoryHard disk
H. Operation panel MX-xx70 series
ICU PWB
Size 10.1 inch Flash
mSATA SSD REUS SOC HDD*1
Form Dot matrix LCD, Touch panel memory
On board On board
Number of Display Dot 1024 x 600 dot (WSVGA) 16MB 16GB 1 GB(STD) 4 GB(STD) 500GB
Color Yes
LCD Drive Display Area (WxD) 222.72x125.28mm (CMO 10.1 inch) *1: HDD capacity may vary depending on the procurement condition.
LCD Back Light LED backlight method
MX-xx50 series
LCD Contrast Adjustment Yes
Angle/Position Adjustment Yes (free stop) ICU PWB
Flash
Touch Panel Method Resistive touch display (effective 2- mSATA SSD REUS SOC HDD*1
memory
point touch) On board On board
16MB 16GB 1 GB(STD) 4 GB(STD) 250GB
I. Controller board
*1: HDD capacity may vary depending on the procurement condition.
MX-xx70 series
mSATA SSD
CPU ARM11 600MHz
ARM9 400MHz (1W energy Utilized memory Area Boot/Program area
saving mode 75MHz:) FAX data storage area: 1GB
SOC Intel ATOM E3845 1.91GHz
Interface
IEEE1284 Parallel No

MX-6070N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 4
K. Wireless LAN 3. Printer function
Item Specification A. Printer driver supported OS
Compliant regulation IEEE802.11 n/g/b
Transmission method IEEE802.11n/g OFDM method Custom
Custom
IEEE802.11b DS-SS method OS PCL6 PPD PC-Fax TWAIN
PS
HOST I/F USB 2.0 Type A - Connect the module to MFP’s SPDL2-c
internal USB I/F Vista CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM

Windows
DEVICE I/F IEEE802.11 n/g/b Vista 64 CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Antenna type Integrated antenna Server 2008 CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Access mode Infrastructure mode, Software AP mode Server 2008
CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Security WEP, WPA/WPA2-mixed PSK, WPA/WPA2-mixed x 64
EAP*,WPA2 PSA,WPA2 EAP* Windows 7 CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
*Not applicable to access point mode Windows 7
CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
x 64
L. Warm-up time Windows 8 CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 8
CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Warm up time Main power SW on*1 15 sec x 64
Sub Power SW on*1 15 sec Windows 8.1 CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Availability of Preheat mode Yes Windows 8.1
CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Jam recovery time 15 sec x 64
Server 2012
*1: Result may change depending on the environmental condition. CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
x 64
X10.4 No CD-ROM No No No

Mac
M. Power source X10.5 No CD-ROM No No No
X10.6 No CD-ROM No No No
100V 200V
X10.7 No CD-ROM No No No
Voltage / Current 110 - 127V 12A 220-240V 8 A
X10.8 No CD-ROM No No No
Frequency 60Hz 50/60Hz
X10.9 No CD-ROM No No No
Power source cord Fixed type (Direct) Inlet type
X10.10 No CD-ROM No No No
Power switch 2 switches
Primary switch: in the front cover
Secondary switch (momentary SW): on the operation
B. PDL emulationFont
panel
PDL (command) Pre-installed font Optional Font
N. Power consumption PCL5c/PCL6 STD European outline font Barcode font
compatible =80 styles =28 styles
100V 200V Line printer font (BMP)
=1 style
Max. rated power 1.44 kW 1.84 kW
consumption*1 Genuine Postscript3 STD* European outline font
—
=139 styles
Fax waiting power Yes No
consumption is 1W or less/ (Except when using Font for List Print STD Arfic mobile font
—
*Condition of Standing by Fax/NW Scalable font
Network: simultaneously.)
*Option for MX-xx50 series
Connect with TCP/IP
protocol only.
Time to move into Preheat 1 minute (Default) 4. Image send function
mode
Recovery time from Preheat 6 seconds A. Mode
mode
Time to move into Sleep 1 minute (Default) Europe: 11 minutes Mode Sub mode
mode Other: 1minute Scanner E-mail, FTP server, Shared folder (SMB),
Desktop, USB memory, HDD
*1: Power ON. Dehumidiator switch: OFF Internet Fax/ Direct SMTP -
Fax -
2. Copy function Data input (metadata) E-mail, FTP server, Shared folder (SMB),
Desktop
A. First copy time
Engine Mono Color
OC 4.7 6.7
RSPF 7.6 9.7
DSPF 7.3 10

MX-6070N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 5
B. Support image Internet Fax/
Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP
Format / Selection of image quality N/A Halftone Halftone
Mode Compression Item (B&W only) (B&W only)
method ON/OFF ON/OFF
Scanner File format TIFF, PDF, PDF/A-1b, PDF/A-1a, Encrypted
(Mono 2 PDF, XPS, Searchable PDF, Office file (pptx, 5. Dimension and weight
gradation) xlsx, docx), Text file (TXT) (UTF-8), Rich text
file (RTF)
File format Color TIFF, JPEG, PDF, PDF/A-1b, PDF/A-1a, Outer dimensions DSPF model:
(Color/ Encrypted PDF, XPS, Searchable PDF, Office (WxDxH) 616 x 660 x 838 (mm)
Grayscale) file (pptx, xlsx, docx), Text file (TXT) (UTF-8), 24.17/64 x 25.63/64 x 33 (inch)
Rich text file (RTF), Compact PDF(*) RSPF model:
608 x 650 x 834 (mm)
Compression Non-compression, G3 (1-dimentional)= MH
23.15/16 x 25.19/32 x 32.27/32 (inch)
method (Modified Huffman), G4= MMR (Modified MR)
(Mono 2 Dimensions occupied DSPF model: 1009 x 659 x 838 (mm) when
gradation) by machine extending bypass tray
RSPF model: 1003 x 650 x 834 (mm) when
Compression JPEG (High/Middle/Low), Black Letter
extending bypass tray
method Emphasis
(Color/ Weight (Not including DSPF model: 90.0kg 198.5 lb
Grayscale) consumables. Including RSPF model: 81.8 kg 180.4 lb
photoconductor and
Internet File format TIFF-FX(TIFF-F / TIFF-S)
developer.)
Fax (Monochrome)
Direct Compression G3 (1-dimentional)= MH (Modified Huffman),
SMTP method G4 = MMR (Modified MR) 6. Environmental conditions
(Monochrome)
Fax Compression MH/ MR/ MMR/JBIG
method (Humidity)
(Monochrome)
85%
File per page (Setting of the number of pages available)
60%
* Option for MX-xx50 series

C. Image processing AREA 1

(1) Color Mode

20%
Internet Fax/
Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP
B&W Yes Yes Yes
Grayscale Yes N/A N/A
10 °C 30 °C 35 °C (Temperature)
Full color Yes N/A N/A
Auto Color Selection
Yes N/A N/A
(ACS)

(2) Resolution

Internet Fax/ Direct

Level Scanner Fax
SMTP
1 100x100dpi 200x100 dpi Standard: 203.2x97.8 dpi
(Half Tone: N/A.) (Half Tone: N/A.)
2 150x150dpi N/A N/A
3 200x200dpi 200x200dpi Fine (203.2x195.6 dpi)
4 300x300dpi 200x400dpi Super Fine (203.2x391 dpi)
5 400x400dpi 400x400dpi Ultra Fine (406.4x391 dpi)
6 600x600dpi 600x600dpi N/A

(3) Exposure / Original Type

Internet Fax/
Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP
Halftone reproduction Equivalent to <- <-
256
gradations
Exposure Auto Yes <- <-
Adjustment Manual 5 levels <- <-
Original Text Yes N/A N/A
document Text / Photo Yes N/A N/A
type Text / Printed Yes N/A N/A
(Selectable photo
in manual Photo Yes N/A N/A
mode)
Printed photo Yes N/A N/A
Map Yes N/A N/A
Magical scan (Area division + Yes N/A N/A
Suppress Background)

MX-6070N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 6
MX-6070N
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS Service Manual

1. Consumable system table

A. North America, Middle America, South America
Qty in
Item Model name Content Qty Life collective Remarks
package
Toner cartridge MX-60NT-BA Toner cartridge (Black toner) 1 40K 10 *Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
(Black)
Toner cartridge MX-60NT-CA Toner cartridge (Cyan toner) 1 24K 10
(Cyan)
Toner cartridge MX-60NT-MA Toner cartridge (Magenta toner) 1 24K 10
(Magenta)
Toner cartridge MX-60NT-YA Toner cartridge (Yellow toner) 1 24K 10
(Yellow)
Developer MX-60NV-BA Developer (Black developer) 1 2700K 10 Standard printable number
(Black) rotation 500K
Maximum printable number
570K
Developer MX-60NV-SA Developer 1 2700K 10 Standard printable number
(Cyan/ (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) rotation 400K
Magenta/ (3 colors/set) Maximum printable number
Yellow) 460K
Drum MX-60NR-SA Drum 1 1350K 10 Standard printable number
rotation BK:250K
CL:200K
Maximum printable number
BK:285K
CL:230K
Drum unit MX-60NU-SA Drum unit 1 1350K 10 Standard printable number
(Process unit+Drum) rotation BK:250K
Color identification seal (C/M/Y/K) 1 each 1 CL:200K
Maximum printable number
BK:285K
CL:230K

B. Europe, Australia, New Zealand

Qty in
Item Model name Content Qty Life collective Remarks
package
Toner cartridge MX-60GT-BA Toner cartridge (Black toner) 1 40K 10 *Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
(Black)
Toner cartridge MX-60GT-CA Toner cartridge (Cyan toner) 1 24K 10
(Cyan)
Toner cartridge MX-60GT-MA Toner cartridge (Magenta toner) 1 24K 10
(Magenta)
Toner cartridge MX-60GT-YA Toner cartridge (Yellow toner) 1 24K 10
(Yellow)
Developer MX-60GV-BA Developer (Black developer) 1 2700K 10 Standard printable number
(Black) rotation 500K
Maximum printable number
570K
Developer MX-60GV-SA Developer 1 2700K 10 Standard printable number
(Cyan/ (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) rotation 400K
Magenta/ (3 colors/set) Maximum printable number
Yellow) 460K
Drum MX-60GR-SA Drum 1 1350K 10 Standard printable number
rotation BK:250K
CL:200K
Maximum printable number
BK:285K
CL:230K
Drum unit MX-60GU-SA Drum unit 1 1350K 10 Standard printable number
(Process unit+Drum) rotation BK:250K
Color identification seal (C/M/Y/K) 1 each 1 CL:200K
Maximum printable number
BK:285K
CL:230K

MX-6070N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 1

C. Asia, Hong Kong
Qty in
Item Model name Content Qty Life collective Remarks
package
Toner cartridge MX-60AT-BA Toner cartridge (Black toner) 1 40K 10 *Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
(Black)
Toner cartridge MX-60AT-CA Toner cartridge (Cyan toner) 1 24K 10
(Cyan)
Toner cartridge MX-60AT-MA Toner cartridge (Magenta toner) 1 24K 10
(Magenta)
Toner cartridge MX-60AT-YA Toner cartridge (Yellow toner) 1 24K 10
(Yellow)
Developer MX-60AV-BA Developer (Black developer) 1 2700K 10 Standard printable number
(Black) rotation 500K
Maximum printable number
570K
Developer MX-60AV-SA Developer 1 2700K 10 Standard printable number
(Cyan/ (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) rotation 400K
Magenta/ (3 colors/set) Maximum printable number
Yellow) 460K
Drum MX-60AR-SA Drum 1 1350K 10 Standard printable number
rotation BK:250K
CL:200K
Maximum printable number
BK:285K
CL:230K
Drum unit MX-60AU-SA Drum unit 1 1350K 10 Standard printable number
(Process unit+Drum) rotation BK:250K
Color identification seal (C/M/Y/K) 1 each 1 CL:200K
Maximum printable number
BK:285K
CL:230K

D. Middle East, Africa, Taiwan, Philippines, Israel

Qty in
Item Model name Content Qty Life collective Remarks
package
Toner cartridge MX-60FT-BA Toner cartridge (Black toner) 1 40K 10 *Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
(Black)
Toner cartridge MX-60FT-CA Toner cartridge (Cyan toner) 1 24K 10
(Cyan)
Toner cartridge MX-60FT-MA Toner cartridge (Magenta toner) 1 24K 10
(Magenta)
Toner cartridge MX-60FT-YA Toner cartridge (Yellow toner) 1 24K 10
(Yellow)
Developer MX-60FV-BA Developer (Black developer) 1 2700K 10 Standard printable number
(Black) rotation 500K
Maximum printable number
570K
Developer MX-60FV-SA Developer 1 2700K 10 Standard printable number
(Cyan/ (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) rotation 400K
Magenta/ (3 colors/set) Maximum printable number
Yellow) 460K
Drum MX-60FR-SA Drum 1 1350K 10 Standard printable number
rotation BK:250K
CL:200K
Maximum printable number
BK:285K
CL:230K
Drum unit MX-60FU-SA Drum unit 1 1350K 10 Standard printable number
(Process unit+Drum) rotation BK:250K
Color identification seal (C/M/Y/K) 1 each 1 CL:200K
Maximum printable number
BK:285K
CL:230K

MX-6070N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 2

2. Maintenance parts list
A. North America, Middle America, South America
Qty in
Item Model name Content Qty Life collective Remarks
pachage
Fusing belt kit MX-608FB Fusing belt unit 1 300K 4
Pressure roller kit MX-607LH Pressure roller 1 300K 10
Primary transfer belt kit MX-607B1 Primary transfer belt 1 300K 10
Primary transfer blade kit MX-607TL Primary transfer blade 1 300K 10
Cleaning roller 1
PTC kit MX-608CU PTC unit 1 300K 10
Secondary transfer roller kit MX-607U2 Secondary transfer roller 1 300K 10
Filter kit MX-607FL Ozone filter 1 300K 10
Toner collection container MX-607HB Toner collection container (with LSU cleaner x 2) 1 50K 10
Main charger kit MX-607MK Main charger unit 1 Drum rotation 10
Cleaning blade 1 1350K
DV toner filter kit MX-607FK DV toner filter kit 1 BK: 250L 10
CL:200K
Staple cartridge MX-SCX1 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20 For Inner/ 1K FIN
Staple cartridge AR-SC2 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20 For 1K saddle FIN
Staple cartridge MX-SC11 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20 For 3K FIN/
3K saddle FIN
Staple cartridge MX-SC12 Staple cartridge 4 2000 times x 4 32 For 3K saddle FIN
Finish stamp cartridge AR-SV1 Finish stamp cartridge 2 - 20
Primary transfer belt unit MX-608U1 Primary transfer belt unit 1 - 1 For service rotation
Fusing unit MX-607FU1 Fusing unit (100V series) 1 - 1 For service rotation

B. Europe, Australia, New Zealand, Asia, Middle East

Qty in
Item Model name Content Qty Life collective Remarks
pachage
Fusing belt kit MX-608FB Fusing belt unit 1 300K 4
Pressure roller kit MX-607LH Pressure roller 1 300K 10
Primary transfer belt kit MX-607B1 Primary transfer belt 1 300K 10
Primary transfer blade kit MX-607TL Primary transfer blade 1 300K 10
Cleaning roller 1
PTC kit MX-608CU PTC unit 1 300K 10
Secondary transfer roller lit MX-607U2 Secondary transfer roller 1 300K 10
Filter kit MX-607FL Ozone filter 1 300K 10
Toner collection container MX-607HB Toner collection container (with LSU cleaner x 2) 1 50K 10
Main charger kit MX-607MK Main charger unit 1 Drum rotation 10
Cleaning blade 1 1350K
DV toner filter kit MX-607FK DV toner filter 1 BK: 250K 10
CL: 200K
Staple cartridge MX-SCX1 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20 For Inner/ 1K FIN
Staple cartridge AR-SC2 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20 For 1K saddle FIN
Staple cartridge MX-SC11 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20 For 3K FIN/
3K saddle FIN
Staple cartridge MX-SC12 Staple cartridge 4 2000 times x 4 32 For 3K saddle FIN
Finish stamp cartridge AR-SV1 Finish stamp cartridge 2 20
Primary transfer belt unit MX-608U1 Primary transfer belt unit 1 1 For service rotation
Fusing unit MX-607FU Fusing unit (200V series) 1 1 For service rotation

MX-6070N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 3

3. Definition of developer/drum life end The lot number is comprised of 10 digits. Each digit indicates the con-
tent as follows.
When the developer/drum counter reaches the maximum printable
The number is printed on the flange on the front side.
count.
When the developer/drum rpm reaches the specified count. Digit Character type Content
When either of the above reach the specified count, it is judged as life 1 Number For this model is 2
end. 2 Alphabet Model conformity code
3 Number End digit of the production year
4 Number or Production month
In an actual case, the ratio of monochrome output and color output
X, Y, Z X stands for October
may differ greatly.
Y November
When data of mixed documents (monochrome and color) are output, Z December
monochrome document data may be output in the color mode in order 5 Number Day of the production date
to prevent against fall in the job efficiency. (ACS auto color selection). 6
In addition, when correction or warm-up operation is performed as well 7 Number or Day of the month of packing
as output operation, the developer and the drum rotates. X, Y, Z X stands for October
Y November
Therefore, the developer/drum consuming level cannot be determined
Z December
only by the copy/print quantity. When, therefore, the rpm reaches the
8 Number Day of the packing date
specified amount, it is judged as life end. 9
To check the developer/drum life, use SIM22-13. 10 Alphabet Production factory

However, when the copy/print quantity is large and the developer/drum

B. Developer
counter reaches the maximum printable quantity even if the rpm does
not reach the specified amount, it is judged as life end.
The table which shows the relation between the standard printable C. M .Y
quantity and the maximum printable quantity in the specified rpm
amount is as follows. BK

* Standard printable quantity means the printing quantity under the

specified developer/drum count by using the specified test data

Developer
3B301

Standard printable Maximum printable Rotation

number number
Mono Color Mono Color Mono Color
500K 400K 570K 460K 2700K 2700K The lot number is 8 digits (BK) and 5 digits (CMY) in length. Each digit
indicates the content as follows.
Drum The number is printed on the back side of the developer bag.
Standard printable Maximum printable Rotation [BK]
number number
Mono Color Mono Color Mono Color Digit Character type Content
250K 200K 285K 230K 1350K 1350K 1 Alphabet Production factory
2 Number End digit of the production year
4. Production number identification 3 Number Production month
4
A. OPC drum 5 Number Day of the production date
6
7 hyphen
8 Number production lot

[C,M,Y]

Digit Character type Content

1 Number End digit of the production year
2 Alphabet Production factory
3 Number or Production month
X, Y 0 stands for October
X November
Y December
4 Number Day of the production date
5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

MX-6070N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 4

C. Toner cartridge
The number is printed on the side of the toner cartridge

: Unit code/Model name

: Color code
(Black: BK/Cyan: CY/Magenta: MA/Yellow: YE)
: Destination
: Skating
: Production factory
: Production date (YYYYMMDD)
: Serial number
: Version number
: Line No.

5. Environmental conditions

（Humidity）
85%

60%

20%

10℃ 30℃ 35℃

（Temperature）

Standard environmental Temperature 21 – 25°C

conditions Humidity 50 ± 10%RH

Usage environmental Temperature 10 – 35°C

conditions Humidity 20 – 85%RH

Storage period Toner/Developer: 24 months from the

manufactured month (Production lot) under
unsealed state.
Drum:36 months from the manufactured month
under unsealed state.

MX-6070N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 5

MX-6070N
Service Manual
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
1. External view

1 2 3 1 4 5 6 7

8 9 10

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Automatic document feeder It automatically feeds and scans multiple originals. 2-sided originals can be automatically scanned.
For the MX-xx70N, both sides of 2-sided originals can be automatically scanned at one time.
2 Output tray (exit tray cabinet)*1 Received faxes and printed papers are delivered to this tray.
3 Job separator tray (upper tray)*1 Output is delivered to this tray.
4 USB port (A type) This is used to connect a USB device such as a USB memory device to the machine.
Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).
5 Operation panel This panel hosts the [Power] button, [Power Save] button/indicator, error indicator, [Home Screen] button,
main power button, data notification indicator and touch panel.
Use the touch panel to operate each of these functions.
6 Exit tray unit (right tray)*1 Set this tray as the output tray if needed.
7 Keyboard*1 Use this as a substitute for the soft keyboard displayed on the touch panel. When not being used, it can
be stored under the operation panel.
8 Inner finisher*1 This staples paper. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output paper. You can also
perform stapling manually.
9 Toner cover Open to replace a toner cartridge.
10 Front cover Open to switch the main power switch to "On" or "Off".

*1 Optional

MX-6070N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 1

 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

24

25

26

18 19 20 21 22 23

No. Name Function/Operation Note

11 Saddle Stitch Finisher (large stacker)*1 This staples and folds paper. A punch module can
also be installed to punch holes in output paper.
You can also perform stapling manually.
12 Paper pass unit*1 Relay between the machine and the finisher, finisher
(large stacker), saddle stitch finisher or saddle stitch
finisher (large stacker).
13 Motion sensor*2 This sensor detects the presence of a person that
approaches the machine, and automatically wakes
the machine from sleep mode (Motion Sensor Mode
Only).
14 Utility table*1 You can use this as a work platform, or temporarily
place originals or a mobile device.
• Do not place anything that weighs more than
5kg or otherwise apply a load.
• Do not place a container that contains water or
other liquid. Risk of fire and electrical shock if
the liquid spills and enters the machine.
• Working on the table while the machine is in
operation may cause poor image quality or
other problems.
15 Bypass tray Use this tray to feed paper manually.
When loading paper larger than 8-1/2" x 11"R or
A4R, pull out the extension guide.
16 Tray 5 (when a large capacity tray is Store paper in this tray.
installed)*1
17 Tray 1 Store paper in this tray.
18 Finisher*1 This staples paper. A punch module can also be
installed to punch holes in output paper.
19 Saddle Stitch Finisher*1 This staples and folds paper. A punch module can
also be installed to punch holes in output paper.
20 Finisher (large stacker)*1 This staples paper. A punch module can also be
installed to punch holes in output paper. You can
also perform stapling manually.
21 Punch module*1 This is used to punch holes in output. Requires an
inner finisher, finisher, finisher (large stacker), saddle
stitch finisher or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker).
22 Tray 3 (when a stand/2x550/3x550 sheet Store paper in this tray.
paper drawer is installed)*1
23 Tray 4 (when a stand/3x550 sheet paper Store paper in this tray.
drawer is installed)*1
24 Tray 2 (when a low stand/550 sheet paper Store paper in this tray.
drawer or stand/550/2x550/3x550/
550&2100 sheet paper drawer is
installed)*1
25 Tray 4 (when a stand/550&2100 sheet Store paper in this tray.
paper drawer is installed)*1
26 Tray 3 (when a stand/550&2100 sheet Store paper in this tray.
paper drawer is installed)*1

*1 Optional
*2 Can only be used on the MX-xx70N.

MX-6070N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 2

A. DUPLEX SINGLE PASS FEEDER

1 2 3 4 5

6 7

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Document feeding cover Open this cover to remove an original misfeed.
2 Original guides These guides help ensure that the original is scannedcorrectly. Adjust the guides to the width of the
original.
3 Document feeder tray Place the original. Place the original with the print side facing up.
4 Original exit tray The original is discharged to this tray after scanning.
5 Original size detector This unit detects the size of an original placed on the document glass.
6 Scanning area Originals placed in the automatic document feeder are scanned here.
7 Document glass If you want to scan books or other thick originals that cannot be fed through the automatic document
feeder, place them on this glass.

B. REVERSING SINGLE PASS FEEDER

1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Document feed roller Feeds a document to the transport section. Makes a buckle on paper between the registration roller and
this roller to correct the start position of document skew and document image scan.
2 Document feeding cover Open this cover to remove an original misfeed.
3 Original guides These guides help ensure that the original is scannedcorrectly. Adjust the guides to the width of the
original.
4 Document feeder tray Place the original. Place the original with the print side facing up.
5 Original exit tray The original is discharged to this tray after scanning.
6 Original size detector This unit detects the size of an original placed on the document glass.
7 Scanning area Originals placed in the automatic document feeder are scanned here.
8 Document glass If you want to scan books or other thick originals that cannot be fed through the automatic document
feeder, place them on this glass.

MX-6070N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 3

2. Internal structure

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12

No. Name Function/Operation Note

1 The main power switch Use this switch to turn on the power for the machine.
When using the fax or Internet fax functions, always keep this switch in
the “ | ” position.
2 Toner cartridge This cartridge contains toner.
When the toner in a cartridge runs out, replace with new one.
3 Waste toner box This container collects excess toner that remains after printing.

A service technician collects

replaced waste toner box.
4 Fusing unit Heat is applied here to fuse the transferred image onto the paper.

The fusing unit is hot.

Take care not to burn yourself
when removing a misfeed.
5 Transfer belt During full color printing, the toner images of the four colors on the
photoconductive drums are combined together on the transfer belt.
During black and white printing, only the black toner image is Do not touch or damage the
transferred onto the transfer belt. transfer belt.
This may cause a defective
image.
6 Right side cover release lever To remove a paper misfeed, pull and hold this lever up to open the right
side cover.
7 Right side cover Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.
8 Paper reversing section cover This unit is used for reversing paper when 2-sided printing is
performed. Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.
9 Waste toner box release button Press this button when you need to release the waste toner box lock to
replace the waste toner box or clean the laser unit.
10 Handle Pull this out and grasp it when moving the machine.
11 A low stand/550 sheet paper drawer or Open this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 2, 3 and 4.
stand/550/2x550/3x550/550&2100 sheet
paper drawer right-side cover
12 Paper tray right side cover Open this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 1.

MX-6070N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 4

3. I/F connectors

No. Name Function/Operation

1 LAN connector Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the machine is used on a network. Use a shielded LAN
cable.
2 Extension phone jack (TEL)* When the fax function of the machine is used, an extension phone can be connected to this jack.
3 Telephone line jack (LINE)* When the fax function of the machine is used, the telephone line is connected to this jack.
4 Power plug

* Optional

MX-6070N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 5

4. Operation panel

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Data notification indicator The indicator lights solidly or blinks to indicate the status of a job. When the Job separator or Exit tray unit
(right tray) is used for output, this blinks until the output is removed.
2 Touch panel Messages and keys appear on the touch panel display. Operate the machine by directly tapping the
displayed keys.
3 Error indicator Lights solidly or blinks to indicate the status of the error.
4 Main power indicator This lamp lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the “ ” position. Blinks green during the
time that the [Power] button does not operate immediately after the main power switch is switched on.
5 [Power] button Use this button to turn the machine's power on and off.
6 [Power Save] button/indicator Use this button to set the machine to Sleep mode for energy saving. [Power Save] button blinks when the
machine is in Sleep Mode.
7 [Home Screen] key Use this button to display the home screen.

[Home Screen] key You can change the angle of the touch panel.
Use your finger to touch the [Home Screen] key. If you use a pen or
other tool to touch the key, it may not operate properly. Risk of mal-
functioning if you use with jewelry or other accessories.

MX-6070N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 6

5. DSPF
A. Rollers

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

No. Name Function and operation

1 Pickup roller Picks up document and feed it to the document feed roller
2 Document feed roller Perform the document feed operation of documents
3 Separation roller Separate a document to prevent against double feed
4 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports document from paper feed roller to transport roller 2
5 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the transport roller, and provides transport power of the transport roller to
document
6 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports document from transport roller to registration roller
7 Transport roller 2 (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the transport roller, and provides the transport power of the transport roller to
document
8 Registration roller (Drive) Performs resist of document transport
9 Registration roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the registration roller, and provides transport power of the registration roller to
document
10 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports document from the No.1 scan section to the transport roller 4
11 Transport roller 3 (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the transport roller and provides transport power of the transport roller to
document
12 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports document from the transport roller 3 to the document exit roller
13 Transport roller 4 (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the transport roller and provides transport power of the transport roller to
document
14 Document exit roller (Drive) Discharges document
15 Document exit roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the document exit roller and provides transport power of the document exit
roller to document

MX-6070N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 7

B. Sensors and switches

SCOV SPRDMD

SPPD2 STUD
SPED1 SPLS2
SPPD1
SPLS1

STLD SPWS
SPED2
SPPD3 SPOD
SOCD SPPD5
SPPD4
SLCOV

Signal name Name Type Function and Operation

SCOV Upper door open/close sensor Transmission type Detects open/close of the upper door
SLCOV Lower door open/close sensor Micro switch Detects open/close of the lower door
SOCD DSPF open/close sensor Transmission type Detects open/close of the DSPF unit
SPED1 Document empty sensor Transmission type Detects document empty in the document feed tray
SPED2 Document empty sensor Transmission type Detects document empty in the document feed tray
SPLS1 Document length detection short sensor Transmission type Detects the document length of the document feed tray upper
SPLS2 Document length detection long sensor Transmission type Detects the document length of the document feed tray upper
SPOD Document exit sensor Transmission type Detects document exit of the document
SPPD1 Document pass sensor 1 Transmission type Detects pass of the document
SPPD2 Document pass sensor 2 Reflection type Detects pass of the document
SPPD3 Document pass sensor 3 Transmission type Detects pass of the document
SPPD4 Document pass sensor 4 Transmission type Detects pass of the document
SPPD5 Document pass sensor 5 Transmission type Detects pass of the document
SPRDMD Document random sensor Transmission type Detects the document size in random document feed
SPWS Document width sensor Volume type resistor Detects the document width of the document feed tray upper
STLD Document feed tray lower limit sensor Transmission type Detects the lower limit of the document feed tray
STUD Document feed tray upper limit sensor Transmission type Detects the upper limit of the document feed tray

MX-6070N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 8

C. Motors/Clutches/PWB/Lamps/Fan

STRC
SPUFM

STRRC
SPFC
SRRC
SPFFAN

CCD PWB SPOM

SLUM

LED PWB

DSPF cnt PWB

Signal name Name Type Function and operation

SLUM Lift up motor PM step motor Lifts up or moves down the document feed tray
SPFC Document feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the rollers in the document feed section
SPFFAN Cooling fan motor DC brushless motor Cools the motors and the clutches
SPOM Document exit motor PM step motor Drives the document exit roller
SPUFM Transport motor DC brushless motor Drives the transport roller
SRRC Registration roller clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of registration roller
STRC Transport roller 2 clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the transport roller 2
STRRC Transport roller 1 clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the transport roller 1

Name Function and operation

DSPF cnt PWB Controls the image data process and all the DSPF
CCD PWB Scans document images and perform A/D conversion of the scanning signal
LED PWB Radiates light onto a document for the CCD to scan the document image

MX-6070N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 9

6. RSPF
A. Rollers

5 4 3 2 1

6 7 8 9 10 11

No. Name Function and operation

1 Pickup roller Picks up document and feed it to the document feed roller
2 Document feed roller Feeds a document to the transport section. Makes a buckle on paper between the registration roller and this roller
to correct the start position of document skew and document image scan
3 Separation roller Separates a document to prevent double-feeding
4 Registration roller (Drive) Transports a document to the transport roller 1 / Controls the transport timing of the document and adjusts the
document scanning timing
5 Registration roller (Idle) Apply a pressure to a document and the registration roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to
the document
6 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports a document transported from the registration roller to the document scanning section
7 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to the
document
8 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports a document transported from the document scanning section to the paper exit roller
9 Transport roller 2 (Idle) Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to the
document
10 Paper exit roller (Drive) Discharges a document. Switchbacks the document and transports it to the registration roller when scanning the
back surface
11 Paper exit roller (Idle) Apply a pressure to a document and the paper exit roller to provide the transport power of the paper exit roller to
the document

MX-6070N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 10

B. Sensors and switches

SCOV
SPPD1 SPED SPLS2
SPLS1
SPPD2
SPWS

SOCD

SPPD3 SPPD4

Signal name Name Type Function and operation

SCOV Cover open/close sensor Transmission type Detects open/close of the RSPF cover
SOCD RSPF open/close sensor Transmission type Detects open/close of the RSPF unit
SPED Document sensor Transmission type Detects document empty in the RSPF paper feed tray
SPLS1 Paper size sensor 1 Transmission type Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray
SPLS2 Paper size sensor 2 Transmission type Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray
SPPD1 Document pass sensor 1 Transmission type Detects paper feed and the document size in random paper feed
SPPD2 Document pass sensor 2 Transmission type Detects paper pass
SPPD3 Document pass sensor 3 Transmission type Detects paper pass
SPPD4 Document pass sensor 4 Transmission type Detects paper exit and switchback
SPWS Document size sensor Volume type resistor Detects the document width

MX-6070N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 11

C. Motors/Clutches/Solenoidos/PWB

SPFM

SRRC
SPUM

SPRS

RSPF DRIVER PWB

Signal name Name Type Function and operation

SPFM RSPF transport motor Stepping motor Transports a document
SPRS Paper exit roller solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Controls ON/OFF of the power of the paper exit roller
SPUM RSPF paper feed motor Stepping motor Feeds a document
SRRC Registration roller clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls the registration roller

Name Function and operation

RSPF DRIVER PWB Drives the motor, the solenoid and the clutch in the RSPF section

MX-6070N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 12

7. Sensors

MHPS OCSW

TFD2 POD4

SHPOS
POD2 APPD1

POD1 HLPCD
TH_US2
REGS_F/PCS_F DSW_ADU
REGS_R/PCS_R DSW_FU
TCED_Y TCED_M TCED_C TCED_K
TH_US1
TFSD_Y TFSD_M TFSD_C TFSD_K TH_UM TH_LM

1TUD_CL 2TPD
DHPD_C 1TUD_K APPD2
DHPD_Y DHPD_M
DHPD_K
TH_CL/ 2TUD
HUD_CL CCHPD_Y CCHPD_M CCHPD_C CCHPD_K MPLD1
TNFD MPED
MPWS
TCS_Y TCS_M TCS_C TCS_K MPFD
CCMD_Y CCMD_M CCMD_C CCMD_K PPD2

LSU_TH1 C1PFPD C1PFD

BD C1LUD
LSU_TH2 C1PED
C1SS1
C1SS2
C1SS3 C1SPD DSW_C1
C1SS4

Signal name Name Type Function and operation

1TUD_CL Transfer mode sensor (CL) Transmission type Detects separation of the transfer belt and the transfer mode
(Detection is made by combination of 1TUD_CL/1TUD_K signals)
1TUD_K Transfer mode sensor (BK) Transmission type Detects separation of the transfer belt and the transfer mode
(Detection is made by combination of 1TUD_CL/1TUD_K signals)
2TPD Secondary transfer paper sensor Transmission type Detects paper remained after recover from paper JAM
2TUD Secondary transfer position sensor Transmission type Detects the position (separation) of the secondary transfer unit
APPD1 ADU paper transport sensor 1 Transmission type Detects paper entry and paper pass in the ADU section
APPD2 ADU paper transport sensor 2 Transmission type Detects paper pass of the transport roller 8 in the ADU section
BD Beam detection sensor Bindiode Detects lase beam scan timing
C1LUD Paper feed tray upper limit sensor (Paper feed Transmission type Detects the upper limit of the paper lift up (Paper feed tray 1)
tray 1)
C1PED Paper empty sensor (Paper feed tray 1) Transmission type Detects paper empty (Paper feed tray 1)
C1PFD Paper transport sensor (Paper feed tray 1) Reflection type Detects paper pass in the paper transport section (Paper feed tray 1)
C1PFPD Paper pass sensor (Paper feed tray 1) Transmission type Detects paper pass in the paper transport section (Paper feed tray 1)
C1SPD Paper remaining quantity sensor (Paper feed Transmission type Detects the paper remaining quantity (Paper feed tray 1)
tray 1)
C1SS1-4 Tray 2 rear edge detection 1-4 Tact switch Either of rear edge 1-4 of tray 2 is detected to detect tray insertion
CCHPD_C Charger cleaner home position sensor (C) Transmission type Detects the home position of the charger cleaner
CCHPD_K Charger cleaner home position sensor (K) Transmission type Detects the home position of the charger cleaner
CCHPD_M Charger cleaner home position sensor (M) Transmission type Detects the home position of the charger cleaner
CCHPD_Y Charger cleaner home position sensor (Y) Transmission type Detects the home position of the charger cleaner
CCMD_C Charger cleaner shift sensor (C) Transmission type Detects the shift distance of the charger cleaner
CCMD_K Charger cleaner shift sensor (K) Transmission type Detects the shift distance of the charger cleaner
CCMD_M Charger cleaner shift sensor (M) Transmission type Detects the shift distance of the charger cleaner
CCMD_Y Charger cleaner shift sensor (Y) Transmission type Detects the shift distance of the charger cleaner
DHPD_C Drum phase sensor (C) Transmission type Detects rotation and the phase of the OPC drum (C)
DHPD_K Drum phase sensor (K) Transmission type Detects rotation and the phase of the OPC drum (K)
DHPD_M Drum phase sensor (M) Transmission type Detects rotation and the phase of the OPC drum (M)
DHPD_Y Drum phase sensor (Y) Transmission type Detects rotation and the phase of the OPC drum (Y)

MX-6070N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 13

Signal name Name Type Function and operation
DSW_ADU ADU paper guide open/close sensor Transmission type Detects open/close of the ADU paper guide
DSW_C1 Transport cover open/close sensor (Paper feed Transmission type Detects open/close of the transport section cover (Paper feed tray 1)
tray 1)
DSW_FU Front cover sensor Transmission type Detects the open/close of the front cover
HLPCD Fusing pressure sensor Transmission type Detects the fusing pressure state
LSU_TH1 LSU temperature sensor 1 Thermistor Detects the LSU temperature
LSU_TH2 LSU temperature sensor 2 Thermistor Detects the LSU temperature
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Transmission type Detects the scanner home position
MPED Paper empty sensor (Manual paper feed tray) Transmission type Detects presence of paper (Manual paper feed tray)
MPFD Paper feed sensor (Manual paper feed tray) Transmission type Detects paper pass (Manual paper feed tray)
MPLD1 Paper length sensor (Manual paper feed tray) Transmission type Detects the paper length (Manual paper feed tray)
MPWS Paper width sensor (Manual paper feed tray) Volume type resistor Detects the paper width (Manual paper feed tray)
OCSW Paper size detection trigger sensor Transmission type Detects generation of the paper size detection trigger signal
POD1 Paper exit sensor 1 Transmission type Detects paper transport from the fusing section
POD2 Paper exit sensor 2 Transmission type Detects paper transport to the lower paper exit tray
POD4 Paper exit sensor 4 Transmission type Detects paper transport to the upper paper exit tray
PPD2 Paper transport sensor 2 Reflection type Detects paper pass in the transport roller 5 and registration roller
REGS_F/ Image registration / Density sensor (F) Reflection type Detects image color shift and the toner patch density
PCS_F
REGS_R/ Image registration / Density sensor (R) Reflection type Detects image color shift and the toner patch density
PCS_R
SHPOS Shifter home position sensor Transmission type Detects the shifter home position
TCED_C Toner cartridge ejector position sensor (C) Transmission type Detects ejecting position of toner cartridge (C)
TCED_K Toner cartridge ejector position sensor (K) Transmission type Detects ejecting position of toner cartridge (K)
TCED_M Toner cartridge ejector position sensor (M) Transmission type Detects ejecting position of toner cartridge (M)
TCED_Y Toner cartridge ejector position sensor (Y) Transmission type Detects ejecting position of toner cartridge (Y)
TCS_C Toner sensor (C) Magnetic sensor Detects toner supply from the hopper
Detects the toner density (C)
TCS_K Toner sensor (K) Magnetic sensor Detects toner supply from the hopper
Detects the toner density (K)
TCS_M Toner sensor (M) Magnetic sensor Detects toner supply from the hopper
Detects the toner density (M)
TCS_Y Toner sensor (Y) Magnetic sensor Detects toner supply from the hopper
Detects the toner density (Y)
TFD2 Paper exit tray full sensor (Lower paper exit Transmission type Detects paper full in the lower paper exit tray
tray)
TFSD_C Toner remaining quantity sensor (C) Transmission type Detects the remaining toner quantity in the hopper
TFSD_K Toner remaining quantity sensor (K) Transmission type Detects the remaining toner quantity in the hopper
TFSD_M Toner remaining quantity sensor (M) Transmission type Detects the remaining toner quantity in the hopper
TFSD_Y Toner remaining quantity sensor (Y) Transmission type Detects the remaining toner quantity in the hopper
TH_CL/ Temperature / humidity sensor Thermistor Detects the temperature and the humidity
HUD_CL
TH_LM Fusing temperature sensor Thermistor Detects the surface temperature of the fusing roller (pressure)
TH_US1 Fusing temperature sensor Thermistor Detects the surface temperature at the edge section of the fusing belt
TH_UM Fusing temperature sensor (main) Thermistor Detects the surface temperature at the center of the fusing belt
TH_US2 Fusing temperature sensor (sub) Thermistor Detects the surface temperature at the edge section of the fusing belt
TNFD Waste toner full sensor Transmission type Detects full of waste toner

MX-6070N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 14

8. Switches

MSW

DSW_R

DSW_F

Signal name Name Type Function and Operation

DSW_F Front door open/close switch Micro switch Detects open/close of the front door. Detects ON/OFF of the power line of
the fusing unit, the motors, and the LSU laser.
DSW_R Right transport unit (right door) open/close Micro switch Detects open/close of the right paper transport section (right door). Detects
switch ON/OFF of the power line of the fusing unit, the motors, and LSU laser.
MSW Main power switch Seesaw switch Turns ON/OFF the main power.

MX-6070N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 15

9. Clutches and solenoids

POGS

1TURC_1
1TURC_2

2TURC
MPFS

HPFC
MPUC
C1PUC
CPFC1

Signal name Name Type Function and Operation

1TURC_1 Primary transfer separation clutch 1 Magnetic clutch Controls separation of the primary transfer unit
1TURC_2 Primary transfer separation clutch 2 Magnetic clutch Controls separation of the primary transfer unit
2TURC Secondary transfer separation clutch Magnetic clutch Controls separation of the secondary transfer unit
CPFC1 Tray vertical transport clutch Magnetic clutch Controls the transport roller of the paper feed tray 1 section
C1PUC Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1) Magnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the paper feed tray 1
section (Paper feed tray 1)
HPFC Horizontal transport clutch (Paper feed tray 1, Magnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the transport roller (Paper feed tray 1, Manual
Manual paper feed tray) paper feed tray)
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch (Manual paper feed tray) Magnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the manual paper feed
section (Manual paper feed tray)
MPFS Paper feed solenoid (Manual paper feed tray) Magnetic solenoid Controls the paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray)
POGS Gate solenoid Magnetic solenoid Controls ON/OFF of the gate solenoid selecting upper tray and
lower tray

MX-6070N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 16

10. Motors

MIM TNHM_Y
SBM
TNHM_M
POM
TNHM_C
OSM TNM_Y
TNHM_K
ADUM1 TNM_M
TNM_C
PRM
TNM_K
FUM PGM

ADUM2 DM_Y
CCM_Y
BTM DM_M
RRM CCM_M
DM_C
PFM
CCM_C
CPFM DM_K
CCM_K
C1LUM

Signal name Name Type Function and Operation

ADUM1 ADU motor 1 DC brushless motor Drives the transport roller in the right door and right paper exit section
ADUM2 ADU motor 2 DC brushless motor Drives the transport roller in the right door section
BTM Transfer motor DC brushless motor Drives the transfer section
C1LUM Paper tray lift motor (Paper feed tray 1) DC brush motor Lifts the lift plate of the paper feed tray (Paper feed tray 1)
CCM_C Charger cleaning motor (C) DC brush motor Drives the charger cleaner
CCM_K Charger cleaning motor (K) DC brush motor Drives the charger cleaner
CCM_M Charger cleaning motor (M) DC brush motor Drives the charger cleaner
CCM_Y Charger cleaning motor (Y) DC brush motor Drives the charger cleaner
CPFM Paper feed motor DC brushless motor Drives the paper feed section
DM_C Drum motor (C) DC brushless motor Drives the OPC drum/developing section (C)
DM_K Drum motor (K) DC brushless motor Drives the OPC drum/developing section (K)
DM_M Drum motor (M) DC brushless motor Drives the OPC drum/developing section (M)
DM_Y Drum motor (Y) DC brushless motor Drives the OPC drum/developing section (Y)
FUM Fusing motor DC brushless motor Drives the fusing section
MIM Scan motor Stepping motor Drives the scanner unit (scan, return operations)
OSM Offset motor Stepping motor Offsets (shifts) paper
PFM Transport motor DC brushless motor Drives the transport roller 5
PGM Polygon motor DC brushless motor Scans laser beams
POM Paper exit motor DC brushless motor Drives the roller in the paper exit section
PRM Fusing pressure control motor Stepping motor Controls ON/OFF of the fusing roller pressure
RRM Registration motor DC brushless motor Drives the registration roller (Controls the timing of the transfer image for
the paper)
SBM Reverse motor DC brushless motor Drives the transport roller in duplex mode
TNHM_C Toner hopper motor (C) DC brush motor Supplies toner from the hopper to the developer unit
TNHM_K Toner hopper motor (K) DC brush motor Supplies toner from the hopper to the developer unit
TNHM_M Toner hopper motor (M) DC brush motor Supplies toner from the hopper to the developer unit
TNHM_Y Toner hopper motor (Y) DC brush motor Supplies toner from the hopper to the developer unit
TNM_C Toner motor (C) Stepping motor Supplies toner from the toner cartridge to the hopper
TNM_K Toner motor (K) Stepping motor Supplies toner from the toner cartridge to the hopper
TNM_M Toner motor (M) Stepping motor Supplies toner from the toner cartridge to the hopper
TNM_Y Toner motor (Y) Stepping motor Supplies toner from the toner cartridge to the hopper

MX-6070N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 17

11. Rollers

33
32
31
30
23
22
20
21

19
18
24
25

36
35
34

26
27

29
10
9

11
28
8
7
6
1
2

16 17 14 15 12 13 3 5 4

No. Name Function and Operation

1 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to paper
2 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed tray to the transport roller 4
3 Paper pickup roller Feeds paper to the paper feed roller
(Paper feed tray 1)
4 Separation roller Separates paper to prevent double feeding
(Paper feed tray 1)
5 Paper feed roller Feeds paper to the paper transport section
(Paper feed tray 1)
6 Transport roller 2 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to paper
7 Transport roller 2(Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed tray 1 to the transport roller 3
8 Transport roller 3 Transports paper from the transport roller 2 to the transport roller 4
9 Paper pickup roller Feeds paper to the paper feed roller
(Manual paper feed tray)
10 Paper feed roller Feeds paper to the paper transport section
(Manual paper feed tray)
11 Separation roller Separate paper to prevent double feeding
(Manual paper feed tray)
12 Transport roller 4 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to paper
13 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 1 and 3 to the transport roller 5
14 Transport roller 5 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to paper
15 Transport roller 5 (Drive) Transports paper to the registration roller. Paper is buckled between the registration roller and this roller to correct the
paper skew and the relation between images and paper
16 Registration roller (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the registration roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to paper
17 Registration roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. Controls the transport timing of paper and adjusts relative position between the
images and paper
18 Transport roller 6 (Drive) Transports paper to the paper exit section

MX-6070N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 18

No. Name Function and Operation
19 Transport roller 6 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to paper
20 Transport roller 7 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to paper
21 Transport roller 7 (Drive) Transports paper to the paper exit section
22 Transport roller 8 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the paper exit roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to paper
23 Transport roller 8 (Drive) Transports paper to transport roller 9
24 Transport roller 9 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to paper
25 Transport roller 9 (Drive) Transports paper transported from the switchback section to the transport roller 10
26 Transport roller 10 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to paper
27 Transport roller 10 (Drive) Transports paper transported from transport roller 9 to the transport roller 5
28 Transport roller 11 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to paper
29 Transport roller 11 (Drive) Transports paper transported from manual paper tray to the transport roller 5
30 Paper exit roller 2 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and paper exit roller to provide the transport power of the paper exit roller to paper
31 Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) Transports paper to the lower paper exit tray
32 Paper exit roller 1 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and paper exit roller to provide the transport power of the paper exit roller to paper
33 Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper to the upper paper exit tray or switchback to the ADU section
34 Heat roller Heats the fusing belt
35 Fusing roller The sponge layer of the roller forms a wide nip between the fusing belt and fusing roller
36 Pressure roller Heats the back surface of paper to fuse toner on the paper

MX-6070N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 19

12. Lamps

CL_ON

DL_Y
DL_M
DL_C
BKLT_EN

DL_K

HL_UW
HL_UM
HL_US
HL_LM

Signal name Name Type Function and Operation

BKLT_EN Backlight in LCD module LED Backlight for LCD module
CL_ON Scanner lamp LED Radiates light onto a document for the CCD to scan the document image
DL_C Discharge lamp (C) LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum (C)
DL_K Discharge lamp (K) LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum (K)
DL_M Discharge lamp (M) LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum (M)
DL_Y Discharge lamp (Y) LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum (Y)
HL_LM Heater lamp (lower) Halogen lamp Heats the pressure roller
HL_UM Heater lamp (Main) Halogen lamp Heats the fusing roller and the fusing belt
HL_US Heater lamp (Sub) Halogen lamp Heats the fusing roller and the fusing belt
HL_UW Heater lamp (upper assist) Halogen lamp Heats the fusing roller and the fusing belt

MX-6070N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 20

13. Fans and filter

PSFM2

1
PSFM

PROFM1

VFM

FUFM
POFM2
2

PROFM2

Signal name Name Function and Operation

FUFM Fusing cooling fan Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section
POFM2 Paper exit cooling fan Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section
PROFM1 Process fan motor 1 Discharges air and cools the process section
PROFM2 Process fan motor 2 Discharges air and cools the process section
PSFM Power cooling fan motor Cools the power unit
PSFM2 Power cooling fan motor 2 Cools the power unit
VFM Machine exhaust fan Discharges heat from the fusing section

No. Name Function and Operation

1 Toner filter Prevents toner splash
2 Ozone filter Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section

MX-6070N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 21

14. PWB/memory device

5
1 2
4 7

8
9

6
3 10

17
18

19
20

21

11

22
12
27
23

24
13

25

26

14

15

16

No. Name Function and Operation

1 HDD Stores the filing data, the watermark data, the log data and authentication data also used as a work memory
2 mSATA SSD Stores the SOC program data, snapshot, the e-manual data, the log data
3 FLASH ROM Stores the ASIC program data
4 LED DRIVER PWB Drives the scanner lamp
5 CCD PWB Scan document images and performs A/D conversion of the scanning signal
6 Document size detection PWB Drives the LED for the document size detection
(Light emitting)
7 Document size detection PWB Outputs the document size detection signal
(Light receiving)

MX-6070N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 22

No. Name Function and Operation
8 WIRELESS LAN PWB Connect the network by the wireless LAN
9 USB CN PWB Connect WIRELESS LAN PWB and SCN-MFP control PWB
10 USB I/F PWB USB interface
11 RD I/F PWB Detects each sensor in the right door unit
12 SCN-MFP control PWB Controls image data (compression, decompression and filing) and controls the whole machine.
Converts print data into image data.
13 PCU PWB Controls engine section
14 HL PWB Drives the heater lamp
15 MC PWB Generates the main charger voltage and the DV bias voltage
16 AC PWB Noise filter for AC input power supply
17 HOME PWB Power switch, Buzzer, sound, power ON/OFF condition display LED, error display LED (red)
18 KEY PWB Outputs the key operation signal
19 LED PWB Display indication state of MFP
20 LVDS PWB Converts the display data signal to the LCD display signal from SCN-MFP control PWB and controls the touch panel
21 Motion sensor PWB Detects the approach of human in energy saving mode.and send signal to SCN-MFP control PWB
22 DC POWER PWB Generates DC voltage
23 BD PWB Detects laser and outputs the synchronous signal
24 TC PWB Generates the transfer voltage
25 LD PWB Controls laser diode and power
26 LSU cnt PWB Controls the LSU
27 AC MONITOR PWB Detects the input power voltage

MX-6070N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 23

15. Fuses and thermostats

#%/10+61429$

F1

TS US

TS UM

TS LM

DC PWB AC PWB

F2
F101

F102
F1
F401

F301

F605
F604
F603
F602
F601

Signal name Name Type Section

F1 Fuse 20A 250V AC PWB (For 100V series)
F1 Fuse 10A 250V AC PWB (For 200V series)
F2 Fuse 10A 250V AC PWB (For 200V series)
F1 Fuse 800mA 250V AC MONITOR PWB
F101 Fuse 12A 250V DC Power PWB
F102 Fuse 2A 250V DC Power PWB
F301 Fuse 5A 250V DC Power PWB
F401 Fuse 3.15A 250V DC Power PWB
F601 Fuse 6.3A 250V DC Power PWB
F602 Fuse 6.3A 250V DC Power PWB
F603 Fuse 6.3A 250V DC Power PWB
F604 Fuse 6.3A 250V DC Power PWB
F605 Fuse 6.3A 250V DC Power PWB

Signal name Name Type Function and Operation

TS LM Thermostat Mechanical thermostat Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_LM) circuit when the fusing section is overheated
TS UM Thermostat Mechanical thermostat Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_UM) circuit when the fusing section is overheated (center section)
TS US Thermostat Mechanical thermostat Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_US) circuit when the fusing section is overheated (edge section)

MX-6070N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 24

MX-6070N
[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS Service Manual

1. General

Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted. Even in this case how-
a specific Job number. Perform the adjustment procedures in the ever the sequence from the smallest to the greatest Job number
sequence of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest. must be observed.
However, there is no need to perform all the adjustment items. If the above precaution should be neglected, the adjustment would
Perform only the necessary adjustments according to the need. not complete normally or trouble may occur.

2. Adjustment item list

Job No. Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ 1 Developing unit adjustment 1-A Toner density control reference value setting 25-2
ADJ 2 High voltage values adjustment 2-A Main charger grid voltage adjustment 8-2
2-B Developing bias voltage adjustment 8-1
2-C Transfer current and voltage adjustment 8-6
ADJ 3 Image density sensor 3-A Image density sensor adjustment 44-2
adjustment
ADJ4 Print image position, image 4-A Print image magnification ratio adjustment (main scanning direction) (Print engine) (Manual 50-10
magnification ratio adjustment adjustment)
(Print engine) (Manual 4-B Print image position (main scanning direction, sub scanning direction adjustment, (Print 50-10
adjustment) engine) (Manual adjustment)
ADJ5 Print engine image distortion 5-A Print engine image distortion adjustment (Manual adjustment), OPC drum phase adjustment 50-22
adjustment, OPC drum phase (Automatic adjustment), Color registration adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
adjustment, Color registration 5-B Print engine image skew (LSU skew) adjustment (Manual adjustment) (No need to adjust 50-20
adjustment (Print engine normally) (64-1)
section) 5-C Color registration offset adjustment (No need to adjust normally) 50-20
ADJ6 Scan image distortion 6-A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment (sub scanning direction distortion adjustment)
adjustment (Document table 6-B Scan image (main scanning direction) distortion adjustment
mode)
ADJ7 Scanner image skew 7-A RSPF scan image skew adjustment
adjustment (DSPF/RSPF 7-B DSPF parallelism adjustment
mode) 7-C DSPF skew adjustment (front surface mode)
7-D DSPF skew adjustment (back surface mode)
ADJ8 Scan image focus adjustment 8-A Image focus adjustment (document table mode, DSPF/RSPF front surface mode) 48-1
8-B Image focus adjustment (DSPF back surface mode)
ADJ9 Scan image magnification ratio 9-A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 48-1
adjustment (Manual 9-B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 48-1
adjustment) (Document table mode)
9-C Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 48-1
(DSPF/RSPF mode)
9-D Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 48-1
(DSPF/RSPF mode)
ADJ10 Scan image off-center 10-A Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode) 50-12
adjustment (Manual 10-B Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment) (DSPF/RSPF mode) 50-12/50-6
adjustment)
ADJ11 Copy image position, image 11-A Copy image position, image loss (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode) 50-1
loss adjustment (Manual 11-B Image scanning position adjustment (Manual adjustment) (DSPF/RSPF mode) 53-8
adjustment) 11-C Copy image position, image loss (Manual adjustment) (DSPF/RSPF mode) 50-6
ADJ12 Print lead edge image position adjustment (printer mode) 50-5
ADJ13 FR density variation correction 13-A FR density unevenness automatic correction 61-11
13-B FR density unevenness visual inspection correction 61-12
ADJ14/ Color balance and density Note before execution of the image quality adjustment
SET1 adjustment Copy image quality check
Printer image quality check
14-A Scanner calibration 14-A Scanner calibration (CCD calibration) (document table 63-3
(1) mode)
14-A Scanner calibration (CCD calibration) (DSPF mode) 63-3
(2)
14-A Shading adjustment (DSPF mode) 63-2
(3)
SET Color balance 1A Copy color balance adjustment target setup 63-7/8/11
1 adjustment target setup 1B Printer color balance adjustment target setup 67-26/27/
28
14-B Copy, printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (Basic 46-74
adjustment)

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 1

Job No. Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ14/ Color balance and density 14-C Copy image quality 14-C Copy color balance and density adjustment (Automatic 46-24
SET1 adjustment adjustment (Basic (1) adjustment)
adjustment) 14-C Copy color balance and density adjustment (Manual 46-21
(2) adjustment)
14-D Copy, Image send, FAX 14-D Color copy density adjustment (for each color copy 46-1
image quality adjustment (1) mode) (separately for the low density area and the high
(Individual adjustment) density area) (No need to adjust normally)
14-D Monochrome copy density adjustment (for each 46-2
(2) monochrome copy mode) (separately for the low density
area and the high density area) (No need to adjust
normally)
14-D Color copy color balance, gamma adjustment (for each 46-10
(3) color copy mode) (No need to adjust normally)
14-D Monochrome copy density, gamma adjustment (No 46-16
(4) need to adjust normally)
14-D Automatic monochrome (Copy/scan/FAX) mode 46-19
(5) document density scanning operation (exposure
operation) conditions setting (No need to set normally)
14-D Document low density image density reproduction 46-32
(6) adjustment in the automatic monochrome (copy/scan/
FAX) mode (No need to adjust normally) (Background
density adjustment in the scanning section)
14-D Copy, scan low density image density adjustment (for 46-63
(7) each mode) (No need to adjust normally)
14-D Color copy, text, line image reproduction adjustment 46-27
(8) (edge gamma, density adjustment) (Text, Map mode)
(No need to adjust normally)
14-D Monochrome (Copy/scan/FAX) mode color document 46-37
(9) reproduction adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
14-D Color copy mode dark area gradation (black component 46-38
(10) quantity) adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
14-D Color (copy/scan) mode sharpness adjustment (No 46-60
(11) need to adjust normally)
14-D Copy high density image density reproduction setting 46-23
(12) (Normally unnecessary to the setting change)
14-D Copy color balance adjustment (single color copy mode) 46-25
(13) (No need to adjust normally)
14-D DSPF/RSPF mode (copy/scan/FAX) density adjustment 46-9
(14) (No need to adjust normally)
14-D Copy gamma, color balance adjustment for each dither 46-54
(15) (Automatic adjustment)
14-D Dropout color adjustment (Normally not required) 46-55
(16)
14-D Watermark adjustment (Normally not required) 46-66
(17)
14-E Printer image quality 14-E Printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) 67-24
adjustment (Basic (1)
adjustment) 14-E Printer color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) 67-25
(2)
14-F Printer image quality 14-F Printer density adjustment (low density section density 67-36
adjustment (Individual (1) adjustment) (No need to adjust normally)
adjustment) 14-F Printer high density image density reproduction setting 67-34
(2) (supporting the high density section tone gap) (No need
to adjust normally)
14-F Printer gamma adjustment for each dither (Automatic 67-54
(3) adjustment) (No need to adjust normally)
ADJ15 Paper size sensor adjustment 15-A Manual paper feed tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment 40-2
15-B DSPF/RSPF paper feed tray document size (width) sensor adjustment 53-6
ADJ16 Document size detection 16-A Sensitivity adjustment of the original size sensor 41-2
adjustment
ADJ17 Touch panel coordinate setting 65-1
ADJ18 Fusing paper guide position adjustment
ADJ19 Image lead edge position, 19-A Print image main scanning direction automatic magnification ration adjustment (Print engine) 50-28
image loss, void area, image 19-B Print image off-center automatic adjustment (Print engine) (each paper feed tray)
off-center, image magnification 19-C Copy mode image lead edge position, image loss, void area, image off-center, sub scanning
ration adjustment (Automatic direction image magnification ration automatic adjustment (Scanner) (Document table
adjustment) mode)
19-D Copy mode image lead edge position, image loss, void area, image off-center, sub scanning
direction image magnification ration automatic adjustment (Scanner) (DSPF/RSPF mode)

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 2

3. Details of adjustment 7) Shake the toner cartridge horizontally several times

ADJ 1 Developing unit adjustment

1-A Toner density control reference value
setting
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases.
• When developer is replaced

Be sure to execute this adjustment only when developer is

replaced. Never execute it in the other cases. 8) Open the front cover and insert each toner cartridge

Perform the toner density reference control level adjustment with

the toner cartridges removed.
If adjustment is performed with toner cartridge installed, the EE-EL
trouble code or an over toner condition may occur.
1) With the front cover opened, enter Sim25-2
2) Close the front cover
3) Select a developing unit to be adjusted
4) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted. The DV
roller rotates and the toner density sensor detects toner den-
sity and the output value is displayed.
The above operation is executed for 1 minutes and the aver-
age value of the toner density sensor detection level is set
(saves) as the reference toner density control value. Be sure to install the color cartridge to their proper positions.
When the reference toner density control adjustment operation Avoid installation to a different color position.
is completed [EXECUTE] key returns to normal from highlight.
This makes known about whether the adjustment operation is
completed or not. Do not forcibly insert the toner cartridge.
The above operation is executed each of the lower speed Push it in until the cartridge is securely locked in place.
mode and the middle speed mode and the reference toner
density control value is set for each of them.

Developing units removed, be sure to remove the toner car-

tridges as well to prevent toner clogging.
If the operation is interrupted within 1 minutes the adjustment
result is not reflected.
Mounting location of the toner cartridge of each color
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during the operation, the
operation is stopped and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal
display.
If [EE-EU], [EE-EL] or [EE-EC] is displayed, setting of the ref-
erence toner density control value is not completed normally.
Troubleshoot the cause, remove the cause and perform setting
again.

Error display Error name Details of error

EE-EL EL abnormality Sensor output level less than 77 or
control voltage over 207
EE-EU EU abnormality Sensor output level over 177 or
control voltage less than 52
EE-EC EC abnormality Sensor output level other than 128 
10 9) Close the front cover
10) Confirm that "Toner replacement in progress" is displayed and
5) Cancel Sim 25-2
wait until the display disappears (It takes 30 sec - 6 min)
6) Confirm that "Instal the toner cartridge " is displayed and instal
the toner cartridge by the following procedures

This procedure is for checking the toner supply operation from

the toner cartridge to the DV unit. The operation time differs
depending on the toner quantity in the toner cartridge, uneven
distribution of toner and the internal state of the toner car-
tridge.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 3

 3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) in the middle
speed mode and press [OK] key.
Do not perform operations which interrupt the above operation Enter the adjustment value of each mode which is specified on
such as opening the front cover, entering the Sim mode and the label attached on the MC PWB.
turning OFF/ON the power. If this precaution is ignored. Trou-
ble codes F2-40 - 43 or F2-64 - 67 or a over toner condition
may occur.

When replacing developer always replace all the three colors of

Yellow, Magenta and Cyan.
If only one color is replaced color balance may be adversely
affected. Black developer can be replaced individually.

When developer is replaced be sure to perform the color balance

adjustment.

When not replacing the developer. do not execute Sim25-2

ADJ 2 High voltage values adjustment

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed the voltage entered in the proce-
dure 3) is outputted for 30sec and the set value is saved.
2-A Main charger grid voltage adjustment
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed again, the output is stopped.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases.
• When the MC PWB has been replaced
• U2 trouble has occurred
Note that the adjustment value may differ depending on the MC-
• The PCU PWB has been replaced PWB. Since the adjustment value label is attached on the MC
• The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced PWB, the PWB must be removed in order to check the adjustment
1) Enter the Sim 8-2 mode value. This is a troublesome procedure. Therefore it is advisable to
2) Select an output mode and an item to be adjusted put down the adjustment value in advance.

adjustment actual When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed
Item/Display (mode) mode
range voltage
mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are auto-
MIDDLE A MIDDLE Main charger K 50 - 850 -630V
matically set according to the middle speed mode setting in a cer-
SPEED grid voltage ±5V
tain relationship.
GB_K (middle
B MIDDLE speed mode) C 50 - 850 -630V
SPEED ±5V
GB_C
Since the high voltage output cannot be checked with a digital multi
C MIDDLE M 50 - 850 -630V
meter in this model, a judgement of the output must be made by
SPEED ±5V
checking the print image quality
GB_M
D MIDDLE Y 50 - 850 -630V
SPEED ±5V 2-B Developing bias voltage adjustment
GB_Y This adjustment must be performed in the following cases.
LOW A LOW Main charger K 50 - 850 -598
• When the MC PWB has been replaced
SPEED grid voltage ±5V
GB_K (low speed • U2 trouble has occurred
B LOW mode) C 50 - 850 -598 • The PCU PWB has been replaced
SPEED ±5V
• The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced
GB_C
C LOW M 50 - 850 -598 1) Enter the Sim 8-1 mode
SPEED ±5V 2) Select an output mode and an item to be adjusted.
GB_M
D LOW Y 50 - 850 -598 Adjustmen Actual
Item/Display (mode) Content
SPEED ±5V t range voltage
GB_Y MIDDLE A MIDDLE Developing K 0 - 600 –450V
SPEED bias voltage 5V
DVB_K (middle
B MIDDLE speed) C 0 - 600 –450V
SPEED 5V
DVB_C
C MIDDLE M 0 - 600 –450V
SPEED 5V
DVB_M
D MIDDLE Y 0 - 600 –450V
SPEED 5V
DVB_Y

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 4

 Adjustmen Actual When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in the proce-
Item/Display (mode) Content dure 3) is outputted for 30sec and the set value is saved. When
t range voltage
LOW A LOW Developing K 0 - 600 –450V [EXECUTE] key is pressed again the output is stopped.
SPEED bias voltage 5V
DVB_K (low speed)
B LOW C 0 - 600 –450V
SPEED 5V Note that the adjustment value may differ depending on the MC
DVB_C PWB . Since the adjustment value label is attached on the MC
C LOW M 0 - 600 –450V PWB, the PWB must be removed in order to check the adjustment
SPEED 5V value. This is a troublesome procedure. Therefore it is advisable to
DVB_M put down the adjustment value in advance.
D LOW Y 0 - 600 –450V
SPEED 5V
DVB_Y When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed
mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are auto-
3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) in the middle matically set according to the middle speed mode setting in a cer-
speed mode and press [OK] key. tain relationship.
Enter the adjustment value of each mode which is specified on
the label attached on the MC PWB.

Since the high voltage output cannot be checked with a digital multi
meter in this model, a judgement of the output must be made by
checking the print image quality.

2-C Transfer current and voltage adjustment

This adjustment must be performed in the following cases.
• When the TC PWB has been replaced
• U2 trouble has occurred
• The PCU PWB has been replaced
• The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced
1) Enter the Sim 8-6 mode
2) Select an item to be adjusted

Actual
Setting Default
Item/Display Content output
range value
value
A TC1 LOW SPEED CL K Primary transfer bias color K low speed 0 - 255 85 10 μA
B TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K adjustment value middle speed 0 - 255 106 15 μA
C TC1 LOW SPEED CL C C low speed 0 - 255 85 10 μA
D TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL C middle speed 0 - 255 106 15 μA
E TC1 LOW SPEED CL M M low speed 0 - 255 85 10 μA
F TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL M middle speed 0 - 255 106 15 μA
G TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y Y low speed 0 - 255 85 10 μA
H TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Y middle speed 0 - 255 106 15 μA
I TC1 LOW SPEED BW K monochrome K low speed 0 - 255 85 10 μA
J TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW K middle speed 0 - 255 106 15 μA

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 5

 Actual
Setting Default
Item/Display Content output
range value
value
K TC2 PLAIN CL SPX Secondary transfer bias color Plain front surface 0 - 255 96 -35 μA
L TC2 PLAIN CL DPX adjustment value paper back surface 0 - 255 96 -35 μA
M TC2 PLAIN BW SPX monochrome front surface 0 - 255 96 -35 μA
N TC2 PLAIN BW DPX back surface 0 - 255 96 -35 μA
O TC2 HEAVY1 CL SPX color Heavy front surface 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
P TC2 HEAVY1 CL DPX paper 1 back surface 0 - 255 96 -35 μA
Q TC2 HEAVY1 BW SPX monochrome front surface 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
R TC2 HEAVY1 BW DPX back surface 0 - 255 96 -35 μA
S TC2 HEAVY2 CL SPX color Heavy front surface 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
T TC2 HEAVY2 CL DPX paper 2 back surface 0 - 255 96 -35 μA
U TC2 HEAVY2 BW SPX monochrome front surface 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
V TC2 HEAVY2 BW DPX back surface 0 - 255 96 -35 μA
W TC2 HEAVY3 CL SPX color Heavy front surface 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
X TC2 HEAVY3 CL DPX paper 3 back surface 0 - 255 96 -35 μA
Y TC2 HEAVY3 BW SPX monochrome front surface 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
Z TC2 HEAVY3 BW DPX back surface 0 - 255 96 -35 μA
AA TC2 HEAVY4 CL color Heavy paper 4 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
AB TC2 HEAVY4 BW monochrome 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
AC TC2 OHP CL color OHP 0 - 255 103 -40 μA
AD TC2 OHP BW monochrome 0 - 255 103 -40 μA
AE TC2 ENVELOPE CL color envelope 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
AF TC2 ENVELOPE BW monochrome 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
AG TC2 THIN CL color thin paper 0 - 255 96 -35 μA
AH TC2 THIN BW monochrome 0 - 255 96 -35 μA
AI TC2 GLOSSY PAPER CL color gloss paper 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
AJ TC2 GLOSSY PAPER BW monochrome 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
AK TC2 EMBOSS CL color emboss paper 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
AL TC2 EMBOSS BW monochrome 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
AM TC2 LABEL CL color label paper 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
AN TC2 LABEL BW monochrome 0 - 255 90 -30 μA
AO TC2 FRONT EDGE LOW SPX front edge bias adjustment front surface low speed 0 - 255 76 -20 μA
AP TC2 FRONT EDGE LOW DPX value back surface low speed 0 - 255 69 -15 μA
AQ TC2 FRONT EDGE MIDDLE SPX front surface middle speed 0 - 255 83 -25 μA
AR TC2 FRONT EDGE MIDDLE DPX back surface middle speed 0 - 255 83 -25 μA
AS TC2 BACKEND LOW SPX rear edge bias adjustment front surface low speed 0 - 255 76 -20 μA
AT TC2 BACKEND LOW DPX value back surface low speed 0 - 255 69 -15 μA
AU TC2 BACKEND MIDDLE SPX front surface middle speed 0 - 255 0 -0 μA
AV TC2 BACKEND MIDDLE DPX back surface middle speed 0 - 255 0 -0 μA
AW TC2 INTERVAL LOW SPEED interval bias adjustment low speed(+) 0 - 255 66 4 μA
AX TC2 INTERVAL MIDDLE SPEED value middle speed(+) 0 - 255 109 10 μA
AY TC2 CLEANING MINUS LOW SPEED cleaning bias adjustment low speed(–) 0 - 255 54 -4 μA
AZ TC2 CLEANING MINUS MIDDLE SPEED value middle speed(–) 0 - 255 62 -10 μA
BA TC2 CLEANING PLUS LOW SPEED low speed(+) 0 - 255 66 4 μA
BB TC2 CLEANING PLUS MIDDLE SPEED middle speed(+) 0 - 255 109 10 μA
BC PTC LOW SPEED CL PTC current adjustment color low speed 0 - 255 109 -200 μA
BD PTC MIDDLE SPEED CL value middle speed 0 - 255 206 -400 μA
BE PTC LOW SPEED BW monochrome low speed 0 - 255 109 -200 μA
BF PTC MIDDLE SPEED BW middle speed 0 - 255 206 -400 μA
BG CASE VOLT LOW CL PTC voltage adjustment color low speed 0 - 255 0 0V
BH CASE VOLT MIDDLE CL value middle speed 0 - 255 0 0V
BI CASE VOLT LOW BW monochrome low speed 0 - 255 0 0V
BJ CASE VOLT MIDDLE BW middle speed 0 - 255 0 0V
BK DHV LOW SPEED CL SPX separation bias color low front surface 0 - 255 80 1000 V
BL DHV LOW SPEED CL DPX adjustment value speed back surface 0 - 255 109 1500 V
BM DHV LOW SPEED BW SPX monochrome front surface 0 - 255 80 1000 V
BN DHV LOW SPEED BW DPX back surface 0 - 255 109 1500 V
BO DHV MIDDLE SPEED CL SPX color middle front surface 0 - 255 226 3500 V
BP DHV MIDDLE SPEED CL DPX speed back surface 0 - 255 226 3500 V
BQ DHV MIDDLE SPEED BW SPX monochrome front surface 0 - 255 226 3500 V
BR DHV MIDDLE SPEED BW DPX back surface 0 - 255 226 3500 V

*Heavy paper 1:106-176g/m2 Heavy paper 2:177-220g/m2 Heavy paper 3:221-256g/m2 Heavy paper 4:257-300g/m2
3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) and press [OK] By setting the value (specified value) the specified output is pro-
key. vided.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in the proce-
dure 3) is outputted for 30sec and the set value is saved. When
[EXECUTE] key is pressed again the output is stopped.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 6

 5) Check that the inside dimension of the printed halftone is
ADJ 3 Image density sensor 240±0.5mm.
adjustment
Before executing this adjustment, check to confirm the following
items.
• Check to confirm that the color image density sensor (image reg-
istration sensor) is clean
• Check to confirm that the transfer belt is clean and free from
scratches.

3-A Image density sensor adjustment

240±0.5mm
The image density sensor and the transfer belt surface are used to
make the sensitivity adjustment of the image registration sensor.
This adjustment executes automatically at the outset of registration
adjustment operation and process control operation as well as Sim
44-2
Normally therefore it is not required to perform this adjustment. It is
performed only when the sensor is replaced or when the adjust-
ment result is checked.
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.
1) Enter Sim 44-2 mode
6) Change the set value of set item A.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. When the set value is changed by 1, the dimension is changed
The sensitivity adjustment of the color image density sensor by 0.1mm.
(image registration sensor) is automatically performed. When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification
After completion of the adjustment the adjustment result is dis- ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set
played and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display. value is decreased , the BK image magnification ration in the
If the adjustment is not completed normally. "ERROR" is dis- main scanning direction is decreased.
played. Repeat procedure 2) to 6) until a satisfactory result is obtained.
When an error occurs, check the following sections for any abnor-
mality. 4-B Print image position (main scanning
• Color image density sensor direction, sub scanning direction)
• The PCU PWB adjustment (Print engine) (Manual
• Transfer belt (dirt, scratch) adjustment)
• Transfer belt cleaner This adjustment must be performed in the following cases.
• When LSU unit is replaced or removed.
• When a paper tray is replaced.
ADJ 4 Print image position, image • When the paper tray section is disassembled.
magnification ratio adjustment • When the manual feed tray is replaced.
• When the manual feed tray is disassembled.
(Print engine) (Manual
• When the duplex mode paper transport section is disassembled.
adjustment) • When the registration roller section is disassembled.
• U2 trouble has occurred.
4-A Print image magnification ratio adjustment
• The PCU PWB has been replaced.
(main scanning direction) (Print engine)
• The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
(Manual adjustment)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases.
• When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced.
Before execution of this adjustment, check to insure the following
• U2 trouble has occurred item
• The PCU PWB has been replaced • The print image magnification ratio adjustment ADJ4-A (main
• The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced scanning direction) (print engine) (manual adjustment) has been
1) Enter the SIM 50-10 mode. properly adjusted.
2) Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper in the paper feed tray. 1) Enter SIM 50-10 mode.
3) Select the paper feed tray set in procedure 2) with the scroll 2) Select the target paper feed tray with the scroll key.
key. 3) Touch [EXECUTE] key.
4) Touch [EXECUTE] key. The adjustment pattern is printed
The check pattern is printed out.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 7

4) Check that the adjustment pattern image is printed in the cor-
rect position. ADJ 5 Print engine image distortion
Measure the dimension of the void area in the front and the adjustment, OPC drum phase
rear frame direction of the adjustment pattern and check that
all the following conditions are satisfied. adjustment, Color registration
adjustment (Print engine
Z1(2.0mm)
section)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases.
• When the color shift occurred.
• When LSU unit is replaced
• When the unit is installed or when the installing place is changed.
X Y • When maintenance work is performed (replacement of the OPC
4.0±1.0mm 2.0∼5.0mm
drum, the transfer unit, the transfer belt)
• When ADJ4-A print engine image magnification ratio adjustment
(main scanning direction) is performed.
• U2 trouble has occurred.
• When the PCU PWB is replaced.
• When EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
• When the color phase is not proper even after execution of the
color balance adjustment.
• When the OPC drum drive section is disassembled.
Z2(2.0mm)
• When the primary transfer unit is replaced (when it removed from
the machine)
Content Standard adjustment value
X Lead edge void area 4.0 ± 1.0mm • When the developing unit or the OPC drum unit is removed from
Y Rear edge void area 2.0mm - 5.0mmm the machine.
Z1 / Z2 FRONT/REAR VOID AREA Total 4.0 ± 2.0mm
5-A Print engine image distortion adjustment
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.
(manual adjustment), OPC drum phase
5) Change the adjustment value.
adjustment (auto adjustment), color
Enter the adjustment value and touch [OK] key or [EXECUTE]
registration adjustment (auto adjustment)
key.When touch [EXECUTE] key, the adjustment pattern is
printed. This adjustment performs the print engine image distortion adjust-
ment, the OPC drum phase adjustment and the color registration
When the adjustment value is increased, the adjustment pat-
adjustment simultaneously.
tern is shifted to the front frame side.When it is decreased, the
adjustment pattern is shifted to the rear frame side. 1) Enter SIM 50-22 mode.
When the set value is changed by 1 the shift distance is 2) Touch [EXECUTE] key.
changed by 0.1mm. [EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the image registration auto
adjustment is started. (it takes about 15 sec to complete the
Repeat procedures 3) - 6) until the conditions of procedure 5)
adjustment)
are satisfied. In case a satisfactory result cannot be obtained
by repeating the above procedures, perform the following pro- 3) When the adjustment is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to
cedure. the normal display and the value of the adjustment result is
displayed. The current skew level for each color is displayed
6) loosen the paper feed tray off-center adjustment screws (2
on the SKEW display section.
pcs) at the center section of the lift plate of the paper feed tray
and change the gear until position in the front/rear frame direc- Display Content Display Default NOTE
tion. Repeat the adjustment procedure from 4). /Item value
MAIN F C Registration 1.0 - 200
M adjustment value 399.0
Y main scanning
direction F side
MAIN R C Registration 1.0 - 200
M adjustment value 399.0
Y main scanning
direction R side
SUB C Registration 1.0 - 200
M adjustment value 399.0
Y sub scanning
direction
SKEW C Print skew L99.9 - 0 If the value is
M amount R99.9 positive “L” is
Y calculation result displayed at the
head of the
value if negative
“R” is displayed.
PHASE C OPC drum phase 1-8 1
M adjustment value
Y

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 8

4) Write down the displayed skew level. Color registration offset adjustment (SIM 50-20)
Meaning of the skew level value and the adjustment pro-
cedure
* If OK is displayed for all items of SKEW C, M, Y, there is no When the color registration is greatly shifted due to replace-
need to perform the adjustment. ment of the LSU etc, if SIM 50-22 is used to perform the color
* When “R” is displayed at the head of the value, turn the LSU registration automatic adjustment an error may occur.
skew adjustment screw clockwise. In this case, the adjustment may be properly executed by set-
* When ”L” is displayed at the head of the value, turn the LSU
ting the adjustment items A - I of SIM 50-20 to 200 and execut-
skew adjustment screw counterclockwise.
ing the automatic adjustment again. If color shift in an actual
* The turning amount of the adjustment screw corresponds to print image differs in the center, the front side and the rear side
each adjustment value. C, M and Y indicate numbers of clicks.
the color shift offset adjustment can improve it. Normally there
The display value is rounded at the decimal point.
is a difference in color shift in several dots. Perform the adjust-
* C, M and Y (SKEW) shows the number of adjustment click ment only when the adjustment is required.
steps for each adjustment screw of C, M and Y.

5-B Print engine image skew (LSU skew)

Contents in ( )
MAIN, SUB: Difference from the previous adjustment value of adjustment (manual adjustment)
image registration. (No need to adjust normally)
Example: 105 for this time and 103 for the previous time, it is If a more accurate adjustment that the auto adjustment ADJ5A is
displayed as 105.0 (+2.0) required, use this method of adjustment.
SKEW: Judgment of LSU skew adjustment result OK or NG. This adjustment is made by changing the parallelism of the LSU
PHASE: OPC drum phase adjustment value of the previous unit scan laser beams for the OPC drum.
time.
1) Enter the SIM 50-20 or 64-1 mode.
5) If the display of C, M and Y (SKEW) is NG. all the LSU skew
2) Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11” x 17”) paper in it and
adjustment screws to adjust and perform the procedures 2) to
touch [EXECUTE] key.
4).
3) The image skew (image registration) adjustment pattern is
Repeat the procedures 2) to 5) until the display of C, M and Y
printed.
(SKEW) becomes OK. C, M and Y (SKEW) is OK, go to the
procedure 6). 4) Check the printed black image for any skew.
For the adjustment, remove the front cover and the waste Use the four cross points printed in black to measure the
toner box and turn the skew adjustment screw. squareness.
6) Repeat the procedures 2) to 4) again and check to confirm that There are following two methods of checking the black image
C, M and Y (SKEW) are OK. If any of them is NG turn the LSU for any skew
skew adjustment screw of the corresponding color to adjust. Method 1
Measure the distances between opposing corners of the rect-
angle print pattern and compare the two distances to check the
squareness.
Method 2
Check the squareness of the vertical and horizontal sides of
the rectangle print pattern by using A3 or 11” x 17” paper sides.
In this case, the right angle of paper to be used may not be
exact, be sure to check the right angle of paper to be used in
advance.

A B

Diagonal Diagonal
About 220mm

line C line D

When the adjustment is made by turning the LSU skew adjust-

ment screw of K, the states of C, M and Y (SKEW) are
changed. Execute SIM50-22 to check to confirm that C, M and
Y (SKEW) are OK. When an abnormality occurs ERROR is About 300mm
displayed.
In this case, check each drive section and process section Method 1
The adjustment result can be checked by the following manual Measure the length of the diagonal lines of the rectangle print
adjustment mode. pattern.
*ADJ5B Calculate the difference between the measured lengths C and
Image skew adjustment (manual adjustment) (SIM 50-20) D of the diagonal lines.
*ADJ5C Check to insure that the difference between C and D is in the
following range.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 9

 C – D = ±0.8mm
If the difference between C and D is in the above range, there
is no need to adjust.
R side
Method 2
Fit the side of A3 or 11” x 17” paper to the long side of the rect-
angle print pattern.
Measure the slant (skew) of the vertical side for the horizontal
side of paper as shown in the figure.
If the above distance is 0.5mm or less, there is no need to
adjust.
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
procedure.
5) Open the front cover, remove the waste toner box and turn the
four LSU image skew adjustment screws in the same direction
F side
by the same amount.
For the adjustment, remove the front cover and the waste
toner box and turn the skew adjustment screw.

Color image shift check C (Image shift fine adjustment

scale (Fine adjustment) reference frame)
B-sub

B-main A-main

A-sub Color image shift

A-main: Main scan rough adjustment pattern check section
A-sub: Sub scan rough adjustment pattern (Rough adjustment)
B-main: Main scan fine adjustment scale
B-sub: Sub scan fine adjustment scale
Skew adjustment screw rotation direction C: Main scan sub scan fine adjustment pattern

When C is greater that Din the method 1 or there is some skew In each Y, M and C color print pattern printed separately in the
in some skew in the direction A in the method 2, turn the screw F side and in the R side, note the same print color pattern and
clockwise. check to confirm that the F side and the R side are in the same
When C is smaller that D in the method 1 or there is some condition.
skew in the direction B in the method 2, turn the screw coun- Rough adjustment pattern check:
terclockwise. Check the sub scan rough adjustment color image shift check
Reference of the rotation amount of the skew adjustment section on R side and the F side of each color, use the center
screw position of the black scale as the reference and check the bal-
In case of the method1, 0.8mm / 1.5 rotations ance in shifts of the color image line positions in the positive
In case of the method2, 0.5mm / 1.5 rotations and the negative directions. The balance in the R side must be
the same as that in the F side
Repeat the procedures 2)to 6).
Fine adjustment pattern check:
After completion of the black image skew adjustment, go to the
procedure 7). Check the square frames on the R side and the F side of each
color (normally five sections of high density can be seen)
6) Perform the same procedure as 1) and 2).
Check the sub scanning direction position of the center area of
7) Check the printed color image for any skew.
high density (one of the above five section). These must be on
If the difference between the shift amounts on the F and R the same position on the R side and the F side.
sides is within ±1 scale of the fine adjustment check scale.
In this case, use the sub scan direction color image shift check
there is no need to perform the adjustment. Measure the skew
scale (five adjustment) as the reference. Visually check the
amount from the print patterns on the front and rear sides of
color density and make the darkest section as the center and
each color.
use it as the read value of the shift amount. Check that the dif-
ference in the center position of the dark density section is
within ±1 step. The positional relations of the front and the rear
frame of the print color patterns of a same color are compared.
There is no need that all the colors are in the same state. Com-
pare only the positional relations of color patterns of a same
color. If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the follow-
ing procedure.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 10

8) Turn the LSU skew adjustment screw of the adjustment target 4) Check the color image registration.
color to adjust. There 6 color image registrations in total, two on each of the F
Skew adjustment screw rotation direction side, the R side and the center. Check all the patterns to con-
When the F side is skewed to the right side for R side: firm that they are within the specified range. Also check to con-
firm that there is not much shift in each color image registration
Turn the screw clockwise.
check pattern.
When the F side is skewed to the left side for the R side:
Turn the screw counterclockwise.
Reference of the rotation amount of the skew adjustment
screw There are two kinds of adjustment, one in the main scanning direc-
tion and the other in the sub scanning direction. The vertical direc-
Skew of difference by one step between F and R sides (differ-
tion in the above figure is that in the main scanning direction and
ence by one scale of the fine adjustment check scale) / turn for
the horizontal direction is that in the sub scanning direction.
about 2 clicks.
There are also two kinds of adjustments the rough adjustment and
Repeat the procedure 7) to 8) until satisfactory result is the fine adjustment. Perform the rough adjustment then perform the
obtained.
fine adjustment deliberately.
For the main scan direction image registration the offset on the F
5-C Color registration offset adjustment side the R side and at the center is independently adjusted.
(No need to adjust normally) If there is a difference in the sub scanning direction image registra-
This adjustment is used to set the offset value for the auto color tion between the F and R sides, perform the skew adjustment
registration adjustment (ADJ5A). AJ5A.
If there is any difference in color phase at the center and the four
corner of an actual print image, this adjustment may improve it.
X2 X1
Especially when there is any color shift at the center area, this
adjustment may improve it effectively. This adjustment cannot elim- Color image shift check C (Image shift fine adjustment
inate color shifts in all the areas, but average the overall color scale (Fine adjustment) reference frame)
B-sub
shifts. After the auto adjustment, use this color registration offset
adjustment to correct color shift partially, performing the adjustment
efficiently.
Y2

Before execution of this adjustment, check to confirm that the fol-

lowing adjustment has been performed. B-main A-main
*ADJ5A or ADJ5B image skew adjustment (LSU unit)
Kinds of adjustment values
Y1

There are following two kinds of registration adjustment values.

• Base registration adjustment value: XXX (FRONT) / XXX
(REAR)
They are manual adjustment values and auto adjustment values A-sub Color image shift
and reflected when the auto registration adjustment is executed.
A-main: Main scan rough adjustment pattern check section
If varies for every operation of the auto registration adjustment. (Rough adjustment)
A-sub: Sub scan rough adjustment pattern
• offset adjustment value: OFFSETXXF / OFFSETXXR B-main: Main scan fine adjustment scale
They are the offset adjustment values added to the above base B-sub: Sub scan fine adjustment scale
registration adjustment values and are not changed unless C: Main scan sub scan fine adjustment pattern
SIM50-20 is executed to change. Check the print patterns of the rough adjustment and the fine
1) Enter SIM 50-20 mode. adjustment of 18 check patterns.
2) Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11” x 17”) paper in it. How to check the rough adjustment pattern and input of the
3) Touch [EXECUTE] key. adjustment value:
The color image registration check pattern is printed. Visually check the color image registration check section, use the
center position of the black scale as the reference and check the
shift balance in the positive and negative directions at the color
image line position.
Rear pattern Use the center position of the black scale as the reference and
check that the color image line is symmetrical in the positive side
and the negative side.
If shift is in the arrow mark X1 and Y1 increase the adjustment
value. if shift is in the arrow mark X2 and Y2 decrease the adjust-
ment value.
Center pattern
The reference arrow on the check pattern faces the positive direc-
tion.
Guideline on adjustment value
1 scale/20 (Changing the set value by 20 shifts the scale by one.)
Checking fine adjustment pattern and entering the adjustment
Front pattern
value
Check whether the darkest spot (one of five spots usually seen) is
Reference arrow mark within the center area of reference frame for image registration fine
adjustment in the square frame.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 11

At that time, use the color image registration check scale (for fine Display/Item Content Adjust Default
adjustment) as reference. ment value
Assume the spot where looks the darkest color as center and read value
out the shift amount. range
J OFFSET_ Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
Check whether the center position of the dark density section is
C_MAIN_F adjustment value (Main
within ± 1 step. scanning direction) (Cyan) (F
(The adjustment won’t be necessary if the print pattern for fine side)
adjustment is placed 0 ± 1 step of reference pattern.) K OFFSET_ Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
Increase the adjustment value if the position is shifting toward the C_MAIN_R adjustment value (Main
scanning direction) (Cyan) (R
arrow X1 or Y1. Decrease the value if shifting toward the arrow X2
side)
or Y2.
L OFFSET_ Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
Reference adjustment value M_MAIN_F adjustment value (Main
1 scale / 2 (When the set value is changed by 2, shift is made by 1 scanning direction) (Magenta)
scale.) (F side)
M OFFSET_ Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
Perform this adjustment if there is a considerable difference in color
M_MAIN_R adjustment value (Main
shift in the square and at the center area.
scanning direction) (Magenta)
Select adjustment item (OFF SET X F / OFF SET X R / OFF SET X (R side)
S) and change adjustment value. N OFFSET_ Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
OFF SET X F: Y_MAIN_F adjustment value (Main
scanning direction) (Yellow)
F side main scanning direction registration offset set value (The
(F side)
color shift on the F side and at the center area is changed.)
O OFFSET_ Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
OFF SET X R: Y_MAIN_R adjustment value (Main
R side main scanning direction registration offset set value (The scanning direction) (Yellow)
color shift on the R side and at the center area is changed.) (R side)
P OFFSET_ Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
OFF SET X S:
C_SUB adjustment value (Sub
Sub scanning direction registration offset set value (The overall scanning direction) (Cyan)
color shift toward sub scanning direction overall.) Q OFFSET_ Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
Adjustment conditions and method M_SUB adjustment value (Sub
scanning direction) (Magenta)
To adjust evenly overall, adjust so that the color shifts on the F side,
R OFFSET_ Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
the R aide and at the center are of the same level.
Y_SUB adjustment value (Sub
To adjust with the center area most focused, adjust so that the color scanning direction) (Yellow)
shift at the center becomes smaller than that on the F side and the S OFFSET_ Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
R side. C_SUB_HV12 adjustment value (Sub
When the offset adjustment value is 0, if the color registration scanning direction) (Cyan)
(Heavy paper 1/2)
adjustment (automatic adjustment) is performed, the color shift on
T OFFSET_ Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
the F side and that on the R side are automatically adjusted to be
M_SUB_HV12 adjustment value (Sub
smaller than that on the center area.
scanning direction) (Magenta)
(Heavy paper 1/2)
Display/Item Content Adjust Default
U OFFSET_ Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
ment value
Y_SUB_HV12 adjustment value (Sub
value
scanning direction) (Yellow)
range
(Heavy paper 1/2)
A CYAN Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
V OFFSET_ Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
(FRONT) Value (Main scanning
C_SUB_HV34 adjustment value (Sub
direction) (Cyan) (F side)
scanning direction) (Cyan)
B CYAN Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
(Heavy paper 3/4)
(REAR) value (Main scanning
W OFFSET_ Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
direction) (Cyan) (R side)
M_SUB_HV34 adjustment value (Sub
C MAGENTA Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
scanning direction) (Magenta)
(FRONT) value (Main scanning
(Heavy paper 3/4)
direction) (Magenta) (F side)
X OFFSET_ Image registration offset 1 - 99 50
D MAGENTA Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
Y_SUB_HV34 adjustment value (Sub
(REAR) value (Main scanning
scanning direction) (Yellow)
direction) (Magenta) (R side)
(Heavy paper 3/4)
E YELLOW Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
(FRONT) value (Main scanning
direction) (Yellow) (F side)
F YELLOW Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
(REAR) value (Main scanning
direction) (Yellow) (R side)
G CYAN Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
(SUB) value (Sub scanning
direction) (Cyan)
H MAGENTA Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
(SUB) value (Sub scanning
direction) (Magenta)
I YELLOW Image registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
(SUB) value (Sub scanning
direction) (Yellow)

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 12

 3) Loosen the fixing screw of the pulley angle on the front frame
ADJ 6 Scan image distortion side of the 2/3 mirror unit.
adjustment
(Document table mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
• When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
• When the copy image is distorted.

6-A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism

adjustment (Sub scanning direction
distortion adjustment)
Before execution of this adjustment, remove the document table
glass.
1) Remove the lamp unit, and then loosen the screws which are
fixing the scanner unit and the drive wire. Release the scanner
unit from the drive wire.

4) Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side
of the 2/3 mirror unit so that it is in contact with two stoppers on
the front and the rear frames simultaneously.
5) Screw edge face of scanner unit and right edge face of the
frame together on both sides to fix the scanner unit while this
unit is in contact with both stoppers.

2) Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the 2/3 mirror
unit to bring it into contact with the stopper.
When the 2/3 mirror unit is in contact with the two stoppers on
the front and the rear frames simultaneously, the parallelism is
proper.

6-B Scan image (main scanning direction)

distortion adjustment
1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.
(Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)

L L

L = 10mm

If this requirement is not met, do the following steps. L

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 13

2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu- Repeat the procedures 2) - 5) until there is no difference in
ment table and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. image distortions (distortion balance) between both sides.
3) Check for distortion in the main scanning direction. 6) Without changing the balance of the scanner rail on the front
If the four angles of the rectangle of the copy image are right frame side, change the overall height.
angles, it is judged that there is no distortion. (The work is 7) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-
completed.) ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. Check
that the distortion in the main scanning direction is within the
specified range.
Repeat the procedures 6) and 7) until the distortion in the main
scanning direction is in the specified range.

ADJ 7 Scanner image skew

adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode)
7-A RSPF scanner image skew adjustment
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
If there is any distortion in the main scanning direction, perform • The RSPF section has been disassembled.
the following procedure. • The RSPF unit has been replaced
4) Check the difference (distortion balance) between left-hand • The RSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
and right-hand side images distortions. 1) Create an adjustment chart by printing the self print pattern
(grid pattern) available in Simulation 64-2 in duplex mode.
Lc Lc SIM 64-2 set values
A = 1, B = 1, C = 254, D = 255
Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
the paper edges, and apply position marks 'A' and 'B' to the
Copy A Copy B front and rear side of leading edge on front side of the paper.

Ld Ld A Paper feed direction

There is no difference There are some differences
between the distortion on between the distortion on
the right and that on the the right and that on the
left. left.
Lc = Ld /F/G

If Lc = Ld, the distortion on the left is equal to that on the right.

(The distortions are balanced.) B
If the above condition is satisfied, go to the procedure 6).
If not, perform the following procedures.
5) Change the height balance of the scanner rail on the front 2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17")
frame side. paper in RSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for
skews (Set in the RSPF feed tray so that the mark on the
adjustment chart is at the edge).
• Check with one of the following methods.
Check Method 1

(Front side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition:
_DE_”“PP

A B

a b

Remove the left cover of the operation panel. Loosen the scan-
ner rail fixing screw to change the balance between the right
and the left heights of the scanner rail.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 14

 Check Method 2 1) Close the DSPF unit and check the clearance between the
Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction print projections in the front side and the rear side and the SPF
line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within 1.0 mm. glass holding resin surface.

1.0

If the copy image is not in the above state, perform the proce-
2) Visually check to insure that the clearance A is 1 mm or less
dure 3).
and the clearance B is 0 mm (in contact).
3) Open the RSPF unit, and loosen the fixing screw of the hinge.
If the above requirement is not met, do step 3).

1mm

0mm B

3) Turn the height adjustment screw to adjust the DSPF front/rear

frame horizontal level.

L
4) Slide the RSPF unit in the arrow direction to make the skew
adjustment.
5) Make a copy again and measure a and b on the copied test
chart. Repeat procedures 2) to 5) until the condition (a - b = ± 1
mm or less) is satisfied.

7-B DSPF parallelism adjustment R

This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
• The DSPF section has been disassembled.
• The DSPF unit has been replaced
• Paper jam occurs at DSPF
• Skew occurs while feeding paper from DSPF
• Skew appears on the image scanned from the DSPF

When the front frame side is higher (There is a clearance of 1

mm or more in B):
Turn the height adjustment screw R of the DSPF rear frame
clockwise.
When the rear frame side is higher (There is a clearance of 1
mm or more in A):
Turn the height adjustment screw L of the DSPF rear frame
counterclockwise.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 15

 Repeat steps 2) to 3) until an acceptable result is obtained. [Check Method 1]
4) After adjustments of A and B, check to insure that the projec-
tion on the front right side is in contact with the glass surface of (Front side)
the main unit. Make sure that the output satisfies the condition:
_DE_”“PP

A B

a b

(Back side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition:
_FG_”“PP

C D
7-C DSPF skew adjustment
(Front surface mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: c d
• The DSPF section has been disassembled.
• When replacing the DSPF unit. [Check Method 2]
• The DSPF unit generates skewed scanned images. Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction print
1) Make an adjustment chart. line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within 1.0 mm.
Print the self print pattern (grid pattern) of SIM64-2 in the
duplex print mode.
SIM64-2 set value
1.0
A=1, B=1, C=254, D=255
Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
the paper edges, and apply position marks 'A' and 'B' to the
front and rear side of leading edge on front and back side of A
the paper.

A Paper feed direction

If the front surface copy image is as shown above and the

back surface copy is not as shown above, go to the step 3) of
"ADJ 7D DSPF skew adjustment (Back surface mode)."
If the above requirement is not met for the paper's front side,
B then do step 3).
3) Loosen the hinge screws and lower the two attachments.

2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17")

ĭ
paper in DSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for
skews (Set in the DSPF feed tray so that the mark on the
adjustment chart is at the edge).
Ĭ
•Check with one of the following methods.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 16

4) Open the DSPF and loosen the screw. Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
the paper edges, and apply position marks 'A' and 'B' to the
front and rear side of leading edge on front and back side of
the paper.

A Paper feed direction

2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17")

paper in DSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for
skews (Set in the DSPF feed tray so that the mark on the
5) Adjust by turning the DSPF skew adjusting screw on the right adjustment chart is at the edge).
side of the DSPF rear frame. Check with one of the following methods.
[Check Method 1]

(Front side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition:
_DE_”“PP

A B

a b

(Back side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition:
_FG_”“PP

C D

c d
[When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the
left] [Check Method 2]
If a < b, then turn counterclockwise the DSPF skew adjusting Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction print
screw. line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within 1.0 mm.
[When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the
right]
If a > b, then turn clockwise the DSPF skew adjusting screw.
1.0
Repeat steps 2) to 5) until an acceptable result is obtained.

7-D DSPF skew adjustment

(Back surface mode) A
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
• DSPF section has been disassembled.
• The DSPF unit has been replaced.
• The DSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
1) Make an adjustment chart.
Print the self print pattern (grid pattern) of SIM64-2 in the
duplex print mode.
SIM64-2 set value If the back surface copy image is as shown above and the
A=1, B=1, C=254, D=255 front surface copy is not as shown above, go to the step 3) of
"ADJ 7C DSPF skew adjustment (Front surface mode)."

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 17

 If the back surface copy is not as shown above, perform the • When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scan-
procedures of step 3). ning direction is not properly adjusted.
3) Open the upper door, and remove the adjustment cover. • U2 trouble has occurred.
1) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
2) Set the adjustment item CCD (MAIN) to 50 (default value).
Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the
adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
3) Place a scale on the original table as illustrated below.

4) Turn the DSPF skew adjustment screw on the CCD unit to

adjust.
4) Make a normal copy on A4 paper.
5) Compare the copied image of the scale and the actual scale
length in terms of length.
6) Obtain the copy magnification ratio correction ratio in the main
scanning direction from the following formula.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
ratio = (Original size - Copy image size) / Original size x 100%
(Example)
Compare the scale of 10 mm with the scale of 10 mm on the
copy image.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
ratio = (100 - 99) / 100 x 100 = 1

[When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the

left] 100 mm scale 10 20 90 100 110
If c < d, turn the DSPF skew adjustment screw A counterclock- (Original)
wise, or turn the adjustment screw B clockwise.
[When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the
right]
1.0mm
If c > d, turn the DSPF skew adjustment screw A clockwise, or
turn the adjustment screw B counterclockwise.
* The adjustment screws A and B must be turned in proper bal- Copy image
ance. For example, if the trouble is not removed by turning the (1mm (1%)
adjustment screw A 180 degrees clockwise, do not turn the shorter than 10 20 90 100 110
adjustment screw A furthermore, but turn the adjustment the original)
screw B 180 degrees counterclockwise.
Repeat steps 2) to 4) until an acceptable result is obtained.
If the copy magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform the
following procedures.
ADJ 8 Scan image focus adjustment 7) Remove the document table glass.
8) Remove the dark box cover.
8-A Image focus adjustment (Document table
mode/DSPF/RSPF front surface mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
• The CCD unit has been removed from the machine.
• The CCD unit has been replaced.
• When the copy image focus is not properly adjusted.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 18

9) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the 12) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.
CCD unit base as shown below. If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 ± 0.8%,
repeat the procedures of 9) - 11) until the condition is satisfied.
NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simula-
tion 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification
ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 ± 0.8%)
and the specified resolution is obtained based on the opti-
cal system structure.

8-B Image focus adjustment

(DSPF back surface mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
• When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced.
• When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced.
• When the COPY/SCAN/FAX image focus is not properly
adjusted.
• When the DSPF unit is removed.
This procedure must be executed also when the CCD unit is • When the DSPF unit is replaced.
replaced. 1) Make a duplex copy in DSPF mode.
10) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws. 2) Make sure that the copied image on the back side of the paper
is satisfactorily focused.
If the image is not satisfactorily focused, do the following
steps.
3) Open the upper door. Remove the screws, and remove the
transport PG upper.

NOTE: Never loosen the screws marked with X.

If any one of these screws is loosened, the position and the
angle of the CCD unit base may be changed to cause a
problem, which cannot be adjusted in the market. In that
case, the whole scanner unit must be replaced.
11) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
direction) to change the installing position.
When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter
than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.
4) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the
One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%. CCD unit base as shown below.
At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the
scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
* Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked in
procedure 9).

5) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws.

B

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 19

NOTE: Never loosen the screws marked with X. • When the SCN-MFP control PWB is replaced.
Loosening these screws could possibly change the CCD • When the EEPROM of the SCN-MFP control PWB is replaced.
unit base optical axis. Once the optical axis has been Before this adjustment, the focus adjustment (CCD unit installing
changed, it cannot be corrected through on-site adjust- position adjustment) must have been completed.
ments. Solving such a problem requires the replacement of
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
the entire scanner unit. below.
6) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
direction) to change the installing position.
When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter
than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.
One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.
At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the
scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
* Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked in
procedure 4).

2) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.

3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode, and make a copy.
A 4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
range (100 ± 0.8%).
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
± 0.8%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification
B ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following
procedure.
5) Change the CCD (MAIN) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-
tion ratio is increased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-
7) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again. cation ratio is changed by about 0.02%.
If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 ± 0.8%, Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio
repeat the procedures of 4) – 6) until the condition is satisfied. is within the specified range (100 ± 0.8%).
NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simula-
tion 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification 9-B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 ± 0.8%) (sub scanning direction) (Manual
and the specified resolution is obtained based on the opti-
cal system structure.
adjustment) (Document table mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
• When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image sub scan-
ADJ 9 Scan image magnification ratio ning direction is not properly adjusted.
• When the scanner motor is replaced.
adjustment (Manual
• U2 trouble has occurred.
adjustment) • When the SCN-MFP control PWB is replaced.
• When the EEPROM of the SCN-MFP control PWB is replaced.
9-A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
(main scanning direction) (Manual
adjustment) (Document table mode)
NOTE: If the default adjustment value of the scan image magnifi-
cation ration adjustment (main scanning direction) of SIM
48-1 is changed, copy image quality may be degraded.
Therefore, this adjustment must be executed only when
there is a special necessity.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
• When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scan-
ning direction is not properly adjusted.
• When the scanner motor is replaced.
• U2 trouble has occurred.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 20

1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure • When U2 trouble occurs.
below. • When the copy magnification ratio of the DSPF/RSPF mode
copy image in the main scanning direction is not proper.
• When the DSPF/RSPF is disassembled.
a. Adjustment procedures
1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the docu-
ment tray of the DSPF/RSPF.
The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures.
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put marks on both sides and
both surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge.

Paper pass direction A4 size

(Both the front surface

and the back surface)

10mm 10mm
2) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper.
3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original
Go to the copy mode, and make a copy.
images.

Copy magnifi- (Original dimension - Copy dimension)

Ჷ X 100%
cation ratio Original dimension
original
(Example 1)
Copy A
(Shorter than
10 20 90 100 110 copy
the original)
10 50 100 150 200 250

10 50 100 150 200 250

Scale
10 20 90 100 110
(Original)
4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following
formula:
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100
(%)
(Example 2) Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%)
Copy B If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range
10 20 90 100 110
(Longer than (100 ± 0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment.
the original)
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro-
cedures.
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified 5) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
range (100 ± 0.8%). 6) Select an adjustment item of SPF (MAIN)/SPFB (MAIN) with
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100 the scroll key.
± 0.8%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification
ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following SPF(MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
(Front surface)
procedure.
SPFB(MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
5) Change the CCD (SUB) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1. (Back surface)
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-
7) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
tion ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnifica-
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-
tion ratio is increased. When the adjustment value is changed
cation ratio is changed by about 0.1%.
by 1, the image magnification ratio is changed by 0.02%
Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio
8) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
is within the specified range (100 ± 0.8%).
Repeat the procedures of 1) - 8) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
9-C Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
(main scanning direction) (Manual
adjustment) (DSPF/RSPF mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
• When the SCN-MFP control PWB is replaced.
• When the EEPROM on the SCN-MFP control PWB is replaced.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 21

 When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnifica-
9-D Scan image magnification ratio adjustment tion ratio is increased. When the adjustment value is changed
(sub scanning direction) (Manual by 1, the image magnification ratio is changed by 0.1%.
adjustment) (DSPF/RSPF mode) 8) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: Repeat the procedures of 1) - 8) until a satisfactory result is
• When the SCN-MFP CONTROL PWB is replaced. obtained.
• When the EEPROM on the SCN-MFP CONTROL PWB is
replaced.
• When U2 trouble occurs. ADJ 10 Scan image off-center
• When the copy magnification ratio of the DSPF/RSPF mode adjustment (Manual
copy image in the sub scanning direction is not proper.
adjustment)
• When the DSPF/RSPF is disassembled.
1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the docu-
10-A Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual
ment tray.
adjustment) (Document table mode)
The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put marks on both sides and
both surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge. • When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
• When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
• When a U2 trouble occurs.
10mm • When the SCN-MFP control PWB is replaced.
Paper pass direction • When the EEPROM on the SCN-MFP control PWB is replaced.
A4 size 1) Make a copy of the adjustment chart (using the document
table) in the adjustment mode.

10mm #

2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper.

3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original
images. #$
10

$
50
100
10

original
150
50

2) Check the copy image center position.

If A - B = ± 1.0mm, the adjustment is not required.
200
100

copy
150
200

4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following A'

formula:
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100
(%)
Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%) A' - B' = ±1.0mm
If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range (100%)
(100 ± 0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment.
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro- B'
cedures.
5) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
6) Select an adjustment item with the scroll key.

SPF(SUB) Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio

(Front surface) If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
SPFB(SUB) Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio procedures.
(Back surface) 3) Enter the SIM 50-12 mode.
7) Enter an image magnification ratio adjustment value with 10- 4) Select the adjustment mode OC with the scroll key.
key, and press [OK] key. 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
The entered value is set.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 22

 When the set value is increased, the main scanning print posi- (SIM50-12)
tion is shifted to the front side by 0.1mm.
SPF(SIDE1) Front surface mode
6) Go to the copy mode, and make a copy
SPF(SIDE2) Back surface mode
Repeat the procedures of 1) - 6) until the above condition is
(SIM50-6)
satisfied.
OFFSET SPF1 Front surface mode
10-B Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual OFFSET SPF2 Back surface mode
adjustment) (DSPF/RSPF mode) 6) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: Change for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step
• When the SCN-MFP control PWB is replaced. When the adjustment value is increased, the print image is
• When the EEPROM on the SCN-MFP control PWB is replaced. shifted to the rear.
• When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. Repeat the procedures of 2) - 6) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
• When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
• When a U2 trouble occurs.
• When the DSPF/RSPF section is disassembled. ADJ 11 Copy image position and image
• When the DSPF/RSPF unit is replaced.
loss adjustment (Manual
NOTE: To execute this adjustment, it is required that the ADJ10-A
Scan image off-center adjustment (Document table mode) adjustment)
must have been properly adjusted.
1) Prepare the adjustment chart. 11-A Copy image position, image loss, and void
Draw a line at the center of the front surface and the back sur- area adjustment (Manual adjustment)
face of A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in parallel with the paper transport (Document table mode)
direction. This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
• When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
Paper transport • When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
direction
• When the LSU is replaced or removed.
Front surface Back surface
• When the registration roller section is disassembled.
• U2 trouble has occurred.
• The PCU PWB has been replaced.
• The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
• The SCN-MFP control PWB has been replaced.
• The EEPROM on the SCN-MFP control PWB has been replaced.
Before executing this adjustment, be sure to confirm that the ADJ
4/ADJ 5 Print engine image skew, image position, image magnifica-
tion ratio adjustments have been completed normally.
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
below.
Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
Draw a line at the center of the front surface
and the back surface of paper in parallel below.
with the paper transport direction. Place a scale so that it is in parallel with the scanning direction
and that its lead edge is in contact with the document guide
2) Set the adjustment chart to the DSPF/RSPF. plate.
3) Make a duplex copy in the normal magnification ratio from the Place white paper on the document table so that the scale lead
manual paper feed tray, and check the image position on the edge can be seen.
front surface and the back surface of the copy paper.

original copy
a

If the difference is within the range of 0 ± 2.7mmm there is no

need to perform the adjustment.
If the adjustment is required, perform the following procedures.
4) Enter the SIM 50-12 or 50-6 mode.
5) Select an adjustment mode with the scroll key.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 23

2) Enter the SIM 50-1 mode.
11-B Image scanning position adjustment
3) Set RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the default values.
(Manual adjustment) (DSPF/RSPF mode)
Item/ Content Setting Default This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
Display range value
• When the SCN-MFP control PWB is replaced.
A RRCA Document lead edge reference 0 - 99 50
position (OC) • When the EEPROM on the SCN-MFP control PWB is replaced.
G LEAD Lead edge image loss area setting 0 - 99 40 • When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
H SIDE Side image loss area adjustment 0 - 99 20 • When the scanner (reading) section is replaced.
4) Perform the image lead edge reference position adjustment. • When U2 trouble occurs.
Shift to the copy mode, and make a copy at 100% in the docu- • When the DSPF/RSPF section is disassembled.
ment table mode. • When the DSPF/RSPF unit is replaced.
When the adjustment value of RRCA is proper, the lead edge This simulation is to adjust the scanning position when scanning in
image from 4.0 mm is not copied in 100% copy scale. the DSPF/RSPF mode.
If not, change and adjust the RRCA value. If this adjustment is made improperly, the scanner stop position is
shifted from the specified position and a shade of the document
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
obtained. table may be reflected on the lead edge section of the scan image
in the DSPF/RSPF mode.
1) Make a copy in the DSPF/RSPF mode, and check for any
Scale image 4.0mm position shade on the lead edge section of the copy image.
Paper lead
edge

Papar lead edge

100%
5mm 10mm
Image area
5) Image loss adjustment
When the adjustment item of the image loss below is set to the
default value, it is adjusted to the standard state. If it is not in
the below standard state, or when it is set to a desired value, Shadow image of RSPF
change these adjustment items.

Paper lead edge

If there is any shade of the document table on the lead edge
section of the copy image, perform the following procedures.
2) Enter the SIM 53-8 mode, and press [MANUAL] key.
Copy area  3) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
When the set value is increased, the distance from the home
position to the DSPF/RSPF scanning position is increased.
1 2 3 4 When the set value is changed by 1, the scanning position is
5mm 10mm
changed by 0.1mm.
Perform the procedures of 1) - 3) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
Void area: 4.0 mm, Image loss: 4.0 mm
NOTE: After execution of this adjustment, be sure to execute ADJ
Adjust Standard 11C Copy image position, image loss, void area adjustment
Item/ Default
Display
Content ment
value
adjustment (Manual adjustment) (DSPF/RSPF mode).
range value
LEAD Image loss Lead edge 0 - 99 40 4±1.0mm
adjustment image loss
11-C Copy image position, image loss, void area
adjustment adjustment (Manual adjustment) (DSPF/
SIDE Side image 0 - 99 20 4±2.0mm RSPF mode)
loss
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
adjustment
• When the SCN-MFP control PWB is replaced.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is • When the EEPROM on the SCN-MFP control PWB is replaced.
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
• When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
image loss is decreased.
• When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is
changed by 0.1mm. • When U2 trouble occurs.
• When the DSPF/RSPF section is disassembled.
• When the DSPF/RSPF unit is replaced.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 24

1) The adjustment chart can be made by the following proce- Item/Display Content Setting Default
dures. range value
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper and draw arrow marks vertically and G FRONT_REAR Back surface side image loss 0 - 99 20
horizontally on the front and the back surfaces. (SIDE2) amount setting
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear edge image 0 - 99 40
At the same time, put marks of the lead edge, the trail edge,
(SIDE2) loss amount setting
the front end, and the rear end as well as the identification
marks of the front surface and the back surface. *Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan
timing is delayed.
R Front surface *Item C – H: When the adjustment value is increased, the
(#%'
image loss is increased.
Lead edge image loss adjustment
L T
1) Set the lead edge image loss adjustment values (LEAD EDGE
(SIDE1/SIDE2) on the front surface and the back surface to
the following values.
When the set value is increased, the lead edge image loss is
Put
increased.
the position
marks. (Standard set value)
F
LEAD EDGE(SIDE 1): 20 Lead edge image loss set value
(Front surface)
Draw arrows.
LEAD EDGE(SIDE 2): 20 Lead edge image loss set value
Back surface (Back surface)
4
$#%-
2) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF/RSPF mode. Check
to confirm that the lead edge image loss is within 4.0 ± 1.0 mm
on the front surface and the back surface. The paper lead
L 6 edge must be aligned with the presumed image lead edge.

Paper lead edge The paper lead edge must be

Put
the position aligned with the image lead edge.
marks.
F

Draw arrows.
2) Enter the SIM 50-6 mode.
DSPF

Setting Default
Item/Display Content Copy image
range value
Front surface document scan
A SIDE1 1 - 99 50
position adjustment (CCD)
Back surface document scan
B SIDE2 1 - 99 50
position adjustment (CCD)
LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead edge Image loss
C 0 - 99 20
(SIDE1) image loss amount setting 4.0±1.0 mm
FRONT_REAR Front surface side image loss
D 0 - 99 20
(SIDE1) amount setting If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear edge procedure.
E 0 - 99 40
(SIDE1) image loss amount setting 3) Enter the adjustment value of SIDE1/SIDE2 with 10-key, and
LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead edge press [OK] key.
F 0 - 99 40
(SIDE2) image loss amount setting
Adjust so that the paper lead edge is aligned with the pre-
FRONT_REAR Back surface side image loss
G
(SIDE2) amount setting
0 - 99 20 sumed image lead edge.
TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear edge image SIDE1: Front surface lead edge scan position adjustment
H 0 - 99 20
(SIDE2) loss amount setting SIDE2: Back surface lead edge scan position adjustment
RSPF When the adjustment value is increased, the print image posi-
tion is shifted to the delaying direction for the paper.
Item/Display Content Setting Default Perform the procedures of 2) - 3) until a satisfactory result is
range value obtained.
A SIDE1 Front surface document scan 1 - 99 50
position adjustment (CCD)
B SIDE2 Back surface document scan 1 - 99 50
position adjustment (CCD)
C LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead edge 0 - 99 20
(SIDE1) image loss amount setting
D FRONT_REAR Front surface side image loss 0 - 99 20
(SIDE1) amount setting
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear edge 0 - 99 40
(SIDE1) image loss amount setting
F LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead edge 0 - 99 20
(SIDE2) image loss amount setting

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 25

Rear edge image loss adjustment Perform the procedures of 1) - 2) until a satisfactory result is
1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF/RSPF mode. Check obtained.
to confirm that the rear edge image loss is 2.0 - 5.0mm on the
front surface and the back surface.
ADJ 12 Print lead edge image position
Paper rear edge adjustment (PRINTER MODE)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
• When the registration roller section is disassembled.
• When the LSU unit is replaced or removed.
• U2 trouble has occurred.
• The PCU PWB has been replaced.
• The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.

Copy image This adjustment should be performed if the user wishes

to increase the lead edge void area for printer mode greater than
the standard value (3 mm).
1) Enter the SIM 50-5 mode.
2) Select the set item M with the scroll key, and enter the value
Image loss 2.0 - 5.0 mm corresponding to the paper feed tray with A4 (11" x 8.5") paper
in it.
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
procedure. Setting
Display/Item Content Default
2) Enter the adjustment value of TRAIL EDGE (SIDE1/SIDE2) range
with 10-key, and press [OK] key. A DEN-C Printer lead edge image 1 - 99 30
position adjustment
TRAIL EDGE(SIDE1): Rear edge image loss adjustment value
B DEN-B Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
(Front surface)
adjustment
TRAIL EDGE(SIDE2): Rear edge image loss adjustment value C FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void area 1 - 99 20
(Back surface) REAR adjustment
When the adjustment value is increased, the rear edge image D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge void 1 - 99 50
loss is increased. area adjustment correction
value
Perform the procedures of 1) - 2) until a satisfactory result is
E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
obtained.
adjustment correction value
Front/rear frame direction image loss adjustment F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF/RSPF mode. Check adjustment correction value
to confirm that the image losses on the front frame side and G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
the rear frame side are 2.0 ± 2.0mm on the front surface and adjustment correction value
the back surface. H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
adjustment correction value
I DENB-LCC LCC rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
Paper F Image loss adjustment correction value
side edge 2.0 ± 2.0 mm J DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void area 1 - 99 55
adjustment correction value
Copy image K DENB-HV Heavy paper correction value 1 - 99 50
L MULTI Number of print 1 - 999 1
COUNT
M PAP MFT Tray Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2
ER CS1 selection Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
N DUP YES Duplex Yes 0-1 0 1
Copy image LEX NO print No 1
selection
Paper R Image loss
side edge 2.0 ± 2.0 mm 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The check pattern is printed.
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
procedure.
2) Enter the adjustment value of FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1) /
FRONT/REAR (SIDE 2), and press [OK] key.
FRONT/REAR(SIDE 1): Front/Rear image loss adjustment
value (Front surface)
FRONT/REAR(SIDE 2): Front/Rear image loss adjustment
value (Back surface)
When the adjustment value is increased, the front/rear image
loss is increased.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 26

4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the check pat- 4) Place the adjustment pattern in the step 3) and the arrows on
tern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is in the adjustment pattern should be placed on left side (A4R/LTR
the standard adjustment value range. direction) on the document table. and press [EXECUTE] key.
Standard adjustment value: 4.0 ± 1.0mm Also put five blank sheets on top of the adjustment pattern.

4.0±1.0mm

If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps. 5) After scanning the adjustment pattern, the data will be updated
5) Select the adjustment target of the paper feed mode adjust- and the adjustment result pattern will be printed automatically.
ment item DENC with the scroll key. Check whether density on front and rear side matches.
6) Change the adjustment value.
Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the
[EXECUTE] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern is printed.
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When
the adjustment value is decreased, the distance is decreased.
Repeat the procedures 4) - 6) until the condition of 4) is satis-
fied.

ADJ 13 FR density uniformity

correction
Make sure followings are confirmed prior to the adjustment: 6) Press [RETRY] and repeat the steps in 3) to 5) until you are
• Charge unevenness is not occurring satisfied with the result in step 5).
• A paper tray with A4 (LT) size papers is available. Execute Sim 61-13 to clear auto/manual correction value to
default setting.
• The auto correction of FR density uniformity will clear the correc-
tion value in “ADJ13B manual correction of FR density unifor- 7) Execute Simulation 46-74 (Copy/Printer color balance adjust-
mity”. Do not execute auto correction if you wish to maintain the ment) after completing all the adjustments.
manual correction value.
• Execute Sim 61-13 if any one of DV unit, Drum Process unit and 13-B FR density uniformity visual inspection
LSU unit has been replaced. (CMYK 5 point adjustment)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases.
13-A FR density uniformity auto correction • Ununiformed density toward main scan direction has been
(32 point adjustment for all colors) observed:
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases. 1) Enter Simulation 61-12.
• Ununiformed density toward main scan direction has been 2) Press [VISUAL INSPECTION] key.
observed Press [DATA] to confirm present manual correction value.
1) Enter Simulation 61-11. 3) Select the density level to adjust and press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [AUTO CORRECTION] key. The adjustment pattern will be output.
Press [DATA] to confirm present auto correction value.
3) Select the density level to adjust and press [EXECUTE] key.
The adjustment pattern will be output.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 27

4) Check the adjustment pattern in the step 3).
Job
Select either [5 POINT CORRECTION] or [32 POINT COR- No.
Adjustment item Simulation
RECTION], enter adjustment value and press [EXECUTE] key. Developin
Toner density control
Larger the adjustment value, the higher the density and vice ADJ1 g unit ADJ1A 25-2
reference value setting
versa. adjustment
Adjust the main charger
ADJ2A 8-2
grid voltage
High
Adjust the developing bias
ADJ2 voltage ADJ2B 8-1
voltage
adjustment
Transfer current and
ADJ2C 8-6
voltage adjustment
ADJ8 Scan image focus adjustment 48-1

Note for the color balance/density check and adjustments

• For the color balance adjustments, be sure to use the paper
specified for color (recommended paper).
Note that, if another kind of paper is used for the color balance
adjustment, proper image qualities (color balance, density) may
not be obtained.
• When setting the adjustment pattern on the document table in
5) The adjustment result pattern will be printed automatically. the automatic color balance adjustment procedures, place 5
sheets of white paper on the adjustment pattern in order to pre-
Check whether density on front and rear side matches.
vent back copying and adverse effects of paper wrinkles as far
as possible.
Relationship between the servicing job contents and the color
balance/density check and adjustment
Note that the jobs before and after execution of the color balance/
density check and adjustment depend on the machine status and
the servicing conditions.
Follow the flowchart of the color balance/density adjustment proce-
dures depending on the actual conditions.
There are following three, major cases.
1) When a periodic maintenance is performed.
2) When a repair, an inspection, or a maintenance is performed.
(When a consumable part is replaced.)
3) When an installation, a repair, or inspection is performed.
6) After step 5) if you furthermore require this adjustment, press (Without replacement of a consumable part)
[RETRY] key and repeat the steps 3) to 5). (3) Copy color balance and density check
Execute Simulation 61-13 to clear auto/manual correction value to Before checking the copy color balance and density, be sure to
resume the factory default setting. execute the following jobs.
Execute Simulation 46-74 (Copy/Printer color balance adjustment) • Execute the high density image correction (Process correction)
after completing all the adjustments. forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
• Execute the half-tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
Method 1
ADJ 14 Color balance/density Make a copy of the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and a copy
adjustment of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-
0326FC11), and check that they are proper.
(1) Note before execution of the color balance/density adjust-
a. Note for execution of the color balance and density check in
ment
the color copy mode
* Requisite conditions before execution of the color balance/density
To check the copy color balance and density, use the gray test
adjustment
chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and the servicing color test chart
Before execution of the color balance/density adjustment, check to (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11). Set the copy density
insure that the adjustments which affect the color balance/density level to "3" in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual), and make a
have been completed properly. copy.
The importance levels of them are shown below: At that time, all the color balance adjustments in the user adjust-
(Since the following items affect the color balance/density ment mode must be set to the default (center).
directly, they must be adjusted or set before execution of the In addition, be sure to use the specified paper for color.
image quality adjustments.)
b. Note for checking the monochrome copy mode density
1) The following item must be adjusted properly.
To check the density, use the gray test chart (UKOG-
0162FCZZ). Set the copy density level to "Manual 3" in the Text/
Job No. Adjustment item Simulation
Printed Photo mode (Manual).
Print engine image distortion adjustment/ OPC
ADJ5 phase adjustment/ Color registration adjustment 50-22/20 In addition, all the color balance adjustments in the user adjust-
(Print engine section) ment mode must be set to the default (center).
Check with the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ)
(Though the following items affect the color balance/density,
there is no need to adjust them frequently. When, however, a In the copy density check with the gray test chart, check to insure
trouble occurs, they must be checked and adjusted.) the following conditions.
1) The following items must be adjusted properly.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 28

For the color (gray) balance, use the servicing color test chart
(UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to check.

(Color copy)
Patch 1 is SHARP gray chart
slightly copied.
SHARP GRAY CHART
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W

Patch 2 is copied.

(Black-and-white copy)
Patch 2 is SHARP gray chart
slightly copied.
SHARP GRAY CHART
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W

Patch 3 is copied.

Patch 1 is not copied.

Check with the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/

UKOG-0326FC11)
In the copy color balance check with the servicing color test chart,
check to insure the following conditions.

(Color copy)

Serviceman chart (Color patch section)

The densities of patches 1 - 6 of Patch 7 is slightly

each color are properly balanced. copied or not copied.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 29

Color copy check items (Check to confirm the following:)
1) There are 12 void areas. 4) The color difference in gray balance between the F and the R
2) Registrations (one point for the main scanning, and one point sides is not so great.
for the sub scanning) are not shifted. 5) There are no white and black streaks.
3) The resolution of 5.0 (5 points) can be seen. 6) Color texts are clearly reproduced.
7) The solid density is not so light.

Solid density

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 30

Monochrome copy check items (Check to confirm the following:)
1) There are 12 void areas. 4) There are no white and black streaks.
2) The resolution of 4.0 (5 points) can be seen. 5) The background solid is not so light.
3) The density difference between the F and the R sides is not so 6) The black low-density gradation is copied slightly.
great.

Solid density

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 31

(Method 2) (Method 2)
Use SIM46-21 to print the color balance adjustment sheet, and Use SIM 67-25 to print the color balance adjustment sheet and
check each process (CMY) black patch color balance and the black compare each process (CMY) black patch color balance and the
patch in order to confirm that the color balance adjustment is black patch to check the color balance.
proper or not more precisely.

PRINTER CALIBRATION

Low High Low density High density

density density Y
Y
M
M
C
C
Bk
Bk
CMY
CMY blend
blend A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q
1) The max. density section is not blurred.
1) The max. density section is not blurred.
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C and BK is copied.
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C, and BK is very slightly copied.

3) Patch for each of Y, M, C, BK

3) Patch for each of Y, M, C, BK The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. The patch density is changed gradually.
The patch density is changed gradually.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY) is to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the adjustment is proper. If reversed.
the color balance of the adjustment pattern printed in this mode is The density level of each color must be almost at the same level.
slightly shifted to Magenta, it is converted into the natural gray color
Patch B may not be copied.
balance by the color table in an actual copy mode.
Patch A must not be copied.
(When the color balance target is DEF 1.)
If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY mixed
(4) Printer color balance/density check color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the adjustment is
Before checking the copy color balance and the density, be sure to proper. In an actual print mode, it is converted into the natural gray
execute the following procedures in advance. color balance by the color table. (When the color balance target is
• Execute the high density image correction (Process correction) DEF 1.)
forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
• The half-tone image correction is forcibly executed. (SIM 44-26) 14-A Scanner calibration (CCD calibration)
(Method 1)
Execute SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern. 14-A (1)
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. The Scanner calibration (CCD calibration)
print test pattern is printed. (Document Glass Mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
• When the CCD unit is replaced.
• When a U2 trouble is occurred.
• When the SCN-MFP control PWB is replaced.
• When the EEPROM on the SCN-MFP control PWB is replaced.
(1) Note before adjustment
• Check that the table glass, No. 1, 2, 3 mirrors, and the lens sur-
face are free from dirt and dust.
(If there is some dust and dirt, wipe and clean with alcohol.)
• Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of the
scanner adjustment chart (UKOG-0356FCZZ) is free from dirt
and scratches.
If they are dirty, clean them.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
reversed. The density level of each color must be almost at the
Since the scanner adjustment chart (UKOG-0356FCZZ)
same level.
is easily discolored by sunlight (especially ultraviolet rays) and
humidity and temperature, put it in a bag.
Adjustment procedures

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 32

1) Set the scanner adjustment chart (UKOG-0356FCZZ) to the 2) Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of
reference position on the left rear frame side of the document the scanner adjustment chart (UKOG-0356FCZZ) is free from
table. dirt and scratches.
Set the chart in order that the arrow mark is placed on the left If they are dirty, clean them.
side. If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.

Since the scanner adjustment chart (UKOG-0356FCZZ)

is easily discolored by sunlight (especially ultraviolet rays) and
humidity and temperature, put it in a bag.

(2) Adjustment procedures

1) Set the scanner adjustment chart (UKOG-0356FCZZ) to the
paper feed tray of DSPF face down.

If the scanner adjustment chart is not available, execute SIM

63-5 to set the CCD gamma to the default. In this case, how-
ever, the adjustment accuracy is lower when compared with
the adjustment method using the scanner adjustment chart.
2) Enter the SIM 63-3 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
The automatic operation is started. During the adjustment,
[EXECUTE] is highlighted. After completion of the adjustment,
[EXECUTE] returns to the normal display.
If the scanner adjustment chart is not available, execute SIM
63-5 to set the CCD gamma to the default. In this case, how-
14-A (2) ever, the adjustment accuracy is lower when compared with
Scanner calibration (CCD calibration) the adjustment method using the scanner adjustment chart.
(DSPF Mode) 2) Enter the SIM 63-3 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: The automatic operation is started. During the adjustment,
• When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced. [EXECUTE] is highlighted. After completion of the adjustment,
[EXECUTE] returns to the normal display.
• When a U2 trouble is occurred.
• When DSPF control PWB is replaced.
(1) Note before adjustment
1) Check that DSPF scanner glass, mirrors, and the lens surface
are free from dirt and dust.
(If there is some dust and dirt, wipe and clean with alcohol.)

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 33

 Insert the shading adjustment sheet along the rear edge
14-A (3) frame, and set it in order that the rear edge of the shading
Shading adjustment (calibration) adjustment sheet is placed to the base of the actuator.
(DSPF Mode)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
• When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced.
• When a U2 trouble is occurred.
• When DSPF control PWB is replaced.
(1) Note before adjustment
1) Check that DSPF scanner glass, mirrors, and the lens surface
are free from dirt and dust.
(If there is some dust and dirt, wipe and clean with alcohol.)
2) Open DSPF original scanning section. Insert the shading
adjustment sheet (UKOG-0333FCZZ), and then close DSPF
original scanning section.

3) Enter the SIM 63-2 mode.

4) Press [DSPF SHADING] [EXECUTE] key.
Shading adjustment starts.
SET 1 Color balance adjustment target setup
a. General
When the automatic color balance adjustment is executed, a cer-
tain color balance (gamma) is used as the target.
There are following three kinds of the target.
• Factory color balance (gamma) target
• Service color balance (gamma) target
• User color balance (gamma) target
In the above three, only the service color balance target can be set
to a desired level.
This setting is required in the following cases.
• When the color balance and density adjustments are executed
manually (SIM46-21) (SIM67-25)
• U2 trouble has occurred.
• When the SCN-MFP control PWB is replaced.
• When the EEPROM on the SCN-MFP control PWB is replaced.
• When the user requests for customizing the color balance.
• When the service color balance target gamma is judged as
improper.

SET 1A Copy color balance adjustment target setup

• Each color balance target for the copy color balance adjustment

Type Descriptions
A Factory color balance There are three kinds of the color balance target, and each of them is specified according to the machine design. Use SIM
(gamma) target 63-11 to select one of them as the factory target. The default setting (factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1) which
emphasizes color reproduction.
B Service color balance This target is used when the user requests to customize the color balance to user's desired level. In advance, the user's
(gamma) target unique color balance must be registered as the service color balance target. The above registration (setting) is made by
the serviceman with SIM 46-21 to adjust the color balance and with SIM 63-7 to register it.
This color balance target is used when the user executes the color balance adjustment. When, therefore, the service color
balance target is changed, the color balance target of the user's color balance adjustment is also changed. When,
however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance is set to the factory color balance target set with SIM 63-11. The default
setting (factory setting) of the color balance is same as the factory color balance target. (Emphasized on color
reproduction (DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the color balance, be sure to use SIM 63-8 to set the color balance to the
factory color balance target.
C User color balance (gamma) Same color balance as the service color balance (gamma) target When the service color balance target is changed, this
target color balance target is also changed accordingly.

• Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the copy
color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/46-24)

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 34

 Color balance target in the copy color balance
automatic adjustment (SIM 46-24)

Factory color balance

Use SIM 63-11 to select one of the three target (DEF1) = Service color balance
target Factory setting
kinds of color balance targets.
Factory color balance
target (DEF1) Factory color balance Service color balance Use SIM 46-21 to adjust the optional color
target (one of DEF1 - 3) target (Unique) balance, and use SIM 63-7 to register it.
Factory color balance
target (DEF2)
Factory color balance
target (DEF3) Factory color balance Execute SIM 63-8.
target
(one of DEF1 - 3)
= Service color balance
target (The service color balance target is the
same as the factory color balance target.)

Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment

Color balance target for Service color balance

the user color balance
adjustment
= target

• Factory target in the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 46-74/46-24)

By use of SIM 63-11, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target.
Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)

SIM63-8
Factory color balance target (DEF2) =
Factory color balance target Service color balance target/Color balance
(DEF2) target for the user color balance adjustment

+b* Direction of Yellow SIM63-8

Factory color balance target
Factory color balance target (DEF1) = Service color balance
Hue (DEF1) target/Color balance target for the
user color balance adjustment
Direction
of Green

Item Content Default

DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance DEF1
(A) operation is slightly shifted to Magenta. When this target is selected, the
color balance is converted into natural gray color balance by the color
correction table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
Direction
of Red DEF2 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance
operation is slightly shifted to natural gray color balance. When this target
is selected, the color balance is slightly shifted to Cyan by the color
correction table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
DEF3 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance
operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. When this target is selected, the color
balance is converted into the color balance with enhanced Cyan by the
color correction table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
Direction of Blue

Factory color balance target (DEF3) =

Factory color balance target Service color balance target/Color balance
(DEF3) target for the user color balance adjustment
SIM63-8

• Service color balance target in the copy color balance adjust- If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
ment ((Automatic adjustment) SIM 46-74/46-24). required.
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Man-
can be adjusted with SIM 46-21 and registered with SIM 63-7. ual) with SIM 46-21 according to the user's request, use SIM 63-7
When, however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance is set to to register the service color balance target data by using adjust-
the same balance as the factory color balance target set with ment pattern that was printed in this mode.
SIM 63-11.
• Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for printing the
the copy color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM adjustment pattern by SIM 46-21.
46-74/46-24). When, therefore, the service color balance target
is changed, this target is also changed accordingly.
(Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and the
purpose of registration)
This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is
customized with SIM 46-21.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 35

By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised. 2) Enter the SIM 63-7 mode.
It is recommended to keep the printed adjustment pattern created 3) Press [SETUP] key.
with SIM 46-21. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the 4) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly
same color balance target to another machine. adjusted and printed in the copy color balance adjustment
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data. (Manual adjustment) (SIM 46-21) on the document table.
Do not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side.
from discoloration and dirt. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image
The service color balance target data is registered immediately (adjustment pattern).
after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21. If the color balance could not be adjusted satisfactorily with
If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color bal- SIM 46-21 (Color balance adjustment (Manual)), do not exe-
ance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21, the color balance of the cute SIM 63-7 to register the service color balance target data.
adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read.
Never use such a pattern for the adjustment.
6) The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color
The accuracy of the service color balance target data can be
(KCMY) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys.
judged as follows.
Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B - P
When result of the color balance adjustment (Auto) with selecting (MAX).
the service color balance target in SIM 46-74/46-24 is unsatisfac-
If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is judged as
tory or abnormal.
abnormal.
In that case, the registered service target data for the color balance
7) Press [OK] key.
adjustment (Auto) may be improper.
The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjust-
This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance
adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance ment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service tar-
get.
target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 63-7.
(Procedures to set the service color balance target and the
The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was
color balance target for the user color balance adjustment to
made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with
SIM 46-21. This procedure may have been executed erroneously the same color balance as the factory color balance target)

a. Setting procedure This procedure must not be executed when the copy color balance
was adjusted with SIM 46-21 to a unique color balance requested
(Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as
by the user and it was registered as the service color balance tar-
the service color balance target)
get with SIM 63-7.
1) Use SIM 46-21 (Copy color balance adjustment (manual
When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM 63-11,
adjustment) mode) to print color patch image (adjustment pat- be sure to execute this procedure.
tern).
1) Enter the SIM 63-8 mode.
In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for printing
2) Press [EXECUTE] key and [YES] key.
the adjustment pattern by SIM 46-21.
The service color balance target and the color balance target
If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment
for the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color
is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an
optional color balance is requested by the user, make an balance as the factory color balance target.
adjustment.

SET 1B Printer color balance adjustment target setup

• Color balance target for the printer color balance adjustment

Type Descriptions
A Factory color balance There are three kinds of the color balance targets, and each of them is specified according to the machine design. Use
(gamma) target SIM 67-26 to select one of them as the factory target. The default setting (factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1)
which emphasizes color reproduction.
B Service color balance This target is used when the user requests to customize the color balance to user's desired level. In advance, the user's
(gamma) target unique color balance must be registered as the service color balance target. The above registration (setting) is made by
the serviceman with SIM 67-25 to adjust the color balance and with SIM 67-27 to register it.
This color balance target is used when the user executes the color balance adjustment. When, therefore, the service color
balance target is changed, the color balance target of the user's color balance adjustment is also changed. When,
however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the color balance is set to the factory color balance target set with SIM 67-26. The
default setting (factory setting) of the color balance is same as the factory color balance target. (Emphasized on color
reproduction (DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the color balance, be sure to use SIM 67-28 to set the color balance to the
factory color balance target.
C User color balance (gamma) Same color balance as the service color balance (gamma) target When the service color balance target is changed, this
target color balance target is also changed accordingly.

• Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the
printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/76-24)

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 36

 Color balance target in the printer color balance
automatic adjustment (SIM 67-24)

Use SIM 67-26 to select one of the three

Factory color balance
target (DEF1)
= Service color balance
target
Factory setting
kinds of color balance targets.
Factory color balance
target (DEF1) Factory color balance Service color balance Use SIM 67-25 to adjust the optional color
target (one of DEF1 - 3) target (Unique) balance, and use SIM 67-27 to register it.
Factory color balance
target (DEF2)
Factory color balance
Execute SIM 67-28.
target (DEF3) Factory color balance
target (one of DEF1 - 3) = Service color balance
target
(The service color balance target is
the same as the factory color balance
target.)

Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment

Color balance target for Service color balance

the user color balance
adjustment
= target

• Factory target in the printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/67-24)
By use of SIM 67-26, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target.
Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)

SIM67-28
Factory color balance target (DEF2) =
Factory color balance target Service color balance target/Color balance
(DEF2) target for the user color balance adjustment

+b* Direction of Yellow SIM67-28 Factory color balance target (DEF1)

Factory color balance target = Service color balance target/Color
(DEF1) balance target for theuser color
Hue balance adjustment
Direction
of Green

Item Content Default

DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance DEF1
(A) operation is slightly shifted to Magenta. When this target is selected, the
color balance is converted into natural gray color balance by the color
table in an actual printer mode and print is made. (Factory setting)
DEF2 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance
operation is slightly shifted to natural gray color balance. When this target
is selected, the color balance is slightly shifted to Cyan by the color table
Direction in an actual copy mode and print is made.
of Red
DEF3 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance
operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. When this target is selected, the color
balance is converted into the color balance with enhanced Cyan by the
color table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
Direction of Blue

Factory color balance target (DEF3) =

Factory color balance target Service color balance target/Color balance
(DEF3) target for the user color balance adjustment
SIM67-28

• Service color balance target in the printer color balance adjust- If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
ment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/67-24). required.
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Man-
can be adjusted with SIM 67-25 and registered with SIM 67-27. ual) with SIM 67-25 according to the user's request, use SIM 67-27
When, however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the color balance is set to register the service color balance target data by use of the
to the same balance as the factory color balance target set with printed adjustment pattern.
SIM 67-26.
• Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for printing the
the printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) adjustment pattern by SIM 67-25.
(SIM 46-74/67-24). When, therefore, the service color balance
target is changed, this target is also changed accordingly.
(Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and the
purpose of registration)
This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is
customized with SIM 67-25.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 37

By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised. This procedure must not be executed when the copy color balance
It is recommended to keep the printed adjustment pattern created was adjusted with SIM 67-25 to a unique color balance requested
with SIM 67-25. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the by the user and it was registered as the service color balance tar-
same color balance target to another machine. get with SIM 67-27.
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data. Do When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM 67-26,
not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it from be sure to execute this procedure.
discoloration and dirt. 1) Enter the SIM 67-28 mode.
The service color balance target data is basically registered imme- 2) Press [EXECUTE] key and then [YES] key.
diately after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25. The service color balance target and the color balance target
If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color bal- for the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color
ance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25, the color balance of the balance as the factory color balance target.
adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color
balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time. 14-B Copy/Printer color balance and density
Never use such a pattern for the adjustment.
adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (Basic
The correctness of the service color balance target data can be
adjustment)
judged as follows.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
When result of the color balance adjustment (Auto) with selecting
the service color balance target in SIM 46-74/67-24 is unsatisfac- • When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
tory or abnormal. replaced.
In that case, the registered service target data for the color balance • When the CCD unit is replaced.
adjustment (Auto) may be improper. • When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance • When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance • U2 trouble has occurred.
target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 67-27. • When the SCN-MFP control PWB is replaced.
The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was • When the EEPROM on the SCN-MFP scanner PWB is replaced.
made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with
a. General
SIM 67-25. This procedure may have been executed erroneously.
SIM46-74 is used to perform the automatic copy color balance and
a. Setting procedure
density adjustment (SIM46-24) and the automatic printer color bal-
(Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as ance and density adjustment (SIM67-24) continuously.
the service color balance target)
Since it is desirable to perform the copy color balance adjustment
1) Use SIM 67-25 (Printer color balance adjustment (manual (automatic adjustment) before the automatic printer color balance
adjustment) mode) to print color patch image (adjustment pat- and density adjustment, it is advisable to perform the adjustment in
tern). this mode.
In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for printing This mode is also advisable to effectively perform both of the auto-
the adjustment pattern by SIM 67-25. matic copy color balance and density adjustment (SIM46-24) and
If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment the automatic printer color balance and density adjustment (SIM67-
is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an 24). It saves considerable time when compared with performing
optional color balance is requested by the user, make an each of the auto copy/printer color balance and the density adjust-
adjustment. ment individually.
2) Enter the SIM 67-27 mode. The color balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is used to
3) Press [SETUP] key. adjust the copy density of each of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and
4) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly Black automatically.
adjusted and printed in the printer color balance adjustment When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments
(Manual adjustment) (SIM 67-25) on the document table. of all the copy/printer modes are revised.
A color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed by another
machine can be used.
Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side.
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image
(adjustment pattern).
This procedure must not be executed when the copy color bal-
ance (manual) was adjusted with SIM 67-25 to a unique color
balance requested by the user and it was registered as the
service color balance target with SIM 67-27.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read.
6) The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color (K, C,
M and Y) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys.
Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B - P
(MAX). If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is
judged as abnormal.
7) Press [OK] key.
The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjust-
ment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service tar-
get.
(Procedures to set the service color balance target and the
color balance target for the user color balance adjustment to
the same color balance as the factory color balance target)

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 38

b. Adjustment procedures
(Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman)

Copy/printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment)

(SIM46-74) procedure flowchart

Start

Copy color balance and density/Printer color balance and density adjustment
(automatic density). (SIM46-74)

(Copy color balance and density adjustment (automatic adjustment))

Enter the SIM46-74 mode, and select A4 (11" x 8.5") paper. (Automatic selection)

Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed.)

Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the FACTORY target or the
SERVICE target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed to
print the check pattern.) (*1)

Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4)

(Printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment))

Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed.)

Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the FACTORY target or the
SERVICE target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed to
print the check pattern.) (*1) Automatic adjustment color balance target change

Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4) Change the color balance and density target. (SIM63-11)

Press [OK] key. (The initial setting of the halftone image correction is automatically
performed.) (*2) NO

Press [EXECUTE] key. (Execute the halftone image correction.)

Though the FACTORY color balance

Cancel SIM46-74. and density target (available in 3
kinds) is changed, satisfactory color
balance and density are not obtained
Check the copy color balance and density adjustment result. (SIM63-11), or the SERVICE target is
selected.
Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to make a copy in the Text
/Printed Photo mode, and check the copy color balance and density.

Use SIM46-21 to print the color balance check pattern, and check the patch color YES
balance and density in the process gray. (If the color balance is slightly shifted to
Magenta, it is properly adjusted.)

Copy color balance and density adjustment (Manual adjustment).

(SIM46-21/44-21) (*3)
Are the color balance and density NO
at the specified level?

YES
Printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic
adjustment). (SIM67-24)

End
Automatic color balance target change

Change the color balance and density target.

(SIM67-26)
*1: NO
When the color balance and density are customized
and registered as the SERVICE target, select the
SERVICE target.
*2:
If the initial setting of the halftone image correction is Though the FACTORY color balance
not properly adjusted, satisfactory color balance and and density target (available in 3
kinds) is changed, satisfactory color
density cannot be obtained. In this case, check the print
balance and density are not obtained
engine for any problems. (SIM67-26), or the SERVICE target is
*3: selected.
If satisfactory color balance and density are not
obtained with copy color balance and density
adjustment (Manual adjustment) (SIM46-21/44-21),
check the print engine for any problems.
YES
*4:
If there is any streak or unclear copy on the printed
check pattern, check the print engine for any problems. Printer color balance and density adjustment
(Manual adjustment). (SIM67-25)

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 39

1) Enter the SIM46-74 mode. The printer color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. out. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically
selected.)
The copy color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
6) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.
procedure 5) on the document table.
3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
procedure 2) on the document table.
procedure 2) on the document table. Place the color patch
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the image so that the fine lines are on the left side. At that time,
procedure 2) on the document table. Place the color patch
place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image
image so that the fine lines are on the left side. At that time,
(adjustment pattern).
place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image
(adjustment pattern).

PRINTER CALIBRATION

7) Select [FACTORY] target, and press [EXECUTE] key.

When the color balance is customized with the manual color
4) Select [FACTORY] target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
balance adjustment (SIM 67-25) according to the user's
When the color balance is customized by the manual color bal-
request and the color balance is registered as the service tar-
ance adjustment (SIM 46-21) according to the user's request, get with SIM 67-27, if the color balance is adjusted to that color
and the color balance is registered with SIM63-7 as the service
balance, select the [SERVICE] target.
target, if the color balance is required to be adjusted, select the
The printer color balance adjustment (step 1) is automatically
[SERVICE] target.
performed and the color balance check patch image is printed
The copy color balance adjustment is automatically executed
out. If there is any streak or unclear print on the printed check
and prints the color balance check patch image. pattern, check the print engine for any problems.
If there is any streak or unclear print on the printed check pat-
tern, check the print engine for any problems.

PRINTER CALIBRATION

Low density High density

Low High ;
density density
Y /

M %

C $M
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3
Bk
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q 1) The max. density section is not blurred.

2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C and BK is copied.

1) The max. density section is not blurred.
3) Patch for each of Y, M, C, BK
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C, and BK is very slightly copied.
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
The patch density is changed gradually.
3) Patch for each of Y, M, C, BK
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
The patch density is changed gradually.
8) The initial setting menu of the halftone image correction is dis-
played.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Press [OK] key. The initial setting of the halftone image correc-
tion is performed.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 40

9) Wait until [EXECUTE] key is displayed. When it is displayed,
press it. 14-C Copy quality adjustment (Basic adjustment)
The halftone image correction is performed. This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
10) When "COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE" is displayed, the • When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
adjustment operation is completed. Cancel the simulation. replaced.
11) Check the copy color balance and density. • The CCD unit has been replaced.
(Refer to the item of the copy color balance and density • When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
check.) • When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained • U2 trouble has occurred.
from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in • When the SCN-MFP control PWB is replaced.
procedure 4), change the factory color balance target with SIM • When the EEPROM on the SCN-MFP control PWB is replaced.
63-11 and repeat the procedures from 1).
If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above proce- 14-C (1)
dure, perform the manual color balance adjustment.
Copy color balance and density adjustment
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to exe-
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
(Automatic adjustment)
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment. a. General
12) Check the printer color balance and density. The color balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is used to
adjust the copy density of each of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and
(Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density
Black automatically. When this adjustment is executed, the color
check.)
balance adjustments of all the copy modes are revised.
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained
from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in There are following two modes in the auto color balance adjust-
ment.
procedure 7), change the factory color balance target with SIM
1) Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 46-24
67-26 and repeat the procedures from 1). If a satisfactory
is used.)
result is not obtained with the above procedure, perform the
manual color balance adjustment. Also when the service tar- 2) Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program
get is selected in procedure 7) to execute the automatic adjust- mode is used.) (The color balance target is the service target.)
ment and a satisfactory result is not obtained, perform the The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to
manual color balance adjustment. reduce the number of service calls.
If the color balance or density is not in the satisfactory level If the copy color balance is lost for some reason, the user can
even after execution of the automatic and manual adjustments, use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance.
there may be another cause. When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
Troubleshoot the cause, repair or perform necessary works, machine condition is greatly changed, this function does not
and repeat the adjustment from the beginning. work effectively.
If the machine condition is dramatically changed, a fatal prob-
lem occurs, or the normal color targets cannot be obtained,
service must recalibrate the machine to specification.
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
understood.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 41

b. Adjustment procedure
(Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman)

Copy color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment)

(SIM46-24) procedure flowchart

Start

Copy color balance and density adjustment

(automatic density).

Enter the SIM46-24 mode, and select A4 (11" x 8.5") paper.

(Automatic selection)

Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed.)

Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the

FACTORY target or the SERVICE target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is
automatically performed to print the check pattern.) (*1)

Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4)

Press [OK] key, and the initial setting of the halftone image correction
is automatically performed. (*3) Automatic color balance target change

Cancel SIM46-24 Change the color balance and

density target. (SIM63-11)

Check the color balance and density adjustment result. NO

Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to make a

copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check the copy color bal- Though the
ance and density. FACTORY color
balance and density
target (available in 3 kinds)
Use SIM46-21 to print the color balance check pattern, and check the is changed, satisfactory color
patch color balance and density in the process gray. (If the color bal- balance and density are not
ance is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is properly adjusted.) obtained (SIM63-11),
or the SERVICE
target is selected.

Are the color balance and den- NO YES

sity at the satisfactory level?

Manual copy color balance and density

YES adjustment.
(SIM46-21/44-21).(*2)
Check that the initial setting of the halftone image correction was properly
performed. (*3) *1:
When the copy color balance and density are
customized and registered as the SERVICE
Execute the initial setting of the halftone image correction. target, select the SERVICE target.
(SIM44-21) *2:
If satisfactory color balance and density are
not obtained with manual copy color balance
Execute the halftone image correction. (SIM44-26) and density adjustment (SIM46-21/44-21),
check the print engine for any problems.
Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) *3:
to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check If the initial setting of the halftone image
the color balance and density. correction is not properly made, satisfactory
color balance and density cannot be
obtained. In this case, check the print engine
for any problems.
NO *4:
Are the color balance and den-
If there is any streak or unclear copy on the
sity at the satisfactory level?
printed check pattern, check the print engine
for any problems.
YES

End

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 42

1) Enter the SIM 46-24 mode. After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the halftone image
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER-
automatically selected.) ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE PROCON." is dis-
played.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS
3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in
procedure 2) on the document table. MODE" is displayed. Do not cancel the simulation until
"PLEASE QUIT THIS MODE" is displayed.
Place the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper
6) Check the color balance and density. (Refer to the item of the
on the document table so that the thin lines on the paper are
copy color balance and density check.)
on the left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed
color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper. 7) Use SIM44-26 to execute the halftone image correction. (Forc-
ible execution)
Press [EXECUTE] key.
After completion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled.
8) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-
0326FC11) in the Text/Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy
color balance and density. (Refer to the item of the copy color
balance and density check.)
If the copy color balance and density are not satisfactory, per-
form the following procedures.
9) Execute the initial setting of the halftone image correction.
(SIM 44-21)
10) Execute the halftone image correction. (Forcible execution)
(SIM44-26)
11) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-
0326FC11) in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check
the copy color balance/density. (Refer to the item of the copy
color balance and density check.)
Though the above procedures 9) - 11) are performed, the copy
color balance and density are not in the specified range, there
may be another cause.
Troubleshoot the cause, repair or perform necessary works,
4) Select [FACTORY] target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
and repeat the adjustment from the beginning.
When the color balance is customized with the manual color
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained
balance adjustment (SIM 46-21) according to the user's
from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in
request and the color balance is registered as the service tar-
procedure 4), change the factory color balance target with SIM
get with SIM 63-7, if the color balance is adjusted to that color
63-11 and repeat the procedures from 1).
balance, select the service target.
If a satisfactory result on the color balance and the density is
The copy color balance adjustment is automatically executed
not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the man-
to print the color balance check patch image. Wait until the
ual adjustment (SIM 46-21).
operation panel shown in procedure 5) is displayed.
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 7) to exe-
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment.
If the color balance or density is not in the satisfactory level
even after execution of the automatic and manual adjustments,
there may be another cause.
Troubleshoot the cause, repair or perform necessary works,
˯ຜࡇ ᭗ຜࡇ
and repeat the adjustment from the beginning.
;
14-C (2)
/ Copy color balance and density adjustment
(Manual adjustment)
%
a. General
$M The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3
adjust the copy density of CMYK. This is used at the following situ-
ation.
When the result of auto adjustment described above is not existing
within the range of reference. When a fine adjustment is required.
When there is request from the user for changing (customizing) the
color balance.
This manual adjustment is executed only for the color patch which
could not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment.
5) Press [OK] key on the operation panel. If the color balance is improper, execute the automatic color bal-
According to data of this adjustment, the initial setting of the ance adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better
halftone image correction is performed. efficiency.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 43

b. Adjustment procedure

Copy color balance and density adjustment (Manual adjustment) procedure

flowchart (SIM46-21)

Start

Copy color balance and density adjustment

(Manual adjustment). (*1)
Enter the SIM46-21 mode, and select A4 (11" x 8.5") paper.
(Automatic selection)

Press [EXECUTE] key.

(The adjustment check pattern is printed.)

Refer to the printed adjustment check pattern, and select a

target adjustment color with the color keys (C, M, Y, K).

Select a target adjustment level with the scroll key.

Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.

Press [EXECUTE] key.

(The adjustment check pattern is printed.)

Check the patch color balance and density in the process

gray of the color balance check pattern. (If the gray color is
slightly shifted to Magenta, the color balance is properly
adjusted.)

Are the color balance NO

and density at the sati-
sfactory level?

YES
Cancel the SIM46-21 mode.

Perform the initial setting of the halftone image correction.

(SIM44-21)

Check the copy color balance and density adjustment result with the
test chart. (*1)
Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11)
to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check
the color balance and density.

Are the color balance NO

and density at the sati-
sfactory level?

YES

Check to confirm that the initial setting of the halftone image correction is
properly set. (*2)

Perform the initial setting of the halftone image correction.

(SIM44-21)

Perform the halftone image correction. (SIM44-26)

Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11)

to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check
the color balance and density.
*1:
If satisfactory color balance and density are not
obtained with the adjustment, check the print
NO Are the color balance engine for any problems.
and density at the sati- *2:
sfactory level? If the initial setting of the halftone image
correction is not properly adjusted, satisfactory
YES color balance and density cannot be obtained. In
this case, check the print engine for any problems.
Set the SERVICE target for the automatic copy color
balance adjustment. (SIM63-7)

End

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 44

1) Enter the SIM46-21 mode. 6) Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is 0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) and a user's document accord-
automatically selected.) ing to necessity in the normal copy mode, the text/Printed
Photo mode (Manual) to check the adjustment result.
The color balance adjustment pattern is printed.
(Refer to the item of the copy color balance/density check.)
3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the color
balance is satisfactory. 7) Execute SIM 44-21. (Halftone image correction)
If not, execute the following procedures. It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com-
pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled.

This procedure is to save the copy color balance

adjustment data as the reference data for the halftone correc-
tion.
Low High Immediately after execution of Color balance adjustment
density density (Manual) with SIM 46-21, be sure to execute this procedure.
;
When Color balance adjustment (Auto) is executed with SIM
46-24, this procedure is automatically executed.
/
8) Use SIM 44-26 to execute the halftone image correction.
% (Forcible execution) Press [EXECUTE] key.
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled.
$M 9) Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-
0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11) and a user's document accord-
CMY
blend ing to necessity in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) and
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3 check the adjustment result again. (Refer to the item of the
copy color balance/density check.)
1) The max. density section is not blurred. If the copy color balance and density are not adjusted to the
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C, and BK is very slightly copied. specified level, there may be another cause.
Troubleshoot the cause, and repair or perform proper treat-
ments, and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment
3) Patch for each of Y, M, C, BK
from the beginning.
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
The patch density is changed gradually.

If the color balance is customized, use SIM 63-7 to

register the color balance as the service target.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
required.
not be reversed.
If the customized color balance is registered as the service tar-
The density level of each color must be almost at the same
get, the automatic color balance adjustment can be made in
level.
the next color balance adjustment.
Patch B may not be copied.
Patch A must not be copied.
When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a
request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
color balance stated above.
If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY
mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the
adjustment is proper. If the color balance of the adjustment
pattern printed in this mode is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is
converted into the natural gray color balance by the color cor-
rection table in an actual copy mode. (When the color balance
target is DEF 1.)
4) Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
The adjustment value is set in the range of (1 - 999). When
SIM 46-24 is used to adjust the automatic color balance and
density, all the set values of this simulation are set to 500.
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value. Repeat
procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satisfied.
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
adjustment values of A - Q to a same level collectively.
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
way of adjustment.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 45

14-D Copy / Image send / FAX image quality
adjustment (Individual adjustment)
a. General
This adjustment is used to execute the fine adjustment in each mode only when a satisfactory image quality is not obtained by the basic adjust-
ments
ADJ 14B and ADJ 14C or there is a request from the user. Normally there is no need to execute this adjustment.
In this adjustment, the adjustment result may be applied to the image send mode and the FAX mode as well as the copy mode.
This must be well understood for execution of the adjustment.

Copy Mode Image Scan Mode

Simulation No. and descriptions of the adjustment Color Monochrome Color Monochrome
Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual FAX Printer
46-01 Color copy density adjustment (for each color
copy mode) (separately for the low density
  — — — — — — — —
area and the high-density area) (No need to
adjust normally)
46-02 Monochrome copy density adjustment (for
each monochrome copy mode) (separately for
— —   — — — — — —
the low-density area and the high-density
area) (No need to adjust normally)
46-04 Color image send mode image density
adjustment (for each mode) (No need to — — — —   — — — —
adjust normally)
46-05 Monochrome image send mode image
density adjustment (for each mode) (No need — — — — — —   — —
to adjust normally)
46-08 Image send mode RGB color balance
adjustment (separately for the low-density
— — — —   — — — —
area and the high-density area) (No need to
adjust normally)
46-09 RSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density
         —
adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
46-10 Color copy color balance, gamma adjustment
(for each color copy mode) (No need to adjust   — — — — — — — —
normally)
46-16 Monochrome copy density, gamma
— —   — — — — — —
adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
46-19 Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX)
mode document density scanning operation
— —  — — —  —  —
(exposure operation) conditions setting
(Normally no need to set)
46-21 Copy color balance and density adjustment
    — — — — — —
(Manual adjustment)
46-23 Copy high density image density reproduction
setting (Normally unnecessary to the setting     — — — — — —
change)
46-24 Copy color balance and density adjustment
    — — — — — —
(Automatic adjustment)
46-25 Copy color balance adjustment (Single color
—  — — — — — — — —
copy mode) (No need to adjust normally)
46-26 Single color copy mode color balance default
—  — — — — — — — —
setting
46-27 Color copy, text, line image reproduction
adjustment (edge gamma, density
  — — — — — — — —
adjustment) (Text, Map mode) (No need to
adjust normally)
46-30 Copy mode sub scanning direction resolution
  — — — — — — — —
setting
46-32 Document low density image density
reproduction adjustment in the automatic
monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode (No — —  — — —  —  —
need to adjust normally) (Background density
adjustment in the scanning section)
46-36 2-color (red, black) copy mode fine color
—  — — — — — — — —
adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
46-37 Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color
document reproduction adjustment (No need — —   — —    
to adjust normally)
46-38 Color copy mode dark area gradation (black
component quantity) adjustment (No need to   — — — — — — — —
adjust normally)
46-39 FAX send image sharpness adjustment — — — — — — — —  —
46-40 FAX send image density adjustment
— — — — — — — —  —
(Collective adjustment of all the modes)

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 46

 Copy Mode Image Scan Mode
Simulation No. and descriptions of the adjustment Color Monochrome Color Monochrome
Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual FAX Printer
46-41 FAX send image density adjustment (Normal
— — — — — — — —  —
text mode)
46-42 FAX send image density adjustment (Fine text
— — — — — — — —  —
mode)
46-43 FAX send image density adjustment (Super
— — — — — — — —  —
fine mode)
46-44 FAX send image density adjustment (Ultra
— — — — — — — —  —
fine mode)
46-45 FAX send image density adjustment (600dpi
— — — — — — — —  —
mode)
46-46 FAX send image density adjustment
— — — — — — — —  —
(RGB_RIP)
46-47 Copy image, image send image, FAX send
image (JPEG) compression ratio setting          
(Normally unnecessary to the setting change)
46-48 Resolution setting for each monochrome copy
— —   — — — — — —
mode (No need to adjust normally)
46-51 Gamma manual adjustment for the copy
mode heavy paper and the image process     — — — — — —
mode (dither) (No need to adjust normally)
46-52 Gamma default setting for the copy mode
heavy paper and the image process mode     — — — — — 
(dither)
46-54 Copy gamma, color balance adjustment for
each dither (Automatic adjustment) (No need     — — — — — 
to adjust normally)
46-55 Dropout color setting — — — — — — —  — —
46-58 Pseudo resolution UP function setting     — — — — — —
46-60 Color (Copy/Scan) mode sharpness
        — 
adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
46-61 Area separation recognition level adjustment
         —
(No need to adjust normally)
46-62 ACS, area separation, background image
process, automatic exposure mode operation
        — —
conditions setting (Normally unnecessary to
the setting change)
46-63 Copy/Scan low density image density
adjustment (for each mode) (No need to   — —   — — — —
adjust normally)
46-65 Color correction table setting (No need to
  — — — — — — — —
adjust normally)
46-66 Watermark adjustment     — — — — — 
46-68 Scan mode auto resolution judgement
— — — —  —  — — —
adjustment
46-74 Printer/Copy color balance and density
adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (Basic     — — — — — 
adjustment)
46-90 High-compression PDF image process
operation setting (Normally unnecessary to — — — —   — — — —
the setting change)
46-91 Black text emphasis fine adjustment — — — —   — — — —

14-D (1) Display/Item Content

Setting
Default
Color copy density adjustment (for each range
A AUTO Auto LOW 1 - 99 50
color copy mode) (separately for the low
HIGH 1 - 99 50
density area and the high-density area) B TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
(No need to adjust normally) HIGH 1 - 99 50
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: PHOTO HIGH 1 - 99 50
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
• When there is necessity to change the copy density of the low
HIGH 1 - 99 50
density and high density part at each copy density individually.
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
• When there is necessity to change the density gradient of the
HIGH 1 - 99 50
• When there is necessity to change all copy density by each the F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
copy mode individually. HIGH 1 - 99 50
• When there is request from the user. G MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
1) Enter the SIM 46-1 mode. HIGH 1 - 99 50
H LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
HIGH 1 - 99 50

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 47

 Setting • When there is necessity to change all copy density by each the
Display/Item Content Default copy mode individually.
range
I TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50 • When there is request from the user.
(COPY TO (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50 1) Enter the SIM 46-2 mode.
COPY)
J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
PHOTO (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO Setting
Display/Item Content Default
COPY) range
K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50 HIGH 1 - 99 50
COPY) B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50
L TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50 HIGH 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 C AUTO3 Auto 3 LOW 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) HIGH 1 - 99 50
M TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 D TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
PHOTO (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 HIGH 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE enhancement) E TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
N TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
F TEXT/PHOTO Text/photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
G PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
O PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) H PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
P PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 HIGH 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 I MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) HIGH 1 - 99 50
Q MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50 J AUTO1 Auto1 LOW 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 (COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) K AUTO2 Auto2 LOW 1 - 99 50
R LIGHT Light LOW 1 - 99 50 (COPY TO COPY) (copy to copy) HIGH 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 L AUTO3 Auto3 LOW 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) (COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
S SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50
M TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 (COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
T SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50
N TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50 PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
COPY)
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy document)
U TWO COLOR Two-color LOW 1 - 99 50
O PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 (COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
V TWO COLOR Two-color LOW 1 - 99 50
P LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
COPY)

3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select
"LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjust- "LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjust-
ing the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH" ing the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH"
mode and change the adjustment value. mode and change the adjustment value.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy
density is decreased. density is decreased.
4) Make a copy and check the adjustment result. 4) Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy
mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result. mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the nor- Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the nor-
mal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and check- mal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and check-
ing the copy until a satisfactory result is obtained. ing the copy until a satisfactory result is obtained.

14-D (2) 14-D (3)

Monochrome copy density adjustment (for Color copy color balance, gamma
each monochrome copy mode) (separately adjustment (for each color copy mode) (No
for the low-density area and the high- need to adjust normally)
density area) (No need to adjust normally) This adjustment is used to execute the color balance adjustment
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. for each density level in each color copy mode.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
• When there is necessity to change the copy density of the low • When there is necessity to change the color balance and gamma
density and high density part at each copy density individually. by each the copy mode individually.
• When there is necessity to change the density gradient of the • When there is request from the user.
copy by each the copy mode individually. 1) Enter the SIM 46-10 mode.
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the mode key.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 48

3) Select a color to change the adjustment value with the color Density level Adjustment
key. Item/Display Default
(Point) Value range
4) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll N POINT14 Point14 1 - 999 500
key. O POINT15 Point15 1 - 999 500
P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
Item/Display
Density level Adjustment
Default Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
(Point) value range
A POINT1 Point1 1 - 999 500 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
B POINT2 Point2 1 - 999 500 When the adjustment value is increased, the density is
C POINT3 Point3 1 - 999 500 increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the den-
D POINT4 Point4 1 - 999 500 sity is decreased.
E POINT5 Point5 1 - 999 500 When the arrow key is pressed, the densities are collectively
F POINT6 Point6 1 - 999 500 adjusted.
G POINT7 Point7 1 - 999 500
That is, all the density levels (points) from the low density point
H POINT8 Point8 1 - 999 500
to the high density point can be adjusted collectively.
I POINT9 Point9 1 - 999 500
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
J POINT10 Point10 1 - 999 500
printed out.
K POINT11 Point11 1 - 999 500
L POINT12 Point12 1 - 999 500 The density at each density level (point) can be checked by
M POINT13 Point13 1 - 999 500 referring to this printed adjustment pattern. However, it is more
N POINT14 Point14 1 - 999 500 practical to make a copy and check it.
O POINT15 Point15 1 - 999 500 4) Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
P POINT16 Point16 1 - 999 500 Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500 mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the nor-
mal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and check-
When the adjustment value is increased, the density is
ing the copy until a satisfactory result is obtained.
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the den-
sity is decreased.
When the arrow key is pressed, the color densities selected
14-D (5)
with the color keys are collectively adjusted. Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX)
That is, all the density levels (points) from the low density point mode document density scanning
to the high density point can be adjusted collectively. operation (exposure operation) conditions
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is setting (Normally no need to set)
printed out. Use for setting the condition of read operation (Exposure) for docu-
This adjustment pattern can be used to check the color bal- ment density in monochrome auto copy mode.
ance and the density for each density level (point). When a copy with correct density is not obtained by type of docu-
6) Make a copy and check the adjustment result. ment, change the setting.
This setting is required in the following cases.
Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy
mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result. • When a proper density copy is not obtained in the monochrome
automatic copy mode.
Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the nor-
mal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and check- • When a document with images near its lead edge is copied.
ing the copy until a satisfactory result is obtained. • When a document with colored background is copied.
1) Enter the SIM 46-19 mode.
14-D (4) 2) Set REALTIME, STOP or PRE-SCAN to adjustment item AE
Monochrome copy density, gamma STOP COPY. For contents of each setting item, refer to below.
adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
Display/
This adjustment is used to execute the density adjustment for each Content Set value Default
Item
density level.
AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1 Japan:MODE1
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: Overseas:MODE2
MODE2
• When there is request from the user. MODE3
1) Enter the SIM 46-16 mode. AE_STOP_ Auto B/W exposure REALTIME PRESCAN
2) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll COPY Stop (for copy) STOP
key. PRESCAN
AE_STOP_ Auto B/W exposure ON ON
Density level Adjustment FAX Stop (for FAX) OFF
Item/Display Default
(Point) Value range AE_STOP_ Auto B/W exposure REALTIME STOP
A POINT1 Point1 1 - 999 500 SCAN Stop (for scanner) STOP
B POINT2 Point2 1 - 999 500 PRESCAN
C POINT3 Point3 1 - 999 500 AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
D POINT4 Point4 1 - 999 500 setting NORMAL
E POINT5 Point5 1 - 999 500 SHARP
F POINT6 Point6 1 - 999 500 AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL FULL
G POINT7 Point7 1 - 999 500
H POINT8 Point8 1 - 999 500
I POINT9 Point9 1 - 999 500
J POINT10 Pint10 1 - 999 500 MODE1: High gamma (Improves the image contrast)
K POINT11 Point11 1 - 999 500
MODE2: Normal gamma
L POINT12 Point12 1 - 999 500
M POINT13 Point13 1 - 999 500

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 49

STOP: Reads the density of 3 - 7 mm area from leading edge of
document, decides the output image density according to the den-
sity of that part. (The output image density is constant at whole Document table/DSPF mode
area.)
3 to 7mm
REALTIME: Reads the density of width of the document one by
one, decides the output image density according to the density of
each part of the document. (The output image density may be not
constant at whole area.)
PRESCAN: Once the densities on the document surface are
scanned, the output image density is determined according to the
average of the scanned densities. (The output image density is AE WIDTH = FULL
even for all the surface.)
In addition, the original type is automatically determined and the
processing is carried out in an optimum original mode.
AE WIDTH FULL: Document density reading area in monochrome
auto mode is 3 - 7mm (leading edge of document) x Document
width. No relationship to PRESCAN MODE
AE WIDTH PART: Document density reading area in monochrome Document table mode
auto mode is 3 - 7mm (leading edge of document) x 100 mm
(width). No relationship to PRESCAN MODE
3 to 7mm
Operation in monochrome auto copy mode:
When the density of the document of the read area is light, output
image density is increased by control. When the density of the doc-
100mm
ument of the read area is dark, output image density is decreased
by control.

AE WIDTH = PART

DSPF mode

3 to 7mm

100mm AE WIDTH = PART

Document density detection area

14-D (6)
Document low density image density
reproduction adjustment in the automatic
monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode
(No need to adjust normally) (Background
density adjustment in the scanning section)
Use for the reproducibility adjustment of document background
density in monochrome auto copy mode.
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
• When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density
image of the document.
• When there is request from the user.
1) Enter the SIM 46-32 mode.
2) Select the adjustment mode with the scroll key.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 50

3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. Set
Display/Item Content Default
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the value
background and the low density image is increased. When the I COLOR COPY: Copy document, 1-9 5
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back- TEXT (COPY TO COPY) Text (Color copy)
ground and the low density image is decreased. J COLOR COPY: Copy document, 1-9 5
PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo
DSPF
(COPY TO COPY) (Color copy)
K COLOR PUSH: Text print 1-9 5
Display/Item Content Set Value Default
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (Color PUSH)
A COPY: OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
L COLOR PUSH: Text 1-9 5
B COPY: DSPF Copy mode 1 - 250 196
TEXT (Color PUSH)
(SIDE1) (for DSPF: Side-1)
M COLOR PUSH: Printed photo 1-9 5
C COPY: DSPF Copy mode 1 - 250 196
PRINTED PHOTO (Color PUSH)
(SIDE2) (for DSPF: Side-2)
N COLOR PUSH: Photograph 1-9 5
D SCAN: OC Scanner mode 1 - 250 196
PHOTOGRAPH (Color PUSH)
(for OC)
O COLOR PUSH: Text/Photograph 1-9 5
E SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode 1 - 250 196
TEXT/PHOTO (Color PUSH)
(SIDE1) (for DSPF: Side-1)
P COLOR PUSH: Map 1-9 5
F SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode 1 - 250 196
MAP (Color PUSH)
(SIDE2) (for DSPF: Side-2)
G FAX: OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
H FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196 When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
(SIDE1) (for DSPF: Side-1)
background and the low density image is increased. When the
I FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back-
(SIDE2) (for DSPF: Side-2)
ground and the low density image is decreased.
RSPF
14-D (8)
Display/Item Content Set value Default
Color copy, text, line image reproduction
A COPY: OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
B COPY: RSPF Copy mode 1 - 250 196
adjustment (edge gamma, density
(for RSPF) adjustment) (Text, Map mode)
C SCAN: OC Scanner mode 1 - 250 196 (No need to adjust normally)
(for OC)
Adjustment 1
D SCAN: RSPF Scanner mode 1 - 250 196
(for RSPF) By changing Text/Printed Photo, Text/Photograph, automatic copy
E FAX: OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 mode Text, line image edge section gamma and the density, the
F FAX: RSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196 reproducibility of text and line profile can be varied optionally.
(for RSPF) With this adjustment, the density and the thickness of fine text and
lines can be varied.
14-D (7) Check the result of this adjustment by text/printed photo copy mode
Copy/Scan low density image density (manual).
adjustment (for each mode) (No need to This adjustment is required in the following cases.
adjust normally) • When the reproducibility of text and line copy image is to be
changed.
This adjustment is used to adjust the image density in the low den-
sity area in the copy/scanner mode. • When there is request from the user.
This adjustment is required in the following cases. 1) Enter the SIM 46-27 mode.
• When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the 2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density
image of the document. Set
Display/Item Content Default
value
• When there is request from the user.
A BLACK TEXT Black character edge 1 - 99 50
1) Enter the SIM 46-63 mode. (SLOPE) gamma skew adjustment
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. B BLACK TEXT Black character edge density 1 - 99 50
(INTERCEPT) adjustment
Set C COLOR TEXT Color character edge 1 - 99 50
Display/Item Content Default
value (SLOPE) gamma skew adjustment
A COLOR COPY: Text print 1-9 3 D COLOR TEXT Color character edge density 1 - 99 50
TEXT / PRINTED PHOTO (Color copy) (INTERCEPT) adjustment
B COLOR COPY: Text 1-9 3 E ED TEXT Text/Map mode gamma 1 - 99 50
TEXT (Color copy) (SLOPE) skew adjustment (Text/Map
C COLOR COPY: Printed Photo 1-9 5 mode)
PRINTED PHOTO (Color copy) F ED TEXT Text/Map mode density 1 - 99 50
D COLOR COPY: Photograph 1-9 5 (INTERCEPT) adjustment (Text/Map mode)
PHOTOGRAPH (Color copy)
E COLOR COPY: Text/Photograph 1-9 3 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
TEXT/PHOTO (Color copy) When the adjustment values of items A and C are changed,
F COLOR COPY: Map 1-9 5 the gamma at the character edge and the line edge section is
MAP (Color copy) changed.
G COLOR COPY: Light document 1-9 6 When the adjustment value is increased, the image contrast of
LIGHT (Color copy)
character edge and line edge is increased. When the adjust-
H COLOR COPY: Copy document, 1-9 5
ment value is decreased, the image contrast of character and
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text print
line edge is decreased.
(COPY TO COPY) (Color copy)

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 51

 When the adjustment value of the item B and D are increased,
Set
the image density at the character edge and the line edge sec- Display/Item Content Default
value
tion is increased, and vice versa.
A R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 127
4) Press [OK] key. B G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 814
5) Make a copy in color text/printed photo copy mode (manual), C R-Ratio RIP Print gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 299
check the copy. D G-Ratio RIP Print gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 587
When checking, use a copy of the document with a thin char-
acter and line image. Gray making setting (B)
B-Ratio
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-27 (1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio)
mode and change the adjustment value. B-Ratio RIP
Print gray making setting (B)
(1000-R-Ratio RIP - G-Ratio RIP)
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
obtained. 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
Adjustment 2 When the adjustment value of adjustment item A is increased,
This adjustment is used to change the gamma and the density in copy density of red image is decreased. When the adjustment
the Text/Map copy mode. value is decreased, copy density of red image is increased.
This adjustment is required in the following cases. When the adjustment value of adjustment item B is increased,
• To change the contrast and the density of the Text/Map copy copy density of red image is increased. When the adjustment
mode images. value is decreased, copy density of red image is decreased.
• When there is request from the user. 4) Press [OK] key.
1) Enter the SIM 46-27 mode. 5) Make a copy in monochrome text/printed photo copy mode
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. (manual), check the copy.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-37
Set mode and change the adjustment value.
Display/Item Content Default
value
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
A BLACK TEXT Black character edge gamma 1 - 99 50
(SLOPE) skew adjustment obtained.
B BLACK TEXT Black character edge density 1 - 99 50
(INTERCEPT) adjustment 14-D (10)
C COLOR TEXT Color character edge gamma 1 - 99 50 Color copy mode dark area gradation (black
(SLOPE) skew adjustment
component quantity) adjustment (No need
D COLOR TEXT Color character edge density 1 - 99 50
(INTERCEPT) adjustment to adjust normally)
E ED TEXT Text/Map mode gamma skew 1 - 99 50 Use to adjust the black component amount in the color copy mode.
(SLOPE) adjustment (Text/Map mode)
(except character and line image)
F ED TEXT Text/Map mode density 1 - 99 50
(INTERCEPT) adjustment (Text/Map mode) As a result of this adjustment, the gradation of the shade part
changes.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. This adjustment is required in the following cases.
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item E is • When reproduction as solid of black image is required.
changed, the gamma (contrast) is changed.
• To make the black background and the dark area darker
When the adjustment value is increased, the contrast is
• When change of gradation of the shade part is required.
increased, and vice versa.
• When there is request from the user.
When the adjustment value of the item F is increased, the
1) Enter the SIM 46-38 mode.
image density is increased, and vice versa.
2) Select the AUTO MODE or the MANUAL MODE with the mode
4) Press [OK] key.
key.
5) Make a copy in the color Text/Map copy mode (manual), and
check the output print. 3) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, use SIM46-27 to change
the adjustment value.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
obtained.

14-D (9)
Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color
document reproduction adjustment (No
need to adjust normally)
Use to adjust the reproducibility for the red image and the yellow
image when printing color document that included the red/yellow
image in monochrome copy mode.
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
• When there is desire to change reproducibility of yellow/red
image in case of making a color copy of the color document in
monochrome copy mode.
• When there is request from the user.
1) Enter the SIM 46-37 mode.
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 52

 Display/Item (Copy Select Content Defa 14-D (11)
mode) button ult Color (Copy/Scan) mode sharpness
MAN TEXT PRT (-)LUT2 Text print (Manual) NOR
UAL MAL
adjustment
(-)LUT1
NORMAL (No need to adjust normally)
(+)LUT1 Use for sharpness adjustment in copy/scan mode and smoothness
(+)LUT2 (asperity) adjustment of the dark area in copy/scan mode.
TEXT (-)LUT2 Text (Manual) NOR This adjustment is required in the following cases.
(-)LUT1 MAL
• When changing the sharpness of copy/scan image in copy
NORMAL
mode.
(+)LUT1
(obtain crispy image) (decreases moire)
(+)LUT2
PRINTED (-)LUT2 Printed photo (Manual) NOR • When there is desire to improving smoothness in the image
PHOTO (-)LUT1 MAL shade part (for decrease of asperity)
NORMAL • To make the black background and the dark area darker.
(+)LUT1 • To reproduce the gradation change in the dark area.
(+)LUT2
• When there is request from the user.
PHOTO (-)LUT2 Photograph (Manual) NOR
MAL 1) Enter the SIM 46-60 mode.
(-)LUT1
NORMAL 2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
(+)LUT1
Setting
(+)LUT2 Display/Item Content Default
range
TEXT PHOTO (-)LUT2 Text/Photograph NOR
A SCREEN Sharpness (filter) Strong 1 3
(-)LUT1 (Manual) MAL
FILTER adjustment of dot emphasis
NORMAL LEVEL pattern image in auto Soft 2
(+)LUT1 copy mode emphasis
(+)LUT2 Auto 3
MAP (-)LUT2 Map (Manual) NOR B CPY CL Sharpness (filter) SOFT 1 2
(-)LUT1 MAL AUTO adjustment for the CENTER 2
NORMAL FILTER auto copy mode (Text, HIGH 3
(+)LUT1 LEVEL Text/Printed Photo/
(+)LUT2 Text, Text/Printed
CPY TO CPY/ (-)LUT2 Copy document/Text NOR Photo image)
TXT PRT (-)LUT1 printed (Manual) MAL C CPY Sharpness (filter) SOFT 1 2
NORMAL PUSH adjustment for the CENTER 2
AUTO auto push scan mode HIGH 3
(+)LUT1
FILTER (Text, Text/Printed
(+)LUT2
LEVEL Photo/ Text, Text/
CPY TO CPY/ (-)LUT2 Copy document/Text NOR Printed Photo image)
TEXT (-)LUT1 (Manual) MAL
D COLOR Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
NORMAL COPY: setting to C, M, Y ON 1
(+)LUT1 CMY image in color copy
(+)LUT2 mode
CPY TO CPY/ (-)LUT2 Copy document/Printed NOR E COLOR Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
PHOTO (-)LUT1 photo (Manual) MAL COPY: K setting to K image in ON 1
NORMAL color copy mode
(+)LUT1 F SINGLE Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
(+)LUT2 COLOR: setting to C, M, Y ON 1
CMY image in single color
LIGHT (-)LUT2 Pencil NOR
copy mode
ORIGINAL (-)LUT1 MAL
G 2 Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
NORMAL
COLOR setting to C, M, Y ON 1
(+)LUT1 COPY: image in 2-color copy
(+)LUT2 CMY mode
AUTO AUTO (-)LUT2 Auto mode judgment NOR H 2 Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
(-)LUT1 MAL COLOR setting to K image in ON 1
NORMAL COPY: K 2-color copy mode
(+)LUT1 I B/W Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
(+)LUT2 COPY setting in ON 1
monochrome copy
4) Press the black component amount select button. mode
When reproduction as solid of black image is required: Selects J COLOR Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
+ button PUSH: setting to image in ON 1
RGB push scan color mode
When there is desire to darken copy of black image: Selects +
K B/W Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
button PUSH setting to image in ON 1
When a dark color image is reproduced in the black: Selects - push scan
button monochrome mode
5) Make a copy in color copy mode and check the copy. L COLOR Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
PRINT: setting to CMY image ON 1
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-38 CMY in color print mode
mode and change the adjustment value. M COLOR Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is PRINT: K setting to K image in ON 1
obtained. color print mode

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 53

 Setting • If a tone gap occurs on part of high density, set 0 to item A and B
Display/Item Content Default
range The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone
N B/W Soft filter applying OFF 0 1 gap is better.
PRINT setting in ON 1 • In case of more increase of the density on high density part, set 1
monochrome print
to item A and B.
mode
The tone gap may occur in high density part.
3) Input numeric value corresponding to sharpness level (filter
process mode).
• Adjustment item A:
Do not change the setting values of item C, D, E and F. If these val-
When selecting AUTO, filter is selected according to dot pat-
ues are changed, density of the high density part is changed.
tern state automatically and adjusts sharpness.
If these values are changed, be sure to execute the copy color bal-
Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input large
ance density adjustment. (Auto adjustment)
numeric value to decrease moire.
• Adjustment item B, C:
14-D (13)
When selecting AUTO, Select HIGH to obtain clear images.
Copy color balance adjustment (Single
Select SOFT to reduce moire.
color copy mode)
• Adjustment item D- K:
(No need to adjust normally)
When setting ON, smoothness in the image shade part
improves by applying soft filter. (asperity decreases) This adjustment is used to set the color balance and the density in
the single color copy mode to the user's request.
4) Press [OK] key.
The adjustment is made by changing Y, M, C components of each
5) Make a copy and check the copy image.
color.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-60
This adjustment is not required normally, but executed when there
mode and change the adjustment value.
is a request from the user.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
When the default adjustment value is changed, this adjustment is
obtained.
required in the following cases.
• When it is required to change the color balance in the single
14-D (12) color copy mode.
Copy high density image density • When there is request from the user.
reproduction setting a. Adjustment procedure
(Normally unnecessary to the setting 1) Enter the SIM 46-25 mode.
change) 2) Select the color to be adjusted with the scroll key.
If a tone gap occurs on part of high density in copy mode, or if there 3) Select the color (YMC) to be adjusted with the color key.
is necessity to increase the density of the part of high density,
4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
change the setting.
This setting is normally not required. When, however, there are Adjustment Default
case of following, change the setting. Display/Item
range C M Y
• When a tone gap occurs on part of high density. A RED 0 - 255 0 255 200
• When there is a necessity to increase the density of the part of B GREEN 0 - 255 255 0 255
high density. C BLUE 0 - 255 255 150 0
D CYAN 0 - 255 255 0 0
• When there is request from the user.
E MAGENTA 0 - 255 0 255 0
1) Enter the SIM 46-23 mode.
F YELLOW 0 - 255 0 0 255
2) Select the item A, B with the scroll key. G ORANGE 0 - 255 0 150 255
H NAVY 0 - 255 255 200 0
Setting
Display/Item Content Default I LIGHT GREEN 0 - 255 150 0 150
range
J LIGHT BLUE 0 - 255 150 20 0
A CMY 0 CMY engine maximum 0-1 0
K AQUA MARINE 0 - 255 170 0 50
(0: ENABLE density correction mode
1: DISABLE) Enable L PURPLE 0 - 255 128 255 0
1 CMY engine maximum M PINK 0 - 255 0 150 20
density correction mode N YELLOW GREEN 0 - 255 128 0 255
Disable O BEIGE 0 - 255 0 50 170
B K 0 K engine maximum 0-1 1
(0: ENABLE density correction mode 5) Press [OK] key.
1: DISABLE) Enable 6) Make a copy in the single color copy mode and check the
1 K engine maximum copy.
density correction mode If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-25
Disable
mode and change the adjustment value.
C CYAN MAX Scanner target value for CYAN 0 - 999 500
TARGET maximum density correction Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
D MAGENTA Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 obtained.
MAX MAGENTA maximum density
TARGET correction 14-D (14)
E YELLOW Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 DSPF/RSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density
MAX YELLOW maximum density
TARGET correction adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
F BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 This setting is normally not required, however, in the following
TARGET BLACK maximum density cases, make changes to the setting:
correction
• When copy in DSPF/RSPF mode differs from copy in document
table mode.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 54

• When copy density in DSPF/RSPF mode is low or too high. 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
• When the DSPF/RSPF unit is replaced. In case of increase of image density, input large numeric
• When the DSPF/RSPF unit is disassembled. value. Or in case of diluting the image density, input small
numeric value.
• The CCD unit has been replaced.
4) Press [OK] key.
• U2 trouble has occurred.
5) Make a copy in the DSPF/RSPF mode and check the copy.
• When the SCN-MFP control PWB is replaced.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-9
• When the EEPROM on the SCN-MFP control PWB is replaced.
mode and change the adjustment value.
1) Enter the SIM 46-9 mode.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
obtained.
When adjusting density on low density part, select "A”.
When adjusting density on high density part, select "D”. 14-D (15)
DSPF Copy gamma, color balance adjustment for
Setting Def
each dither (Automatic adjustment)
Item/Display Content
range ault This simulation is used to improve the image quality in a certain
A OC COPY SIDEA: Copy mode exposure 1 - 99 47 mode. (Refer to the list in procedure 6.)
LOW adjustment (Low density 1) Enter the SIM46-54 mode.
side)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
B SCAN SIDEA: Scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 47
LOW adjustment (Low density A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.
side) The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed.
C FAX SIDEA: FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 47
3) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the proce-
LOW adjustment (Low density
dure 2) on the document table so that the thin lines on the
side)
printed patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the left side.
D COPY SIDEA: Copy mode exposure 1 - 99 52
HIGH adjustment (High density Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed patch image
side) (adjustment pattern).
E SCAN SIDEA: Scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 52
HIGH adjustment (Low density
side)
F FAX SIDEA: FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 52
HIGH adjustment (High density
side)
A DSPF COPY SIDEB: Copy mode exposure 1 - 99 47
LOW adjustment (Low density
side)
B SCAN SIDEB: Scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 47
LOW adjustment (Low density
side)
C FAX SIDEB: FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 47
LOW adjustment (Low density
side)
D COPY SIDEB: Copy mode exposure 1 - 99 50
HIGH adjustment (High density
side)
E SCAN SIDEB: Scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 50
HIGH adjustment (Low density
side)
F FAX SIDEB: FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 50
HIGH adjustment (High density
side)
G BALANCE Color balance R 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: R
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
H BALANCE Color balance G 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: G The color balance and the density are automatically adjusted.
I BALANCE Color balance B 1 - 99 50 The adjustment pattern is printed out. Check it for any abnor-
SIDEB: B mality.
5) Press [OK] key.
RSPF
The list of the adjustment items (for each dither) is displayed.
Item/Display Content
Setting Def 6) Select an adjustment item (for each dither).
range ault
A COPY: LOW Copy mode exposure adjustment 1 - 99 48 Select item
Content
(Low density side) (Mode/Image)
B SCAN: LOW Scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 48 HEAVY PAPER *1 Adjustment item to improve the color balance in the
adjustment (Low density side) heavy paper mode
C FAX: LOW FAX mode exposure adjustment 1 - 99 48 BLACK EDGE Adjustment item (K) to improve the reproduction of
(Low density side) lines, text density, and thickness
D COPY: HIGH Copy mode exposure adjustment 1 - 99 53 COLOR EDGE Adjustment item (Color) to improve the reproduction
(High density side) of lines, text density, and thickness
E SCAN: HIGH Scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 53 COLOR ED Adjustment item to improve the color balance in the
adjustment (Low density side) text mode and the map mode.
F FAX: HIGH FAX mode exposure adjustment 1 - 99 53
(High density side)

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 55

 Select item
Content 14-D (16)
(Mode/Image)
B/W ED Adjustment item to improve the density and Dropout color adjustment (Normally not
gradation in the monochrome auto mode, text mode, required.)
map mode and light original mode
This adjustment is used to adjust the level of chroma of color
B/W 1200 Adjustment item to improve the density and
images which are reproduced as monochrome images in the image
gradation in the monochrome Printed Photo mode
send mode (monochrome manual text mode).
and Photo mode.
B/W 600 Adjustment item to improve the density and This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
gradation in the monochrome auto mode Text/ • When there is request from the user.
Printed Photo mode and Text/Photo mode.
1) Enter the SIM 46-55 mode.
B/W 600 LOW Adjustment item to improve the density and
gradation in the monochrome auto mode (Printed 2) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
Photo mode and Photo mode). When the adjustment value is increased, colors dropout
WOVEN1 Adjustment item when adjusting the watermark becomes easy to narrow the reproduction range. When the
density in the watermark mode 1 adjustment value is decreased, color dropout becomes difficult
WOVEN2 Adjustment item when adjusting the watermark to widen the reproduction range.
density in the watermark mode 2
WOVEN3 Adjustment item when adjusting the watermark Setting Default
Item/Display Content
density in the watermark mode 3 range value
WOVEN4 Adjustment item when adjusting the watermark A CHROMA Dropout color range adjustment 0-6 3
density in the watermark mode 4
3) Scan the document in the image send mode (monochrome
*1: When performing adjustments in the heavy paper mode, manual text mode) and check the adjustment result.
load paper in the manual paper feed tray.

When black characters When the color section is not

are fainted, Document dropped out,

Decrease the adjustment value. Color dropout Increase the value.

Reproduced
image

SIM value 0 SIM value 3 SIM value 6

(Minimum value) (Default) (Maximum value)

The reproduction range is widened. The reproduction range is narrowed.

Effect and adverse effect when decreasing the value Effect and adverse effect when increasing the value
[Effect] [Effect]
When black characters are fainted by color shift, etc, the black Colors (of low chroma) which are difficult to be dropped out
area is outputted clearly. can be dropped out.
[Adverse effect] [Adverse effect]
Dropout of color sections becomes difficult. Black characters are fainted or cracked.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 56

 J:
14-D (17)
This is used to adjust the variation in the watermark density
Watermark adjustment (Normally not when the adjustment value of the watermark print/contrast
required) adjustment in the system setting is changed by 1. When this
This adjustment is used to adjust the reproduction capability of the value is increased, the variation is also increased. When the
watermark in the copy/printer mode. value is decreased, the variation is also decreased.
This adjustment is used for watermark documents (primary output). When the adjustment value is 0, the result of the contrast
The result of this adjustment affects the result of watermark print adjustment is not reflected. (* The adjustment value must be
(secondary output). set to 1 or greater.)
In the printer mode, the watermark density can be adjusted by the K:
printer driver. That adjustment is based on the result of this adjust- To reproduce the containing characters of watermark copy
ment. (secondary output) more clearly, set to 43.
1) Enter the SIM 46-66 mode. In that case, however, the containing characters of the water-
2) Select the PATTERN mode, then select an adjustment item in mark document (primary output) can be easily reproduced.
the following list according to the situation. L:
To reproduce the containing characters of watermark copy
Setting Default (secondary output) more clearly, set to 43.
Item/Display Content
range setting
In that case, however, the containing characters of the water-
A WOVEN Watermark density level (Color: 0 - 255 15
DEN BK Black/Adjustment for light images) mark document (primary output) can be easily reproduced.
LOW Changing adjustment values of adjustment items A - I and
B WOVEN Watermark density level (Color: 0 - 255 19 trade off
DEN BK Black, Density: Standard)
MIDDLE Kinds of
C WOVEN Watermark density level (Color: 0 - 255 23 watermarks
Adjustmen
DEN BK Black, Density: Dark) (Mode
Density t values of
HIGH selected in
value adjustment
Effect
D WOVEN Watermark density level (Color: 0 - 255 19 the
items A - I
DEN C Cyan / Adjustment for light images) watermark
LOW copy mode)
E WOVEN Watermark density level (Color: 0 - 255 23 Characters Decrease. The The watermark images
DEN C Cyan, Density: Standard) appearing. adjustment become easy to disappear.
MIDDLE value is The containing characters
F WOVEN Watermark density level (Color: 0 - 255 27 decreased. become lighter.
DEN C Cyan, Density: Dark) Increase. The The containing characters
HIGH adjustment become darker.
G WOVEN Watermark density level (Color: 0 - 255 15 value is The watermark images
DEN M Magenta / Adjustment for light increased. become difficult to disappear.
LOW images) Background Decrease. The The containing characters
H WOVEN Watermark density level (Color: 0 - 255 18 appearing. adjustment become easy to disappear.
DEN M Magenta, Density: Standard) value is The watermark images
MIDDLE decreased. become easy to disappear.
I WOVEN Watermark density level (Color: 0 - 255 21 Increase. The The watermark images
DEN M Magenta, Density: Dark) adjustment become darker.
HIGH value is The containing characters
increased. become difficult to disappear.
J CONTR Contrast adjustment 0 - 255 2
AST
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
K HT For half-tone index watermark type 42 - 43 42
TYPE positive 4) Make a copy, and check the adjustment result.
(POSI) Descriptions on the watermark
L HT For half-tone index watermark type 42 - 43 42
TYPE negative
(NEGA) Containing
characters
Copy / Print Copy
Description
A~I:
The adjustment value is changed to increase or decrease the COPY INHIBITED
density of the watermark of background documents (primary
output). COPY INHIBITED
To increase the watermark density, increase the adjustment COPY INHIBITED
value.
To decrease the watermark density, decrease the adjustment Document Watermark document Watermark copy
value. (Copy document or (Primary output) (Secondary output)
When the adjustment value is increased, the watermark area Print data) (Copy or Printer output) (This machine or other
which is originally not reproduced becomes difficult to disap- (This machine) company's machine)
pear.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the watermark area Watermark The watermark color is available in Cyan, Magenta, and
which is originally reproduced becomes easy to disappear. color Black.
Containing Characters embedded in a watermark, such as "COPY
characters INHIBITED," are called containing characters.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 57

 Kinds of There are two kinds: "Character appearing" and Note for adjusting the watermark with SIM46-54
watermarks "Background appearing." When the color balance automatic adjustment is executed with
When a watermark of "Character appearing" is copied, the SIM46-74 or SIM46-24 but the containing characters are repro-
background disappears and the containing characters duced, use SIM46-54 to execute the color balance automatic
appear.
adjustment for each dither.
When a watermark of "Background appearing" is copied,
the watermark of the character area disappears and the However, note the following items.
containing characters become outline characters. • When either of item K or L of the PATTERN mode is 42, the
Principle of A watermark is composed of two dots: fine dots and rough adjustment must be executed for the both modes of WOVEN1
watermarks dots. and WOVEN2 of SIM46-54.
Since fine dots disappear when copied, they are called
• When either of item K or L of the PATTERN mode is 43, the
disappearing patterns. Since rough dots remain when
copied, they are called remaining patterns. adjustment must be executed for the both modes of WOVEN3
In a watermark of "Character appearing," the background is and WOVEN4 of SIM46-54.
a disappearing pattern and the containing characters are • WOVEN1 and WOVEN2 must be adjusted in a pair as well as
remaining patterns. WOVEN3 and WOVEN4.
In a watermark of "Background appearing," the background
If it is ignored, the containing characters remain reproduced.
is a remaining pattern and the containing characters are
disappearing patterns.
Note for Watermarks have the following characteristics: 14-E Printer image quality adjustment
watermarks • A watermark is presumed to be synthesized with text (Basic adjustment)
documents. If it is used with photos or images, the
containing characters may be seen in the watermark Requisite condition before execution of the printer color bal-
document (primary output) or the containing characters ance/density adjustment
may not appear properly in the watermark copy Before execution of the printer color balance/density adjustment,
(secondary output). the copy color balance/density adjustment must have been com-
• When a watermark is synthesized with newspapers or pleted properly.
other dark-background documents, the containing
characters may not appear in the watermark copy This adjustment is required in the following cases.
(secondary output). • Basically same as when the copy color balance/density adjust-
• Containing characters may not appear in the watermark ment is required.
copy (secondary output) depending on the kind of the
• After the copy color balance/density adjustment.
copier which makes the watermark copy (secondary
output) and the copy mode.
• Containing characters may not appear clearly in the 14-E (1)
watermark copy (secondary output) depending on the Printer color balance adjustment
copy mode in which the watermark document (primary
output) is made.
(Automatic adjustment)
• When the print engine status changes, the containing The color balance adjustment (auto adjustment) is used to adjust
characters may not be concealed properly in the the print density of each color (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) auto-
watermark document (primary output). In this case, matically with SIM 67-24 or the user program.
follow the procedures below to conceal the containing
When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments
characters.
* Use SIM46-24 to execute the color balance adjustment. of all the print modes are revised.
* Use SIM46-54 to execute the color balance adjustment There are following two modes in the auto color balance adjust-
for each dither. ment.
* Adjust the watermark print contrast in the system setting.
1) Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 67-24
• Though the watermark of cyan or magenta is selected in
is used.)
the black and white mode, the black watermark is
synthesized. 2) Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program
• For a document which is judged as monochrome with mode is used.) (The color balance target is the service target.)
ACS selected, though the watermark color is specified as The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to
cyan or magenta, the black watermark is synthesized.
reduce the number of service calls.
• The preview screen of the watermark only indicates the
setting of the watermark color, and does not indicate an If the print color balance is lost for some reasons, the user can
actual copy image. use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance.
• When the document control (printer mode) is used When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
together, it is advisable to use "Characters appearing" machine condition is greatly changed, this function does not
setting. If "Background appearing" setting is used
work effectively.
together, the detection accuracy of document control
may be reduced. On the other hand, the auto color balance adjustment by the
• In the printer mode watermark, setting of 1200dpi and a serviceman functions to recover the normal color balance
watermark cannot be used together. though the machine condition is greatly changed. If the
machine has a fatal problem, repair and adjust it for obtaining
Watermark adjustment in the system setting the normal color balance.
System setting -> Security setting -> Watermark print -> Contrast To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
tab
understood.
Watermark kind
Density Adjustment
mode selection
Character appearing To increase the Decrease the contrast value.
text density (Default: 5)
To decrease the Increase the contrast value.
text density (Default value: 5)
Background To increase the Increase the contrast value.
appearing text density (Default value: 5)
To decrease the Decrease the contrast value.
text density (Default: 5)

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 58

Printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment) procedure
flowchart (SIM67-24)

Start

Printer color balance and density adjustment

(Automatic adjustment).

Enter the SIM67-24 mode, and select A4

(11" x 8.5") paper.

Press [EXECUTE] key.

(The adjustment pattern is printed.)

Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.

Select the FACTORY target or the SERVICE target,
and press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern
is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically
Automatic adjustment color balance target change
performed to print the check pattern.) (*1)
Change the color balance and density target.
(SIM67-26)
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or
unclear copy. (*4) NO

Press [OK] key. (The initial setting of the halftone

image correction is automatically performed.) (*2) Though the FACTORY
color balance and density
target (available in 3 kinds) is
Cancel SIM67-24. changed, satisfactory color
balance and density are not
obtained (SIM67-26), or the
SERVICE target is
selected.
Check the self print check pattern to check the printer
color balance and density adjustment.
YES
Use SIM64-5 to print the self print
check pattern, and check the printer color balance Printer color balance and density adjustment
and density. (Manual adjustment). (SIM67-25) (*3)

*1:
When the color balance and density are customized and
registered as the SERVICE target, select the SERVICE
Are the color balance and NO target.
density at the satisfactory *2:
level? If the initial setting of the halftone image correction is not
properly adjusted, satisfactory color balance and density
cannot be obtained. In this case, check the print engine for
YES any problems.
*3:
If satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained
with printer color balance and density adjustment (Manual
End adjustment) (SIM67-25), check the print engine for any
problems.
*4:
If there is any streak or unclear copy on the printed check
pattern, check the print engine for any problems.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 59

1) Enter the SIM 67-24 mode. After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. MODE" is displayed.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in
procedure 2) on the document table. After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled.
Place the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper 6) Check the color balance and density.
on the document table so that the thin lines on the paper are (Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density
on the left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed check.)
color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper. When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained
from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in
procedure 4), change the factory color balance target with SIM
67-26 and repeat the procedures from 1).
PRINTER CALIBRATION If a satisfactory result on the color balance and the density is
not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the man-
ual adjustment (SIM 67-25).
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to exe-
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment.
If the color balance or density is not in the satisfactory level even
after execution of the automatic and manual adjustments, there
may be another cause.
Troubleshoot the cause, repair or perform necessary works, and
repeat the adjustment from the beginning.

14-E (2)
Printer color balance adjustment
(Manual adjustment)
The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to
adjust the printer density of C, M, Y and K. This is used at the fol-
lowing situation. When the result of auto adjustment described
above is not existing within the range of reference. When a fine
4) Select [FACTORY] key, and press [EXECUTE] key. adjustment is required. When there is request from the user for
When the color balance is customized with the manual color changing (customizing) the color balance.
balance adjustment (SIM 67-25) according to the user's In this manual adjustment, adjust only the color patch which could
request and the color balance is registered as the service tar- not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment.
get with SIM 67-27, if the color balance is adjusted to that color If the color balance is improper, execute the automatic color bal-
balance, select the service target. ance adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better
The copy color balance adjustment is automatically executed efficiency.
and prints the color balance check patch image. Wait until the
operation panel shown in the procedure 5) is displayed.

PRINTER CALIBRATION

5) Press [OK] key on the operation panel.

After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the halftone image
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER-
ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE" is displayed.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 60

 1) Enter the SIM 67-25 mode.
Printer color balance and density adjustment (Manual 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
adjustment) procedure flowchart (SIM67-25) The color patch image (Adjustment pattern) is printed.
3) Check that the following condition is satisfied or the color bal-
Start
ance is satisfactory.
If not, execute the following procedures.
Printer color balance and density
adjustment (Manual adjustment). (*1)

Enter the SIM67-25 mode, and select A4

(11" x 8.5") paper. (Automatic selection.)
PRINTER CALIBRATION
Press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is printed.)

Check the printed adjustment check pattern,

and select a target adjustment color with the
Low density High density
color keys (C,M,Y,K).
;
Select a target adjustment density level.
/
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.

%
Press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is printed.)
$M
Check the patch color balance and density in the
process gray of the color balance check pattern. CMY
blend
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3

Are the color balance 1) The max. density section is not blurred.
NO
and density at the sati-
sfactory level? 2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C and BK is copied.

3) Patch for each of Y, M, C, BK

YES
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
Cancel the SIM67-25 mode. The patch density is changed gradually.

The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter

Check the self print check pattern to check the printer color level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
balance and density adjustment.
not be reversed.
Use SIM64-5 to print the self print
The density level of each color must be almost at the same
check pattern, and check the level.
printer color balance and density.
Patch B may not be copied.
Patch A must not be copied.
NO
When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a
Are the color balance and request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
density at the satisfactory
level?
color balance stated above.
If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY
mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the
YES
adjustment is proper. In an actual print mode, it is converted
into the natural gray color balance by the color table. (When
Set the SERVICE target for the the color balance target is DEF 1.)
automatic printer color balance
adjustment. (SIM67-27) 4) Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
End 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
The adjustment value is set in the range of (1 - 999). When
*1: SIM 67-24 is used to adjust the automatic color balance and
If satisfactory color balance and density are not
obtained with the adjustment, check the print
density, all the set values of this simulation are set to 500.
engine for any problems. To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
Repeat procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satis-
fied.
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively.
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
way of adjustment.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 61

6) Check the color balance and density. Setting
Display/Item Content Default
(Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density range
check.) B K K engine maximum 0 0-1 1
0:ENABLE density correction mode
1:DISABLE Enable
If the color balance is customized, use SIM 67-27 to register K engine maximum 1
density correction mode
the color balance as the service target.
Disable
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not C CYAN Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
required. MAX TARGET CYAN maximum density
If the customized color balance is registered as the service tar- correction
get, the automatic color balance adjustment can be made in D MAGENTA Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
the next color balance adjustment. MAX TARGET MAGENTA maximum density
correction
E YELLOW Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
14-F Printer image quality adjustment MAX TARGET YELLOW maximum density
(Individual adjustment) correction
This adjustment is used to execute the fine adjustment in each F BLACK Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
mode only when a satisfactory image quality is not obtained by the MAX TARGET BLACK maximum density
correction
basic adjustments ADJ 14E (1) and ADJ 14E (2) or there is a
G PRINTER Printer total toner limit set up 0-3 0
request from the user. Normally there is no need to execute this
TOTAL TONER
adjustment.
LIMIT SETUP
This must be well understood for execution of the adjustment.
• If a tone gap occurs on part of high density, set 0 to item A and B
14-F (1) The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone
gap is better.
Printer density adjustment (Low density
• In case of more increase of the density on high density part, set 1
section density adjustment) (No need to
to item A and B.
adjust normally)
The tone gap may occur in high density part.
This adjustment is used to adjust the image density in the low den-
If the setting values of item C, D, E and F are changed, density of
sity area in the printer mode.
the high density part is changed.
Adjust to reproduction setting of the low density image.
When these values are changed, be sure to perform the printer
This adjustment is required in the following cases. color balance and density adjustment. (Automatic adjustment)
• When it is required not to reproduce images in the low density
section, or to reproduce low-density images. 14-F (3)
• When there is request from the user. Printer gamma adjustment for each dither
1) Enter the SIM 67-36 mode. (Automatic adjustment) (No need to adjust
2) Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key. normally)
In case of increase of the image density on low density part,
This adjustment is used to adjust the color balance and the density
increase the adjustment value. For diluting the image density
in the monochrome mode, the heavy paper mode, and the gloss
on low density part, decrease the adjustment value. paper mode.
This simulation is used to improve image quality in these modes
14-F (2) and images.
Printer high density image density 1) Enter the SIM67-54 mode.
reproduction setting (Supporting the high 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
density section tone gap) The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
(No need to adjust normally)
When a tone gap is generated in the high density section in the
printer mode, the setting is changed to lower the density in the high
density section.
This setting is normally not required, however, in the following
cases, a change of setting must be made.
• When a tone gap occurs on part of high density.
• To lower the density in the high density section.
1) Enter the SIM 67-34 mode.
2) Select the item A, B with the scroll key.

Setting
Display/Item Content Default
range
A CMY CMY engine maximum 0 0-1 0
0:ENABLE density correction mode
1:DISABLE Enable
CMY engine maximum 1
density correction mode
Disable

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 62

3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the 8) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
procedure 2) on the document table so that the thin lines on procedure 7) on the document table so that the thin lines on
the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the
left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color
patch image (adjustment pattern). patch image (adjustment pattern).

PRINTER CALIBRATION PRINTER CALIBRATION

4) Press [EXECUTE] key. 9) Press [EXECUTE] key.

The color balance adjustment is automatically performed. The color balance adjustment is automatically performed, and
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. the machine goes to the state of procedure 6).
Check it for any abnormality. 10) When [OK] key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered
5) Press [OK] key. and the adjustment mode is terminated. When [EXECUTE]
key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered and the
The list of the adjustment items (for each dither) is displayed.
screen is shifted to the other item (Mode/Image) select menu.
6) Select an adjustment item (for each dither).
To execute the adjustment of the other item (Mode/Image),
press [EXECUTE] key.
Select item
Content After completion of all the adjustments of the items (Mode/
(Mode/Image)
Adjustment item to improve the color balance Image), press [OK] key, and the adjustment results are regis-
HEAVY PAPER
in the heavy paper mode tered.
Adjustment item to improve the color balance 11) Make a print, and check the print image quality.
1200DPI_1BIT
in 1200dpi mode
(Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density
Adjustment item to improve the density and
B/W check.)
gradation in the monochrome mode
Adjustment item to improve the color balance
4BIT_GRAPHICS
in the text mode

DOT_SCREEN1
Adjustment item to improve the color balance ADJ 15 Paper size sensor adjustment
in Dot (High Line Number).
Adjustment item to improve the color balance
DOT_SCREEN2
in Dot (Low Line Number) mode
15-A Manual paper feed tray paper size (width)
Adjustment item to improve the density and sensor adjustment
DOT_SCREEN1_BW gradation in Dot mode of Monochrome High This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
Quality mode
• The manual paper feed tray section has been disassembled.
Adjustment item to improve the density and
DOT_SCREEN2_BW gradation in Dot mode of Monochrome Ultra • The manual paper feed tray unit has been replaced.
Fine mode • U2 trouble has occurred.
Adjustment item to improve the color balance • The PCU PWB has been replaced.
SHIGH
in Super Fine Text mode
• The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
7) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Enter the SIM 40-2 mode.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 63

2) Open the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width posi- 2) Open the DSPF/RSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width
tion. position.

3) Press [EXECUTE] key.

3) Press [EXECUTE] key. The maximum width detection level is recognized.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal 4) Open the DSPF/RSPF paper feed guide to the width for the
display. A4R size.
The maximum width position detection level of the manual 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
paper feed guide is recognized. The A4R width detection level is recognized.
4) Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4 size. 6) Open the DSPF/RSPF paper feed guide to the width for the
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. A5R size.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal 7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
display. The A5R width detection level is recognized.
The A4 size width position detection level of the manual paper 8) Open the DSPF/RSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width
feed guide is recognized. position.
6) Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size. 9) Press [EXECUTE] key.
7) Press [EXECUTE] key. The minimum width detection level is recognized.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal * When each of the above operations has been completed, the
display. "COMPLETE" message appears; when any of the operations
Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size. has failed, the "ERROR" message appears.
8) Open the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width posi-
tion.
9) Press [EXECUTE] key. ADJ 16 Document size detection
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal adjustment
display.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
The minimum width position detection level of the manual
paper feed guide is recognized. • When the original size sensor section has been disassembled.

If the above operation is not completed normally, "ERROR" is dis- • When the original size sensor section has been replaced.
played. • When U2 trouble has occurred.
When the operation is completed normally, the above data are • When the SCN-MFP control PWB is replaced.
saved to the memory and "COMPLETE" is displayed. • When the EEPROM on the SCN-MFP control PWB is replaced.

15-B DSPF/RSPF paper feed tray document size 16-A Adjust the sensitivity of the original size
(width) sensor adjustment sensor
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: 1) Enter the SIM41-2 mode.
• The DSPF/RSPF paper feed tray section has been disassem- 2) Execute the sensor adjustment without document.
bled. With the document cover open, without placing a document on
• The DSPF/RSPF paper feed tray unit has been replaced. the table glass, press [EXECUTE] key.
• When a U2 trouble occurs. 3) Place A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table and press
• The scanner PWB has been replaced. [EXECUTE] key.
• The EEPROM on the scanner PWB has been replaced. If the adjustment is completed normally, "DOCUMENT SIZE
PHOTO SENSOR LEVEL IS ADJUESTED" is displayed.
1) Enter the SIM 53-6 mode.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 64

 The standard fixing position is at two scales in direction B from
ADJ 17 Touch panel coordinate setting the marking scale center. However, the position may be varied
depending on the situation.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When a wrinkle is made on paper, change the position in the
• The operation panel has been replaced. error direction A.
• U2 trouble has occurred. * When an image deflection or unclear image is generated in the
• The SCN MFP PWB has been replaced. lead edge area of paper, change the position in the arrow direc-
• The EEPROM on the SCN MFP PWB has been replaced. tion B.
1) Enter the SIM 65-1 mode.

ADJ 19 Image lead edge Image lead

edge position, Image loss, Void
area, Image off-center, Image
magnification ratio adjustment
(Auto adjustment)
Menu list

Display/Item Content
2) Precisely press the cross mark points (4 positions). OC ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction
When the cross mark is pressed precisely, a buzzer sounds image magnification ratio adjustment (Document
and the display is reversed. When all the four points are table mode)
pressed and the touch panel adjustment is completed, the dis- BK-MAG ADJ Main scanning direction image magnification
play returns to the simulation sub number entry screen. ratio adjustment
SPF ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction
In case of an error, the display returns to the entry screen
image magnification ratio adjustment (DSPF/
again. RSPF mode)
Check to confirm that there is no shift between the display SETUP/PRINT ADJ Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center
frame and the detection position when the touch panel is (each paper feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment
pressed. RESULT Adjustment result display
* When pressing the touch panel, never use a sharp tip (such as a DATA Display of data used when an adjustment is
needle or a pin). executed

19-A Print image main scanning direction

ADJ 18 Fusing paper guide position automatic magnification ratio adjustment
adjustment (Print engine)
1) Enter the SIM 50-28 mode.
Normally there is no need to perform this adjustment. In the follow-
2) Select [BK-MAG ADJ] with the key.
ing cases, perform this adjustment.
3) Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key.
• When a paper jam occurs in the fusing section.
4) Touch [EXECUTE] key.
• When wrinkles are made on paper in the fusing section.
The adjustment pattern is printed out.
• When an image deflection or an image blur is generated in the
5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.
paper rear edge section.
Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document guide.
1) Loosen the fusing paper guide fixing screws on the two posi- In this case, put 5 sheets of white paper on the printed adjust-
tions in the front/rear frame direction. ment pattern
2) Use the fusing paper guide position scale as the reference to
shift the paper guide in the arrow direction A or B.

6) Touch [EXECUTE] key.

The following item is automatically adjusted.
• Print image main scanning direction image magnification
B ratio.
7) Touch [OK] key.
The adjustment result becomes valid.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 65

 5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.
19-B Print image off-center auto adjustment
Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document guide.
(Print engine) (Each paper feed tray) In this case, put 5 sheets of white paper on the printed adjust-
1) Enter the SIM 50-28 mode. ment pattern.
2) Select [SETUP/PRINT ADJ] with the key.
3) Select [ALL] with the key.

By touching LEAD or OFFSET key, the following items can be

executed individually.
• LEAD : Print image lead edge image position adjustment
• OFFSET: Print image off-center adjustment
When [ALL] is selected, both of the above two items are exe-
cuted simultaneously.
4) Select a paper tray to be adjusted.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The adjustment pattern is printed.
6) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.
Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document guide.
In this case, put 5 sheets of white paper on the printed adjust-
ment pattern. 6) Touch [EXECUTE] key.
The following item is automatically adjusted.
• Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, ima-
geoff-center, sub scanning direction image magnification
ratio auto adjustment.
7) Touch [OK] key.
The adjustment result becomes valid.

19-D Copy mode image lead edge position,

Image loss, Void area, Image off-center, Sub
scanning direction image magnification
ratio auto adjustment (Scanner) (DSPF/
RSPF mode)
1) Enter the SIM 50-28 mode.
2) Touch [SPF ADJ] key.
3) Proceed to one of the three screens for selecting the tray used
to print DSPF/RSPF adjustment pattern by selecting the corre-
7) Touch [EXECUTE] key. sponding button.
The following item is automatically adjusted. SIDE1: DSPF/RSPF adjustment for the front side
• Print image lead edge image position adjustment SIDE2: DSPF/RSPF adjustment for the back side
ALL: DSPF/RSPF adjustment for both the front and back sides
• Print image off-center adjustment
4) Select one of the tray that can be used to print adjustment pat-
8) Touch [OK] key.
terns.
The adjustment result becomes valid.
5) Touch [EXECUTE] key.
Perform procedure 4) to 7) for each paper feed tray.
The machine starts self-print of adjustment pattern.
6) DSPF/RSPF adjustment patterns are loaded into the DSPF/
19-C Copy mode image lead edge position, RSPF
Image loss, Void area, Image off-center, Sub (Set so that the pattern surface faces up)
scanning direction image magnification
ratio auto adjustment (Scanner) (Document
table mode)
1) Enter the SIM 50-28 mode.
2) Select [OC ADJ] with the key.
3) Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key.
4) Touch [EXECUTE] key
The adjustment pattern is printed out.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 66

7) Touch [EXECUTE] key.
Adjustment item list
• DSPF/RSPF original leading edge adjustment (front side)
• DSPF/RSPF original off-center adjustment (front side)
• DSPF/RSPF original sub-scan magnification adjustment
(front side)
8) DSPF/RSPF adjustment patterns are loaded into the DSPF/
RSPF.
(Set so that the pattern surface faces down)
9) Touch [EXECUTE] key.
Adjustment item
• DSPF/RSPF original leading edge adjustment (back side)
• DSPF/RSPF original off-center adjustment (back side)
• DSPF/RSPF original sub-scan magnification adjustment
(backside)
10) adjustment result screen appears.
This screen shows the current values along with the previous
values in parentheses.
• By touching [REPRINT] key, you can return to the tray selec-
tion screen and have the machine self-print DSPF/RSPF
adjustment patterns (for the front and back sides) again.
• To have the machine start re-reading the DSPF/RSPF
adjustment patterns (front and back sides) touch [RESCAN]
key.
• To return to the top menu without saving the adjustment val-
ues into EEPROM and RAM, touch [RETRY] key.
• To display the data used for adjustment, touch [DATA] key.
11) Touch [OK] key.

MX-6070N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 67

MX-6070N
[6] SIMULATION Service Manual

1. General and purpose

The simulation mode has the following functions, to display the
machine operating status, identify the trouble position and causes
in an earlier stage and to efficiently setup and adjust the machine
for improved serviceability.
1) Various adjustments
2) Setting of the specifications and functions
3) Canceling troubles
4) Operation check
5) Counters check, setting clear
6) Machine operating conditions (operation hysteresis) data
check, clear
7) Various (adjustments, setting, operation, counters, etc) data Ver
transport.
The operating procedures and displays depend on the design of
the operation panel of the machine.

There are two simulation modes.

* Easy mode:
Displays commonly used simulations for each category, allowing
easy access for technicians to change settings, perform mainte-
nance and adjustments.
* Classic mode:
All simulations are listed and can be accessed by entering the
main code, then sub code as per previous model series.

2. Function of each key

3) Touch the (#) key → Asterisk (*) key → Clear key → Asterisk
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(*) key → Ready for input of main code of simulation.

No. Name Function

1 TEST key Change test mode
2 Mode setting key Change Easy mode, Classic mode
3 Language setting key Change language in simulation mode
4 INFO key Display operation of current display
5 EXIT key Exit from simulation mode
6 BACK key Back to the previous display
7 Clear key Clear input value

3. Starting the simulation

Entering the simulation mode.
1) Double-click the HOME key
2) Touch the Ver display section (10-key mode input mode
screen)

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 1
1 : ‘16/Sep.
4. List of simulation codes The second
SIM
The first menu num SIM Title
menu
A. List of easy mode ber
6 Ready for 6-90 Load move for shipment 1
(1) List of menu (Installation) transport 10-3 Toner cartridge eject sensor
check
SIM
The second 10 History 1 Date list Use
The first menu num SIM Title
menu SIM
ber
1 Adjustment 1 Process 46-74 Copy/printer gradation auto (2) List of menu (Maintenance)
adjustment
50-22 Auto adjustment of SIM
registration & drum position The second
The first menu num SIM Title
menu
2 Positioning 50-10 Manual image position ber
adjustment 1 Data 1 Counter 22-1 Counter display
3 Copy 46-21 Color copy gradation manual display display 22-8 Org./staple counter display
adjustment 22-9 Paper feed counter display
4 Printer 67-25 Printer gradation manual 22-13 Process cartridge display
adjustment
2 JAM 22-3 JAM history data display
64-5 Printer self print (PCL) history data 22-12 SPF JAM history data display
5 Image 63-2 Shading execution display
Quality 63-3 Scanner color balance auto 3 System/ 22-5 ROM version data display
Adjustment adjustment Version 22-10 Machine system display
44-6 High density / engine halftone 4 List printing 22-6 Data print mode
process control compulsory
23-2 JAM/trouble data print mode
execution
5 USB 56-99 Export all log data
44-26 Half tone density correct
storage
execution
2 Adjustment 1 Positioning 50-10 Manual image position
46-74 Copy/printer gradation auto
adjustment
adjustment
50-22 Auto adjustment of
2 Registration 1 Function/ 26-1 Paper output system setup
registration & drum position
Settings Option 26-2 Size setup
2 Process 25-2 Automatic developer
settings 26-3 Auditor setup adjustment
26-50 Function setting 44-2 Process control gain
26-65 Finisher alarm mode setup adjustment
(staple limit) 46-74 Copy/printer gradation auto
26-78 ROPE password setting adjustment
2 Counter 26-5 A3(11x17) countup 3 Image 44-2 Process control gain
mode 26-8 Banner size countup Quality adjustment
26-52 A blank paper count mode Adjustment 44-6 High density / engine halftone
setup process control compulsory
3 FAX/Image 66-1 Image send software SW. execution
send setting 44-26 Half tone density correct
settings execution
4 Toner 26-18 Toner save mode setup 61-13 Laser power correction data
setting 26-69 Toner near end setting clear
5 FSS setting 27-2 FSS function setup (input) 61-11 Laser power auto correction
27-4 FSS function setup 63-3 Scanner color balance auto
27-7 FSS function setup (function) adjustment
27-9 FSS function adjustment 63-5 Standard scanner gamma
27-14 FSS test mode setup setup
27-15 FSS connect status 46-74 Copy/printer gradation auto
27-16 FSS alert setting adjustment
27-17 FSS paper order alert setting 4 Cleaning 6-4 Charger cleaner check
3 Data 1 Counter 22-1 Counter display 5 Replacing 10-3 Toner cartridge eject sensor
display display developer check
22-9 Paper feed counter display
25-2 Automatic developer
22-13 Process cartridge display
adjustment
2 System/ 22-5 ROM version data display
3 Counter 24-1 JAM/trouble counter data
Version 22-10 Machine system display
clear clear
3 List printing 22-6 Data print mode
24-2 Paper feed counter clear
23-2 JAM/trouble data print mode
24-3 Org./output counter data clear
4 USB 56-99 Export all log data
24-4 Maintenance counter clear
storage
4 Registration 21-1 Maintenance cycle setup
4 Version 49-1 Firmware update
Settings
upgrade 49-3 E-manual update
5 Version 49-1 Firmware update
49-5 Water mark update upgrade 49-3 E-manual update
49-6 OCR data update
49-5 Water mark update
49-10 ACU update
49-6 OCR data update
5 Error 13 U1 trouble cancellation
49-10 ACU update
release 14 Trouble cancellation (other)
6 Error 13 U1 trouble cancellation
15 Paper feed trouble release 14 Trouble cancellation (other)
cancellation
15 Paper feed trouble
16 U2 trouble cancellation
cancellation
16 U2 trouble cancellation

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 2
 1 : ‘16/Sep.
SIM SIM
The second The second
The first menu num SIM Title The first menu num SIM Title
menu menu
ber ber
10 History 1 Date list Use 5 Copy 46-21 Color copy gradation manual
SIM adjustment
44-21 Half tone process control
(3) List of menu (Adjustment and Settings) standard value register setup
46-24 Copy gradation auto
SIM adjustment
The second
The first menu num SIM Title
menu 46-54 Copy gradation auto
ber
adjustment (at dither)
1 Adjustment 1 Positioning 50-1 Copy edge adjustment
63-7 Copy gradation auto
50-5 Print edge adjustment adjustment target setup:
50-6 SPF edge adjustment service
50-10 Manual image position 63-8 Copy gradation auto
adjustment adjustment target clear:
50-12 Original center offset setup service
48-1 Ratio adjustment 63-11 Copy gradation auto
48-5 Motor speed adjustment adjustment target select
50-22 Auto adjustment of 6 Printer 67-24 Printer gradation auto
registration & drum position adjustment
1 67-25 Printer gradation manual
2 Image 50-22 Auto adjustment of adjustment
Quality registration & drum position 67-26 Printer gradation auto
Automatic 50-20 Registration adjustment adjustment target select
Adjustment 61-11 Laser power auto correction 67-27 Printer gradation auto
46-74 Copy/printer gradation auto adjustment target setup:
adjustment service
3 Image 61-14 Laser power setting collective 67-28 Printer gradation auto
Quality input adjustment target clear:
Adjustment 61-11 Laser power auto correction service
61-13 Laser power correction data 7 Touch 65-1 Touch panel adjustment
clear panel
46-74 Copy/printer gradation auto 8 Function/ 64-2 Self print (B/W) : service
adjustment Option
settings
46-54 Copy gradation auto
adjustment (at dither) 9 Data 1 Counter 22-1 Counter display
display display 22-9 Paper feed counter display
46-52 Copy gradation data clear (at
dither) 22-13 Process cartridge display
67-54 Printer gradation auto 2 System/ 22-5 ROM version data display
adjustment (at dither) Version 22-10 Machine system display
67-52 Printer gradation data clear 3 List printing 22-6 Data print mode
(at dither) 23-2 JAM/trouble data print mode
2 Process 10-3 Toner cartridge eject sensor 4 USB 56-99 Export all log data
check storage
25-2 Automatic developer 10 History 1 Date list Use
adjustment SIM
44-2 Process control gain
adjustment B. List of classic mode
46-74 Copy/printer gradation auto
adjustment Easy Mode
3 Scanner/ 41-1 PD sensor check
Adjustment and
Maintenance
Installation

SPF 41-2 Document size photo-sensor

Settings

setup Sim No.

46-9 Exposure adjustment (SFP)
63-2 Shading execution
53-6 SPF tray adjustment
53-8 SPF scanning position 1 1 Used to check the operation of the scanner
adjustment (reading) unit and the control circuit
63-3 Scanner color balance auto 2 Used to check the sensors in the scanner
adjustment (reading) section and the related circuit
63-5 Standard scanner gamma 5 Used to check the operation of the scanner
setup (reading) unit and the control circuit
4 Paper 1 40-2 Bypass tray adjustment 2 1 Used to check the operations of the
feeding, 2 3-10 Finisher adjustment automatic document feeder and the control
Transport circuit
and paper 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors
ejection and the detectors in the automatic
document feeder section and the control
circuit
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in
the automatic document feeder and the
control circuit
3 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors
and the detectors in the finisher and the
control circuit

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 3
 1 : ‘16/Sep.
Easy Mode Easy Mode

Adjustment and

Adjustment and
Maintenance

Maintenance
Installation

Installation
Settings

Settings
Sim No. Sim No.

3 3 Used to check the operation of the load in 10 2 Used to check the operations of the toner
the finisher and the control circuit remaining quantity sensor and the control
10 Used to adjust the finisher 4 circuit
4 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors 3 Used to check the ejector position sensor 6 2-5 2 1
and detectors in the desk/large capacity 13 Used to cancel the self-diag U1 trouble 5 6
tray (LCC) and the control circuit of those 14 Used to cancel the self-diag H3, H4, H5 5 6
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in troubles
the desk/large capacity tray (LCC) and the 15 Used to cancel the self-diag U6 trouble 5 6
control circuit of those 16 Used to cancel the self-diag U2 trouble 5 6
5 Used to check the operations of the paper 21 1 Used to set the maintenance cycle 4
feed desk paper transport clutch (DTRC) 22 1 Used to check the print count value in each 3-1 1-1 9-1
and the LCC paper transport clutch (LTRC) section and each operation mode
5 1 Used to check the operation of the display, 2 Used to check the total number of misfeed
LCD in the operation paper and the control and troubles
circuit
3 Used to check misfeed positions and the 1-2
2 Used to check the operation of the heater misfeed count of each position
lamp and the control circuit
4 Used to check the trouble (self diag) history
3 Used to check the operation of the scanner
5 Used to check the ROM version of each 3-2 1-3 9-2
lamp and the control circuit
unit
4 Used to check the operation of the
6 Used to output the setting/adjustment data, 3-3 1-4 9-3
discharge lamp and the control circuit
the firmware version and the counter list
6 1 Used to check the operations of the load in
8 Used to check the number of operations 1-1
the paper transport system (clutches and
(counter value) of the finisher, the SPF and
solenoids) and the control circuit
the scan (reading) unit
2 Used to check the operations of each fan
9 Used to check the number of use (print 3-1 1-1 9-1
motor and its control circuit
quantity) of each paper feed section
3 Used to check the operations of the
10 Used to check the system configuration 3-2 1-3 9-2
transport unit and the control circuit
(option, internal hardware)
4 Used to check the cleaning of the main
11 Used to check the use frequency (send/
charger
receive) of FAX
6 Used to perform fusing pressure release
12 Used to check the SPF misfeed positions 1-2
and applying and to check the operations of
and the number os misfeed at each position
the control circuit
13 Used to check the operating time of the 3-1 1-1 9-1
1 90 Used to reset the machine to the factory 6
process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner
setting (The scanner is set to the lock
cartridge) and the fusing unit)
enable position)
14 Used to display the use status of the toner
7 1 Used to set the operating conditions of
cartridge
aging
18 Used to display the user data delete history
6 Used to set the operating intermittent aging
19 Used to check the values of the counters
cycle
related to the scan - image send
8 Used to display the warm up time
40 Used to display the error code list and the
9 Color setting in the color copy test mode
contents
(used to check the copy operation and the
41 Used to check JAM code information
image quality for each color)
42 Used to check the JAM/trouble data
12 The document reading number of sheets
(for aging operation) 43 JAM data details display
8 1 Used to check and adjust the operations of 90 Used to output the various set data lists
the developping voltage in each print mode 23 2 Used to output the trouble history list of 3-3 1-4 9-3
and the control circuit. *When the middle paper jam and misfeed
speed is adjusted the low speed are also 80 Used to check the operation of paper feed
adjusted simultaneously and paper transport in the paper feed
2 Used to check and adjust the operation of section and the paper transport section.
the main charger grid voltage in each Used to output the list of the operation
printer mode and the control circuit. *When status of the sensor and detectors in the
the middle speed is adjusted the low speed paper feed section and the paper transport
are also adjusted simultaneously section
6 Used to check and adjust the operation of 81 Used to export paper feed time list
the transport voltage and the control circuit 24 1 Used to clear the jam counter and the 3
10 Main charger current output setting trouble counter
9 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors 2 Used to clear the number of use (the 3
and detectors in the paper reverse section number of prints) of each paper feed
(duplex section) and its control circuit section
3 Used to check the operations of the load in 3 Used to clear the finisher, SPF and the scan 3
the paper reverse section (duplex section) (reading) unit counter
and its control circuit 4 Used to clear the maintenance counter the 3
10 1 Used to check the operations of the toner printer counter of the transport unit and the
supply mechanism (toner motor) and the fusing unit
related circuit 5 Used to clear the developer counter

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 4
 Easy Mode Easy Mode

Adjustment and

Adjustment and
Maintenance

Maintenance
Installation

Installation
Settings

Settings
Sim No. Sim No.

24 35 Used to clear the toner cartridge use status 27 10 Used to clear the trouble prediction history
data information
25 1 Used to check the operations of the 11 Used to check the serial communication
developing section retry number and the scanner gain
2 Used to make the initial setting of toner 2-2 2 adjustment retry number history
density when replacing developer -5 12 Used to check the high density, halftone
4 Used to display the operation data of the process control and the automatic
toner supply quantity registration adjustment error history
5 Used to display the toner density correction 13 Used to check the history of paper transport
data time between sensors
10 Developer/drum serial no setting 14 Used to set the FSS function connection 2-5
26 1 Used to set Yes/No of installation of the 2-1 test mode
right paper exit tray 15 Used to display the FSS connection status 2-5
2 Used to set the paper size of the large 2-1 16 Used to set the FSS alert send 2-5
capacity tray (LCC) 17 Used to set the FSS paper order alert 2-5
3 Used to set the specifications of the auditor 2-1 30 1 Used to check the operations of the sensors
5 Used to set the count mode of the total 2-2 and the detectors in other than the paper
counter and the maintenance counter feed section and the control circuit
6 Used to set the specifications of the 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors
destination and the detectors in the paper feed section
7 Used to set the machine ID and the control circuit
8 Used to set the counter mode (long scale) 2-2 30 Used to check the operation of the motion
10 Used to set the trial mode of the network sensor
scanner 40 2 Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor 4
18 Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner 2-4 adjustment
save mode operation 7 Used to set the adjustment value of the
30 Used to set the operation mode manual paper feed tray paper width sensor
corresponding to the CE mark 41 1 Used to check the operations of the 3
32 Used to set the specifications of the fusing document size sensor and the control
cleaning operation circuit
35 Used to set the display/mode of Sim 22-4 2 Used to adjust the document size sensor 3
trouble history when a same trouble detection level
occurred repeatedly. There are two display 3 Used to check the operations of the
modes. Display as one trouble and display document size sensor and the control
as several series of troubles circuit
38 Used to set continue/stop of print when the 43 1 Used to set the fusing temperature in each
maintenance life is reached mode
41 Used to set Enable/Disable of the 2 Used to set the fusing operation and
magnification ratio automatic select function preheating
in the center binding mode 20 Used to set the environment correction
49 Used to set the print speed of postcard under low temperature and low humidity (L/
mode L) for the fusing temperature setting
50 Used to set functions 2-1 (Sim43-2) in each paper mode
52 Used to set whether non-printed paper is 2-2 21 Used to set the environment correction
counted up or not under high temperature and high humidity
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
65 Used to set the finisher alarm mode 2-1
(Sim43-2) in each paper mode
66 Simulation password setting
24 Fuser motion setup
69 Used to set the operating conditions for 2-4
35 Fusing nip operation check
toner near end
44 1 Used to set each correction operation
73 Enlargement continuous shoot, A3 wide
function in the image forming section
copy mode image loss adjustment
2 Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image 2-2 2
74 Used to set the OSA trial mode
density sensor -3
78 Used to set the password of the remote 2-1
4 Used to set the conditions of the high
operation panel
density process control operation
79 Used to set Yes/No of the pop-up display of
6 Used to execute the high density process 1-5 2-3
security
control forcibly
85 Simulation function setting
9 Used to display the result data of the high
27 2 Used to set the sender's registration 2-5
density process control operation
number and the HOST server telephone
12 Used to display the operation data of the
number
high density process control and the image
4 Used to set the initial call and toner order 2-5
density sensor
auto send
14 Used to display the output level of the
5 Used to set the machine tag No.
temperature and humidity sensor
6 Used to set of the manual service call
15 Used to set the OPC drum idle rotation
7 Used to set of the enable, alert callout 2-5
17 Process refresh execution
9 Used to set the paper transport time 2-5
21 Used to set the halftone process control 5
recording Yes/No threshold value and
target
shading gain adjustment retry number

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 5
 Easy Mode Easy Mode

Adjustment and

Adjustment and
Maintenance

Maintenance
Installation

Installation
Settings

Settings
Sim No. Sim No.

44 22 Used to display the toner patch density 46 39 Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send
level in the halftone process control images
operation 40 Used to adjust the FAX send image density
24 Used to display the correction target and (Collective adjustment of all the modes)
the correction level in the halftone process 41 Used to adjust the FAX send image density
control operation (Normal)
25 Used to set the calculating conditions of the 42 Used to adjust the FAX send image density
correction value for the halftone process (Fine)
control 43 Used to adjust the FAX send image density
26 Used to execute the halftone process 1-5 2-3 (Super fine)
control compulsory 44 Used to adjust the FAX send image density
27 Used to clear the correction data of the (Ultra fine)
halftone process control 45 Used to adjust the FAX send image density
28 Used to set the process control execution (600dpi)
conditions 46 Used to adjust the FAX send image density
29 Used to set the operating conditions of the (RGB RIP)
process control during a job 47 Used to set the compression rate of copy
31 Used to adjust the OPC drum phase and scan images (JPEG)
(Manual adjustment) 48 Used to set the copy output resolution of
37 Used to set the development bias copy mode
correction level in the continuous printing 51 Used to adjust the gamma for the copy
operation mode heavy paper mode and the image
43 Used to display the identification process mode
information of the developing unit 52 Used to set the gamma default for the copy 1-3
62 Used to set the process control execution mode heavy paper and the image process
conditions mode
46 1 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy 54 Used to perform the engine halftone 1-3
mode automatic density adjustment (dither)
2 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy 55 Used to adjust the drop out color in the
mode image send mode (monochrome manual
4 Used to adjust the density in the image text mode)
send mode 58 Used to set the copy mode pseudo
5 Used to adjust the density in the image resolution (smoothing process)
send mode 60 Used to adjust the sharpness in the copy/
8 Used to adjust the image send mode color scan mode
balance RGB 61 Used to adjust the area separation
9 Used to adjust the scan image density 3 recognition level
10 Used to adjust the copy color balance and 62 Used to set the operating condition of the
the gamma (for each color copy mode) ACS the area separation the background
16 Used to adjust the monochrome copy image process and the auto exposure
density and the gamma mode
19 Used to set the operating conditions for the 63 Used to adjust the density in the copy low
density scanning (exposure) of density section
monochrome auto copy mode documents 65 Used to set the color correction table
21 Copy color balance adjustment (manual 1-3 5 66 Used to adjust the reproduction capability of
adjustment) watermarks in the copy/printer mode
23 Used to set the density correction of copy 68 Used to adjust the auto resolution
high density section (high density tone gap judgement (For MX-xx70 series)
supported) 74 Copy color balance adjustment (Auto 1-1 2-2 1-2
24 Copy color balance adjustment (auto 5 adjustment)/printer color balance -5 -3 -3
adjustment) adjustment (Auto adjustment)
25 Used to adjust the copy color balance 90 Used to set the process operation of high
(single color copy mode) compression PDF images
26 Used to reset the single color mode color 91 Used to adjust the reproduction capability of
balance set value to the default black text
27 Used to adjust the gamma/density of copy 48 1 Used to adjust the scan image 1-1
images, text and line image edges magnification ratio (in the main scanning
30 Used to adjust the resolution in the sub direction and the sub scanning direction)
scanning direction in the copy mode 5 Used to correct the scan image 1-1
32 Used to adjust the document background magnification ratio (in the sub scanning
density reproducibility in the monochrome direction)
auto copy mode 6 Used to adjust the rotation speed of each
36 Used to adjust the colors in the two color motor
copy mode 49 1 Used to perform the firmware update 4 5
37 Used to adjust the reproduction capability of 3 Used to update the operation manual 4 5
monochrome mode color 5 Used to perform the watermarks update 4 5
38 Used to adjust the black component 6 Used to perform the OCR update
amount in the color copy mode 10 Used to perform the ACU update

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 6
 1 : ‘16/Sep.
Easy Mode Easy Mode

Adjustment and

Adjustment and
Maintenance

Maintenance
Installation

Installation
Settings

Settings
Sim No. Sim No.

50 1 Copy image position, image loss 1-1 61 4 Used to print the print image skew
adjustment adjustment pattern
5 Used to adjust the print lead edge image 1-1 11 Used to correct the laser power 2-3 1-2
position automatically -3
6 Used to adjust the copy image position and 1-1 12 Laser power manual correction
the image loss (SPF mode) 13 Used to clear the laser power correction 2-3 1-3
10 Used to adjust print image position 1-2 2-1 1-1 value
12 Used to perform the scan image off center 1-1 14 Used to set the laser power correction 1-3
position adjustment 62 1 Used to format the HDD
20 Image registration adjustment (Main 1-2 2 Used to check read/write of the HDD
scanning direction) (partial)
22 Used to adjust the image registration (Main 1-1 2-1 1-1 3 Used to check read/write of the HDD (all
scan direction, sub scan direction) -2 areas)
23 Used to set the registration for temperature 6 Used to perform the self diagnostics of the
adjustment HDD
24 Used to display the detail data of SIM 44-2, 7 Used to print the HDD self diagnostics error
50-22 log
27 Used to perform the image loss adjustment 8 Used to format the HDD
of scanned images in the FAX or image 10 Used to clear the job completion list data
send mode 11 Used to delete the document filing data
1 28 Used to automatically adjust the image 12 Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format
loss, void area, image off center and image in a HDD trouble
magnification ratio
13 Used to format the HDD (Operation manual
51 1 Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the watermark data only)
secondary transport voltage
14 Used to delete the document filing
2 Used to adjust the contact pressure management data
(deflection amount) on paper by the main
20 Used to check the status display of HDD
unit and the SPF resist roller
63 1 Used to display the shading correction
53 6 Used to adjust the detection level of the 3
result
SPF document width
2 Used to perform shading 1-5 3
7 Used to adjust the SPF document size
3 Used to perform scanner (CCD) color 1-5 2-3 3
width sensor
balance and gamma auto adjustment
8 Used to adjust the document lead edge 3
4 Used to display the scanner test chart patch
reference and the SPF mode document
density
scan position
5 Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color 2-3 3
9 SPF dirt detection setting
balance and gamma default setting
10 SPF dirt detection execution
7 Used to register the service target of the 5
55 1 Used to set the specification of the engine
copy mode auto color balance adjustment
control operations (SOFT SW)
8 Used to set the default of the service target 5
2 Used to set the specifications of the
of the copy mode auto color balance
scanner control operation (SOFT SW)
adjustment
3 Used to set the specifications of the
11 Used to set the target color balance of the 5
controller operation (SOFT SW)
copy mode auto color balance adjustment
10 Used to set the special stamp text for
64 1 Test print (self print) (color mode)
Taiwan
2 Test print (self print) (monochrome mode) 8
56 1 Used to transport data between HDD - MFP
4 Printer test print (self print)
PWB SRAM/EEPROM
5 Printer test print (self print) (PCL) 1-4
2 Used to backup the data in the EEPROM
and HDD to the USB memory 6 Printer test print (self print) (PS)
3 Used to backup the document filing data to 65 1 Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display 7
the USB memory section) detection coodinates
4 Used to backup the JOB log data to the 2 Used to display the touch panel (LCD
USB memory display section) detection coodinates
5 Used to import the SIM22-6 data to a USB 5 Used to check the operation panel key input
memory in the text format 66 1 Used to display the image send-related soft 2-3
6 Used to output the JAM/trouble data SW (2-150) on the LCD to allow changing
the soft SW while checking with the LCD
7 Used to export system log data to the USB
memory 2 Used to enter a country code and set the
default value for the country code
8 Used to perform ICC profile update
3 Used to check read/write of the EEPROM
1 15 MFP EEPROM data restore
and the SDRAM on the MODEM controller
99 Used to export system log data to the USB 3-4 1-5 9-4
and display the result
memory
4 Used to send the selected signals to the
60 1 Used to check the memory operations
line and the main unit speaker (send level:
(read/write) of the SCU-MFP PWB
max)
61 1 Used to check the LSU polygon motor
5 Used to send the selected signal to the line
rotation and laser detection
and the main unit speaker (send level: soft
3 Used to set the laser power SW setting)

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 7
 Easy Mode Easy Mode

Adjustment and

Adjustment and
Maintenance

Maintenance
Installation

Installation
Settings

Settings
Sim No. Sim No.

66 6 Used to print the confidential registration 67 26 Used to set the target color balance of the 6
check table (BOX No, BOX name, printer mode auto color balance adjustment
passcode 27 Used to set the service target of the printer 6
7 Used to output all image data saved in the mode auto color balance adjustment
image memory 28 Used to set the default of the service target 6
8 Used to send the selected sound message of the printer mode auto color adjustment
to the line and the speaker (send level: 31 Used to clear the printer calibration value
max) 33 Used to change the gamma of the printer
9 Used to send the selected sound message screen
to the line and the speaker (send level: soft 34 Used to set the density correction in the
SW setting) printer high density section
10 Used to clear the FAX and image send 36 Used to adjust the density in the low density
image data section
11 Used to send the selected signal at 300bps 41 Used to set 2 color print
to the line and the speaker (send level: 42 Used to set 2 color print color density
max)
43 Used to adjust 2 color mode color balance
12 Used to send the selected signal at 300bps
52 Used to set the default of the gamma of the 1-3
to the line and the speaker (send level: soft
printer screen
SW setting)
54 Printer color balance adjustment 1-3
13 Used to register dial number for Sim66-14/
15/16 dial test
14 Used to execute the dial pulse (10pps) send
test and to adjust the make time
15 Used to execute the dial pulse (20pps) send
test and to adjust the make time
16 Used to execute the DTMF signal send test
and to adjust the send level
17 Used to send the DTMF signal to the line
and the speaker (send level: max)
18 Used to send the DTMF signal to the line
and the speaker (send level: soft SW
setting)
21 Used to print the selected items (system
error, protocol monitor)
22 Used to set the handset sound volume
(Japan model only)
29 Used to initialize the telephone book data
and FAX system error
30 Used to display the TEL/LIU status change,
the display is highlighted by status change
31 Used to set ON/OFF the port for output to
TEL/LIU
32 Used to check the fixed data received from
the line and to display the result
33 Used to execute detection of various
signals with the line connected and to
display the detection result. When a signal
is detected the display is highlighted
36 Used to check send and receive data from
the MODEM controller to the MFP controller
or the data line or the command line
individually
39 Used to check and change the destination
setting saved in EEPROM of the FAX BOX
42 Used to rewrite the program to power
control installed in the FAX BOX
43 Used to write the adjustment value into the
power control installed in the FAX BOX
61 Used to display the image send-related soft
SW (151-250) on the LCD to allow
changing the soft SW while checking with
the LCD
62 Used to import the FAX receive data into a
USB memory in PDF file type
67 17 Printer reset
24 Printer color balance adjustment (Auto 6
adjustment)
25 Printer color balance adjustment (Manual 1-4 6
adjustment)

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 8
5. Details of simulation 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The RSPF repeats paper feed, transport, and paper exit oper-
ations at the speed corresponding to the scan resolution (oper-
1 ation speed).
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
1-1
RSPF
Purpose Operation test/check
Item/Display Operation mode Default value
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner
300DPI 300DPI(396.0mm/s)
(reading) unit and the control circuit. SPF SCAN 300DPI
400DPI 400DPI(396.0mm/s)
(SINGLE) (396.0mm/s)
Section Scanner (reading) 600DPI 600DPI(264.0mm/s)
Operation/Procedure 300DPI 300DPI(396.0mm/s)
SPF SCAN 300DPI
1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key. 400DPI 400DPI(396.0mm/s)
(DOUBLE) (396.0mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI(264.0mm/s)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Scanning is once performed at the speed corresponding to the DSPF
scan resolution (operation speed).
Item/Display Operation mode Default value
Item/Display Operation mode Default value 300DPI 300DPI(496.0mm/s)
SPF SCAN 300DPI
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI (372mm/s) 300DPI (372mm/s) 400DPI 400DPI(396.0mm/s)
(SINGLE) (496.0mm/s)
400DPI 400DPI (372mm/s) 600DPI 600DPI(264.0mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI (264.0mm/s) 300DPI 300DPI(496.0mm/s)
SPF SCAN 300DPI
1200DPI 1200DPI (132mm/s) 400DPI 400DPI(396.0mm/s)
(DOUBLE) (496.0mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI(264.0mm/s)

2-2
1-2
Purpose Operation test/check
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
Function (Purpose) Used to check the sensors in the scanner sors and the detectors in the automatic
(reading) section and the related circuits. document feeder section and the control
Section Scanner (reading) circuits.
Operation/Procedure Section Automatic document feeder
The operating status of the sensor is displayed. Operation/Procedure
When "MHPS" is highlighted, the scanner unit is in the home posi- The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
tion. played.
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
are highlighted.
1-5
RSPF
Purpose Operation test/check
Display Content
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner SPED Document sensor
(reading) unit and the control circuit. SPPD1 Document transport sensor 1
Section Scanner (reading) SPLS1 Paper size detector 1
Operation/Procedure SPLS2 Paper size detector 2
SOCD SPF open/close sensor
1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key.
SPPD2 Document transport sensor 2
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
SPPD3 Document transport sensor 3
Scanning is repeated at the speed corresponding to the scan SPPD4 Document transport sensor 4
resolution (operation speed). SCOV SPF cover open/close detector
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. SSET SPF installation detection
STMPU SPF stamp UN installation detection
Item/Display Operation mode Default value SWD_LEN SPF document guide plate position (Unit: 0.1mm)
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI (372mm/s) 300DPI (372mm/ SWD_AD SPF document detection volume output AD value
400DPI 400DPI (372mm/s) s)
600DPI 600DPI (264.0mm/s) DSPF
1200DPI 1200DPI (132mm/s)
Display Content
SCOV SPF cover open/close detector
SLCOV Lower door open/close sensor
2 SOCD SPF open/close sensor
SPED1 Document empty sensor
2-1 SPED2 Document empty sensor
SPLS1 Paper size detector 1
Purpose Operation test/check
SPLS2 Paper size detector 2
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the auto- SPOD Document exit sensor
matic document feeder and the control cir- SPPD1 Document transport sensor 1
cuit. SPPD2 Document transport sensor 2
Section SPF SPPD3 Document transport sensor 3
Operation/Procedure SPPD4 Document transport sensor 4
SPPD5 Document transport sensor 5
1) Select the operation mode and the speed with the touch panel
SPRDMD Document random sensor
key.
STLD Document feed tray lower limit sensor

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 9
 Display Content No,/Display item Content
STUD Document feed tray upper limit sensor FNPS3 Knurling home position sensor
FNPS4 Alignment plate front home position sensor
FNPS5 Alignment plate rear home position sensor
FNPS6 Staple tray paper sensor
SWD_LEN and SWD_AD are not ON/OFF display. FNPS7 Paper exit assist home position sensor
FNPS8 Bundle hold home position sensor
FNPS9 Paper height sensor
2-3 FNPS10 Paper exit tray lower limit sensor
FNPS11 Staple shift home position sensor
Purpose Operation test/check
FNPS12 Manual staple paper detection sensor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads FNPS14 Paper exit tray position sensor
in the automatic document feeder and the FNPS16 Slide position sensor
control circuit. FNPUDTC Punch unit connection detection signal
Section SPF FNSTPLHP Staple home position sensor
Operation/Procedure FNSTPLLS Staple empty detection
FNSTPLRE Staple lead edge sensor
1) Select a target item of the operation check with the touch panel
key. Inner finisher punch unit (MX-PN14)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
No,/Display item Content
The selected load performs the operation. FCFULL_S Punch dust full sensor
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. FCPI_S Punch home position sensor
FCPUENCS Punch motor rotation sensor
DSPF
FCRI_S Punch mode sensor
Display Content FCYKPTRS Punch unit paper rear edge sensor
SLUM Lift up motor
SPFC Document feed clutch Staple-free Staple Unit
SPFFAN Cooling fan motor
No,/Display item Content
SPOM Document exit motor
FNPS13 Staple-free staple unit position sensor
SPUFM Transport motor
FNPS15 Staple-free staple unit home position sensor
SRRC Registration roller clutch
STMPS Stamp solenoid 1K finisher (MX-FN28)
STRC Transport roller 2 clutch
STRRC Transport roller 1 clutch No,/Display item Content
BLTHPS Release position sensor
RSPF ENT Inlet sensor
Paper exit guide plate open/close home position
Display Content EXGPLTHP
sensor
SPUM_F SPF paper feed motor (normal rotation) FDRSW Door open/close sensor
SPUM_R SPF paper feed motor (reverse rotation) HITHP Flapper home position sensor
SPFM_F SPF transport motor (normal rotation) JOGHPS Jogger home position sensor
SPFM_R SPF transport motor (reverse rotation) LDWNLMUT Lift tray lower limit lower sensor
SPRS Paper exit roller pressure control solenoid (SPF) LMDLT Intermediate feeder left sensor
SRRC Registration roller clutch (SPF) PRFEX Proof paper exit sensor
STMPS Stamp solenoid PRFTRYFL Proof tray full sensor
RMDLT Intermediate feeder right sensor
SFTROLHP Shift home position sensor
STMHP Staple shift home position detection
STPDRRHP Staple driver home position sensor
3 STPNEND Staple near end sensor
STPSPRM Staple self-priming sensor
3-2 STPTRPAP Staple tray paper empty sensor
UDWNLMUT Lift tray lower limit upper sensor
Purpose Operation test/check
UPCVR Upper cover open/close sensor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- UPEX Shift paper exit (Lift tray paper exit) sensor
sors and the detectors in the finisher and UPLMUTSW Lift tray upper switch
the control circuit. UTNRH Tray near home detection sensor
Section Finisher UTRPH Lift tray paper surface sensor
Operation/Procedure
1K saddle finisher (MX-FN29)
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
played. No,/Display item Content
BDLTRS Bundle transport sensor
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
BLTHPS Release home position sensor
are highlighted.
ENDSHP Rear edge stopper home position sensor
Inner finisher (MX-FN27) ENDSTRS Rear edge stopper transport sensor
ENT Inlet sensor
No,/Display item Content
Paper exit guide plate open/close home position
FNECODTC Staple-less staple connection detection signal EXGPLTHP
sensor
FNINTSNS Punch unit paper rear edge detection signal
FDRSW Door open/close sensor
FNMANSW Manual staple switch
FLDCMHP Folding cam home position sensor
FNMSW1 Front cover switch
FLDEX Half folding paper exit sensor
FNPS1 Discharged paper sensor
FLDPLTHP Folding blade home position sensor
FNPS2 Paddle home position sensor

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 10
 No,/Display item Content No,/Display item Content
HITHP Flapper home position sensor Escape/saddle transport switch flapper home
FNHPFECE
JOGHPS Jogger home position sensor position sensor
LDWNLMUT Lift tray lower limit lower sensor FNHPFR Rear edge falling home position sensor
LMDLT Intermediate feeder left sensor Alignment unit front alignment plate lift home
FNHPGJFN
Bundle transport lower pressure release home position sensor
LPRSRLHP
position sensor Alignment unit rear alignment plate lift home
FNHPGJRN
PRFEX Proof paper exit sensor position sensor
PRFTRYFL Proof tray full sensor FNHPGKS Take-up knurling lift home position sensor
RMDLT Intermediate feeder right sensor FNHPGPN Alignment unit paddle lift home position sensor
SDLFLLL Half folding tray full lower sensor FNHPJF Front edge alignment plate home position sensor
SDLFLLU Half folding tray full upper sensor Alignment unit front alignment plate home position
FNHPJFN
SFTROLHP Shift home position sensor sensor
SSSTPCHP Saddle stitch staple clincher home position sensor FNHPJR Rear edge alignment plate home position sensor
STMHP Staple shift home position detection Alignment unit rear alignment plate home position
FNHPJRN
sensor
STPDRRHP Staple driver home position sensor
FNHPMSS Staple shift home position sensor
STPNEND Staple near end sensor
FNHPMT Load tray home position sensor
STPSPRM Staple self-priming sensor
FNHPP Paddle home position sensor
STPTRPAP Staple tray paper empty sensor
Alignment unit paddle rotation home position
STTKSH Staple retracting sensor FNHPRPN
sensor
UDWNLMUT Lift tray lower limit upper sensor
FNHPS Oscillation home position sensor
UPCVR Upper cover open/close sensor
FNHPTF Front edge tongue home position sensor
UPEX Shift paper exit (Lift tray paper exit) sensor
FNHPTR Rear edge tongue home position sensor
UPLMUTSW Lift tray upper limit switch
FNMCSLS Staple-free stapling motor clock sensor
Bundle transport upper pressure release home
UPRSRLHP FNOCFD Front door open/close switch
position sensor
FNSSS Staple safety switch
UTNRH Tray near home detection sensor
FNTBP Preprocessing timing sensor
UTRPH Lift tray paper surface sensor
FNULMT Load tray upper limit sensor
1K finisher punch unit (MX-PN15)
3K saddle finisher (MX-FN31)
No,/Display item Content
No,/Display item Content
PAPPOS Horizontal registration detection sensor
FN1DDS DIP SW1 detection sensor
Horizontal registration detection shift home position
PAPPOSHP FN1DO Paper exit paper surface detection sensor 1
sensor
PNCHENC Punch rear position sensor FN1DPS Push SW1 detection sensor
PNCHHP Punch home position sensor FN2DDS DIP SW2 detection sensor
PNCHHPFL Punch hopper full sensor FN2DO Paper exit paper surface detection sensor 2
PNCHMVHP Punch shift home position sensor FN2DPS Push SW2 detection sensor
PSLTDSW1 Punch selection DIP SW1 FN3DDS DIP SW3 detection sensor
PSLTDSW2 Punch selection DIP SW2 FN4DDS DIP SW4 detection sensor
FNAMS Manual staple operation SW
3K finisher (MX-FN30) FNB Buffer sensor
FNDCP Punch connection detection signal
No,/Display item Content
FNDCS Saddle connection detection signal
FN1DDS DIP SW1 detection sensor
FNDES Staple empty detection sensor
FN1DO Paper exit paper surface detection sensor 1
FNDFET Escape tray full detection sensor
FN1DPS Push SW1 detection sensor
FNDOCFD Front door open/close detection sensor
FN2DDS DIP SW2 detection sensor
Alignment unit paddle lift paper surface detection
FN2DO Paper exit paper surface detection sensor 2 FNDOGPN
sensor
FN2DPS Push SW2 detection sensor FNDOHS Staple cuing detection sensor
FN3DDS DIP SW3 detection sensor FNDPMS Manual staple paper detection sensor
FN4DDS DIP SW4 detection sensor FNDPOPT Process tray paper surface sensor
FNAMS Manual staple operation SW FNE Entry port sensor
FNB Buffer sensor FNEE Escape paper exit sensor
FNDCP Punch connection detection signal FNFMTLC Load tray full (Large coated paper full) sensor
FNDCS Saddle connection detection signal FNFMTLS Load tray middle (Large coated paper full) sensor
FNDES Staple empty detection sensor Load tray lower limit (Small coated paper full)
FNDFET Escape tray full detection sensor FNFMTSS
sensor
FNDOCFD Front door open/close detection sensor FNHPAR Rear edge assist home position sensor
Alignment unit paddle lift paper surface detection FNHPCSLS Staple-free stapling clinch home position sensor
FNDOGPN
sensor FNHPDSS Staple drive home position sensor
FNDOHS Staple cuing detection sensor Escape/saddle transport switch flapper home
FNDPMS Manual staple paper detection sensor FNHPFECE
position sensor
FNDPOPT Process tray paper surface sensor FNHPFR Rear edge falling home position sensor
FNE Entry port sensor Alignment unit front alignment plate lift home
FNHPGJFN
FNEE Escape paper exit sensor position sensor
FNFMTLC Load tray full (Large coated paper full) sensor Alignment unit rear alignment plate lift home
FNHPGJRN
FNFMTLS Load tray middle (Large coated paper full) sensor position sensor
Load tray lower limit (Small coated paper full) FNHPGKS Take-up knurling lift home position sensor
FNFMTSS
sensor FNHPGPN Alignment unit paddle lift home position sensor
FNHPAR Rear edge assist home position sensor FNHPJF Front edge alignment plate home position sensor
FNHPCSLS Staple-free stapling clinch home position sensor Alignment unit front alignment plate home position
FNHPJFN
FNHPDSS Staple drive home position sensor sensor

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 11
 No,/Display item Content Inner finisher (MX-FN27)
FNHPJR Rear edge alignment plate home position sensor No,/Display item Content
Alignment unit rear alignment plate home position FNM1 Transport motor
FNHPJRN
sensor
FNM10 Paddle motor
FNHPMSS Staple shift home position sensor
FNM2 Roller motor
FNHPMT Load tray home position sensor
FNM3 Front alignment motor
FNHPP Paddle home position sensor
FNM4 Rear alignment motor
Alignment unit paddle rotation home position
FNHPRPN FNM5 Assist motor
sensor
FNM6 Tray shift motor
FNHPS Oscillation home position sensor
FNM7 Staple shift motor
FNHPTF Front edge tongue home position sensor
FNM9 eco staple motor
FNHPTR Rear edge tongue home position sensor
FNSL Rear edge falling motor
FNMCSLS Staple-free stapling motor clock sensor
FNSTPLIF Staple motor
FNOCFD Front door open/close switch
FNSSS Staple safety switch
1K finisher (MX-FN28)
FNTBP Preprocessing timing sensor
FNULMT Load tray upper limit sensor No,/Display item Content
FSDU Saddle unit detection sensor BLT_M Release motor
FSE Saddle unit entry port sensor ENTRS_M Entry port transport motor
FSEB Saddle unit folding bundle paper exit sensor EXGPLT_M Paper exit guide plate open/close motor
Saddle unit folding bundle loading paper empty EXTRS_M Paper exit transport/Flapping, drawing roller motor
FSEPB
sensor JCTG_S Branch solenoid
FSESFS Saddle unit staple front staple empty sensor JOG_M Jogger motor
FSESRS Saddle unit staple rear staple empty sensor PSN_M Flapping motor
FSHPDSS Saddle unit staple drive home position sensor SFT_M Shift motor
FSHPEL Saddle unit switch lever home position sensor STPMOV_M Staple motor
FSHPG Saddle unit gripper home position sensor STPMV_M Staple shift motor
FSHPJ Saddle unit alignment plate home position sensor TRYLFT_M Tray lift motor
FSHPP Saddle unit paddle home position sensor UPTRS_M Proof transport motor
Saddle unit rear edge stopper home position
FSHPSR 1K Saddle finisher (MX-FN29)
sensor
FSHPT Saddle unit pushing home position sensor No,/Display item Content
FSMCE Saddle unit paper exit motor clock sensor BLT_M Release motor
FSMCF Saddle unit folding motor clock sensor ENDS_M Rear edge stopper motor
FSPV Saddle unit vertical path sensor ENTRS_M Entry port transport motor
EXGPLT_M Paper exit guide plate open/close motor
3K finisher punch unit (MX-PN16)
EXTRS_M Paper exit transport/Flapping, drawing roller motor
No,/Display item Content FLDPLT_M Folding blade motor
FC1DR Punch horizontal registration detection sensor 1 FLTRS_M Folding transport motor
FC2DR Punch horizontal registration detection sensor 2 GDLED Guide LED
FC3DR Punch horizontal registration detection sensor 3 JCTG_S Branch solenoid
FC4DR Punch horizontal registration detection sensor 4 JOG_M Jogger motor
FC5DR Punch horizontal registration detection sensor 5 LPRSRL_M Bundle transport lower pressure release motor
FCDFWP Punch dust full detection sensor PSN_M Flapping motor
FCEP Punch hole encoder sensor SFT_M Shift motor
FCHPP Punch hole home position sensor STPMOV_M Staple motor
FCHPR Punch horizontal registration home position sensor STPMV_M Staple shift motor
TRYLFT_M Tray lift motor
Paper pass unit (MX-RB25) UBTRS_M Bundle transport upper motor
No,/Display item Content Bundle transport upper pressure release/
UPRSRL_M
PDOS1 Relay cover open/close detection 1 Reference fence evacuation motor
PDOS2 Relay cover open/close detection 2 UPTRS_M Proof transport motor
PDPPD1 Relay transport detection 1
PDPPD2 Relay transport detection 2 1K Finisher punch unit (MX-PN15)
No,/Display item Content
PNCH_M Punch motor
PNCHMV_M Punch shift motor
3-3 STSMOV_M Punch horizontal registration detection shift motor
Purpose Operation test/check
3K Finisher (MX-FN30)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the load in
the finisher and the control circuit. No,/Display item Content
FNCDP Paddle drive clutch
Section Finisher
FNCDRUS Oscillation lower roller drive clutch
Operation/Procedure FNCEDCE Escape transport drive switch clutch
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel FNMAR Rear edge assist motor
key. FNMB Buffer motor
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. FNMDJFN Alignment unit front alignment plate drive motor
The selected load performs the operation. FNMDJRN Alignment unit rear alignment plate drive motor
FNMDT Tongue drive motor
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
FNME Discharge motor
FNMEC Entry port transport motor
FNMFECES Escape/Saddle transport switch flapper motor

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 12
 No,/Display item Content
FNMFR Rear edge falling motor Inner finisher (MX-FN27)
FNMGJFN Alignment unit front alignment plate lift motor
FNMGJRN Alignment unit rear alignment plate lift motor Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
FNMGMT Load paper tray lift motor
ALIGNMENT Alignment position
FNMGPN Alignment unit paddle lift motor A 50 - 150 100
adjustment
FNMGRS Take-up switch roller lift motor
ALIGNMENT Alignment position center
FNMJF Front alignment motor B 90 - 110 100
CENTER adjustment
FNMJR Rear alignment motor
STAPLE Stapling position
FNMMSS Staple horizontal shift motor C FRONT adjustment (one position in 50 - 150 100
FNMRPN Alignment unit paddle rotation motor front)
FNMS Oscillation motor STAPLE REAR Stapling position
FNMSLS Staple-free staple motor D adjustment (one position at 50 - 150 100
FNMSS Staple motor the rear)
STAPLE BOTH Stapling position
3K Saddle finisher (MX-FN31) E adjustment (staple pitch of 50 - 150 100
No,/Display item Content two positions binding)
FNCDP Paddle drive clutch MANUAL Manual stapling position
F STAPLE adjustment 80 - 120 100
FNCDRUS Oscillation lower roller drive clutch
POSITION
FNCEDCE Escape transport drive switch clutch
STAPLELESS Staple-free stapling
FNMAR Rear edge assist motor
G STAPLE Y position adjustment (Y : 70 - 130 100
FNMB Buffer motor Main scanning direction)
FNMDJFN Alignment unit front alignment plate drive motor STAPLELESS Staple-free stapling
FNMDJRN Alignment unit rear alignment plate drive motor H STAPLE X position adjustment (X : 85 - 115 100
FNMDT Tongue drive motor Sub scanning direction)
FNME Discharge motor STAPLELESS Staple-free stapling
FNMEC Entry port transport motor I STAPLE welding pressure 85 - 115 100
FNMFECES Escape/Saddle transport switch flapper motor PRESSURE adjustment (Motor rotation)
FNMFR Rear edge falling motor BELT Return belt pressure
J 90 - 110 100
FNMGJFN Alignment unit front alignment plate lift motor PRESSURE adjustment
FNMGJRN Alignment unit rear alignment plate lift motor MANUAL Manual staple time out
K 1-5 2
FNMGMT Load paper tray lift motor STAPLE TIME setting
FNMGPN Alignment unit paddle lift motor MANUAL Manual staple pull out time
STAPLE out setting
FNMGRS Take-up switch roller lift motor L 0 - 10 0
PULLOUT
FNMJF Front alignment motor
TIME
FNMJR Rear alignment motor
PUNCH X Punch hole position
FNMMSS Staple horizontal shift motor M adjustment (X : Sub 80 - 120 100
FNMRPN Alignment unit paddle rotation motor scanning direction)
FNMS Oscillation motor
FNMSLS Staple-free staple motor 1K Finisher (MX-FN28)/1K Saddle finisher (MX-FN29)
FNMSS Staple motor
Item/Display Setting Default
FSMC Saddle transport motor Content
range value
FSMDLE Saddle switch lever drive motor
STAPLE Stapling position
FSME Saddle discharge motor A 93 - 107 100
POSITION adjustment
FSMF Saddle folding motor JOGGER(A3) Jogger position adjustment
FSMG Saddle gripper motor B 97 - 103 100
A3
FSMJ Saddle alignment motor JOGGER(B4) Jogger position adjustment
FSMS Saddle staple motor C 97 - 103 100
B4
FSMSR Saddle rear edge stopper motor JOGGER(A4- Jogger position adjustment
D 97 - 103 100
R) A4-R
3K finisher punch unit (MX-PN16) JOGGER(A4) Jogger position adjustment
E 97 - 103 100
A4
No,/Display item Content
JOGGER(B5- Jogger position adjustment
FCMR Punch horizontal registration motor F 97 - 103 100
R) B5-R
FCP Punch hole motor
JOGGER(B5) Jogger position adjustment
G 97 - 103 100
B5
Paper pass unit (MX-RB25)
JOGGER(11 x Jogger position adjustment
H 97 - 103 100
No,/Display item Content 17) 11 x 17
PDPTM Relay unit transport motor JOGGER(8.5 x Jogger position adjustment
I 97 - 103 100
14) 8.5 x 14
JOGGER(8.5 x Jogger position adjustment
J 97 - 103 100
11R) 8.5 x 11R
3-10 JOGGER(8.5 x Jogger position adjustment
K 97 - 103 100
11) 8.5 x 11
Purpose Adjustment
JOGGER(12 x Jogger position adjustment
L 97 - 103 100
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the finisher. 18) 12 x 18
Section Finisher JOGGER(8KR) Jogger position adjustment
M 97 - 103 100
8K
Operation/Procedure
JOGGER(16K- Jogger position adjustment
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch N 97 - 103 100
R) 16K-R
panel. JOGGER(16K) Jogger position adjustment
O 97 - 103 100
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 16K
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 13
 Item/Display Setting Default Item/Display Setting Default
Content Content
range value range value
JOGGER(OTH Jogger position adjustment HITTING Flapping roller flapping
P 97 - 103 100
ER) Other AM ROLLER time adjustment 8.5 x 14 90 - 110 100
HITTING Flapping roller operation TIME(8.5 x 14)
Q ROLLER start timing adjustment A3 90 - 110 100 HITTING Flapping roller flapping
START(A3) ROLLER time adjustment 8.5 x 11R
AN 90 - 110 100
HITTING Flapping roller operation TIME(8.5 x
R ROLLER start timing adjustment B4 90 - 110 100 11R)
START(B4) HITTING Flapping roller flapping
HITTING Flapping roller operation AO ROLLER time adjustment 8.5 x 11 90 - 110 100
S ROLLER start timing adjustment 90 - 110 100 TIME(8.5 x 11)
START(A4-R) A4-R HITTING Flapping roller flapping
HITTING Flapping roller operation AP ROLLER time adjustment 12 x 18 90 - 110 100
T ROLLER start timing adjustment A4 90 - 110 100 TIME(12 x 18)
START(A4) HITTING Flapping roller flapping
HITTING Flapping roller operation AQ ROLLER time adjustment 8K 90 - 110 100
U ROLLER start timing adjustment 90 - 110 100 TIME(8K)
START(B5-R) B5-R HITTING Flapping roller flapping
HITTING Flapping roller operation AR ROLLER time adjustment 16K-R 90 - 110 100
V ROLLER start timing adjustment B5 90 - 110 100 TIME(16K-R)
START(B5) HITTING Flapping roller flapping
HITTING Flapping roller operation AS ROLLER time adjustment 16K 90 - 110 100
ROLLER start timing adjustment 11 TIME(16K)
W 90 - 110 100
START(11 x x 17 HITTING Flapping roller flapping
17) AT ROLLER time adjustment Other 90 - 110 100
HITTING Flapping roller operation TIME(OTHER)
ROLLER start timing adjustment 8.5 HITTING Sheet number type
X 90 - 110 100
START(8.5 x x 14 AU ROLLER flapping roller flapping time 90 - 110 100
14) TIME(1-10) adjustment 1 - 10 sheets
HITTING Flapping roller operation HITTING Sheet number type
ROLLER start timing adjustment 8.5 AV ROLLER flapping roller flapping time 90 - 110 100
Y 90 - 110 100
START(8.5 x x 11R TIME(11-20) adjustment 11 - 20 sheets
11R) HITTING Sheet number type
HITTING Flapping roller operation AW ROLLER flapping roller flapping time 90 - 110 100
ROLLER start timing adjustment 8.5 TIME(21-30) adjustment 21 - 30 sheets
Z 90 - 110 100
START(8.5 x x 11 HITTING Sheet number type
11) AX ROLLER flapping roller flapping time 90 - 110 100
HITTING Flapping roller operation TIME(31-40) adjustment 31 - 40 sheets
ROLLER start timing adjustment 12 HITTING Sheet number type
AA 90 - 110 100
START(12 x x 18 AY ROLLER flapping roller flapping time 90 - 110 100
18) TIME(40-50) adjustment 41 - 50 sheets
HITTING Flapping roller operation SKEW Skew correction striking
AZ 75 - 125 100
AB ROLLER start timing adjustment 8K 90 - 110 100 QUANTITY(A3) quantity adjustment A3
START(8K) SKEW Skew correction striking
HITTING Flapping roller operation BA 75 - 125 100
QUANTITY(B4) quantity adjustment B4
AC ROLLER start timing adjustment 90 - 110 100 SKEW Skew correction striking
START(16K-R) 16K-R BB QUANTITY(A4- quantity adjustment A4-R 75 - 125 100
HITTING Flapping roller operation R)
AD ROLLER start timing adjustment 90 - 110 100 SKEW Skew correction striking
START(16K) 16K BC 75 - 125 100
QUANTITY(A4) quantity adjustment A4
HITTING Flapping roller operation SKEW Skew correction striking
ROLLER start timing adjustment BD QUANTITY(B5- quantity adjustment B5-R 75 - 125 100
AE 90 - 110 100
START(OTHE Other R)
R) SKEW Skew correction striking
HITTING Flapping roller flapping BE 75 - 125 100
QUANTITY(B5) quantity adjustment B5
AF ROLLER time adjustment A3 90 - 110 100 SKEW Skew correction striking
TIME(A3) BF 75 - 125 100
QUANTITY(A5) quantity adjustment A5
HITTING Flapping roller flapping SKEW Skew correction striking
AG ROLLER time adjustment B4 90 - 110 100 BG QUANTITY(11 quantity adjustment 11 x 75 - 125 100
TIME(B4) x 17) 17
HITTING Flapping roller flapping SKEW Skew correction striking
AH ROLLER time adjustment A4-R 90 - 110 100 BH QUANTITY(8.5 quantity adjustment 8.5 x 75 - 125 100
TIME(A4-R) x 14) 14
HITTING Flapping roller flapping SKEW Skew correction striking
AI ROLLER time adjustment A4 90 - 110 100 BI QUANTITY(8.5 quantity adjustment 8.5 x 75 - 125 100
TIME(A4) x 11R) 11R
HITTING Flapping roller flapping SKEW Skew correction striking
AJ ROLLER time adjustment B5-R 90 - 110 100 BJ QUANTITY(8.5 quantity adjustment 8.5 x 75 - 125 100
TIME(B5-R) x 11) 11
HITTING Flapping roller flapping SKEW Skew correction striking
AK ROLLER time adjustment B5 90 - 110 100 BK QUANTITY(5.5 quantity adjustment 5.5 x 75 - 125 100
TIME(B5) x 8.5) 8.5
HITTING Flapping roller flapping SKEW Skew correction striking
AL ROLLER time adjustment 11 x 17 90 - 110 100 BL QUANTITY(12 quantity adjustment 12 x 75 - 125 100
TIME(11 x 17) x 18) 18

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 14
 Item/Display Setting Default Setting Default
Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
SKEW Skew correction striking ALIGNMENT Alignment position center
BM 75 - 125 100 D 90 - 110 100
QUANTITY(8K) quantity adjustment 8K CENTER adjustment
SKEW Skew correction striking STAPLE Stapling position
BN QUANTITY(16 quantity adjustment 16K-R 75 - 125 100 E FRONT adjustment (one position in 50 - 150 100
K-R) front)
SKEW Skew correction striking STAPLE Stapling position
BO QUANTITY(16 quantity adjustment 16K 75 - 125 100 F REAR adjustment (one position at 50 - 150 100
K) the rear)
SKEW Skew correction striking STAPLE Stapling position
BP QUANTITY(OT quantity adjustment Other 75 - 125 100 G BOTH adjustment (staple pitch of 50 - 150 100
HER) two positions binding)
SKEW Skew correction striking MANUAL Manual stapling position
BQ 0-1 0
MODE(A3) control switch A3 H STAPLE adjustment 80 - 120 100
SKEW Skew correction striking POSITION
BR 0-1 0
MODE(B4) control switch B4 STAPLELESS Staple-free stapling
SKEW Skew correction striking I STAPLE position adjustment 80 - 115 100
BS 0-1 0
MODE(A4-R) control switch A4-R POSITION
SKEW Skew correction striking BUFFER Buffer paper shift quantity
BT 0-1 0 J 40 - 160 100
MODE(A4) control switch A4 SHIFT(1-2) adjustment (1-2 sheets)
SKEW Skew correction striking BUFFER Buffer paper shift quantity
BU 0-1 0 K 40 - 160 100
MODE(B5-R) control switch B5-R SHIFT(2-3) adjustment (2-3 sheets)
SKEW Skew correction striking PUNCH X Punch hole position
BV 0-1 0
MODE(B5) control switch B5 L adjustment (X : Sub 80 - 120 100
SKEW Skew correction striking scanning direction)
BW 0-1 0
MODE(A5) control switch A5 PUNCH Y Punch hole position
SKEW Skew correction striking M adjustment (Y : Main 97 - 115 100
BX 0-1 0 scanning direction)
MODE(11 x 17) control switch 11 x 17
SKEW Skew correction striking EJECTING Paper exit roller height
N 70 - 130 100
BY MODE(8.5 x control switch 8.5 x 14 0-1 0 ROLLER adjustment
14) KNURLING Take-up knurling height
O 0 - 150 100
SKEW Skew correction striking ROLLER adjustment
BZ MODE(8.5 x control switch 8.5 x 11R 0-1 0 KNURLING Take-up knurling
11R) P ROLLER evacuation height 0 - 200 100
SKEW Skew correction striking RETREAT adjustment
CA MODE(8.5 x control switch 8.5 x 11 0-1 0 STAPLELESS Staple-free stapling
11) Q STAPLE welding pressure 85 - 115 100
SKEW Skew correction striking PRESSURE adjustment (Motor rotation)
CB MODE(5.5 x control switch 5.5 x 8.5 0-1 0 DELIVERY Paper exit speed
8.5) R SPEED(NON- adjustment (Non-sort) 90 - 110 100
SKEW Skew correction striking SORT)
CC 0-1 0
MODE(12 x 18) control switch 12 x 18 DELIVERY Paper exit speed
SKEW Skew correction striking S SPEED(ESCA adjustment (Escape) 90 - 110 100
CD 0-1 0 PE)
MODE(8K) control switch 8K
SKEW Skew correction striking EJECTING Bundle paper eject speed
CE 0-1 0 T SPEED(SHIFT) adjustment (Shift bundle 95 - 105 100
MODE(16K-R) control switch 16K-R
SKEW Skew correction striking ejection)
CF 0-1 0 EJECTING Bundle paper eject speed
MODE(16K) control switch 16K
SKEW Skew correction striking U SPEED(STAPL adjustment (Staple bundle 95 - 105 100
CG MODE(OTHER control switch Other 0-1 0 E) ejection)
) MANUAL Manual staple time out
V 1-5 2
PUNCH Y Punch hole position STAPLE TIME setting
CH adjustment (Y : Main 95 - 105 100 MANUAL Manual staple pull out time
scanning direction) STAPLE out setting
W 0 - 10 0
PUNCH X Punch hole position PULLOUT
CI adjustment (X : Sub 85 - 115 100 TIME
scanning direction) STITCHING Saddle staple position
X 80 - 120 100
SADDLE Saddle stitching position UNIT adjustment
CJ 85 - 115 100 STITCHING Saddle staple position
STITCHING adjustment Y 80 - 120 100
SADDLE Saddle folding position UNIT THIN adjustment (Thin paper)
CK 85 - 115 100 FOLDING Saddle folding position
FOLDING adjustment Z 80 - 120 100
FOLDING Folding time adjustment UNIT adjustment
CL 0 - 29 0 FOLDING Saddle folding position
TIME * AA 80 - 120 100
UNIT THIN adjustment (Thin paper)
* This is displayed only when MX-FN29 is connected. SADDLE Saddle alignment width
AB 80 - 120 100
ALIGNMENT adjustment
3K Finisher (MX-FN30) / 3K Saddle finisher (MX-FN31)
STITCHING Saddle staple folding
AC 30 - 70 50
Setting Default AND FOLDING position adjustment
Item/Display Content
range value SADDLE Saddle folding position
ALIGNMENT Alignment position AD FOLDING(A4- adjustment A4-R/8.5 x 30 - 70 50
A 50 - 150 100
adjustment R/8.5 x 11R) 11R
FRONT Front alignment position SADDLE Saddle folding position
B 50 - 150 100
ADJUST adjustment AE FOLDING(B4/ adjustment B4/8.5 x 14 30 - 70 50
REAR ADJUST Rear alignment position 8.5 x 14)
C 50 - 150 100
adjustment

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 15
 Setting Default Display Content
Item/Display Content
range value LLSW LCC upper limit switch
SADDLE Saddle folding position LPED LCC tray paper empty sensor
AF FOLDING(A3/ adjustment A3/11 x 17 30 - 70 50 LPFD LCC transport sensor
11 x 17) LPFPD LCC transport sensor 2
SADDLE Saddle folding position LPUD LCC paper upper surface sensor
AG FOLDING(12 x adjustment 12 x 18 30 - 70 50
LRE LCC lift motor encoder sensor
18)
LUD LCC tray upper limit sensor
SADDLE Saddle folding position
LWRSW LCC reverse winding detection switch
AH FOLDING(CUS adjustment Custom size 30 - 70 50
TOM)

4-3
4 Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads
4-2
in the desk/large capacity tray (LCC), and
Purpose Operation test/check the control circuit of those.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
sors and detectors in the desk/large capac-
ity tray (LCC), and the control circuit of Section.
those. Section Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
Section Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC) Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select the load item that is required to operation check with the
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- touch panel key.
played. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active The selected load performs the operation.
are highlighted. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Desk Desk
Display Content Display Content
D1MDC Desk 3 installation detection connector D1LM Tray 3 lift-up motor
D1PED Desk 3 paper empty sensor D1PFC Tray 3 paper feed clutch
D1PPD Desk 3 paper transport sensor D2LM Tray 4 lift-up motor
D1PQD Desk 3 remaining paper quantity sensor D2PFC Tray 4 paper feed clutch
D1PRED1 Desk 3 paper rear edge sensor 1 DPFM Desk transport motor
D1PRED2 Desk 3 paper rear edge sensor 2 DPTRC Desk paper transport clutch
D1PRED3 Desk 3 paper rear edge sensor 3
D1PRED4 Desk 3 paper rear edge sensor 4 Tandem LCC
D1ULD Desk 3 upper limit detector Display Content
D2MDC Desk 4 installation detection connector D1LM Tray 3 lift-up motor
D2PED Desk 4 paper empty sensor D1PFC Tray 3 paper feed clutch
D2PPD Desk 4 paper transport sensor D2LM Tray 4 lift-up motor
D2PQD Desk 4 remaining paper quantity sensor D2PFC Tray 4 paper feed clutch
D2PRED1 Desk 4 paper rear edge sensor 1 DPFM Desk transport motor
D2PRED2 Desk 4 paper rear edge sensor 2 DPTRC Desk paper transport clutch
D2PRED3 Desk 4 paper rear edge sensor 3
D2PRED4 Desk 4 paper rear edge sensor 4 LCC
D2ULD Desk 4 upper limit detector
Display Content
LLM LCC lift motor
Tandem LCC
LPFC LCC paper feed clutch
Display Content LPFM LCC paper transport motor
D1CDT Desk 3 insertion detection LPFS LCC paper feed solenoid
D1LUD Desk 3 upper limit sensor LTRC LCC transport clutch
D1PED Desk 3 paper empty sensor
D1PFD Desk 3 paper transport sensor
D1PPD1 Desk 3 paper transport sensor 1
4-5
D1PPD2 Desk 3 paper transport sensor 2
D1PQD Desk 3 remaining paper quantity sensor Purpose Operation test/check
D2CDT Desk 4 insertion detection Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the paper
D2LUD Desk 4 upper limit sensor feed desk paper transport clutch (DTRC)
D2PED Desk 4 paper empty sensor and the LCC paper transport clutch (LTRC).
D2PQD Desk 4 remaining paper quantity sensor
Section Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
DHOD Horizontal transport open/close detection
Operation/Procedure
LCC Check the ON operation
Display Content Press the button of the code name for checking the ON operation.
24VM LCC 24V power monitor Checking is started. When the operation is normal, the button on
LCCD LCC main unit connection sensor the display is highlighted. When it is abnormal, the button is not
LCLSW LCC tray open/close switch highlighted.
LDD LCC tray lower limit sensor Check the OFF operation

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 16
Press the highlighted button which is ON.
5-4
When the operation is normal, the highlighted button on the display
returns to the normal display. When it is abnormal, the highlighted Purpose Operation test/check
display is maintained. Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the dis-
charge lamp and the control circuit.
Button Content
Section Process
DTRC Desk transport clutch
LTRC A4 LCC transport clutch
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key.
When [ALL] key is pressed, all the items are selected.
5 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The selected discharge lamp is lighted for 30 sec.
5-1 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Purpose Operation test/check DL_K Discharge lamp K
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the display, DL_C Discharge lamp C
LCD in the operation panel, and control cir- DL_M Discharge lamp M
cuit. DL_Y Discharge lamp Y
Section Operation panel
Operation/Procedure
The LCD is changed as shown below.
6
The contrast changes every 2sec from the current level to MAX 
MIN  the current level. During this period, each LED is lighted. 6-1
The LCD display contrast change and the LED lighting status are Purpose Operation test/check
checked. Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in
the paper transport system (clutches and
solenoids) and the control circuits.
5-2 Section Paper transport/Paper exit section
Purpose Operation test/check Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the heater 1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
lamp and the control circuit. key.
Section Fusing 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Operation/Procedure The selected load performs the operation.
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
key. Load operation check method:
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
The selected heater lamp operates ON/OFF. there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
sound.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Heater lamp operation check method: Display Content
Remove the front cabinet upper and the paper exit tray, and the C1LUM Paper tray lift motor (Paper feed tray 1)
lighting status of each heater lamp can be checked through the C1PUC Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1)
clearance between the fusing pressure release drive gear and the C2LUM Paper tray lift motor (Paper feed tray 2)
frame fusing section. C2PUC Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2)
CPFC1 Tray vertical transport clutch 1
HL_UM Main heater lamp (Upper main) CPFC2 Tray vertical transport clutch 2
HL_US Sub heater lamp (Upper sub) CPFM Transport motor
HL_LM Heater lamp (Lower main) FUM Fusing motor
HPFC Horizontal transport clutch
MPFS Paper feed motor solenoid (Manual feed tray)
MPUC Paper feed clutch (Manual feed tray)
5-3 OSM Offset motor
Purpose Operation test/check PFM Transport motor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner POGS Paper exit gate solenoid
lamp and the control circuit. POM Paper exit motor
RRM Registration motor
Section Scanner (reading)
SBM_F Reverse motor (normal rotation)
Operation/Procedure SBM_R Reverse motor (reverse rotation)
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel TRC_DSK Desk clutch
key. TRC_FIN Finisher clutch
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. TRC_LCC LCC clutch
The scanner lamp lights up for 10 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 17
 6-2 6-4
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of each fan Function (Purpose) Used to check the cleaning operation of the
motor and its control circuit. main charger
Section Others Section Process
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel 1) Select the items to be checked with the touch panel key
key. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
MC (K) COUNT Main charger cleaner operation check
The selected load performs the operation.
MC (C) COUNT
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
MC (M) COUNT
Press [ALL] key to select all the fans collectively. MC (Y) COUNT
Load operation check method: ALL All color
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
sound.
6-6
Display Content
Purpose Operation test/check
FUFM Fusing cooling fan
POFM2 Paper exit cooling fan
Function (Purpose) Used to perform fusing pressure release
PROFM1 Process fan 1
and applying, and to check the operations
PROFM2 Process fan 2
of the control circuits.
PSFM Power cooling fan Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [FUSER] key to highlight it.
6-3 2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and fusing pressure applying and fus-
ing pressure release are repeated.
Purpose Operation test/check
During this period, the status of the fusing roller pressure is dis-
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the trans- played.
port unit and the control circuit.
Section Process (Transport) PRINT Fusing pressure Fusing pressure applying -> Fusing
applying pressure release -> (Fusing pressure
Operation/Procedure
FREE Fusing pressure applying) The operation is repeated.
1) Select the operation mode with the mode select button. release

Mode select button Content

TC1 Primary transfer (normal rotation)
TC1_R Primary transfer (reverse rotation) 6-90
TC2 Secondary transfer
Purpose Setting
2) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation of the mode Function (Purpose) Used to reset the machine to the factory
selected in 1) is performed. setting. (The scanner is set to the lock
enable position)
Mode
select
Mode
Content NOTE Section Scanner
display
button Operation/Procedure
TC1 BLACK Monochrome Black mode position -> Color 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
mode position mode position -> Drum
separation position -> (Black
The scanner is shifted to the lock enable position and stopped.
COLOR Color mode
position mode position)
FREE Non-transport (Repeated in this sequence.)
position
TC1_R BLACK Monochrome
mode position
Black mode position -> Drum
separation position -> Color
7
FREE Non-transport mode position -> (Black mode
position position) (Repeated in this 7-1
COLOR Color mode sequence.)
Purpose Setting
position
TC2 PRINT Print position Print position -> Drum Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of
FREE Non-transport separation position aging.
position (Repeated in this sequence) Section Others
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The machine is rebooted in the aging mode.
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.

AGING Aging operation setup

INTERVAL Intermittent operation setting

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 18
 MISFEED DISABLE JAM detection ignoring setting 7-12
FUSING DISABLE Fusing unit ignoring setting
WARMUP DISABLE Warming up ignoring setting
Purpose Operation test/check
DV CHECK DISABLE Developing unit ignoring setting Function (Purpose) The document reading number of sheets
SHADING DISABLE Shading correction operation omitting setting setting (for aging operation)
CCD GAIN FREE CCD gain adjustment omitting setting Section SPF
Operation/Procedure
1) Set document reading quantity with 10-key.
7-6 (Setting range:0 - 255)
Purpose Setting 2) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating intermittent aging The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
cycle. after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.

Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the intermittent aging operation cycle (unit: sec) with 10-
8
key.
2) Press [OK] key. 8-1
The time entered in procedure 1) is set. Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
* The interval time that can be set is 1 to 900 (sec). Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operations of
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here- the developing voltage in each print mode
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed. and the control circuit.
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the
low speed are also adjusted simultane-
ously.
7-8
Section Process (Developing)
Purpose Operation display
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to display the warm-up time. 1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] keys on the touch
Section panel.
Operation/Procedure 2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
Press [EXECUTE] key. 3) Enter the setting value with 10-key. (The value specified on the
Counting of the warm-up time is started and the time required for label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.)
warm-up is displayed * When the r s key is pressed, the setting value of each item
* Interruption of counting by pressing [EXECUTE] key is inhibited. can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
4) Press [OK] key. Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.

Adjustment Actual
7-9 Item/Display (Mode) Content
range voltage
Purpose Operation test/check MIDDLE A MIDDLE Developing K 0 - 600 –450V
Function (Purpose) Color setting in the color copy test mode SPEED bias voltage +/- 5V
DVB_K (Middle
(Used to check the copy operation and the
speed mode)
image quality for each color).
B MIDDLE Developing C 0 - 600 –450V
Section SPEED bias voltage +/- 5V
Operation/Procedure DVB_C (Middle
speed mode)
1) Select the copy color with the touch panel key.
C MIDDLE Developing M 0 - 600 –450V
(Two or more colors can be selected.)
SPEED bias voltage +/- 5V
The key of the selected color is highlighted. DVB_M (Middle
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. speed mode)
D MIDDLE Developing Y 0 - 600 –450V
Copying is performed with the selected color.
SPEED bias voltage +/- 5V
When [CLOSE] key is pressed, the display goes into the copy oper- DVB_Y (Middle
ation menu in the simulation mode. speed mode)
LOW A LOW Developing K 0 - 600 –450V
K Setup/cancel of black SPEED bias voltage +/- 5V
C Setup/cancel of cyan DVB_K (Low speed
M Setup/cancel of magenta mode)
Y Setup/cancel of yellow B LOW Developing C 0 - 600 -450V
SPEED bias voltage ±5V
DVB_C (Low speed
mode)
C LOW Developing M 0 - 600 -450V
SPEED bias voltage ±5V
DVB_M (Low speed
mode)
D LOW Developing Y 0 - 600 -450V
SPEED bias voltage ±5V
DVB_Y (Low speed
mode)

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 19
 8-2 Adjustment Actual
Item/Display (Mode) Content
range voltage
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
MIDDLE A MIDDLE Main charger K 50 - 850 -630V
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of SPEED grid voltage ±5V
the main charger grid voltage in each GB_K (Middle
printer mode and the control circuit. speed mode)
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the B MIDDLE Main charger C 50 - 850 -630V
low speed are also adjusted simultane- SPEED grid voltage ±5V
ously. GB_C (Middle
speed mode)
Section Process (Charging)
C MIDDLE Main charger M 50 - 850 -630V
Operation/Procedure SPEED grid voltage ±5V
1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] keys on the touch GB_M (Middle
panel. speed mode)
D MIDDLE Main charger Y 50 - 850 -630V
2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
SPEED grid voltage ±5V
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. (The value specified GB_Y (Middle
on the label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.) speed mode)
* When the r s key is pressed, the setting value of each item LOW A LOW Main charger K 50 - 850 -598V
can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. SPEED grid voltage ±5V
GB_K (Low speed
4) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved. mode)
B LOW Main charger C 50 - 850 -598V
SPEED grid voltage ±5V
GB_C (Low speed
mode)
C LOW Main charger M 50 - 850 -598V
SPEED grid voltage ±5V
GB_M (Low speed
mode)
D LOW Main charger Y 50 - 850 -598V
SPEED grid voltage ±5V
GB_Y (Low speed
mode)

8-6
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
the transport voltage and the control circuit.
Section Process (Transport)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Enter the default value specified on the following list.
3) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.

Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A TC1 LOW SPEED CL K Primary transfer bias Low speed 0 - 255 85
K
B TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K adjustment value Middle speed 0 - 255 106
C TC1 LOW SPEED CL C Low speed 0 - 255 85
C
D TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL C Middle speed 0 - 255 106
Color
E TC1 LOW SPEED CL M Low speed 0 - 255 85
M
F TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL M Middle speed 0 - 255 106
G TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y Y Low speed 0 - 255 85
H TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Y Middle speed 0 - 255 106
I TC1 LOW SPEED BW K Low speed 0 - 255 85
Monochrome K
J TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW K Middle speed 0 - 255 106
K TC2 PLAIN CL SPX Secondary transfer bias Front surface 0 - 255 96
Color Standard
L TC2 PLAIN CL DPX adjustment value Back surface 0 - 255 96
paper
M TC2 PLAIN BW SPX Front surface 0 - 255 96
Monochrome <Middle speed>
N TC2 PLAIN BW DPX Back surface 0 - 255 96
O TC2 HEAVY1 CL SPX Front surface 0 - 255 90
Color Heavy paper
P TC2 HEAVY1 CL DPX Back surface 0 - 255 96
1<106 -176g/m2>
Q TC2 HEAVY1 BW SPX Front surface 0 - 255 90
Monochrome <Low speed >
R TC2 HEAVY1 BW DPX Back surface 0 - 255 96
S TC2 HEAVY2 CL SPX Front surface 0 - 255 90
Color Heavy paper 2
T TC2 HEAVY2 CL DPX Back surface 0 - 255 96
<177 - 220g/m2>
U TC2 HEAVY2 BW SPX Front surface 0 - 255 90
Monochrome <Low speed >
V TC2 HEAVY2 BW DPX Back surface 0 - 255 96

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 20
 Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
W TC2 HEAVY3 CL SPX Secondary transfer bias Front surface 0 - 255 90
Color Heavy paper 3
X TC2 HEAVY3 CL DPX adjustment value Back surface 0 - 255 96
<221- 256g/ m2>
Y TC2 HEAVY3 BW SPX Front surface 0 - 255 90
Monochrome <Low speed>
Z TC2 HEAVY3 BW DPX Back surface 0 - 255 96
AA TC2 HEAVY4 CL Color Heavy paper 4 <257 - 300g/m2> 0 - 255 90
AB TC2 HEAVY4 BW Monochrome <Low speed > 0 - 255 90
AC TC2 OHP CL Color 0 - 255 103
OHP <Low speed >
AD TC2 OHP BW Monochrome 0 - 255 103
AE TC2 ENVELOPE CL Color 0 - 255 90
Envelope <Low speed >
AF TC2 ENVELOPE BW Monochrome 0 - 255 90
AG TC2 THIN CL Color 0 - 255 96
Thin paper <Low speed >
AH TC2 THIN BW Monochrome 0 - 255 96
AI TC2 GLOSSY PAPER CL Color 0 - 255 90
Gross paper <Low speed >
AJ TC2 GLOSSY PAPER BW Monochrome 0 - 255 90
AK TC2 EMBOSS CL Color 0 - 255 90
Embossed paper <Low speed >
AL TC2 EMBOSS BW Monochrome 0 - 255 90
AM TC2 LABEL CL Color 0 - 255 90
Label <Low speed >
AN TC2 LABEL BW Monochrome 0 - 255 90
AO TC2 FRONT EDGE LOW SPX Front edge bias adjustment In low speed front surface print 0 - 255 76
AP TC2 FRONT EDGE LOW DPX value In low speed back surface print 0 - 255 69
AQ TC2 FRONT EDGE MIDDLE SPX In middle speed front surface print 0 - 255 83
AR TC2 FRONT EDGE MIDDLE DPX In middle speed back surface print 0 - 255 83
AS TC2 BACKEND LOW SPX Rear edge bias adjustment In low speed front surface print 0 - 255 76
AT TC2 BACKEND LOW DPX value In low speed back surface print 0 - 255 69
AU TC2 BACKEND MIDDLE SPX In middle speed front surface print 0 - 255 0
AV TC2 BACKEND MIDDLE DPX In middle speed back surface print 0 - 255 0
AW TC2 INTERVAL LOW SPEED Bias reference value between In low speed print (+ pole) 0 - 255 66
AX TC2 INTERVAL MIDDLE SPEED papers In middle speed print (+ pole) 0 - 255 109
AY TC2 CLEANING MINUS LOW SPEED Cleaning negative bias In low speed print (- pole) 0 - 255 54
AZ TC2 CLEANING MINUS MIDDLE SPEED adjustment value In middle speed print (- pole) 0 - 255 62
BA TC2 CLEANING PLUS LOW SPEED Cleaning negative bias In low speed print (+ pole) 0 - 255 66
BB TC2 CLEANING PLUS MIDDLE SPEED adjustment value In middle speed print (+ pole) 0 - 255 109
BC PTC LOW SPEED CL PTC current adjustment value Low speed 0 - 255 109
Color
BD PTC MIDDLE SPEED CL Middle speed 0 - 255 206
BE PTC LOW SPEED BW Low speed 0 - 255 109
Monochrome
BF PTC MIDDLE SPEED BW Middle speed 0 - 255 206
BG CASE VOLT LOW CL PTC case voltage adjustment Low speed 0 - 255 0
Color
BH CASE VOLT MIDDLE CL value Middle speed 0 - 255 0
BI CASE VOLT LOW BW Low speed 0 - 255 0
Monochrome
BJ CASE VOLT MIDDLE BW Middle speed 0 - 255 0
BK DHV LOW SPEED CL SPX Separation bias reference Front surface 0 - 255 80
Color
BL DHV LOW SPEED CL DPX value Back surface 0 - 255 109
Low speed
BM DHV LOW SPEED BW SPX Front surface 0 - 255 80
Monochrome
BN DHV LOW SPEED BW DPX Back surface 0 - 255 109
BO DHV MIDLLE SPEED CL SPX Front surface 0 - 255 226
Color
BP DHV MIDLLE SPEED CL DPX Back surface 0 - 255 226
Middle speed
BQ DHV MIDLLE SPEED BW SPX Front surface 0 - 255 226
Monochrome
BR DHV MIDLLE SPEED BW DPX Back surface 0 - 255 226

8-10 Item/Display Setting Default Changeabl

Contents
range value e range
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
MIDDLE Main charger
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of -500 -
A SPEED total current K 50 - 100 70
the main charger total current output in -1000μA
MC_K
each printer mode and the control circuit. MIDDLE Main charger
-500 -
Section Process (Charging) B SPEED total current C 50 - 100 70
MI -1000μA
MC_C
Operation/Procedure DD
MIDDLE Main charger
LE -500 -
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch C SPEED total current M 50 - 100 70
-1000μA
panel. MC_M
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. MIDDLE Main charger
-500 -
D SPEED total current Y 50 - 100 70
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) -1000μA
MC_Y

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 21
 Item/Display Setting Default Changeabl
Contents
range value e range 10
LOW1 Main charger
-500 -
A SPEED total current K 50 - 100 70
-1000μA 10-1
MC_K
LOW1 Main charger Purpose Operation test/check
-500 -
B SPEED total current C 50 - 100 70
-1000μA Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner
LO MC_C
supply mechanism (toner motor) and the
W LOW1 Main charger
-500 - related circuit.
C SPEED total current M 50 - 100 70
-1000μA
MC_M Section Process (Developing)
LOW1 Main charger Operation/Procedure
-500 -
D SPEED total current Y 50 - 100 70
-1000μA 1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key.
MC_Y
When [ALL] key is pressed, all the items are selected.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The selected load operation is performed for 10 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
9
9-2 This simulation must be executed without installing the toner car-
Purpose Operation test/check tridges.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
TNM_K Toner motor K
sors and detectors in the paper reverse
TNM_C Toner motor C
section (duplex section) and its control cir-
TNM_M Toner motor M
cuit.
TNM_Y Toner motor Y
Section Duplex
Operation/Procedure
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
10-2
played.
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active Purpose Operation test/check
are highlighted. Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner
remaining quantity sensor and control cir-
APPD1 ADU paper transport detector 1 cuit
APPD2 ADU paper transport detector 2
Section Toner supply section
DSW_ADU ADU paper guide open/close detector
Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] key
No toner remaining : Normal display
9-3
Toner remaining : Highlighted display
Purpose Operation test/check
TFSD_K Hopper remaining quantity sensor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in
TFSD_C
the paper reverse section (duplex section)
TFSD_M
and its control circuit.
TFSD_Y
Section Duplex
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
key. If this simulation is executed it will be forcibly supplied to the devel-
oping unit, resulting in over toner and trouble.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The selected load performs the operation.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.

Display Content
ADUM1 ADU motor 1
ADUM2 ADU motor 2
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 22
10-3
16
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner
16--
cartridge discharge sensor and the related
circuit. Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Section Process (Developing) Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble.
Operation/Procedure Section SCN MFP PWB / PCU PWB
1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key. Operation/Procedure
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
TCED_K Toner cartridge discharge K
TCED_C Toner cartridge discharge C
TCED_M Toner cartridge discharge M
TCED_Y Toner cartridge discharge Y
21
21-1
If this simulation is executed, push back the toner cartridge to the
original position. Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the maintenance cycle.
Section
Operation/Procedure
13 * Do not change the default setting value of the maintenance
counter on SIM21-1. The replacement timing of the fusing clean-
13-- ing roller, the filter and PS paper dust removal cleaner may not
clarify.
Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.)
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble. panel.
Section 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Operation/Procedure 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Default
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble. Item/Display Content Setting range
value
A MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0: Default 300K
COUNTER counter (Total) 1 - 300: 1K - 300K
(TOTAL) 999:Free
14 B MAINTENANCE
COUNTER
Maintenance
counter
0: Default
1 - 300: 1K- 300K
300K

(COLOR) (Color) 999:Free

14--
Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag H3, H4, H5
troubles.
22
Section
Operation/Procedure
22-1
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data output/
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble. Check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the print count value in each
section and each operation mode.
(Used to check the maintenance timing.)
15 Section
Operation/Procedure
15-- Change the display page with scroll key on the touch panel.
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Item Display Content
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U6" trouble.
Total TOTAL OUT Total output All prints including
Section LCC output (BW) quantity of black jams
Operation/Procedure quantity and white
TOTAL OUT Total output All prints including
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
(COL) quantity of color jams
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 23
 Item Display Content 22-3
Total use TOTAL (BW) Total use quantity Effective paper
quantity of black and white (including self print, Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
excluding jams) Function (Purpose) Used to check misfeed positions and the
TOTAL (COL) Total use quantity Effective paper misfeed count of each position.
of full color (including self print, * Presumption of the faulty point by this
excluding jams) data is possible.
TOTAL Total use quantity Effective paper
(2COL) of 2-color (including self print, Section
excluding jams) Operation/Procedure
TOTAL Total use quantity Effective paper The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one
(3COL) of 3-color (including self print, up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
excluding jams)
TOTAL Total use quantity Effective paper
(SGL_COL) of single color (including self print,
excluding jams) 22-4
Copy COPY (BW) Black and white Billing target Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
copy counter (excluding self print)
COPY (COL) Full color copy Billing target Function (Purpose) Used to check the trouble (self diag) his-
counter (excluding self print) tory.
COPY (2COL) 2-color copy Billing target Section
counter (excluding self print)
Operation/Procedure
COPY Single color copy Billing target
(SGL_COL) counter (excluding self print) The trouble history is displayed from the latest one up to 30 items.
Print PRINT (BW) Black and white Billing target (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
print counter (excluding self print)
PRINT (COL) Full color print Billing target
counter (excluding self print) 22-5
PRINT (2COL) 2-color print Billing target
counter (excluding self print) Purpose Others
PRINT (3COL) 3-color print Billing target Function (Purpose) Used to check the ROM version of each
counter (excluding self print) unit (section).
PRINT Single color print Billing target
Section Firmware
(SGL_COL) counter (excluding self print)
Document DOC FIL (BW) Black and white Operation/Procedure
filing document filing The ROM version of the installed unit in each section is displayed.
print counter When there is any trouble in the software, use this simulation to
DOC FIL Color document check the ROM version, and upgrade the version if necessary.
(COL) filing print counter
DOC FIL 2-color document Display Content
(2COL) filing print counter Serial No. (The codes for November and
S/N
DOC FIL(SGL Single color December are "X" and "Y" respectively.)
COL) document filing BUNDLE Bundle version
print counter ICU-MAIN ICUM (MAIN section)
Other OTHER (BW) Black and white Self print quantity ICU-BIOS ICUM (BIOS section)
other counter ASIC-MAIN ASIC (MAIN section)
OTHER (COL) Color other Self print quantity ASIC-SUB ASIC (SUB section)
counter
LANGUAGE Language support data version
LANGUAGE (LIST) Language data for list printing
EOSA ESCP font ROM
22-2 UNICONTENTS Contents data for display
SIM-TEXT Language data for simulation
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check PCL (PROFILE) Color profile data
Function (Purpose) Used to check the total number of misfeed POWER-CON Power controller program
and troubles. (When the number of total FONT BARCODE Font data for bar code
jam is considerably great, it is judged as FONT PS PS font data
necessary for repair.) FONT PCL PCL font data
Section FONT SPDL Simple PDL font data
FONT OFFICE Office Direct font data
Operation/Procedure
WATER MARK Water mark data
The paper jam, trouble counter value is displayed. E-MANUAL Users manual data
OCR-DIC OCR dictionary data
MACHINE JAM Machine JAM counter
SCU SCU
RSPF/DSPF JAM SPF JAM counter
DSPF DSPF
TROUBLE Trouble counter
PCU PCU
DESK/ESK (TANDEM) Desk unit
LCC LCC
FINISHER/FINISHER
(1KFIN)/ FINISHER
Finisher
(3KFIN)/ FINISHER
(INNER)
JOGGER 3K finisher jogger
FIN-SUB 3K finisher sub
SADDLE Saddle

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 24
 Display Content
Display Content
PUNCH/UNCH(3K)/
Punch unit TRAY1 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 1)
UNCH(IN)
TRAY2 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 2)
FAX OPT1 FAX 1-Line (Option section)
TRAY3 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 3)
ACU High compression PDF unit
TRAY4 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 4)
MFT Manual paper feed counter
LCC LCC paper feed counter
22-6 ADU ADU paper transport counter
TRAY1_TTL Accumulated tray 1 paper feed counter
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
TRAY2_TTL Accumulated tray 2 paper feed counter
Function (Purpose) Used to output the setting/adjustment data TRAY3_TTL Accumulated tray 3 paper feed counter
(simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the TRAY4_TTL Accumulated tray 4 paper feed counter
firmware version, and the counter list. MFT_TTL Accumulated manual paper feed counter
Section LCC_TTL Accumulated side LCC paper feed counter
Operation/Procedure ADU_TTL Accumulated ADU paper feed counter
TRAY1_RETRY Paper feed retry counter (Paper feed tray 1)
* When installing or servicing, this simulation is executed to print
TRAY2_RETRY Paper feed retry counter (Paper feed tray 2)
the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing.
TRAY3_RETRY Paper feed retry counter (Paper feed tray 3)
(Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.)
TRAY4_RETRY Paper feed retry counter (Paper feed tray 4)
1) Select the print list mode with 10-key. MFT_RETRY Manual paper feed retry counter
LCC_RETRY LCC paper feed retry counter
Print list
Display Print content
mode
DATA NO.1 Firmware version, counter data, etc.
PATTERN NO.2 Data related to the image registration
22-10
NO.3 Data related to the process control
2SIDED PRINT 1-SIDED One sided printing (Default) Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
2-SIDED Double sided printing Function (Purpose) Used to check the system configuration
(option, internal hardware).
2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start printing the list selected in step
Section
1).
Operation/Procedure
The system configuration is displayed.
22-8 (The model names of the installed devices and options are dis-
played.)
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of operations Item display Display
Content
(counter value) of the finisher, the SPF, and name content
the scan (reading) unit. MX-5070N Main unit
Section MX-6070N
MACHINE
MX-5050N
Operation/Procedure
MX-6050N
The counter values of the finisher, the SPF, and the scanner related SPF STANDARD Duplex single pass feeder
counters are displayed. STAMP AR-SU1 Finish stamp
MX-DE25 STAND/550 SHEET PAPER DRAWER
Display Content
MX-DE26 STAND/2x550 SHEET PAPER DRAWER
SPF Document feed quantity
MX-DE27 STAND/3x550 SHEET PAPER DRAWER
SCAN Number of times of scan DESK MX-DE28 STAND/550&2100 SHEET PAPER
STAPLER Staple counter DRAWER
PUNCHER Puncher counter MX-DE29 LOW STAND/550 SHEET PAPER
STAMP Stamp counter DRAWER
SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter LCC MX-LC17 A4 Large capacity tray
SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold counter MX-PN14A Punch unit
COVER Document cover open/close counter MX-PN14B
HP_ON Number of scanner HP detection MX-PN14C
OC LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the scanner lamp MX-PN14D
DSPF LAMP TIME Total lighting time of DSPF lamp (* hour * MX-PN15A
minutes) MX-PN15B
FIN OUTPUT Finisher output counter PUNCHER
MX-PN15C
STAPLELESS STAPLE Stapleless staple counter MX-PN15D
MANUAL STAPLE Manual staple counter MX-PN16A
MX-PN16B
MX-PN16C
MX-PN16D
22-9
MX-FN27 Inner finisher
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check MX-FN28 Finisher (1K)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of use (print FINISHER MX-FN29 Saddle stitch finisher (1K)
quantity) of each paper feed section. MX-FN30 Finisher (3K)
MX-FN31 Saddle stitch finisher (3K)
Section Paper feed, ADU
MX-TR19 Exit tray unit
Operation/Procedure EXIT TRAY
MX-TU16 Exit tray cabinet
The counter values related to paper feed are displayed. SEPARATOR MX-TR20 Job separator tray
FAX1 MX-FX15 Facsimile expansion kit

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 25
 Item display Display Item/Display Content
Content
name content FUSING BELT Fusing belt
PS STANDARD PS expansion kit FUSING ROLLER Fusing roller
MX-FR-51U/ Data security kit (commercial version) PRESSURE ROLLER Fusing pressure roller
SECURITY
MX-FR52U SEPARATE PAWL Fusing separation pawl
ICU_PWB *****MB ICU REUS capacity SEPARATE PLATE Fusing separation plate
(REUS) FUSING WEB UNIT Fusing web unit
ICU_PWB *****MB ICU SOC capacity FUSING WEB SEND Fusing web cleaning send counter
(SOC)
FUSING LOAD Fusing pressure release roller
HDD *****GB Hard disk capacity
TC1 BELT Primary transfer belt
SSD *****MB SSD capacity
TRANSFER BLADE Transfer cleaning blade
BARCODE MX-PF10 Barcode font kit
TC CL ROLLER Transfer cleaning roller
INTERNET- MX-FWX1 Internet Fax expansion kit
TC2 ROLLER Secondary transfer roller
FAX
PTC PTC counter
AIM MX-AMX1 Application integration module
PS PAPER Paper dust cleaner
MX-AMX2/ Application communication module
ACM OZONE FILTER Ozone filter
STANDARD
DEVE CTRG (K) DV unit (K)
MX-AMX3/ External account module
EAM DEVE CTRG (C) DV unit (C)
STANDARD
OFFICE DRT MX-PU10 Direct print expansion kit DEVE CTRG (M) DV unit (M)
HC-PDF MX-EB11 Enhanced compression kit (ACRE) DEVE CTRG (Y) DV unit (Y)
DRUM UNIT (K) OPC drum unit (K)
DRUM UNIT (C) OPC drum unit (C)
DRUM UNIT (M) OPC drum unit (M)
22-11 DRUM UNIT (Y) OPC drum unit (Y)
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check MAIN CHARGER (K) Main charger (K)
MAIN CHARGER (C) Main charger (C)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the use frequency (send/ MAIN CHARGER (M) Main charger (M)
receive) of FAX. MAIN CHARGER (Y) Main charger (Y)
(Only when FAX is installed) MC CLEAN (K) MC cleaner K
Section FAX MC CLEAN (C) MC cleaner C
Operation/Procedure MC CLEAN (M) MX cleaner M
The values of the FAX send counter and the FAX receive counter MC CLEAN (Y) MC cleaner Y
are displayed. DRUM BLADE (K) OPC drum cleaning blade K
DRUM BLADE (C) OPC drum cleaning blade C
FAX OUTPUT FAX print quantity counter DRUM BLADE (M) OPC drum cleaning blade M
FAX SEND FAX send counter DRUM BLADE (Y) OPC drum cleaning blade Y
FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter TONER CTRG (K) Toner cartridge (K)
SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter TONER CTRG (C) Toner cartridge (C)
SEND TIME FAX send time TONER CTRG (M) Toner cartridge (M)
RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time TONER CTRG (Y) Toner cartridge (Y)

22-12 22-14
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the SPF misfeed positions Function (Purpose) Used to display the use status of the toner
and the number of misfeed at each posi- cartridge.
tion. (When the number of misfeed is con- Section Process
siderably great, it can be judged as Operation/Procedure
necessary for repair.)
The status of the toner cartridge is displayed.
Section SPF
Operation/Procedure Accumul
Accumul
ated No. Accumul
The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one Display of
ated No.
ated No.
up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.) item
Content
installed
of near
of end
near end
cartridge (Unit)
(Unit)
s (Unit)
22-13 INSTALL NN END END
Toner cartridge use
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check TONER(K) 0 - 510 0 - 510 0 - 510
counter (K)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operating time of the Toner cartridge use
TONER(C) 0 - 510 0 - 510 0 - 510
process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner counter (C)
cartridge) and the fusing unit Toner cartridge use
TONER(M) 0 - 510 0 - 510 0 - 510
counter (M)
Section Process
Toner cartridge use
Operation/Procedure TONER(Y) 0 - 510 0 - 510 0 - 510
counter (Y)
The number of prints and the number of rotations in the process
section are displayed.

Item/Display Content
MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total) (Counter)
MAINTENANCE COL Maintenance counter (Color)

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 26
22-18 22-40
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Purpose Error contents display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the user data delete history. Function (Purpose) Used to display the error code list and the
Section contents.
Operation/Procedure Section
The date and time of the user data delete are displayed. Operation/Procedure
1) Select the main error code.
Display item
Content The sub error code and the contents are displayed.
Item name Date
START Year/month/day/hour/min. Delete history (Date and time
of operation start)
END Year/month/day/hour/min. Delete history (Date and time 22-41
of operation end) Purpose JAM code contents display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the JAM code list and the
contents.
22-19 Section
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the values of the counters 1) Select the JAM code.
related to the scan - image send. Display can be changed by [ENGINE] and [SPF] keys.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Used to display the counter value related to the network scanner 22-42
Change the display with scroll key. Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the JAM/trouble data
Item/Display Content
Section
Network NET SCN Network scanner document read quantity
scanner ORG_B/W counter (B/W scan job) Operation/Procedure
NET SCN Network scanner document read quantity 1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key.
ORG_CL counter (Color scan job)
2) Printable with [COLOR] and [MONO] keys.
NET SCN Network scanner document read quantity
ORG_2CL counter (2-Color scan job) Counter Content
NET SCN Network scanner document read quantity JAM
ORG_SGL counter (Single-color scan job) Display TOTAL TOTAL
CODE/ DATE/
Internet INTERNET Number of internet FAX output data Display Content COUNT COUN
TROUBLE TIME
FAX FAX OUTPUT (BW) T(CL)
CODE
INTERNET Number of internet FAX sending page PAPER PAPER Number Generated Gener Total Total
FAX SEND JAM JAM of JAM code ated output output
OUTPUT COUNT machine (Machine) date/ quantity quantit
INTERNET Number of internet FAX receive JAM time of black y of
FAX RECEIVE troubles (YY/ and color
INTERNET Number of internet FAX send SPF SPF Number Generated MM/ white
FAX SEND JAM JAM of SPF JAM code DD
E-Mail MAIL Number of times of E-MAIL send COUNT JAM (SPF) HH:M
COUNTER troubles M:SS)
FTP FTP Number of FTP send TROUB TROUB Number Generated
COUNTER LE LE of trouble
Other SMB SEND Number of SMB send COUNT troubles code
USB CNT Number of times of USB storage
TRIAL Trial mode counter
MODE_B&C (B/W & COLOR scan job)
SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W) 22-43
HDD_B/W Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record quantity
HDD_CL (COLOR)
Function (Purpose) JAM data details display
SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record quantity Section
HDD_2CL (2-COLOR) Operation/Procedure
SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record quantity
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key.
HDD_SGL (SINGLE color)
When [COUNTER] key is pressed, the JAM counter, the paper
feed counter, and the paper feed retry counter are displayed.
When [HISTORY1] key is pressed, the JAM history is dis-
played.
When [HISTORY2] key is pressed, the temperature and
humidity data are displayed.
2) Printable with [COLOR] and [MONO] keys.

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 27
Display data and contents (COUNTER)
Display Content
Item Content 01A Inch series 9x12
PAPER JAM COUNT Number of machine JAM troubles 01B fixed form 9x12R
PAPER FEED COUNTER Paper feed counter (Similar with 01C 13x19
SIM22-09 display content) 01D 13x19R
PAPER FEED RETRY COUNTER Paper feed retry counter (Similar MLG Mexican-Legal
with SIM27-18 display content)
MLR Mexican-Legal-R
ALG Asian-Legal
Display data and contents (HISTORY1)
ALR Asian -Legal-R
Item Content Description EXT Other Extra (Special)
NO No History number A1 AB series A1
JAM CODE JAM Code Jam code main A1R fixed form A1R
DATE/TIME Date/Time Occurrence date A2 A2
TOTAL_BW Total Count (BW) Total counter (B/W) A2R A2R
TOTAL_CL Total Count (CL) Total counter (color) A3 A3
P_S (*1) Paper Size Paper size A3R A3R
P_T (*1) Paper Type Paper type A4 A4
JOB (*1) Job Mode Job mode A4R A4R
JN Job No First after JOB start or not A5 A5
OF Offset Paper exit: Offset A5R A5R
EP Exit Position Paper exit: Exit position A6 A6
PC Punch Paper exit: Punch A6R A6R
SP Staple Paper exit: Staple B3 B3
B3R B3R
*1: Refer to the detail display content of HISTORY1.
B4 B4
Display data and contents (HISTORY2) B4R B4R
B5 B5
Item Content
B5R B5R
NO. History number
B6 B6
DATE/TIME Occurrence date
B6R B6R
TH_CL External air temperature sensor temperature/AD value
54 A0x2
HUD_CL External air humidity sensor humidity/AD value
55 A0x2 R
TH1_LSU LSU thermistor temperature/AD value
A0 A0
TH_UM Fusing upper main thermistor temperature/AD value
A0R A0R
Fusing upper main thermistor (compensation)
TH_UM_CS B0 B0
temperature/AD value
B0R B0R
Fusing upper main thermistor (differential) temperature/
TH_UM_D B1 B1
AD value
TH_SUB2 Fusing upper sub thermistor 2 temperature/AD value B1R B1R
Fusing upper sub thermistor 2 (compensation) B2R B2
TH_SUB2_CS B2R B2R
temperature/AD value
Fusing upper sub thermistor 2 (differential) K8 K8
TH_SUB2_D K8R K8R
temperature/AD value
TH_LM Fusing lower sub thermistor 2 temperature/AD value K16 K16
TH_US Fusing upper sub thermistor temperature/AD value 16R K16R
K32 K32
Detail display content of HISTORY1 32R K32R
Display Content 66 SRA3
NON Inch series No paper size 67 SRA3R
WLG fixed form Double Legal 68 SRA4
WLR Double Legal-R 69 SRA4R
LD Ledger 06A 318 x 469 mm
LDR Ledger-R (Double Letter) 06B 469 x 318 mm
LG Legal 06C 234 x 318 mm
LGR Legal-R 06D 318 x 234 mm
FC Foolscap 06E 312 x 440 mm
FCR Foolscap-R 06F 440 x 312 mm
LT Letter 70 220 x 312 mm
LTR Letter-R 71 312 x 220 mm
IV Invoice (Mini) 82 Domestic DBL Postcard
83 special DBL Postcard-R
IVR Invoice-R (Mini)
84 (Envelope) Postcard
EC Executive
ECR Executive-R 85 Postcard-R
A3W A3W (12x18 in) 87 119 x 277 mm
AWR A3W (12x18 in)-R 89 120 x 235 mm
12 22x17 08B 90 x 205 mm
13 22x17R 08D 90 x 185 mm
14 22x34 08F 240 x 332 mm
15 22x34R 91 216 x 277 mm
16 34x44 93 197 x 267 mm
17 34x44R 95 190 x 240 mm
18 44x68 97 162 x 229 mm
19 44x68R 99 142 x 205 mm

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 28
 Display Content Display Content
09B Domestic 119 x 197 mm THN Thin paper
09D special 120 x 176 mm US1 User type 1
09F (Enve- 114 x 162 mm US2 User type 2
0A1 lope) 98 x 148 mm US3 User type 3
0A3 105 x 235 mm US4 User type 4
0A5 95 x 217 mm US5 User type 5
0A7 98 x 190 mm US6 User type 6
0A9 92 x 165 mm US7 User type 7
0AA AB series E-version HV2 Heavy paper 2
0AB AB series L-version PL2 Plain paper 2 (not used)
0AC AB series panorama size HV3 Heavy paper 3
0AD AB series name card size HV4 Heavy paper 4
0AE AB series identification photo GLS Glossy paper
0AF AB series name card small
Display content detail: Job mode (JOB)
0B0 Other A3 width
0B1 B4 width Display Content
0B2 A4 width SHD Shading.
0B3 A3 width (Long size) PCL Process control
0B4 B4 width (Long size) SIM Test mode (Sim)
0B5 A4 width (Long size) ICP Interruption copy
0BC Custom (Large size) CP Copy
0BD Custom (Small size) FXS FAX send scan
0BF Custom AXS AXIS
0C2 Oversea Monarch FXP FAX reception print
0C3 special Monarch-R PR Printer
0C4 (Envelope) DL FXC FAX communication report print
0C5 DL-R 00A Zaurus print
0C6 C4 SLF Self/Test print
0C7 C4-R 00C Document counter
0C8 C5 RMT Remote maintenance
0C9 C5-R 00E SIM 52-01
0CA C6 00F Tandem (Cordless handset)
0CB C6-R CFP Confidential print
0CC C65 NET Network scanner
0CD C65-R PRF Proof print
0CE ISOB5
0CF ISOB5-R 22-90
0D0 Size6-1/2
0D1 Size6-1/2-R
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
0D2 Size9 Function (Purpose) Used to output the various set data lists.
0D3 Size9-R Section
0D8 Com-10
Operation/Procedure
0D9 Com-10-R
0DA Inch series E-version
1) Change the display with scroll key.
0DB Inch series L-version 2) Select the print target with the keys on the touch panel.
0DC Inch series panorama size 3) Press [EXECUTE] key to start self print of the list.
0DD Inch series name card large
0DE Inch series identification photo Category Item Content
0DF Inch series name card small Machine status MACHINE STATUS LIST Machine status list
0EC Other Extra (Special large size) list
0ED Extra (Special small size) Printer test PCL SYMBOL SET LIST SPDL symbol set list
0EF Extra (Special/Not fixed) page PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST SPDL internal font list
0F0 Long size PCL EXTENDED FONT SPDL extended font list
0FF JAM (Used for canceling temporary charging in LIST
a coin vendor.) PS FONT LIST PS internal font list
KANJI FONT LIST PS KANJI font list
Display content detail: Paper type (P_T) PS EXTENDED FONT LIST PS extended font list
Display Content NIC PAGE NIC page
UST User type Address INDIVIDUAL LIST Address registration list
LHP Letter head paper registration list GROUP LIST Group list
PNP Perforated sheet MEMORY BOX LIST Memory box list
RCL Recycled paper Document DOCUMENT FILING Document filing folder
COL Color paper filing list FOLDER LIST list
PLN Standard paper Common PAPER SETTING LIST Paper setting list
PRP Pre printed MACHINE Machine identification
IDENTIFICATION settings list
OHP OHP Transparency
SETTINGS LIST
HV Heavy paper
OPERATION SETTINGS Operation settings list
LBL Label sheet
LIST
ENV Envelope
KEYBOARD SETTINGS Keyboard settings list
HG Postcard LIST
TAB Tab sheet DEVICE CONTROL LIST Device control list

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 29
 Category Item Content Item Content
Home screen HOME SCREEN LIST Home screen list TYPE Paper type
Copy setting COPY SETTINGS LIST Copy settings list PIC TRAY Paper feed tray
Printer setting PRINTER SETTINGS LIST Printer settings list OUT TRAY Paper exit tray
FAX/Image METADATA SET LIST Meta data set list SECTION Measurement interval of transport time
send SCAN SETTINGS LIST Scan settings list STANDARD Theoretical value of transport time
FAX SETTINGS LIST Fax settings list JAM-1 Measurement time of the paper right before the JAM
I-FAX SETTINGS LIST Internet fax settings list paper
Document DOCUMENT FILING Document filing settings JAM Measurement time of the JAM paper
filing list SETTINGS LIST list POS/STATUS MIOP (Sensor/Load) data of JAM occurrence
SHARP OSA SHARP OSA SETTINGS SHARP OSA settings list
setting LIST
Network NETWORK SETTINGS Network settings list
setting LIST 23-81
Security SECURITY SETTINGS Security settings list Purpose Operation test/check
setting LIST
Energy save ENERGY SAVE LIST Energy save settings list
Function (Purpose) Used to output the trouble history list of
setting SIM23-80.
Image quality IMAGE QUALITY Image quality Section Paper feed, Paper transport
adjustment ADJUSTMENT LIST adjustment list Operation/Procedure
Image sending IMAGE SENDING Image sending activity
activity report ACTIVITY REPORT (FAX) report (FAX)
1) Connect the USB flash drive to the main unit.
IMAGE SENDING Image sending activity 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
ACTIVITY REPORT (SCAN) report (scanner) 3) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
IMAGE SENDING Image sending activity
ACTIVITY REPORT report (Internet FAX)
(INTERNET FAX)
Transfer table ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER Receive rejection
list LIST number table 24
ALLOW/REJECT MAIL & Receive rejection/allow
DOMAIN NAME LIST address
24-1
INBOUND ROUTING LIST Transfer table list
DOCUMENT ADMIN LIST To administrator transfer Purpose Data clear
list Function (Purpose) Used to clear the jam counter, and the trou-
* When the data list print of system setting is inhibition in DSK ble counter. (After completion of mainte-
model, this setting is invalid. nance, clear the counters.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
23 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
23-2 3) Press [YES] key.
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check The target counter is cleared.
Function (Purpose) Used to output the trouble history list of
MACHINE Machine JAM counter
paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of
SPF SPF JAM counter
troubles of misfeed is considerably great,
TROUBLE Trouble counter
the judgment is made that repair is
required.)
Section
Operation/Procedure 24-2
Press [EXECUTE] key to execute print. Purpose Data clear
The trouble history of paper jams and misfeed is printed. Function (Purpose) Used to clear the number of use (the num-
ber of prints) of each paper feed section.
Section
23-80 Operation/Procedure
Purpose Operation test/check 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
Function (Purpose) Used to print out list of the paper transport 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
time when the paper JAM is occurred. 3) Press [YES] key.
Section Paper feed, Paper transport The target counter is cleared.
Operation/Procedure
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed counter
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counter
timing list of paper feed and paper transport is outputted. TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter
Print item list MFT Manual paper feed counter (Total)
LCC LCC paper feed counter (LCC)
Item Content ADU ADU paper feed counter
JAM CODE JAM code
DATE/TIME JAM occurrence date
MODE Printing mode when JAM is occurred.
SIZE Paper size

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 30
24-3 Item/Display Content
Separation SEPARATE Separation pawl (Counter)
Purpose Data clear PAWL Separation pawl (Number of use days)
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the finisher, SPF, and the Separation pawl
scan (reading) unit counter. (Accumulated number of rotations)
Section SEPARATE Separation plate (Counter)
PLATE Separation plate (Number of use days)
Operation/Procedure
Separation plate
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. (Accumulated number of rotations)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Transfer TC1 BELT Primary transfer belt (Counter)
3) Press [YES] key. Primary transfer belt
(Number of use days)
The target counter is cleared.
Primary transfer belt
(Accumulated number of rotations)
SPF SPF document feed counter
TRANS BLADE Transfer blade (Counter)
(No. of discharged sheets)
Transfer blade (Number of use days)
SCAN Scan counter
Transfer blade
STAPLER Staple counter
(Accumulated number of rotations)
PUNCHER Puncher counter
TC CL ROLLER Transfer cleaning roller (Counter)
STAMP Stamp counter
Transfer blade (Number of use days)
SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter
Transfer cleaning roller (Accumulated
SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold counter
number of rotations)
COVER Document cover open/close counter
TC2 BELT Secondary transfer belt (Counter)
HP_ON Number of scanner HP detection
Secondary transfer belt
OC LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the scanner lamp (Number of use days)
DSPF LAMP TIME(*) DSPF section lamp total lighting time Secondary transfer belt
FIN OUTPUT Finisher output counter (Accumulated number of rotations)
STAPLELESS STAPLE Stapleless staple counter PTC PTC counter (Counter)
MANUAL STAPLE Manual staple counter PTC counter (Number of use days)
PTC counter
(Accumulated number of rotations)
Drum DRUM UNIT K Drum unit (K) (Counter)
24-4 Drum unit (K) (Number of use days)
Purpose Data clear Drum unit (K)
(Accumulated number of rotations)
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the maintenance counter, the
DRUM UNIT C Drum unit (C) (Counter)
printer counters of the transport unit and
Drum unit (C)
the fusing unit. (After completion of mainte-
(Number of use days)
nance, clear the counters.)
Drum unit (C)
Section (Accumulated number of rotations)
Operation/Procedure DRUM UNIT M Drum unit (M) (Counter)
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. Drum unit (M) (Number of use days)
Drum cartridge (M)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (Accumulated number of rotations)
3) Press [YES] key. DRUM UNIT Y Drum unit (Y) (Counter)
The target counter is cleared. Drum unit (Y) (Number of use days)
Drum unit (Y)
Item/Display Content (Accumulated number of rotations)
Maintenance MAINTENANCE Maintenance counter (Total) (Counter) Main MAIN Main charger (K) (Counter)
ALL Maintenance counter (Total) charger CHARGER K Main charger (K) (Number of use days)
(Number of use days) Main charger (K)
MAINTENANCE Maintenance counter (Color) (Counter) (Accumulated number of rotations)
COL Maintenance counter (Color) MAIN Main charger (C) (Counter)
(Number of use days) CHARGER C Main charger (C) (Number of use days)
Fusing FUSING BELT Fusing belt (Counter) Main charger (C)
Fusing belt (Number of use days) (Accumulated number of rotations)
Fusing belt MAIN Main charger (M) (Counter)
(Accumulated number of rotations) CHARGER M Main charger (M) (Number of use days)
FUSING Fusing roller (Counter) Main charger (M)
ROLLER Fusing roller (Number of use days) (Accumulated number of rotations)
Fusing roller MAIN Main charger (Y) (Counter)
(Accumulated number of rotations) CHARGER Y Main charger (Y) (Number of use days)
PRESS Pressure roller (Counter) Main charger (Y)
ROLLER Pressure roller (Number of use days) (Accumulated number of rotations)
Pressure roller MC CLEAN K MC Cleaner K (Number of rotations)
(Accumulated number of rotations) MC CLEAN C MC Cleaner C (Number of rotations)
FUSING LOAD Fusing Pressure release roller MC CLEAN M MC Cleaner M (Number of rotations)
(Accumulated number of rotations) MC CLEAN Y MC Cleaner Y (Number of rotations)

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 31
 Item/Display Content 24-35
Drum blade DRUM BLADE Drum blade K (Counter)
K Drum blade K (Number of use days)
Purpose Data clear
Drum blade K Function (Purpose) Used to clear the toner cartridge use status
(Accumulated number of rotations) data.
DRUM BLADE Drum blade C (Counter) Section
C Drum blade C (Number of use days)
Operation/Procedure
Drum blade C
(Accumulated number of rotations) 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
DRUM BLADE Drum blade M (Counter) 2) Press [YES] key.
M Drum blade M (Number of use days) The toner cartridge use status data (SIM22-14) are cleared.
Drum blade M
(Accumulated number of rotations)
DRUM BLADE Drum blade Y (Counter)
Y Drum blade Y (Number of use days)
Drum blade Y 25
(Accumulated number of rotations)
Other PS PAPER PS paper dust cleaner (Counter)
25-1
PS paper dust cleaner
(Number of use days) Purpose Operation test/check
OZONE FILTER Ozone filter (Counter) Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the devel-
Ozone filter (Number of use days) oping section.
* When "MAIN CHARGER K" is cleared, "MC CLEAN K" is also Section Process (Developing section)
cleared. (as well as CMY) Operation/Procedure
1) Select the process speed with [MIDDLE], [LOW] keys.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
24-5 The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate for 3
Purpose Data clear minutes and the output level of the toner density sensor is dis-
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the developer counter. (After played.
replacement of developer, clear the coun-
TCS_K Toner sensor output value (K)
ter.)
TCS_C Toner sensor output value (C)
Section TCS_M Toner sensor output value (M)
Operation/Procedure TCS_Y Toner sensor output value (Y)
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. TSG_K Toner density sensor control voltage level (K)
TSG_C Toner density sensor control voltage level (C)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
TSG_M Toner density sensor control voltage level (M)
3) Press [YES] key.
TSG_Y Toner density sensor control voltage level (Y)
The target counter is cleared.
LOW Process speed: Low speed
MIDDLE Process speed: Medium speed
When SIM25-2 is executed, this counter is also cleared automati-
cally.
25-2
Button Purpose Setting
Content
display Function (Purpose) Used to make the initial setting of toner
DV_K Developer cartridge print counter (K) density when replacing developer. (Auto-
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K) matic adjustment)
Number of day that used developer (day) (K)
Section Image process (Photo conductor/Develop-
DV_C Developer cartridge print counter (C)
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (C)
Number of day that used developer (day) (C) Operation/Procedure
DV_M Developer cartridge print counter (M) 1) Select a color to be adjusted with the touch panel.
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (M) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Number of day that used developer (day) (M)
The developing motor rotates for 1 min, and the toner density sen-
DV_Y Developer cartridge print counter (Y)
sor makes sampling of the toner density. The detected level is dis-
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (Y)
played.
Number of day that used developer (day) (Y)
After stopping the developing motor, the average value of the toner
HP_K Remaining toner counter in the intermediate hopper
Hopper loop counter density sampling results is set as the reference toner density con-
HP_C
trol level.
HP_M
HP_Y

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 32
Execute simulation 10-3 before executing this simulation. 25-10
When the above operation is interrupted on the way, the reference Purpose Setting
toner concentration level is not set. Also when error code of EE-EC, Function (Purpose) Developer/drum serial no. setting (Not used
EE-EL or EE-EU is displayed, the reference toner density level is in the market)
not set normally.
Section
Do not execute this simulation except when new developer is sup-
plied. If it is executed in other cases, undertoner or overtone may Operation/Procedure
occur, causing a trouble.

Display Default
Division Item/Display
range value
Toner density control AT DEVE ADJ_L_K 1 - 255 128
adjustment value in the AT DEVE ADJ_L_C 1 - 255 128 26
low speed process mode AT DEVE ADJ_L_M 1 - 255 128
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y 1 - 255 128 26-1
Toner density control AT DEVE ADJ_M_K 1 - 255 128
Purpose Setting
adjustment value in the AT DEVE ADJ_M_C 1 - 255 128
medium speed process AT DEVE ADJ_M_M 1 - 255 128 Function (Purpose) Used to set Yes/No of installation of the
mode AT DEVE ADJ_M_Y 1 - 255 128 right paper exit tray.
Toner density sensor AT DEVE VO_L_K 1 - 255 128 Section Paper exit
control voltage level in AT DEVE VO_L_C 1 - 255 128 Operation/Procedure
the low speed process AT DEVE VO_L_M 1 - 255 128
mode 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
AT DEVE VO_L_Y 1 - 255 128
Toner density sensor AT DEVE VO_M_K 1 - 255 128 2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
control voltage level in AT DEVE VO_M_C 1 - 255 128 This setting is required to use the right paper exit tray unit.
the medium speed AT DEVE VO_M_M 1 - 255 128
process mode AT DEVE VO_M_Y 1 - 255 128 Item/Display Content
A 0 YES Paper exit tray:
Display during execution of the simulation 1 NO Paper exit tray:
B 0 YES Job separator
Item/Display Content
1 NO Job separator
TCS_K Toner sensor output value (K)
TCS_C Toner sensor output value (C)
TCS_M Toner sensor output value (M)
TCS_Y Toner sensor output value (Y)
26-2
TSG_K Toner density sensor control voltage level (K)
TSG_C Toner density sensor control voltage level (C) Purpose Setting
TSG_M Toner density sensor control voltage level (M) Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper size of the large
TSG_Y Toner density sensor control voltage level (Y) capacity tray (LCC). (When the paper size
is changed, this simulation must be exe-
Error content cuted to change the paper size in software.)
Display Error name Error content Section Paper feed
EE-EL EL abnormality The sensor output level is less than 77, or Operation/Procedure
the control voltage exceeds 207.
EE-EU EU abnormality The sensor output level exceeds 177, or the
Select a paper size and a weight system to be changed.
control voltage is less than 52.
EE-EC EC abnormality The sensor output level is outside of 128 +/- Item Setting value Content
10. 0 8.5x11
Tray4
1 A4
(Tandem)
2 B5
0 8.5x11
25-4 LCC 1 A4
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check 2 B5
0 Gram
Function (Purpose) Used to display the operation data of the G/LBS Set
1 LBS
toner supply quantity. (Not used in the mar-
ket.)
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
The operation data of the toner supply quantity are displayed.

25-5
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner density correction
data. (Not used in the market.)
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
The toner density correction data are displayed.

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 33
1 : ‘16/Sep.

26-3 Default
Item/Display Content
value
Purpose Setting IMS ON Image send mode is limited. OFF
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the auditor. CONTROL OFF Image send mode is not
(Setting must be made according to the limited.
auditor use conditions.) PRINTER MODE1 All the items in OUTSIDE MODE
CONTROL AUDITOR and VENDOR 3
Section Auditor MODE are allowed to select.
Operation/Procedure MODE2 OUTSIDE AUDITOR is
Select an item to be set with the touch panel. always set to P VENDOR1
and VENDOR MODE is
Default always set to MODE3.
Item/Display Content
value MODE3 OUTSIDE AUDITOR is
BUILT-IN P10 Built-in auditor mode P10 always set to P OTHER and
AUDITOR (standard mode) operation. VENDOR MODE is always
OUTSIDE NONE No external connection NONE set to MODE3.
AUDITOR vendor is used.
(*1) Displayed only when EQUITRAC.
P VENDOR1 Coin vendor mode
(Only the copy mode can be (*2) Refer to the details of the vendor mode.
controlled.) Details of the vendor mode
P VENDOR3 Vendor mode in which
signals for the intercard Completion Insufficient money during Completion
connected to the PCU are of the copy job of the
used for communication in specified specified
BW/Color Color
parallel I/F. quantity. quantity.
(no money (Money
(Money (No money
P OTHER Mode for an external auditor remaining) remaining)
remaining) remaining)
connected to the SCU.
Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Condition 4
VENDOR-EX Vendor I/F for EQUITRAC
(*1) MODE1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 2 Operation 1
VENDOR-EX VENDOR-EX + Multi job MODE2 Operation 1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 1
(MULTI) (*1) cueing Enable mode MODE3 Operation 1 Operation 3 Operation 2 Operation 3
S_VENDOR Serial vendor mode
Operation 1:
DOC ADJ ON Support for the auditor in OFF
document filing print Standby during setting time of auto clear. Default is 60 seconds,
OFF No support for the auditor in which can be changed in the system setting.
document filing print Operation 2:
PF ADJ ON Continuous printing is OFF Auto clear is not made.
performed in the duplex print Operation 3:
mode.
The display is shifted to the initial screen.
If the remaining money
expires during continuous Details of the printer control 1
printing, the sheets in the
MODE1 I) Selectable all VENDOR MODE
machine are discharged
without being printed on the MODE2 I) Printing of the copy job (not including the reprint in copy
back surfaces. mode) and print job (including the reprint in printer mode/self-
print in printer mode) are exclusively controlled using READY
OFF Continuous printing is not
signal from the vender.
performed in the duplex print
mode. (The remaining
II) If READY signal from the vender gets ready during printing,
amount is checked for
the print job in progress will be completed and other print jobs
printing every surface in all
will be held on the job queue, and then the copy job becomes
the printing process.)
executable.
If the remaining money
expires during printing, the
III) If READY signal becomes NotReady, the copy job in
sheet is discharged without
progress will be canceled after the print stops, and then the
printing on the back surface.
print of the printer job will resume.
VENDOR MODE1 Vendor mode 1 MODE
MODE3 I) If READY signal from the auditor becomes NotReady during
MODE (*2) MODE2 Vendor mode 2 3
printing the copy job/print job (including Self-print)/all kinds of
MODE3 Vendor mode 3 reprint jobs, all of copy/print/any kinds of reprint jobs on the job
COUNTUP FUSER_IN Mode in which the detection EXIT_O queue will be canceled right after the print of the job in progress
TIMING timing of the paper lead edge UT stops.
by the sensor after the paper
passes the fusing section is
used as the money charging
timing.
26-5
FUSER_OUT Mode in which the detection
timing of the paper rear edge Purpose Setting
by the sensor after the paper
Function (Purpose) Used to set the count mode of the total
passes the fusing section is
counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/
used as the money charging
timing. 11x17 size)
EXIT_OUT Mode in which the detection Section
timing of the paper rear edge Operation/Procedure
by the paper exit sensor of
the right paper exit tray or of 1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
the after process unit is used 2) Enter the setting value with 10-key
as the money charging 1 = Count up by 1, 2 = Count up by 2
timing.
3) Press [OK] key.

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 34
 The set value in step 2) is saved.
26-8
Item/Display Content Default value Purpose Setting
A TOTAL (B/W) Total counter (B/W) 2 Function (Purpose) Counter mode setting (Long scale)
B TOTAL (COL) Total counter (Color)
C MAINTNANCE Maintenance counter (B/W) 2
Section
E (B/W) Operation/Procedure
D MAINTNANCE Maintenance counter (Color) 1) Select a setting item with the scroll key.
E (COL)
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
E DEV (B/W) Developer counter (B/W)
F DEV (COL) Developer counter (Color)
1 = 1 count up, 2 = 2 count up
3) Press [OK] key.

Default
Setting Default
26-6 Item/Display Content value
range value
(Taiwan)
Purpose Setting A TOTAL(B/W) Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed LONG Total counter (B/W)
magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination. SIZE(S)
B TOTAL Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2
Section
(COL) LONG Total counter
Operation/Procedure SIZE(S) (Color)
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel. C MAINTE Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2
(B/W) LONG Maintenance
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
SIZE(S) counter (B/W)
The selected set content is saved. D MAINTE Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2
(COL) LONG Maintenance
SIZE(S) counter (Color)
26-7 E DEV(B/W) Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2
LONG Developer counter
Purpose Setting SIZE(S) (B/W)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine ID. F DEV(COL) Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2
LONG Developer counter
SIZE(S) (color)
Section
G TOTAL(B/W) Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2
Operation/Procedure LONG Total counter (B/W)
1) Enter the machine ID with the 10-key. SIZE(L)
H TOTAL Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2
Max. 30 digits of numerals and alphabetical characters can be
(COL) LONG Total counter
inputted.
SIZE(L) (Color)
To select a desired character, press the 10-key repeatedly. I MAINTE Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2
Refer to the following list and enter characters. (B/W) LONG Maintenance
SIZE(L) counter (B/W)
Touch the "CONFIRM" section every time a character is input-
ted. J MAINTE Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2
(COL) LONG Maintenance
To modify an inputted character, delete it with "CLEAR" key SIZE(L) counter (Color)
and enter the correct character. K DEV(B/W) Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2
2) Press [SET] key to set the contents entered in procedure 1). LONG Developer counter
SIZE(L) (B/W)
L DEV(COL) Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2
LONG Developer counter
The machine ID can be set also by the Web Page service mode SIZE(L) (color)
function.
Conventionally, the machine ID has been set by the Web Page Long Scale (Small): 631 - 1050mm
function. In this mode, this function is made available in the simula- Long Scale (Large): 1631 - 1200mm
tion mode.

Number of times of key input

10-key 26-10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 1 - - - - - - - - - Purpose Setting
2 A B C a b c 2 - - - Function (Purpose) Used to set the trial mode of the network
3 D E F d e f 3 - - - scanner.
4 G H I g h i 4 - - -
Section
5 J K L j k l 5 - - -
Operation/Procedure
6 M N O m n o 6 - - -
7 P Q R S p q r s 7 - 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
8 T U V t u v 8 - - - 2) Press [OK] key.
9 W X Y Z w x y z 9 - The set value in step 1) is saved.
0 0 - - - - - - - - -
TRIAL MODE 0 Trial mode setting
(0: YES 1: NO) 1 Trial mode cancel (Default)

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 35
26-18 Default
Item/Display Content Setting range
value
Purpose Setting
A CLEANIN User fusing cleaning 0 YES 0
Function (Purpose) Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner G PRINT function is Enable.
save mode operation. SET User fusing cleaning 1 NO
(For the Japan and the UK versions.) function is Disable.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. 26-35
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Purpose Setting
3) Press [OK] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4
The set value in step 2) is saved. trouble history when a same trouble
occurred repeatedly. There are two display
Item/Display Content Default value
modes: display as one trouble and display
A COPY(0:OFF 0 Copy toner save mode is 0
as several series of troubles.
1:SV1 2:SV2 inhibited
:SV3) 1 Copy toner save mode 1 Section
2 Copy toner save mode 2 Operation/Procedure
3 Copy toner save mode 3 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
B PRINTER(0: 0 Printer toner save mode is 0
OFF 1:SV1 inhibited 0 Only once display. (Default)
:SV2 3:SV3) 1 Printer toner save mode 1 1 Any time display.
2 Printer toner save mode 2
3 Printer toner save mode 3 2) Press [OK] key.
C COPY TS 0 Copy toner save setting is 0 The set value in step 1) is saved.
DISPLAY(0:Y displayed.
ES 1 Copy toner save setting is
:NO) not displayed.
D PRINTER TS 0 Printer toner save setting is 0
26-38
DISPLAY(0:Y displayed. Purpose Setting
ES 1:NO) 1 Printer toner save setting is Function (Purpose) Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the
not displayed.
maintenance life is reached.
Section
Operation/Procedure
26-30 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Purpose Setting 2) Press [OK] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operation mode corre- The set value in step 1) is saved.
sponding to the CE mark (Europe safety
standards). (For slow start to drive the fus- Item/Display Content
Default
ing heater lamp) value
A MAINTENANCE 0 Setting of Print Continue/ 0
Section
LIFE OVER Stop when the maintenance
Operation/Procedure (0: CONTINUE life is over (Print Continue)
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. 1: STOP) 1 Setting of Print Continue/
Stop when the maintenance
0 Control allowed life is over (Print Stop)
1 Control inhibited B FUSER WEB END 0 Continue/Stop setting of print 1
(0: CONTINUE when the fusing web is end
2) Press [OK] key. 1: STOP) (Print Continue)
The set value in step 1) is saved. 1 Continue/Stop setting of print
when the fusing web is end
* Even in Enable state, the control may not be executed due
(Print Stop)
to the power frequency, etc.
<Default value of each destination>
U.S.A 1 (CE not supported) EUROPE 0 (CE supported)
26-41
CANADA 1 (CE not supported) U.K. 0 (CE supported)
INCH 1 (CE not supported) AUS. 0 (CE supported) Purpose Setting
JAPAN 1 (CE not supported) AB_A 0 (CE supported) Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnifi-
AB_B 1 (CE not supported) cation ratio automatic select function (AMS)
in the center binding mode.
26-32 Section
Purpose Setting Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the fusing 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
cleaning operation.
0 AMS Disable
Section Fusing 1 AMS Enable
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Press [OK] key.

Enable/Disable of the user fusing cleaning function is set. The set value in step 1) is saved.

2) Press [OK] key.

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 36
<Default value of each destination> (*1) Default values for each destination of item B
U.S.A 0 (Disable) U.K. 1 (Enable)
Mode 2-Color/Single
CANADA 0 (Disable) AUS. 0 (Disable) Set value
Single 2-color Counter
INCH 0 (Disable) AB_A 0 (Disable)
0 OFF OFF OFF
JAPAN 0 (Disable) CHINA 0 (Disable)
1 OFF ON OFF
AB_B 0 (Disable) KOREA 0 (Disable)
2 ON OFF OFF
EUROPE 1 (Enable) BRAZIL 0 (Disable)
3 ON ON OFF
4 OFF OFF ON
5 OFF ON ON
6 ON OFF ON
26-49
7 ON ON ON
Purpose Setting
(*2)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the print speed of postcards
mode. <Default value of each destination>
Section Destination Item A Item H
Operation/Procedure USA 1 1
Select the copy speed mode with the touch panel. (Default: LOW) CANADA 1 1
INCH 1 1
Item/Setting value Content Default value TAIWAN 1 1
LOW Postcard copy speed LOW LOW EUROPE 1 0
HIGH Postcard copy speed HIGH UK 0 0
AUS 1 1
BRAZIL 1 1

26-50 (*3)
Purpose Setting Target Target paper setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set functions. paper 0 1
Section Inner envelope The operation is stopped when If it is set to "1,"
finisher 10 sheets of same kind are the operation is
Operation/Procedure discharged continuously. stopped when
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch Label The operation is stopped when the paper exit
panel. sheet, 20 sheets of same kind are tray is full or
tab sheet, discharged continuously. when 250
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
OHP, sheets
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) Postcard (35.5mm thick)
are discharged.
Default 1K Postcard, The operation is stopped when If it is set to "1,"
Item/Display Content
value finisher OHP, 100 sheets of same kind are the operation is
A BW REVERSE 0 BW reverse copy Disable Refer to *2 Label discharged continuously. stopped when
1 BW reverse copy Enable sheet the paper exit
B COLOR MODE 2-color/Single color copy mode 0 *1 tray is full or
Enable/Disable setting when 500
C FINISHER 0 Finisher special paper 0 *3 sheets (67mm
FUNCTION The number of paper exit is thick) are
limited. discharged.
1 Finisher special paper 3K Postcard, The operation is stopped when If it is set to "1,"
The number of paper exit is not finisher Tab 100 sheets of same kind are the operation is
limited. sheet, discharged continuously. stopped when
D COLOR MODE 0 All colors and monochrome 2 OHP, the paper exit
(PRINTER) counters are displayed. Label tray is full or
sheet, when 500
1 All are displayed except for the
Envelope sheets (67mm
3-color print counter.
thick) are
2 Monochrome and full color
discharged.
print counters are displayed.
E FEED TRAY 0 Paper feed tray color display 0
COLOR ON during paper feed
1 Paper feed tray color display
OFF during paper feed
F BANNER SIZE 0 Banner size print disable 0
PRINT 1 Banner size print enable
G WIRELESS 0 Disables wireless LAN setting. 0
SET 1 Enables wireless LAN setting.
H POWER 0 Automatic power shut off is *2
SHUT-OFF displayed.
SET 1 Automatic power shut off is not
displayed.
I USB DEVICE 0 USB device setting is disabled 0
1 USB device is enabled
J PUNCH UNIT 0 No destination set 0
DESTINATION 1 2 holes
2 2, 3 holes
3 2, 4 holes
4 4 holes (4 holes wide)

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 37
26-52 Default
Item/Display Content
value
Purpose Setting
A TONER 0 The toner preparation 0
Function (Purpose) Used to set whether non-printed paper PREPARATION message is displayed.
(insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up (0:YES 1:NO) 1 The toner preparation
or not. message is not displayed.
Section B REMAINING 5% 0 Toner preparation at remaining 1
TONER toner level of 5%
Operation/Procedure
LEVEL 10% 1 Toner preparation at remaining
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. toner level of 10%
15% 2 Toner preparation at remaining
0 Count up toner level of 15%
1 No count up 20% 3 Toner preparation at remaining
toner level of 20%
2) Press [OK] key.
25% 4 Toner preparation at remaining
The set value in step 1) is saved. toner level of 25%
<Default value of each destination> 30% 5 Toner preparation at remaining
toner level of 30%
Destination Default 35% 6 Toner preparation at remaining
U.S.A 0 (Counted) toner level of 35%
CANADA 0 (Counted) 40% 7 Toner preparation at remaining
INCH 0 (Counted) toner level of 40%
JAPAN 1 (Not counted) 45% 8 Toner preparation at remaining
AB_B 0 (Counted) toner level of 45%
EUROPE 0 (Counted) 50% 9 Toner preparation at remaining
U.K. 0 (Counted) toner level of 50%
AUS. 1 (Not counted) C TONER NEAR END 0 The toner near end message 0
AB_A 0 (Counted) (0:YES 1:NO) is displayed.
1 The toner near end message
is not displayed.
D TONER END 1 Operation setup 1 2
26-65 2 Operation setup 2
3 Operation setup 3
Purpose Setting
E TONER END 1 Toner end judgement by toner 1
Function (Purpose) Used to set the finisher alarm mode. JUDGMENT remaining counter or toner
Section sensor.
2 Toner end judgement by toner
Operation/Procedure sensor.
Use the touch key to set. 3 Toner end judgement by toner
cartridge.
Default F TONER E-MAIL 0 Low status send of E-mail alert 0
Item Set value Content
value ALERT (When the toner preparation
Number of stapling sets: Maximum message is displayed) (in near
LIMIT ON
staple setting is set value. ON near toner end)
COPIES
OFF Number of stapling sets. Not Limited 1 Low status send of E-mail alert
(near toner end)
G TONER MIB UNIT 0 Receive the remaining toner 0
level MIB in 1% increment.
26-66 1 Receive the remaining toner
Purpose Setting level MIB in 5% increment.
2 Receive the remaining toner
Function (Purpose) Used to set the password for the simula- level MIB in 25% increment.
tion.
Section (Contents of set items)
Operation/Procedure A: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display.
1) The current password for the simulation is displayed. B: The toner remaining quantity at which the toner preparation
message is displayed.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
C: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display
3) Press [SET] key.
when the toner near end status is reached.
D: Machine operation at toner end
E: Toner end judgement setting when toner near end message is
26-69
displayed.
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for
toner near end. When item A is set to "0" and item E is properly set, printing can be
Section made after toner near end. However, improper phenomena such as
Operation/Procedure insufficient density, thin spots, or improper color balance may result
depending on the using conditions.
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2 is saved.

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 38
26-73 26-79
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Enlargement continuous shoot, A3 wide Function (Purpose) Used to set YES/NO of the pop-up display
copy mode image loss (shade delete quan- of user data security.
tity) adjustment Section
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. 2) Press [OK] key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Default
3) Press [OK] key. Item/Display Content Setting range
value
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss A DISP SET Delete result supported the YES 1 0
(shade delete quantity) is increased. security pop-up display ON
Delete result supported the NO 0
Setting security display OFF
Item/Display Content Default value
range
B SIM Simulation start password YES 1 0
A DELETING Rear frame side 0 - 50 0 PASSWO input display ON
SHADOW ADJ image loss quantity (Adjustment RD DISP Simulation start password NO 0
(M) (shade delete amount:
input display OFF
quantity) adjustment 0.1mm/step)
B DELETING Lead edge image 0 - 50 0
SHADOW ADJ (S) loss quantity (shade (Adjustment
delete quantity) amount:
adjustment 0.1mm/step)
26-85
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the function of the simulation
mode.
26-74
Section
Purpose Setting
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to set the OSA trial mode.
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Section
2) Press [OK] key.
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. Item/Display Content Setting range
Default
value
2) Press [OK] key.
A DISP SET Password input display for YES 1 0
transferring between each
Default
Item/Display Content simulation ON
value
Password input display for NO 0
A OSA TRIAL MODE 0 Used to set the OSA trial 1
transferring between each
(0: YES 1: NO) mode.
simulation OFF
1 OSA trial mode is canceled.

26-78
Purpose Setting
27
Function (Purpose) Used to set the password of the remote
27-2
operation panel.
Purpose Setting
Section
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to set the sender's registration num-
ber and the HOST server telephone num-
1) Enter a password with 10-key. (5 - 8 digits)
ber. (FSS function)
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW".
Section
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key
Operation/Procedure
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit.
1) Select an item to be set with touch panel.
2) Press [SET] key.
[USER FAX NO] [SERVA TEL NO]
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [SET] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.

USER FAX_NO. Sender registration number (Max. 16 digits)

SERVA TEL_NO. Host server telephone number (Max. 16 digits)
* If the connection process is not completed
normally when registering the FSS, calling to the
HOST may be continuously made every time
when the power is turned ON (from OFF) or
rebooted.
In this case, enter "********" to inhibit calling to
the HOST.

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 39
27-4
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the initial call and toner order
auto send. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.

Setting Default
Item/Display Content Remarks
range value
A FSS MODE NEB1 Set the FSS MODE Exclusive for send in NE-B mode 0-3 0 1
NEB2 Send/Receive in NE-B mode 1
NFB1 Exclusive for send in NE-F mode 2
NFB2 Send/Receive in NE-F mode 3
B RETRY_BUSY Resend number setting when busy 0 - 15 2 0: No retry
C TIMER(MINUTE)_BUSY Resend timer setting (minute) when busy 1 - 15 3
D RETRY_ERROR Resend number setting when error 0 - 15 1 0: No retry
E TIMER(MINUTE)_ERROR Resend timer setting (minute) when error 1 - 15 1
F FAX RETRY Resend number setting when FAX initial connection 0 - 15 2 Unit: Number of times
G TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto send Empty 0 - 11 0 6
TIMING(K) NEAR_END timing setting (K) Near end 1
0.05 0.05 2
0.1 0.1 3
0.15 0.15 4
0.2 0.2 5
0.25 0.25 6
0.3 0.3 7
0.35 0.35 8
0.4 0.4 9
0.45 0.45 10
0.5 0.5 11
H TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto send Empty 0 - 11 0 6
TIMING(C) NEAR_END timing setting (C) Near end 1
0.05 0.05 2
0.1 0.1 3
0.15 0.15 4
0.2 0.2 5
0.25 0.25 6
0.3 0.3 7
0.35 0.35 8
0.4 0.4 9
0.45 0.45 10
0.5 0.5 11
I TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto send Empty 0 - 11 0 6
TIMING(M) NEAR_END timing setting (M) Near end 1
0.05 0.05 2
0.1 0.1 3
0.15 0.15 4
0.2 0.2 5
0.25 0.25 6
0.3 0.3 7
0.35 0.35 8
0.4 0.4 9
0.45 0.45 10
0.5 0.5 11

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 40
 Setting Default
Item/Display Content Remarks
range value
J TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto send Empty 0 - 11 0 6
TIMING(Y) NEAR_END timing setting (Y) Near end 1
0.05 0.05 2
0.1 0.1 3
0.15 0.15 4
0.2 0.2 5
0.25 0.25 6
0.3 0.3 7
0.35 0.35 8
0.4 0.4 9
0.45 0.45 10
0.5 0.5 11
K TEMP HISTORY CYCLE Frequency of acquiring the temperature and humidity 1 - 1440 60 Unit: min.
history
L LOG OUTPUT CAPACITY(PCU) Log output capacity 0 - 50 30 Unit: [KB]
M TONER ORDER TIMING CONTROL Toner order timing Toner order alert call at fixed toner 0-1 0 0
control remaining amount
LOG OUTPUT CAPACITY(PCU) Toner order alert call at predicted 1
toner consumption amount
N TONER ORDER DELIVERY SETTING Toner order delivery setting 0-1 0 0
1
O TONER ORDER DELIVERY INTERVAL Toner order delivery interval setting 1 - 15 3 Unit: Date
P REMOTE FIRMWARE UPDATE (PULL) Pull type firmware update is inhibited or not allowed. 0-1 0 1 0 : Allowed
1 1 : Inhibited
Q FIRMWARE VER. SEARCH INTERVAL Firmware search interval setting 1 - 90 7 Unit: Date

3) Press [OK] key.

27-5
The set value in step 2) is saved.
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine tag No. (This func- Item/Display Content
Setting Default
tion allows the host computer to check the range value
machine tag No.) (FSS function) A FUNCTION FSS function enable 0 1
(0:YES 1:NO) FSS function disable 1
Section Communication (RIC/MODEM)
B ALERT Alert call enable (*1) 0 0
Operation/Procedure (0:YES 1:NO) Alert call disable 1
1) Enter the password (max. 8 digits) with 10-key. C CONNECTION FAX connection enable 0 0
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW”. (0: FAX Not used. 1
1: No Use HTTP connection enable 2
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key 2: HTTP)
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit.
2) Press [SET] key. *1 Alert send timing

No alert cause Initial state / Trouble / Continuous JAM alert

Maintenance When the maintenance timing is reached.
27-6 Service call When pressing Service call.
Purpose Setting Toner send request When the toner order automatic send setting is
reached.
Function (Purpose) Used to set of the manual service call.
Toner collection request Revision of the toner installation date (only for
(FSS function)
a new product)
Section Alert resend
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.

0 Allow (Default) 27-9

1 Inhibit Purpose Setting
2) Press [OK] key. Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper transport time record-
ing YES/NO threshold value and shading
The set value in step 1) is saved.
gain adjustment retry number.
(FSS function)
Section
27-7
Operation/Procedure
Purpose Setting
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
Function (Purpose) Used to set of the enable, alert callout.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
(FSS function)
3) Press [OK] key.
Section
The set value in step 2) is saved.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 41
 Display Item
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Occurrence date Retry Content
range value Item name
(Display) number
A FEED TIME2 Threshold value of paper 0 - 100 50(%)
transport time between TONER 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Black toner order
sensors (SPF) ORDER(K) alert call date/
time
B GAIN Threshold value of the gain 0 - 20 11
ADJUSTMENT adjustment retry number (TIMES) TONER 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Cyan toner order
RETRY ORDER(C) alert call date/
time
C JAM ALERT Continuous JAM alert 1 - 100 10
judgment threshold value (TIMES) TONER 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits magenta toner
(Alert judgment threshold ORDER(M) order alert call
value for continuous JAM's) date/time
(Setting of the number of TONER 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Yellow toner
JAM's continuously made at ORDER(Y) order alert call
which it is judged as an date/time
alert.)
[DSPF]
D JAM ALERT Continuous JAM alert 0 - 99 30
PERIOD interval value (DAYS) Display Item
Occurrence date Retry Content
* Items A: 0%, standard passing time between sheets of paper; Item name
(Display) number
100%, time for judgment as a jam between sheets of paper. LSU1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Serial
* Item B: Because of a trouble in shading operation, the number of LSU2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits communication
retry is actually not registered. DESK1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits retry number
DESK2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits history display

27-10 FINISHER1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits

FINISHER2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
Purpose Data clear
DSPF1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the trouble prediction history DSPF2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
information. (FSS function) SCAN GAIN ADJ1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Scanner gain
Section SCAN GAIN ADJ2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits adjustment retry
SCAN GAIN ADJ3 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits history
Operation/Procedure
SCAN GAIN ADJ4 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
SCAN GAIN ADJ5 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Scanner gain
2) Press [YES] key. adjustment retry
The history information of trouble prediction is cleared. history
DSPF GAIN ADJ1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits DSPF gain
Target history Serial communication retry history DSPF GAIN ADJ2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits adjustment retry
High density process control error history DSPF GAIN ADJ3 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits history display
Halftone process control error history DSPF GAIN ADJ4 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits * This is only for
Automatic registration adjustment error history DSPF supported
DSPF GAIN ADJ5 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
machines.
Scanner gain adjustment retry history
TONER 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Black toner order
DSPF gain adjustment retry history
ORDER(K) alert call date/
Paper transport time between sensors
time
TONER 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Cyan toner order
ORDER(C) alert call date/
time
27-11 TONER 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits magenta toner
Purpose Others ORDER(M) order alert call
date/time
Function (Purpose) Used to check the serial communication
TONER 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Yellow toner
retry number and the scanner gain adjust-
ORDER(Y) order alert call
ment retry number history. (FSS function) date/time
Section
Operation/Procedure
The serial communication retry number history and the scanner
gain adjustment retry number history are displayed. 27-12
Purpose Others
[RSPF]
Function (Purpose) Used to check the high density, halftone
Display Item
process control and the automatic registra-
Occurrence date Retry Content
Item name tion adjustment error history. (FSS Func-
(Display) number
tion)
LSU1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Serial
LSU2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits communication Section
DESK1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits retry number Operation/Procedure
DESK2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits history display
The high density, halftone process control and the automatic regis-
FINISHER1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits tration adjustment error history is displayed.
FINISHER2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
SCAN GAIN ADJ1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Scanner gain HV_ERR1 High density process control error history 1
SCAN GAIN ADJ2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits adjustment retry HV_ERR2 High density process control error history 2
SCAN GAIN ADJ3 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits history HV_ERR3 High density process control error history 3
SCAN GAIN ADJ4 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits HV_ERR4 High density process control error history 4
SCAN GAIN ADJ5 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Scanner gain HV_ERR5 High density process control error history 5
adjustment retry H_TONE ERR1 Halftone process control error history 1
history

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 42
 H_TONE ERR2 Halftone process control error history 2 27-16
H_TONE ERR3 Halftone process control error history 3
H_TONE ERR4 Halftone process control error history 4
Purpose Setting
H_TONE ERR5 Halftone process control error history 5 Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS alert send.
AUTO REG ADJ1 Automatic registration adjustment error history 1 Section
AUTO REG ADJ2 Automatic registration adjustment error history 2
Operation/Procedure
AUTO REG ADJ3 Automatic registration adjustment error history 3
AUTO REG ADJ4 Automatic registration adjustment error history 4
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
AUTO REG ADJ5 Automatic registration adjustment error history 5 The value for the FSS alert operation specification is set.
2) Press [OK] key.

Setting Default
Item/Display Content
27-13 range value
Purpose Others A MAINTENANC Maintenance Alert send 0 0
E ALERT alert send Enable
Function (Purpose) Used to check the history of paper transport (0:YES 1:NO) Enable setting Alert send 1
time between sensors. (FSS function) Disable
Section B TONER Toner order Alert send 0 0
ORDER alert send Enable
Operation/Procedure
ALERT (0:YES Enable setting Alert send 1
Change the display with scroll key. 1:NO) Disable
C TONER CTRG Toner cartridge Alert send 0 0
Item/Display Content
ALERT (0:YES replacement Enable
FEED TIME1 History of paper transport time between sensors 1 1:NO) alert send Alert send 1
FEED TIME2 History of paper transport time between sensors 2 Enable setting Disable
FEED TIME3 History of paper transport time between sensors 3 D JAM ALERT Continuous Alert send 0 0
FEED TIME4 History of paper transport time between sensors 4 (0:YES 1:NO) JAM alert send Enable
FEED TIME5 History of paper transport time between sensors 5 Enable setting Alert send 1
FEED TIME6 History of paper transport time between sensors 6 Disable
FEED TIME7 History of paper transport time between sensors 7 E TROUBLE Trouble alert Alert send 0 0
FEED TIME8 History of paper transport time between sensors 8 ALERT (0:YES send Enable Enable
FEED TIME9 History of paper transport time between sensors 9 1:NO) setting Alert send 1
FEED TIME10 History of paper transport time between sensors 10 Disable
F PAPER Paper order Alert send 0 1
ORDER alert send Enable
ALERT (0:YES Enable setting Alert send 1
27-14 1:NO) Disable

Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function connection
test mode. 27-17
Section Purpose Setting
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS paper order alert.
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. Section
0 Disable (Default) Operation/Procedure
1 Enable 1) Select an item to be set.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Press [OK] key.
The value for the FSS paper order alert operation specification
The set value in step 1) is saved.
is set.
3) Press [SET] key.

27-15 Item/ Setting Default

Content NOTE
Purpose Operation test/check Display range value
PAPER Setting of paper kind 0-2 0 0: Standard
Function (Purpose) Used to display the FSS connection status. TYPE for paper order alert paper and
Section SET recycled paper
Operation/Procedure 1: Standard
paper only
The FSS operating status is displayed. 2: Recycled
paper only
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range A3 Paper order number 500 - 1250 Unit: No. of
value
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box
FSS CONNECTION Used to display the 0 Not operated 0 sheets] (A3)
FSS connection 1 Operated A4 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of
status.
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box
sheets] (A4)
B4 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box
sheets] (B4)
B5 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box
sheets] (B5)

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 43
 Item/ Setting Default Display Contents
Content NOTE
Display range value TFD3 Paper exit tray full sensor (Right paper exit tray)
A3: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert TNFD Waste toner full detection sensor
FIRST number setting (A3) 10000 sheets for the WEBEND Web end detection
(Number of used first time
sheets)
A4: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
FIRST number setting (A4) 10000 sheets for the 30-2
(Number of used first time
sheets) Purpose Operation test/check
B4: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
FIRST number setting (B4) 10000 sheets for the sors and the detectors in the paper feed
(Number of used first time section and the control circuits.
sheets)
B5: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
Section
FIRST number setting (B5) 10000 sheets for the Operation/Procedure
(Number of used first time The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
sheets) played.
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
lighted.

Display Contents
30 C1LUD Paper feed tray upper limit sensor (Paper feed tray 1)
C1PED Paper empty sensor (Paper feed tray 1)
30-1 C1PFD Paper transport detector (Paper feed tray 1)
Purpose Operation test/check C1PFPD Paper feed immediate detection sensor
C1SPD Paper remaining quantity sensor (Paper feed tray 1)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- C1SS Paper feed tray 1 detector
sors and the detectors in other than the C1SS1 Paper feed tray size detector PWB
paper feed section and the control circuits. C1SS2 Paper feed tray size detector PWB
Section C1SS3 Paper feed tray size detector PWB
Operation/Procedure C1SS4 Paper feed tray size detector PWB
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- C2LUD Paper feed tray upper limit sensor (Paper feed tray 2)
played. C2PED Paper empty sensor (Paper feed tray 2)
C2PFD Paper transport detector (Paper feed tray 2)
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
C2SPD Paper remaining quantity sensor (Paper feed tray 2)
lighted.
C2SS1 Paper feed tray size detector PWB
Display Contents C2SS2 Paper feed tray size detector PWB
1TUD_CL Transfer mode sensor (CL) C2SS2ETM Desk2 module empty detection
1TUD_K Transfer mode sensor (K) C2SS3 Paper feed tray size detector PWB
2TPD 2nd transfer rear paper sensor C2SS4 Paper feed tray size detector PWB
2TUD 2nd transfer position sensor C2SSSETD Desk2 installation detection
CCHPD_C MC cleaner HP-C MPED Paper empty sensor (Manual paper feed tray)
CCHPD_K MC cleaner HP-K MPFD Paper feed sensor (Manual paper feed tray)
CCHPD_M MC cleaner HP-M MPLD1 Paper length detector (Manual paper feed tray)
CCHPD_Y MC cleaner HP-Y
CCMD_C MC cleaner shift detection C
CCMD_K MC cleaner shift detection K
30-30
CCMD_M MC cleaner shift detection M
CCMD_Y MC cleaner shift detection Y Purpose Operation test/check
DHPD_C Drum phase sensor C Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the motion
DHPD_K Drum phase sensor K sensors, the detectors and the related cir-
DHPD_M Drum phase sensor M cuits.
DHPD_Y Drum phase sensor Y
Section
DSW_C1 Transport cover open/close detector (Paper feed tray 1)
DSW_C2 Cassette 2 transport cover open/close detection
Operation/Procedure
DSW_F Front door open/close detection SW When you enter this simulation, the current status of the sensor is
DSW_FU Front door upper open/close detection SW displayed.
DSW_R Right transport unit (Right door) open/close detection *1: Displayed, but not installed in some models.
HLPCD Fusing pressure sensor
POD1 Paper exit sensor 1
POD2 Paper exit sensor 2
POD3 Paper exit sensor 3
POD4 Paper exit sensor 4
PPD2 Paper transport sensor 2
PRTPD Paper exit paper sensor (Right paper exit tray)
SHPOS Shifter home positions sensor
TCED_C Toner cartridge discharge sensor C
TCED_K Toner cartridge discharge sensor K
TCED_M Toner cartridge discharge sensor M
TCED_Y Toner cartridge discharge sensor Y
TED4 Upper paper empty detection sensor
TFD2 Paper exit tray full sensor (Center paper exit tray)

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 44
40 41
40-2 41-1
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
adjustment. ment size sensor and the control circuit.
Section Paper feed Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Open the manual paper feed guide to the max. width (MAX). The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. played.
The max. width (MAX) detection level is recognized. The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
lighted.
3) Open the manual paper feed guide to P1 width (A4).
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. OCSW Document cover status Open: Normal display
The P1 width (A4) detection level is recognized. Close: Highlighted
5) Open the manual paper feed guide to P2 width (A4R). PD1 - 7 Document detection No document: Normal display
sensor status Document present: Highlighted
6) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The P2 width (A4R) detection level is recognized.
7) Open the manual paper feed guide to the min. width (MIN).
8) Press [EXECUTE] key. 41-2
The min. width (MIN) detection level is recognized. Purpose Adjustment
When the above operation is not performed normally, "ERROR" is Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document size sensor
displayed. When completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed. detection level.
Section
MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width
Operation/Procedure
P1(A4)POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4)
P2(A4R)POSITION Manual feed P2 position width (A4R) 1) Open the document cover, and press [EXECUTE] key without
MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width place a document on the document table.
The sensor level without document is recognized.
2) Set A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table, and press
[EXECUTE] key.
40-7
The sensor level when detecting the document is displayed.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the adjustment value of the
manual paper feed tray paper width sensor. 41-3
Section Paper feed Purpose Operation test/check
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys. ment size sensor and the control circuit.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Section
3) Press [OK] key. Operation/Procedure
The set value in step 2) is saved. The detection output level (A/D value) of OCSW and the document
sensor (PD1 - PD7) is displayed in real time.
Default
Item/Display Content
value The light receiving range of PD1 - PD7 is 1 - 255. (Default: 128)
A MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width 241
Item/Display Content Detection level range
B P1 (A4) POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4) 231
OCSW Original cover SW 0-1 ("1" to Close)
C P2 (A4R) POSITION Manual feed P2 position width 140
(A4R) PD1 Document detection 1 0 - 255
D MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width 19 PD2 Document detection 2 0 - 255
PD3 Document detection 3 0 - 255
PD4 Document detection 4 0 - 255
PD5 Document detection 5 0 - 255
PD6 Document detection 6 0 - 255
PD7 Document detection 7 0 - 255

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 45
 Setting
43 Display Content
range
Default

EMBOSS PAPER GR Used to change the fusing -20 0

temperature setting of -15
43-1 embossed paper -10
Purpose Setting -5
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature in each 0
mode. +5
+10
Section
+15
Operation/Procedure
+20
1) Select the SW-A or the SW-B. OHP PAPER Used to change the fusing -20 0
2) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. temperature setting of -15
OHP paper -10
3) Select an item to be set with displayed value.
-5
The set value in step 3) is saved.
0
Setting +5
Display Content Default +10
range
PLAIN Used to change the fusing -20 0 +15
PAP&WUP&RDY GR temperature setting of -15 +20
plain paper, WUP, and -10 FUSING CONDITION Fusing condition 0 0
Ready series -5 ADJ adjustment setting 1
0 2
+5 3
+10 4
+15 5
+20 ENV PAPER PRESS Envelop paper pressure 0 0
HEAVY PAPER GR Used to change the fusing -20 0 PATTERN adjustment 1
temperature setting of -15 2
heavy paper series -10 WUP&RDY GR ADJ WUP/Ready LL -10 0
-5 LL environment fine -7
0 adjustment -5
+5 -3
+10 0
+15 +3
+20 +5
THIN PAPER GR Used to change the fusing -20 0 +7
temperature setting of thin -15 +10
paper series -10 PLAIN PAP ADJ LL Normal paper LL -10 0
-5 environment fine -7
0 adjustment -5
+5 -3
+10 0
+15 +3
+20 +5
RECYCLED PAPER Used to change the fusing -20 0 +7
GR temperature setting of -15 +10
recycled paper series -10 HEAVY PAPER GR Heavy paper LL -10 0
-5 ADJ LL environment fine -7
0 adjustment -5
+5 -3
+10 0
+15 +3
+20 +5
GLOSSY PAPER GR Used to change the fusing -20 0 +7
temperature setting of -15 +10
gloss paper series -10 SPECIAL PAPER ADJ Special paper LL -10 0
-5 LL environment fine -7
0 adjustment -5
+5 -3
+10 0
+15 +3
+20 +5
ENV PAPER GR Used to change the fusing -20 0 +7
temperature setting of -15 +10
envelope series -10
-5
0
+5
+10
+15
+20

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 46
 Setting
Display Content Default Item / Display Content Setting Default
range
range value
WUP&RDY GR ADJ WUP/Ready HH -10 0
WARMUP Fusing motor previous rotation List of
HH environment fine -7 A FUMON start TH_UM set value 0 - 200 Default
adjustment -5 TH_UM T values
-3 WARMUP Fusing motor previous rotation and set
B 0 - 255
0 FUMOFF complete time values for
+3 WARMUP Warm-up complete time each
C 0 - 255 destinatio
+5 END TIME
+7 FM preliminary rotation start n
HI WU FM
+10 D TH_UM when warming up at 0 - 200
ON TMP
PLAIN PAP ADJ HH Normal paper HH -10 0 alpha degree C or above
environment fine -7 Warm-up completion time
HI WU END
adjustment -5 E when warm-up at alpha 0 - 255
TIME
degree C or above
-3
Setting value applying time in
0 LO
warm-up of 120 degrees C or
+3 F WARMUP 0 - 255
below (Timer from Ready
+5 TIME
completion)
+7 Setting value applying time in
+10 HI
warm-up of 120 degree C or
G WARMUP 0 - 255
HEAVY PAPER GR Heavy paper HH -10 0 above (Time from Ready
TIME
ADJ HH environment fine -7 completion)
adjustment -5 HI Threshold value alpha to apply
-3 H WARMUP the setting value in warm-up of 1 - 119
0 BORDER alpha degree C or above
+3 JOBEND After-rotation time after
+5 I FUMON completion of a job 0 - 255
TIME
+7
TH_UM E- TH_UM set value when
+10 J 30 - 200
STAR preheating
SPECIAL PAPER ADJ Special paper HH -10 0
TH_LM E- TH_LM set value when
HH environment fine -7 K 30 - 200
STAR preheating
adjustment -5
TH_US E- TH_US set value when
-3 L 30 - 200
STAR preheating
0 TH_UM TH_UM set value from
+3 M 30 - 200
PRE-JOB recovering the preheating
+5
+7 List of destination groups
+10
Group Destination
Group B U. S. A CANADA INCH – –
SW-A Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/
device setting/fusing control setting. Group C EUROPE U. K AUS. AB_A AB_B
SW-B Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/
List of Default values and set values for each destination
device setting/fusing control setting.
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on Item Default value (50 ppm) Default value (60 ppm)
plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/ SW_A SW_B SW_A SW_B
device setting/fusing control setting. Grou Grou Grou Grou Grou Grou Grou Grou
(Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/ pB pC pB pC pB pC pB pC
device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is
A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
displayed.
B 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
C 12 12 35 35 12 12 35 35
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
43-2 E 12 12 35 35 12 12 35 35
Purpose Setting F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature and pre-
H 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
heating.
I 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Section J 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
Operation/Procedure K 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110
1) Select the SW-A or SW-B. L 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
2) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. M 170 170 175 175 170 170 175 175

3) Enter the set value with 10-key. Code descriptions

4) Press [OK] key.
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper)
The set value in step 3) is saved. TH_LM Fusing thermistor main (Back surface of paper)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper)

SW-A Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/
device setting/fusing control setting.

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 47
SW-B Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/ Default
Setting
device setting/fusing control setting. Item / Display Content value
range
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on 50 ppm 60 ppm
plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/ Correction value of
device setting/fusing control setting. the threshold value
(Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/ HI_WARM alpha to apply the
device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is H UP_BORD setting value in warm- 1 - 99 50 50
displayed. ER_LL up of alpha degree C
or above under LL
environment
43-20 Correction value for
JOBEND_ the after rotation time
Purpose Adjustment/Setup I FUMON_TI when completing a 1 - 99 50 50
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environmental correction ME LL job under LL
under low temperature and low humidity (L/ environment
L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM Correction value for
TH_UM E- preheating TH_UM
43-2) in each paper mode. J 1 - 99 55 55
STAR LL set value under LL
Section environment
Operation/Procedure Correction value for
TH_LM E- preheating TH_LM
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. K 1 - 99 55 55
STAR LL set value under LL
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. environment
3) Press [OK] key. Correction value for
The set value in step 2) is saved. TH_US E- preheating TH_US
L 1 - 99 55 55
STAR LL set value under LL
Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 - environment
99) Correction value for
the set value of
Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 5 25 49 TH_UM
TH_UM when
Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99 M PRE-JOB 1 - 99 55 55
restoring from
LL
preheating under LL
environment
Default
Setting
Item / Display Content value * Item WARMUP END TIME LL: 1 Count = 1s Change
range
50 ppm 60 ppm
Correction value for the other items: 1 count for 1degrees C
Correction value for
WARMUP change
fusing motor pre-
FUMON
A rotation start TH_UM 1 - 99 50 50 Code descriptions
TH_UM T
set value under LL
LL TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper)
environment
Fusing motor prior TH_LM Fusing thermistor main (Back surface of paper)
WARMUP
rotation completion TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper)
B FUMOFF 1 - 99 60 60
time under LL
LL
environment
Correction value for
WARMUP
warm-up completion 43-21
C END TIME 1 - 99 75 75
time under LL
LL Purpose Adjustment/Setup
environment
Correction value for Function (Purpose) Used to set the environment correction
FM prior rotation start under high temperature and high humidity
HI_WU_F
TH_UM in warm-up at (H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
D M_ON_TM 1 - 99 50 50
alpha degree C or (SIM 43-2) in each paper mode.
P_LL
above under LL
environment Section
Correction value for Operation/Procedure
warm-up completion 1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
HI_WU_E
time in warm-up at
E ND_TIME_ 1 - 99 65 65 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
alpha degree C or
LL
above under LL 3) Press [OK] key.
environment The set value in step 2 is saved.
Correction value of
Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 -
the setting value
applying time in
99)
LO_WARM
warm-up of
F UP_TIME_ 1 - 99 65 65 Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 5 25 49
120degree C or below
LL Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
under LL environment
(Time from Ready
completion)
Correction value of
the setting value
applying time in
HI_WARM warm-up of
G UP_TIME_ 120degree C or 1 - 99 65 65
LL above under LL
environment (Time
from Ready
completion)

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 48
 Item / Display Content Setting Default 43-24
range value Purpose Adjustment/Setup
WARMUP Fusing motor previous List of Default
A FUMON rotation start TH_UM set 1 - 99 values and Function (Purpose) Used to set the temperature adjustment
TH_UM T HH value set values for value.
WARMUP Fusing motor previous each Section
B 1 - 99
FUMOFF HH rotation completion time destination
Operation/Procedure
WARMUP Warm-up completion
C END TIME time 1 - 99 1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
HH 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
HI_WU_FM_ FM preliminary rotation 3) Press [OK] key.
ON_TMP HH start TH_UM when
D
warming up at alpha
1 - 99 The set value in step 2 is saved.
degree C or above Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 -
HI_WU_END Warm-up completion 99)
E _TIME HH time when warm-up at 1 - 99
alpha degree C or above Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 5 25 49
LO_WARMU Correction value for AF - Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
P_TIME_HH AH application time
F 1 - 99
(Time from Ready
Item / Display Content Setting Default
complete)
Value value
HI_WARMUP Correction value for AJ -
COOL_DOWN Cool down time List of Default
G _TIME HH AL application time (Time 1 - 99 A 1-60
_HEAVY (Heavy paper) values and set
from Ready complete)
COOL_DOWN Cool down time values for each
HI_WARMUP Threshold value alpha to B 1-60
_OHP (OHP) destination
H _BORDER_H which AN - AP is applied 1 - 99
H COOL_DOWN Cool down time
C 1-60
_ENVELOPE (Envelope)
JOBEND_FU After-rotation time after
I MON_TIME completion of a job 1 - 99 Fusing web motor
D FUS_MOTOR 3-20
HH operating interval
TH_UM E- TH_UM set value when Power supply voltage
J 1 - 99 E POWER SET 1:100V, 2 :110 - 1-3
STAR HH preheating
120V, 3 : 220 - 240V
TH_LM E- TH_LM set value when
K 1 - 99
STAR HH preheating
* Each cool down time: 1 count = 1sec change
TH_US E- TH_US set value when
L 1 - 99
STAR HH preheating List of destination groups
TH_UM PRE- Resetting from
Group Destination
M JOB HH preheating TH_UM set 1 - 99
Group B U. S. A CANADA INCH TAIWAN –
value
Group C EUROPE U. K AUS. AB_A AB_B
* Item WARMUP END TIME HH: 1 Count = 1s Change
List of Default values and set values for each destination
Correction value for the other items: 1 count for 1 degrees C
change Item Default value (50 ppm) Default value (60 ppm)
Group B Group C Group B Group C
Code descriptions
A 10 10 10 10
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) B 10 10 10 10
TH_LM Fusing thermistor main (Back surface of paper) C 10 10 10 10
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) D 10 10 10 10
E 2 3 2 3
List of destination groups
Group Destination
Group B U. S. A CANADA INCH – –
Group C EUROPE U. K AUS. AB_A AB_B 43-35
Purpose Adjustment and setting
List of Default values and set values for each destination
Function (Purpose) Fusing nip operation check
Item Default value (50 ppm) Default value (60 ppm) Section Fusing
Group B Group C Group B Group C
Operation/Procedure
A 50 50 50 50
B 50 50 50 50 1) Prepare a black-background image, and put it on the cassette
C 50 50 50 50 with the black background facing upward.
D 50 50 50 50 2) Enter the set value with 10-key. (The cassette is specified.)
E 50 50 50 50 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
F 50 50 50 50 4) [EXECUTE] key is highlighted and printing is started.
G 50 50 50 50
When printing is executed, a jam is always generated. (As
H 50 50 50 50
shown in the photo below.)
I 50 50 50 50
J 50 50 50 50 5) Leave the jam paper for about 30sec, then remove the jam
K 50 50 50 50 paper.
L 50 50 50 50 6) Measure the width of the gloss change section (nip) of the jam
M 50 50 50 50 paper, and check to confirm that it is in the range of about
10.5mm - 12mm.
* If the difference between F and R is considerably great, the
fusing pressure may be insufficient.

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 49
 Item/ Setting Default
Setting Default Content
Item/Display item Content Display range value
range value
TN_EMP Setting of Enable/Disable of the toner Black text
A PAPER MFT Cassette selection 1-5 1 2 Allow
falling distance detection control on white
CS1 2
TN_EMP Setting of Enable/Disable of the toner backgrou
CS2 3 nd
_INT falling distance detection control of Allow
CS3 4 job interruption (Inhibit:
CS4 5 TN_EMP Enable/Disable setting of fall amount 0=NO)
white text Allow
_NEW detection control of a new cartridge
TN_PIX_ Enable/Disable setting of toner supply on black
"LACKBACKGROUND backgrou Allow
0APERFEEDDIRECTION TBL control by the yield count
nd (Allow:
PRT_HT Enable/Disable setting of printer
1=YES)
correction feedback of half-tone Allow
process control
MD VG Enable/Disable setting of the
membrane decrease grid voltage Allow
correction
MD EV Enable/Disable setting of the
membrane decrease environment Allow
'LOSSCHANGE grid voltage correction
SECTION MD VG Enable/Disable setting of the grid
MC correction by the MC total current Allow
correction
.IPWIDTH MD VG Enable/Disable setting of the VG grid
DV correction by the developer bias Allow
absolute value
MD LD Enable/Disable setting of the
membrane decrease laser power Allow
voltage correction
MD LD Enable/Disable setting of
EV environmental area and the
Allow
membrane decrease count laser
power voltage correction
MD LD Enable/Disable process control laser
Allow
HV power voltage correction
MD DL Enable/Disable setting of the
membrane decrease discharge light Allow
quantity correction
44 MD DL Enable/Disable setting of the
EV membrane decrease environment Disable
discharge quantity correction
44-1 MD MC Enable/Disable setting of the MC total
Purpose Setting current correction by an increase in Allow
the resistance
Function (Purpose) Used to set each correction operation func-
MD MC Enable/Disable setting of the MC total
tion in the image forming (process) section. EV current correction by environmental Allow
Section Image process (Photo conductor/Develop- change
ing/Transfer/Cleaning) AR_AUT Auto registration adjustment Enable/
Allow
O Disable setting
Operation/Procedure
AR_ERR Auto registration adjustment Black text
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel. OR execution error check Enable/Disable on white Allow
(The selected item is highlighted.) setting backgrou
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.) AR_PHA Enable/Disable setting of drum phase nd
SE fitting calculation feedback Enable/ (Inhibit: Allow
Disable setting 0=NO)
DM_PHA Drum phase fitting Enable/Disable white text
Set the items to the default values unless a change is specially on black Allow
SE setting
required. TC Enable/Disable setting of transfer backgrou
nd (Allow: Allow
output correction
Item/ Setting Default 1=YES)
Content PTC_EN PTC environment correction Enable/
Display range value Allow
V Disable setting
HV Normal operation high density Black text
process control Enable/Disable on white Allow
setting backgrou
HT Normal operation halftone process nd
Allow 44-2
control Enable/Disable setting (Inhibit:
TN_PIX_ Setting of Enable/Disable of toner 0=NO) Purpose Adjustment/Setup
white text Allow
SUP supply control for the yield count Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image
TN_FB Enable/Disable setting of FEEDBACK on black
Allow density sensor (registration sensor).
toner supply control backgrou
nd (Allow: Section Process
TN_INT Enable/Disable setting of the interval
1=YES) Allow Operation/Procedure
toner supply control
TN_REC Enable/Disable setting of developer When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment is executed auto-
Allow
V recovery matically.
TN_ADJ Enable/Disable setting of the sensor After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is dis-
Allow
output adjustment
played.

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 50
If the adjustment is not executed normally, "ERROR" is displayed. Class
Setting Default
ificati Content
Class Item/Display range value
Setting Default on
ificati Content REGI AA BELT_ Belt substrate F side
Item/Display range value
on ST REGS_ monitor max. value
PROC A REGS_ Light emitting quantity 0 - 255 0
1 - 255 21 F_ (Registration)
ON/ F LED adjustment value MAX
EGIS B REGS_ AB BELT_ Belt substrate F side
1 - 255 21
T R LED REGS_ monitor min. value 0 - 255 0
C REGS_ Transfer belt substrate F_ MIN (Registration)
F detection level value (F AC BELT_ Belt substrate F side
side) when the light 0 - 255 0 REGS_ monitor difference
emitting quantity 0 - 255 0
F_ DIF (BELT_REGS_F MAX-
adjustment is completed. MIN)
D REGS_ Transfer belt substrate AD BELT_ Belt substrate R side
R detection level value (R REGS_ monitor max. value
side) when the light 0 - 255 0 0 - 255 0
R_ (Registration)
emitting quantity MAX
adjustment is completed. AE BELT_ Belt substrate R side
E REGS_ Specular reflection dark REGS_ monitor min. value 0 - 255 0
F voltage (F side) 0 - 255 0 R_ MIN (Registration)
DARK AF BELT_ Belt substrate R side
F REGS_ Specular reflection dark REGS_ monitor difference
R voltage (R side) 0 - 255 0 0 - 255 0
R_ DIF (BELT_REGS_R MAX-
DARK MIN)
PROC G PCS_F Diffuse reflection dark AG PATCH Toner patch detection
0 - 255 0
ON _DARK voltage (F side) _REGS level F (K) 0 - 255 0
H PCS_R Diffuse reflection dark _F_K
0 - 255 0
_DARK voltage (R side) AH PATCH Toner patch detection
I PCS_F Linearity correction _REGS level F (C) 0 - 255 0
0 - 255 0
_V1 coefficients (F side) _F_C
J PCS_F AI PATCH Toner patch detection
0 - 255 0
_V2 _REGS level F (M) 0 - 255 0
K PCS_F _F_M
0 - 255 0
_V3 AJ PATCH Toner patch detection
L PCS_F _REGS level F (Y) 0 - 255 0
0 - 255 0
_V4 _F_Y
M PCS_F AK PATCH Toner patch detection
0 - 255 0
_V5 _REGS level R (K) 0 - 255 0
N PCS_R Linearity correction _R_K
0 - 255 0
_V1 coefficients (R side) AL PATCH Toner patch detection
O PCS_R _REGS level R (C) 0 - 255 0
0 - 255 0
_V2 _R_C
P PCS_R AM PATCH Toner patch detection
0 - 255 0
_V3 _REGS level R (M) 0 - 255 0
Q PCS_R _R_M
0 - 255 0
_V4 AN PATCH Toner patch detection
R PCS_R _REGS level R (M) 0 - 255 0
0 - 255 0 _R_Y
_V5
S PCS_F Diffuse reflection 100 -
500
_CL_ka normalization coefficients 2000 Error name Error content
T PCS_R 100 - F sensor adjustment REGS_F LED error
500
_CL_ka 2000 abnormality The target is not reached by 3 times of
U BELT_ Belt substrate F side adjustments.
PCS_F monitor max. value 0 - 255 0 R sensor adjustment REGS_R LED error
MAX (Process control) abnormality The target is not reached by 3 times of
V BELT_ Belt substrate F side adjustments.
PCS_F monitor min. value 0 - 255 0 F Color sensor PCS_F_CL_ka calculation error
MIN (Process control) adjustment The target is not reached
W BELT_ Belt substrate F side abnormality
PCS_F monitor difference Process control F BELT_PCS_F DIF error
0 - 255 0
DIF (BELT_PCS_F MAX- sensor adjustment The difference between the max. value and the
MIN) abnormality min. value of the substrate detection level is
X BELT_ Belt substrate R side greater than the specified value when the transfer
PCS_R monitor max. value 0 - 255 0 belt rotates 1 turn
MAX (Process control) R Color sensor PCS_R_CL_ka calculation error
Y BELT_ Belt substrate R side adjustment The target is not reached
PCS_R monitor min. value 0 - 255 0 abnormality
MIN (Process control) Process control R BELT_PCS_R DIF error
Z BELT_ Belt substrate R side sensor adjustment The difference between the max. value and the
PCS_R monitor difference abnormality min. value of the substrate detection level is
0 - 255 0
DIF (BELT_PCS_F MAX- greater than the specified value when the transfer
MIN) belt rotates 1 turn

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 51
 Error name Error content 44-6
Registration BELT_REGS_F_ DIF error
substrate F scan The difference between the max. value and the Purpose Adjustment
abnormality min. value of the substrate detection level is Function (Purpose) Used to execute the high density process
greater than the specified value when the transfer control forcibly.
belt rotates 1 turn
Registration BELT_REGS_R_ DIF error
Section Process
substrate R scan The difference between the max. value and the Operation/Procedure
abnormality min. value of the substrate detection level is Press [EXECUTE] key.
greater than the specified value when the transfer
belt rotates 1 turn
In case of a normal completion, the result is saved.
In case of an abnormal completion, "ERROR" is displayed.
(Refer to the table below.)
In case of an ERROR, the previous correction data are saved.
44-4
Purpose Setting Result display Content description
COMPLETE Normal complete
Function (Purpose) Used to set the conditions of the high den-
ERROR Abnormal end
sity process control operation.
INTERRUPTION Forcible interruption
Section Process
Operation/Procedure Details of error display Content description
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR Color image sensor adjustment abnormality
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR Black image sensor adjustment abnormality
3) Press [OK] key. K_HV_ERR K high density process control abnormality
C_HV_ERR C high density process control abnormality
M_HV_ERR M high density process control abnormality
Y_HV _ERR Y high density process control abnormality
Set the items to the default values unless a change is specially TIMEOUT_ERR Time out
required.

Setting Default Details of error display Content description

Item/Display Content
range value CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR Color image sensor adjustment abnormality
A PCS_CL TARGET Color image sensor 1 - 255 204 BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR Black image sensor adjustment abnormality
adjustment target value K_EHT_ERR K process control abnormality
B PCS_K TARGET Black image sensor 1 - 255 204 C_EHT_ERR C process control abnormality
adjustment target value M_EHT_ERR M process control abnormality
C LED_CL OUTPUT Color image sensor light 1 - 255 21 Y_EHT_ERR Y process control abnormality
emitting start level TIMEOUT_ERR Time out
D LED_K OUTPUT Black image sensor light 1 - 255 21
emitting start level
E PCS ADJSTMENT Color image sensor 1 - 255 8
LIMIT adjustment error 44-9
allowance level
F BELT GROUND Transfer belt one-turn 1 - 255 1
Purpose Operation data display
DIF substrate detection level Function (Purpose) Used to display the result data of the high
difference allowance density process control operation.
level
Section Image process (Photo conductor/Develop-
G BIAS_CL Developing bias (for 0 - 255 60
STANDARD DIF color) reference
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
correction voltage Operation/Procedure
H BIAS_BK Developing bias (for 0 - 255 0 Select a target display mode with [CPY/PRN], [OTHER] keys.
STANDARD DIF black) reference
correction voltage
I BIAS PATCH Toner patch making 1 - 255 60
INTERVAL developing bias interval 44-12
J Y_PAT TARGET ID Process control target 1 - 255 42 Purpose Operation data display
density level (yellow)
Function (Purpose) Used to display the operation data of the
K M_PAT TARGET ID Process control target 1 - 255 45
density level (magenta)
high density process control and the image
L C_PAT TARGET ID Process control target 1 - 255 45
density sensor (registration sensor).
density level (cyan) Section Image process (Photo conductor/Develop-
M K_PAT TARGET ID Process control target 1 - 255 50 ing)
density level (black) Operation/Procedure
N HV BK_GROUND Black image sensor 1 - 255 60
LIMIT adjustment error
Select a display mode with [TARGET] [PATCH] keys.
allowance level

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 52
44-14 44-17
Purpose Operation data display Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to display the output level of the tem- Function (Purpose) Process refresh execution
perature and humidity sensor. Section Process
Section Process (OPC drum, development)/Fusing/ Operation/Procedure
LSU 1) Select a refresh item with the touch panel key.
Operation/Procedure 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The output levels of the fusing temperature sensor, the machine 3) The refresh operation is executed.
temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor are displayed.
NOTE: Do not execute this simulation unless specially required.
Item/Display Content
Display items and descriptions of contents
TH_CL External air temperature sensor temperature
External air temperature sensor AD value Display Content
HUD_CL External air humidity sensor humidity BLADE REFRESH Blade development refresh
External air sensor AD value DEVE REFRESH Development refresh
TH1_LSU LSU thermistor 1 temperature * DEVE REFLESH execution consume
LSU thermistor 1 A/D value W-Letter A3 100% worth of toner.
TH2_LSU LSU thermistor 2 temperature
LSU thermistor 2 A/D value
TH_UM Fusing upper main thermistor temperature
Fusing upper main thermistor (AD value) 44-21
TH_UM_CS Fusing upper main thermistor (compensation)
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
temperature
Fusing upper main thermistor (compensation) AD value Function (Purpose) Used to set the halftone process control tar-
TH_UM_D Fusing upper main thermistor (differential) AD value get.
TH_SUB2 Fusing upper sub thermistor 2 temperature Section Process
Fusing upper sub thermistor 2 (AD value)
Operation/Procedure
TH_SUB2_CS Fusing upper sub thermistor 2 (compensation)
temperature Press [EXECUTE] key.
Fusing upper sub thermistor 2 (compensation) AD value The halftone process control target is set and the operation data
TH_SUB2_D Fusing upper sub thermistor 2 (differential) AD value are displayed.
TH_LM Fusing lower main thermistor temperature
Fusing lower main thermistor (AD value) Display Content
TH_US Fusing upper sub thermistor temperature COMPLETE Normal complete
Fusing upper sub thermistor (AD value) ERROR COLOR SENSOR Color image density sensor
ADJUSTMENT sensitivity adjustment error
ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black image density sensor
ADJUSTMENT sensitivity adjustment error
44-15 [YMCK] High density process control error
Purpose Setting [YMCK]
OTHER Other errors
Function (Purpose) Used to set the OPC drum idle rotation.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
44-22
1) Select an item to be set with the scroll key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Purpose Operation data display
3) Press [OK] key. Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner patch density
level in the halftone process control opera-
The initial value must be set unless any special change is required.
tion.
Item/
Content
Setting Default Section Process
Display range value
Operation/Procedure
A TIME Idle rotation interval (time interval 0 - 255 6
between the previous OPC drum
1) The toner patch density level made in the halftone process
idle rotation and the next one) control operation is displayed.
setting (h)
B AREA1 Environmental area difference 0-5 2
judgment threshold value setting 44-24
(difference between the previous
OPC drum idle rotation and the Purpose Operation data display
current one) Function (Purpose) Used to display the correction target and
C AREA2 Environmental area conditions 1 - 15 1 the correction level in the halftone process
(AND condition of the previous control operation.
OPC drum idle rotation and the
current one) Section Process
D CYCLE Previous rotation time setting 0 - 255 0 Operation/Procedure
(sec) in the process control when 1) Select the display category with [NEXT] key.
recovered from power ON,
preheating/sleep mode. 2) Select a target adjustment color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
E FLAG OPC drum idle rotation is 0-1 0
allowed or disabled. (0 : Allow
1 : Disable)

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 53
44-25 44-28
Purpose Setting Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the calculating conditions of the Function (Purpose) Used to set the process control execution
correction value for the halftone process conditions.
control. Section Process
Section Process Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
1) Select a target adjustment color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key. panel.
2) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key on the 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
touch panel. 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
4) Press [OK] key.
Set the items to the default values unless a change is specially
required.
Set the items to the default values unless a change is specially
Setting Default
required. Item/Display Content
range value
Default A INITI YES When warm-up Enable 0 0
Setting
value AL NO after clearing the Disable 1
Item/Display Content
range counter of the
K CMY
OPC drum and the
A HIGHTLIGHT Highlight correction 0 - 128 20 20
developer unit
VALUE LIMIT amount limit value
B SW ON When supplying Color 0 3
B MAX VALUE Maximum density value 0 - 128 20 20
the power (when process
LIMIT correction limit value
canceling power control
shut-off) Enable
Process 1
control
44-26 Disable
Purpose Adjustment/Setup BK 2
process
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the halftone process con-
control
trol compulsory. Enable
Section Process Pixel 3
Operation/Procedure count
judgment
Press [EXECUTE] key.
C TIME After passing the Color 0 3
The halftone process control is performed and the operation data specified time process
are displayed. from leaving control
READY Enable
COMPLETE Normal complete continuously Process 1
ERROR COLOR SENSOR Color image density sensor sensitivity (Time can be control
ADJUSTMENT adjustment error changed by Disable
ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black image density sensor sensitivity INTERVAL TIME) BK 2
ADJUSTMENT adjustment error process
[YMCK] High density process control error [YMCK] control
error Enable
OTHER Other errors Pixel 3
count
judgment
D HUM_LIMIT HUM judgment is Color 0 0
44-27 made when process
turning ON the control
Purpose Data clear power and after Enable
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the correction data of the half- passing Process 1
tone process control. INTERVAL TIME. control
Disable
Section Process
BK 2
Operation/Procedure process
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. control
Enable
2) Press [YES] key.
The correction data of the halftone process control are cleared.

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 54
 Setting Default Setting Default
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
E HUM The temperature Color 0 0 K HI-COV Setting of the The 0 1
and humidity process execution process
inside the control conditions of the control is
machine are Enable process control for performed
monitored only Process 1 the print ratio by
during a job at the control considerin
interval set by the Disable g the
item of HUM BK 2 average
HOUR. process print ratio
When the control of every
changes in the Enable 10 pages
temperature and as the
the humidity are judgment
greater than the criteria.
specified level (the Print ratio 1
set value of item judgment
HUM DIF) in inhibit
comparison with (The
the previous process
process control. control for
F REV1 YES When the Enable 0 1 the target
NO accumulated Disable 1 of print
traveling distance ratio is not
of K or M OPC performed
drum unit reaches .)
the specified level The 2
after turning ON process
the power. control is
G REV2 YES When the Enable 0 1 performed
_BK NO accumulated Disable 1 by
traveling distance considerin
of K OPC drum g the
unit reaches the average
specified level print ratio
from execution of of 30
the previous pages as
density correction. the
H REV2 YES When the Enable 0 1 judgment
_CL NO accumulated Disable 1 criteria in
traveling distance a
of M OPC drum continuou
unit reaches the s print job
specified level of 30 or
from execution of more
the previous pages.
density correction. L LO-COV Setting of the Enable 0 1
I REFR YES Select of YES/NO Key 0 1 execution Disable 1
ESH of the manual operation judgment of the
MOD process control display process control in
E NO key with key Key 1 continuous
operation operation printing of low
NO print ratio images
display M TonerCA- Setting of the Enable 0 1
J DAY When there is no 0: Disable 0 1 END process control Disable 1
color job from of the interval reduction
when the previous specified when the toner
color process days cartridge
control was judgment remaining quantity
performed to 1 - 999: 1 - 999 is 25% or less (If
when the number 999 days this is set to
of days set by this passing Enable, item M
item setting, RATIO is
perform the changed.)
process control
when executing
the next warming
up.

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 55
 Setting Default Setting Default
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
N JOB Simplified process High 0 0 Q LIMIT PAGE Setting of the 1: 10 1 10
control judgement density number of pages -
(During Job) process connected jobs of 99: 990
control : the process pages
Allow control and of the 1 step
Engine limit number of the correspon
half-tone process control ds to 10
process A number of pages. 99
control : reservation jobs
Allow are connected.
High 1 When the number
density of jobs exceeds
process the specified
control : number of pages
Inhibit (the set value of
Engine this setting), the
half-tone process control is
process performed. / The
control : process control is
Inhibit performed by AND
High 2 conditions of item
density REV condition and
process the specified
control : number of pages
Allow (the set value of
Engine this setting).
half-tone R PIX_RATIO_ Magnification ratio setting (%) of 1 - 999 5
process BK the BK toner count specified
control : value
Inhibit The set value of 100
High 3 corresponds to K print of A4 at
density the print ratio of 5%.
process S PIX_RATIO_ Magnification ratio setting (%) of 1 - 999 5
control CL the color (CMY) toner count
:Inhibit specified value
Engine The set value of 100
half-tone corresponds to K print of A4 at
process the print ratio of 5%.
control : T INTERVAL Setting of the leaving time when 1 - 255 3
Allow TIME turning ON the power (including
O JOB_END Simplified process High 0 0 the sleep recovery time) (h:
control judgement density hour)
(After Job) process U HUM HOUR Interval setting of the 1 - 24 2
control : temperature and humidity
Allow monitoring time of "HUM" (unit:
Engine 10 minutes)
half-tone V HUM_DIF The specified value of the area 1-9 2
process difference in humidity between
control : the level at execution of the
Allow previous control and the current
High 1 humidity (Applied to item HUM)
density W BK_RATIO Magnification ratio setting (%) of 1 - 999 15
process the specified value of the BK (Entry
control : OPC drum traveling distance of of 20
Allow "REV2_BK" corresp
Engine onds to
half-tone 100,00
process 0mm.)
control : X M_RATIO Magnification ratio setting (%) of 1 - 999 15
Inhibit the M OPC drum traveling (Entry
P AVERAGE- Setting of the 1: 10 1 3 distance of "REV2_CL" of 20
PAGE number of pages pages - 5: 5 corresp
of item 50 pages onds to
1 step 100,00
correspon 0mm.)
ds to 10 Y REV1_RATI Magnification ratio setting (%) of 1 - 255 20
pages. O the REV1 OPC drum traveling
distance of "REV1"
Z SHV_PAGE Interval of number of sheets of 0 - 999 100
simplified process control
standard value"
A SHV_RATIO Interval of number of traveling 0 - 999 20
A distance of simplified process
control standard value
A SHV_DIF Normal process control 1 - 255 60
B execution setting by simplified
process control result

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 56
 Setting Default Setting Default
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
A SHT_DIF Half tone engine execution 1 - 255 5 A 2TRAN_CLE Secondary transfer cleaning 5 - 999 300
C setting by simplified process M AN_ process time judgment
control result TIME2 threshold value 2 (The total
A COLOR Judgment criteria 0: The BK 0 - 999 20 number of sheets for cleaning
D BORDER whether the BK process execution conditions) (Cleaning
high density control is time: Medium)
process control is executed A 2TRAN_CLE Secondary transfer cleaning 5 - 999 500
individually regardless N AN_ process time judgment
performed or not of the M TIME3 threshold value 3 (The total
(Setting of the OPC drum number of sheets for cleaning
ratio of the M OPC traveling execution conditions) (Cleaning
drum rotation distance. time: Long)
distance for the K 1 - 999: 1 - A MC_CLEAN_ MC cleaning Disable 0 5
OPC drum rotation 999(%) O TIME interval setting Interval 1 - 99
distance (%)) A MX_CLEAN_ MC cleaning Enable 0 1
A BK ONLY Setting of the Frequency 0 5 P DURING_JO during job Disable 1
E frequency of of once for B
execution of the 4- 5 times A MC_DISCHA Discharge time setting after MC 0 - 300 0
color high density Frequency 1-5 Q RGE_TIME_ cleaning
process control of once for 1
when only 1 - 5 times A MC_DISCHA Discharge time setting in 0 - 300 0
monochrome The 4- 6 R RGE_TIME_ simulation mode after MX
output is color high 2 cleaning
continued (The density A MC_DISCHA Discharge time setting in 0 - 300 30
result of this process S RGE_TIME_ system setting after MC
setting is applied control is 3 cleaning
only when the M always
OPC drum rotation performed A BLADE_CLE Blade refresh Enable 0 10
distance is smaller . T AN_TIME interval setting Inhibit 1 - 99
than the set value
of COLOR
BORDER.)
A HT_DIF HT process control execution 1 - 255 40 44-29
F judgment developing bias Purpose Setting
variation value
A RG_ CL Setting of When the 0 0
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the
G ON_ execution of the color process control during a job.
SYNC registration process Section Process
adjustment when control is
Operation/Procedure
executing the executed.
ALL process control Executed 1 1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
when turning ON regardless panel.
the power of the 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
process
3) Press [OK] key.
control.
CL/ When the 2
Item/ Default
BK color Content Setting range
Display value
process
A COPY During copy job 0 0: No execution 2
control
B PRINTE During print job - 1: HV only 2
and the K
R 2 2: HV -> HT
process
control are C FAX During FAX 2
executed. print job
A RG_TEMP_T Time interval from registration 0 - 240 0 D SELF During self print 2
H IMER adjustment after turning ON the (MINU PRINT
power to the next execution. TE) E CPY TO Halftone 0 0:CALC 0: Color 0
AI RG_PERM_T Setting of inhibit time of 0 - 15 0 PRT process control - ULATED balance
IMER execution of the registration (HOUR TABLE copier - printer 1 1:DEFA calculation
adjustment ) conversion ULT value
A RG_HOUR_ Setting of the interval time of 0 - 15 6 table select (Revised
J TIMER execution of the registration (Above every time
adjustment )+(HO when
UR) SIM46-74 is
executed.)
A RG_BW_SY Setting of Enable/ Enable 0 1
1: Default
K NC Disable of the Disable 1
(Fixed
registration
value)
adjustment after a
monochrome job F HT Halftone 0 - 255 20
RETRY process control
A 2TRAN_CLE Secondary transfer cleaning 5 - 999 200
retry setting
L AN_ process time judgment
TIME1 threshold value 1 (The total G HT Halftone 0 - 255 3
number of sheets for cleaning TARGE process control
execution conditions) (Cleaning T standard value
time: Short) RETRY registration
retry

HV: High density process control

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 57
HT: Halftone process control
44-62
Purpose Setup/Adjustment
44-31 Function (Purpose) Used to set the process control execution
conditions.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Section Process
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the OPC drum phase. (Man-
ual adjustment) Operation/Procedure
This simulation allows collective change in the set contents of
Section Process
SIM44-4 and SIM44-28.
Operation/Procedure
A suitable one is selected among a number of options depending
on the condition.
1) Select an item to be set.
For the OPC drum phase adjustment, do not use this simulation,
To change the image density in the high density area, select
but use SIM50-22 (auto adjustment).
PROCON TARGET.
1) Select item A with scroll key.
To change the frequency of the process control operations,
2) Enter the value corresponding to the adjustment pattern with
select PROCON MODE.
10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed out.) Display/Item Content
4) Select an adjustment pattern whose deflection is within two PROCON CL ID DOWN The densities of C, M, and Y decrease.
scale lines on the adjustment pattern of C,M, Y colors. TARGET (The C/M/Y high density process control
target values decrease.)
5) Select item B with scroll key.
CL ID UP The densities of C, M, and Y increase.
6) Enter the adjustment pattern sheet number selected in proce- (The C/M/Y high density process control
dure 4). target values increase.)
7) Press [EXECUTE] key. BK ID DOWN The density of K decreases. (The high
density process control target value
8) The adjusted adjustment pattern is printed.
decreases.)
BK ID UP The density of K increases. (The high
density process control target value
44-37 increases.)
ALL ID DOWN The densities of C, M, Y and K decrease.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
(The C/M/Y/K high density process
Function (Purpose) Used to set the development bias correc- control target values decrease.)
tion level in the continuous printing opera- ALL ID UP The densities of C, M, Y and K increase.
tion. (The C/M/Y/K high density process
control target values increase.)
Section
NORMAL The standard density of C, M, Y and K.
Operation/Procedure (The C/M/Y/K high density process
1) Select a set target color with the touch panel. control target values are the standard
2) Select a target item with scroll keys. values.)
PROCON HIGH QUALITY1 The execution frequency of the process
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. MODE control is high. (It is set when the color
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) image quality is given priority.)
HIGH QUALITY2 The execution frequency of the process
control is highest. (It is set when the color
image quality is given priority.)
When the print density is varied in the continuous printing opera-
PRINT The execution frequency of the process
tion, this simulation is used. PERFORMANCE control is low. (It is set when the job
speed is given priority.)
Item/Display Content Setting Default
BW MODE The process control is executed in the
range value
normal frequency. (It is set when there
Multi-grid bias Enable 0 are little color jobs and many
MUL_M
A correction enable/ 1 monochrome jobs.)
C_ADJ Disable 1
disable setting
NORMAL The process control is executed in the
Multi-fusing bias Enable 0 normal frequency.
MUL_DV
B correction enable/ 0
_ADJ Disable 1
disable setting (When PROCON TARGET is selected.)
2A) Select the density level.

44-43 (When PROCON MODE is selected.)

Purpose Data display 2B) Select the execution frequency of the process control.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to display the identification informa-
tion of the developing unit. 4) Press [YES] key.
Section Developing system
Operation/Procedure
The identification number and the identification signal level of the
developing unit are displayed.

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 58
 Setting Default
46 Item/Display Content
range value
T SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
46-1 document)
Purpose Adjustment (Color copy mode) U TWO COLOR 2-color (red/ LOW 1 - 99 50
black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy
mode. V TWO COLOR 2-color (red/ LOW 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
Section (copy document)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
46-2
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome copy mode)
* When the r s key is pressed, the setting value of each item
can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy
mode.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is Section
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy den- Operation/Procedure
sity is decreased. 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
range value
A AUTO Auto LOW 1 - 99 50 * When the r s key is pressed, the setting value of each item
HIGH 1 - 99 50 can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
B TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
HIGH 1 - 99 50 When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50 increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy den-
PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50 sity is decreased.
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 Item/Display Content Setting Default
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 range value
HIGH 1 - 99 50 AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50
A
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 HIGH 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50
B
G MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50 HIGH 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 AUTO3 Auto 3 LOW 1 - 99 50
C
H LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50 HIGH 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
D
I TEXT(COPY TO Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50 HIGH 1 - 99 50
COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50 TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
E
J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50 PHOTO HIGH 1 - 99 50
PHOTO (COPY TO Photo (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50 TEXT/PHOTO Text/ LOW 1 - 99 50
F
COPY) document) Photograph HIGH 1 - 99 50
K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 PRINTED Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy G
HIGH 1 - 99 50 PHOTO HIGH 1 - 99 50
document) PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
L TEXT (COLOR Text (Color tone LOW 1 - 99 50 H
HIGH 1 - 99 50
TONE enhancement) HIGH 1 - 99 50 MAP MAP LOW 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) I
HIGH 1 - 99 50
M TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
AUTO1(COPY Auto 1 (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
PHOTO (COLOR Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50 J
TO COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
TONE (Color tone
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) AUTO2(COPY Auto 2 (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
K
N TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 TO COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 AUTO3(COPY Auto 3 (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
L
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) TO COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
O PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 TEXT(COPY TO Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
M
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
P PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 N PHOTO(COPY Photo (Copy
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 TO COPY) document)
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) PRINTED Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
Q MAP (COLOR Map LOW 1 - 99 50 O PHOTO(COPY (Copy
TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 TO COPY) document)
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50
R LIGHT(COLOR LIGHT LOW 1 - 99 50 P
HIGH 1 - 99 50
TONE DOCUMENT(Co HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) lor tone
enhancement)
S SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 59
46-4 Setting Default
Mode Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode) HIGH A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
send mode. C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
PHOTO
Section
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
panel. G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. H RIP – 1 - 99 50
* When the r s key is pressed, the setting value of each item
can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) 46-8
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode)
increased, and vice versa.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image send mode color
Setting Default balance RGB.
Mode Item/Display Content
range value Section
LOW A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50 1) Select an adjustment target with [R] [G] [B] keys on the touch
PHOTO panel.
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50 2) Select an adjustment target item on the touch panel.
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
The color balance can be adjusted separately for the low density
H RIP – 1 - 99 50
area and the high density area.
HIGH A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50 When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50 target color is increased, and vice versa.
PHOTO
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50 Default
Item/Display Content
value
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
A LOW DENSITY POINT Low density correction amount 50
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
B HIGH DENSITY POINT High density correction amount 50
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
H RIP – 1 - 99 50

46-9
46-5 Purpose Adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode)
Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome scanner mode) Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image density.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image Section
send mode. Operation/Procedure
Section 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
Operation/Procedure panel.
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
panel. * When the r s key is pressed, the setting value of each item
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
* When the r s key is pressed, the setting value of each item 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. This adjustment result affects the image send mode, the copy
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) mode, and the fax mode.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
increased, and vice versa. increased, and vice versa.
[RSPF]
Setting Default
Mode Item/Display Content Setting Default
range value
Item/Display Content
LOW A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50 range value
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50 A COPY : LOW RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 48
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50 adjustment (Low density side)
PHOTO B SCAN : LOW RSPF scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 48
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50 adjustment (Low density side)
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50 C FAX : LOW RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 48
adjustment (Low density side)
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
D COPY : HIGH RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 53
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
adjustment (High density side)
H RIP – 1 - 99 50
E SCAN : HIGH RSPF scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 53
adjustment (Low density side)
F FAX : HIGH RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 53
adjustment (high density)

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 60
[DSPF]
Density level
Item/Display Setting range Default value
Setting Default (Point)
Item/Display Content
range value A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
OC A COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47 B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
SIDEA: LOW exposure adjustment C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
(Low density side)
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 47
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
SIDEA: LOW exposure adjustment
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
(Low density side)
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
C FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
LOW exposure adjustment H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
(Low density side) I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 52 J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
SIDEA: HIGH exposure adjustment K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
(High density side) L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 52 M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
SIDEA: HIGH exposure adjustment N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
(Low density side) O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
F FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 52 P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
HIGH exposure adjustment Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
(high density)
DSPF A COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
SIDEB: LOW exposure adjustment
(Low density side)
46-16
B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 47
SIDEB: LOW exposure adjustment Purpose Adjustment
(Low density side) Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the monochrome copy den-
C FAX SIDEB : DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47 sity and the gamma
LOW exposure adjustment
(Low density side) Section
D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 50 Operation/Procedure
SIDEB: HIGH exposure adjustment 1) Select an adjustment target item on the touch panel.
(High density side)
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: HIGH exposure adjustment * When the r s key is pressed, the setting value of each item
(High density side) can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
F FAX SIDEB : DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 50 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
HIGH exposure adjustment
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
(high density)
increased, and vice versa.
G BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: R R
Density level
H BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50 Item/Display Setting range Default value
(Point)
SIDEB: G G
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
I BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
SIDEB: B B
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
46-10
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
Purpose Adjustment H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy color balance and I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
the gamma (for each color copy mode). J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
Section K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
Operation/Procedure
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
1) Select an adjustment target mode with the touch panel key. N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
2) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
touch panel. P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
3) Select an adjustment target item on the touch panel. Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
4) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* When the r s key is pressed, the setting value of each item
can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. 46-19
5) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Purpose Setting
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for the
increased, and vice versa.
density scanning (exposure) of mono-
TEXT Text chrome auto copy mode documents.
TEXT/PRT PHOTO Text/Printed Photo Section
PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo Operation/Procedure
PHOTO + TEXT/PHOTO Photograph + Text/Printed Photo
Select an item to be set with touch panel.
MAP Map
LIGHT Light document
When an item is selected, it is highlighted and the setting change is
COPY ORG Copy document
saved.

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 61
 Default 0 Enable
Item/Display Content Set value
value 1 Inhibit
AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1 MODE2
MODE2 2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
MODE3
AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME PRESCAN Setting Default
Item/Display Content
Stop (for copy) STOP range value
PRESCAN A CMY 0 CMY engine highest 0-1 0
AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure ON/OFF ON (0: ENABLE density correction
Stop (for FAX) 1: DISABLE) mode: Enable
AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME STOP 1 CMY engine highest
Stop (for scanner) STOP density correction
PRESCAN mode: Disable
AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL B K 0 K engine highest 0-1 1
setting NORMAL (0: ENABLE density correction
SHARP 1: DISABLE) mode: Enable
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL FULL 1 K engine highest
PART density correction
mode: Disable
C CYAN MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET CYAN maximum density
46-21 correction
D MAGENTA Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
Purpose Adjustment MAX TARGET MAGENTA maximum density
Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment (Manual correction
adjustment) E YELLOW MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET YELLOW maximum density
Section correction
Operation/Procedure F BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
1) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the TARGET BLACK maximum density
touch panel. correction

2) Select an adjustment target item on the touch panel. * When tone gap is generated in the high density area, set items A
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. and B to "0".
* When the r s key is pressed, the setting value of each item The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone
can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. gap is better.
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) * To increase the density in the high density area further, set items
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is A and B to "1".
increased, and vice versa. The tone gap may occur in high density part.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in
the color balance and density corresponding to the adjustment
value. Do not change the values of items C, D, E, and F. If these values
are changed, the density in the high density area is changed.
Density level Default
Item/Display Setting range
(Point) value
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500 46-24
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500 Purpose Adjustment
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
(Auto adjustment)
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500 Section
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500 Operation/Procedure
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
2) Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table,
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode.
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500 The copy color balance automatic adjustment is performed,
P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500 then the adjustment result pattern is printed.
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500 4) Press [OK] key.
The halftone correction target registration is processed.

46-23
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction of copy
high density section (High density tone gap
supported).
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 62
46-25 Item/Display Setting Default
Content
(Copy mode) range value
Purpose Adjustment D COLOR TEXT Color character edge 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy color balance. (Sin- (INTERCEPT) density adjustment
gle color copy mode) E ED TEXT (SLOPE) Text/Map mode gamma 1 - 99 50
skew adjustment (Text/
Section Map mode)
Operation/Procedure F ED TEXT Text/Map mode density 1 - 99 50
1) Select an adjustment target color with [C][M][Y] keys on the (INTERCEPT) adjustment (Text/Map
touch panel. mode)

2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch When the adjustment values of items A and C are changed, the
panel. gamma of character edge and line edge image density section is
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. changed.
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) When the adjustment value is increased, the image contrast of
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the character edge and line edge is increased. When the adjustment
target color is increased, and vice versa. value is decreased, the image contrast of text and line edge is
decreased.
Default value When the adjustment values of items B and D are increased, the
Item/Display Setting range
C M Y image density of character edge and line edge section is
A RED 0 - 255 0 255 200 decreased, and vice versa.
B GREEN 0 - 255 255 0 255
C BLUE 0 - 255 255 150 0
D CYAN 0 - 255 255 0 0
46-30
E MAGENTA 0 - 255 0 255 0
F YELLOW 0 - 255 0 0 255 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
G ORANGE 0 - 255 0 150 255 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the resolution in the sub
H NAVY 0 - 255 255 200 0 scanning direction in the copy mode.
I LIGHT GREEN 0 - 255 150 0 150
Section
J LIGHT BLUE 0 - 255 150 20 0
Operation/Procedure
K AQUA MARINE 0 - 255 170 0 50
L PURPLE 0 - 255 128 255 0 1) Refer to the following table, and enter the set value corre-
M PINK 0 - 255 0 150 20 sponding to the resolution mode with 10-key.
N YELLOW GREEN 0 - 255 128 0 255 2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
O BEIGE 0 - 255 0 50 170
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A SCAN Scan resolution Mode1 0-1 0 0
46-26 RESOLUTION selection Mode2 1
SW (COPY: COLOR)
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to reset the single color mode color RSPF
balance set value to the default. Resolution in the sub scanning direction (DPI)
Section Scan 25-99% 100-200% 201-400%
Mode
mode [Magnification [Magnification [Magnification
Operation/Procedure
ratio] ratio] ratio]
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Mode1 OC 600 600 600
2) Press [YES] key. RSPF 600 600 -
The color balance value of the single color mode is reset to the Mode2 OC 300 600 600
default value. RSPF 300 600 -

DSPF

46-27 Resolution in the sub scanning direction (DPI)

Scan 25-99% 100-200% 201-400%
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Mode
mode [Magnification [Magnification [Magnification
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma/density of color ratio] ratio] ratio]
copy images, texts, and line image edges. Mode1 OC 600 600 600
DSPF 600 600 -
Section
Mode2 OC 400 600 600
Operation/Procedure DSPF 300 600 -
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) 46-32
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Item/Display Setting Default
Content Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document background
(Copy mode) range value
density reproducibility in the monochrome
A BLACK TEXT Black character edge 1 - 99 50
(SLOPE) gamma skew adjustment auto copy mode.
B BLACK TEXT Black character edge 1 - 99 50 Section
(INTERCEPT) density adjustment Operation/Procedure
C COLOR TEXT Color character edge 1 - 99 50
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
(SLOPE) gamma skew adjustment
panel.

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 63
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Default value Defa
Setting
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) Item/Display Content
range
C M Y ult
value
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
OUTC I LIGHT LG output 0 - 255 150 0 150 -
background and the low density image is increased. When the
OLOR GREEN color
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background
(Outp J LIGHT LB output 0 - 255 150 20 0 -
and the low density image is decreased. ut BLUE color
RSPF color K AQUA AM output 0 - 255 170 0 50 -
coeffic MARINE color
Item / Display Content Setting Default ient) L PURPLE PU output 0 - 255 128 255 0 -
range value
color
A COPY:OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
M PINK P output 0 - 255 0 150 20 -
B COPY:RSPF Copy mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196 color
C SCAN:OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 N YELLOW YG output 0 - 255 128 0 255 -
D SCAN:RSPF Scanner mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196 GREEN color
E FAX:OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 O BEIGE BE output 0 - 255 0 50 170 -
F FAX:RSPF FAX mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196 color
CHR A RED / Red 0-6 - - - 3
DSPF OMA BLACK extraction
(Chro mode
Item / Display Content Setting Default
ma (The red
range value
adjust recognitio
A COPY:OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
ment) n area is
COPY DSPF Copy mode (for DSPF top adjusted.)
B 1 - 250 196
SIDE1) side)
B KS:CHR Chromatic 0-6 - - - 3
COPY DSPF Copy mode (for DSPF OMATIC color
C 1 - 250 196
SIDE2) back side) extraction
D SCAN:OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 mode
SCAN DSPF Scanner mode (for DSPF (The
E 1 - 250 196
SIDE1) top side) chromatic
SCAN DSPF Scanner mode (for DSPF color
F 1 - 250 196
SIDE2) back side) recognitio
G FAX:OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 n area is
FAX DSPF FAX mode (for DSPF top adjusted.)
H 1 - 250 196
SIDE1) side)
FAX DSPF FAX mode (for DSPF back
I 1 - 250 196
SIDE2) side)
46-37
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproduction capability
46-36 of monochrome mode color.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Section
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the colors in the 2-color Operation/Procedure
copy mode.
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
Section 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Operation/Procedure 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch 4) Press [YES] key.
panel.
This is to adjust the reproduction capability of red and yellow
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. images when copying color documents with red and yellow images
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) in the monochrome mode.
By changing the density level of each color, the color adjustment in
the 2-color copy mode can be performed. Item/Display Content
Setting Default
range value
A R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 127
Default value Defa B G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 814
Setting C R-Ratio Print gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 299
Item/Display Content C M Y ult
range RIP
value
OUTC A RED R output 0 - 255 0 255 200 - D G-Ratio Print gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 587
OLOR color RIP
(Outp B GREEN G output 0 - 255 255 0 255 -
ut color B-Ratio Gray making setting (B)
color C BLUE B output 0 - 255 255 150 0 - (1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio)
coeffic color B-Ratio RIP Print gray making setting (B)
ient) D CYAN C output 0 - 255 255 0 0 - (1000-R-Ratio RIP - G-Ratio RIP)
color
E MAGENT M output 0 - 255 0 255 0 - * B-Ratio: The value of gray making setting (B) is obtained from
A color the formula below.
F YELLOW Y output 0 - 255 0 0 255 - 1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio
color
When [DEFAULT] key is pressed, the values are set to the initial
G ORANG O output 0 - 255 0 150 255 -
values (Default).
E color
H NAVY N output 0 - 255 255 200 0 - When the adjustment value of the adjustment item A is increased,
color the copy density of red images is decreased. When the adjustment
value is decreased, the density is increased.

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 64
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item B is increased, Item/Display Select Default
the copy density of yellow images is increased. When the adjust- Content
(Copy mode) button value
ment value is decreased, the density in also decreased. MANUAL LIGHT (-) LUT2 Pencil NORMAL
ORIGINAL (-) LUT1
NORMAL
46-38 (+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
AUTO AUTO (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the black component (-) LUT1 judgment
amount in the color copy mode. NORMAL
Section (+) LUT1
Operation/Procedure (+) LUT2

1) Select the AUTO MODE or the MANUAL MODE with the mode
key.
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. 46-39
3) Press the black component amount select key. Purpose Adjustment/Setup
This adjusts black component amount in the color copy mode. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send
(except character and line image) images.
As a result of this adjustment, the gradation of the shade part Section
changes.
Operation/Procedure
Item/Display Select Default 1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
Content
(Copy mode) button value 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
MANUAL TEXT PRT (-) LUT2 Text print NORMAL
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
(-) LUT1 (Manual)
Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input large
NORMAL
numeric value to decrease moire.
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
Setting Default
TEXT (-) LUT2 Text (Manual) NORMAL Item/Display Content
range value
(-) LUT1 A 200 x 100 [DPI] OFF 200 x 100 [DPI] 0-2 1
NORMAL halftone OFF
(+) LUT1 B 200 x 200 [DPI] OFF 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1
(+) LUT2 halftone OFF
PRINTED (-) LUT2 Printed photo NORMAL C 200 x 200 [DPI] ON 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1
PHOTO (-) LUT1 (Manual) halftone ON
NORMAL D 200 x 400 [DPI] OFF 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
(+) LUT1 halftone OFF
(+) LUT2 E 200 x 400 [DPI] ON 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
PHOTO (-) LUT2 Photograph/Text NORMAL halftone ON
(-) LUT1 photograph F 400 x 400 [DPI] OFF 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1
NORMAL (Manual) halftone OFF
(+) LUT1 G 400 x 400 [DPI] ON 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1
halftone ON
(+) LUT2
H 600 x 600 [DPI] OFF 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1
TEXT (-) LUT2 Text/Photograph NORMAL
halftone OFF
PHOTO (-) LUT1 (Manual)
I 600 x 600 [DPI] ON 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1
NORMAL
halftone ON
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
MAP (-) LUT2 Map (Manual) NORMAL
(-) LUT1 46-40
NORMAL
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
CPY TO (-) LUT2 Copy document/ NORMAL (Collective adjustment of all the modes)
CPY/TXT (-) LUT1 Text printed Section
PRT NORMAL (Manual)
Operation/Procedure
(+) LUT1
1) Set the document on the document table.
(+) LUT2
CPY TO (-) LUT2 Copy document/ NORMAL 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
CPY/TEXT (-) LUT1 Text (Manual) 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
NORMAL When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
(+) LUT1 and the scanned document image is outputted.
(+) LUT2
CPY TO (-) LUT2 Copy document/ NORMAL Setting Default
Item/Display Content
CPY/ (-) LUT1 Printed photo range value
PHOTO NORMAL (Manual) A EXPOSURE Used to adjust the FAX send 1 - 99 50
(+) LUT1 LEVEL(ALL) image density. (Collective
(+) LUT2 adjustment of all the modes)

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 65
46-41 Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup M EXECUTE AUTO Print Fine/Auto 1 1
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. MODE EXP1 mode Fine/ 2
(Normal) Exposure 1
EXP2 Fine/ 3
Section
Exposure 2
Operation/Procedure EXP3 Fine/ 4
1) Set the document on the document table. Exposure 3
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. EXP4 Fine/ 5
Exposure 4
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
EXP5 Fine/ 6
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set Exposure 5
and the scanned document image is outputted. AUTO Fine/ 7
H_TONE Automatic/
Item/Display Content
Setting Default halftone
range value EXP1 Fine/ 8
A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50 H_TONE Exposure 1/
B EXPOSURE1 Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 Halftone
C EXPOSURE2 Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 EXP2 Fine/ 9
D EXPOSURE3 Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 H_TONE Exposure 2/
E EXPOSURE4 Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 Halftone
F EXPOSURE5 Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 EXP3 Fine/ 10
G EXECUTE AUTO Print Auto 1 1 H_TONE Exposure 3/
MODE mode Exposure 1 Halftone
EXP1 2
EXP4 Fine/ 11
EXP2 Exposure 2 3
H_ONE Exposure 4/
EXP3 Exposure 3 4
Halftone
EXP4 Exposure 4 5
EXP5 Fine/ 12
EXP5 Exposure 5 6 H_TONE Exposure 5/
Halftone

46-42
Purpose Adjustment/Setup 46-43
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. Purpose Adjustment/Setup
(Fine) Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
Section (Super Fine)
Operation/Procedure Section
1) Set the document on the document table. Operation/Procedure
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 1) Set the document on the document table.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
and the scanned document image is outputted. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
and the scanned document image is outputted.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value Setting Default
A AUTO Fine/Automatic 1 - 99 50 Item/Display Content
range value
B EXPOSURE1 Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 A AUTO Super Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50
C EXPOSURE2 Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 B EXPOSURE1 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
D EXPOSURE3 Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 Exposure 1
E EXPOSURE4 Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 C EXPOSURE2 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
F EXPOSURE5 Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 Exposure 2
G AUTO H_TONE Fine/Automatic/ 1 - 99 50 D EXPOSURE3 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone Exposure 3
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 1/ 1 - 99 50 E EXPOSURE4 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone Exposure 4
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 2/ 1 - 99 50 F EXPOSURE5 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone Exposure 5
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 3/ 1 - 99 50 G AUTO H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone Auto/Halftone
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 4/ 1 - 99 50 H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone Exposure 1/Halftone
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 5/ 1 - 99 50 I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone Exposure 2/Halftone
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Exposure 3/Halftone
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Exposure 4/Halftone
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Exposure 5/Halftone

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 66
 Setting Default Setting Default
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
M EXECUTE AUTO Print Super Fine/ 1 1 M EXECUTE AUTO Print Ultra Fine/ 1 1
MODE mode Auto MODE mode Auto
EXP1 Super Fine/ 2 EXP1 Ultra Fine/ 2
Exposure 1 Exposure 1
EXP2 Super Fine/ 3 EXP2 Ultra Fine/ 3
Exposure 2 Exposure 2
EXP3 Super Fine/ 4 EXP3 Ultra Fine/ 4
Exposure 3 Exposure 3
EXP4 Super Fine/ 5 EXP4 Ultra Fine/ 5
Exposure 4 Exposure 4
EXP5 Super Fine/ 6 EXP5 Ultra Fine/ 6
Exposure 5 Exposure 5
AUTO Super Fine/ 7 AUTO Ultra Fine/ 7
H_TONE Auto/ H_TONE Auto/
Halftone Halftone
EXP1 Super Fine/ 8 EXP1 Ultra Fine/ 8
H_TONE Exposure 1/ H_TONE Exposure 1/
Halftone Halftone
EXP2 Super Fine/ 9 EXP2 Ultra Fine/ 9
H_TONE Exposure 2/ H_TONE Exposure 2/
Halftone Halftone
EXP3 Super Fine/ 10 EXP3 Ultra Fine/ 10
H_TONE Exposure 3/ H_TONE Exposure 3/
Halftone Halftone
EXP4 Super Fine/ 11 EXP4 Ultra Fine/ 11
H_TONE Exposure 4/ H_TONE Exposure 4/
Halftone Halftone
EXP5 Super Fine/ 12 EXP5 Ultra Fine/ 12
H_TONE Exposure 5/ H_TONE Exposure 5/
Halftone Halftone

46-44 46-45
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
(Ultra fine) (600dpi).
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Set the document on the document table. 1) Set the document on the document table.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
and the scanned document image is outputted. and the scanned document image is outputted.

Setting Default Setting Default

Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
A AUTO Ultra Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50 A AUTO 600dpi/Auto 1 1 - 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 B EXPOSURE1 600dpi/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
C EXPOSURE2 Ultra Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 C EXPOSURE2 600dpi/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
D EXPOSURE3 Ultra Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 D EXPOSURE3 600dpi/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 Ultra Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 E EXPOSURE4 600dpi/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
F EXPOSURE5 Ultra Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 F EXPOSURE5 600dpi/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
G AUTO H_TONE Ultra Fine/Auto/ 1 - 99 50 G AUTO H_TONE 600dpi/Auto/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone Halftone 1
H EXPOSURE1 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50 H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 1/ 1 - 99 50
H_TONE Exposure 1/Halftone Halftone
I EXPOSURE2 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50 I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 2/ 1 - 99 50
H_TONE Exposure 2/Halftone Halftone
J EXPOSURE3 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50 J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 3/ 1 - 99 50
H_TONE Exposure 3/Halftone Halftone
K EXPOSURE4 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50 K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 4/ 1 - 99 50
H_TONE Exposure 4/Halftone Halftone
L EXPOSURE5 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50 L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 5/ 1 - 99 50
H_TONE Exposure 5/Halftone Halftone

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 67
 Setting Default Setting Default
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
M EXECUTE AUTO Print 600dpi/ 1 1 I 600DPI RIP H_TONE For 600dpi/ 1 - 99 50
MODE mode Auto Halftone ON
EXP1 600dpi/ 2 mode
Exposure 1
EXP2 600dpi/ 3
Exposure 2
EXP3 600dpi/ 4 46-47
Exposure 3 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
EXP4 600dpi/ 5
Exposure 4
Function (Purpose) Used to set the compression rate of copy
EXP5 600dpi/ 6
and scan images (JPEG).
Exposure 5 Section
AUTO 600dpi/ 7 Operation/Procedure
H_TONE Auto/
Halftone
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
EXP1 600dpi/ 8 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
H_TONE Exposure 3) Press [OK] key.
1/Halftone
The set value is saved.
EXP2 600dpi/ 9
H_TONE Exposure
Setting Default
2/Halftone Category Item/Display Content
range value
EXP3 600dpi/ 10
FILLING A FILLING LOW Low
H_TONE Exposure
(COLOR) (C) compression 0
3/Halftone
(Color)
EXP4 600dpi/ 11
MIDDLE Medium
H_TONE Exposure
compression 1 0
4/Halftone
(Color)
EXP5 600dpi/ 12
HIGH High
H_TONE Exposure
compression 2
5/Halftone
(Color)
FILLING B FILLING LOW Low
(GRAY) (G) compression 0
(Gray)
46-46
MIDDLE Medium
Purpose Adjustment/Setup compression 1 0
(Gray)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
HIGH High
(RGB RIP)
compression 2
Section (Gray)
Operation/Procedure PRINT C PRINT LOW Low
HOLD (C) compression 0
1) Select a target mode for adjustment.
(COLOR) (Color)
2) Set the document on the document table. MIDDLE Medium
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. compression 1 0
4) Press [OK] key. (Color)
HIGH High
When the set value is increased, the density becomes higher.
compression 2
When the set value is decreased, the density becomes lower. (Color)
PRINT D PRINT LOW Low
Setting Default
Item/Display Content HOLD (G) compression 0
range value
(GRAY) (Gray)
A STANDARD RIP For Normal/ 1 - 99 50
MIDDLE Medium
Halftone OFF
compression 1 0
mode
(Gray)
B FINE RIP For Fine/Halftone 1 - 99 50
HIGH High
OFF mode
compression 2
C FINE RIP H_TONE For Fine/Halftone 1 - 99 50 (Gray)
ON mode
PUSH E SCAN MIDDLE Medium
D SUPER FINE RIP For Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 SCAN (C) 1 compression 0
Halftone OFF (COLOR) mode 1
mode (Scanner MIDDLE Medium
E SUPER FINE RIP H_TONE For Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 Color) 2 compression 1 1
Halftone ON mode 2
mode
MIDDLE Medium
F ULTRA FINE RIP For Ultra fine/ 1 - 99 50 3 compression 2
Halftone OFF mode 3
mode
PUSH F SCAN MIDDLE Medium
G ULTRA FINE RIP H_TONE For Ultra fine/ 1 - 99 50 SCAN (G) 1 compression 0
Halftone ON (GRAY) mode 1
mode (Scanner MIDDLE Medium
H 600DPI RIP For 600dpi/ 1 - 99 50 Gray) 2 compression 1 1
Halftone OFF mode 2
mode
MIDDLE Medium
3 compression 2
mode 3

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 68
46-48 Density level Default
Item/Display Setting range
(Point) value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
Function (Purpose) Used to change the copy output resolution M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
to 600dpi or 1200dpi depending on the N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
printing quality. O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
Section P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.

Item Button display Content Default value 46-52

AUTO 600DPI ED AUTO 600DPI DT
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
600DPI DT
TEXT/PRT PHOTO 600DPI ED Text/Printed 600DPI DT Function (Purpose) Used to set the gamma default for the copy
600DPI DT Photo mode heavy paper and the image process
1200DPI DT mode. (After execution of either SIM46-54
TEXT/PHOTO 600DPI DT Text/ 600DPI DT or SIM46-51, the adjustment value is reset
1200DPI DT Photograph to the initial value.)
PRINTED PHOTO 600DPI DT Printed photo 1200DPI DT Section
1200DPI DT Operation/Procedure
PHOTO 600DPI DT Photograph 1200DPI DT
1) Select an item to be set to the default with the touch panel key.
1200DPI DT
To reset the adjustment values of all the items, select [ALL].
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [YES] key.
46-51
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Display Content
Dither HEAVYPAPER Copier/Heavy paper gamma
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma for the copy
BLACK EDGE Black edge
mode heavy paper mode and the image
COLOR EDGE Color edge
process mode.
B/W ED Monochrome error diffusion
Section B/W 1200 Monochrome dither 1200dpi
Operation/Procedure B/W 600 Monochrome dither 600dpi
1) Select a target adjustment mode with the touch panel key B/W 600 LOW Monochrome dither 600dpi Low
[PAPER/DITHER]. WOVEN1 Watermark 1
WOVEN2 Watermark 2
2) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the
WOVEN3 Watermark 3
touch panel.
WOVEN4 Watermark 4
3) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key on the
touch panel.
4) Enter the set value with 10-key.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key. 46-54
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the self print image is out- Purpose Adjustment
putted. Function (Purpose) Used to perform the engine halftone auto-
When the image density is insufficient or a background copy is matic density adjustment (dither).
made in heavy paper copy, change this adjustment value to adjust Section
the image density.
Operation/Procedure
Item/Display Content Color 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
HEAVY Copier heavy paper gamma KCMY The high density process control is started to make 48 patch
DITH1 Black edge K self print. (A4 (11" x 8.5") or A3 (11" x 17") paper in the paper
DITH2 Color edge KCMY feed tray is used.)
DITH3 Color error diffusion KCMY 2) Place the 48 patch self print on the document table, and press
DITH4 Monochrome error diffusion K [EXECUTE] key.
DITH7 Monochrome dither (1200dpi) K
Scanning the 48 patch self print is started.
DITH8 Monochrome dither(600dpi) K
DITH9 Monochrome dither(600dpi low) K After scanning the 48 patch self print, the 17 patch self print is
automatically printed.
3) Press [OK] key.
Density level Default
Item/Display Setting range After completion of the correction amount registration, the
(Point) value
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500 screen shifts to the dither selection menu.
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500 4) Select an item (dither) to be adjusted.
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500 HEAVYPAPER Copier/Heavy paper gamma
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500 BLACK EDGE Black edge
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500 COLOR EDGE Color edge
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500 B/W ED Monochrome error diffusion
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500 B/W 1200 Monochrome dither 1200dpi (except MX-xx50
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500 series)
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500 B/W 600 Monochrome dither 600dpi
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500 B/W 600 LOW Monochrome dither 600dpi Low

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 69
 WOVEN1 Watermark 1
Content Setting Default
WOVEN2 Watermark 2 Mode Item/Display
(copy mode) range value
WOVEN3 Watermark 3 COLOR A AUTO Auto OFF 0 0
WOVEN4 Watermark 4 ON 1
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. B TEXT Text OFF 0 1
ON 1
The 48 patch self print is printed.
C TEXT PRT Text print OFF 0 0
6) Place the 48 patch self print on the document table, and press ON 1
[EXECUTE] key. D PRINTED Printed Photo OFF 0 0
Scanning the 48 patch self print is started. PHOTO ON 1
After scanning the patch, the screen automatically shifts to the E TEXT PHOTO Text OFF 0 0
dither selection menu. photograph ON 1
7) After completion of the adjustment of all the density adjustment F PHOTO Photograph OFF 0 0
items (dither), press [OK] key. ON 1
G MAP Map OFF 0 1
ON 1
H LIGHT Light OFF 0 0
46-55 document ON 1
Purpose Adjustment/Setup I CPY TO CPY/ Text (copy OFF 0 1
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the drop out color in the TEXT document) ON 1
image send mode (monochrome manual J CPY TO CPY/ Text print OFF 0 0
text mode). TXT PRT (copy ON 1
document)
Section K CPY TO CPY/ Printed Photo OFF 0 0
Operation/Procedure PHOTO (copy ON 1
In the image send mode (monochrome manual text mode), the document)
range where color images are reproduced as monochrome images MONO A AUTO Auto OFF 0 0
is adjusted. ON 1
B TEXT Text OFF 0 1
1) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
ON 1
When the adjustment value is increased, colors dropout C TEXT PRT Text print OFF 0 0
becomes easy to narrow the reproduction range. When the ON 1
adjustment value is decreased, color dropout becomes difficult D PRINTED Printed Photo OFF 0 0
to widen the reproduction range. PHOTO ON 1
E TEXT PHOTO Text OFF 0 0
Setting Default photograph
Item/Display Content ON 1
range value
F PHOTO Photograph OFF 0 0
A CHROMA Dropout color range adjustment 0-6 3
ON 1
2) Scan the document in the image send mode (monochrome G MAP Map OFF 0 1
manual text mode), and check the adjustment result. ON 1
H LIGHT Light OFF 0 0
document ON 1
I CPY TO CPY/ Auto (copy OFF 0 0
46-58 AUTO document) ON 1
Purpose Adjustment/Setup J CPY TO CPY/ Text (copy OFF 0 1
Function (Purpose) Used to set the copy mode pseudo resolu- TEXT document) ON 1
tion. (Smoothing process) K CPY TO CPY/ Text print OFF 0 0
TXT PRT (copy ON 1
Section document)
Operation/Procedure L CPY TO CPY/ Printed Photo OFF 0 0
1) Select an item (mode) to be set with the button and the scroll PHOTO (copy ON 1
key. document)

2) Enter the set value with 10-key.

3) Press [OK] key.
1(ON): 9600 (equivalent) x 600 dpi 46-60
0 (OFF): 600 x 600 dpi Purpose Adjustment/Setup
The setting is reflected only the image edge area. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness in the color
auto copy mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
2) Input numeric value corresponding to sharpness level (filter
process mode) with 10-keys.
3) Press [OK] key.
This is used to adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy mode
and the smoothness (roughness) in the dark area.

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 70
 Setting Default 46-61
Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
A SCREE H Sharpness (filter) Strong 1 3
N adjustment of dot empha Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the area separation recogni-
FILTER pattern image in sis tion level.
LEVEL L auto copy mode Soft 2 Section
empha
Operation/Procedure
sis
AUTO Auto 3 1) Select an adjustment mode.
B CPY CL SOFT Sharpness (filter) SOFT 1 2 2) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
AUTO CENT adjustment for the CENT 2 panel.
FILTER ER automatic copy ER 3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
LEVEL HIGH mode (Text, HIGH 3
Printed Photo / 4) Press [OK] key.
Printed Photo
images)
C CPY SOFT Sharpness (filter) SOFT 1 2 This Sim is overwritten by changing Image “Quality Adjustment” ->
PUSH CENT adjustment for the CENT 2 “Copy Image Quality” -> “Image Quality Priority”.
AUTO ER automatic push ER
FILTER HIGH scan mode (Text, HIGH 3
(It is overwritten just by pressing the “Store” on screen without
LEVEL Printed Photo / changing the setting.)
Printed Photo Make sure to set corresponding item Z to “1” after changing the
images) value.
D COLOR OFF Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
COPY : setting to C, M, Y
Then the adjustment of “Image Quality Priority” in System Settings
ON ON 1
CMY image in color will be invalidated. (The adjustment itself is allowed from UI point of
copy mode view however, the image quality won’t change because the setting
E COLOR OFF Soft filter applying OFF 0 1 won’t be reflected to the Sim.)
COPY : ON setting to K image ON 1 - When “AUTO” in “COLOR” or “MONO” has been adjusted:
K in color copy
Go to COLOR -> AUTO -> and set Z to 1…. Image Quality Priority
mode
“Auto” will be invalidated.
F SINGLE OFF Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
COLOR ON setting to C, M, Y ON 1 - When “TPP” or “COPY (AUTO&TPP)” in “COLOR” or ”MONO”
: CMY image in single has been adjusted:
color copy mode Go to COLOR -> TPP -> and set Z to 1…. Image Quality Priority
G 2 OFF Setting of YES/ OFF 0 1 “Text/Prtd.Photo” will be invalidated.
COLOR ON NO of applying ON 1
COPY : the soft filter to C/
(The item Z is not available in “MONO” and “COPY (AUTO&TPP)”)
CMY M/Y images of the The adjustment of “MONO” -> “TPP” will affect FAX.
2-color copy mode This must be set to the default unless any change is specially
H 2 OFF Setting of YES/ OFF 0 1 required.
COLOR ON NO of applying ON 1
COPY : the soft filter to K
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly different from
K images of the 2- the default value, image quality trouble may occur for some docu-
color copy mode ments.
I B/W OFF Soft filter applying OFF 0 1
COPY ON setting in ON 1 Item/Display Content
monochrome COLOR AUTO [Color/Gray] Auto
copy mode TPP [Color/Gray] Manual (Text print)
J COLOR OFF Soft filter applying OFF 0 1 COPY(TPP and [Color/Gray] Copy document (Text print
PUSH : ON setting to image in ON 1 AUTO) and auto)
RGB push scan color MONO AUTO [Monochrome] Auto
mode TPP [Monochrome] Manual (Text print)
K B/W OFF Soft filter applying OFF 0 1 COPY(TPP and [Monochrome] Copy document (Text print
PUSH ON setting to image in ON 1 AUTO) and auto)
push scan
monochrome
mode Setting Default
Item/Display Content
L COLOR OFF Setting of ON/ OFF 0 0 range value
PRINT: ON OFF of soft filter ON 1 SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF:
A 0-1 0
CMY application to [TXT ON SCR] Text on dot
color print C, M, Y SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF:
B 0-1 0
images [LINE SCR] line screen
M COLOR OFF Setting of ON/ OFF 0 0 SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF:
C 0-1 0
PRINT: ON OFF of soft filter ON 1 [SMALL SCR] Dot in a small area
K application to Detection ON/OFF:
SEGMENT: SWITCH
color print K D High line number 0-1 0
[HIGH LPI]
images judgment select
N B/W OFF Setting of ON/ OFF 0 0 SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF:
PRINT ON OFF of soft filter ON 1 E [TXT ON SCR IMAGE Text on image send 0-1 0
application to SEND] dots
monochrome print Detection level
SEGMENT: ADJUST
images F adjustment: Black 1 - 99 50
[BK TXT 1]
text 1
Detection level
SEGMENT: ADJUST
G adjustment: Color 1 - 99 50
[CL TXT 1]
text 1

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 71
 Setting Default 3) Press [OK] key.
Item/Display Content
range value
Detection level
SEGMENT: ADJUST
H adjustment: Black 1 - 49 25
[BK TXT 2, CL TXT 2] This must be set to the default unless any change is specially
text 2, Color text 2
required.
Detection level
SEGMENT: ADJUST When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly different from
I adjustment: Thine 1 - 99 50
[THIN LINE] the default value, image quality trouble may occur for some docu-
line
Detection level ments.
SEGMENT: ADJUST
J adjustment: Text 1 1 - 99 50
[TXT ON SCR 1]
on dots Setting Default
Item/Display Content
Detection level range value
SEGMENT: ADJUST
K adjustment: Text 2 1 - 99 50 A SW_ACS ACS judgment reference 0-1 1
[TXT ON SCR 2]
on dots area select
Detection level B TEXT_IMAGE Text/Image judgment 0-6 3
SEGMENT: ADJUST adjustment: priority level adjustment
L 1 - 15 8
[TXT ON SCR AREA 1] Detection area 1 of C TEXT_BLANK Text/Blank judgment 0-6 4
text on dots priority level adjustment
Detection level D HT_LV Dot area judgment 0-6 1
SEGMENT: ADJUST adjustment: threshold value
M 1 - 99 50
[TXT ON SCR AREA 2] Detection area 2 of adjustment
text on dots E AE_AREA_LV Color AE judgment target 0-6 3
Detection level area adjustment
SEGMENT: ADJUST adjustment: High F AE_LV_CC AE background detection 0-8 4
N 1 - 49 25
[HIGH LPI] line number division result
judgment adjustment:
Detection level For color copy
SEGMENT: ADJUST
O adjustment: No 1 - 99 50 G AE_LV_MC AE background detection 0-8 4
[BK]
chrome judgment division result
Detection level adjustment:
SEGMENT: ADJUST
P adjustment: Chrome 1 - 99 50 For monochrome copy
[CL]
judgment H AE_LV_CS AE background detection 0-8 4
Detection level division result
SEGMENT: ADJUST
Q adjustment: Text on 1 - 99 50 adjustment:
[TXT ON BG]
background For color scan
Detection level I AE_LV_MS AE background detection 0-8 4
SEGMENT: ADJUST
R adjustment: High 1 - 49 25 division result
[SCR 1 HIGH]
density dots 1 adjustment:
Detection level For monochrome scan
SEGMENT: ADJUST
S adjustment: Medium 1 - 49 25 J AE_JUDGE Color AE background 0-4 0
[SCR 1 MIDDLE]
density dots 1 _LV_L_U density threshold value
Detection level adjustment (lower limit)
SEGMENT: ADJUST
T adjustment: Low 1 - 49 25 K AE_JUDGE Color AE background 0 - 10 0
[SCR 1 LOW]
density dots 1 LV_L_O density threshold value
SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level adjustment (upper limit)
U 1 - 15 8
[SCR 2] adjustment: Dot 2 L AE_JUDGE_ Color AE background 0 - 10 5
SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level LV_C detection level
V 1 - 15 8
[SCR 3] adjustment: Dot 3 adjustment (chroma)
Detection level M AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0
SEGMENT: ADJUST
W adjustment: line 1 - 49 25 _ONOFF OFF OFF switch: OFF 1
[LINE HALFTONE]
screen _CC For color copy
Detection level N AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0
SEGMENT: ADJUST
X adjustment: Small 1 - 49 25 _ONOFF OFF OFF switch: OFF 1
[SMALL SCR 1]
Dot Area 1 _MC For mono-
Detection level chrome copy
SEGMENT: ADJUST O AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0
Y adjustment: Small 1 - 99 50
[SMALL SCR 2] _ONOFF OFF switch :
Dot Area 2 OFF OFF 1
Image Quality _CS For color scan
SEGMENT: SWITCH Priority ON/OFF : P AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0
Z 0-1 0
[LOCK] Image Quality _ONOFF OFF OFF switch : OFF 1
Priority lock _MS For mono-
chrome copy
Q BLANK_JUDGE Blank judgment level 0 - 10 0
_LV_L adjustment (value)
46-62 R BLANK_JUDGE Blank judgment level 0 - 10 0
_LV_C adjustment (chroma)
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
S MODE0_UNDE Mode 0 developing 0-6 0
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the R paper mode select
ACS, the area separation, the background T MODE1_UNDE Mode 1 developing 0-6 0
image process, and the auto exposure R paper mode select
mode. U MODE5_UNDE Mode 5 developing 0-6 0
Section R paper mode select
V MODE6_UNDE Mode 6 developing 0-6 0
Operation/Procedure R paper mode select
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch W SW_CHANGE_ Mode 0: Mode judgment 0-6 0
panel. MODE0 select
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 72
 Setting Default 46-65
Item/Display Content
range value
X SW_CHANGE_ Mode 1: Mode judgment 0-6 1 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
MODE1 select Function (Purpose) Used to set the color correction table.
Y SW_CHANGE_ Mode 2: Mode judgment 0-6 2
Section
MODE2 select
Z SW_CHANGE_ Mode 3: Mode judgment 0-6 3 Operation/Procedure
MODE3 select 1) Select an adjustment mode.
AA SW_CHANGE_ Mode 4: Mode judgment 0-6 4 2) Select an item (mode) to be set with the scroll key.
MODE4 select
3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
AB SW_CHANGE_ Mode 5: Mode judgment 0-6 5
MODE5 select 4) Press [OK] key.
AC SW_CHANGE_ Mode 6: Mode judgment 0-6 6 When the setting is changed, the color tone is changed. This func-
MODE6 select tion is used to make copies of different color tone for each copy
mode.
The initial value must be set unless any special change is required.
46-63
Category Mode Item/Display Content Setting Default
Purpose Adjustment/Setup range value
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the copy low OC COPY A TEXT Text print
PRINTED 0 - 12 0
density section.
PHOTO
Section B TEXT Text 0 - 12 3
Operation/Procedure C PRINTED Printed
0 - 12 0
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch PHOTO Photo
panel. D PHOTO Photograph 0 - 12 1
E TEXT Text
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. 0 - 12 1
PHOTO photograph
3) Press [OK] key. F MAP Map 0 - 12 3
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the G LIGHT Pencil
0 - 12 0
background and the low density image is increased. When the ORIGINAL
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background H COPY TO Copy
and the low density image is decreased. COPY/ document/
TEXT Text print 0 - 12 2
Setting Default PRINTED
Item/Display Content PHOTO
range value
A COLOR COPY : Text print 1-9 3 I COPY TO Copy
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (color copy) COPY/ document/ 0 - 12 3
B COLOR COPY : TEXT Text (color copy) 1-9 3 TEXT Text
C COLOR COPY : Printed photo 1-9 5 J COPY TO Copy
PRINTED PHOTO (color copy) COPY/ document/
0 - 12 2
PHOTO Printed
D COLOR COPY : Photograph 1-9 5
Photo
PHOTOGRAPH (color copy)
K AUTO0 Automatic
E COLOR COPY : Text/Photograph 1-9 3
mode 0 - 12 0
TEXT/PHOTO (color copy)
judgment 0
F COLOR COPY : MAP Map (color copy) 1-9 5
L AUTO1 Automatic
G COLOR COPY : LIGHT Light document 1-9 6
mode 0 - 12 0
(color density)
judgment 1
H COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
M AUTO2 Automatic
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Character print
mode 0 - 12 1
(COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
judgment 2
I COLOR COPY : TEXT Copy document, 1-9 5
N AUTO3 Automatic
(COPY TO COPY) Character
mode 0 - 12 1
(color copy)
judgment 3
J COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
O AUTO4 Automatic
PRINTED PHOTO (COPY Printed photo
mode 0 - 12 0
TO COPY) (color copy)
judgment 4
K COLOR PUSH : Text print 1-9 5
P AUTO5 Automatic
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
mode 0 - 12 0
L COLOR PUSH : TEXT Text (color PUSH) 1-9 5 judgment 5
M COLOR PUSH : Printed photo 1-9 5 Q AUTO6 Automatic
PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH) mode 0 - 12 0
N COLOR PUSH : Photograph 1-9 5 judgment 6
PHOTOGRAPH (color PUSH) PREVI A TEXT Text print
O COLOR PUSH : Text/Photograph 1-9 5 EW PRINTED 0 - 12 0
TEXT/PHOTO (color PUSH) PHOTO
P COLOR PUSH : MAP Map (color PUSH) 1-9 5 B TEXT Text 0 - 12 3
C PRINTED Printed
0 - 12 0
PHOTO Photo
D PHOTO Photograph 0 - 12 1
E TEXT Text
0 - 12 1
PHOTO photograph
F MAP Map 0 - 12 3

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 73
Category Mode Item/Display Content Setting Default Category Mode Item/Display Content Setting Default
range value range value
OC PREVI G LIGHT Pencil SPF1 COPY P AUTO5 Automatic
0 - 12 0
EW ORIGINAL (Docume mode 0 - 12 4
H COPY TO Copy nt feeder judgment 5
COPY/ document/ (RSPF)/ Q AUTO6 Automatic
TEXT Text print 0 - 12 2 (DSPF)To mode 0 - 12 4
PRINTED p) judgment 6
PHOTO PREVI A TEXT Text print
I COPY TO Copy EW PRINTED 0 - 12 4
COPY/ document/ 0 - 12 3 PHOTO
TEXT Text B TEXT Text 0 - 12 7
J COPY TO Copy C PRINTED Printed
0 - 12 4
COPY/ document/ PHOTO Photo
0 - 12 2
PHOTO Printed D PHOTO Photograph 0 - 12 5
Photo E TEXT Text
K AUTO0 Automatic 0 - 12 5
PHOTO photograph
mode 0 - 12 0 F MAP Map 0 - 12 7
judgment 0
G LIGHT Pencil
L AUTO1 Automatic 0 - 12 4
ORIGINAL
mode 0 - 12 0
H COPY TO Copy
judgment 1
COPY/ document/
M AUTO2 Automatic TEXT Text print 0 - 12 6
mode 0 - 12 1 PRINTED
judgment 2 PHOTO
N AUTO3 Automatic I COPY TO Copy
mode 0 - 12 1 COPY/ document/ 0 - 12 7
judgment 3 TEXT Text
O AUTO4 Automatic J COPY TO Copy
mode 0 - 12 0 COPY/ document/
judgment 4 0 - 12 6
PHOTO Printed
P AUTO5 Automatic Photo
mode 0 - 12 0 K AUTO0 Automatic
judgment 5 mode 0 - 12 4
Q AUTO6 Automatic judgment 0
mode 0 - 12 0 L AUTO1 Automatic
judgment 6 mode 0 - 12 4
SPF1 COPY A TEXT Text print judgment 1
(Docume PRINTED 0 - 12 4 M AUTO2 Automatic
nt feeder PHOTO mode 0 - 12 5
(RSPF)/ B TEXT Text 0 - 12 7 judgment 2
(DSPF)To C PRINTED Printed
0 - 12 4 N AUTO3 Automatic
p) PHOTO Photo mode 0 - 12 5
D PHOTO Photograph 0 - 12 5 judgment 3
E TEXT Text O AUTO4 Automatic
0 - 12 5
PHOTO photograph mode 0 - 12 4
F MAP Map 0 - 12 7 judgment 4
G LIGHT Pencil P AUTO5 Automatic
0 - 12 4
ORIGINAL mode 0 - 12 4
H COPY TO Copy judgment 5
COPY/ document/ Q AUTO6 Automatic
TEXT Text print 0 - 12 6 mode 0 - 12 4
PRINTED judgment 6
PHOTO SPF2(Do COPY A TEXT Text print
I COPY TO Copy cument PRINTED 0 - 12 8
COPY/ document/ 0 - 12 7 feeder PHOTO
TEXT Text (DSPF) B TEXT Text 0 - 12 11
J COPY TO Copy Back) C PRINTED Printed
0 - 12 8
COPY/ document/ PHOTO Photo
0 - 12 6
PHOTO Printed D PHOTO Photograph 0 - 12 9
Photo E TEXT Text
K AUTO0 Automatic 0 - 12 9
PHOTO photograph
mode 0 - 12 4 F MAP Map 0 - 12 11
judgment 0
G LIGHT Pencil
L AUTO1 Automatic 0 - 12 8
ORIGINAL
mode 0 - 12 4
H COPY TO Copy
judgment 1
COPY/ document/
M AUTO2 Automatic TEXT Text print 0 - 12 10
mode 0 - 12 5 PRINTED
judgment 2 PHOTO
N AUTO3 Automatic I COPY TO Copy
mode 0 - 12 5 COPY/ document/ 0 - 12 11
judgment 3 TEXT Text
O AUTO4 Automatic J COPY TO Copy
mode 0 - 12 4 COPY/ document/
judgment 4 0 - 12 10
PHOTO Printed
Photo

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 74
Category Mode Item/Display Content Setting Default
range value
SPF2(Do COPY K AUTO0 Automatic
cument mode 0 - 12 8
feeder judgment 0
(DSPF) L AUTO1 Automatic
Back) mode 0 - 12 8
judgment 1
M AUTO2 Automatic
mode 0 - 12 9
judgment 2
N AUTO3 Automatic
mode 0 - 12 9
judgment 3
O AUTO4 Automatic
mode 0 - 12 8
judgment 4
P AUTO5 Automatic
mode 0 - 12 8
judgment 5
Q AUTO6 Automatic
mode 0 - 12 8
judgment 6
PREVI A TEXT Text print
EW PRINTED 0 - 12 8
PHOTO
B TEXT Text 0 - 12 11
C PRINTED Printed
0 - 12 8
PHOTO Photo
D PHOTO Photograph 0 - 12 9
E TEXT Text
0 - 12 9
PHOTO photograph
F MAP Map 0 - 12 11
G LIGHT Pencil
0 - 12 8
ORIGINAL
H COPY TO Copy
COPY/ document/
TEXT Text print 0 - 12 10
PRINTED
PHOTO
I COPY TO Copy
COPY/ document/ 0 - 12 11
TEXT Text
J COPY TO Copy
COPY/ document/
0 - 12 10
PHOTO Printed
Photo
K AUTO0 Automatic
mode 0 - 12 8
judgment 0
L AUTO1 Automatic
mode 0 - 12 8
judgment 1
M AUTO2 Automatic
mode 0 - 12 9
judgment 2
N AUTO3 Automatic
mode 0 - 12 9
judgment 3
O AUTO4 Automatic
mode 0 - 12 8
judgment 4
P AUTO5 Automatic
mode 0 - 12 8
judgment 5
Q AUTO6 Automatic
mode 0 - 12 8
judgment 6

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 75
46-66
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproduction capability
of watermarks in the copy/printer mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
This is to adjust the reproduction capability of watermarks in the
copy/printer mode.
1) Select the adjustment mode.
2) Select an adjustment item according to the necessity.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
4) Make a copy, and check the adjustment result.

Setting Default
Category Item/Display Content NOTE
range value
PATTERN A WOVEN DEN BK LOW Watermark density level (Black LOW) 0 - 255 15 The adjustment value is
B WOVEN DEN BK MIDDLE Watermark density level (Black MIDDLE) 0 - 255 19 changed to increase or
C WOVEN DEN BK HIGH Watermark density level (Black HIGH) 0 - 255 23 decrease the density of the
D WOVEN DEN C LOW Watermark density level (Cyan LOW) 0 - 255 19 watermark of background
documents (primary output).
E WOVEN DEN C MIDDLE Watermark density level (Cyan MIDDLE) 0 - 255 23
To increase the watermark
F WOVEN DEN C HIGH Watermark density level (Cyan HIGH) 0 - 255 27
density, increase the
G WOVEN DEN M LOW Watermark density level (Magenta LOW) 0 - 255 15 adjustment value.
H WOVEN DEN M MIDDLE Watermark density level (Magenta MIDDLE) 0 - 255 18 To decrease the watermark
I WOVEN DEN M HIGH Watermark density level (Magenta HIGH) 0 - 255 21 density, decrease the
adjustment value.
NOTE:
When the adjustment value
is increased, the watermark
area which is originally not
reproduced becomes
difficult to disappear.
When the adjustment value
is decreased, the watermark
area which is originally
reproduced becomes easy
to disappear.
J CONTRAST Contrast adjustment 0 - 255 2 This is used to adjust the
variation in the watermark
density when the adjustment
value of the watermark print/
contrast adjustment in the
system setting is changed
by 1.
When this value is
increased, the variation is
also increased. When the
value is decreased, the
variation is also decreased.
When the adjustment value
is 0, the result of the
contrast adjustment is not
reflected. (* The adjustment
value must be set to 1 or
greater.)
K HT TYPE (POSI) For halftone index watermark type positive 42 - 43 42 To reproduce the containing
L HT TYPE (NEGA) For halftone index watermark type negative 42 - 43 42 characters of watermark
copy (secondary output)
more clearly, set to 43.
In that case, however, the
containing characters of the
watermark document
(primary output) can be
easily reproduced.

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 76
 Setting Default
Category Item/Display Content NOTE
range value
COPY MODE A TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text/Printed Photo mode OFF 0-1 0 1 Normally set to the default.
select Enable/Disable ON 1 No need to change in the
B TEXT Text mode select Enable/ OFF 0-1 0 1 market.
Disable ON 1
C PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo mode OFF 0-1 0 1
select Enable/Disable ON 1
D PHOTOGRAPH Photograph mode select OFF 0-1 0 1
Enable/Disable ON 1
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph mode OFF 0-1 0 1
select Enable/Disable ON 1
F MAP Map mode select Enable/ OFF 0-1 0 1
Disable ON 1
G LIGHT Light density document OFF 0-1 0 1
mode select Enable/ ON 1
Disable
H TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Copy document: Enable/ OFF 0-1 0 1
(CPY TO CPY) Disable of selection of the ON 1
text print mode
I TEXT (CPY TO CPY) Copy document: Enable/ OFF 0-1 0 1
Disable of selection of the ON 1
text mode
J PRINTED PHOTO (CPY Copy document: Enable/ OFF 0-1 0 1
TO CPY) Disable of selection of the ON 1
printed photo mode
K AUTO Automatic mode select OFF 0-1 0 1
Enable/Disable ON 1
L DEFAULT MODE When the default TEXT/ 0-5 0 0
exposure mode PRINTED PHOTO
background is ON, the TEXT 1
exposure mode to be set PRINTED PHOTO 2
is specified. PHOTOGRAPH 3
TEXT/PHOTO 4
MAP 5
POSITION A LINE SPACE 1 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 50
(24P - 36P)
B LINE SPACE 2 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 60
(37P - 48P)
C LINE SPACE 3 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 70
(49P - 64P)
D LINE SPACE 4 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 80
(65P - 80P)
E BLANK H/B 1 Upper margin/Lower margin in the watermark print 0 - 200 25
box (24P - 36P)
F BLANK H/B 2 Upper margin/Lower margin in the watermark print 0 - 200 30
box (37P - 48P)
G BLANK H/B 3 Upper margin/Lower margin in the watermark print 0 - 200 35
box (49P - 64P)
H BLANK H/B 4 Upper margin/Lower margin in the watermark print 0 - 200 40
box (65P - 80P)
I BLANK L/R 1 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark print box 0 - 200 60
(24P - 36P)
J BLANK L/R 2 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark print box 0 - 200 90
(37P - 48P)
K BLANK L/R 3 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark print box 0 - 200 120
(49P - 64P)
L BLANK L/R 4 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark print box 0 - 200 150
(65P - 80P)

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 77
46-68
Purpose Adjustment/Setup The adjustment result becomes effective only when the adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the automatic resolution procedure for both copy and print mode have completed success-
judgement. (For MX-xx70 series) fully. For example, when the copy color balance adjustment (auto-
Section matic adjustment) is performed and the simulation is canceled, the
adjustment result is not effective.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
46-90
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
Purpose Adjustment
3) Press [OK] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the process operation of high-
Item/Display Content
Setting Default compression PDF images.
range value
Section
RESULT HIGH Judgement result : High
A 0-3 3 Operation/Procedure
RESOLUTION resolution
RESULT MID Judgement result : 1) Select a target adjustment mode.
B 0-3 2
RESOLUTION1 Slight high resolution 2) Select an adjustment target item with the scroll key.
RESULT MID Judgement result :
C 0-3 1 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
RESOLUTION2 Slight low resolution
RESULT LOW Judgement result : Low 4) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.
D 0-3 1
RESOLUTION1 resolution
MX-xx70 series
RESULT UNKNOWN Judgement result :
E 0-3 1
RESOLUTION Cannot judge Setting Default
Mode Item / Display Content
F LANGUAGE SEL Language setting 0-1 0 value value
AUTO RESOLUTION Automatic resolution TEXT GLYPH Text handling
G 0-2 1 A 0-2 0
MODE judgement mode SENSITIVITY selection
BG SW FOR Line handling
B 0-1 0
FINDLINES selection
HOR Line detection
C 0-2 0
46-74 FINDLINES SW SW(H)
VERT Line detection
Purpose Adjustment D
FINDLINES SW SW (V)
0-2 0
Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment (Auto Text color
FGCOLOR
adjustment)/Printer color balance adjust- E number 0-3 0
INDEXING SEL
ment (Auto adjustment) adjustment SW
FGCOLOR Text color
Section F 0-4 2
INDEXING ADJ adjustment
Operation/Procedure COLO LUMINANCE Luminance
A 0-4 2
This simulation is used to perform SIM46-24 and SIM67-24 contin- R ADJUSTMENT adjustment
uously. CHROMA Chroma
B 0-2 1
To perform both the copy color balance adjustment (Automatic INTENT selection
adjustment) and the printer color balance adjustment (Automatic NEUTRAL Neutral
C 0-2 0
ADJUSTMENT adjustment
adjustment), use this simulation for efficient adjustment operations.
R-RATIO Gray scale
1) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the high density process control is D 0 - 1000 299
ADJUSTMENT adjustment 
performed. Then, the copy color balance adjustment pattern is G-RATIO Gray scale
printed. E 0 - 1000 587
ADJUSTMENT adjustment (G)
2) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table, BG BG LAYER Speed priority
A 0-2 1
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode. LAYER INTENT 1 setting
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy color balance adjustment BG LAYER Image quality
B 0-2 1
INTENT 2 priority setting
is performed and the adjustment result pattern is printed.
SOFT SKEW Skew correction
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjust- A 0-1 0
CIC CORRECTION switch
ment pattern is printed. B FILTER Filter switch 0-1 0
5) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table, High
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode. C CIC MODE compression 0-1 0
6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjust- mode switch
ment (automatic adjustment) is performed and the adjustment OUTPUT Resolution
D 0-3 0
RESOLUTION setting
result pattern is printed.
7) Press [OK] key, and the halftone correction target is registered.
8) When [EXECUTE] key is displayed, press it.
When "COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE" is displayed, the adjust- In the table above, the valid items in MX-xx70 (Standard equipped
ment is completed. compact PDF) are COLOR[A-B], BG LAYER[A-B] and SOFT
CIC[A-D].

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 78
MX-xx50 series Default
Item Display Content Description
value
Mode Item / Display Content Setting Default
value value D BG: JPEG JPEG 0: Low 1
QUALITY LV recompression 1: Middle
TEXT GLYPH Text handling
A 0-2 0 [GRY: COMPACT] level adjustment 2: High
SENSITIVITY selection
[Gray: High
BG SW FOR Line handling
B 0-1 0 compression
FINDLINES selection
mode]
HOR Line detection
C 0-2 0 E BG: JPEG JPEG 1
FINDLINES SW SW(H)
QUALITY LV recompression
VERT Line detection [GRY: ULTRA level adjustment
D 0-2 0
FINDLINES SW SW (V) FINE] [Gray: Ultra fine
Text color mode]
FGCOLOR
E number 0-3 0 F FG: TYPE0 Front ground 0: type0 0
INDEXING SEL
adjustment SW TARGE extraction area 1: type1
TYPE1
FGCOLOR Text color T AREA select 2: type2
F 0-4 2 TYPE2
INDEXING ADJ adjustment
G FG: TEXT Front ground 0: Dark - 5
COLO LUMINANCE Luminance
A 0-4 2 DENSITY [COL] black text density 5: Default -
R ADJUSTMENT adjustment
adjustment 10: Light
CHROMA Chroma [Color]
B 0-2 1
INTENT selection
H FG: TEXT Front ground 5
NEUTRAL Neutral DENSITY [GRY] black text density
C 0-2 0
ADJUSTMENT adjustment adjustment
R-RATIO Gray scale [Gray]
D 0 - 1000 299
ADJUSTMENT adjustment  I ULTRA ON High 0: High 0
G-RATIO Gray scale FINE OFF compression/ compression
E 0 - 1000 587
ADJUSTMENT adjustment (G) MODE Ultra Fine mode mode
BG BG LAYER Speed priority select 1: Ultra fine
A 0-2 1
LAYER INTENT 1 setting mode
BG LAYER Image quality
B 0-2 1 NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is spe-
INTENT 2 priority setting
cially required.
When the adjustment value is changed greatly from the ini-
tial value, an image quality trouble may occur.
46-91
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproduction capability
of black text. 48
Section
Operation/Procedure 48-1
1) Select an item to be set with the scroll key. Purpose Adjustment
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image magnifica-
3) Press [OK] key. The adjustment value is set. tion ratio (in the main scanning direction
When COLOR key or MONO key is pressed, the adjustment value and the sub scanning direction).
is set and a copy is made simultaneously. Section
Operation/Procedure
Default
Item Display Content Description
value 1) Select a target adjustment item on the touch panel.
A SEGME COMM Area separation 0: Other than 0 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
NT ON setting select image send 3) Press [OK] key.
PARAM SPECI mode black
The set value is saved.
AL text emphasis
(simple, high When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnification
compression) ratio is increased.
1: Image send A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item A, C, or E corre-
mode black
sponds to a change of about 0.02% in the copy magnification ratio.
text emphasis
(simple, high A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item B, D, or F corre-
compression) sponds to a change of about 0.1% in the copy magnification ratio.
B BG: JPEG JPEG 0: Low 1 [RSPF]
QUALITY LV recompression 1: Middle
[COL: COMPACT] level adjustment 2: High Setting Default
Item/Display Content
[Color: High range value
compression A CCD (MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
mode] magnification ratio adjustment
C BG: JPEG JPEG 1 (CCD)
QUALITY LV recompression B CCD (SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
[COL: ULTRA level adjustment magnification ratio adjustment
FINE] [Color: Ultra fine (CCD)
mode] C SPF (MAIN) RSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio adjustment
(Main scan)
D SPF (SUB) RSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio adjustment
(Sub scan)

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 79
 Setting Default 48-5
Item/Display Content
range value
E SPFB (MAIN) RSPF document back surface 1 - 99 50 Purpose Adjustment
magnification ratio adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to correction the scan image magnifi-
(Main scan) cation ratio (in the sub scanning direction).
F SPFB (SUB) RSPF document back surface 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio adjustment
Section Scanner section
(Sub scan) Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item on the touch panel.
[DSPF]
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
3) Press [OK] key.
A CCD (MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50 The set value is saved.
magnification ratio adjustment When the image magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is
(CCD) adjusted with SIM48-1, and a different magnification ratio is speci-
B CCD (SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50 fied, and the image magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform
magnification ratio adjustment this adjustment.
(CCD)
C SPF (MAIN) RSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
When there is an error in the image magnification ratio in reduction,
magnification ratio adjustment change the adjustment value in the high speed mode. When there
(Main scan) is an error in the image magnification ratio in enlargement, change
D SPF (SUB) RSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50 the adjustment value in the low speed mode.
magnification ratio adjustment
(Sub scan) Item/Display Content
Setting Default
E SPFB (MAIN) RSPF document back surface 1 - 99 50 range value
magnification ratio adjustment A MR (HI) Scanner motor (High speed) 1 - 99 50
(Main scan) B MR(MID) Scanner motor (Reference speed) 1 - 99 50
C MR(LO) Scanner motor (Low speed) 1 - 99 50
D SPF(HI) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50
(High speed)
E SPF(MID) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50
(Reference speed)

2) Select a target adjustment item on the touch panel.

48-6
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Purpose Adjustment
4) Press [OK] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the rotation speed of each
The set value is saved.
motor.
When the adjustment value is increased, the speed is increased,
Section and vice versa. A change of 1 in the adjustment value corresponds
Operation/Procedure to a change of about 0.1% in the speed.
1) Select an adjustment target mode with [MID] [LOW A] [LOW B]
LOW C] keys on the touch panel.
Setting Default
Mode Select Item/Display Content
range value
COLOR/MONO MID A RRM (COLOR) Registration motor correction value (Color) 53
COLOR/MONO MID B RRM (MONO) Registration motor correction value (Monochrome) 53
HEAVY1,2 LOW A A RRM (COLOR/MONO) Registration motor correction value 1-99 46
HEAVY3 LOW B A RRM (COLOR/MONO) 46
HEAVY4 LOW C A RRM (COLOR/MONO) 46
COLOR/MONO MID C BTM Belt motor correction value 1-99 47
COLOR/MONO MID D DM-K Drum K motor correction value 1-99 45
COLOR/MONO MID E DM-C Drum C motor correction value 1-99 45
COLOR/MONO MID F DM-M Drum M motor correction value 1-99 45
COLOR/MONO MID G DM-Y Drum Y motor correction value 1-99 45
COLOR/MONO MID H FUM Fusing motor correction value 40
HEAVY1,2 LOW A B 39
1-99
HEAVY3 LOW B 39
HEAVY4 LOW C 39
COLOR/MONO MID I CPFM Paper feed motor correction value 50
HEAVY1,2 LOW A C 50
1-99
HEAVY3 LOW B 50
HEAVY4 LOW C 50
COLOR/MONO MID J PFM PS front motor correction value 50
HEAVY1,2 LOW A D 50
1-99
HEAVY3 LOW B 50
HEAVY4 LOW C 50
COLOR/MONO MID K POM Paper exit motor correction value 50
HEAVY1,2 LOW A E 50
1-99
HEAVY3 LOW B 50
HEAVY4 LOW C 50

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 80
 Setting Default
Mode Select Item/Display Content
range value
COLOR/MONO MID L SBM Reverse motor correction value 50
HEAVY1,2 LOW A F 50
1-99
HEAVY3 LOW B 50
HEAVY4 LOW C 50
COLOR/MONO MID M POM (OUT) Paper exit motor correction value (From Tray exit) 50
HEAVY1,2 LOW A G 50
1-99
HEAVY3 LOW B 50
HEAVY4 LOW C 50
COLOR/MONO MID N SBM (OUT) Reverse motor correction value (From Tray exit) 50
HEAVY1,2 LOW A H 50
1-99
HEAVY3 LOW B 50
HEAVY4 LOW C 50
COLOR/MONO MID O ADUM1 (OUT) ADU motor correction value (From Right paper exit tray exit) 50
HEAVY1,2 LOW A I 50
1-99
HEAVY3 LOW B 50
HEAVY4 LOW C 50
HEAVY1,2 LOW A J FUSER SETTING Fusing speed switch timing value 50
HEAVY3 LOW B 1-99 50
HEAVY4 LOW C 50
HEAVY1,2 LOW A K RRM-START RRM acceleration start timing 150
HEAVY3 LOW B 0-255 150
HEAVY4 LOW C 150
HEAVY1,2 LOW A L RRM-END RRM acceleration end timing 200
HEAVY3 LOW B 0-255 200
HEAVY4 LOW C 200
HEAVY1,2 LOW A M RRM-OFFSET RRM acceleration ratio 50
HEAVY3 LOW B 50-99 50
HEAVY4 LOW C 50
COLOR/MONO MID P COR-IM Imaging motors all correction values 1-99 50
COLOR/MONO MID Q COR-PP Paper transport motors all correction values 50
HEAVY1,2 LOW A N 50
1-99
HEAVY3 LOW B 50
HEAVY4 LOW C 50

The greater the correction value is, the higher the speed is, and vice versa. Change by +/-1 corresponds to 0.1%.
List of destination groups
Group Destination
North America U. S. A CANADA INCH
Europe EUROPE U. K AUS.
Other AB TAIWAN

Error display
49 Item/Display Content in case or
abnormality
BOTTOM BUNDLE Bundle version (Lower) BTMBDL
49-1
ICU-MAIN ICUM main program ICUM
Purpose ICU-BIOS ICUM sub program ICUB
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the firmware update. ASIC-MAIN ASIC main program ASICM
ASIC-SUB ASIC sub program ASICS
Section
LANGUAGE Language support data program LANG
Operation/Procedure LANGUAGE(LIST) List print language data LANGL
1) Save the firmware to the USB memory. EOSA Embedded OSA program EOSA
2) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. (Use USB I/F of the UICONTENTS UI display program UICON
operation panel section.) SIM-TEXT Simulation language data SIMT
3) Select a target firmware file for update with the touch panel. PCL (PROFILE) PCL color profile PCLP
SCU SCU program SCU
4) Select a target firmware.
DSPF DSPF program DSPF
Press [ALL] key to select all the Firmware collectively. PCU PCU program PCU
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. DESK Desk unit program DESK
6) Press [YES] key. DESK(TANDEM) Tandem desk unit program DESKT
The selected firmware is updated. When the operation is nor- LCC LCC program LCC
mally completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. When terminated FINISHER(1KFIN) 1K Finisher program FIN1
abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed. FINISHER(3KFIN) 3K Finisher program FIN3M
FINISHER(INNER) Inner finisher program INFIN
Error display JOGGER 3K Finisher jogger program JOG
Item/Display Content in case or FIN-SUB 3K Finisher sub program FINS
abnormality SADDLE Saddle program SDL
UPSIDE BUNDLE Bundle version (Upper) UPBDL PUNCH(3K) 3K Punch unit program 3PUN

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 81
 Error display 49-10
Item/Display Content in case or
abnormality Purpose
PUNCH(IN) Inner punch unit program INPUN Function (Purpose) Used to perform the ACU firmware update.
FAX Standard FAX program FAX
Section
FAX OPT1 Optional FAX 1st line program FXOT1
High compression PDF unit
Operation/Procedure
ACU ACU
program 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.

49-3
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to update the operation manual.
50
Section
50-1
Operation/Procedure
Purpose Adjustment
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
Function (Purpose) Copy image position, image loss adjust-
* When the USB is not inserted, "INSERT A STORANGE E-
ment
MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] key is
pressed, the display is shifted to the folder select menu 1. Section
2) Press the folder button of the operation manual data. (The dis- Operation/Procedure
play is shifted to the operation manual update menu.) 1) Select an adjustment target item on the touch panel.
The current version and the update version are displayed. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. Set the items other than RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted, and [YES] [NO] keys becomes default.
active from gray out. RRCA: Image lead edge reference position adjustment
4) When [YES] key is pressed, the selected operation manual is LEAD: Lead edge image loss adjustment
updated. SIDE: Side image loss adjustment
When update is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is dis- 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
played. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A Lead RRCA Document lead 0 - 99 50
49-5
edge edge reference
Purpose adjust- position (OC)
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the watermark update. B ment RRCB-CS Regis- Standard 1 - 99 50
value tration Tray
Section C RRCB-DSK motor Desk 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure D RRCB-LCC ON LCC 1 - 99 50
1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit. E RRCB-MFT timing Manual 1 - 99 50
adjust- paper
2) Select the button of the folder to perform the watermark ment feed
update.
F RRCB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
3) The current version and the update version are displayed. G Image LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 40
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. loss area loss area setting
5) Press [YES] key. H setting SIDE Side image loss 0 - 99 20
value area adjustment
The selected watermark is updated.
I Void area DENA Lead edge void 1 - 99 40
adjust- area adjustment
J ment DENB Rear edge void 1 - 99 30
49-6 area adjustment
Purpose K FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 23
REAR area adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the OCR update. L Off-center OFFSET_ OC document off- 1 - 99 50
Section adjust- OC center adjustment
ment
Operation/Procedure
M Magnificat SCAN_ SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit. ion ratio SPEED_ magnification ratio
2) Select the button of the folder to perform the OCR update. correc- OC adjustment (CCD)
3) The current version and the update version are displayed. tion

4) Press [EXECUTE] key.

5) Press [YES] key.
The selected OCR is updated.

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 82
 Setting Default
Item/Display Content Setting Default
range value Item/Display Content
range value
N Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50
A DEN-C Used to adjust the print lead 1 - 99 30
scanning correction value
edge image position.
O direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50 (PRINTER MODE)
print area value
B DEN-B Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
P correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50 adjustment
value value
C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area 1 - 99 23
Q DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50 adjustment
value
D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge void 1 - 99 50
R DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50 area adjustment correction
value value
S DENB-LCC LCC correction 1 - 99 50 E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
value adjustment correction value
T DENB-ADU ADU correction 1 - 99 50 F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
value adjustment correction value
U DENB-HV Heavy paper 1 - 99 50 G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
correction value adjustment correction value
A. (RRC-A) Timing from starting document scanning to specifying H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
adjustment correction value
the image lead edge reference is adjusted. (01.mm/step)
I DENB-LCC LCC rear edge void aria 1 - 99 50
* When the value is decreased, the timing is advanced. When adjustment correction value
the value is increased, the timing is delayed. J DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void aria 1 - 99 50
B - F. (RRC-B) Timing of paper (registration roller ON) for the adjustment correction value
image position on the transfer belt is adjusted. (0.1mm/step) K DENB-HV Heavy paper correction 1 - 99 50
* When the value is decreased, the timing is delayed. When the value
value is increased, the timing is advanced. L MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
M PAPER MFT Tray Manual paper 1 2
G. (LEAD) The lead edge image loss amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
selection feed
step)
CS1 Tray 1 2
* When the value is increased, the image loss is increased. CS2 Tray 2 3
H. (SIDE) The side image loss amount is adjusted. CS3 Tray 3 4
* When the value is increased, the image loss is increased. CS4 Tray 4 5
(0.1mm/step) LCC LCC 6
N DUPLE YES Duplex Yes 0 1
I. (DEN-A) The paper lead edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
X NO print No 1
step)
selection
* When the value is increased, the void is increased.
J. (DEN-B) The paper rear edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/ When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
step) paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, the distance from the paper lead
* When the value is increased, the void is increased.
edge to the image lead edge is decreased.
K. (FRONT/REAR) The void amount on the right and left edges of
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by
paper is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
about 0.1mm.

50-5
50-6
Purpose Adjustment
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print lead edge image
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and
position. (PRINTER MODE)
the image loss. (SPF mode)
Section
Section SPF
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item (DEN-C) with scroll key on the
1) Select an adjustment target item on the touch panel.
touch panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The set value is saved, and the adjustment check pattern is [RSPF]
printed. Setting Default
Item/Display Content
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment range value
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
in the standard adjustment value range. document scan
position
Standard reference value: 4.0 +/- 2.0mm adjustment (CCD)
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the document scan
adjustment value is decreased, the distanced is decreased. position
adjustment (CCD)
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 20
about 0.1mm.
loss (SIDE1) edge image loss
amount amount setting
setting
SIDE1

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 83
 Setting Default Setting Default
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
D Image FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 - 99 20 J OFSET_SPF2 DSPF back 1 - 99 50
loss (SIDE1) image loss amount surface document
amount setting off-center
E setting TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 99 40 adjustment
SIDE1 (SIDE1) edge image loss K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF document 1 - 99 50
amount setting front surface
F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 20 magnification ratio
loss (SIDE2) edge image loss (Sub scan)
amount amount setting
setting Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan timing
G FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20
SIDE2 (SIDE2) image loss amount is delayed.
setting Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 40 is increased.
(SIDE2) edge image loss Item E - H: When a shadow image appears on the rear edge,
amount setting
increase the adjustment value to delete the shadow.
I OFSET_SPF1 RSPF front surface 1 - 99 50
document off- All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change
center adjustment
J OFSET_SPF2 RSPF back 1 - 99 50
surface document 50-10
off-center
adjustment Purpose Adjustment
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 RSPF document 1 - 99 50 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust print image position
front surface
Section
magnification ratio
(Sub scan) Operation/Procedure
L SCAN_SPEED_SPF2 RSPF document 1 - 99 50 1) Select an adjustment target item on the touch panel.
back surface 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
magnification ratio
(Sub scan) 3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)

Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan timing Setting Default
Item/Display Content
is delayed. range value
Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss A BK-MAG Main scan print 60 - 140 102
magnification ratio BK
is increased.
B MAIN-MFT Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
Item E - H: When a shadow image appears on the rear edge, value (Manual paper feed)
increase the adjustment value to delete the shadow. C MAIN-CS1 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change value (Tray 1)
D MAIN-CS2 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
[DSPF]
value (Tray 2)
Setting Default E MAIN-CS3 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
Item/Display Content
range value value (Tray 3)
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50 F MAIN-CS4 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
document scan value (Tray 4)
position G MAIN-LC Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
adjustment (CCD) value (Large capacity tray)
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50 H MAIN-ADU 1 - 99 50
document scan I SUB-MFT Registration Manual 1 - 99 50
position motor ON paper feed
adjustment (CCD) timing
J SUB-CS1 Standard 1 - 99 50
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 20 adjustment cassette
loss (SIDE1) edge image loss
K SUB-DSK DESK 1 - 99 50
amount amount setting
L SUB-LC LCC 1 - 99 50
setting
SIDE1 M SUB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
D Image FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 - 99 20 N MAIN-STD Combined Standard 1 - 99 50
loss (SIDE1) image loss amount correction correction
amount setting value amount
setting (Off center
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 99 40
SIDE1 direction)
(SIDE1) edge image loss
amount setting O SUB-STD Standard 1 - 99 60
correction
F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 40
amount
loss (SIDE2) edge image loss
(Paper
amount amount setting
feed
G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20
direction)
SIDE2 (SIDE2) image loss amount
P SUB-HV-A Shifting Heavy1, 2 1 - 99 50
setting
Q SUB-HV-B amount value Heavy3, 4 1 - 99 50
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 20
(SIDE2) edge image loss R SUB-GLOSSY Gross 1 - 99 50
amount setting PAPER
I OFSET_SPF1 DSPF front surface 1 - 99 50 S SUB-EMBOSS Emboss 1 - 99 50
document off- T SUB-OHP OHP 1 - 99 50
center adjustment U SUB-ENV Envelop 1 - 99 50
V MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 84
 Setting Default Setting Default
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
W PAPE MFT Tray selection Manual 1 2 (CS1) G CYAN(SUB) Registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
R paper feed value sub scanning direction
CS1 Tray 1 2 CYAN (Black drum
CS2 Tray 2 3 reference)
CS3 Tray 3 4 H MAGENTA(SU Registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
CS4 Tray 4 5 B) value sub scanning direction
MAGENTA (Black drum
LCC LCC 6
reference)
X DUPL YES Duplex print Yes 0 1 (NO)
I YELLOW(SUB) Registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
EX NO selection No 1
value sub scanning direction
YELLOW (Black drum
reference)
J OFFSET_C_M Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
50-12 AIN_F value main scanning
Purpose Adjustment direction offset value CYAN
(FRONT)
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scan image off-center
K OFFSET_C_M Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
position adjustment. (The adjustment is
AIN_R value main scanning
made separately for each scan mode.) direction offset value CYAN
Section (REAR)
Operation/Procedure L OFFSET_M_M Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
AIN_F value main scanning
1) Select an adjustment target item on the touch panel. direction offset value
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. MAGENTA (FRONT)
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) M OFFSET_M_M Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
AIN_R value main scanning
When the adjustment value is increased, the image position is
direction offset value
shifted to the rear frame side. When the adjustment value is MAGENTA (REAR)
decreased, it is shifted to the front frame side. N OFFSET_Y_M Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
1step = 0.1mm AIN_F value main scanning
direction offset value
Setting Default YELLOW (FRONT)
Item/Display Content
range value O OFFSET_Y_M Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
A OC Document table image off- 1 - 99 50 AIN_R value main scanning
center adjustment direction offset value
B SPF (SIDE1) SPF front surface image off- 1 - 99 50 YELLOW (REAR)
center adjustment P OFFSET_C_S Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
C SPF (SIDE2) SPF back surface image off- 1 - 99 50 UB value sub scanning direction
center adjustment offset value CYAN
Q OFFSET_M_S Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
UB value sub scanning direction
offset value MAGENTA
50-20 R OFFSET_Y_S Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
UB value sub scanning direction
Purpose Adjustment offset value YELLOW
Function (Purpose) Image registration adjustment (Main scan- S OFFSET_C_S Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
ning direction) UB_HV12 value sub scanning direction
offset value CYAN (HEAVY
Section
1/2)
Operation/Procedure T OFFSET_M_S Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch UB_HV12 value sub scanning direction
panel. offset value MAGENTA
(HEAVY 1/2)
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
U OFFSET_Y_S Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.) UB_HV12 value sub scanning direction
offset value YELLOW
Setting Default (HEAVY 1/2)
Item/Display Content
range value V OFFSET_C_S Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
A CYAN(FRONT) Registration adjustment 1 - 399 200 UB_HV34 value sub scanning direction
value main scanning offset value CYAN (HEAVY
direction CYAN F side 3/4)
B CYAN(REAR) Registration adjustment 1 - 399 200 W OFFSET_M_S Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
value main scanning UB_HV34 value sub scanning direction
direction CYAN R side offset value MAGENTA
C MAGENTA(FR Registration adjustment 1 - 399 200 (HEAVY 3/4)
ONT) value main scanning X OFFSET_Y_S Registration adjustment 1 - 99 50
direction MAGENTA F side UB_HV34 value sub scanning direction
D MAGENTA(RE Registration adjustment 1 - 399 200 offset value YELLOW
AR) value main scanning (HEAVY 3/4)
direction MAGENTA R side Y MULTICOUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
E YELLOW(FRO Registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
NT) value main scanning
direction YELLOW F side
F YELLOW(REA Registration adjustment 1 - 399 200
R) value main scanning
direction YELLOW R side

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 85
 1 : ‘16/Sep.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
Z PAPE MFT Tray selection Manual 1 2
R paper feed
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
A DUPL YES Duplex print Yes 0 1
A EX NO selection No 1

50-22
Purpose Adjustment The contents of the following list are mainly used by the technical
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image registration. (Main division, and are not necessary for the market.
scan direction, sub scan direction) (Auto
adjustment)/OPC drum phase adjustment
(Auto adjustment)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The adjustment is automatically performed, and the adjust-
ment data are displayed.
Setting range Color/ Default
Item/Display Content NOTE
(unit) History value
MAIN F - REG_M_F Registration adjustment correction 1.0 - 399.0 CMY/- 200
(VALUE) amount main scanning direction F (+/-0.1)
() REG_M_F (DIF) Registration value correction amount -399.0 - 399.0 CMY/- 0
from the previous one, main scanning F (+/-0.1)
MAIN R - REG_M_R Registration adjustment correction value, 1.0 - 399.0 CMY/- 200
(VALUE) main scanning direction R (+/-0.1)
() REG_M_R (DIF) Registration value correction amount -399.0 - 399.0 CMY/- 0
from the previous one, main scanning R (+/-0.1)
SUB - REG_SUB Registration adjustment correction value, 1.0 - 399.0 CMY/- 200
(VALUE) sub scanning direction (+/-0.1)
() REG_SUB (DIF) Registration value correction amount -399.0 - 399.0 CMY/- 0
from the previous one, sub scanning (+/-0.1)
SKEW CMY SKEW_CLC SKEW adjustment rotating direction and L99.9 - R99.9 KCMY/- 0 If the value is plus, L is
the number of clicks (CMY) (+/-0.1) displayed to left side of
numerical value. If the value
is minus, R is displayed to left
side of numerical value.
ALL_ SKEW adjustment rotating direction and If the value is plus, L is
ROTATE the number of clicks (K) displayed to left side of
numerical value. If the value
is minus, R is displayed to left
side of numerical value.
PHASE PHASE_ADJ Phase adjustment value (1: Value of this 1-8 More than 1 -
time, 2: Value of the previous time) (+/-1) 50cpm :
Angle step 0 (1) -> 45 (2) -> 90 (3) -> CMY/2
135 (4) -> 180 (5) -> 225 (6) -> 270 Less than
(7) -> 315 (8) 50 cpm : -/2

1 Error displays in case of abnormal end

Error code Error display Error contents Description

Forcible end error - SUSPENDED Door open end Door open during operation
- SUSPENDED CA end CA button pressed during operation
- - OFF end Unconfirmed operation during operation (Power OFF)
Basic error 1 TONER EMPTY Toner empty BK or ALL color EMPTY detection
2 BEFORE BEHAVIOR Other condition Other condition
4 SENSOR CALIBLATION F Calibration error F The target is not reached by 3 times of retry of F or R
5 SENSOR CALIBLATION R Calibration error R
6 SENSOR CALIBRATION FR Calibration error FR
7 TIME OVER Time error No data are obtained for 90sec from data acquisition
8 PROCESS CONTROL Process control error Process control error detection
Sub scanning 10 - 49 DATA SUB X X XXX XX
adjustment error
Main scanning 50 - 89 DATA MAIN X X XXX XX
adjustment error
Adjustment range error 90 - 107 RANGE XXX X XX

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 86
50-23 Item/Display Contents Setting Default
range value
Purpose (This simulation is normally not used in the CP_N CP_NORM_ Normal correction
market.) SUB_M operation rate
Function (Purpose) Used to set the registration for temperature F correction coefficient 1 - 199 100
adjustment. (Magenta sub
scanning)
Section CP_NORM_ Normal correction
Operation/Procedure MAIN_F_Y operation rate
G correction coefficient 1 - 199 100
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
(Yellow main scanning
panel.
F side)
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. CP_NORM_ Normal correction
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.) MAIN_R_Y operation rate
H correction coefficient 1 - 199 100
Item/Display Contents Setting Default (Yellow main scanning
range value R side)
CT_N CT_NORM_ Normal correction CP_NORM_ Normal correction
MAIN_F_C temperature correction SUB_Y operation rate
A 1 - 199 104 I 1 - 199 100
coefficient (Cyan main correction coefficient
scanning F side) (Yellow sub scanning)
CT_NORM_ Normal correction CT_J CT_JOB_M Correction during job
MAIN_R_C temperature correction AIN_C temperature correction
B 1 - 199 104 A 1 - 199 104
coefficient (Cyan main coefficient (Cyan main
scanning R side) scanning)
CT_NORM_ Normal correction CT_JOB_S Correction during job
SUB_C temperature correction UB_C temperature correction
C 1 - 199 103 B 1 - 199 103
coefficient (Cyan sub coefficient (Cyan sub
scanning) scanning)
CT_NORM_ Normal correction CT_JOB_M Correction during job
MAIN_F_M temperature correction AIN_M temperature correction
D 1 - 199 107 C 1 - 199 107
coefficient (Magenta coefficient (Magenta
main scanning F side) main scanning)
CT_NORM_ Normal correction CT_JOB_S Correction during job
MAIN_R_M temperature correction UB_M temperature correction
E 1 - 199 107 D 1 - 199 97
coefficient (Magenta coefficient (Magenta
main scanning R side) sub scanning)
CT_NORM_ Normal correction CT_JOB_M Correction during job
SUB_M temperature correction AIN_Y temperature correction
F 1 - 199 97 E 1 - 199 107
coefficient (Magenta coefficient (Yellow main
sub scanning) scanning)
CT_NORM_ Normal correction CT_JOB_S Correction during job
MAIN_F_Y temperature correction UB_Y temperature correction
G 1 - 199 107 F 1 - 199 97
coefficient (Yellow main coefficient (Yellow sub
scanning F side) scanning)
CT_NORM_ Normal correction CP_J CP_JOB_M Correction during job
MAIN_R_Y temperature correction AIN_C operation rate
H 1 - 199 107 A 1 - 199 100
coefficient (Yellow main correction coefficient
scanning R side) (Cyan main scanning)
CT_NORM_ Normal correction CP_JOB_S Correction during job
SUB_Y temperature correction UB_C operation rate
I 1 - 199 97 B 1 - 199 100
coefficient (Yellow sub correction coefficient
scanning) (Cyan sub scanning)
CP_N CP_NORM_ Normal correction CP_JOB_M Correction during job
MAIN_F_C operation rate AIN_M operation rate
A correction coefficient 1 - 199 100 C correction coefficient 1 - 199 120
(Cyan main scanning F (Magenta main
side) scanning)
CP_NORM_ Normal correction CP_JOB_S Correction during job
MAIN_R_C operation rate UB_M operation rate
B correction coefficient 1 - 199 100 D correction coefficient 1 - 199 100
(Cyan main scanning R (Magenta sub
side) scanning)
CP_NORM_ Normal correction CP_JOB_M Correction during job
SUB_C operation rate AIN_Y operation rate
C 1 - 199 100 E 1 - 199 120
correction coefficient correction coefficient
(Cyan sub scanning) (Yellow main scanning)
CP_NORM_ Normal correction CP_JOB_S Correction during job
MAIN_F_M operation rate UB_Y operation rate
F 1 - 199 100
D correction coefficient 1 - 199 100 correction coefficient
(Magenta main (Yellow sub scanning)
scanning F side)
CP_NORM_ Normal correction
MAIN_R_M operation rate
E correction coefficient 1 - 199 100
(Magenta main
scanning R side)

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 87
50-24 Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose (This simulation is normally not used in the When A Image LEAD_ED OC lead 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
market.) image loss GE (OC) edge image
Function (Purpose) Used to display the detail data of automatic send amount loss amount
registration data. mode setting setting
(Excep B OC FRONT_R OC side 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
Section t for EAR(OC) image loss
Operation/Procedure FAX amount
and setting
copy) C TRAIL_ED OC rear 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
GE(OC) edge image
50-27 loss amount
Purpose Adjustment setting
D Image LEAD_ED Front 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the image loss adjustment
loss GE surface lead
of scanned images in the FAX or image amount (SPF_SID edge image
send mode. setting E1) loss amount
Section SPF setting
E SIDE1 FRONT_R Front 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
Operation/Procedure
EAR surface side
1) Select a target adjustment mode with [FAX] or [SCANNER] (SPF_SID image loss
key. E1) amount
2) Select an adjustment target item on the touch panel. setting
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. F TRAIL_ED Front 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
GE(SPF_ surface rear
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) SIDE1) edge image
[RSPF] loss amount
setting
Setting Default G Image LEAD_ED Back 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
Item/Display Content
range value loss GE surface lead
FAX A Image LEAD_ED OC lead 0 - 100 30 amount (SPF_SID edge image
send loss GE (OC) edge image (3mm) setting E2) loss amount
amount loss amount SPF setting
setting setting H SIDE2 FRONT_R Back 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
B OC FRONT_R OC side 0 - 100 20 EAR surface side
EAR (OC) image loss (2mm) (SPF_SID image loss
amount E2) amount
setting setting
C TRAIL_ED OC rear 0 - 100 20 I TRAIL_ED Back 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
GE (OC) edge image (2mm) GE(SPF_ surface rear
loss amount SIDE2) edge image
setting loss amount
D Image LEAD_ED Front 0 - 100 20 setting
loss GE surface lead (2mm)
amount (SPF_SID edge image [DSPF]
setting E1) loss amount Setting Default
SPF setting Item/Display Content
range value
E SIDE1 FRONT_R Front 0 - 100 20
FAX A Image LEAD_ED OC lead 0 - 100 30
EAR surface side (2mm)
send loss GE (OC) edge image (3mm)
(SPF_SID image loss
amount loss amount
E1) amount
setting setting
setting
B OC FRONT_R OC side 0 - 100 20
F TRAIL_ED Front 0 - 100 30 EAR (OC) image loss (2mm)
GE surface rear (3mm) amount
(SPF_SID edge image setting
E1) loss amount
C TRAIL_ED OC rear 0 - 100 20
setting
GE (OC) edge image (2mm)
G Image LEAD_ED Back 0 - 100 20 loss amount
loss GE surface lead (2mm) setting
amount (SPF_SID edge image
D Image LEAD_ED Front 0 - 100 20
setting E2) loss amount
loss GE surface lead (2mm)
SPF setting
amount (SPF_SID edge image
H SIDE2 FRONT_R Back 0 - 100 20 setting E1) loss amount
EAR surface side (2mm) SPF setting
(SPF_SID image loss SIDE1
E FRONT_R Front 0 - 100 20
E2) amount
EAR surface side (2mm)
setting
(SPF_SID image loss
I TRAIL_ED Back 0 - 100 30
E1) amount
GE surface rear (3mm)
setting
(SPF_SID edge image
F TRAIL_ED Front 0 - 100 30
E2) loss amount
GE surface rear (3mm)
setting
(SPF_SID edge image
E1) loss amount
setting

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 88
 Setting Default * Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss (Man-
Item/Display Content ual adjustments)
range value
FAX G Image LEAD_ED Back 0 - 100 30 1) Select an adjustment item with the menu button.
send loss GE surface lead (2mm)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is printed.
amount (SPF_SID edge image
setting E2) loss amount 3) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.
SPF setting 4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is scanned.
H SIDE2 FRONT_R Back 0 - 100 20 5) Press [OK] key.
EAR surface side (2mm)
(SPF_SID image loss Item/Display Content Content
E2) amount
OC ADJ OC Adjustment Image loss off-center sub
setting
scanning direction image
I TRAIL_ED Back 0 - 100 20 magnification ratio
GE surface rear (3mm) adjustment (Document table
(SPF_SID edge image mode)
E2) loss amount
BK-MAG ADJ BK main scanning BK main scanning direction
setting
direction image image magnification ratio
When A Image LEAD_ED OC lead 0 - 100 0 (0mm) magnification ratio adjustment
image loss GE (OC) edge image adjustment
send amount loss amount
SPF ADJ SPF Adjustment RSPF/DSPF (Top/Back)
mode setting setting
sheet front edge and off-
(Excep B OC FRONT_R OC side 0 - 100 0 (0mm) center sub scanning
t for EAR(OC) image loss direction image
FAX amount magnification ratio
and setting adjustment
copy) C TRAIL_ED OC rear 0 - 100 0 (0mm) SETUP/PRINT ADJ Printing position Print image edge
GE(OC) edge image adjustment adjustment / all tray print
loss amount off-center adjustment
setting (individual tray, ADU)
D Image LEAD_ED Front 0 - 100 0 (0mm) RESULT Display the result Adjustment result is
loss GE surface lead displayed
amount (SPF_SID edge image
DATA Data display Used data for the
setting E1) loss amount
adjustment is displayed.
SPF setting
E SIDE1 FRONT_R Front 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
EAR surface side
(SPF_SID image loss
E1) amount
setting 51
F TRAIL_ED Front 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
GE(SPF_ surface rear
51-1
SIDE1) edge image
loss amount Purpose Adjustment/Setup
setting
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the
G Image LEAD_ED Back 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
secondary transport voltage.
loss GE surface lead
amount (SPF_SID edge image Section
setting E2) loss amount Operation/Procedure
SPF setting
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
H SIDE2 FRONT_R Back 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
panel.
EAR surface side
(SPF_SID image loss 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
E2) amount 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
setting
When the adjustment value is decreased, the transfer ON/OFF tim-
I TRAIL_ED Back 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
ing for the paper is advanced. When the adjustment value is
GE(SPF_ surface rear
SIDE2) edge image increased, the timing is delayed.
loss amount When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the timing is changed
setting by about 10ms. The setting range is -490 - +490ms.

Default
Item/Display Content
value
50-28 A TC2 ON TIMING Secondary transfer voltage ON 55
Purpose Adjustment timing setting
B TC2 OFF TIMING Secondary transfer voltage OFF 47
Function (Purpose) Used to automatically adjust the image timing setting
loss, void area, image off-center, and image C FRONT EDGE ON Front edge bias ON timing setting 30
magnification ratio. TIMING
Section D BACKEND OFF Rear edge bias OFF timing setting 60
TIMING
Operation/Procedure
E DHV ON TIMING Separation output ON timing setting 30
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with F DHV OFF TIMING Separation output OFF timing setting 90
SIM50-28.
* Print image position, image magnification ratio, void area, off-
center adjustments (Manual adjustments)
* Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Manual adjustment)
* Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment)

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 89
51-2 Default
Mode Display/Item Content
value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup ENGINE D TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflec- HEAVY A stage)/deflection adjustment
tion amount) on paper by the main unit and PAPER(L) value
the SPF registration roller. (This adjustment (Heavy paper A/Large size)
is performed when there is a considerable E TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40
HEAVY B stage)/deflection adjustment
variation in the print image position on the
PAPER(S) value
paper or when paper jams frequently (Heavy paper B/Small size)
occur.) F TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40
Section HEAVY B stage)/deflection adjustment
Operation/Procedure PAPER(L) value
(Heavy paper B/Large size)
1) (When RSPF model) G TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Lower 40
Select a target adjustment mode with [SIDE1] or [SIDE2] or PLAIN stage)/deflection adjustment
[ENGINE] keys. PAPER (S) value
2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys. (Plain paper/Small size)
H TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Lower 40
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. PLAIN stage)/deflection adjustment
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) PAPER (L) value
(Plain paper/Large size)
[RSPF]
I TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Upper 40
Default HEAVY A stage)/deflection adjustment
Mode Display/Item Content
value PAPER(S) value
SIDE1 A NORMAL_P RSPF front surface document 50 (Heavy paper A/Small size)
LAIN_HIGH deflection amount adjustment J TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Upper 40
value (Normal/Plain paper/ HEAVY A stage)/deflection adjustment
HIGH) PAPER(L) value
B NORMAL_P RSPF front surface document 50 (Heavy paper A/Large size)
LAIN_LOW deflection amount adjustment K TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Upper 40
value (Normal/Plain paper/ HEAVY B stage)/deflection adjustment
LOW) PAPER(S) value
C NORMAL_T RSPF front surface document 50 (Heavy paper B/Small size)
HIN _HIGH deflection amount adjustment L TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Upper 40
value (Normal/Thin paper/ HEAVY B stage)/deflection adjustment
HIGH) PAPER(L) value
D NORMAL_T RSPF front surface document 50 (Heavy paper B/Large size)
HIN _LOW deflection amount adjustment M MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
value (Normal/Thin paper/ PLAIN adjustment value
LOW) PAPER (S) (Plain paper/Small size)
E RANDOM_P RSPF front surface document 50 N MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
LAIN_HIGH deflection amount adjustment PLAIN adjustment value
value (Random/Plain paper/ PAPER (L) (Plain paper/Large size)
HIGH) O MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
F RANDOM_P RSPF front surface document 50 HEAVY A adjustment value
LAIN _LOW deflection amount adjustment PAPER(S) (Heavy paper A/Small size)
value (Random/Plain paper/ P MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
LOW) HEAVY A adjustment value
G RANDOM_T RSPF front surface document 50 PAPER(L) (Heavy paper A/Large size)
HIN_HIGH deflection amount adjustment Q MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
value (Random/Thin paper/ HEAVY B adjustment value
HIGH) PAPER(S) (Heavy paper B/Small size)
H RANDOM_T RSPF front surface document 50 R MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
HIN_LOW deflection amount adjustment HEAVY B adjustment value
value (Random/Thin paper/ PAPER (L) (Heavy paper B/Large size)
LOW) S MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
SIDE2 A NORMAL_P RSPF back surface document 50 OHP adjustment value (OHP)
LAIN_ deflection amount adjustment T MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
HIGH_1 value 1 (Normal/Plain paper/ ENV adjustment value
HIGH) (Envelop)
B NORMAL_P RSPF back surface document 50 U MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 30
LAIN_ deflection amount adjustment LABEL adjustment value
LOW_1 value 1 (Normal/Plain paper/ (Label)
LOW) V ADU PLAIN ADU/deflection adjustment 30
ENGINE A TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40 PAPER (S) value
PLAIN stage)/deflection adjustment (Plain paper/Small size)
PAPER (S) value W ADU PLAIN ADU/deflection adjustment 30
(Plain paper/Small size) PAPER (L) value
B TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40 (Plain paper/Large size)
PLAIN stage)/deflection adjustment X ADU HEAVY ADU/deflection adjustment 40
PAPER (L) value A PAPER (S) value
(Plain paper/Large size) (Heavy paper A/Small size)
C TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40 Y ADU HEAVY ADU/deflection adjustment 40
HEAVY A stage)/deflection adjustment A PAPER (L) value
PAPER(S) value (Heavy paper A/Large size)
(Heavy paper A/Small size)

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 90
 Default Defaul
Mode Display/Item Content Mode Display/Item Content
value t value
ENGINE Z ADU HEAVY ADU/deflection adjustment 40 SIDE2 E RANDOM DSPF back surface document 70
B PAPER (S) value _PLAIN_ deflection amount adjustment
(Heavy paper B/Small size) HIGH value 2 (Normal/Plain paper/
AA ADU HEAVY ADU/deflection adjustment 40 HIGH)
B PAPER (L) value F RANDOM DSPF back surface document 50
(Heavy paper B/Large size) _PLAIN_L deflection amount adjustment
AB DESK (S) DESK/deflection adjustment 40 OW value 2 (Normal/Plain paper/
value LOW)
(Plain paper/Small size) G RANDOM DSPF back surface document 70
AC DESK DESK/deflection adjustment 40 _THIN_HI deflection amount adjustment
HEAVY A value GH value 2 (Normal/Thin paper/
PAPER(S) (Heavy paper A/Small size) HIGH)
AD DESK DESK/deflection adjustment 40 H RANDOM DSPF back surface document 50
HEAVY B value _THIN_L deflection amount adjustment
PAPER(S) (Heavy paper B/Small size) OW value 2 (Normal/Thin paper/
AE DESK (L) DESK/deflection adjustment 40 LOW)
value ENGINE A TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40
(Plain paper/Large size) PLAIN stage)/deflection adjustment
AF DESK DESK/deflection adjustment 40 PAPER value
HEAVY value (S) (Plain paper/Small size)
PAPER (L) (Heavy paper A/Largel size) B TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40
AG DESK DESK/deflection adjustment 40 PLAIN stage)/deflection adjustment
HEAVY value PAPER value
PAPER (L) (Heavy paper B/Large size) (L) (Plain paper/Large size)
AH LCC(S) LCC/deflection adjustment 40 C TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40
value (Plain paper/Small size) HEAVY A stage)/deflection adjustment
AI LCC HEAVY LCC/deflection adjustment 40 PAPER(S) value
A PAPER(S) value (Heavy paper /Small (Heavy paper A/Small size)
size) D TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40
HEAVY A stage)/deflection adjustment
[DSPF] PAPER(L) value
(Heavy paper A/Large size)
Defaul
Mode Display/Item Content E TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40
t value
HEAVY B stage)/deflection adjustment
REGI1 A NORMAL DSPF front surface document 50 PAPER(S) value
_PLAIN_ deflection amount adjustment (Heavy paper B/Small size)
HIGH value (Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
F TRAY1 Main unit cassette 1 (Upper 40
B NORMAL DSPF front surface document 50 HEAVY B stage)/deflection adjustment
_PLAIN_L deflection amount adjustment PAPER(L) value
OW value (Normal/Plain paper/LOW) (Heavy paper B/Large size)
C NORMAL DSPF front surface document 50 G TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Lower 40
_THIN deflection amount adjustment PLAIN stage)/deflection adjustment
_HIGH value (Normal/Thin paper/HIGH) PAPER value
D NORMAL DSPF front surface document 50 (S) (Plain paper/Small size)
_THIN deflection amount adjustment H TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Lower 40
_LOW value (Normal/Thin paper/LOW) PLAIN stage)/deflection adjustment
E RANDOM DSPF front surface document 50 PAPER value
_PLAIN_ deflection amount adjustment (L) (Plain paper/Large size)
HIGH value (Random/Plain paper/ I TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Upper 40
HIGH) HEAVY A stage)/deflection adjustment
F RANDOM DSPF front surface document 50 PAPER(S) value
_PLAIN deflection amount adjustment (Heavy paper A/Small size)
_LOW value (Random/Plain paper/LOW) J TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Upper 40
G RANDOM DSPF front surface document 50 HEAVY A stage)/deflection adjustment
_THIN_HI deflection amount adjustment PAPER(L) value
GH value (Random/Thin paper/HIGH) (Heavy paper A/Large size)
H RANDOM DSPF front surface document 50 K TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Upper 40
_THIN_L deflection amount adjustment HEAVY B stage)/deflection adjustment
OW value (Random/Thin paper/LOW) PAPER(S) value
REGI2 A NORMAL DSPF back surface document 70 (Heavy paper B/Small size)
_PLAIN_ deflection amount adjustment L TRAY2 Main unit cassette 2 (Upper 40
HIGH value 2 (Normal/Plain paper/ HEAVY B stage)/deflection adjustment
HIGH) PAPER(L) value
B NORMAL DSPF back surface document 50 (Heavy paper B/Large size)
_PLAIN_L deflection amount adjustment M MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
OW value 2 (Normal/Plain paper/ PLAIN adjustment value
LOW) PAPER (Plain paper/Small size)
C NORMAL DSPF back surface document 70 (S)
_THIN_HI deflection amount adjustment N MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
GH value 2 (Normal/Thin paper/ PLAIN adjustment value
HIGH) PAPER (Plain paper/Large size)
D NORMAL DSPF back surface document 50 (L)
_THIN_L deflection amount adjustment O MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
OW value 2 (Normal/Thin paper/ HEAVY A adjustment value
LOW) PAPER(S) (Heavy paper A/Small size)

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 91
 Defaul (When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the stop timing is
Mode Display/Item Content changed by 0.1mm.)
t value
ENGINE P MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
HEAVY A adjustment value
PAPER(L) (Heavy paper A/Large size)
Q MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
HEAVY B adjustment value 53
PAPER(S) (Heavy paper B/Small size)
R MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40 53-6
HEAVY B adjustment value
PAPER (Heavy paper B/Large size) Purpose Adjustment
(L) Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the detection level of the
S MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40 SPF document width.
OHP adjustment value (OHP)
Section
T MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 40
ENV adjustment value (Envelop) Operation/Procedure
U MANUAL Manual feed tray/deflection 30 1) Open the SPF paper feed guide to the maximum width.
LABEL adjustment value (Label)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
V ADU ADU/deflection adjustment value 30
PLAIN (Plain paper/Small size) The maximum width detection level is recognized.
PAPER 3) Open the SPF paper feed guide to the A4R width.
(S) 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
W ADU ADU/deflection adjustment value 30
The A4R width detection level is recognized.
PLAIN (Plain paper/Large size)
PAPER 5) Open the SPF paper feed guide to the A5R width.
(L) 6) Press [EXECUTE] key.
X ADU ADU/deflection adjustment value 40
The A5R width detection level is recognized.
HEAVY A (Heavy paper A/Small size)
PAPER 7) Open the SPF paper feed guide to the minimum width.
(S) 8) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Y ADU ADU/deflection adjustment value 40 The minimum width detection level is recognized.
HEAVY A (Heavy paper A/Large size)
PAPER When the above operation is not performed normally, "ERROR" is
(L) displayed and. When the above operation is completed normally,
Z ADU ADU/deflection adjustment value 40 "COMPLETE" is displayed.
HEAVY B (Heavy paper B/Small size)
PAPER 1 TRAYVOLMAX Tray size volume maximum value
(S) 2 TRAYVOLA4R Tray volume A4R size adjustment value
AA ADU ADU/deflection adjustment value 40 3 TRAYVOLA5R Tray volume A5R size adjustment value
HEAVY B (Heavy paper B/Large size) 4 TRAYVOLMIN Tray size volume minimum value
PAPER
(L)
AB DESK (S) DESK/deflection adjustment 40
value (Plain paper/Small size) 53-7
AC DESK DESK/deflection adjustment 40
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
HEAVY A value (Heavy paper A/Small size)
PAPER(S) Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the SPF document size
AD DESK DESK/deflection adjustment 40 width sensor.
HEAVY B value (Heavy paper B/Small size)
Section
PAPER(S)
AE DESK (L) DESK/deflection adjustment 40 Operation/Procedure
value (Plain paper/Large size) 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
AF DESK DESK/deflection adjustment 40 panel.
HEAVY value (Heavy paper A/Large size) 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
PAPER
(L) 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
AG DESK DESK/deflection adjustment 40 [RSPF]
HEAVY value (Heavy paper B/Large size)
PAPER Setting Default
Item/Display
(L) range value
AH LCC(S) LCC/deflection adjustment value 40 A AD_MAX Max. width position 0 - 1023 84
(Plain paper/Small size) B AD_P1 A4R width position 0 - 1023 509
AI LCC LCC/deflection adjustment value 40 C AD_P2 A5R width position 0 - 1023 808
HEAVY A (Heavy paper /Small size) D AD_MIN Min. width position 0 - 1023 961
PAPER(S)
[DSPF]
Note on “Large size” and “Small size”
Setting Default
Small size: The paper length in the transport direction is shorter Item/Display
range value
than the LT size (216mm). A AD_MAX Max. width position 0 - 1023 66
Large size: The paper length in the transport direction is longer B AD_P1 A4R width position 0 - 1023 438
than the LT size (216mm). C AD_P2 A5R width position 0 - 1023 699
Adjustment value D AD_MIN Min. width position 0 - 1023 893
When the adjustment value is increased, the warp amount is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the warp
amount is decreased.

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 92
53-8 Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Adjustment C SIDEA_ WEA SPF front Low 0 1
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document lead edge ref- SCAN_ K surface optimum
erence and the SPF mode document scan POSITI MIDD scan position Medi 1
position. ON_LV LE detection level um
STRO setting High 2
Section NG
Operation/Procedure D OC_DIR WEA OC dirt level Low 0 1
Select an adjustment item with [AUTO] [MANUAL] key. T_LV K setting
MIDD Medi 1
<AUTO: Document lead edge reference (RRCA) adjustment>(Auto
LE um
adjustment)
STRO High 2
1) Set a sheet of black paper of A4 or 11"x 8.5" on the document NG
table. E SIDEA_ WEA SPF front Low 0 1
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment is performed and the DIRT_A K surface dirt
adjustment value is saved.) LARM_L MIDD alarm level Medi 1
V LE setting um
Setting Default STRO High 2
Item/Display Content
range value NG
MEASUREMENT Document lead edge 0-255 - F SIDEA_ OFF SPF front OFF 0 1
DISTANCE measurement distance (0.1mm unit) DIRT_S ON surface streak ON 1
RRCA Document lead edge 0 - 99 50 HADING delete shading
reference position _SET setting

<MANUAL: SPF mode document scan position adjustment> [DSPF]

1) Enter the set value with 10-key. Setting Default
Item/Display Content
2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) range value
A SIDEA_ OFF SPF front OFF 0 0
Setting Default Default SCAN_ ON surface optimum ON 1
Item/Display Content range value value POSITI scan position
(RSPF) (DSPF) ON_SE detection setting
A ADJUST SPF mode document 1 - 99 5 10 T_STAR (When starting)
VALUE scan position adjustment T
(Scanner stop position B SIDEA_ OFF SPF front OFF 0 1
adjustment) SCAN_ ON surface optimum ON 1
POSITI scan position
* When the adjustment value is increased, the scanner stop posi- ON_SE detection setting
tion in the RSPF mode is shifted to the right. T_JOB (After a job)
* When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the position is C SIDEA_ WEA SPF front Low 0 1
SCAN_ K surface optimum
shifted by 0.1mm.
POSITI MIDD scan position Medi 1
ON_LV LE detection level um
STRO setting High 2
53-9 NG
Purpose Adjustment D OC_DIR WEA OC dirt level Low 0 1
T_LV K setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set dirt detection for SPF scanning MIDD Medi 1
position. LE um
Section STRO High 2
NG
Operation/Procedure
E SIDEA_ WEA SPF front Low 0 1
1) Select an items to be set with scroll key. DIRT_A K surface dirt
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. LARM_L MIDD alarm level Medi 1
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) V LE setting um
STRO High 2
NG
[RSPF] F SIDEB_ WEA SPF back Low 0 1
DIRT_A K surface dirt
Setting Default
Item/Display Content LARM_L MIDD alarm level Medi 1
range value
V LE setting um
A SIDEA_ OFF SPF front OFF 0 0
STRO High 2
SCAN_ ON surface optimum ON 1
NG
POSITI scan position
ON_SE detection setting G SIDEA_ OFF SPF front OFF 0 1
T_STAR (When starting) DIRT_S ON surface streak ON 1
T HADING delete shading
_SET setting
B SIDEA_ OFF SPF front OFF 0 1
SCAN_ surface optimum H SIDEB_ OFF SPF back OFF 0 1
ON ON 1
POSITI scan position DIRT_S ON surface streak ON 1
ON_SE detection setting HADING delete shading
T_JOB (After a job) _SET setting

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 93
 Setting Default 55-2
Item/Display Content
range value
I SIDEB_EXT_SH SPF back side Defa 0 0 Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
ADING_SET expansion ult required.)
shading setting Both 1 Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the scan-
OFF ner control operation. (SOFT SW)
Both 2
ON
Section
Powe 3 Operation/Procedure
r on
ON/
OFF
after
55-3
JOB Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
Powe 4 required.)
r on
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the control-
OFF/
ON
ler operation. (SOFT SW)
after Section
JOB Operation/Procedure

53-10 55-10
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment/Setting
Function (Purpose) SPF dirt detection execution. Function (Purpose) Used to set the special stamp text. (Taiwan
Section only)
Operation/Procedure Section
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set (digit, color, type) with the scroll key.
[RSPF]
2) Enter the value corresponding to the setting item with 10-key.
Item Content
3) Press [OK] key.
SPF SIDEA SPF front surface dirt detection position (main scan
position 1 to 8)
Setting Default
"-": No dirt, A"*": Dirt Item/Display Content
range value
OC OC surface dirt detection position (main scan position
A 1ST DIGIT First digit (left edge) 1 - 90 1
1 to 8)
B 2ND DIGIT Second digit 32 [blank:
"-": No dirt, "*": Dirt
C 3RD DIGIT Third digit 20H]
D 4TH DIGIT Fourth digit 65 - 90
[DSPF]
[Alphabet:
E 5TH DIGIT Fifth digit
Item Content 41H("A) -
F 6TH DIGIT Sixth digit (right
SPF SIDEA SPF front surface dirt detection position (main scan 5AH("Z")]
edge)
position 1 to 8) 48 - 57
"-": No dirt, A"*": Dirt [Numeral:
SPF SIDEB DSPF back surface dirt detection position (main scan 30H("0") -
position 1 to 8) 39H("9")]
"-": No dirt, A"*": Dirt G COLOR K Color specification 0 0
OC OC surface dirt detection position (main scan position C input 1
1 to 8) M 2
"-": No dirt, "*": Dirt Y 3
R 4
G 5
B 6
H TYPE PATTERN Print Edging 0 1
55 1 com- type
PATTERN posing OR 1
2 method process
55-1 type
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially PATTERN No- 2
required.) 3 delete-
compo-
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the engine sition type
control operations. (SOFT SW)
Section Input value
Operation/Procedure Print Blank A B C E F G
Input value 32 65 66 67 69 70 71

Print H I J K L M N
Input value 72 73 74 75 76 77 78

Print O P Q R T U V
Input value 79 80 81 82 84 85 86

Print W X Y Z 0 1 2

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 94
 Input value 87 88 89 90 48 49 50 When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
Print 3 5 6 7 8 9
Input value 51 53 54 55 56 57
56-4
Purpose Data backup
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the JOB log data to the
56 USB flash drive.
Section
56-1 Operation/Procedure
Purpose Backup 1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
Function (Purpose) Used to transport data between HDD- 2) Press [JOB LOG EXPORT] key.
EEPROM. (Used to repair the PWB.) 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Section Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
Operation/Procedure When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
1) Select a target content of data transfer.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key.
Data transfer of the item selected in procedure 1) is executed.
56-5
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed. Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to import the SIM22-6 data to a USB
EEPROM -> HDD Transfer from EEPROM to HDD flash drive in the TEXT format.
HDD -> EEPROM Transfer from HDD to EEPROM
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
56-2 2) Select a kind of data to be imported.
Purpose Data backup 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the data in the EEPROM. Procedure 2) The selected data are imported.
HDD (including user authentication data When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
and address data) to the USB flash drive. displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
(Corresponding to the device cloning and
the storage backup.)
Section 56-6
Operation/Procedure Purpose Operation data check
1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
Function (Purpose) Used to import the SIM23-2 data to a USB
2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel. flash drive in the TEXT format.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. Section
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed Operation/Procedure
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is 1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
2) Select a kind of data to be imported.
(Machine with the DSK installed)
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
3) Enter the password with 10-key. 56-7
4) Press [SET] key.
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
5) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to import the syslog data to a USB
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed. flash drive.
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
Section
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
Operation/Procedure
1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
56-3 2) Select SYSLOG EXPORT to be imported.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Purpose Data backup
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the document filing data to
the USB flash drive.
56-8
Section
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to import the ICC profile data to a
1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
USB flash drive.
2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
Section
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Operation/Procedure
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 95
 1 : ‘16/Sep.
2) Select the ICC profile data to be imported.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. 61
61-1
1 56-15 Purpose Operation test/check
Purpose Backup Function (Purpose) Used to check the LSU polygon motor rota-
Function (Purpose) MFP EEPROM data restore tion and laser detection.
Section Section LSU
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Confirm that new EEPROM attached on the PWB. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. When the operation is completed normally, [OK] is displayed.
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is In case of an abnormal end, [NG] is displayed.
displayed, in case of an abnormal end "ERROR" is displayed.
Display Content
LSU TESTRESULT NG: PG Polygon mirror rotation abnormality
LSU TESTRESULT NG: K Laser abnormality (K)
56-99 LSU TESTRESULT NG: CL Laser light emitting abnormality (C,M,Y)
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to import the log data to a USB flash
drive.
61-3
Section
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power
1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
Section
2) Select the log item data to be imported.
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
1) Select a target mode for adjustment with [COPY600],
Item Contents [COPY1200], [PR600/FAX], [PR1200] on the touch panel.
SIM00-11 Import SIM00-11 data. 2) Select an adjustment target item on the touch panel.
SIM56-2 Perform simplified output of SIM56-2. 3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
SIM56-4 Import SIM56-4 job log data.
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
SIM56-5 Import SIM56-5 data.
SIM56-6 Import SIM56-6 data. When the laser power are increased, the print density is
SIM56-7 Import SIM56-7 system log data. increased and the line width of line images are increased.
MX-xx70 series
Mode Item / Display Content Default
COPY LASER POWER Laser power setting
A 150
600 MIDDLE(K) middle speed/K
60 LASER POWER Laser power setting
B 150
MIDDLE(C) middle speed/C
60-1 LASER POWER Laser power setting
C 150
MIDDLE(M) middle speed/M
Purpose Operation test/check
LASER POWER Laser power setting
D 150
Function (Purpose) Used to check the memory operations MIDDLE(Y) middle speed/Y
(read/write). LASER POWER Laser power setting low
E 150
LOW(K) speed/K
Section
LASER POWER Laser power setting low
Operation/Procedure F 150
LOW(C) speed/C
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. LASER POWER Laser power setting low
G 150
Start the test. LOW(M) speed/M
LASER POWER Laser power setting low
H 150
Result display Description LOW(Y) speed/Y
OK Success LASER POWER Laser power setting
I 150
NG Fail MIDDLE(BW) middle speed/BW
NONE DIMM trouble LASER POWER Laser power setting low
J 150
INVALID Execution disable LOW(BW) speed/BW
LASER DUTY Laser duty select
K 0
MIDDLE(K) middle speed/K
LASER DUTY Laser duty select
L 0
MIDDLE(C) middle speed/C
LASER DUTY Laser duty select
M 0
MIDDLE(M) middle speed/M
LASER DUTY Laser duty select
N 0
MIDDLE(Y) middle speed/Y
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
O 0
LOW(K) speed/K
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
P 0
LOW(C) speed/C
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
Q 0
LOW(M) speed/M

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 96
Mode Item / Display Content Default Mode Item / Display Content Default
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low PRINT LASER DUTY Laser duty select
R 0 S 0
LOW(Y) speed/Y ER MIDDLE(BW) middle speed/BW
LASER DUTY Laser duty select 600/ LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
S 0 T 0
MIDDLE(BW) middle speed/BW FAX LOW(BW) speed/BW
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low LASER DUTY Laser duty select
T 0 U 0
LOW(BW) speed/BW MIDDLE(K 1BIT) middle speed (1BIT)/K
U LASER POWER K1 Laser power setting K1 100 LASER DUTY Laser duty select
V 0
V LASER POWER K2 Laser power setting K2 100 MIDDLE(C 1BIT) middle speed (1BIT)/C
W LASER POWER K3 Laser power setting K3 100 LASER DUTY Laser duty select
W 0
X LASER POWER K4 Laser power setting K4 100 MIDDLE(M 1BIT) middle speed (1BIT)/M
LASER POWER Laser power setting C1 LASER DUTY Laser duty select
Y 100 X 0
C1 MIDDLE(Y 1BIT) middle speed (1BIT)/Y
LASER POWER Laser power setting C2 LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
Z 100 Y 0
C2 LOW(K 1BIT) speed (1BIT)/K
COPY LASER POWER Laser power setting C3 100 LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
AA Z 0
600 C3 LOW(C 1BIT) speed (1BIT)/C
LASER POWER Laser power setting C4 LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
AB 100 AA 0
C4 LOW(M 1BIT) speed (1BIT)/M
LASER POWER Laser power setting M1 LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
AC 100 AB 0
M1 LOW(Y 1BIT) speed (1BIT)/Y
LASER POWER Laser power setting M2 LASER DUTY Laser duty select
AD 100 AC MIDDLE(BW 1BIT) middle speed (1BIT)/ 0
M2
LASER POWER Laser power setting M3 BW
AE 100 LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
M3 AD 0
LASER POWER Laser power setting M4 LOW(BW 1BIT)) speed (1BIT)/BW
AF 100 PRINT LASER POWER Laser power setting
M4 A 150
AG LASER POWER Y1 Laser power setting Y1 100 ER MIDDLE(K) middle speed/K
1200 LASER POWER Laser power setting
AH LASER POWER Y2 Laser power setting Y2 100 B 150
MIDDLE(C) middle speed/C
AI LASER POWER Y3 Laser power setting Y3 100
LASER POWER Laser power setting
AJ LASER POWER Y4 Laser power setting Y4 100 C 150
MIDDLE(M) middle speed/M
COPY LASER POWER Laser power setting
A 150 LASER POWER Laser power setting
1200 MIDDLE(BW) middle speed/BW D 150
MIDDLE(Y) middle speed/Y
LASER POWER Laser power setting low
B 150 LASER POWER Laser power setting low
LOW(BW) speed/BW E 150
LOW(K) speed/K
LASER DUTY Laser duty select
C 0 LASER POWER Laser power setting low
MIDDLE(BW) middle speed/BW F 150
LOW(C) speed/C
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
D 0 LASER POWER Laser power setting low
LOW(BW) speed/BW G 150
LOW(M) speed/M
PRINT LASER POWER Laser power setting
A 150 LASER POWER Laser power setting low
ER MIDDLE(K) middle speed/K H 150
LOW(Y) speed/Y
600/ LASER POWER Laser power setting
FAX B 150 LASER POWER Laser power setting
MIDDLE(C) middle speed/C I 150
MIDDLE(BW) middle speed/BW
LASER POWER Laser power setting
C 150 LASER POWER Laser power setting low
MIDDLE(M) middle speed/M J 150
LOW(BW) speed/BW
LASER POWER Laser power setting
D 150 LASER DUTY Laser duty select
MIDDLE(Y) middle speed/Y K 0
MIDDLE(K) middle speed/K
LASER POWER Laser power setting low
E 150 LASER DUTY Laser duty select
LOW(K) speed/K L 0
MIDDLE(C) middle speed/C
LASER POWER Laser power setting low
F 150 LASER DUTY Laser duty select
LOW(C) speed/C M 0
MIDDLE(M) middle speed/M
LASER POWER Laser power setting low
G 150 LASER DUTY Laser duty select
LOW(M) speed/M N 0
MIDDLE(Y) middle speed/Y
LASER POWER Laser power setting low
H 150 LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
LOW(Y) speed/Y O 0
LOW(K) speed/K
LASER POWER Laser power setting
I 150 LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
MIDDLE(BW) middle speed/BW P 0
LOW(C) speed/C
LASER POWER Laser power setting low
J 150 LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
LOW(BW) speed/BW Q 0
LOW(M) speed/M
LASER DUTY Laser duty select
K 0 LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
MIDDLE(K) middle speed/K R 0
LOW(Y) speed/Y
LASER DUTY Laser duty select
L 0 LASER DUTY Laser duty select
MIDDLE(C) middle speed/C S 0
MIDDLE(BW) middle speed/BW
LASER DUTY Laser duty select
M 0 LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
MIDDLE(M) middle speed/M T 0
LOW(BW) speed/BW
LASER DUTY Laser duty select
N 0
MIDDLE(Y) middle speed/Y MX-xx50 series
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
O 0 Mode Item / Display Content Default
LOW(K) speed/K
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low COPY LASER POWER Laser power setting
P 0 A 150
LOW(C) speed/C 600 MIDDLE(K) middle speed/K
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low LASER POWER Laser power setting
Q 0 B 150
LOW(M) speed/M MIDDLE(C) middle speed/C
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low LASER POWER Laser power setting
R 0 C 150
LOW(Y) speed/Y MIDDLE(M) middle speed/M

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 97
 Mode Item / Display Content Default Mode Item / Display Content Default
COPY LASER POWER Laser power setting PRINT LASER POWER Laser power setting low
D 150 E 150
600 MIDDLE(Y) middle speed/Y ER LOW(K) speed/K
LASER POWER Laser power setting low 600/ LASER POWER Laser power setting low
E 150 F 150
LOW(K) speed/K FAX LOW(C) speed/C
LASER POWER Laser power setting low LASER POWER Laser power setting low
F 150 G 150
LOW(C) speed/C LOW(M) speed/M
LASER POWER Laser power setting low LASER POWER Laser power setting low
G 150 H 150
LOW(M) speed/M LOW(Y) speed/Y
LASER POWER Laser power setting low LASER POWER Laser power setting
H 150 I 150
LOW(Y) speed/Y MIDDLE(BW) middle speed/BW
LASER POWER Laser power setting LASER POWER Laser power setting low
I 150 J 150
MIDDLE(BW) middle speed/BW LOW(BW) speed/BW
LASER POWER Laser power setting low LASER DUTY Laser duty select
J 150 K 0
LOW(BW) speed/BW MIDDLE(K) middle speed/K
LASER DUTY Laser duty select LASER DUTY Laser duty select
K 0 L 0
MIDDLE(K) middle speed/K MIDDLE(C) middle speed/C
LASER DUTY Laser duty select LASER DUTY Laser duty select
L 0 M 0
MIDDLE(C) middle speed/C MIDDLE(M) middle speed/M
LASER DUTY Laser duty select LASER DUTY Laser duty select
M 0 N 0
MIDDLE(M) middle speed/M MIDDLE(Y) middle speed/Y
LASER DUTY Laser duty select LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
N 0 O 0
MIDDLE(Y) middle speed/Y LOW(K) speed/K
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
O 0 P 0
LOW(K) speed/K LOW(C) speed/C
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
P 0 Q 0
LOW(C) speed/C LOW(M) speed/M
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
Q 0 R 0
LOW(M) speed/M LOW(Y) speed/Y
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low LASER DUTY Laser duty select
R 0 S 0
LOW(Y) speed/Y MIDDLE(BW) middle speed/BW
LASER DUTY Laser duty select LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
S 0 T 0
MIDDLE(BW) middle speed/BW LOW(BW) speed/BW
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low LASER DUTY Laser duty select
T 0 U 0
LOW(BW) speed/BW MIDDLE(K 1BIT) middle speed (1BIT)/K
U LASER POWER K1 Laser power setting K1 100 LASER DUTY Laser duty select
V 0
V LASER POWER K2 Laser power setting K2 100 MIDDLE(C 1BIT) middle speed (1BIT)/C
W LASER POWER K3 Laser power setting K3 100 LASER DUTY Laser duty select
W 0
X LASER POWER K4 Laser power setting K4 100 MIDDLE(M 1BIT) middle speed (1BIT)/M
LASER POWER Laser power setting C1 LASER DUTY Laser duty select
Y 100 X 0
C1 MIDDLE(Y 1BIT) middle speed (1BIT)/Y
LASER POWER Laser power setting C2 LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
Z 100 Y 0
C2 LOW(K 1BIT) speed (1BIT)/K
LASER POWER Laser power setting C3 100 LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
AA Z 0
C3 LOW(C 1BIT) speed (1BIT)/C
LASER POWER Laser power setting C4 LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
AB 100 AA 0
C4 LOW(M 1BIT) speed (1BIT)/M
LASER POWER Laser power setting M1 LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
AC 100 AB 0
M1 LOW(Y 1BIT) speed (1BIT)/Y
LASER POWER Laser power setting M2 LASER DUTY Laser duty select
AD 100 AC MIDDLE(BW 1BIT) middle speed (1BIT)/ 0
M2
LASER POWER Laser power setting M3 BW
AE 100 LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
M3 AD 0
LASER POWER Laser power setting M4 LOW(BW 1BIT)) speed (1BIT)/BW
AF 100 PRINT LASER POWER Laser power setting
M4 A 150
AG LASER POWER Y1 Laser power setting Y1 100 ER MIDDLE(K) middle speed/K
1200 LASER POWER Laser power setting
AH LASER POWER Y2 Laser power setting Y2 100 B 150
MIDDLE(C) middle speed/C
AI LASER POWER Y3 Laser power setting Y3 100
LASER POWER Laser power setting
AJ LASER POWER Y4 Laser power setting Y4 100 C 150
MIDDLE(M) middle speed/M
COPY LASER POWER Laser power setting
A 150 LASER POWER Laser power setting
1200 MIDDLE(BW) middle speed/BW D 150
MIDDLE(Y) middle speed/Y
LASER POWER Laser power setting low
B 150 LASER POWER Laser power setting low
LOW(BW) speed/BW E 150
LOW(K) speed/K
LASER DUTY Laser duty select
C 0 LASER POWER Laser power setting low
MIDDLE(BW) middle speed/BW F 150
LOW(C) speed/C
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
D 0 LASER POWER Laser power setting low
LOW(BW) speed/BW G 150
LOW(M) speed/M
PRINT LASER POWER Laser power setting
A 150 LASER POWER Laser power setting low
ER MIDDLE(K) middle speed/K H 150
LOW(Y) speed/Y
600/ LASER POWER Laser power setting
B 150 LASER POWER Laser power setting
FAX MIDDLE(C) middle speed/C I 150
MIDDLE(BW) middle speed/BW
LASER POWER Laser power setting
C 150 LASER POWER Laser power setting low
MIDDLE(M) middle speed/M J 150
LOW(BW) speed/BW
LASER POWER Laser power setting
D 150 LASER DUTY Laser duty select
MIDDLE(Y) middle speed/Y K 0
MIDDLE(K) middle speed/K

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 98
 Mode Item / Display Content Default
PRINT LASER DUTY Laser duty select /DVHUSRZHUDXWRFRUUHFWLRQ02'(0,''/(
L 0 3OHDVHSODFHWKHSULQWHGWHVWSDWFK
ER MIDDLE(C) middle speed/C RQWKHGRFXPHQWJODVVWKHQSUHVV>(;(&87(@
WRUHYLVHDQGSURFRQDQGSULQWWHVWSDJH
1200 LASER DUTY Laser duty select
M 0
MIDDLE(M) middle speed/M
LASER DUTY Laser duty select
N 0
MIDDLE(Y) middle speed/Y
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
O 0
LOW(K) speed/K
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
P 0
LOW(C) speed/C 'LUHFWLRQDUURZDWOHIWVLGHRQGRFXPHQWJODVV

LASER DUTY Laser duty select low

Q 0
LOW(M) speed/M
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
R 0
LOW(Y) speed/Y 7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
LASER DUTY Laser duty select 8) Press [RETRY] key if correction is still required.
S 0
MIDDLE(BW) middle speed/BW
LASER DUTY Laser duty select low
T 0
LOW(BW) speed/BW
61-12
Purpose Adjustment
61-4 Function (Purpose) Laser power manual correction
Purpose Adjustment Section LSU
Function (Purpose) Used to print the print image skew adjust- Operation/Procedure
ment pattern. (LSU unit) Press an item button to be adjusted.
Section Item / Display Content Outline
Operation/Procedure MEASURING Density meter Adjustment with density meter
1) Select a target item on the touch panel. INSTRUMENT adjustment
2) Enter the print conditions setting value with 10-key. VISUAL Visual check Adjustment by visual check
INSPETION adjustment
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. DATA Data display Data display during execution of
The print image skew adjustment pattern is printed. screen the manual correction

Default When [MEASURING INSTRUMENT] is pressed:

Item/Display Content
value 1) Select the adjustment density pattern.
A MULTICOUNT Print quantity (1-999) 1
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
B PAPER MFT Tray 1 Manual paper feed 2
CS1 selection 2 Paper feed tray 1 (CS 1) 3) The adjustment pattern is printed out.
CS2 3 Paper feed tray 2 4) Enter the adjustment value of 5points by the density meter.
CS3 4 Paper feed tray 3 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
CS4 5 Paper feed tray 4 Execute the manual correction of the laser power. Then the
LCC 6 LCC adjustment result pattern is outputted and the data are dis-
played.
6) Press [RETRY] key if adjustment is still required.
61-11
Item/Display Contents Setting range Default
Purpose Adjustment A POSITION(4) Point 4 0 - 300 0
Function (Purpose) Used to correct the laser power automati- B POSITION(10) Point 10 0 - 300 0
cally. C POSITION(16) Point 16 0 - 300 0
D POSITION(22) Point 22 0 - 300 0
Section
E POSITION(29) Point 29 0 - 300 0
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item on the touch panel. When [VISUAL INSPECTION] is pressed:
2) Press [AUTO CORRECTION] key. 1) Select the adjustment density pattern.
3) Select a density to be corrected. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. 3) The adjustment pattern is printed out.
5) Check pattern is printed. 4) Press [5POINT CORRECTION] or [32POINT CORRECTION].
6) Place the printed pattern for scanning on the OC in the 5) Enter an adjustment value of 5 points.
A4R(LTR) direction. 6) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Execute the manual correction of the laser power. Then the
adjustment result pattern is outputted and the data are dis-
played.
7) Press [RETRY] key if adjustment is still required.
8) Press [DATA] key, display manual adjustment result.

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 99
61-13
62
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the laser power correction
62-1
value.
Purpose Data clear
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (HDD:
Operation/Procedure
Excluding the Operation manual and the
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. watermark data)
2) Press [YES] key.
Section
3) Laser power auto correction value (K-Y) 32 points and laser
Operation/Procedure
power manual correction value (K-Y) 32 points are return back
to the default value. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
Used to execute the HDD format.
61-14 When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display.
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power at once.
Section 62-2
Operation/Procedure
Purpose Operation test/check
This Sim mode allows change of laser power settings easily, and all
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk
at once. However, this change will not change the initial value of
(partial).
SIM 61-3 (Laser power settings).
The laser power set in this Sim mode will be: Section
Initial value of Sim 61-3 x Initial value of Sim 61-14 (%) Operation/Procedure
1) Press a target item. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
Item Setting range Default
K/BW -2 Fine (80%) 0
-1 Slight fine (90%)
62-3
0 Normal (100%)
1 Slight thick (110%) Purpose Operation test/check
2 Thick (120%) Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk
C -2 Fine (80%) 0 (all areas).
-1 Slight fine (90%) Section
0 Normal (100%)
Operation/Procedure
1 Slight thick (110%)
2 Thick (120%) 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
M -2 Fine (80%) 0 2) Press [YES] key.
-1 Slight fine (90%) Read/write operations are performed.
0 Normal (100%)
1 Slight thick (110%)
2 Thick (120%)
62-6
Y -2 Fine (80%) 0
-1 Slight fine (90%) Purpose Operation test/check
0 Normal (100%) Function (Purpose) Used to perform the self diagnostics of the
1 Slight thick (110%) hard disk.
2 Thick (120%)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the self diagnosis area.
Same as [SYSTEM SETTINGS] -> [Image Quality Adjustment] -> 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
[Collective Adjustment] -> Black Letter/Black Line Width Adjust- The self diagnosis operation is performed.
ment
SHORT S.T Partial area diagnosis
EXTENDED S.T All area diagnosis

When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the

normal display.
Normal completion  "OK (RESULT:0)" is displayed.
Abnormal end  "NG (RESULT: Other than 0)" is displayed.
* If the simulation cannot be executed or terminated abnormally for
some reason, "ERROR" is displayed on the corresponding sec-
tion.

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 100

 When it is set to Enable, if a read error of HDD occurs in the system
62-7
data storage area (FAX/device cloning data, etc.), only the system
Purpose Operation test/check data storage area is cleared.
Function (Purpose) Used to print the hard disk self diagnosis
error log. A 0 Enable
1 Disable (Default)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
62-13
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display. Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (Operation
Manual, watermark data only)
62-8 Section
Purpose Data clear Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (HDD: 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Excluding the Operation Manual, the water- 2) Press [YES] key.
mark data, and the system area) The operation manual data are deleted.
Section When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
Operation/Procedure normal display.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
Used to execute the hard disk format. 62-14
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the Purpose Data clear
normal display. Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the database file.
* When the HDD formatting (except for the system area) is not Section HDD
completed normally, "HDD FORMAT (EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA)
Operation/Procedure
NG" is displayed.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
62-10 The database files are initialized.
Purpose Data clear At the same time, the job log data are also cleared.

Function (Purpose) Used to clear the job completion list data.

Section
62-20
Operation/Procedure
Purpose Operation test/check
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the mirror-
2) Press [YES] key.
ing hard disk.
Used to delete the job log data.
Section Mirroring hard disk
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
Operation/Procedure
normal display.
Enter the simulation mode, and the operation status of the HDD is
displayed.
The status display is renewed in every second.
62-11
Purpose Data clear Display Content description
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the document filing data. OK Normal operation
NONE Not connected
Section
REBUILDING Data rebuilding
Operation/Procedure ERROR Error occurrence
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. TROUBLE Trouble
2) Press [YES] key.
Used to delete the document filing data.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display.

62-12
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format
in a hard disk trouble.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Press [OK] key.
The set value is saved.

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 101

 [DSPF]
63 Display item Description Remarks
OC ANALOG Analog gain adjustment
63-1 GAIN ODD value (odd number)
ANALOG Analog gain adjustment
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check GAIN EVEN value (even number)
Function (Purpose) Used to display the shading correction DIGITAL Digital gain adjustment
result. GAIN ODD value (odd number)
DIGITAL Digital gain adjustment
Section Scanner
GAIN EVEN value (even number)
Operation/Procedure SMP AVE Reference plate
1) Select a target color to display with [R] [G] [B] on the touch ODD sampling average value
panel. (ODD)
SMP AVE Reference plate
[RSPF]
EVEN sampling average value
Display item Description Remarks (EVEN)
ANALOG Analog gain adjustment TARGET Target value
GAIN ODD value (odd number) BLACK Black output level
ANALOG Analog gain adjustment LEVEL
GAIN EVEN value (even number) ERROR Error code (0, 1 - 14) 0: No error
DIGITAL Digital gain adjustment CODE 1: STAGE1, Loop
GAIN ODD value (odd number) number over
DIGITAL Digital gain adjustment 2: STAGE2, The
GAIN EVEN value (even number) target value is
SMP AVE Reference plate sampling under the
ODD average value (ODD) specified value
SMP AVE Reference plate sampling 3: STAGE3, The
EVEN average value (EVEN) gain set value is
TARGET Target value negative.
BLACK Black output level 4: END is not
LEVEL asserted. (Gain
ERROR Error code (0, 1 - 14) 0: No error adjustment)
CODE 1: STAGE1, Loop number 5: STAGE2, Retry
over maximum
2: STAGE2, The target 6: STAGE2,
value is under the Underflow
specified value 7: Black shading
3: STAGE3, The gain set error
value is negative. 8: Other error
4: END is not asserted. 9: END is not
(Gain adjustment) asserted.
5: STAGE2, Retry (White shading)
maximum 10 END is not
6: STAGE2, Underflow : asserted. (Black
shading)
7: Black shading error
11 END is not
8: Other error
: asserted. (Light
9: END is not asserted.
quantity
(White shading)
correction)
10 END is not asserted.
12 END is not
: (Black shading)
: asserted.
11 END is not asserted.
13 Register check
: (Light quantity
: error (White
correction)
booting/Before
12 END is not asserted. gain)
:
14 Register check
13 Register check error : error (Before
: (White booting/Before light quantity
gain) correction)
14 Register check error DSPF BACK First scan DSPF back
: (Before light quantity WHITE surface white reference
correction) LEVEL 1ST level
RSPF BACK First scan RSPF back DSPF BACK Second scan DSPF
WHITE surface white reference WHITE back surface white
LEVEL 1ST level LEVEL 2ND reference level
RSPF BACK Second scan RSPF back
WHITE surface white reference
LEVEL 2ND level

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 102

 Display item Description Remarks 63-3
DSPF ANALOG Analog gain adjustment
GAIN ODD value (odd number) Purpose Adjustment
ANALOG Analog gain adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to perform scanner (CCD) color bal-
GAIN EVEN value (even number) ance and gamma auto adjustment.
DIGITAL Digital gain adjustment
Section Scanner
GAIN ODD value (odd number)
DIGITAL Digital gain adjustment Operation/Procedure
GAIN EVEN value (even number) For OC mode
ERROR Error code (0, 1 - 14) 0: No error 1) Place the scanner adjustment chart (UKOG-0356FCZZ) on the
CODE 1: STAGE1, Loop reference position of the left rear frame side of the document
number over table.
2: STAGE2, The
target value is
2) Select the color which needs to be adjusted. Then, press
under the [EXECUTE] key.
specified value The scanner (CCD) color balance automatic adjustment is per-
3: STAGE3, The formed.
gain set value is When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
negative.
normal display.
4: END is not
asserted. (Gain For DSPF mode
adjustment) 1) Place the scanner adjustment chart (UKOG-0356FCZZ) on the
5: STAGE2, Retry DSPF paper tray
maximum 2) Select the color which needs to be adjusted. Then, press
6: STAGE2, [EXECUTE] key.
Underflow
7: Black shading
The scanner (CCD) color balance automatic adjustment is per-
error formed.
8: Other error
9: END is not
asserted. 63-4
(White shading)
10 END is not
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
: asserted. (Black Function (Purpose) Used to display the SIT chart patch density.
shading)
Section
11 END is not
: asserted. (Light Operation/Procedure
quantity 1) Set the scanner adjustment chart (UKOG-0356FCZZ) to the
correction) reference position on the left rear frame side of the document
12 END is not table.
: asserted.
2) Select the color which needs to be adjusted. Then, press
13 Register check
[EXECUTE] key.
: error (White
booting/Before The patch of the SIT chart is scanned.
gain) When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to
14 Register check the normal display.
: error (Before
3) Select a data display mode.
light quantity
correction)
GAMMATHROUGH SIT chart scan data
DSPF BACK First scan DSPF back
COPY GAMMA Copy mode gamma process data of the SIT chart
WHITE surface white reference
scan data
LEVEL 1ST level
SCANNER GAMMA Image send mode gamma process data of the SIT
DSPF BACK Second scan DSPF
chart scan data
WHITE back surface white
LEVEL 2ND reference level SIT CHECK SIT chart scan data/Check result

Select an target display color with [R] [G] [B] keys.

63-2
Purpose Adjustment 63-5

Function (Purpose) Used to perform shading. Purpose Adjustment/Setup

Section Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color

balance and gamma default setting.
Operation/Procedure
Section
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Operation/Procedure
Used to perform shading.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display. 2) The scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma are set to the
When the DSPF is connected, the following items are displayed. default.

Display Contents
OC analog correction level correction or shading
OC SHADING
correction data creation (OC mode)
DSPF analog correction level correction or shading
DSPF SHADING
correction data creation (SPF mode)

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 103

 [RSPF]
63-8
Item/Display Contents
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
1 SIDE A(OC) Copy gamma correction 1 and color correction
coefficient Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the service target
2 TWAIN gamma correction 1 and color correction of the copy mode auto color balance adjust-
coefficient ment.
3 Auto adjustment gamma correction 1 and color Section
correction coefficient
Operation/Procedure
[DSPF] 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Item/Display Contents 2) Press [YES] key.
1 SIDE A(OC) Copy gamma correction 1 and color correction The service target of the copy mode automatic color balance
coefficient adjustment is set to the default.
2 TWAIN gamma correction 1 and color correction The service color balance target and the color balance target
coefficient for the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color
3 Auto adjustment gamma correction 1 and color
balance as the factory color balance target.
correction coefficient
1 SIDE B(DSPF) Copy gamma correction 1 and color correction
coefficient
2 TWAIN gamma correction 1 and color correction 63-11
coefficient Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the target color balance of the
copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
63-7 Section
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to register the service target of the 1) Select the target color balance with the touch panel.
copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
Default
Section Item/Display Content
value
Operation/Procedure TARGET DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment DEF 1
1) Press [SETUP] key on the touch panel. TBL target in the automatic color balance
operation is slightly shifted to Magenta.
2) Set the color balance adjustment pattern sheet printed with When this target is selected, the color
SIM46-21 on the document table. balance is converted into natural gray
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. color balance by the color table in an
actual copy mode and print is made.
The patch image of the adjustment pattern sheet is scanned.
DEF2 The engine color balance adjustment
4) Press [OK] key. target in the automatic color balance
The service target of the copy mode automatic color balance operation is slightly shifted to natural gray
adjustment is registered according to the patch image of the color balance. When this target is
scanned adjustment pattern sheet. selected, the color balance is slightly
shifted to Cyan by the color table in an
The registered color balance and the density are displayed.
actual copy mode and print is made.
Select a target color with [C] [M] [Y] [K] key. DEF3 The engine color balance adjustment
target in the automatic color balance
operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. When
this target is selected, the color balance is
This simulation is executed only when the copy color balance is
converted into the color balance with
manually adjusted. enhanced Cyan by the color table in an
actual copy mode and print is made.
B Point B target value
C Point C target value
D Point D target value
E Point E target value
F Point F target value
G Point G target value
H Point H target value
I Point I target value
J Point J target value
K Point K target value
L Point L target value
M Point M target value
N Point N target value
O Point O target value
P Point P target value
BASE Background sampling value

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 104

 Operation/Procedure
64 1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.
64-1 Set the print conditions with 10-key.
Purpose Operation test/check Select a target print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Color mode) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section The test print (self print) is performed.

Item/Display Content Setting range Default value

A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1 - 58 (Printable only 1, 2, 9 - 11, 17 - 19, 21, 1
(1, 2, 9 - 11, 17 - 19, 21, 22, 29) (* For details, refer to the description below.) 22, 29)
B DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A: 2,11) Setting of print dot number (M parameter) 1-255 1
(Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern 2, 11: 2-255 except above: 1-255)
C DOT2 (DOT2>=2 IF A: 2,11) Setting of blank dot number (N parameter) 0-255 254
(Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern2, 11: 2-255 except above: 0-255)
D DENSITY (FIXED "255" IF A: 9) Used to specify the print gradation. 1-255 255
(Pattern 9: 255 Fixed except above:1-255)
E MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
F EXPOSURE NONE Exposure mode No process (through) 1-8 1 8
(2 - 8 IF A: 17 - 19) TEXT/PRINTED specification Text/Printed Photo (Pattern 17-19: 2-8 2
PHOTO except above:1-8)
TEXT/PHOTO Text/ Photograph 3
TEXT Text 4
PHOTO Photograph 5
PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 6
MAP Map 7
STANDARD DITHER Dither without correction 8
G PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1
NO selection No 1
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 1-6 1 1
HEAVY Heavy paper 2
OHP OHP 3
ENVELOPE Envelope 4
HEAVY2 Heavy paper 2 5
GLOSSY Glossy paper 6
HEAVY3 Heavy paper 3 7
HEAVY4 Heavy paper 4 8

Print pattern of Item A

Pattern generating
Pattern No. Content NOTE
section
1 Grid pattern LSU-ASIC * When the print width is 100 or more and all colors are selected, print is made in the
three colors (CMY).
* Print is started at 4mm from the paper lead edge.
* Writing regardless of pound. The first one is fixed to LD1.
2 Dot print -
9 Each color 10% area (A4/ * Each interval is 41.86mm (989dot).
A4R) density print * If m is not in the range of 1 - 13%, it is rounded.
* K print is started at 17mm from the paper lead edge.
10 8-color belt print
11 4-color dot print (sub scan) * For every 1/4 of the sub scanning direction paper size, print is made for each color.
* When N=0, print of all the background is made in 4 colors.
17 All background (halftone) Halftone * When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY.
18 256 gradations pattern (IMG-ASIC rear * When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY.
(Other dither) process) * 16 gradations are printed in the main scanning direction, and feedback is made, and
the next 16 gradations are printed. (16 x 16 patch print)
* Print is started at 5mm from the paper lead edge.
* Print is made from 255 gradations, and 0-254 gradations are printed.
19 256 gradations pattern * Print is made from 255 gradations, and 0-254 gradations are printed.
(For text dither)
21 4-point dot print (main LSU-ASIC * For every 1/4 of the main scanning direction paper size, print is made for each color.
scan) * When N=0, print of all the background is made in 4 colors.
22 Slant line LSU-ASIC
29 Dot print 1200dpi LSU-ASIC * M=1(Fixed), N=1or3

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 105

64-2
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.
Set the print conditions with 10-key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The test print (self print) is performed.

Item/Display Content Setting range Default value

A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 1 - 58 1
(1, 2, 9 - 11, 17 - 19, 21, 22, 29) (* For details, refer to the description below.) (Printable only 1, 2, 9 - 11, 17 - 19, 21, 22,
29)
B DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A: 2,11) Setting of print dot number (M parameter) 1-255 1
(Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern 2, 11: 2-255 except above: 1-255)
C DOT2 (DOT2>=2 IF A: 2,11) Setting of blank dot number 0-255 254
(N parameter) (Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern2, 11: 2-255 except above: 0-255)
D DENSITY (FIXED "255" IF A: 9) Used to specify the print gradation. 1-255 255
(Pattern 9: 255 Fixed except above:1-255)
E MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
F EXPOSURE NONE Exposure mode No process (through) 1-8 1 8
(2 - 8 IF A: 17 - 19) TEXT/PRINTED specification Text/Printed Photo (Pattern 17-19: 2-8 2
PHOTO except above: 1-8)
TEXT/PHOTO Text/ Photograph 3
TEXT Text 4
PHOTO Photograph 5
PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 6
MAP Map 7
STANDARD DITHER Dither without correction 8
G PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1
NO selection No 1
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 1-6 1 1
HEAVY Heavy paper 2
OHP OHP 3
ENVELOPE Envelope 4
HEAVY2 Heavy paper 2 5
GLOSSY Glossy paper 6
HEAVY3 Heavy paper 3 7
HEAVY4 Heavy paper 4 8

Print pattern of Item A

Pattern generating
Pattern No. Content NOTE
section
1 Grid pattern LSU-ASIC * When the print width is 100 or more and all colors are selected, print is made in the
three colors (CMY).
* Print is started at 4mm from the paper lead edge.
* Writing regardless of pound. The first one is fixed to LD1.
2 Dot print –
9 Each color 10% area (A4/ * Each interval is 41.86mm (989dot).
A4R) density print * If m is not in the range of 1 - 13%, it is rounded.
* K print is started at 17mm from the paper lead edge.
10 8-color belt print
11 4-color dot print (sub scan) * For every 1/4 of the sub scanning direction paper size, print is made for each color.
* When N=0, print of all the background is made in 4 colors.
17 All background (halftone) Halftone (IMG-ASIC –
18 256 gradations pattern rear process) –
(Other dither)
19 256 gradations pattern –
(For text dither)
21 4-point dot print (main LSU-ASIC * For every 1/4 of the main scanning direction paper size, print is made for each color.
scan) * When N=0, print of all the background is made in 4 colors.
22 Slant line LSU-ASIC
29 Dot print 1200dpi LSU-ASIC * M=1(Fixed), N=1or3

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 106

64-4
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.
Set the print conditions with 10-key.
Select a target print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) The test print (self print) is performed.

Item/Display Content Setting range Default value

A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1-6 6
(* For details, refer to the description below.)
B DENSITY Used to specify the print gradation. 1 - 255 128
C MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray selection Manual paper feed 1 2
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E HALFTONE LOW Halftone Low line number 0 0
HIGH High line number 1
F QUALITY STANDARD Image quality setting 600dpi 0 1
HIGHQUALITY 600dpi (High Quality) 1
FINE 1200dpi 2
G DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of dither Straight 0 1
CALIB correction Calibration 1
H PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Plain paper 0 0
HEAVY Heavy paper 1
HEAVY2 Heavy paper 2 2
GLOSSY Glossy paper 3
HEAVY3 Heavy paper 3 4
HEAVY4 Heavy paper 4 5

Print pattern of Item A

Pattern No. Content
1 256 gradations pattern (COLOR)
2 256 gradations pattern (B/W)
3 256 gradations pattern (COLOR) (Y-M-C-K continuous)
4 Halftone pattern (COLOR)
5 Halftone pattern (B/W)
6 Background dot print

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 107

 Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.
64-5
Set the print conditions with 10-key.
Purpose Operation test/check
Select a target print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section The test print (self print) is performed.
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.

Item/Display Content Setting range Default value

A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 1-5 3
B DENSITY Print gradation specification 1 - 255 255
C MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray Manual paper feed 1 2
CS1 selection Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E HALFTONE LOW(IMAGE) Halftone For Photo 0 2
HIGH(TEXT) For text 1
AUTO Auto (for photo/text) 2
F QUALITY STANDARD Image quality setting 600dpi 0 1
HIGHQUALITY 600dpi (High Quality) 1
FINE 1200dpi 2
G DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of dither Straight 0 1
CALIB correction Calibration 1
H PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0 0
HEAVY Heavy paper 1
HEAVY2 Heavy paper 2 2
GLOSSY Glossy paper 3
HEAVY3 Heavy paper 3 4
HEAVY4 Heavy paper 4 5
I INTENT PERCEPTUAL Rendering indent Perceptual 0 0
COLORIMETRIC Color metric 1
SATURATION Saturation 2
J OUTPUT PROFILE SHARP Output profile Standard 0 0
STANDARD Photo image 1
GRAPHICS Graphics 2
K RGB SOURCE SRGB RGB source profile SRGB 0 0
PROFILE GAMMA1.6 Gamma 1.6 1
GAMMA1.8 Gamma 1.8 2
GAMMA2.0 Gamma 2.0 3
GAMMA2.6 Gamma 2.6 4
GAMMA3.0 Gamma 3.0 5
TONER SAVE TONER SAVE 6
L GRAY COMPENSATION K Gray print method K only 0 0
KCMY KCMY 1
M PURE BLACK PRINT ON Black monochrome set. 0 0
OFF print not set. 1
N TONER SAVE MODE OFF Monochrome toner not set. 0 0
ON save set. 1

Print pattern of Item A

Pattern No. Content
1 COLOR
2 B/W
3 Continuous COLOR,B/W
4 Service chart (COLOR)
5 Service chart (B/W)

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 108

64-6
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.
Set the print conditions with 10-key.
Select a print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The test print (self print) is performed.

Item/Display Content Setting range Default value

A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 1-2 1
B DENSITY Print gradation specification 1 - 255 255
C MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray Manual paper feed 1 2
CS1 selection Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E HALFTONE LOW(IMAGE) Halftone For Photo 0 2
HIGH(TEXT) For text 1
AUTO Auto (for photo/text) 2
F QUALITY STANDARD Image quality setting 600dpi 0 1
HIGHQUALITY 600dpi (High Quality) 1
FINE 1200dpi 2
G DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of dither Straight 0 1
CALIB correction Calibration 1
H PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0 0
HEAVY Heavy paper 1
HEAVY2 Heavy paper 2 2
GLOSSY Glossy paper 3
HEAVY3 Heavy paper 3 4
HEAVY4 Heavy paper 4 4
I INTENT PERCEPTUAL Rendering indent Perceptual 0 0
COLORIMETRIC Color metric 1
SATURATION Saturation 2
J OUTPUT PROFILE SHARP Output profile Standard 0 0
STANDARD Photo image 1
GRAPHICS Graphics 2
K RGB SOURCE SRGB RGB source profile SRGB 0 0
PROFILE GAMMA1.6 Gamma 1.6 1
GAMMA1.8 Gamma 1.8 2
GAMMA2.0 Gamma 2.0 3
GAMMA2.6 Gamma 2.6 4
GAMMA3.0 Gamma 3.0 5
TONER SAVE TONER SAVE 6
L GRAY COMPENSATION K Gray print method K only 0 0
KCMY KCMY 1
M PURE BLACK PRINT ON Black monochrome set. 0 1
OFF print not set. 1
N TONER SAVE MODE OFF Monochrome toner not set. 0 0
ON save set. 1
O CMY SIMULATION OFF CMYK simulation OFF 0 0
SWOP SWOP 1
EURO EURO 2
JAPAN COLOR JAPAN COLOR 3
TONER SAVE TONER SAVE 4

Print pattern of Item A

Pattern No. Content
1 COLOR
2 B/W

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 109

 65 66
65-1 66-1
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD dis- Function (Purpose) Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (2
play section) detection coordinates. - 150) on the LCD to allow changing the
Section Operation panel section soft SW while checking with the LCD.
Operation/Procedure Section FAX
Touch the center of the cross mark at the four corners of the Operation/Procedure
screen. 1) Enter the [SW NO] with 10-key.
When the adjustment is completed normally, the screen shifts to * When [C] key is pressed, the entered value of [SW NO] is
the simulation sub number entry menu. cleared.
In case of an error, the screen returns to the adjustment menu. 2) Press [DATA] button.
The soft SW data entered in procedure 1) is displayed.
* When [SW NO] button is pressed, the display returns to the
initial screen.
3) Enter the number corresponding to the bit to be changed with
10-key.
* [1] -> [0]
[0] -> [1]
4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
setting is saved.
After saving the setting, [EXECUTE] button returns to the nor-
mal display.

65-2
Purpose Operation check/test 66-2
Function (Purpose) Used to display the touch panel (LCD dis- Purpose Setting
play section) detection coordinates. Function (Purpose) Used to enter a country code and set the
Section default value for the country code.
Operation/Procedure Section FAX
Touch the touch panel. Operation/Procedure
The coordinates X (horizontal direction) and Y (vertical direction) of 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-02, the following
the touched position is displayed in real time. screen is displayed.
* When [DEST CODE] button is pressed, the display is shifted
to the country code list screen.
* The currently set country code is displayed in the column of
"PRESENT:".
2) Enter the country code (8 digits) with 10-key([0]/[1]). The
entered country code is displayed in the column of "NEW:" and
[SET] key becomes active.
* When [CLEAR] key is pressed, the column of “NEW:” is
cleared.
3) When [SET] button is pressed after entering the country code,
[EXECUTE] button becomes active. The country code is dis-
played in the column of "PRESENT:", and the column of
"NEW:" is cleared.
4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and
65-5 [YES] and [NO] buttons become active. The country name is
Purpose Operation check/test displayed on the tile line.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation panel key 5) When [YES] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the soft SW
input. corresponding to the country code is initialized.
Section 6) After completion of initialization of the soft SW, [EXECUTE],
[YES], and [NO] buttons become inactive.
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure (Shifting to the country page)
Press [HOME] key.
* When [DEST CODE] button is pressed on the initial screen, the
If the key entry is effective, the guidance for pressing the next key
display is shifted to the country code list screen.
is displayed. When all the key entries are completed, "COMPLETE"
is displayed. Use scroll keys to select the country select page.
<Check target key> <Country code list>
JAPAN 00000000
10 Inch LCD model
U.S.A. 10110101
HOME
AUSTRALIA 00001001
U.K. 10110100

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 110

 FRANCE 00111101 Check memory item Remark
GERMANY 00000100 4 MODEM SDRAM <1> (once) Check only once in LINE1
SWEDEN 10100101 5 MODEM SDRAM<1>(repeat) Repeat check in LINE1
NEWZEALAND 01111110
CHINA 00100110
SINGAPORE 10011100
TW 11111110 66-4
MIDDLEANDNEAREAST 11111101 Purpose Operation test/Check
SLOVAKIA 11111100 Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signals to the
OTHER3 11111011 line and the main unit speaker. (Send level:
FINLAND 00111100 max.)
NORWAY 10000010
DENMARK 00110001
Section FAX
NETHERLANDS 01111011 Operation/Procedure
ITALY 01011001 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-04, the screen on the
SWITZERLAND 10100110 right is displayed. (Default, left upper selected.)
AUSTRIA 00001010 * Use scroll keys to switch the send mode select page.
INDONESIA 01010100
2) When a button of a signal to be sent is selected, it is high-
THAILAND 10101001
lighted and the previously set button is shifted to the normal
MALAYSIA 01101100
display.
INDIA 01010011
PHILIPPINES 10001001
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
HONGKONG 01010000
nals are sent.
RUSSIA 10111000 4) To end signal send:
SOUTHAFRICA 10011111 When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
SPAIN 10100000 nal send is interrupted.
PORTUGUESE 10001011 <Signal send table>
LUXEMBURG 01101001
BELGIUM 00001111 NOSIGNAL 33.6 V34 31.2 V34 28.8 V34
CZECH 00101110 26.4 V34 24.0 V34 21.6 V34 19.2 V34
HUNGARY 01010001 16.8 V34 14.4 V34 12.0 V34 9.6 V34
GREECE 01000110 7.2 V34 4.8 V34 2.4 V34 14.4 V33
POLAND 10001010 12.0 V33 14.4 V17 12.0 V17 9.6 V17
BRAZIL 00010110 7.2 V17 9.6 V29 7.2 V29 4.8 V27t
KOREA 01100001 2.4 V27t 0.3 FLG CED 2100 CNG 1100
VIETNAM 10111100 0.3 V21 ANSam RINGER No RBT

DP MAKE DP BRK NO MSG Volt/mA

66-3
Purpose Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the EEPROM 66-5
and the SDRAM on the MODEM controller Purpose Operation test/Check
and display the result.
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signal to the line
Section FAX and the main unit speaker. (Send level: Soft
Operation/Procedure SW setting) (For the kinds of send signals,
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-03, the following refer to SIM66-04.)
screen is displayed. Section FAX
* Select the page of memory check item with the scroll key. Operation/Procedure
2) When the memory check item button is selected, the display is 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-05, the item selection
shifted to the memory check screen. screen is displayed.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the * Use scroll keys to switch the send mode select page.
memory check of the selected item is started. 2) When a button of a signal to be sent is selected, it is high-
4) After completion of memory check, [EXECUTE] button returns lighted and the previously set button is shifted to the normal
to the normal display and the result of memory check is dis- display.
played. 3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
Memory check status nals are sent.
NO CHECK No check
4) To end signal send:
CHECKING During checking * When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and
OK Check complete OK signal send is interrupted.
NG A## Check complete NG Error occurring address or data
line is displayed for each item.

Check item
Check memory item Remark
1 All Memory Device Check (once) All the items are checked
once.
2 MODEM EEPROM <1> (once) Check only once in LINE1
3 MODEM EEPROM <1> (repeat) Repeat check in LINE1

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 111

 2) When a button of a sound message to be sent is selected, it is
66-6
highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal
Purpose Data output/Check display.
Function (Purpose) Used to print the confidential registration 3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and a
check table (BOX NO., BOX name, pass- sound message is sent.
code. (If there is no confidential registra- 4) To end signal send:
tion, no print is made.)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
Section FAX nal send is interrupted.
Operation/Procedure
1) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
confidential checkable is printed. 66-10
* If there is no confidential registration, no print is made even Purpose Data clear
though [EXECUTE] key is pressed.
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX and image send
2) After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the image data. (The confidential data and
normal display. redial data are also cleared)
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
66-7
1) Press [EXECUTE] button.
Purpose Data output/Check
2) Press [YES] button.
Function (Purpose) Used to output all image data saved in the
image memory. (Confidential data are also
outputted.)
66-11
Section FAX
Purpose Operation test/Check
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signal at 300bps
1) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and all
to the line and the speaker. (Send level:
image data saved in the image memory are outputted.
Max.)
2) After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
Section FAX
normal display.
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-11, the item selection
66-8 screen is displayed.
2) When a button of a sound message to be sent is selected, it is
Purpose Operation test/Check
highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected sound mes- display.
sages to the line and the speaker. (Send
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and a
level: Max.)
sound message is sent.
Section FAX 4) To end signal send:
Operation/Procedure When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-08, the item selection nal send is interrupted.
screen is displayed.
<300bps send signal table>
2) When the sound message button to be sent is selected, it is
highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal NO SIGNAL 11111 11110 00000
display. 010101 00001

<Sound message table>

NONE (Mute) PAUSE (Pause MESSAGE1 MESSAGE2
melody) (Message 1) (Message 2) 66-12
MESSAGE3 MESSAGE4 MESSAGE5 MESSAGE6 Purpose Operation test/Check
(Message 3) (Message 4) (Massage 5) (Message 6)
ALARM (Alarm) RINGER EXT.TEL.RING Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signal at 300bps
(Ringing sound ER (External to the line and the speaker. (Send level:
(Speaker)) telephone call) Soft SW setting)
* For the kings of send signals at 300bps,
refer to SIM66-11, 300bps send signal
table.
66-9 Section FAX
Purpose Operation test/Check Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected sound message 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-12, the item selection
to the line and the speaker. (Send level: screen is displayed.
Soft SW setting) 2) When a button of a sound message to be sent is selected, it is
* For details of sound messages, refer to highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal
the sound message table of SIM66-08. display.
Section FAX 3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and a
Operation/Procedure sound message is sent.
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-09, the item selection 4) To end signal send:
screen is displayed. When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
nal send is interrupted.

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 112

 3) To terminate the dial test, press [EXECUTE] button. The button
returns to the normal display and the test is terminated.
66-13
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to register dial numbers for SIM66- 66-17
14/15/16, Dial test. (Up to 20 digits can be Purpose Operation test/Check
registered.) Function (Purpose) Used to send the DTMF signal to the line
Section FAX and the speaker. (Send level: Max.)
Operation/Procedure Section FAX
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-13, the number input Operation/Procedure
screen is displayed. 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-17, the number selec-
* The number saved in the memory is displayed in the column tion screen is displayed.
of [PRESENT:]. (If there is no data, [-------] is displayed.) 2) When a button of a send signal is selected, it is highlighted and
2) Enter a number with 10-key. the previously set button returns to the normal display.
The entered number is displayed in the column of [NEW:]. 3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
After entering 20 digits, 10-key is disabled (no response). Only nals are sent.
[C] key is enabled. (10-key [0] to [9], [*], [#], [C] key (back by 4) To stop signal sending:
one digit)) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it returns to the normal
3) When [SET] key is pressed after completion of entry, the display and signal sending is interrupted.
entered number is displayed (registered) in the column of
[PRESENT:]. The column of [NEW:] becomes blank.
66-18
Purpose Operation test/Check
66-14
Function (Purpose) Used to send the DTMF signal to the line
Purpose Adjustment and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW set-
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the dial pulse (10PPS) ting)
send test and to adjust the make time. Section FAX
Section FAX Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-18, the number selec-
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-14, the adjustment tion screen is displayed.
item screen is displayed. 2) When a button of a send signal is selected, it is highlighted and
2) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the the previously set button returns to the normal display.
dial pulse is sent from the line in the set make time. 3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
3) To end the dial test, press [EXECUTE] button again. The but- nals are sent.
ton returns to the normal display and the test is terminated. 4) To stop signal sending:
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it returns to the normal
display and signal sending is interrupted.
66-15
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the dial pulse (20PPS) 66-21
send test and to adjust the make time. Purpose Check
Section FAX Function (Purpose) Used to print the selected items (system
Operation/Procedure error, protocol monitor).
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-15, the adjustment Section FAX
item screen is displayed. Operation/Procedure
2) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the 1) When an item button to be printed is selected, it is highlighted
dial pulse is sent from the line in the set make time. and the previously set button returns to the normal display.
* The dial pulse in this example is up to 20 digits registered 2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
with SIM66-13.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and printing is started.
3) To end the dial test, press [EXECUTE] button again. The but-
3) After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
ton returns to the normal display and the test is terminated. normal display.
<FAX information print content table>
66-16 PROTOCOL LINE 1 SYSTEM ERROR LINE 1

Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the DTFM signal send test
and to adjust the send level.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-16, the item selection
screen is displayed.
2) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
dial pulse signal is sent from the line by the setting of high/low
group of the signal send level.

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 113

66-22 66-31
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the handset sound volume. Function (Purpose) Used to set ON/OFF the port for output to
(This simulation can be executed even TEL/LIU.
though the handset setting is set to NO. Section FAX
When, however, the handset is not
Operation/Procedure
installed, the sound volume cannot be
checked.) (Japan model only) 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-31, the item selection
screen is displayed.
Section FAX
2) Change the port setting.
Operation/Procedure
When a port is set to ON, the port display is highlighted.
1) When the machine enters the simulation, the number of the set
sound volume is displayed. (In this example, MIDDLE is set as 3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the changed setting is
reflected to the port which outputs to TEL/LIU.
the default sound volume.)
4) To terminate the process, press [EXECUTE] button again.
2) Use 10-key to set the handset sound volume. (0: MIN 1:MID-
[EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display.
DLE 2:MAX)
3) Press [EXECUTE] button to deliver the selected on-hold tone. <Port which outputs to TEL/LIU>
* If, however, the handset is not installed, the sound volume CION S. 150Von
cannot be checked. Execution is possible.
4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and deliv-
ery of the on-hold tone is stopped.
66-32
Purpose Operation test/Check
66-29 Function (Purpose) Used to check the fixed data received from
Purpose Clear the line and to display the result.

Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the telephone book data Section FAX
(the one-touch registration table, the FTP/ Operation/Procedure
Desktop expansion table, the group expan- 1) Press [EXECUTE] button to check the fixed data received from
sion table, the program registration table, the line. At that time, [EXECUTE] button is highlighted.
the interface memory box table, the meta * Fixed data check procedure
data, InboundRouting, and the Documen-
* The data received from the line is checked of the following
tAdmin table).
fixed data status for minutes, then if they are in accord with
Section FAX “OK” is displayed on LCD, if not “NG” is displayed.
Operation/Procedure * The judgment is made in 2 minutes.
1) Press [EXECUTE] button. Receive speed: 300BPS
2) Press [YES] button. Receive data: 00H
The telephone book data area cleared. Judgment data: 100byte
3) After completion of memory clear, [EXECUTE] button returns 2) After completion of check, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
to the normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out. normal display. The result is displayed as "OK" or "NG."

66-30 66-33
Purpose Operation test/Check Purpose Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) Used to display the TEL/LIU status change, Function (Purpose) Used to execute detection of various sig-
The display is highlighted by status change. nals with the line connected and to display
Section FAX the detection result. When a signal is
Operation/Procedure detected, the display is highlighted.
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-30, the item selection Section FAX
screen is displayed. Operation/Procedure
2) RGDT, RHS, EXHS and SiDAA are highlighted when the sig- 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-33, the item selection
nal is detected, and displayed normally when the signal is not screen is displayed.
detected. 2) The signal to be checked can be selected from the two
<TEL/LIU status change item description> options: "FNET" and "BT/CNG/CED/DTMF."
3) When a signal is detected, "FNET" and "BUSY TONE CNG
RGDT Telephone line voltage
CED DTMF" are highlighted. When a signal is not detected,
RHS Handset hook SW
they are normally displayed.
EXHS External telephone hook SW
SiDAA Polarity inversion signal <Signal used for signal detection check>
(When "FNET" is selected)
FNET

(When "BT/CNG/CED/DTMF" is selected)

BUSY TONE CNG CED DTMF

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 114

66-36 66-43
Purpose Operation test/Check Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to check send and receive data from Function (Purpose) Used to write the adjustment value into the
the MODEM controller to the MFP control- power control installed in the FAX BOX.
ler or the data line or the command line Section FAX
individually.
Operation/Procedure
Section FAX
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-43, the item selection
Operation/Procedure screen is displayed.
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-36, the item selection * Use scroll keys to select the select item of the power control
screen is displayed. adjustment value.
2) Operation check 2) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and writing
Select an item to be checked on the screen. to the power control is executed. When writing is normally
<MFP controller I/F check item table> completed, "OK" is displayed. When it is failed, "NG" is dis-
played.
MFP <- MDMC (DATA once) MFP -> MDMC (DATA once)
3) After completion of writing, [EXECUTE] key returns to the nor-
Data line Once Data line Once
mal display.
MFP <- MDMC (DATA repeat) MFP -> MDMC (DATA repeat)
Data line Repeat Data line Repeat <Set range and default value of each set value>
MFP <- MDMC (CMD once) MFP -> MDMC (CMD once)
Item Set range Default value
Command line Once Command line Once
A CI_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 15 6
MFP <- MDMC (CMD repeat) MFP -> MDMC (CMD repeat)
B CI_CYCLE_MIN 1 to 254 10
Command line Repeat Command line Repeat
C CI_CYCLE_MAX 2 to 255 142
D CI_COUNT 2 to 15 3
E RES_3.3V_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 15 15
66-39 F EXHS_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 225 240
G RHS_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 15 2
Purpose Setting H SON_TIMEOUT 1 to 127 20
Function (Purpose) Used to check and change the destination
setting saved in EEPROM of the FAX BOX.
Section FAX
66-61
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters the simulation, the currently set des- Purpose Setting
tination button is highlighted. (In the default state, JAPAN is set Function (Purpose) Used to display the FAX-related soft SW
as the destination.) (151 - 250) on the LCD to allow changing
2) Select a destination button to set the destination. The selected the soft SW while checking with the LCD.
button is highlighted and the previously selected button returns Section FAX
to the normal display. Operation/Procedure
* When the destination button is changed, the new destination 1) Enter the [SW NO] with 10-key.
setting is saved to EEPROM of the FAX BOX.
2) Press [DATA] button.
<Destination setting table> The soft SW data entered in procedure 1) is displayed.
JAPAN U.S.A/CANADA EUROPE AUSTRALIA 3) Enter the number corresponding to the bit to be changed with
CHINA ASIA&OTHERS 10-key.
* [1] -> [0]
[0] -> [1]
66-42 4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
setting is saved.
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to rewrite the program to power con-
trol installed in the FAX BOX.
66-62
Section FAX
Purpose Backup
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to import the FAX receive data into a
1) Press [EXECUTE] button.[EXECUTE] button is highlighted USB flash drive in PDF file type.
and YES] and [NO] buttons become active.
Section FAX
2) Press [YES] button.
Operation/Procedure
The power control program is rewritten.
1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
3) When rewriting of the power control program is normally com-
pleted, "OK" is displayed and [EXECUTE] button returns to the 2) Select data to be imported.
normal display, and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out. 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Execute import of data selected in procedure 2).
When the operation is completed normally, [COMPLETE] is
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, [ERROR] is displayed.

Error display Content

Error: No USB memory device No USB flash drive installed
Error: No image data No image data
Error Other errors

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 115

 Item/Display Setting range Default value
67 L POINT12 1 - 999 500
M POINT13 1 - 999 500
N POINT14 1 - 999 500
67-17
O POINT15 1 - 999 500
Purpose Reset P POINT16 1 - 999 500
Function (Purpose) Printer controller reset/Default value setting Q POINT17 1 - 999 500
Section Printer
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. 67-26
2) Press [YES] key. Purpose Adjustment/Setup
The set data related to the printer controller are initialized.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the target color balance of the
(Including the NIC setting.)
printer mode auto color balance adjust-
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the ment.
normal display.
Section Printer
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the target color balance with the touch panel.
67-24
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Default
Item/Display Content
Function (Purpose) Printer color balance adjustment (Auto value
adjustment) Target DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment DEF 1
value target in the automatic color balance
Section Printer table operation is slightly shifted to Magenta.
Operation/Procedure select When this target is selected, the color
balance is converted into natural gray
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
color balance by the color table in an
The 48 color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. actual printer mode and print is made.
2) Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table, DEF2 The engine color balance adjustment
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode. target in the automatic color balance
operation is slightly shifted to natural gray
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
color balance. When this target is
The printer color balance auto adjustment is performed, and selected, the color balance is slightly
the adjustment result is printed. shifted to Cyan by the color table in an
4) Press [OK] key. actual printer mode and print is made.
Target DEF3 The engine color balance adjustment DEF 1
The halftone correction target registration is processed.
value target in the automatic color balance
table operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. When
select this target is selected, the color balance is
67-25 converted into the color balance with
enhanced Cyan by the color table in an
Purpose Adjustment/Setup actual printer mode and print is made.
Function (Purpose) Printer color balance adjustment (Manual
adjustment)
Section Printer
67-27
Operation/Procedure
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
1) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the
touch panel. Function (Purpose) Used to set the service target of the printer
mode auto color balance adjustment.
2) Select a target adjustment density level on the touch panel.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. Section Printer
* When the rs key is pressed, the setting value of each item Operation/Procedure
can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. 1) Press [SETUP] key on the touch panel.
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) 2) Place the printed color balance adjustment pattern sheet
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is printed in SIM 67-25 on the document table.
increased, and vice versa. 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in The patch image of the adjustment pattern sheet is scanned.
the color balance and density corresponding to the adjustment 4) Press [OK] key.
value. The service target of the printer mode auto color balance
adjustment is set according to the scanned adjustment pattern
Item/Display Setting range Default value
sheet patch images.
A POINT1 1 - 999 500
B POINT2 1 - 999 500
The registered color balance and the density are displayed.
C POINT3 1 - 999 500 Select a target color with [C] [M] [Y] [K] key.
D POINT4 1 - 999 500
E POINT5 1 - 999 500
F POINT6 1 - 999 500 This simulation is executed only when the printer color balance is
G POINT7 1 - 999 500 manually adjusted.
H POINT8 1 - 999 500
I POINT9 1 - 999 500 B Point B target value
J POINT10 1 - 999 500 C Point C target value
K POINT11 1 - 999 500 D Point D target value

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 116

 E Point E target value Setting Default
Item/Display Content
F Point F target value range value
G Point G target value E POINT5 Point 5 0 - 255 128
H Point H target value F POINT6 Point 6 0 - 255 128
I Point I target value G POINT7 Point 7 0 - 255 128
J Point J target value H POINT8 Point 8 0 - 255 128
K Point K target value I POINT9 Point 9 0 - 255 128
L Point L target value J POINT10 Point 10 0 - 255 128
M Point M target value K POINT11 Point 11 0 - 255 128
N Point N target value L POINT12 Point 12 0 - 255 128
O Point O target value M POINT13 Point 13 0 - 255 128
P Point P target value N POINT14 Point 14 0 - 255 128
BASE Background sampling value O POINT15 Point 15 0 - 255 128
P POINT16 Point 16 0 - 255 128
Q POINT17 Point 17 0 - 255 128

67-28 Display Content Button

Purpose Adjustment/Setup HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper CMYK
Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the service target SCREEN1 600dpi 1bit Photo
of the printer mode auto color balance SCREEN2 600dpi 1 bit Graphics
adjustment. SCREEN3 600dpi 4 bit Photo
SCREEN4 600dpi 4 bit Graphics
Section Printer
SCREEN5 1200dpi 1bit Photo
Operation/Procedure SCREEN6 1200dpi 1bit Graphics
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. SCREEN7 B/W 600dpi 1bit Photo K
2) Press [YES] key. SCREEN8 B/W 600dpi 4bit Photo
The service target of the printer mode auto color balance SCREEN9 B/W 1200dpi 1bit Photo
adjustment is set to the default. SCREEN11 B/W 600dpi 1bit Graphics
SCREEN12 B/W 600dpi 4bit Graphics
The service color balance target and the color balance target
SCREEN13 B/W 1200dpi 1bit Graphics
for the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color
SCREEN14 DotScreen1 CMYK
balance as the factory color balance target.
SCREEN15 DotScreen2
SCREEN16 DotScreen1_BW K
SCREEN17 DotScreen2_BW
67-31 SCREEN18 SHIGH CMYK
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the printer calibration value.
Section Printer 67-34
Operation/Procedure Purpose Adjustment/Setup
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction in the
2) Press [YES] key. printer high density section. (Support for
The printer calibration data (Halftone correction data) are the high density section tone gap)
cleared. Section Printer
(The printer color balance correction is canceled.) Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.

67-33 0 Enable
Purpose Adjustment/Setup 1 Disable

Function (Purpose) Used to change the gamma of the printer 2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
screen with different dither.
Setting Default
Section Printer Item/Display Content
range value
Operation/Procedure A CMY 0 CMY engine highest 0-1 0
1) Select a target change color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key on the (0: ENABLE density correction
touch panel. 1: DISABLE) mode: Enable
2) Select a target screen with [SCREEN] key. 1 CMY engine highest
density correction
3) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key. mode: Disable
4) Enter the set value with 10-key. B K 0 K engine highest 0-1 1
5) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) (0: ENABLE density correction
1: DISABLE) mode: Enable
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in
1 K engine highest
the color balance and density corresponding to the adjustment density correction
value. mode: Disable
C CYAN MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
Setting Default
Item/Display Content TARGET CYAN maximum density
range value
correction
A POINT1 Point 1 0 - 255 128 D MAGENTA Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
B POINT2 Point 2 0 - 255 128 MAX TARGET MAGENTA maximum density
C POINT3 Point 3 0 - 255 128 correction
D POINT4 Point 4 0 - 255 128

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 117

 Setting Default 67-42
Item/Display Content
range value
E YELLOW MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 Purpose Adjustment
TARGET YELLOW maximum density Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gradation by increasing /
correction decreasing the selected color component
F BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 amount or the black color component
TARGET BLACK maximum density amount in the black and white mode.
correction
G PRINTER Printer total toner limitation 0-3 0 Section Printer
TOTAL TONAR setup Operation/Procedure
LIMIT SETUP 1) Select Mode1 or Mode2.
* When tone gap is generated in the high density section, set items 2) Select an item to be set.
A and B to "0."
The density in the high density section is decreased, but tone Mode
Item/Display Content
Default
gap is reduced. value
MODE Black F1 Black : Light F2
* To increase the density in the high density section further, set
1 (Achromatic F2 Black : Normal
items A and B to "1. color) F3 Black : Dark
The tone gap may occur in high density part. COLOR G1 Selected color : Light G2
(Selected color) G2 Selected color : Normal
G3 Selected color : Dark
Do not change the values of items C, D, E, and F. If these values MODE Black F1 Black : Light F2
are changed, the density in the high density area is changed. 2 (Achromatic F2 Black : Normal
color) F3 Black : Dark
COLOR G1 Selected color : Light G2
(Selected color) G2 Selected color : Normal
67-36
G3 Selected color : Dark
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the low den-
sity section.
67-43
Section Printer
Purpose Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a set value with the scroll key. Function (Purpose) 2 Color mode balance adjustment
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. Section Printer
3) Press [OK] key. Operation/Procedure
When the adjustment value is increased, the low density images 1) Select an adjustment item with the scroll key.
are strongly reduced. When the adjustment value is decreased, the 2) Enter the set value with 10-keys.
low density are images are weakly reproduced. 3) Press [OK] key.
When tone gap is generated in the low density section (highlight
section), changing this adjustment value may improve the trouble. Setting Default value
Item/Display Content Color range C M Y
Setting Default
Item/Display Content A RED R output CMY 0 - 255 0 235 224
range value
A A PATCH INPUT C A patch input value C color
B A PATCH INPUT M A patch input value M B GREEN G output CMY 0 - 255 180 0 241
C A PATCH INPUT Y A patch input value Y color
D A PATCH INPUT K A patch input value K 0 - 13 1 C BLUE B output CMY 0 - 255 235 159 0
color
D CYAN C output CMY 0 - 255 182 0 25
color
E MAGENTA M output CMY 0 - 255 0 271 0
67-41
color
Purpose Adjustment/Setup F YELLOW Y output CMY 0 - 255 0 0 234
Function (Purpose) Used to set the threshold for judging the color
selected color printing or the black color
printing in the black and white mode.
Section Printer 67-52
Operation/Procedure
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
1) Select a set value with the scroll key.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the gamma of the
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. printer screen.
3) Press [OK] key.
Section Printer
Setting Default Operation/Procedure
Item/Display Content
range value 1) Select a target default setting mode with the touch panel.
A C1 Mode1 : Threshold of Saturation 0 - 255 5 Press [ALL] key to select all the modes.
B V1 Mode1 : Threshold of Brightness 0 - 255 0
2) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key.
C C2 Mode2 : Threshold of Saturation 0 - 255 5
D V2 Mode2 : Threshold of Brightness 0 - 255 0 When the printer screen gamma was changed by SIM 67-33,
SIM67-54, it is reset to the default.

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 118

 Select item (Mode) Content
Item/Display Content
DOT_SCREEN2 SCREEN14(Dot(LOW))
Screen HEAVYPAPER Heavy paper screen
DOT_SCREEN1_BW SCREEN16(BW 600dpi DOT)
Printer heavy paper automatic density
correction amount DOT_SCREEN2_BW SCREEN17(BW 1200dpi DOT)
1200DPI_1BIT SCREEN5 (1200dpi 1bit Photo) SHIGH SCREEN18(SHIGH)
SCREEN6 (1200dpi 1bit Graphics)
6) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4 or A3 paper is automatically
600DPI_1BIT SCREEN1 (600dpi 1bit Photo)
selected.)
SCREEN2 (600dpi 1bit Graphics)
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
B/W SCREEN7 (600dpi 1bit Graphics)
SCREEN8 (600dpi 4bit Graphics) 7) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
SCREEN9 (1200dpi 1bit Graphics) procedure 6) on the document table so that the thin lines on
SCREEN11(600dpi 1bit Graphics) the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the
SCREEN12 (600dpi 4bit Graphics) left side.
Screen B/W SCREEN13 (1200dpi 1bit Graphics) 8) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Printer B/W toner save automatic density The color balance adjustment is automatically performed, and
correction amount the color balance check patch image is printed out.
4BIT_GRAPHIC SCREEN4 (600dpi 4bit Graphics)
9) When [OK] key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered
S
and the adjustment mode is terminated. When [EXECUTE]
DOT_SCREEN1 SCREEN14(Dot Screen1)
key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered and the
DOT_SCREEN2 SCREEN15(Dot Screen2)
screen is shifted to the other item (Mode/Image) select menu.
DOT_SCREEN1 SCREEN16(Dot Screen1 BW)
_BW To execute the adjustment of the other item (Mode/Image),
DOT_SCREEN2 SCREEN17(Dot Screen2 BW) press [EXECUTE] key.
_BW After completion of all the adjustments of the items (Mode/
SHIGH SCREEN18(SHIGH) Image), press [OK] key, and the adjustment results are regis-
tered.
10) Make a print, and check the print image quality.
67-54
Purpose Adjustment
Use SIM67-52 to reset the adjustment values to the default values.
Function (Purpose) Printer color balance adjustment

Section Printer
Operation/Procedure
This simulation is used to adjust the color balance, the density, and
the gradation in the monochrome mode, the heavy paper mode,
the 1200dpi mode, and the 600dpi 1bit mode.
This simulation is used to improve image quality in these modes
and images.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4 or A3 paper is automatically
selected.)
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
2) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
procedure 1) on the document table so that the thin lines on
the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the
left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color
patch image (adjustment pattern).
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The color balance adjustment is automatically performed.
The adjustment pattern is printed out. Check it for any abnor-
mality.
4) Press [OK] key.
The list of the adjustment items (for each dither) is displayed.
5) Select an adjustment item (for each dither).

Select item (Mode) Content

Heavy Paper Adjustment item to improve the color balance in
the heavy paper mode
1200dpi 1bit SCREEN5 (1200dpi 1bit Photo)
SCREEN6 (1200dpi 1bit Graphics)
B/W SCREEN7 (600dpi 1bit)
SCREEN8 (600dpi 4bit)
SCREEN9 (1200dpi 1bit)
Printer B/W toner save automatic density
correction amount
SCREEN11(PCL B/W 600dpi 1bit Graphics)
SCREEN12(PCL B/W 600dpi 4bit Graphics)
SCREEN13(PCL B/W 1200dpi 1bit Graphics)
4BIT_GRAPHICS SCREEN4 (600dpi 4bit Graphics)
DOT_SCREEN1 SCREEN14(Dot(HIGH))

MX-6070N SIMULATION 6 – 119

MX-6070N
[7] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE Service Manual
1. Trouble code and troubleshooting D. Self diag operation
The machine always monitors its own state.
A. General
When the machine recognizes a trouble, it stops the operation and
When a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a consum- displays the trouble message.
able part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the machine
A warning message is displayed when a consumable part life is
detects and displays it on the display section. This allows the user
nearly expired or is expired.
and the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of a trouble,
this feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and stops the When a warning message is displayed, the machine may be or
machine to minimize the damage. may not be stopped.
The trouble messages and the warning messages are displayed by
B. Function and purpose the LCD and lamp.
1) Securing safety. (The machine is stopped on detection of a Some trouble messages are automatically cleared when the trou-
trouble.) ble is repaired. Some other troubles must be cleared by a simula-
2) The damage to the machine is minimized. (The machine is tion.
stopped on detection of a trouble.) Some warning messages of consumable parts are automatically
3) By displaying the trouble content, the trouble position can be cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other warning mes-
quickly identified. (This allows to perform an accurate repair, sages must be cleared by a simulation.
improving the repair efficiency.)
4) Preliminary warning of running out of consumable parts allows Monitors the machine
to arrange for new parts in advance of running out. (This conditions.
avoids stopping of the machine due to running out the a con-
sumable part.)
Detects/analyzes
C. Self diag message kinds the content.
The self diag messages are classified as shown in the table below.

Class 1 User Warning of troubles which can be recovered by the

user. (Paper jam, consumable part life expiration,
Warning
࠙࣬
Trouble/Warning
Πρήσȟ࠙࣬
etc.)
Service Warning of troubles which can be recovered only by
a serviceman. (Motor trouble, maintenance, etc.) Trouble
Πρήσ
Others -
Class 2 Warning Warning to the user, not a machine trouble
൲ै೪গ
The machine is stopped.
(Preliminary warning of life expiration of a
consumable part, etc.)
Trouble Warning of a machine trouble. The machine is
stopped. ඤယͬນা
The content is displayed.
Others -

Warning
࠙࣬ A consumable No
OP
Πρήσȟ࠙࣬
Trouble/Warning part has reached
its lifetime

Trouble
Πρήσ ZFT
YES
Replace or supply
Troubleshoot
ະၻࡔ֦ͬ಺औ the cause. ક࿍ΩȜΜ࢐۟¦༞‫ݯ‬
the consumable part.

ਘၑ
Repair

Cancel the self-diagnostic

ΘͼͺΈȪΞΑΠ΋ζϋΡȫ
message with the
൝ͤ͢ͅুࡨ૷౯ιΛΓȜΐ
diagnostic (test
ٜੰcommands).

Reset
໘‫ܦ‬

Standby
ఞ‫ેܥ‬ఠ state

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 1

E. Breakdown sequence
(1) Trouble code and operatable mode

Trouble code Operatable mode

Copy
Judg-
scan
Trouble content ment MX-xx70 MX-xx50 Scan Scan ScanT List FAX FAX
(including Print
block series series (Push) (Pull) oHDD print Send print
interrup-
tion)
FAX board – FAX board SCN- F6(00, 01, 02 04, 21, 30, ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 1 1
trouble breakdown MFP 97 98)
HDD trouble – SSD E7(A7) × × × × × × × ×
breakdown
– HDD E7(03) × × × × × × × ×
breakdown
– HDD-ASIC E7(04) × × × × × × × ×
breakdown
Operation – Operation U9(01) × × × × ○ ○ × ○
communication communicatio
trouble n error
Scanner – SCU A0(02) × × × × ○ ○ × ○
communication communicatio E7(80)
trouble n error
Engine – PCU A0(01) × × × × × × × ×
communication communicatio E7(90)
trouble n error
Option – ACU A0(04) × × × × × × × ×
communication communicatio
trouble n trouble
Backup battery – Backup U1(01) × × × × × × × ×
voltage fall battery voltage *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20
trouble fall
Operation – Memory error U2(00, 11, 41, 42) × × × × × × × ×
disable trouble (included not *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20
2 installed the
expansion
RAM)
– Serial number U2(30) × × × × × × × ×
data error *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20
– HDD U2(50) × × × × × × × ×
registration *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20
data check
sum error
– External serial U7(50, 51) × × × × × × × ×
I/F
communicatio
n error (RIC)
– Memory error U2(40) × × × × × × × ×
(included not
installed the
expansion
RAM)
– Connection A0(10, 15, 17, 18, 20) × × × × × × × ×
trouble (Model E7(60, 61, 62)
data
discrepancy)
(MFPC
detection)

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 2

 Trouble code Operatable mode
Copy
Judg-
scan
Trouble content ment MX-xx70 MX-xx50 Scan Scan ScanT List FAX FAX
(including Print
block series series (Push) (Pull) oHDD print Send print
interrup-
tion)
Operation – Memory check SCN- E7(96) × × × × × × × ×
disable trouble error when MFP
3 booting
– Image E7(01, 49, 91, 92, 93, 94) × × × × × × × ×
memory
trouble,
decode error
– Image E7(42, 46, 47, 48) × *17 × × × ○ ○ ○
memory
trouble,
decode error
(Image high
compression)
Operation – Personal PC(00) × × × × × × × ×
disable trouble counter not-
4 installed
trouble
Power – Power L8(20) × × × × × × × ×
controller controller error
trouble
Special – Special U2(60, 70) U2(60) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
function trouble function error *16 *16 *16 *16 *16 *16 *16 *16
Laser trouble – LSU PCU E7(20, 24, 28, 29, A0) × × × × × × × ×
breakdown L6(10) *10
Engine trouble – Connection A0(21) × × × × × × × ×
1 trouble (Model E7(50, 55)
data F1(50)
discrepancy)
(PCU
detection)
Engine trouble – PCU troubles H3(00, 01, 02) × × × × × × × ×
2 (motor, fusing, H4(00, 01, 02, 30, 32) *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *10 *20 *20
etc.) H5(01) *20
U2(90, 91)
Engine trouble – PCU troubles C1(01, 10, 14, 15, 16, 40, × × × × × × × ×
2 (motor, fusing, 41) *10
etc.) C4(00, 05, 20, 25, 30, 31,
35, 40)
F2(22, 40, 64, 70, 74)
H2(00, 01, 02, 03, 05, 06)
H7(10, 12)
L4(02, 03, 06, 07, 11, 12,
16, 17, 18, 32, 35, 43, 50,
51, 71)
L8(01, 02)
Process – PCU troubles C1(03, 05, 07) × × × × × × × ×
system trouble E7(21, 22, 23, 25, 26, 27, *19 *19 *19 *19 *19 *10 *19 *19
A1, A2, A3) *19
F2(23, 24, 25, 41, 42, 43,
65, 66, 67, 71, 72, 73, 75,
76, 77, 95, 96, 97, 98)
Paper feed tray – Paper feed F3(12) 3 ○ ○ ○ 3 3 ○ 3
1 trouble tray 1 *10
breakdown
Paper feed tray – Paper feed F3(22) 3 ○ ○ ○ 3 3 ○ 3
2 trouble tray 2 *10
breakdown
Paper feed tray – Paper feed U6(01) 3 ○ ○ ○ 3 3 ○ 3
3 trouble tray 3 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *10 *20 *20
breakdown *20
Paper feed tray – Paper feed U6(02) 3 ○ ○ ○ 3 3 ○ 3
4 trouble tray 4 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *10 *20 *20
breakdown *20
Paper feed tray – Paper feed U6(09) 3 ○ ○ ○ 3 3 ○ 3
5 trouble tray 5 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *10 *20 *20
breakdown *20

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 3

 Trouble code Operatable mode
Copy
Judg-
scan
Trouble content ment MX-xx70 MX-xx50 Scan Scan ScanT List FAX FAX
(including Print
block series series (Push) (Pull) oHDD print Send print
interrup-
tion)
Paper feed tray – Paper feed PCU U6(20, 21, 22, 51) 3 ○ ○ ○ 3 3 ○ 3
5 trouble tray 5 *10
breakdown
Paper feed tray – Paper feed U6(00, 10, 50, 52, 54, 55) 11 ○ ○ ○ 11 11 ○ 11
other troubles tray other *10
breakdown
Finisher trouble – After-process F1(00, 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
breakdown 06, 08, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, *10
15, 16, 18, 19, 20, 22, 23,
28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34,
37, 38, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45,
46, 47, 48, 49, 51, 53, 54,
55, 78, 83, 89)
Other troubles – Other troubles EE(EC, EL, EU) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Process control – Process F2(39, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
trouble control 58, 78) *12
breakdown
(PCU
detection)
Operation – Connection SCN- A0(22) × × × × × × × ×
disable trouble trouble (Model MFP
data
discrepancy)
(SCU
detection)
Color system – SCU Color UC(02) 9 9 9 9 ○ ○ 9 ○
trouble (SCU trouble (SCU
detection) detection)
Color system – SCU Color UC(12) - 8 8 8 8 ○ ○ 8 ○
trouble (DSPF trouble (DSPF
detection) detection)
Anti-copy – Anti-copy UC(20) × × × × ○ ○ × ○
trouble system
Anti-copy – Anti-copy UC(30) - 7 7 7 7 ○ ○ 7 ○
trouble (DSPF system (DSPF
detection) detection)
Scanner – EEPROM U2(80, 81) × × × × ○ ○ × ○
trouble 1 error *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20
Scanner – Scanner L1(00) × × × × ○ ○ × ○
trouble 2 section L3(00)
breakdown
(mirror motor,
lens, copy
lamp)
CCD trouble – CCD E7(10, 11, 14) × × × × ○ ○ × ○
breakdown
(shading, etc.)
DSPF/DF – DSPF/DF U5(00, 16, - 6 6 6 6 ○ ○ 6 ○
trouble breakdown 20, 30, 31)
SPF back – General E6(10, 11, - 7 7 7 7 ○ ○ 7 ○
surface trouble trouble in the 14)
SPF back
surface
scanning
section

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 4

(2) Trouble where only history data are saved

Trouble code Operatable mode

Copy
Judg- scan
Scan-
Trouble content ment MX-xx70 MX-xx50 (includi Scan Scan List FAX FAX
To Print
block series series ng (Push) (Pull) print Send print
HDD
interrup-
tion)
Trouble history F2(45)
PCU ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
L4(09, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79)
SCN-
U2(05) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
MFP

○: Operation enabled ×: Operation disabled

1: The operation is enabled in a line other than the trouble line.
3: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled with a tray other than the trouble tray.
4: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in a section other than the trouble paper exit section. * However, it is valid
only when the escape tray setting has been made.
6: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enable in the OC mode.
7: When detected in other than a job, the operation is enable in the black and white mode.
8: When detected in other than a job, the operation is enabled in other than the duplex color scan mode.
9: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the black and white mode.
*10: Since communication is enabled, reception can be transferred.
11: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in other than the DESK and the LCC.
*12: A trouble message is displayed. (Example: Ready to copy. F2 trouble)
15: FAST notification function (When in U2-22, trouble notification cannot be made. If there is no abnormality in the FAX software or the
FAST data in U2-23, trouble notification can be made.)
17: Job execution enable only in a format other high compression PDF.
*19: When the color mode is set to disable in the "Color mode disable setting" of the system setting, the operation is enabled in the black and
white mode.

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 5

(3) Trouble detection sequence and trouble cancel
sequence when turning on the power

MFP event Each block

manager

(Power ON sequence)
H3, H4, H5, U1, U2, U6, F3 trouble check When the power is turned on,
Trouble check is preformed in each block, check is made in each block.
and the result is sent to the MFP. Communication of trouble status
[Trouble code] [Trouble status]
H3, H4, H5 Saved in the PCU
U1 Saved in the MFP
U2 Saved in each block
U6 Saved in the PCU
F3 Saved in the PCU

(Trouble cancel sequence)

When executing SIM 13, 14, 15, 16 sim task

SIM13: U1 trouble cancel

SIM14: H3, H4, H5
(Color mode inhibition) cancel
SIM15: LCC/LCT (U6) trouble cancel,
F3 trouble cancel Trouble cancel
SIM16: U2 trouble cancel Trouble cancel command
(The trouble memory is
initialized.)
Trouble cancel status
is communicated.

The process has priority when the power is turned ON with the When booting, two or more troubles in the list below may be
MFP. detected. In this case, the trouble code of higher priority is dis-
played.

Process sequence Error code Content

50 HDD user authentication data check sum error
U2
30 MFPC PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency
First
A0 15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and program firmware
(Low priority)
20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (MFP)
 U2 11 MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check sum error
00 MFP EEPROM read/write error
 E7 48 Scanner expansion PWB ASIC memory error
47 Inconsistency between the MFP and the ACRE firmware
Last 42 Image data trouble (Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) ASIC)
(High priority)
A0 04 Scanner expansion PWB (ACU) ROM error
U1 01 Battery trouble
E7 60 Combination error between PWB and firmware (MFPC PWB detection)

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 6

F. Trouble code list
Trouble code
Trouble Mechanis
Main Sub Trouble content Option Electricity FAX Supply
detection m
code code
A0 01 PCU PWB ROM error SCN-MFP O
02 SCN-MFP PWB ROM error SCN-MFP O
04 ACU ROM error SCN-MFP O
10 Controler ROM error SCN-MFP O
15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and program firmware SCN-MFP O
17 Inconsistency between the UI data and the CPU firmware version SCN-MFP O
18 Incompatible ASIC-MAIN firmware SCN-MFP O
20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (MFP) SCN-MFP O
21 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (PCU) PCU O
22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (SCU) SCN-MFP O
C1 01 Charger cleaner trouble (K) PCU O
03 Charger cleaner trouble (C) PCU O
05 Charger cleaner trouble (M) PCU O
07 Charger cleaner trouble (Y) PCU O
10 Main charger trouble (Monochrome) PCU O
14 Main charger trouble (Color) PCU O
15 High voltage MC-K circuit trouble PCU O
16 High voltage MC-CL circuit trouble PCU O
40 High voltage MC PWB trouble PCU O
41 High voltage MC/TC PWB trouble PCU O
C4 00 PTC high voltage trouble PCU O
05 High voltage PTC circuit trouble PCU O
20 1TC high voltage trouble PCU O
25 High voltage 1TC circuit trouble PCU O
30 2TC open trouble PCU O
31 2TC short trouble PCU O
35 High voltage 2TC circuit trouble PCU O
40 High voltage TC PWB trouble PCU O
E6 10 Shading error (Black correction) (SPF) SCN-MFP O
11 Shading error (White correction) (SPF) SCN-MFP O
14 CCD ASIC error (SPF) SCN-MFP O
E7 01 MFP image data error SCN-MFP O
03 HDD trouble / Mirroring kit error SCN-MFP O
04 HDD-ASIC error SCN-MFP O
10 Shading error (Black correction) SCN-MFP O
11 Shading error (White correction) SCN-MFP O
14 CCD-ASIC error SCN-MFP O
20 LSU laser detection & deterioration error (K) PCU O
21 LSU laser deterioration error (C) PCU O
22 LSU laser deterioration error (M) PCU O
23 LSU laser deterioration error (Y) PCU O
24 LSU LD driver trouble (K) PCU O
25 LSU LD driver trouble (C) PCU O
26 LSU LD driver trouble (M) PCU O
27 LSU LD driver trouble (Y) PCU O
28 LSU - PCU connection error PCU O
29 LSU ASIC frequency error PCU O
42 Image data trouble (Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) ASIC) SCN-MFP O
46 Image data decode error (Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) ASIC) SCN-MFP O
47 Inconsistency between the MFP and the ACRE firmware SCN-MFP O
48 Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) ASIC memory error SCN-MFP O
49 Water Mark data error SCN-MFP O
50 Combination error between PWB and firmware (PCU PWB detection) PCU O
55 PCU PWB information sum error PCU O
60 Combination error between PWB and firmware SCN-MFP O
61 Combination error between the SCN-MFP PWB and the PCU PWB SCN-MFP O
62 Combination error between the SCN-MFP PWB and the Scanner SCN-MFP O
80 MFP - SCU PWB communication error SCN-MFP O
90 SCN-MFP - PCU PWB communication error SCN-MFP O
91 FAX reception image data error SCN-MFP O
92 Copy image data error SCN-MFP O
93 Copy, image send, FAX, filing, print image data process error SCN-MFP O
94 Image file data process error (when importing file data) SCN-MFP O
96 MFPC PWB memory check error SCN-MFP O
A0 LSU EEPROM/LD driver read/write error (K) PCU O
A1 LSU EEPROM/LD driver read/write error (C) PCU O
A2 LSU EEPROM/LD driver read/write error (M) PCU O

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 7

 1 : ‘16/Sep.
Trouble code
Trouble Mechanis
Main Sub Trouble content Option Electricity FAX Supply
detection m
code code
E7 A3 LSU EEPROM/LD driver read/write error (Y) PCU O
A7 mSATA SSD trouble SCN-MFP O
EE EC Auto toner density adjustment error PCU O
EL Auto toner density adjustment error (over toner) PCU O
EU Auto toner density adjustment error (under toner) PCU O
F1 00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication error PCU O
01 Jogger motor trouble PCU O
02 Inlet transport motor trouble PCU O
03 Swinging motor trouble PCU O
04 Finisher paddle trouble PCU O
05 Return belt motor trouble PCU O
06 Paper exit transport/Tapping motor trouble PCU O
08 Stapler moving motor trouble PCU O
10 Staple operation trouble PCU O
11 Finisher grip motor trouble PCU O
12 Proof transport motor trouble PCU O
13 Paper exit guide plate switching motor trouble PCU O
14 Rear paper edge flap motor trouble PCU O
15 Finisher paper exit tray lift operation trouble PCU O
16 Escape/Saddle transport switching flapper motor trouble PCU O
18 Finisher paper bundle hold motor section trouble PCU O
19 Finisher Jogger motor F trouble PCU O
20 Finisher Jogger motor R trouble PCU O
1
22 Finisher assist motor trouble PCU O
23 Safety switch trouble PCU O
28 Flap motor trouble PCU O
29 Fuse break detection PCU O
30 Communication error between finisher and saddle unit PCU O
31 Finisher saddle motor trouble (Saddle stitch finisher) (FSFOM) PCU O
32 Communication error between the finisher and the punch unit PCU O
(Saddle stitch finisher)
33 Punch unit shift operation trouble PCU O
34 Punch operation trouble PCU O
35 Side registration detection motor trouble PCU O
37 Finisher PWB backup memory error PCU O
38 Finisher punch unit PWB backup memory error PCU O
41 Saddle paper positioning operation trouble PCU O
42 Switching lever drive motor trouble PCU O
43 Saddle alignment operation trouble PCU O
44 Gripper motor trouble PCU O
45 Saddle staple trouble PCU O
46 Saddle pushing plate motor section trouble PCU O
47 Saddle paper transport motor trouble PCU O
48 Bundle transport upper pressure release / reference fence escape motor PCU O
trouble
49 Bundle transport lower pressure release motor trouble PCU O
50 Main unit - Finisher combination error PCU O
51 Communication trouble between the finisher main and sub PCU O
53 Unsupported main unit error PCU O
54 Unset finisher punch unit destination trouble PCU O
55 After-process unit ROM error PCU O
78 Finisher staple-free staple motor section trouble PCU O
83 Guide sub motor trouble PCU O
89 Shift motor trouble PCU O
F2 22 Discharge lamp trouble (K) PCU O
23 Discharge lamp trouble (C) PCU O
24 Discharge lamp trouble (M) PCU O
25 Discharge lamp trouble (Y) PCU O
39 Process thermistor trouble PCU O
40 Toner density sensor trouble (K) PCU O
41 Toner density sensor trouble (C) PCU O
42 Toner density sensor trouble (M) PCU O
43 Toner density sensor trouble (Y) PCU O
45 Color image density sensor trouble PCU O
49 LSU thermistor trouble PCU O
50 K drum phase sensor trouble PCU O
51 C drum phase sensor trouble PCU O
52 M drum phase sensor trouble PCU O

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 8

Trouble code
Trouble Mechanis
Main Sub Trouble content Option Electricity FAX Supply
detection m
code code
F2 53 Y drum phase sensor trouble PCU O
58 Temperature/humidity sensor trouble (HUD_M/TH_M) PCU O
64 Toner supply operation trouble (K) PCU O
65 Toner supply operation trouble (C) PCU O
66 Toner supply operation trouble (M) PCU O
67 Toner supply operation trouble (Y) PCU O
70 Improper toner cartridge detection (K) PCU O
71 Improper toner cartridge detection (C) PCU O
72 Improper toner cartridge detection (M) PCU O
73 Improper toner cartridge detection (Y) PCU O
74 Toner cartridge CRUM error (K) PCU O
75 Toner cartridge CRUM error (C) PCU O
76 Toner cartridge CRUM error (M) PCU O
77 Toner cartridge CRUM error (Y) PCU O
78 Registration image density sensor trouble PCU O
95 Eject operation trouble (K) PCU O
96 Eject operation trouble (C) PCU O
97 Eject operation trouble (M) PCU O
98 Eject operation trouble (Y) PCU O
F3 12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble PCU O
22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble PCU O
F6 00 MFPC PWB - FAX communication trouble SCN-MFP O
01 FAX control PWB EEPROM read/write error FAX O
02 FAX power supply trouble FAX O
04 FAX MODEM operation trouble FAX O
21 Improper combination of TEL/LIU PWB and FAX soft switch FAX O
30 FAX 1-chip microprocessor access error (FAX detection) FAX O
97 Incompatibility between FAX control PWB and the main machine SCN-MFP O
98 Incompatibility between the FAX control PWB destination and the main SCN-MFP O
machine destination
H2 00 Thermistor open trouble (Upper Main TH_UM detection) TH_UM PCU O
01 Thermistor open trouble (Lower Main TH_LM) TH_LM PCU O
02 Thermistor open trouble (Upper Sub TH_US1 detection) TH_SUB2_2 PCU O
03 Thermistor open trouble (Upper Main TH_UM compensation) TH_UM_CS PCU O
05 Thermistor open trouble (Upper Sub TH_US1 compensation) PCU O
TH_SUB2_2_CS
06 Thermistor open trouble (Upper edge) TH_US2 PCU O
H3 00 Fusing section high temperature trouble (Upper Main) TH_UM PCU O
01 Fusing section high temperature trouble (Lower Main) TH_LM PCU O
02 Fusing section high temperature trouble (Upper Sub) TH_US1 PCU O
H4 00 Fusing section low temperature trouble (Lower Main) TH_LM PCU O
01 Fusing section low temperature trouble (Upper Main) TH_UM PCU O
02 Fusing section low temperature trouble (Upper Sub) TH_US1 PCU O
30 Upper main thermistor differential input abnormality (TH_UM) PCU O
32 Upper sub thermistor differential input abnormality (TH_US1) PCU O
H5 01 5 times continuous POD1 not-reach jam PCU O
H7 10 Recovery error from low fuser temp. (TH_UM) PCU O
11 Recovery error from low fuser temp. (TH_US1) PCU O
L1 00 Scanner feed trouble SCU O
L3 00 Scanner return trouble SCU O
L4 02 Paper feed motor trouble PCU O
03 Fusing motor trouble PCU O
06 Transfer unit lift trouble PCU O
07 Transfer belt motor trouble PCU O
09 PS motor trouble PCU O
11 Shift motor trouble PCU O
12 Secondary transfer separation trouble PCU O O
16 Fusing pressure release trouble PCU O
17 Drum motor lock trouble (BK) PCU O
18 Drum motor lock trouble (C) PCU O
19 Drum motor lock trouble (M) PCU O
20 Drum motor lock trouble (Y) PCU O
32 Power source cooling fan trouble PCU O
35 Fusing cooling fan trouble PCU O
43 Paper exit cooling fan 2 trouble PCU O
44 Power cooling fan 2 trouble PCU O
50 Process fan trouble PCU O
51 Process fan 2 trouble PCU O
71 Motor control IC access error PCU O

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 9

 1 : ‘16/Sep.
Trouble code
Trouble Mechanis
Main Sub Trouble content Option Electricity FAX Supply
detection m
code code
L4 75 Paper exit motor lock trouble PCU O
76 Reverse motor lock trouble PCU O
77 ADU motor Upper lock trouble PCU O
78 ADU motor Lower lock trouble PCU O
79 PS front motor lock trouble PCU O
L6 10 Polygon motor trouble PCU O
L8 01 Full wave signal detection error PCU O
02 Full wave signal error PCU O
03 Abnormal input voltage error PCU O
20 Communication error of MFPC PWB/LSU mother board SCN-MFP O
PC - Personal counter not detected SCN-MFP O
U1 01 Battery trouble SCN-MFP O
U2 00 MFP EEPROM read/write error SCN-MFP O
05 Erroneous detection of account management data / HDD internal SCN-MFP O
authentication DB table error
11 MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check sum error SCN-MFP O
30 MFPC PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency SCN-MFP O
40 SD card system storage data area error SCN-MFP O
41 HDD system storage data area error SCN-MFP O
42 Machine adjustment data (system storage data area) error SCN-MFP O
50 HDD user authentication data check sum error SCN-MFP O
60 Watermark check error SCN-MFP O
70 OCR dictionary check error SCN-MFP O
80 SCN MFP PWB EEPROM read/write error SCN-MFP O
81 SCN MFP PWB EEPROM check sum error SCN-MFP O
90 PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error PCU O
91 PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error PCU O
1 U5 00 Communication error in SPF SCN-MFP O
16 SPF fan motor trouble SCN-MFP O
20 SPF paper feed transport motor trouble SCN-MFP O
30 SPF tray lift up trouble SCN-MFP O
31 SPF tray lift down trouble SCN-MFP O
U6 00 PCU PWB - Paper feed desk (paper feed tray 3, 4) communication trouble PCU O
01 Desk paper feed tray 1 lift trouble PCU O
02 Desk paper feed tray 2 lift trouble PCU O
09 LCC lift motor trouble PCU O
10 Desk paper feed unit paper transport motor trouble PCU O
20 LCC control PWB - PCU PWB communication error PCU O
21 LCC transport motor trouble PCU O
22 LCC 24V power abnormality PCU O
23 LCC tray descending trouble PCU O
50 Desk - Main unit combination trouble PCU O
51 LCC - Main unit combination trouble PCU O
52 PCU PWB - Paper feed desk (paper feed tray 2) communication trouble PCU O
54 Option installation combination trouble (LCC) PCU O
55 Option installation combination trouble (DESK) PCU O
U7 50 MFPC PWB - Vendor machine communication error SCN-MFP O
51 Vendor machine error SCN-MFP O
U9 01 Touch panel trouble SCN-MFP O
UC 02 CPT - ASIC error SCN-MFP O
20 DOCC ASIC error SCN-MFP O

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 10

G. Details of error codes and countermeasures

A0-01 PCU PWB ROM error A0-18 Conflict firmware version ASIC-MAIN

Trouble detection PCU Trouble detection SCN-MFP

Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly by Cause Combination version error in MFPC ASIC
interruption of the power during the version-up Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
operation, etc. Use SIM49-1 to perform the firmware version-up
PCU PWB trouble. procedure again.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the firmware version-up
procedure again.
Replace the PCU PWB. A0-20 Machine level error (CTL detection)

Trouble detection SCN-MFP

A0-02 SCN-MFP PWB ROM error
Cause Inconsistency between the MFP firmware version and
the EEPROM data version.
Trouble detection SCN-MFP Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly by
interruption of the power during the version-up
operation, etc. A0-21 Machine level error (PCU detection)
SCN-MFP PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the firmware version-up
procedure again. Trouble detection PCU
Replace the SCN-MFP PWB. Cause Inconsistency between the PCU firmware version and
the EEPROM data version.
Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
A0-04 ACU ROM error
A0-22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
Trouble detection SCN-MFP
Cause Scanner expansion PWB (ACU) (ACRE) ROM data version (SCN-MFP)
error.
An error occurs during firmware upgrading for some Trouble detection SCN-MFP
reasons. Cause Inconsistency between the SCN-MFP PWB firmware
Check & Remedy Perform firmware upgrading again. version and the EEPROM data version.
Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.

A0-10 Controller ROM error

C1-01 Charger cleaner trouble (K)
Trouble detection SCN-MFP
Cause The content of the color profile is abnormal. Trouble detection PCU
Combination error between the SCN-MFP PWB Cause Charger unit trouble.
firmware and the color profile HP sensor, motor, PCU PWB, harness connection
Check & Remedy Upgrade the firmware collectively. trouble.
Replace the SCN-MFP PWB. Check & Remedy Check charger unit, PCU PWB, harness connection.

A0-15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and program C1-03 Charger cleaner trouble (C)
firmware
Trouble detection PCU
Trouble detection SCN-MFP Cause Charger unit trouble.
Cause Installation of the normal firmware was performed HP sensor, motor, PCU PWB, harness connection
with a security kit enable. trouble.
Check & Remedy Stop installation of the normal firmware. Check & Remedy Check charger unit, PCU PWB, harness connection.

A0-17 Inconsistency between the UI data C1-05 Charger cleaner trouble (M)
and the CPU firmware version
Trouble detection PCU
Trouble detection SCN-MFP Cause Charger unit trouble.
HP sensor, motor, PCU PWB, harness connection
Cause Combination error between the UI contents data and
trouble.
the CPU UI firmware version.
Check & Remedy Check charger unit, PCU PWB, harness connection.
Check & Remedy Install the firmware in the all-firmware version-up
mode.

C1-07 Charger cleaner trouble (Y)

Trouble detection PCU

Cause Charger unit trouble.
HP sensor, motor, PCU PWB, harness connection
trouble.
Check & Remedy Check charger unit, PCU PWB, harness connection.

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 11

C1-10 Main charger trouble (Monochrome) C1-15 High voltage MC Black circuit trouble

Trouble detection PCU Trouble detection PCU

Cause Open circuit or short circuit of the main charger Cause 1) Pin getting away of a harness (MC-K-ERR) and
(Black) output breaking (MC PWB Input connector CN1-10pin)
1) Check & Use SIM8-2 to check the output of [GB-K]. 2) High-voltage error circuit (MC-K-ERR)
Remedy If the leakage noise or the flickering on the screen of damage
the panel is detected; Check & Remedy 1) Check connection of the harness.(MC PWB Input
(1) Abnormality of the charger (BK) connector CN1-10pin)
-> Remove and insert the charger (BK) or replace the Replace the harness.
charger (BK). 2) Check disconnection of the high voltage MC PWB
(2) Imperfect insertion of the charger (BK) connector./Replace.
-> Remove and insert the charger (BK).
(3) Abnormality of MC-K harness (Transformer B801
of the high-voltage MC PWB) C1-16 High voltage MC color circuit trouble
-> Remove and insert MC-K harness or replace MC-
K harness.
(4)Abnormality of GB-K/DV-KCMY wiring Trouble detection PCU
-> Check GB-K/DV-KCMY wiring./Replace. Cause 1) Pin getting away of a harness (MC-CMY-ERR) and
(5) Abnormality of the developing unit (K/C/M/Y) breaking (MC PWB Input connector CN1-11pin)
-> Insert and remove the developing unit./Replace. 2) High-voltage error circuit (MC-CMYERR)
(6) Abnormality of the high voltage MC PWB spring damage
contact (GB,DV). 3) 24V fuse meltdown in the high voltage MC PWB
-> Check the high voltage MC PWB spring contact. Check & Remedy 1) Check connection of the harness.(MC PWB Input
2) Check & Use SIM8-2 to check the output of [GB-K]. connector CN1-11pin)
Remedy If the leakage noise etc. is not detected; Replace the harness.
(1) Charger (BK) not inserted. 2) 3) Check disconnection of the high voltage MC
-> Insert the Charger (BK). PWB connector./Replace.
(2) Disconnection/ breakage of MC-K harness
(Transformer B801 of the high-voltage MC PWB)
-> Insert the harness./Replace. C1-40 High voltage MC PWB trouble
(3) High MC PWB trouble.
-> Replace the high MC PWB.
Trouble detection PCU
(4) PCU PWB trouble
-> Replace PCU PWB. Cause 1) Input harness disconnection in the high voltage MC
PWB.
2) Harness (MC-K-ERR, MC-CMY-ERR) pin
disconnection (MC PWB input connector CN1-
C1-14 Main charger trouble (Color) 10pin,CN1-11pin)
3) 24V fuse meltdown in the high voltage MC PWB
Trouble detection PCU 4) High voltage error circuit (MC-K-ERR, MC-CMY-
Cause Open circuit or short circuit of the main charger ERR) breakage in the high voltage MC PWB
(Color) output Check & Remedy 1) Check the harness and the connector (MC PWB
1) Check & Use SIM8-2 to check the output of [GB-C/M/Y]. Input connector CN1)
Remedy If the leakage noise or the flickering on the screen of 2) Check or replace the harness.(MC PWB input
the panel is detected; connector CN1-10pin, CN1-11pin)
(1) Abnormality of the charger (C/M/Y) 3) 4) Replace the MC PWB
-> Remove and insert the charger (C/M/Y) or replace
the charger (C/M/Y).
(2) Imperfect insertion of the charger (C/M/Y) C1-41 High voltage MC/TC PWB trouble
-> Remove and insert the charger (C/M/Y).
(3) Abnormality of MC-CL harness (Transformer
Trouble detection PCU
B901, B1001, B1101 of the high-voltage MC PWB)
-> Remove and insert MC-CL harness or replace MC- Cause 1) PCU connector (input harness to the high voltage
CL harness. MC PWB and the TC PWB) disconnection. (PCU
(4)Abnormality of GB-CMY wiring PWB input CN10)
-> Check GB-CMY wiring./Replace. 2) Both input connectors disconnections of the high
(5)Abnormality of the high voltage MC PWB spring voltage MC PWB and the high voltage TC PWB.(MC
contact (GB,DV) PWB input connector CN1,TC PWB input connector
-> Check the high voltage MC PWB spring contact. CN1)
3) 24V fuses meltdown in the high voltage MC PWB
2) Check & Use SIM8-2 to check the output of [GB-C/M/Y].
and the high voltage TC PWB
Remedy If the leakage noise etc. is not detected;
(1) Charger (C/M/Y) not inserted. Check & Remedy 1) Check the connections of the connectors to the
-> Insert the Charger (C/M/Y). high voltage MC PWB and the high voltage TC PWB
(2) Disconnection/ breakage of MC-CL harness on the PCU PWB or connect these connectors again
(Transformer B901, B1001, B1101 of the high-voltage (PCU PWB input CN10).
MC PWB) 2) Check the connectors of the high voltage MC PWB
-> Insert the harness./Replace. and the high voltage TC PWB and connect these
(3) High MC PWB trouble. connectors again.(MC PWB input connector CN1,TC
-> Replace the high MC PWB. PWB input connector CN1)
(4) PCU PWB trouble 3) Check or replace the high voltage MC PWB and
-> Replace PCU PWB. the high voltage TC PWB

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 12

C4-00 PTC High-voltage output trouble C4-20 1st transfer High-voltage output trou-
ble
Trouble detection PCU
Cause (1) Abnormality of PTC unit Trouble detection PCU
(2) Imperfection insertion of PTC unit
Cause Open circuit of the 1st transfer out put.
(3) PTC unit not inserted
1) Check & Use SIM8-6 to check the out put of [1TC-K/C/M/Y].If
(4) Disconnection, abnormality of PTC unit.
Remedy the leakage noise or the flickering on the screen of
(Transformer B801 of the high-voltage TC PWB)
the panel is detected;
(5) High voltage TC PWB trouble
(1) Abnormality of 1ST transfer unit.
(6) PCU PWB trouble
--> Remove and insert the 1ST transfer unit.
Check & Remedy (1)Remove and insert PTC unit./Replace.
--> Replace the 1ST transfer unit.
(2) Remove and insert PTC unit.
(2) Imperfect insertion the 1ST transfer unit.
(3) Insert PTC unit.
--> Remove and insert the 1ST transfer unit.
(4) Insert PCT harness. /Replace. (Transformer B801
(3) Abnormality of the PTC unit.
of the high-voltage TC PWB)
--> Remove and insert the PTC unit.
(5) Replace the high voltage TC PWB.
--> Replace the PTC unit.
(6 Replace PCU PWB.
(4) Imperfect insertion the PTC unit.
--> Remove and insert the PTC unit.
(5) Abnormality of the 1TC-K/C/M/Y harness.
C4-05 High-voltage MC Black circuit trouble --> Check 1TC-K/C/M/Y wiring.Replace.
(6) Abnormality of the high voltage TC PWB spring
Trouble detection PCU contact.
--> Check the high voltage TC PWB spring contact.
Cause 1) Pin getting away of a harness (PTC-ERR) and
(7) High TC PWB trouble.
breaking (TC PWB Input connector CN1-4pin)
--> Replace the high TC PWB.
2) High-voltage error circuit (PTC-ERR)
(8) PCU PWB trouble.
damage
--> Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy 1) Check connection of the harness.(TC PWB Input
2) Check & Check the operation of the 1ST transfer separation
connector CN1-4pin)
Remedy clutch1/2(1TURC_1,1TURC_2).
Replace the harness.
If the clutch or gera do not move smoothly or have
2) Check disconnection of the high voltage TC PWB
noise,
connector./Replace.
(1) Abnormality of 1ST transfer separation clutch.
--> Check connection of harness and check the
clutch.
--> Replace the clutch.
(2) Abnormality of 1ST transfer unit.
--> Check the 1ST transfer unit.
--> Replace the 1ST transfer unit.
3) Check & Check the operation of OPC Drum.
Remedy If it is not normal movement,
(1) Abnormality of Drum drive motor
(DVM_K.DVM_CL).
--> Check Drum drive motor (DVM_K,DVM_CL).
(2) Abnormality of OPC Drum (K/C/M/Y).
--> Check OPC Drum (K/C/M/Y).
--> Replace OPC Drum (K/C/M/Y).

C4-25 High-voltage 1TC circuit trouble

Trouble detection PCU

Cause 1) Pin getting away of a harness (1TC-ERR) and
breaking (TC PWB Input connector CN1-2pin)
2) High-voltage error circuit (1TC-ERR)
damage
Check & Remedy 1) Check connection of the harness.(1TC PWB Input
connector CN1-2pin)
Replace the harness.
2) Check disconnection of the high voltage TC PWB
connector./Replace.

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 13

1 : ‘16/Sep.

C4-30 2nd transfer High-voltage output trou- C4-40 High-voltage TC PWB trouble
ble (open)
Trouble detection PCU
Trouble detection PCU Cause 1) Input harness disconnection in the high voltage TC
PWB.
Cause Open circuit of the 2nd transfer out put.
2) Harness (1TC-ERR, 2TC-ERR, PTC-ERR) pin
1) Check & Use SIM8-6 to check the out put of [2TC]. If the
disconnection
Remedy leakage noise or the flickering on the screen of the
3) 24V fuse meltdown in the high voltage TC PWB
panel is detected;
4) High voltage error circuit (1TC-ERR, 2TC-ERR,
(1) Abnormality of 1ST transfer unit.
PTC-ERR) breakage in the high voltage TC PWB
--> Remove and insert the 1ST transfer unit.
Check & Remedy 1) Check the harness and the connector (TC PWB
--> Replace the 1ST transfer unit.
Input connector CN1)
(2) Imperfect insertion the 1ST transfer unit.
2) Check or replace the harness.(TC PWB input
--> Remove and insert the 1ST transfer unit.
connector CN1-2pin, CN1-3pin, CN1-4pin)
(3) Abnormality of 2nd transfer unit.
3) 4) Replace the MC PWB
--> Remove and insert the 2nd transfer unit.
--> Replace the 2ST transfer unit.
(4) Imperfect insertion the 2nd transfer unit.
E6-10 Shading error (Black correction) (SPF) 1
--> Remove and insert the 2nd transfer unit.
(5) Abnormality of the 2nd TC harness. (Transformer
B501 of the high-voltage TC PWB) Trouble detection SCN MFP
--> Check 2nd TC harness wiring.Replace.
Cause Installation error of the CCD unit harness.
(6) High voltage TC PWB trouble.
CCD unit trouble.
--> Replace the high voltage TC PWB.
DSPF PWB trouble.
(7) PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the installing state of the harness to the CCD
--> Replace the PCU PWB.
unit.
2) Check & Check the operation of the 2nd transfer separation
Check the CCD unit.
Remedy clutch (2TCRC).
Check the DSPF PWB.
If the clutch or gera do not move smoothly or have
noise,
(1) Abnormality of 2nd transfer separation clutch.
--> Check connection of harness and check the
E6-11 Shading error (White correction) (SPF)
clutch.
--> Replace the clutch. Trouble detection SCN MFP
(2) Abnormality of 2nd transfer unit. Cause Installation error of the CCD unit harness.
--> Check the 2nd transfer unit. Copy lamp lighting trouble.
--> Replace the 2nd transfer unit. Dirt on the mirror, the lens or the reference white
plate.
CCD unit trouble.
C4-31 2nd transfer High-voltage output trou- DSPF PWB trouble.
ble (short) Shading correction not executed.
Check & Remedy Check the installing state of the harness the CCD
unit.
Trouble detection PCU Check the installing state of the harness to the copy
Cause 1) Abnormality of 1ST transfer unit. lamp unit.
2) Imperfect insertion the 1ST transfer unit. Clean the mirror, the lens or the reference plate.
3) High voltage TC PWB trouble. Check the CCD unit.
Check & Remedy Use SIM8-6 to check the out put of [2TC]. Check the DSPF PWB.
1) Check the 1ST transfer unit.
Replace the 1ST transfer unit.
2) Remove and insert the 1ST transfer unit. E6-14 CCD ASIC error (SPF)
3) Replace the high TC PWB.

Trouble detection SCN MFP

C4-35 High-voltage 2TC circuit trouble Cause DSPF PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the DSPF PWB.

Trouble detection PCU

Cause 1) Pin getting away of a harness (2TC-ERR) and E7-01 SCN-MFP image data error
breaking (TC PWB Input connector CN1-3pin)
2) High-voltage error circuit (2TC-ERR)
damage Trouble detection MFP
Check & Remedy 1) Check connection of the harness.(TC PWB Input Cause Image data transfer error in the SCN-MFP PWB.
connector CN1-3pin) SCN-MFP PWB trouble.
Replace the harness. Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness
2) Check disconnection of the high voltage TC PWB of the SCN-MFP PWB.
connector./Replace. Check or replace the SCN-MFP PWB.

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 14

E7-03 HDD trouble / Mirroring kit error E7-20 LSU laser detection & deterioration
error (K)
Trouble detection SCN-MFP
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble in the SCN- Trouble detection PCU
MFP PWB and HDD.
Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode
HDD (error file management area) data abnormality
trouble.
(FAT breakage).
LSU harness, connector trouble
SCN-MFP PWB trouble.
BD PWB, LD PWB, LSUcnt PWB trouble
Break down HDD
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
HDD connector trouble
Check or replace the LSUcnt PWB.
error file management area data abnormality (FAT
Check connection of the LSU harness and connector.
breakage)
Replace the LSU.
HDD is not set normally.
SCN-MFP PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness E7-21 LSU laser deterioration error (C)
of the SCN-MFP PWB and HDD.
Use SIM62-2, 3 to check read/write operations of the
HDD. Trouble detection PCU
Replace the HDD. Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode
Check or replace the SCN-MFP PWB. trouble.
LSU harness, connector trouble
LD PWB, LSUcnt PWB trouble
E7-04 HDD-ASIC error Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
Check or replace the LSUcnt PWB.
Check connection of the LSU harness and connector.
Trouble detection SCN-MFP
Replace the LSU.
Cause ASIC trouble. (SCN-MFP PWB trouble.)
Check & Remedy Check or replace the SCN-MFP PWB.
E7-22 LSU laser deterioration error (M)
E7-10 Shading error Black correction (OC)
Trouble detection PCU
Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode
Trouble detection SCN-MFP trouble.
Cause Abnormality in the CCD black scan level when the LSU harness, connector trouble
scanner lamp is turned OFF. LD PWB, LSUcnt PWB trouble
Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit. Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
CCD unit abnormality. Check or replace the LSUcnt PWB.
SCN-MFP PWB abnormality. Check connection of the LSU harness and connector.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit. Replace the LSU.
Check the CCD unit.
Check or replace the SCN-MFP PWB.
E7-23 LSU laser deterioration error (Y)
E7-11 Shading error White correction (OC)
Trouble detection PCU
Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode
Trouble detection SCN-MFP trouble.
Cause Abnormality in the CCD white reference plate scan LSU harness, connector trouble
level when the scanner lamp is turned ON. LD PWB, LSUcnt PWB trouble
Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit. Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
Dirt on the mirror, lens, and the reference white plate. Check or replace the LSUcnt PWB.
Scanner lamp lighting trouble. Check connection of the LSU harness and connector.
Scanner lamp drive PWB trouble Replace the LSU.
CCD unit abnormality.
SCN-MFP PWB abnormality.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit. E7-24 LSU LD driver error (K)
Check connection of the harness to the scanner lamp
unit.
Check or replace the scanner lamp. Trouble detection PCU
Check or replace the scanner lamp drive PWB. Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode
Clean or replace the mirror, the lens, and the trouble.
reference white board. LSU connector trouble
Check or replace the CCD unit. LD PWB, LSUcnt PWB trouble
Check or replace the SCN-MFP PWB. Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
Check or replace the LSUcnt PWB.
Check connection of the LSU connector.
E7-14 CCD-ASIC error (OC) Replace the LSU.

Trouble detection SCN-MFP

Cause SCN-MFP PWB trouble.
CCD unit trouble.
Improper Installation of the harness to the CCD unit.
Check & Remedy Check or replace the SCN-MFP PWB.
Check or replace the CCD unit.
Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit.

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 15

E7-25 LSU LD driver error (C) E7-42 Image data trouble (Scanner
expansion PWB (ACRE) ASIC)
Trouble detection PCU
Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode Trouble detection SCN-MFP
trouble.
Cause An image data error occurs.
LSU connector trouble.
An image data send error occurs.
LD PWB, LSUcnt PWB trouble.
Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU. Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) trouble.
Check or replace the LSUcnt PWB. SCN-MFP PWB trouble.
Check connection of the LSU connector.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the scanner expansion PWB
Replace the LSU.
(ACRE).
Check the scanner expansion PWB (ACRE), and
replace if necessary.
E7-26 LSU LD driver error (M) Check the SCN-MFP PWB, and replace if necessary.

Trouble detection PCU

Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode E7-46 Image data decode error (Scanner
trouble. expansion PWB (ACRE) ASIC)
LSU connector trouble.
LD PWB, LSUcnt PWB trouble.
Trouble detection SCN-MFP
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
Check or replace the LSUcnt PWB. Cause A decode error occurs while high compression PDF
Check connection of the LSU connector. images are made. (garbled data)
Replace the LSU. Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) connection trouble.
Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) trouble.
SCN-MFP PWB trouble.
E7-27 LSU LD driver error (Y) Check & Remedy Check connection of the scanner expansion PWB
(ACRE).
Check the scanner expansion PWB (ACRE), and
Trouble detection PCU replace if necessary.
Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode Check the SCN-MFP PWB, and replace if necessary.
trouble.
LSU connector trouble.
LD PWB, LSUcnt PWB trouble. E7-47 Combination of firmware error
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU. between the SCN-MFP and the ACRE
Check or replace the LSUcnt PWB.
Check connection of the LSU connector. ASIC
Replace the LSU.
Trouble detection SCN-MFP
Cause Written ACRE board of the firmware that a model did
E7-28 LSU - PCU connection error not support MFP was connected.
Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
Trouble detection PCU Use SIM49-1 or SIM49-10 to execute firmware
Cause Communication error between the CPU in the PCU version-up
PWB and the LSU PWB ASIC.
Improper connection of the communication connector
between the PCU PWB and the LSUcnt PWB. E7-48 Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) ASIC
Harness trouble between the PCU PWB and the memory error
LSUcnt PWB.
PCU PWB trouble.
LSUcnt PWB trouble. Trouble detection SCN-MFP
LSU trouble. Cause Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) DIMM trouble,
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness memory slot trouble.
between the PCU PWB and the LSUcnt PWB. Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) DIMM insertion
Check the LSUcnt PWB. trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) connection trouble.
Replace the LSU. Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) trouble.
SCN-MFP PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check insertion of the scanner expansion PWB
E7-29 LSU ASIC frequency error (ACRE) DIMM memory.
Check the scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) DIMM
memory, and replace if necessary.
Trouble detection PCU Check connection of the scanner expansion PWB
Cause Oscillation abnormality of the external oscillator used (ACRE).
in the LSU ASIC. Check the scanner expansion PWB (ACRE), and
LSU ASIC abnormality on the LSU PWB. replace if necessary.
Frequency abnormality of picture transfer clock of Check the SCN-MFP PWB, and replace if necessary.
SCN-MFP PWB.
Check & Remedy Check or replace the LSUcnt PWB.
Check connection of the connector and the harness E7-49 Water Mark data error
between the SCN-MFP PWB and the LSUcnt PWB.
Check or replace the SCN-MFP PWB.
Trouble detection SCN-MFP
Cause Watermark data trouble.
mSATA SSD trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-5 to upload the watermark data.
Replace the mSATA SSD.

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 16

E7-50 engine connection trouble E7-90 SCN-MFP - PCU PWB communication
error
Trouble detection PCU
Cause A PWB/firmware/LSU which is not compatible with Trouble detection SCN-MFP
the machine specifications is detected.
Cause SCN-MFP PWB - PCU PWB connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
PCU PWB trouble.
LSU trouble
SCN-MFP PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the SCN-MFP PWB and PCU
Check or replace the LSU.
PWB.
Check or replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the SCN-MFP PWB.

E7-55 PWB information sum error (engine

detection) E7-91 Decode error (FAX reception print)

Trouble detection PCU Trouble detection SCN-MFP

Cause PCU EEPROM sum check error. Cause Compression dater abnormality.
PCU EEPROM trouble. HDD trouble.
PCU EEPROM contact trouble. mSATA SSD trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB. Image compression/transmission data corruption.
Replace the PCU EEPROM. SCN-MFP PWB trouble.
Memory attachment state abnormality.
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of
E7-60 Combination error between PWB and the memory.
Replace the HDD.
firmware Replace or check installation of the mSATA SSD.
Replace the SCN-MFP PWB.
Trouble detection SCN-MFP Replace the FAX control PWB.
Cause A PWB/firmware which is not compatible with the
machine specifications is detected in the SCN-MFP
PWB. E7-92 Decode error (FCOT)
SCN-MFP PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware. Trouble detection SCN-MFP
Check or replace the SCN-MFP PWB.
Cause Compression dater abnormality.
Image compression/transmission data corruption.
SCN-MFP PWB trouble
E7-61 Combination error between the SCN- DRAM memory trouble or contact error
MFP PWB and the PCU PWB Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of
the memory.
Replace the HDD.
Trouble detection SCN-MFP
Replace the SCN-MFP PWB.
Cause Combination error between the SCN-MFP PWB and
the PCU PWB.
SCN-MFP PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the combination between the SCN-MFP PWB
E7-93 Decode error (Usual processing)
and the PCU PWB.
Replace the SCN-MFP PWB or PCU PWB. Trouble detection SCN-MFP
Cause Compression dater abnormality.
Image compression/transmission data corruption.
E7-62 Combination error between the SCN- SCN-MFP PWB trouble
DRAM memory trouble or contact error
MFP PWB and the scanner
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of
the memory.
Trouble detection SCN-MFP (FAX Job case)
Cause Combination error between the SCN and the scanner Check the FAX PWB.
on the SCN-MFP PWB. (Other case)
Check & Remedy Check the SCN-MFP PWB. Check connection SCN-MFP PWB and HDD
Replace the SCN-MFP PWB. Replace the SCN-MFP PWB.

E7-80 Communication error between the E7-94 Decode error (additional processing)
SCN-MFP PWB and the scanner
Trouble detection SCN-MFP
Cause Compression dater abnormality.
Trouble detection SCN-MFP
Image compression/transmission data corruption.
Cause SCN-MFP PWB trouble.
SCN-MFP PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the SCN-MFP PWB. DRAM memory trouble or contact error
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of
the memory.
(FAX Job case) check the FAX PWB.
(Other case) check connection SCN-MFP PWB and
HDD
Replace the SCN-MFP PWB.

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 17

E7-96 SCN-MFP PWB memory check error EE-EC Automatic toner density adjustment
(SCN-MFP ASIC) error

Trouble detection SCN-MFP Trouble detection PCU

Cause At the time of access, data change occurrence Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
Abnormality of installation of the memory. Developing unit trouble.
Memory device trouble or contact error PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
the memory. Replace the developing unit.
Visually check the installation of the memory (MFP- Replace the PCU PWB.
ASIC side).
Re-install the memory.
If the trouble recurs, perform the following actions. EE-EL Automatic toner density adjustment
Replace the memory.
Replace SCN-MFP PWB.
error (Over toner)

Trouble detection PCU

E7-A0 LSU EEP ROM/LD-driver read/write Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
error (K) Developing unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Trouble detection PCU Replace the developing unit.
Cause EEPROM/LD-driver trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
EEPROM/LD-driver access circuit trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection between PCU PWB and LD PWB.
Check the LD PWB and replace the PCU PWB. EE-EU Automatic toner density adjustment
Replace the LSU.
error (Under toner)

E7-A1 LSU EEP ROM/LD-driver read/write Trouble detection PCU

error (C) Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
Developing unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Trouble detection PCU Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Cause EEPROM/LD-driver trouble. Replace the developing unit.
EEPROM/LD-driver access circuit trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Check connection between PCU PWB and LD PWB.
Check the LD PWB and replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the LSU. F1-00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication
error
E7-A2 LSU EEP ROM/LD-driver read/write
Trouble detection PCU
error (M)
Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
between the finisher and the PCU PWB.
Trouble detection PCU Finisher control PWB trouble.
Cause EEPROM/LD-driver trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
EEPROM/LD-driver access circuit trouble. Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness between the
Check & Remedy Check connection between PCU PWB and LD PWB. finisher and the PCU PWB.
Check the LD PWB and replace the PCU PWB. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Replace the LSU. Replace the PCU PWB.

E7-A3 LSU EEP ROM/LD-driver read/write F1-01 Jogger motor trouble (1K FIN)
error (Y)
Trouble detection PCU
Trouble detection PCU Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Cause EEPROM/LD-driver trouble. Finisher jogger motor trouble.
EEPROM/LD-driver access circuit trouble. Home position sensor trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection between PCU PWB and LD PWB.
Check the LD PWB and replace the PCU PWB. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the finisher
Replace the LSU. jogger motor.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
position sensor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
E7-A7 mSATA SSD trouble Replace the jogger motor.
Replace the home position sensor.
Trouble detection PCU Replace the Finisher control PWB.
Cause mSATA SSD trouble.
Improper connection of mSATA SSD.
SCN-MFP PWB trouble.
Data error of the file system management part.
Check & Remedy Remove and insert the mSATA SSD.
Replace the mSATA SSD.
Replace the SCN-MFP PWB.

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 18

F1-02 Inlet transport motor trouble (1K FIN) F1-05 Return belt motor trouble (INF)

Trouble detection PCU Trouble detection PCU

Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Finisher inlet transport motor trouble. Return belt motor trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Home position sensor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the finisher inlet Finisher control PWB trouble.
transfer motor. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the finisher
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home return belt motor.
position sensor. Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
Check connection of the connector and the harness. position sensor.
Replace the inlet transfer motor. Replace the finisher return belt motor.
Replace the Finisher control PWB. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the finisher control PWB.

F1-03 Swinging motor trouble (3K FIN)

F1-06 Paper exit transport/Tapping-Gather-
Trouble detection PCU ing roller motor trouble (1K FIN)
Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Finisher swinging motor trouble Trouble detection PCU
Home position sensor trouble Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Finisher control PWB trouble Paper exit transport/Tapping-Gathering roller motor
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the finisher trouble.
swinging motor. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit
position sensor. transport/Tapping-Gathering roller motor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the finisher swinging motor. Replace the Paper exit transport/Tapping-Gathering
Replace the home position sensor roller motor.
Replace the finisher control PWB Replace the finisher control PWB.

F1-04 Finisher paddle trouble F1-08 Stapler shift motor trouble

Trouble detection PCU Trouble detection PCU
Cause motor trouble. Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Finisher stapler shift motor trouble.
Home position sensor trouble. Home position sensor trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the finisher
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the stapler shift
paddle motor.
motor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
Replace the finisher control PWB.
position sensor.
Replace the finisher paddle motor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the harness.
Replace the stapler shift motor.
Replace the home position sensor.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
F1-04 Finisher paddle trouble (3K FIN)

Trouble detection PCU F1-10 Staple motor trouble

Cause motor trouble.
Clutch trouble. Trouble detection PCU
Finisher control PWB trouble. Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Staple motor trouble.
Home position sensor trouble. Home position sensor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the finisher exit Finisher control PWB trouble.
motor. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paddle motor.
drive clutch. Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
Check connection of the connector and the harness. position sensor.
Replace the finisher control PWB. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the finisher exit motor. Replace the staple motor.
Replace the paddle drive clutch. Replace the home position sensor.
Replace the paddle HP sensor. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Replace the harness.

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 19

F1-11 Finisher bundle exit motor trouble (1K F1-15 Finisher tray lift motor trouble
FIN)
Trouble detection PCU
Trouble detection PCU Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
tray lift motor trouble.
Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Finisher control PWB trouble.
Finisher bundle exit motor trouble.
Home position sensor trouble.
Home position sensor trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the tray lift
motor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of finisher bundle
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
exit motor.
position sensor.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
Replace the finisher control PWB.
position sensor.
Replace the tray lift motor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the home position sensor.
Replace the finisher bundle exit motor.
Replace the home position sensor.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
F1-15 Finisher tray lift motor trouble (3K FIN)

F1-12 Proof transport motor trouble (1K FIN) Trouble detection PCU
Cause Motor lock.
Trouble detection PCU Control PWB trouble.
Cause Motor driver detects the abnormality. Disconnection of harness.
(DC motor control trouble) Connector connection trouble.
(First time is jam detection, Second time is trouble Area sensor trouble.
detection) Paper exit paper surface detection sensor trouble.
Stapler safety switch trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the proof
transport motor. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the movable
Check connection of the connector and the harness. tray motor
Replace the proof transport motor. Check the harness and the connector connection
Replace the finisher control PWB. from the control PWB to the motor and the sensor
Replace the stacker control PWB
Replace the movable tray motor
Replace the following area sensors.
F1-13 Paper exit guide plate switching motor - Loading tray upper limit sensor
trouble (1K FIN) - Loading tray home position sensor
- Loading tray full load sensor (Large coat paper full)
- Loading tray middle sensor (Large size full load)
Trouble detection PCU
- Loading tray lower limit sensor Small size full load)
Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Replace the paper exit paper surface detection
Paper exit guide plate switching motor trouble.
sensor 1
Home position sensor trouble.
Replace the stapler safety switch
Finisher control PWB trouble.
Replace the harness from the control PWB to the
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit motor and the sensor
guide plate switching motor.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
position sensor
Check connection of the connector and the harness
F1-16 Escape/Saddle transport switching
Replace the paper exit guide plate switching motor flapper motor trouble (3K FIN)
Replace the home position sensor
Replace the finisher control PWB
Trouble detection PCU
Cause Motor lock.
Control PWB trouble.
F1-14 Rear paper edge flap motor trouble Disconnection of harness.
(3K FIN) Connector connection trouble.
Home position sensor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the escape/
Trouble detection PCU
saddle transport switching flapper motor.
Cause motor trouble.
Check the harness and the connector connection
Finisher control PWB trouble.
from the control PWB to the motor and the sensor.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Replace the stacker control PWB.
Home position sensor trouble.
Replace the escape/saddle transport switching
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the finisher rear flapper motor.
paper edge flap motor. Replace the home position sensor.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home Replace the harness.
position sensor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Replace the finisher rear paper edge flap motor.
Replace the home position sensor.
Replace the harness.

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 20

 1 : ‘16/Sep.

F1-18 Finisher paper bundle hold trouble F1-23 Safety switch trouble
(INF)
Trouble detection PCU
Trouble detection PCU Cause control PWB trouble
connection trouble of harness
Cause Check connection from the control PWB to the motor
connection trouble of connector
and the sensor.
safety switch trouble
Paddle motor trouble.
front door switch trouble
Home position sensor trouble.
front door sensor trouble
Finisher control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection between the control PWB and
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paddle
sensor
motor.
Replace the control PWB
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
Replace safety switch
position sensor.
Replace front door switch
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace front door sensor
Replace the paddle motor.
Replace the home position sensor.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
F1-28 Flap motor trouble (1K FIN)

F1-19 Front alignment motor trouble Trouble detection PCU

Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Trouble detection PCU Flap motor trouble
Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Home position sensor trouble
Finisher paper alignment motor F trouble Finisher control PWB trouble
Home position sensor trouble Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the flap motor.
Finisher control PWB trouble Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the finisher position sensor.
paper alignment motor F. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home Replace the flap motor.
position sensor. Replace the home position sensor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Replace the finisher paper alignment motor F.
Replace the home position sensor.
Replace the finisher control PWB. F1-28 Drawing lift motor trouble (3K FIN)

Trouble detection PCU

F1-20 Rear alignment motor trouble Cause Motor lock.
Control PWB trouble.
Trouble detection PCU Disconnection of harness.
Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Connector connection trouble.
Finisher paper alignment motor R trouble Home position sensor trouble.
Home position sensor trouble Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the drawing lift
Finisher control PWB trouble motor.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the finisher
position sensor.
paper alignment motor R.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
Replace the drawing lift motor.
position sensor.
Replace the home position sensor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Replace the finisher paper alignment motor R.
Replace the home position sensor.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
F1-29 Fuse break detection trouble (1K FIN)
1
Trouble detection PCU
F1-22 Finisher assist motor trouble (INF/ Cause Over current (PWB breakage, harness short-circuit,
3K FIN) solenoid trouble)
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the each motor
and the solenoid.
Trouble detection PCU
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the each
Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
sensor.
Finisher assist motor trouble
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Home position sensor trouble
Replace each motor.
Finisher control PWB trouble
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the finisher
assist motor.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
position sensor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the finisher assist motor.
Replace the home position sensor.
Replace the finisher control PWB.

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 21

F1-30 Communication trouble between the F1-33 Finisher punch shift motor trouble
finisher and the saddle (3K FIN) (1K FIN)

Trouble detection PCU Trouble detection PCU

Cause Control PWB trouble. Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Disconnection of harness. Finisher punch shift motor trouble
Connector connection trouble. Home position sensor trouble
Firmware of the after-process is not the latest version. Finisher control PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector connection Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the finisher
from the finisher to the saddle. punch shift motor.
Replace the stacker control PWB. Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
Replace the saddle control PWB. position sensor.
Replace the harness from the finisher to the saddle. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Upgrade the firm wares of the master software and Replace the finisher punch shift motor.
the saddle software. Replace the home position sensor.
Replace the finisher control PWB.

F1-31 Finisher saddle motor trouble

(1K FIN) F1-33 Finisher punch side registration motor
trouble (3K FIN)
Trouble detection PCU
Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Trouble detection PCU
Saddle motor trouble. Cause Motor lock.
Finisher control PWB trouble Control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle Disconnection of harness.
motor. Connector connection trouble.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Home position sensor trouble.
Replace the saddle motor. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch unit
Replace the finisher control PWB. side registration motor.
Check the harness and the connector connection
from the control PWB to the motor and the sensor.
F1-31 Paper exit motor trouble (3K FIN) Replace the punch control PWB.
Replace the punch unit side registration motor.
Replace the punch unit side registration home
Trouble detection PCU position sensor.
Cause Motor lock. Replace the harness from the control PWB to the
Control PWB trouble. motor and the sensor.
Disconnection of harness.
Connector connection trouble.
Home position sensor trouble. F1-34 Punch motor trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit
motor.
Check the harness and the connector connection Trouble detection PCU
from the control PWB to the motor and the sensor. Cause Punch motor trouble.
Replace the saddle control PWB. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Replace the paper exit motor. Home position sensor trouble.
Replace the saddle paper exit clock sensor. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Replace the harness. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the finisher
punch motor.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
F1-32 Communication trouble between the position sensor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
finisher and the punch unit Replace the finisher punch motor.
Replace the home position sensor.
Trouble detection PCU Replace the finisher control PWB.
Cause Control PWB trouble.
Disconnection of harness.
Connector connection trouble. F1-35 Side registration detection motor trou-
Firmware of the after-process is not the latest version. ble (1K FIN)
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Replace the punch unit control PWB. Trouble detection PCU
Replace the harness. Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Side registration detection motor trouble
Home position sensor trouble
Finisher control PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the side
registration detection motor.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
position sensor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the side registration detection motor.
Replace the home position sensor.
Replace the finisher control PWB.

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 22

F1-37 Finisher PWB backup memory error F1-43 Saddle alignment operation trouble
(3K FIN)
Trouble detection PCU
Cause Finisher control PWB trouble. Trouble detection PCU
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power Cause Motor lock.
Replace the finisher control PWB. Control PWB trouble.
Disconnection of harness.
Connector connection trouble.
F1-38 Finisher punch unit PWB backup Home position sensor trouble.
memory error Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
alignment motor.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
Trouble detection PCU position sensor.
Cause Punch control PWB trouble. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power Replace the saddle alignment motor.
Replace the punch control PWB. Replace the home position sensor.
Replace the finisher control PWB.

F1-41 Saddle paper positioning motor trou-

ble (1K FIN) F1-44 Gripper motor trouble (3K FIN)

Trouble detection PCU Trouble detection PCU

Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Cause Motor lock.
Finisher saddle paper positioning motor trouble. Control PWB trouble.
Home position sensor trouble. Disconnection of harness.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Connector connection trouble.
Home position sensor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the finisher
saddle paper positioning motor. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the gripper
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home motor.
position sensor. Check the harness and the connector connection
Check connection of the connector and the harness. from the control PWB to the motor and the sensor.
Replace the finisher saddle paper positioning motor. Replace the saddle control PWB.
Replace the home position sensor. Replace the gripper motor.
Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the saddle gripper motor home position
sensor.
Replace the harness from the control PWB to the
motor and the sensor.
F1-41 Saddle paper positioning motor trou-
ble (3K FIN)
F1-45 Saddle staple motor trouble (3K FIN)
Trouble detection PCU
Cause Motor lock. Trouble detection PCU
Control PWB trouble. Cause Motor lock.
Disconnection of harness. Control PWB trouble.
Connector connection trouble. Disconnection of harness.
Home position sensor trouble Connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the rear edge Home position sensor trouble.
stopper motor. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
Check the harness and the connector connection staple motor.
from the control PWB to the motor and the sensor. Check the harness and the connector connection
Replace the saddle control PWB. from the control PWB to the motor and the sensor.
Replace the rear edge stopper motor. Replace the saddle control PWB.
Replace the rear edge stopper home position sensor. Replace the saddle staple motor.
Replace the harness from the control PWB to the Replace the saddle staple drive home position
motor and the sensor. sensor.
Replace the harness from the control PWB to the
motor and the sensor.
F1-42 Switching lever drive motor trouble
(3K FIN)

Trouble detection PCU

Cause Motor lock.
Control PWB trouble.
Disconnection of harness.
Connector connection trouble.
Home position sensor trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the switching
lever drive motor.
Check the harness and the connector connection
from the control PWB to the motor and the sensor.
Replace the saddle control PWB.
Replace the switching lever drive motor.
Replace the switching lever home position sensor.
Replace the harness from the control PWB to the
motor and the sensor.

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 23

F1-46 Saddle pushing plate motor trouble F1-48 Bundle transport upper pressure
(1K FIN) release/reference fence escape motor
trouble (1K FIN)
Trouble detection PCU
Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Trouble detection PCU
Finisher saddle pushing plate motor trouble.
Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Home position sensor (Folding blade home position)
Bundle transport upper pressure release/reference
trouble
fence escape motor trouble
Home position sensor (Folding cam home position)
Home position sensor trouble
trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble
Finisher control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the bundle
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the finisher
transport upper pressure release/reference fence
saddle pushing plate motor.
escape motor
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
position sensor.
position sensor
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Check connection of the connector and the harness
Replace the finisher saddle pushing plate motor.
Replace the bundle transport upper pressure release/
Replace the home position sensor.
reference fence escape motor
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Replace the home position sensor
Replace the finisher control PWB

F1-46 Push and holding motor trouble (3K

FIN) F1-49 Bundle transport lower pressure
release motor trouble (1K FIN)
Trouble detection PCU
Cause Motor lock. Trouble detection PCU
Control PWB trouble.
Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Disconnection of harness.
Bundle transport upper pressure release/reference
Connector connection trouble.
fence escape motor trouble
Home position sensor, clock sensor trouble.
Home position sensor trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the push and Finisher control PWB trouble
folding motor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the bundle
Check the harness and the connector connection
transport lower pressure release motor.
from the control PWB to the motor and the sensor.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
Replace the saddle control PWB.
position sensor.
Replace the push and folding motor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the push and folding home position sensor.
Replace the bundle transport lower pressure release
Replace the saddle folding motor clock sensor.
motor.
Replace the harness from the control PWB to the
Replace the home position sensor.
motor and the sensor.
Replace the finisher control PWB.

F1-47 Paddle trouble (Saddle section) (3K F1-50 Main unit - Finisher combination error
FIN)
Trouble detection PCU
Trouble detection PCU Cause The finisher which is not supported by the main unit
Cause Motor lock. model is installed.
Control PWB trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Disconnection of harness. Check & Remedy Install a proper finisher.
Connector connection trouble. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Home position sensor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
paper exit motor. F1-51 Communication trouble between the
Check the harness and the connector connection
from the control PWB to the motor and the sensor.
master and the sub software at fin-
Replace the saddle control PWB. isher (3K FIN)
Replace the saddle paper exit motor.
Replace the saddle paddle home position sensor.
Trouble detection PCU
Replace the harness from the control PWB to the
motor and the sensor. Cause Control PWB trouble.
Firmware of the finisher is not the latest version.
Check & Remedy Upgrade the firmware of the finisher.
Replace the finisher control PWB.

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 24

F1-53 Unsupported after-process unit main F1-89 Shift motor trouble (1K FIN)
unit trouble
Trouble detection PCU
Trouble detection PCU Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Shift motor trouble
Cause Firmware of the finisher is not the latest version.
Home position sensor trouble
Check & Remedy Upgrade the firmware of the finisher.
Finisher control PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the shift motor.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
F1-54 Unset finisher punch unit destination position sensor.
trouble (INF) Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the shift motor.
Replace the home position sensor.
Trouble detection PCU
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Cause Incorrect destination setting of the punch unit.
Check & Remedy Set the correct destination setting for the punch unit
in the service mode.
F2-22 Discharge lamp trouble (K)

F1-55 After-process unit ROM trouble Trouble detection PCU

Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB (K)
and the PCU PWB.
Trouble detection PCU Discharge lamp PWB (K) trouble.
Cause Main firmware trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Conflict the main firmware version and the boot
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-4 to check the operation of the discharge
version.
lamp on.
Check & Remedy Upgrade the firmware of the finisher. Replace the discharge lamp PWB (K).
Check the harness and the connector.
Replace the PCU PWB.

F1-78 Finisher staple-free staple motor sec-

tion trouble F2-23 Discharge lamp trouble (C)

Trouble detection PCU Trouble detection PCU

Cause Motor lock Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB (C)
Finisher control PWB trouble and the PCU PWB.
Home position, encoder sensor trouble Discharge lamp PWB (C) trouble.
Disconnection of harness or connector PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple-free Check & Remedy Use SIM5-4 to check the operation of the discharge
staple motor. lamp on.
Check the harness and the connector connection Replace the discharge lamp PWB (C).
from the control PWB to the motor and the sensor. Check the harness and the connector.
Replace the stacker control PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the staple-free staple unit.
Replace the harness from the control PWB to the
motor and the sensor. F2-24 Discharge lamp trouble (M)

Trouble detection PCU

F1-83 Guide sub motor trouble (3K FIN) Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB
(M) and the PCU PWB.
Discharge lamp PWB (M) trouble.
Trouble detection PCU PCU PWB trouble.
Cause Motor lock. Check & Remedy Use SIM5-4 to check the operation of the discharge
Control PWB trouble. lamp on.
Disconnection of harness. Replace the discharge lamp PWB (M).
Connector connection trouble. Check the harness and the connector.
Home position sensor trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the guide sub
motor.
Check the harness and the connector connection F2-25 Discharge lamp trouble (Y)
from the control PWB to the motor and the sensor.
Replace the stacker control PWB.
Replace the guide sub motor. Trouble detection PCU
Replace the front tongue-shaped home position Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB (Y)
senor. and the PCU PWB.
Replace the rear tongue-shaped home position Discharge lamp PWB (Y) trouble.
senor. PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the harness from the control PWB to the Check & Remedy Use SIM5-4 to check the operation of the discharge
motor and the sensor. lamp on.
Replace the discharge lamp PWB (Y).
Check the harness and the connector.
Replace the PCU PWB.

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 25

F2-39 Temperature/humidity sensor trouble F2-45 Color image density sensor trouble
(Indoor temperature detection trouble)
Trouble detection PCU
Trouble detection PCU Cause Image density sensor trouble.
Image density sensor harness and PCU PWB
Cause Detection of abnormality by the temperature sensor
connector connection trouble.
on internal temperature/ humidity sensor
Image density sensor dirt.
PCU PWB trouble.
Transfer belt cleaning trouble.
Check & Remedy Check internal temperature/humidity sensor and
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-6 to execute the process control.
check the connection of harness and connector.
Clean the image density sensor.
Check the PCU PWB.
Replace the image density sensor.

F2-40 Toner density sensor trouble (K)

F2-49 LSU thermistor trouble
Trouble detection PCU
Trouble detection PCU
Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality.
Sensor connector and harness connection trouble. Cause The LSU temperature is outside of -28C - 78C.
Developing unit trouble. LSU thermistor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. LSU thermistor harness and connector connection
trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check connection of the sensor connector and the
LSUcnt PWB trouble.
harness.
LD PWB trouble.
Replace the developing unit.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector connection at
LSU thermistor.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the LSU.
F2-41 Toner density sensor trouble (C) Replace the LSUcnt PWB.

Trouble detection PCU

Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality. F2-50 K drum phase sensor trouble
Sensor connector and harness connection trouble.
Developing unit trouble.
Trouble detection PCU
PCU PWB trouble.
Cause Drum phase sensor dirt.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Drum phase sensor trouble.
Check connection of the sensor connector and the
Drum phase sensor harness and connector
harness.
connection trouble
Replace the developing unit.
Drum drive section trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the sensor condition and check the
connection.
F2-42 Toner density sensor trouble (M) Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of "DHPD_K".
Replace the drum phase sensor.
Trouble detection PCU Repair the drum drive section.
Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality. Replace the PCU PWB.
Sensor connector and harness connection trouble.
Developing unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. F2-51 C drum phase sensor trouble (C)
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Check connection of the sensor connector and the Trouble detection PCU
harness.
Cause Drum phase sensor dirt.
Replace the developing unit.
Drum phase sensor trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Drum phase sensor harness and connector
connection trouble
Drum drive section trouble.
F2-43 Toner density sensor trouble (Y) PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the sensor condition and check the
Trouble detection PCU connection.
Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality. Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of "DHPD_CL".
Sensor connector and harness connection trouble. Replace the drum phase sensor.
Developing unit trouble. Repair the drum drive section.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Check connection of the sensor connector and the
harness.
Replace the developing unit.
Replace the PCU PWB.

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 26

F2-52 M drum phase sensor trouble (M) F2-65 Toner supply operation trouble (C)

Trouble detection PCU Trouble detection PCU

Cause Drum phase sensor dirt. Cause Toner motor trouble.
Drum phase sensor trouble. Toner density sensor trouble.
Drum phase sensor harness and connector Connector/harness trouble.
connection trouble PCU PWB trouble.
Drum drive section trouble. Toner cartridge trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Developing unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the sensor condition and check the Hopper section trouble
connection. Check & Remedy Replace the toner motor.
Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of "DHPD_CL". Replace the toner density sensor.
Replace the drum phase sensor. Connector and harness check.
Repair the drum drive section. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the toner cartridge.
Replace the developing unit.
Check the hopper section.
F2-53 Y drum phase sensor trouble (Y)

Trouble detection PCU

F2-66 Toner supply operation trouble (M)
Cause Drum phase sensor dirt.
Drum phase sensor trouble. Trouble detection PCU
Drum phase sensor harness and connector Cause Toner motor trouble.
connection trouble Toner density sensor trouble.
Drum drive section trouble. Connector/harness trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the sensor condition and check the Toner cartridge trouble.
connection. Developing unit trouble.
Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of "DHPD_CL". Hopper section trouble
Replace the drum phase sensor. Check & Remedy Replace the toner motor.
Repair the drum drive section. Replace the toner density sensor.
Replace the PCU PWB. Connector and harness check.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the toner cartridge.
F2-58 Temperature/humidity sensor trouble Replace the developing unit.
Check the hopper section.
(Indoor humidity detection trouble)

Trouble detection PCU F2-67 Toner supply operation trouble (Y)

Cause Detection of abnormality by the humidity sensor on
internal temperature/ humidity sensor.
Trouble detection PCU
Check & Remedy Check internal temperature/humidity sensor and
Cause Toner motor trouble.
check the connection of harness and connector.
Toner density sensor trouble.
Check the PCU PWB.
Connector/harness trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Toner cartridge trouble.
F2-64 Toner supply operation trouble (K) Developing unit trouble.
Hopper section trouble
Trouble detection PCU Check & Remedy Replace the toner motor.
Cause Toner motor trouble. Replace the toner density sensor.
Toner density sensor trouble. Connector and harness check.
Connector/harness trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the toner cartridge.
Toner cartridge trouble. Replace the developing unit.
Developing unit trouble. Check the hopper section.
Hopper section trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the toner motor.
Replace the toner density sensor. F2-70 Improper toner cartridge detection (K)
Connector and harness check.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble detection PCU
Replace the toner cartridge.
Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main
Replace the developing unit.
unit detects a toner cartridge of a different
Check the hopper section.
specification.)
Toner cartridge trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Replace the PCU PWB.

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 27

F2-71 Improper toner cartridge detection (C) F2-77 Toner cartridge CRUM error (Y)

Trouble detection PCU Trouble detection PCU

Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
unit detects a toner cartridge of a different PCU PWB trouble.
specification.) Connector and harness trouble between PCU PWB
Toner cartridge trouble. and toner cartridge
PCU PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check the connector and the harness between the
PCU PWB and the toner cartridge.

F2-72 Improper toner cartridge detection (M)

F2-78 Image density sensor adjustment
Trouble detection PCU trouble
Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main
unit detects a toner cartridge of a different Trouble detection PCU
specification.) Cause PCU PWB trouble
Toner cartridge trouble. Harness connection trouble between PCU PWB and
PCU PWB trouble. Image density sensor
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge. Check & Remedy Check printed image for image density trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check the harness connection between PCU PWB
and the sensor.
Clean the image density sensor.
F2-73 Improper toner cartridge detection (Y) Check the condition of Transfer belt surface.
If the error cannot be fixed, replace the image sensor
Trouble detection PCU exclusive for registration.
Replace the transfer belt.
Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main
Replace the PCU PWB.
unit detects a toner cartridge of a different
Replace the developer.
specification.)
Toner cartridge trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
F2-95 Ejecting operation trouble (K)
Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble detection PCU
Cause Ejecting sensor trouble.
F2-74 Toner cartridge CRUM error (K) Harness connection trouble.
Toner motor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Trouble detection PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM10-03 to check the operation of the eject
Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
arm.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check the harness connection and dirt at the eject
Connector and harness trouble between PCU PWB
sensor.
and toner cartridge
Replace the eject sensor.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Check the harness connection at the toner motor.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the toner motor.
Check the connector and the harness between the
Replace the PCU PWB.
PCU PWB and the toner cartridge.

F2-75 Toner cartridge CRUM error (C) F2-96 Ejecting operation trouble (C)

Trouble detection PCU

Trouble detection PCU
Cause Ejecting sensor trouble.
Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
Harness connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Toner motor trouble.
Connector and harness trouble between PCU PWB
PCU PWB trouble
and toner cartridge
Check & Remedy Use SIM10-03 to check the operation of the eject
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
arm.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Check the harness connection and dirt at the eject
Check the connector and the harness between the
sensor.
PCU PWB and the toner cartridge.
Replace the eject sensor.
Check the harness connection at the toner motor.
Replace the toner motor.
F2-76 Toner cartridge CRUM error (M) Replace the PCU PWB.

Trouble detection PCU

Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Connector and harness trouble between PCU PWB
and toner cartridge
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Check the connector and the harness between the
PCU PWB and the toner cartridge.

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 28

F2-97 Ejecting operation trouble (M) F6-00 MFPC PWB - FAX communication
trouble
Trouble detection PCU
Cause Ejecting sensor trouble. Section SCN-MFP
Harness connection trouble.
Case 1 Cause FAX PWB trouble.
Toner motor trouble.
Check Replace the FAX PWB.
PCU PWB trouble
and
Check & Remedy Use SIM10-03 to check the operation of the eject
Remedy
arm.
Case 2 Cause FAX PWB - SCN-MFPC PWB connector and harness
Check the harness connection at the eject sensor.
trouble
Replace the eject sensor.
Check the harness connection and dirt at the toner Check Check the connector and the harness between the
motor. and FAX PWB and the SCN-MFPC PWB.
Replace the toner motor. Remedy
Replace the PCU PWB. Case 3 Cause FAX PWB - Mother board connector and harness
trouble
Check Check the connector and the harness between the
F2-98 Ejecting operation trouble (Y) and FAX PWB and the mother board.
Remedy
Case 4 Cause FAX PWB ROM trouble / ROM pin breakage
Trouble detection PCU Check Check the ROM of the FAX PWB.
Cause Ejecting sensor trouble. and
Harness connection trouble. Remedy
Toner motor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM10-03 to check the operation of the eject F6-01 FAX PWB EEPROM read/write error
arm.
Check the harness connection and dirt at the eject
sensor. Section FAX
Replace the eject sensor. Case 1 Cause FAX PWB EEPROM trouble
Check the harness connection at the toner motor. Check Check that no trouble occurs after replacement of
Replace the toner motor. and PIC.
Replace the PCU PWB. Remedy Execute the memory check of SIM66-3 to insure that
EEPROM can be accessed.
Case 2 Cause FAX PWB PIC access circuit trouble
F3-12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble Check Replace the FAX PWB.
and
Remedy
Trouble detection PCU
Cause LUD1 sensor trouble.
Paper feed tray 1 lift up motor trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
F6-02 FAX power supply trouble
at the PCU PWB and lift up unit and paper feed unit.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector Trouble detection PCU
of LUD1. Cause DC power supply trouble at the main machine.
Replace the lift-up unit. SCN-MFP PWB trouble (Fuse break trouble).
Replace the PCU PWB. 24 volt detection circuit Trouble at FAX PWB.
Harness trouble between the FAN PWB and SCN-
MFP PWB.
F3-22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble Check & Remedy Check the 24 volt supply circuit between the machine
and the FAX PWB.
Replace the DC power supply unit at the machine.
Trouble detection PCU
Replace the SCN-MFP PWB.
Cause LUD2 sensor trouble.
Replace the FAX PWB.
Paper feed tray 2 lift up motor trouble.
REplace the harness between the machine and the
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
FAX PWB.
at the PCU PWB and lift up unit and paper feed unit.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector
of LUD2.
Replace the lift-up unit.
F6-04 FAX MODEM operation trouble
Replace the PCU PWB.
Section FAX
Case 1 Cause FAX MODEM chip operation trouble.
Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause The FAX MODEM chip cannot be accessed.
Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
and
Remedy

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 29

F6-21 Improper combination of TEL/LIU H2-01 Thermistor open trouble (Lower main
PWB and FAX soft switch TH_LM) (TH_LM)

Section FAX Trouble detection PCU

Case 1 Cause The destination of the TEL/LIU PWB installed is Cause Thermistor trouble
improper. PCU PWB trouble
Check Check the destination of the TEL/LIU PWB. Thermistor connector and harness trouble
and AC Power unit trouble
Remedy Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
Case 2 Cause TEL/LIU PWB trouble. Replace the thermistor.
Check Replace the TEL/LIU PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
and Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
Remedy harness.
Case 3 Cause Different Fax PWB information (Soft Switch) Check the connector in the fusing section.
Check Check Fax PWB information (Soft Switch)
and
Remedy H2-02 Thermistor open trouble (Upper sub
TH_US1 detection) (TH_SUB2_2)
F6-30 FAX 1-chip microprocessor access Trouble detection PCU
error (FAX detection) Cause Thermistor trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Section FAX Thermistor connector and harness trouble
AC Power unit trouble
Case 1 Cause Program writing trouble to the 1-chip microprocessor,
or no program data written. Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
Replace the thermistor.
Check Use SIM66-42 to rewrite the 1-chip microprocessor
Replace the PCU PWB.
and program.
Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
Remedy
harness.
Case 2 Cause FAX 1-chip microprocessor circuit trouble.
Check the connector in the fusing section.
Check Replace the FAX PWB and
and Use SIM66-42 to rewrite the program.
Remedy
H2-03 Thermistor open trouble (Upper main
TH_UM compensation)
F6-97 Incompatibility between FAX PWB and (TH_UM_CS)
the main machine
Trouble detection PCU
Section FAX Cause Thermistor trouble
Case 1 Cause The FAX PWB installed is improper. PCU PWB trouble
FAX PWB trouble. Thermistor connector and harness trouble
AC Power unit trouble
Check and Install a proper FAX PWB.
Remedy Replace the FAX PWB. Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
Replace the thermistor.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
F6-98 Incompatibility between the FAX PWB harness.
destination and the main machine Check the connector in the fusing section.
destination
H2-05 Thermistor open trouble (Upper sub
Section FAX
Case 1 Cause Incompatibility between the destination information TH_US1 compensation)
written into the FAX PWB PCI and that in the main (TH_SUB2_2_CS)
machine (set with SIM26-6)
Check Check the destination of the FAX control PWB.
Trouble detection PCU
and Check the destination of the main machine (SIM26-
Cause Thermistor trouble
Remedy 06)
PCU PWB trouble
Thermistor connector and harness trouble
AC Power unit trouble
H2-00 Thermistor open trouble (Upper main Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
TH_UM detection) (TH_LM) Replace the thermistor.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
Trouble detection PCU
harness.
Cause Thermistor trouble
Check the connector in the fusing section.
PCU PWB trouble
Thermistor connector and harness trouble
AC Power unit trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
Replace the thermistor.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
harness.
Check the connector in the fusing section.

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 30

H2-06 Thermistor open trouble (Upper edge) H4-00 Fusing section low temperature
(TH_US2) trouble (Upper main) (TH_UM)

Trouble detection PCU Trouble detection PCU

Cause Thermistor trouble Cause Thermistor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble Heater lamp trouble.
Thermistor connector and harness trouble PCU PWB trouble.
AC Power unit trouble Thermostat trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor. AC Power unit trouble.
Replace the thermistor. Interlock switch trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check & Remedy Use SIM05-02 to check the flushing operation of the
Check connection of the thermistor connector and the heater lamp.
harness. When the lamp lights on correctly, check the
Check the connector in the fusing section. thermistor or the harness.
Check the input circuit of the thermistor on the PCU
PWB.
H3-00 Fusing section high temperature When the lamp does not light on correctly, check the
cut-line of the heater harness and the thermostat.
trouble (Upper main) (TH_UM) Check the interlock switch.
Check the lamp control circuit on the AC PWB and
Trouble detection PCU the PCU PWB.
Cause Thermistor trouble Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Fusing section connector connection trouble
AC Power unit trouble H4-01 Fusing section low temperature
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-2 to check the flushing operation of the trouble (Lower main) (TH_LM)
heater lamp.
When the lamp lights on correctly, check the
thermistor or the harness. Trouble detection PCU
Check the input circuit of the thermistor on the PCU Cause Thermistor trouble.
PWB. Heater lamp trouble.
When the lamp keeps on lighting, check the lamp PCU PWB trouble.
control circuit on the AC PWB and the PCU PWB. Thermostat trouble.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. AC Power unit trouble.
Interlock switch trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM05-02 to check the flushing operation of the
H3-01 Fusing section high temperature heater lamp.
When the lamp lights on correctly, check the
trouble (Lower main) (TH_LM) thermistor or the harness.
Check the input circuit of the thermistor on the PCU
Trouble detection PCU PWB.
Cause Thermistor trouble When the lamp does not light on correctly, check the
PCU PWB trouble cut-line of the heater harness and the thermostat.
Fusing section connector connection trouble Check the interlock switch.
AC Power unit trouble Check the lamp control circuit on the AC PWB and
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-2 to check the flushing operation of the the PCU PWB.
heater lamp. Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
When the lamp lights on correctly, check the
thermistor or the harness.
Check the input circuit of the thermistor on the PCU H4-02 Fusing section low temperature
PWB. trouble (Upper sub) (TH_US1)
When the lamp keeps on lighting, check the lamp
control circuit on the AC PWB and the PCU PWB.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. Trouble detection PCU
Cause Thermistor trouble.
Heater lamp trouble.
H3-02 Fusing section high temperature PCU PWB trouble.
Thermostat trouble.
trouble (Upper sub) (TH_US1) AC Power unit trouble.
Interlock switch trouble.
Trouble detection PCU Check & Remedy Use SIM05-02 to check the flushing operation of the
Cause Thermistor trouble heater lamp.
PCU PWB trouble When the lamp lights on correctly, check the
Fusing section connector connection trouble thermistor or the harness.
AC Power unit trouble Check the input circuit of the thermistor on the PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-2 to check the flushing operation of the PWB.
heater lamp. When the lamp does not light on correctly, check the
When the lamp lights on correctly, check the cut-line of the heater harness and the thermostat.
thermistor or the harness. Check the interlock switch.
Check the input circuit of the thermistor on the PCU Check the lamp control circuit on the AC PWB and
PWB. the PCU PWB.
When the lamp keeps on lighting, check the lamp Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
control circuit on the AC PWB and the PCU PWB.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 31

H4-30 Thermistor differential input trouble H7-10 Recovery error from low fuser temp.
(Upper main) (TH_UM) (Upper main) (TH_UM)

Trouble detection PCU Trouble detection PCU

Cause HL_UM does not light. Cause Thermistor trouble.
Thermistor trouble. Heater lamp trouble.
Harness trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Thermostat trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM05-02 to check the flushing operation of the Connector, harness connection trouble.
heater lamp. AC Power unit trouble.
When the lamp lights on correctly, check the Interlock switch trouble
thermistor or the harness. Check & Remedy Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
Check the input circuit of the thermistor on the PCU heater lamp.
PWB. Replace the thermostat conduction.
When the lamp does not light on correctly, check the Replace the heater lamp.
cut-line of the heater harness and the thermostat. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check the interlock switch. Replace the AC PWB.
Check the lamp control circuit on the AC PWB and Check connection of the connector and the harness.
the PCU PWB.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
H7-12 Recovery error from low fuser temp.
(TH_LM)
H4-32 Thermistor differential input trouble
(Upper sub) (TH_US1) Trouble detection PCU
Cause Thermistor trouble.
Trouble detection PCU Thermostat trouble.
Cause HL_UM does not light. Heater lamp trouble.
Thermistor trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Harness trouble. AC Power unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Interlock switch trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM05-02 to check the flushing operation of the Connector, harness connection trouble.
heater lamp. Check & Remedy Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
When the lamp lights on correctly, check the heater lamp.
thermistor or the harness. Replace the thermostat conduction.
Check the input circuit of the thermistor on the PCU Replace the heater lamp.
PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
When the lamp does not light on correctly, check the Replace the AC PWB.
cut-line of the heater harness and the thermostat. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Check the interlock switch.
Check the lamp control circuit on the AC PWB and
the PCU PWB. L1-00 Scanner feed trouble
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.

Trouble detection SCN-MFP

H5-01 5 times continuous POD1 not-reach Cause Mirror unit trouble
Wire is removed from the mirror.
jam Lock screw is not removed.
Circuit trouble
Trouble detection PCU Check & Remedy Use SIM1-1 to check the mirror operation.
Cause A fusing jam is not canceled completely. (A jam paper Check the circuit related with the mirror motor (SCN-
remains.) MFP PWB and MHP sensor PWB).
POD1 sensor trouble
Fusing unit installation trouble
POD1 sensor connector and harness connection L3-00 Scanner return trouble
trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Trouble detection SCN-MFP
Fusing unit, drive section trouble
Cause Mirror unit trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the POD1 sensor.
Wire is removed from the mirror.
Check installation of the fusing unit.
Lock screw is not removed.
Replace the fusing unit.
Circuit trouble
Check or repair the fusing drive section.
Check & Remedy Use SIM1-1 to check the mirror operation.
Check connection of the POD1 sensor connector and
Check the circuit related with the mirror motor (SCN-
the harness.
MFP PWB and MHP sensor PWB).
Replace the PCU PWB.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 32

L4-02 Paper feed motor trouble L4-11 Shift motor trouble

Trouble detection PCU Trouble detection PCU

Cause Paper feed motor trouble Cause Shift motor trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness PCU PWB trouble.
between the PCU PWB and the paper feed motor Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
harness. between the PCU PWB and the shift motor.
PCU PWB trouble Controller circuit trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the paper feed Finisher is still installed when the connector of the
motor. finisher is removed.
Replace the paper feed motor. Communication trouble of the finisher
Check connection of the paper feed motor harness Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the shift operation.
and the connector. Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of the shifter
Replace the PCU PWB. home position sensor.
Check the connection of the connector and the
harness between the PCU PWB and the shift motor.
L4-03 Fusing motor trouble Connect the connector of the finisher.
Refer to the contents of F1-00 when the
communication trouble between the PCU PWB and
Trouble detection PCU the finisher is occurred
Cause Fusing motor trouble
Fusing motor harness and connector connection
trouble L4-12 Secondary transfer separation trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the fusing
motor. Trouble detection PCU
Replace the Fusing motor. Cause The position sensor is not blocked or the position
Check connection of the fusing motor harness and sensor is always blocked.
the connection. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
Replace the PCU PWB. between the PCU PWB and the separation position
sensor.
Separation clutch trouble
L4-06 Transfer unit lift trouble Secondary transfer unit is not installed
Separation motor trouble
Check & Remedy Check the separation operation by the SIM06-03.
Trouble detection PCU Check that the sensor is blocked when the separation
Cause Transfer unit position sensor trouble operation is done.
Dirt on the transfer unit position sensor. Replace the separation motor, the separation sensor
PCU PWB trouble and the PCU PWB.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Check the connection of the connector and the
Transfer unit lift mechanism trouble harness between the PCU PWB and the separation
Transfer unit is not installed correctly. position sensor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-3 to check the separating operation of the Install the secondary transfer unit.
transfer unit.
Replace the transfer unit position sensor.
Clean the transfer unit position sensor. L4-16 Fusing pressure release trouble
Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Repair the transfer unit lift mechanism. Trouble detection PCU
Cause Fusing pressure release sensor trouble.
Fusing pressure release motor trouble.
L4-07 Transfer belt motor trouble Pressure release drive gear and pressure release idle
gear trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Trouble detection PCU Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Cause Transfer belt motor trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the fusing pressure release sensor.
Harness/connector trouble between the PCU PWB Replace the fusing pressure release motor.
and transfer belt motor. Replace the pressure release drive gear and the
Check & Remedy Use Sim25-1 to check operation of the transfer belt pressure release idle gear.
motor. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check the harness and connector between the PCU Check connection of the connector and the harness.
PWB and the transfer belt motor.

L4-17 Drum motor trouble (BK)

L4-09 PS motor trouble
Trouble detection SCN-MFP
Trouble detection PCU Cause Drum motor trouble
Cause PCU PWB trouble Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
Motor trouble between the PCU PWB and the drum motor.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness PCU PWB trouble
between the PCU PWB and the motor. Check & Remedy Check the operation of the drum motor by SIM25-01.
Check & Remedy Check the connection of the connector and the Check the connection of the harness and the
harness between the PCU PWB and the motor. connector between the PCU PWB and the drum
Replace the PCU PWB, the motor and the harness. motor.
Replace the PCU PWB and the drum motor.

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 33

L4-18 Drum motor trouble (C) L4-43 Paper exit cooling fan R trouble

Trouble detection PCU Trouble detection PCU

Cause Drum motor trouble Cause Fan trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness PCU PWB trouble.
between the PCU PWB and the drum motor. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
PCU PWB trouble Check & Remedy Check that the fan is rotating after turning ON the
Check & Remedy Check the operation of the drum motor by SIM25-01. power.
Check the connection of the harness and the Replace the fan.
connector between the PCU PWB and the drum Replace the PCU PWB.
motor. Check the connector and the harness.
Replace the PCU PWB and the drum motor. Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.

L4-19 Drum motor trouble (M) L4-44 Power cooling fan 2 trouble

Trouble detection PCU Trouble detection PCU

Cause Drum motor trouble Cause Harness, connector trouble between the PCU PWB
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness and the fan motor.
between the PCU PWB and the drum motor. PCU PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble Fan motor trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the operation of the drum motor by SIM25-01. Check & Remedy Use Sim6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
Check the connection of the harness and the Check the harness and the connector between the
connector between the PCU PWB and the drum PCU PWB and the fan motor.
motor. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB and the drum motor. Replace the fan motor.

L4-20 Drum motor trouble (Y) L4-50 Process fan 1 trouble

Trouble detection PCU Trouble detection PCU

Cause Drum motor trouble Cause Process fan trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness PCU PWB trouble.
between the PCU PWB and the drum motor. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
PCU PWB trouble Check & Remedy Check that the fan is rotating after turning ON the
Check & Remedy Check the operation of the drum motor by SIM25-01. power.
Check the connection of the harness and the Replace the process fan.
connector between the PCU PWB and the drum Replace the PCU PWB.
motor. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the PCU PWB and the drum motor.

L4-51 Process fan 2 trouble

L4-32 Power source cooling fan trouble
Trouble detection PCU
Trouble detection PCU Cause Process fan trouble.
Cause Power cooling fan trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Check & Remedy Check that the fan is rotating after turning ON the
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating. power.
Replace the power cooling fan. Replace the process fan.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the connectors and the harness. Check the connector and the harness.

L4-35 Fusing cooling fan R trouble L4-71 Process fan 2 trouble

Trouble detection PCU Trouble detection PCU

Cause Fusing cooling fan trouble. Cause PCU PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
Replace the fusing cooling fan. L4-75 Paper exit motor trouble
Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Trouble detection PCU
Cause PCU PWB trouble.
Motor trouble
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
between the PCU PWB and the motor.
Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness of the PCU
PWB and the motor.
Replace the PCU PWB, the motor and the harness.

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 34

L4-76 Reverse motor trouble L8-02 Full wave signal error

Trouble detection PCU Trouble detection PCU

Cause PCU PWB trouble. Cause An abnormality in the full wave signal frequency is
Motor trouble detected
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness (The frequency is detected as 65Hz or above, or
between the PCU PWB and the motor. 45Hz or less) PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness of the PCU Power unit trouble.
PWB and the motor. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Replace the PCU PWB, the motor and the harness. Power frequency wave form abnormality
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the power unit.
L4-77 ADU motor upper trouble Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Check the power wave form.

Trouble detection PCU

Cause PCU PWB trouble. L8-03 Abnormal input voltage error
Motor trouble
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
between the PCU PWB and the motor. Trouble detection PCU
Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness of the PCU Cause Detects abnormal input voltage
PWB and the motor. Check & Remedy Check the connection of the AC monitor PWB,
Replace the PCU PWB, the motor and the harness. harness, connector.
Check the PCU PWB and replace if necessary.

L4-78 ADU motor bottom trouble

L8-20 Communication error of power con-
Trouble detection PCU troller PWB
Cause PCU PWB trouble.
Motor trouble Trouble detection SCN-MFP
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
Cause SCN-MFP PWB trouble.
between the PCU PWB and the motor.
Check & Remedy Check the ground of the main unit.
Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness of the PCU
Replace the SCN-MFP PWB.
PWB and the motor.
Replace the PCU PWB, the motor and the harness.
PC-- Personal counter not detected
L4-79 PS front motor trouble
Trouble detection SCN-MFP
Cause The personal counter is not installed.
Trouble detection PCU
The personal counter is not detected.
Cause PCU PWB trouble.
SCN-MFP PWB trouble.
Motor trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
Replace the SCN-MFP PWB.
between the PCU PWB and the motor.
Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness of the PCU
PWB and the motor.
Replace the PCU PWB, the motor and the harness.
U1-01 Battery trouble

Trouble detection SCN-MFP

L6-10 Polygon motor trouble Case 1 Cause 1) Battery life
2) Battery circuit abnormality
Trouble detection PCU Check Check to confirm that the battery voltage is about
and 2.5V or above.
Cause Polygon motor trouble.
Remedy Replace the battery.
LSUcnt PWB trouble.
LD PWB trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the polygon
U2-00 MFP EEPROM read/write error
motor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Trouble detection SCN-MFP
Replace the LSU. Cause EEPROM device trouble
Replace the LSUcnt PWB. EEPROM device contact trouble
Device access trouble by the noise
Check & Remedy Replace the SCN-MFP PWB EEPROM.
L8-01 Full wave signal detection error Replace the SCN-MFP PWB.
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
replacing the SCN-MFP PWB in the Service Manual,
Trouble detection PCU
and perform the works.)
Cause PCU PWB trouble.
Check that the EEPROM device is connected
Power unit trouble.
correctly.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the power unit.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 35

U2-05 Account data error U2-41 HDD versatile partition error

Trouble detection SCN-MFP Trouble detection SCN-MFP

Cause The certification database table in the HDD is broken. Cause A file error occurs in the HDD system saved data
The certification database table is rebuilt after the area, disabling backup of the saved file of the
broken certification database table is detected and machine adjustment values in the mSATA SSD.
the main unit is restarted. HDD trouble
This error can be recognized only by the SIM22-4 MFPC PWB trouble
which registers the error in the error records. Check & Remedy Backup the data by following the procedure for the
When this error is occurred frequently, the following trouble which can be released by turning OFF and
devices are defective. ON the power of the main unit, and format the HDD
- HDD by SIM62.
- SCN-MFP PWB Or, replace the HDD and perform SIM16.
Check & Remedy Check or replace the HDD.
Check or replace the SCN-MFP PWB.
Perform the operation by referring the "Necessary U2-42 Machine adjustment data lost error
works and procedures when the HDD and the SCN-
MFP PWB are replaced".
When this error is not occurred frequently, the above Trouble detection SCN-MFP
operations should not be done. Cause The system data partition of mSATA SSD and the
versatile partition for the backup HDD are broken.
Check & Remedy Backup the data by following the procedure for the
U2-11 SCN-MFP PWB EEPROM counter mSATA SSD and the HDD breakage and format the
HDD by SIM62.
check Or, replace the HDD and perform SIM16.
sum error Perform the mechanical adjustment because the
mechanical adjustment values are formatted.

Trouble detection SCN-MFP

Cause SCN-MFP PWB EEPROM trouble
EEPROM socket contact trouble
U2-50 HDD user authentication data check
SCN-MFP PWB trouble sum error
Strong external noises.
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error. (The previous writing Trouble detection SCN-MFP
data (about the latest 8 sheets) are written into the
Cause HDD trouble
EEPROM.)
SCN-MFP PWB trouble
Replace the SCN-MFP PWB.
Strong external noises.
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
Check & Remedy Check the data related to the check sum error
replacing the SCN-MFP PWB in the Service Manual,
(address book, image send system registration data
and perform the works.)
(senders record, meta data)) and register again.
Use SIM16 to cancel the U2 trouble.
Replace the HDD.
U2-30 SCN-MFP PWB and PCU PWB Replace the SCN-MFP PWB.
manufacturing No. data inconsistency (Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
replacing the HDD and the SCN-MFP PWB in the
Service Manual, and perform the works.)
Trouble detection SCN-MFP
Cause When replacing the SCN-MFP PWB or the MFPC
PWB, the EEPROM which was mounted on the PWB
before replacement is not mounted on the new PWB.
U2-60 Watermark check error
SCN-MFP PWB trouble
PCU PWB trouble Trouble detection SCN-MFP
Check & Remedy Check that the EEPROM is properly set. Cause Watermark data trouble
Check to confirm that the EEPROM which was mSATA SSD trouble
mounted on the PWB before replacement is mounted SCN-MFP PWB trouble
on the new PWB. Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the U2 trouble.
Replace the SCN-MFP PWB. Use SIM49-5 to install the watermark data.
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after Replace the mSATA SSD.
replacing the SCN-MFP PWB in the Service Manual, Replace the SCN-MFP PWB.
and perform the works.) (Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
Replace the PCU PWB. replacing the HDD and the SCN-MFP PWB in the
Service Manual, and perform the works.)

U2-40 mSATA SSD system storage data par-

tition error U2-70 OCR dictionary check error

Trouble detection SCN-MFP Trouble detection SCN-MFP

Cause A file error occurs in the mSATA SSD system storage Cause OCR dictionary error
data partition. Check & Remedy Use Sim49-6 to install the OCR dictionary data
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power, and the backup data in the
HDD are written into the mSATA SSD and the
machine is automatically booted.

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 36

 1 : ‘16/Sep.

U2-80 SCN-MFP PWB EEPROM read/write U5-16 SPF fan motor trouble 1
error
Trouble detection SCN-MFP
Trouble detection SCN-MFP Cause Fan motor trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Cause EEPROM trouble
SCN-MFP PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble Check & Remedy Use Sim2-3 to check the operation.
Check the DSPF PWB and connection of the
Check & Remedy Check that the EEPROM is attached correctly.
connector and the harness.
Take notes of the counter data and the adjustment
values to prevent from deleting the data. (When the
printer option is attached, take notes of the
adjustment values by SIM22-01.) U5-20 SPF paper feed transport motor trou-
Replace the PCU PWB. ble
Release this error with SIM16.

Trouble detection SCN-MFP

U2-81 SCN-MFP PWB EEPROM check sum Cause SPF paper feed transport motor trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
error Check & Remedy Use Sim2-3 to check the operation.
Check the SPF paper feed transport motor and
Trouble detection SCN-MFP connection of the connector and the harness.
Cause EEPROM trouble
SCN-MFP PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
Check & Remedy Check that the EEPROM is attached correctly. U5-30 SPF tray lift up trouble
Take notes of the counter data and the adjustment
values to prevent from deleting the data. (When the Trouble detection SCN-MFP
printer option is attached, take notes of the
Cause STUD does not turn ON 5 times continuously within
adjustment values by SIM22-01.)
the specified time.
Replace the PCU PWB.
STUD/STLD sensor trouble.
Release this error with SIM16.
Connection trouble of the connector and harness.
DSPF PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the STUD/STLD sensor.
U2-90 PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace DSPF PWB.
Trouble detection PCU
Cause EEPROM trouble
Installation of non-initialized EEPROM. U5-31 SPF tray lift down trouble
PCU PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
Check & Remedy Check that the EEPROM is attached correctly. Trouble detection SCN-MFP
Check that the 256kBit EEPROM is attached.
Cause STLD does not turn OFF within the specified time.
Take notes of the counter data and the adjustment
STUD/STLD sensor trouble.
values to prevent from deleting the data. (When the
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
printer option is attached, take notes of the
DSPF PWB trouble.
adjustment values by SIM22-01.)
Check & Remedy Replace the STUD/STLD sensor.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Release this error with SIM16.
Replace DSPF PWB.

U2-91 PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error U6-00 Desk communication trouble
Trouble detection PCU
Trouble detection PCU
Cause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble
Cause Connection trouble or cut-line of the connector and
PCU PWB trouble
the harness.
EEPROM socket contact trouble
Desk control PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Check that the EEPROM is attached correctly.
Control (PCU) PWB trouble
Take notes of the counter data and the adjustment
Check & Remedy Check the control PWB.
values to prevent from deleting the data.
Check connection of the connector and the harness
(When the printer option is attached, take notes of the
on the communication line.
adjustment values by SIM22-01.)
Turn OFF and ON the main unit.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Release this error with SIM16.

U6-01 Desk tray 1 lift motor trouble

1 U5-00 Communication error in SPF
Trouble detection PCU
Trouble detection SCN-MFP Cause DLUD1 sensor trouble
Desk casette 1 lift up motor trouble
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
DSPF PWB trouble.
between the paper feed unit, Desk control PWB, and
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power.
Lift up unit.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Check the DLUD1, the DLUD1 harness and the
Replace DSPF PWB.
connector of the DLUD1.
Check the lift up unit.
Replace the desk control PWB.
Release this error with SIM15.

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 37

U6-02 Desk tray 2 lift motor trouble U6-22 LCC 24V power trouble

Trouble detection PCU Trouble detection PCU

Cause DLUD2 sensor trouble Cause Connection trouble of the harness and the connector.
Desk casette 2 lift up motor trouble LCC control PWB trouble/A3 2nd LCT control PWB
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness trouble.
between the paper feed unit, Desk control PWB, and Machine power unit trouble
Lift up unit. Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness
Check & Remedy Check the DLUD2, the DLUD2 harness and the Check the 24 voltage at the machine power unit and
connector of the DLUD2. the LCC control PWB/A3 2nd LCT control PWB.
Check the lift up unit.
Replace the desk control PWB.
Release this error with SIM15. U6-23 LCC Tray descending trouble (reverse
winding detection)
U6-09 LCC lift trouble
Trouble detection PCU
Cause Reverse winding detection switch ON
Trouble detection PCU
Reverse winding of the wire
Cause sensor trouble Reverse winding detection switch trouble
LCC control PWB trouble. Connector and harness connection trouble
gear is damaged. LCC control PWB trouble
Lift up motor trouble
Check & Remedy Check the wire
Check & Remedy Use SIM4-2 and SIM4-3 to check the operation of the Replace reverse winding switch
LCC sensor and lift motor. Check connection of the connector and the harness
Use SIM15 to cancel the error. Replace the LCC control PWB
Use Sim4-3 to check the motor operation

U6-10 Desk transport motor trouble

U6-50 Desk - Main unit combination trouble
Trouble detection PCU
Cause Motor lock. Trouble detection PCU
Motor rotation error. Cause Improper combination between the main unit and the
Over current to the motor. Desk.
Desk PWB trouble. Desk control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM4-3 to check the operation of the desk
Check & Remedy Install a Desk which is proper for the main unit mode.
transport motor.
Replace the Desk control PWB.
Replace the desk control PWB.
Replace the desk paper feed motor.
U6-51 LCC - Main unit combination trouble
U6-20 LCC control PWB - PCU PWB
Trouble detection PCU
communication error
Cause Improper combination between the main unit and the
LCC.
Trouble detection PCU Desk control PWB trouble.
Cause Connection trouble of the harness and the connector Check & Remedy Install a LCC which is proper for the main unit mode.
between the machine and the LCC and those of the Replace the LCC control PWB.
LCC control PWB.
LCC control PWB trouble
PCU PWB trouble U6-52 Desk connection error
Malfunction due to noises.
Check & Remedy Cancel the error by turning OFF/ON the power.
Check the connection of the harness and the Trouble detection PCU
connector between the machine and the LCC. Cause Connection failure between the machine and paper
Check the LCC control PWB, and replace if feed tray 2 (desk unit)
necessary. PCU PWB trouble.
Check the PCU PWB, and replace if necessary. Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the PCU PWB.

U6-21 LCC transport motor trouble

U6-54 Option installation combination trou-
Trouble detection PCU ble (LCC)
Cause Motor lock.
Motor rotation error. Trouble detection PCU
Over current to the motor. Cause firmware version is inconsistency
LCC control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy update latest firmware version
Check & Remedy Use SIM4-3 to check the operation of the LCC
transport motor.
Check the LCC control PWB, and replace if
necessary.
U6-55 Option installation combination trou-
ble (DESK)

Trouble detection PCU

Cause firmware version is inconsistency
Check & Remedy update latest firmware version

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 38

U7-50 SCN-MFP PWB - Vendor machine
communication error

Trouble detection SCN-MFP

Cause Improper setting of the vendor machine specifications
(SIM26-3).
Vendor machine trouble.
SCN-MFP PWB trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble.
Strong external noises.
Check & Remedy Cancel the error by turning OFF/ON the power.
Check the connector and the harness in the
communication line.
Change the specifications of the vendor machine
(SIM26-3).
Replace the SCN-MFP PWB.

U7-51 Vendor machine error

Trouble detection SCN-MFP (Notification of a trouble from the serial

vendor)
Cause Serial vendor machine trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Err.XX is displayed on the operation panel of the
vendor. (XX is the detail code.)
Repair the vendor machine referring to the detail code.
Check the connector and the harness in the
communication line.

U9-01 Touch panel trouble

Trouble detection SCN-MFP and Touch Panel

Cause Harness connection trouble.
SCN-MFP trouble.
Touch Panel trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness in the touch
panel line (SCN MFP PWB, LVDS PWB, HOME PWB,
and touch panel).
Replace the SCN-MFP PWB.
Replace the Touch panel.

UC-02 SCAN ASIC IPD error

Trouble detection SCN-MFP

Cause SCN-MFP trouble
SCAN ASIC trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the SCN-MFP PWB.

UC-20 SCAN ASIC DOCC error

Trouble detection SCN-MFP

Cause SCN-MFP trouble
SCAN ASIC trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the SCN-MFP PWB.

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 39

H. Relation between the SCN-MFP PWB LED <Process content and LED display>
status and errors 1, LED-R lighting-up status
When the machine cannot be booted, check the LED status of the
MFPC PWB to presume the error content and its cause.

LED status
Process operation content Countermeasure at error
(Lighting)
●●●● Normal status
○○○●--●○○○ Error SCN-MFP PWB trouble. Replace SCN-MFP PWB.

2, LED-S lighting-up status

LED status
Process operation content Countermeasure at error
(Lighting)
●●●● Normal status
other status Error Replace mSATA SSD. IF still error. --> Replace SCN-MFP PWB.

* : LED ON / : LED OFF

SCN-MFP PWB

LED-S  LED LED-R  LED

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 40

2. JAM and troubleshooting JAM code JAM content
TRAY1_RT Tray 1 feed tray paper feed JAM (Check the paper)
A. JAM code list
(1) Main machine
(2) DSPF/RSPF
JAM code JAM content
2TPD_N1 2TPD not-reached JAM (Tray 1 feed paper) JAM code JAM content
2TPD_NA 2TPD not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper) ICU_REQ ICU factor stop JAM
2TPD_NL 2TPD not-reached JAM (LCC feed paper) P_SHORT Short size JAM
2TPD_NM 2TPD not-reached JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper) SDFS_S Double feed detection JAM/Accompanied feed JAM
2TPD_S1 2TPD remaining JAM (Tray 1 feed paper) SPOD_N SPOD not-reached JAM
2TPD_SA 2TPD remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper) SPOD_S SPOD remaining JAM
2TPD_SL 2TPD remaining JAM (LCC feed paper) SPPD1_N SPPD1 not-reached JAM
2TPD_SM 2TPD remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper) SPPD1_S SPPD1 remaining JAM
APPD1_N APPD1 not-reached JAM SPPD2_N SPPD2 not-reached JAM
APPD1_S APPD1 remaining JAM SPPD2_S SPPD2 remaining JAM
APPD2_N APPD2 not-reached JAM SPPD3_N SPPD3 not-reached JAM
APPD2_S APPD2 remaining JAM SPPD3_S SPPD3 remaining JAM
C1PFD_N1 C1PFD not-reached JAM (Tray 1 feed paper) SPPD4_N SPPD4 not-reached JAM
C1PFD_NL C1PFD not-reached JAM (LCC feed paper) SPPD4_S SPPD4 remaining JAM
C1PFD_S1 C1PFD remaining JAM (Tray 1 feed paper) SPPD5_N SPPD5 not-reached JAM
C1PFD_SL C1PFD remaining JAM (LCC) SPPD5_S SPPD5 remaining JAM
C1PFPD_S1 C1PFPD remaining JAM (Tray 1 feed paper) SPSD_SCN Exposure start notification timer end
MFT Manual feed tray paper feed JAM (MPFD not-reached)
Manual feed tray paper feed JAM
MFT_1ST
(Check the paper set condition) (3) LCC
MFT_LE Manual feed tray paper feed JAM
Manual feed tray paper feed JAM JAM code JAM content
MFT_RT
(Check the paper) LCC LCC paper feed JAM (LPFPD not-reached JAM)
MPFD_S MPFD remaining JAM LCC feed tray paper feed JAM (Check the paper set
LCC_1ST
POD1_N POD1 not-reached JAM condition)
POD1_NA POD1 not-reached JAM (Back surface) LCC_LE LCC feed tray paper feed JAM
POD1_S POD1 remaining JAM LCC_RT LCC feed tray paper feed JAM (Check the paper)
POD1_SA POD1 remaining JAM (Back surface) LPFD_NL LCC paper feed JAM (LPFD not-reached JAM)
POD2_N POD2 not-reached JAM LPFD_SL LPFD remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
POD2 remaining JAM (When left paper exit)
POD2_S
POD2 remaining JAM (When ADU reversing)
POD3_N POD3 not-reached JAM (4) DESK
POD3_S POD3 remaining JAM
POD4_NB POD4 not-reached JAM (Before switchback) JAM code JAM content
POD4_SA POD4 remaining JAM (After switchback) 2TPD_N2 2TPD not-reached JAM (Tray 2 feed paper)
POD4_SB POD4 remaining JAM (Before switchback) 2TPD_N3 2TPD not-reached JAM (Tray 3 feed paper)
PPD2_N1 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tray 1 feed paper) 2TPD_N4 2TPD not-reached JAM (Tray 4 feed paper)
PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tray 1 feed paper) 2TPD_S2 2TPD remaining JAM (Tray 2 feed paper)
PPD2_N1_D
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *1 2TPD_S3 2TPD remaining JAM (Tray 3 feed paper)
PPD2_NA PPD2 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper) 2TPD_S4 2TPD remaining JAM (Tray 4 feed paper)
PPD2 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper) C1PFD_N2 C1PFD not-reached JAM (Tray 2 feed paper)
PPD2_NA_D
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *1
C1PFD_N3 C1PFD not-reached JAM (Tray 3 feed paper)
PPD2_NL PPD2 not-reached JAM (LCC feed paper)
C1PFD_N4 C1PFD not-reached JAM (Tray 4 feed paper)
PPD2 not-reached JAM(LCC paper feed paper)
PPD2_NL_D C1PFD_S2 C1PFD remaining JAM (Tray 2 feed paper)
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *1
C1PFD_S3 C1PFD remaining JAM (Tray 3 feed paper)
PPD2_NM PPD2 not-reached JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper)
C1PFD_S4 C1PFD remaining JAM (Tray 4 feed paper)
PPD2 not-reached JAM (manual paper feed tray paper)
PPD2_NM_D C2PFD_N3 C2PFD not-reached JAM (Tray 3 feed paper)
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *1
C2PFD_N4 C2PFD not-reached JAM (Tray 4 feed paper)
PPD2_S1 PPD2 remaining JAM (Tray 1 feed paper)
C2PFD_S2 C2PFD remaining JAM (Tray 2 feed paper)
PPD2 remaining JAM (Tray 1 feed paper)
PPD2_S1_D C2PFD_S3 C2PFD remaining JAM (Tray 3 feed paper)
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS)*1
PPD2_SA PPD2 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper) C2PFD_S4 C2PFD remaining JAM (Tray 4 feed paper)
PPD2 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper) D1PPD_N04 D1PPD not-reached JAM (Tray 4 feed paper)
PPD2_SA_D D1PPD_S03 D1PPD remaining JAM (tandem desk left side feed paper)
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *1
PPD2_SL PPD2 remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper) D1PPD remaining JAM (tandem desk right side feed
D1PPD_S04
PPD2 remaining JAM side LCC feed paper) paper)
PPD2_SL_D D2PPD_S04 D2PPD remaining JAM (tandem desk left side feed paper)
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *1
PPD2 remaining JAM PPD2_N2 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tray 2 feed paper)
PPD2_SM PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tray 2 feed paper)
Manual feed tray feed paper) PPD2_N2_D
PPD2 remaining JAM (manual feed tray feed paper) Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *1
PPD2_SM_D PPD2_N3 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tray 3 feed paper)
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *1
PRI_JAM Image preparation wait time- out PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tray 3 feed paper)
PPD2_N3_D
STOP_JAM Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request) Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *1
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed JAM (C1PFPD not-reached JAM) PPD2_N4 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tray 4 feed paper)
Tray 1 feed tray paper feed JAM PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tray 4 feed paper)
TRAY1_1ST PPD2_N4_D
(Check the paper set condition) Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *1
TRAY1_LE Tray 1 feed tray paper feed JAM PPD2_S2 PPD2 remaining JAM (Tray 2 feed paper)

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 41

 JAM code JAM content JAM code JAM content
PPD2 remaining JAM (Tray 2 feed paper) TRAY4_RT Tray 4 (tandem right side) feed tray paper feed JAM
PPD2_S2_D
Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *1 (Check the paper)
PPD2_S3 PPD2 remaining JAM (Tray 3 feed paper)
*1: In SIM22-41, the description of "(Delay of paper just before the
PPD2 remaining JAM (Tray 3 feed paper)
PPD2_S3_D JAM from PS)" is omitted because of the limitation on the number
Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *1
PPD2_S4 PPD2 remaining JAM (Tray 4 feed paper) of characters.
PPD2 remaining JAM (Tray 4 feed paper)
PPD2_S4_D
Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *1
(6) Inner finisher
TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed JAM (C2PFD not-reached JAM)
Tray 2 feed tray paper feed JAM (Check the paper set JAM code JAM content
TRAY2_1ST
condition)
FCMOT Punch motor JAM
TRAY2_LE Tray 2 feed tray paper feed JAM
FNENTER Before multi-rotation JAM
TRAY2_RT Tray 2 feed tray paper feed JAM (Check the paper)
FNM10 Paddle motor JAM
TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed JAM (D1PPD not-reached JAM)
FNM2 Scrape belt motor JAM
Tray 3 feed tray paper feed JAM (Check the paper set
TRAY3_1ST FNM3 Front alignment motor JAM
condition)
FNM4 Rear alignment motor JAM
TRAY3_LE Tray 3 feed tray paper feed JAM
FNM5 Assist motor JAM
TRAY3_RT Tray 3 feed tray paper feed JAM (Check the paper)
FNM6 Tray shift motor JAM
TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed JAM (D2PPD not-reached JAM)
FNM7 Stapler shift motor JAM
Tray 4 feed tray paper feed JAM (Check the paper set
TRAY4_1ST FNM9 Staple-free staple bind motor JAM
condition)
FNPS1_N Paper exit sensor delay JAM
TRAY4_LE Tray 4 feed tray paper feed JAM
FNPS1_S Paper exit sensor remaining JAM
TRAY4_RT Tray 4 feed tray paper feed JAM (Check the paper)
FNPS12 Manual bundle insert JAM
FNPS8 Bundle motor JAM
FNSTPLIF Staple JAM
(5) Tandem DESK
FNTIME Finisher paper early reaching JAM
JAM code JAM content
2TPD_NT1 2TPD not-reached JAM (Tandem left side feed paper)
2TPD_NT2 2TPD not-reached JAM (Tandem right side feed paper) (7) 1K finisher
2TPD_ST1 2TPD remaining JAM (tandem desk left side feed paper)
2TPD_ST2 2TPD remaining JAM (tandem desk right side feed paper) JAM code JAM content
C1PFD_NT1 C1PFD not-reached JAM (Tandem left side feed paper) FCPNCH_M Punch drive motor JAM
C1PFD_NT2 C1PFD not-reached JAM (Tandem right side feed paper) FCPNCHMV_M Punch shift motor JAM
C1PFD_ST1 C1PFD remaining JAM (tandem desk left side feed paper) FCSTSMOV_M Lateral registration correction motor JAM
C1PFD_ST2 C1PFD remaining JAM (tandem desk right side feed FNBDLTRS_N Bundle transport not-reached JAM
paper) FNBLT_M Release motor JAM
C2PFD_NT1 C2PFD not-reached JAM (Tandem left side feed paper) FNENDSTRS_N Edge stopper paper surface sensor not-reached JAM
C2PFD_NT2 C2PFD not-reached JAM (Tandem right side feed paper) FNENDSTRS_S Edge stopper paper surface sensor remaining JAM
C2PFD_ST1 C2PFD remaining JAM (tandem desk left side feed paper) FNENT_N Entrance not-reached JAM
C2PFD_ST2 C2PFD remaining JAM (tandem desk right side feed FNENT_S Entrance remaining JAM
paper) FNENTRS_M Entrance transport motor JAM
D1PPD1_ST1 D1DPFD2 remaining JAM (tandem desk left side feed FNEXGPLT_M Paper eject cover open/close motor JAM
paper) FNEXTRS_M Paper exit/Tapping motor JAM
D1PPD2_NT1 DPFD2 not-reached JAM (Tandem left side feed paper) FNFLDEX_N Folding paper exit not-reached JAM
D1PPD2_ST1 D1DPFD2 remaining JAM (tandem desk left side feed FNFLDEX_S Folding paper exit remaining JAM
paper) FNJOG_M Jogger motor JAM
DPFD1_NT1 DPFD1 not-reached JAM (Tandem left side feed paper) FNLMDLT_N Intermediate transport left not-reached
DPFD1_ST1 DPFD1 remaining JAM (tandem desk left side feed paper) FNLMDLT_S Intermediate transport left sensor remaining JAM
DPFD1_ST2 DPFD1 remaining JAM (tandem desk right side feed FNPRFEX_N Proof paper exit not-reached JAM
paper) FNPRFEX_S Proof paper exit remaining JAM
PPD2_NT1 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tandem left side feed paper) FNPSN_M Tapping motor JAM
PPD2_NT1_D PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tandem left side feed paper) FNRMDLT_N Intermediate transport right not-reached
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *1 FNSFT_M Shift motor JAM
PPD2_NT2 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tandem right side feed paper) FNSTPMOV_M Stapler motor JAM
PPD2_NT2_D PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tandem right side feed paper) FNSTPMV_M Stapler shift motor JAM
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *1
FNTRYLFT_M Tray lift motor JAM
PPD2_ST1 PPD2 remaining JAM (tandem desk left side feed paper)
FNUPEX_N Shift paper exit not-reached JAM
PPD2_ST1_D PPD2 remaining JAM (tandem desk left side feed paper)
FNUPEX_S Shift paper exit remaining JAM
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *1
FNUPTRS_M Proof transport motor JAM
PPD2_ST2 PPD2 remaining JAM (tandem desk right side feed paper)
FSENDS_M Edge stopper motor JAM
PPD2_ST2_D PPD2 remaining JAM (tandem desk right side feed paper)
FSFLDPLT_M Folding blade motor JAM
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *1
FSLPRSRL_M Booklet transport lower pressure release motor
TRAY3 Tray 3 (tandem left side) paper feed JAM
FSUPRSRL_M Booklet transport upper pressure release motor/Standard
TRAY3_1ST Tray 3 (tandem left side) feed tray paper feed JAM (Check
fence retreat motor JAM
the paper set condition)
TRAY3_LE Tray 3 (tandem left side) feed tray paper feed JAM
TRAY3_RT Tray 3 (tandem left side) feed tray paper feed JAM (Check
the paper) (8) 3K finisher
TRAY4 Tray 4 (tandem right side) paper feed JAM
TRAY4_1ST Tray 4 (tandem right side) feed tray paper feed JAM JAM code JAM content
(Check the paper) FCMR Punch shift motor JAM
TRAY4_LE Tray 4 (tandem right side) feed tray paper feed JAM FCP Punch motor JAM

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 42

 JAM code JAM content 3. Image send communication report
FCP2 Punched hole JAM code
FIN_TIME Finisher paper early reaching JAM
FNB_N Buffer sensor time-out JAM A. Outline and code system descriptions
FNB_S Buffer sensor remaining JAM After completion of communication, the communication report
FNCDP Paddle Jam table, the communication management table, and the protocol are
FNDPMS Manual bundle insert JAM described on the communication report column.
FNE_N Entrance paper sensor time-out JAM
The communication report code is composed as follows:
FNE_S Entrance paper sensor remaining JAM
Communication report: XX (XXXX)
FNEE_N The first escape delivery sensor time-out JAM
FNEE_S The first escape delivery sensor remaining JAM The upper 2 digits of the communication report code:
FNMAR Assist motor JAM Communication report code of 00 – 99 (Refer to communication
FNMDT Guide sub motor JAM report main code.)
FNMFECES Escape/saddle transport switching flapper motor Jam The lower 4 digits of the communication report code:
FNMFR Paper End Pushing Guide Motor JAM Used by the serviceman.
FNMGMT Tray lift motor Jam The upper 2 digits: Communication report sub code 1 (Refer to
FNMGRS Return Roller Lift Motor JAM communication report sub code 1.)
FNMJF Front alignment motor JAM
The lower 2 digits: Communication report sub code 2 (Refer to
FNMJR Rear alignment motor JAM
communication report sub code 2.)
FNMMSS Staple shift motor JAM
FNMOTERR Motor trouble JAM
FNMS Swing motor JAM
FNMSLS Staple-free staple bind motor JAM The communication report sub code 1 and sub code 2 are in hexa-
FNMSS Staple JAM decimal notation. (The others are in decimal notation.)
FNSSS Safety switch actuation Jam
FNTBP_N Paper exit sensor time-out JAM
FNTBP_S Paper exit sensor remaining JAM The communication report sub code 1 is not used in the these mod-
FSE_N Saddle entrance paper sensor time-out JAM els.
FSE_S Saddle entrance paper sensor remaining JAM
FSEB_N Saddle paper exit sensor time-out JAM B. Details
FSEB_S Saddle paper exit sensor remaining JAM
(1) Communication report main code
FSMC Paddle JAM (Saddle section)
FSMDLE Saddle switching lever motor JAM Report Final receive signal
FSME Saddle delivery motor JAM Final receive signal (Receive side)
code (Send side)
FSMF Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor JAM 0 Abnormal signal Abnormal signal
FSMG Gripper motor JAM 1 NSF, DIS (SID), (SUB), NSS, DCS
FSMJ Saddle alignment motor JAM 2 CFR (PWD), (SEP), NSC, DTC
FSMS Saddle staple JAM 3 FTT EOP
FSMSR Edge stopper motor JAM 4 MCF EOM
5 PIP, PIN MPS
6 RTN, RTP PRI-Q
(9) Paper pass unit 7 No signal, DCN DCN
8 PPR PPS-EOP
JAM code JAM content 9 PPS-EOM
PDPPD1_N PDPPD1 not-reached JAM 10 PPS-MPS, PPS-NULL
PDPPD1_S PDPPD1 remaining JAM 11 RNR RR
PDPPD2_N PDPPD2 not-reached JAM 12 CTR CTC
PDPPD2_S PDPPD2 remaining JAM 13 ERR EOR-Q
14 PPS-PRI-Q
16 Abnormal signal Abnormal signal
17 NSF, DIS SID, SUB, NSS, DCS
18 CFR PWD, SEP, NSC, DTC
19 FTT PPS-EOP
20 MCF PPS-EOM
21 PIP, PIN PPS-MPS, PPS-NULL
22 RTN, RTP PRI-Q
23 No signal, DCN DCN
24 PPR
25 RNR RR
26 CTR CTC
27 ERR EOR-Q
28 PPS-PRI-Q
29 V.8 Phase-1 V.8 Phase-1
30 V.8 Phase-2 V.8 Phase-2
31 V.8 Phase-3 V.8 Phase-3

For report codes 16 – 31, V.34 MODE COMMUNICATION.

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 43

 Report code
Display in the column of
(Communication Content of communication interruption
result
result)
0 – 31 Refer to “previous table”. Depends on the point of communication interruption. For 16 or later, V.34 mode communication.
33 BUSY The calling side cannot establish connection with the remote party.
34 CANCEL A communication interruption command is made during sending/receiving. The interruption key is pressed for
interruption of input. <Send/Receive/Polling/Bulletin board>
35 NG35 XXXX Power is failed during sending/receiving. <Send/Receive/Polling/Bulletin board>
36 (No record paper)
37 (Record paper jam)
38 MEM. FULL Memory over during reception. <Receive/Polling>
Print is not made during reception in acting reception inhibit. <Receive/Polling>
39 (Number of paper
unmatched)
40 (Relay not received)
41 LENGTH OVER The send data length of one page exceeds the limit (2m) in sending. <Send/Bulletin board>
42 LENGTH OVER The receive data length of one page exceeds the limit. <Receive/Polling>
43 (Communication) (OK) Speaking before data transmission
44 ORIGINAL ERROR A document jam occurs in direct sending. <Send>
45 (Picture quality error)
46 NO RESPONSE The FAX signal from the remote party is not detected within T1 time. <Send/Polling>
(When in recall, however, the recall setting in case of a communication error is valid.)
47 TX DECODE ERROR A decode error occurs in the FAX board. <Send/Bulletin board>
48 OK Normal end of communication
OK REPLY RECEIVE OK in Internet FAX send with reception confirmation.
49 NO RX POLL The called side does not have polling function in polling reception. <Polling>
The called side has no data to send. <Polling>
50 RX POLL FAIL In polling reception, DCN is received for DTC. <Polling>
In polling sending, there is no send data. <Bulletin board>
51 PASS # NG In poling sending, the allow number is not matched. <Bulletin board>
In polling sending, the system number is not matched. <Bulletin board>
52 (No confidential function in In confidential sending, the remote party does not have confidential function. <Send>
remote party) (Including other company's machines)
1) The NSF signal has not "Confidential function" bit.
2) The NSF is not a Sharp machine.
53 (Confidential not received) 1) In confidential sending, DCN is received for NSS. <Send>
54 (Confidential BOX NO NG) 1) In confidential reception, a confidential box number which is not registered is specified.
55 (No relay function in In relay command sending, the remote machine has no relay function. <Send>
remote party) (Including other company's machine)
1) The NSF signal has not "Confidential function" bit.
2) The NSF is not a Sharp machine.
56 NO REL RX 1) In relay command sending, DCN is received for NSS. <Send>
2) In relay command reception, a remote station number which is not registered is specified. <Receive>
3) In F code relay broadcasting, an F code relay command is received.<Receive>
57 (Relay ID unmatched) 1) In relay command reception, the relay ID does not match. <Receive>
58 REJECTED In reception, data are sent from a remote machine of receive inhibit number. <Receive>
(Not rejected in the bulletin board send or the F code bulletin board send.)
59 RX NO F-CODE POLL In F code polling (calling), the remote machine has no DIS bit 47 (polling function). <Polling>
In F code polling (calling), the called side has no send data. (DIS bit 9 is 0.)<Polling>
60 NO F-CODE POLL In F code polling (calling), DCN is received for SEP. <Polling>
In bulletin board, there is no send data for SEP. <Bulletin board>
61 RX POLL # NG In bulletin board, the sub address (bulletin board number (SEP)) is not matched. <Bulletin board>
62 F POLL PASS # NG In bulleting board, the pass code (PWD) is not matched. <Bulletin board>
63 NO F FUNC In F code sending, the remote machine has no DIS bit 49 (sub address function). <Send>
(Check that the remote machine conforms to F code.)
64 NO F-CODE In F code sending : <Send>
1) DCN is received for SUB. --- Check the box number.
2) DCN is received for SID. --- Check the box number and pass code.

In F code receiving : <Receive>

"F code relay broadcasting" or "F code confidential reception" is "Inhibited with soft SW."
65 NG65 XXXX If the reservation of the job cannot be completed when reserving the job from PC-FAXorPC-IFAX;
*If an error occurs when storing the job ticket (including fmSyncFile error);
*If an error occurs when creating the thumbnail;
*If an error occurs when creating the map;
*If an error occurs during the storage of the control table;
67 F PASS # NG In F code receiving, the pass code (SID) is not matched. <Receive>
68 BOX NO. NG In F code reception, a box number which is not registered is specified. (SUB is not matched.) <Receive>
69 MEMORY OVER Memory over in quick online sending <Send>
70 (JOB MEMORY OVER) In PC-FAX reservation, the number of remote parties is exceeded. <Send>
71 NG71 XXXX *1 In PC-FAX reservation, data sent from PC includes some errors. <Send>
72 (NG72 XXXX) *1 In department management setting on the machine side:
• In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, a department number which is not registered on the
machine side is specified. <Send>
• In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the department number is not specified. <Send>

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 44

 Report code
Display in the column of
(Communication Content of communication interruption
result
result)
73 NG73 XXXX *1 In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the use quantity limit is exceeded. <Send>
74 NG74 XXXX *1 When reserving specified filing in document filing in PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX;
• The pass-code for the folder is set on the machine side and the pass-code from PC-XXX does not match
with it. <Send>
• The pass-code for the folder is set on the machine side and no pass-code is specified by PC-XXX. <Send>
75 NG75 XXXX *1 • Reservation cannot be made due to machine busy. (Reservation of PC-FAX cannot be accepted.)
• When "PC-FAX or PC-internet FAX send inhibit" is set on the machine side.
76 NG76 XXXX *1 Reserved with receive confirmation request in PC-Internet FAX, but the Internet FAX sender is not registered
on the machine side. <Send>
77 NG77 XXXX *1 In reserving specified filing in PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the machine has no filing function.
78 NG78 XXXX *1 The filing function is inhibited on the machine side when filing specification is reserved by PC-FAX or PC-
Internet FAX.
79 NG79 XXXX *1 An authentication error occurs when PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX is reserved.
80 NG80 XXXX *1 NIC connect failure (network abnormality)
• Check for disconnection of cables.
• A network trouble (CE-XX) occurs.
• The port is set to DISABLE.
• Authentication of the POP server is failed when POP before SMTP is enabled.
• When an error other than the communication result code 93 or 94 in D-SMTP send (including error
response of 5XX)
81 NG REPORT In Internet FAX send, reply of receive confirmation of the remote machine is not normal. (Including PC-Internet
FAX).
• Error of the disposition-modifier.
• The disposition modifier is not in an error, and the disposition type is other than displayed, dispatched, or
processed.
82 NO REPORT In Internet FAX send, time-out occurs in waiting for receive confirmation from the remote machine. (Including
PC-Internet FAX).
• In a case where send confirmation wait time-out time is other than 0, when send confirmation reply from an
Internet FAX destination is not received.
• Recalls of the set number of recalls are performed, but send confirmation reply from an internet AFX
destination is not received.
83 NG LIMIT In E-mail/FTP, Internet FAX send, the send data size exceeds the upper limit of send data.
84 REJECTED In e-mail receive, a sender is registered in receive reject address/domain. <Receive>
85 NG85 XXXX *1 In e-mail receive, an error occurs in communication with POP3 server.
• Header acquisition error.
• Time-out during mail receive
86 RECEIVED In e-mail receive, an unsupported attached file is received.
Only the TIFF-F type is supported for attached files.
• The TIFF-F type of the attached file cannot be recognized.
• There is no attached file.
87 NG87 XXXX *1 In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory.
• Memory over
88 NG88 XXXX *1 In SMTP e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory.
• Cannot be stored in memory.
• The number of items of acting receive data is the maximum, and an additional data cannot be stored.
89 NG89 XXXX *1 In SMTP e-mail receive, an error occurs in communication with the mail server.
• Time-out occurs during e-mail receive.
90 NG90 XXXX *1 After reservation by re-operation of document filing, conversion for image send cannot be made.
• conversion for image sending cannot be made.
91 NG91 XXXX *1 *2 Data cannot be written to the memory device when Scan To USB is executed.
• The memory device is disconnected during writing to the memory device.
• An error occurs due to a memory device trouble.
92 NG92 XXXX *1 *2 The USB device memory overflows during writing data into the memory device when "Scan to USB" is
executed.
93 NG93 XXXX *1 When error in D-SMTP send (with recall)
• An error response of 4XX occurs during communication with the SMTP server.
• Time out occurs after establishment of connection with the SMTP server.
94 NG94 XXXX *1 When busy in D-SMTP send
Time out occurs during establishment of connection with the SMTP server.
95 NG95 XXXX *1 When the path is too long in execution of Scan To USB.
96 NG96 XXXX *1 When the normal process is not executed in the secure mail sending.
98 NG98 XXXX *1 The copy inhibit pattern is detected when scanning a document.
99 NG99 XXXX *1 A document which is inhibited to be copied such as a banknote is scanned.

*1: For a job status result in "Display in the column of result," "NG XXXX" is displayed. " " is the code number.
For a communication result, "Communication error (XXXX)" is displayed.
*2: The error code of Scan To USB is specified only in the job log.
• When the communication result is OK, the communication sub code 1 and the communication sub code 2 are "0000."
• Errors in ( ) are not used.

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 45

(2) Communication report sub code 1
The communication report sub code 1 (upper 2 digits) are always indicated as "00."
(3) Communication report sub code 2

Report code 2 Content of communication interruption Send/Receive

00 When the conditions after 01 do not apply. Send/Receive
01 Send length over Send
02 EOL time up Receive
03 Carrier detection time up Receive
04 Time up of the communication start command from the machine side Receive
05 Time up in phase C (8 min) Send
06 Memory image decode error Receive
07 Memory image decode error Send
08 Time up between frames in phase C (Report code is 0 or 16.) Send/Receive
09 Not used —
10 Not used —
11 Polarity reversion detection Receive
12 Invalid command reception Receive
13 Time up (1-minute timer/6-second time) Receive
14 PUT error Receive
15 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Primary to Control. Receive
16 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Control to Primary. Receive
17 Command receive time-up from MFP controller Receive
18 Not used —
19 Not used —
20 Polarity reversion detection Send
21 Invalid command reception Send
22 Fallback retry number over Send
23 Command retry number resend over Send
24 Time up (T5 timer) Send
25 Time up (T5 timer) in V.34 mode Send
26 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Primary to Control. Send
27 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Control to Primary. Send
28 When sending the FSK signal, no response of send completion is sent back from the MODEM chip within a certain time. Send
(V.34, other than V.34)
29 Not used —
30 A communication error is generated between MFP controller and Modem controller. (Report code is 0 or 16.) —
31 DC current not detected (busy) Send
Line disconnected.
32 Dial tone not detected (busy) Send
33 Busy tone detection (busy) Send
34 T0 time up (Remote machine not responding) Send
35 T1 time up (Remote machine not responding) Send
36 In dialing, polarity reversion detection (Remote machine not responding) Send
37 Calling is not made (busy)<Collision detected (including CNG detection)> Send
38 Not used —
60 In resend of document filed data, an error occurs in decoding or coding. Resend
61 In resend of document filed data, setting to inhibit resolution conversion is made. (The resolution after resend is set to be Resend
Enlarged.)
62 In resend of document filed data, rotation setting is made for data which cannot be rotated. Resend
63 In resend of document filed data, data cannot be stored in HD after conversion of resolution for resend. Resend
64 In resending data of document file, during conversion for resending, the number of IMS management pages exceeds the Resend
upper limit (999). (IT occurs in OSA Scan to FTP also, resulting in memory over.) OSAScanToFTP
70 E-mail header acquisition error E-mail receive
71 Time out occurs during e-mail receive. E-mail receive
72 Receive reject occurs during e-mail receive. E-mail receive
73 Network communication cannot be made due to port disable. Network send
74 An authentication of the POP server is failed when POP before SMTP is enabled. Network send
75 In the setting of SSL communication, when SSL communication is tried but the server side does not support SSL. Network send
76 There is no image in network communication (transfer). Network send
80 There is no attached file in received e-mail. E-mail receive
81 The attached file of received e-mail is not of TIFF type which is supported. E-mail receive
82 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
ID error
83 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
Endian error
84 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
Version error
85 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
Tag data error
86 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
Tag parameter error

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 46

 Report code 2 Content of communication interruption Send/Receive
87 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
Header size error
88 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
Data error
90 In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. E-mail receive
Memory over.
Cannot be stored in memory.
91 In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. E-mail receive
The file size is too great to be stored in memory.
92 In SMTP e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. E-mail receive
Cannot be stored in memory.
93 There is character that cannot be processed. —
OCR processing error.

When the sub code 2 is "08" or "30" and the communication report is "OK," the report code is "00" or "16."

MX-6070N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 – 47

MX-6070N
[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE Service Manual

1. Outline
A. Cases where update is required C. Update procedures and kinds of firmware
ROM update is required in the following cases: There are following methods of update of the firmware.
1) When there is a necessity to upgrade the performance. 1) Update method using SIM 49-1
2) When installing a new spare part ROM for repair to the machine. 2) Update method using FTP
3) When installing a new spare parts PWB unit (with ROM) for repair 3) Update method using the Web page
to the machine. 4) Update method using the CN update function (There are three
4) When there is a trouble in the ROM program and it must be methods.)
repaired. Normally, one of 1) - 3) is used to update the firmware.
B. Notes for update When any one of 1) - 3) is interrupted by an error such as power-
off during updating, etc., and when retries of these methods are
(1) Relationship between each ROM and update failed, the method 4) is employed.
Before execution of ROM update, check combinations with ROM’s Firmware types
installed in the other PWB’s including options. Some combinations of
The firmware type can be displayed by SIM22-5.
each ROM’s versions may cause malfunctions of the machine.
Use SIM22-5 to check the firmware type.

2. Update procedure
A. Update method using SIM 49-1
For the update, connect the media or USB memory to the USB port that exists in the main body, and select the firmware data in the media or USB
memory by simulation screen in the main unit.

Media
Firmware.sfu Adapter

USB Host

Firmware.sfu +

Firmware.sfu USB memory

Firmware.sfu The machine detects the media

and executes the program automatically.

*1:
• Store the firmware data (xxx .sfu) to the media or USB memory beforehand.
• The media used for the update must have an enouch capacity for storing the firmware data.
• The USB memory equipped with the security (secure) function cannot be used.

Execution of the firmware by SIM49-01

1) Insert the media or USB memory which stores the firmware into 3) Current version number and the version number to be updated
the main unit. (Be sure to use the USB I/F on the operation panel.) will be shown for each firmware respectively.
2) Enter the SIM49-01. 4) Press [ALL] key.
Press the key of the file to be updated. The screen transfers to the All the firmware programs are selected.
update screen. * Normally select all the firmwares and execute updating.
* The number of key changes according to the number of the sfu * In this case, firmwares which do not exist on the machine side
file in the media or USB memory inserted. are ignored.
* If the media or USB memory was not inserted when entry to the To update a certain firmware only, select the firmware with the
SIM49-01 screen, "INSERT A USB MEMORY DEVICE CON- firmware display key.
TAINING MFP FIRMWARE [OK]" is displayed on the screen.
* If firmware's key is not selected, [EXECUTE] key is gray out
Insert the media or USB memory and push the [OK] key to open
and cannot be pressed.
the file. If the media have not been inserted and [OK] key is
pushed, the next screen does not appear and the screen waits 5) Press [EXECUTE] key. “ARE YOU SURE? [YES] [NO]” becomes
clear. Press [YES] key to start the update of selected firemware.
the entry. Conversely, if the media or USB memory is pulled out
on the file list screen, the error is detected by the [FILE] key 6) If the update is normal completion, Display "Complete"
pressing, and the first screen appears. 7) If the update is not normal completion, Display "Error" and its firm-
ware name or dose not reboot, in this case power OFF and ON if
still same machine condition, go to the CN update

MX-6070N FIRMWARE UPDATE 8 – 1

B. Firmware update using FTP
FTP software is used to transfer the firmware data (extension ".sfu") from the PC to the machine. The controller recognizes the firmware identifier and
the machine automatically switches to firmware write mode. After the firmware is updated, the machine automatically resets.

Machine 1 Machine 3
10.36.112.83 10.36.112.84

Firmware.sfu

Machine 2 Machine 4

FTP Client

10.36.101.52 10.36.101.53

C. Firmware update using the Web page

An Web browser (service technician’s Web page) is used to update
the firmware.
1) Start the Web browser on a PC and enter the specified URL. A
special firmware upgrade page appears.
2) Click the "Update of Firmware" key in the Web page. Click the
[Browse] key and select the firmware for the update.

"Close the browser and open again to display latest information."

will be displayed.
5) Check the firmware version of machine again.
MX-xxxx

D. Firmware update using the CN update function

(There are three methods.)
(1) Outline
The update method using the DIP SW of the SCN MFP PWB is called
the CN update.
a. Function
There are the following three functions in the CN update mode.
1) Firmware update function
This function is used to update the firmware by transferring data
from the PC which is connected to the SCN MFP PWB, the PCU
3) After selecting the file, click the [Submit] key to send the firmware
PWB, the FAX PWB, and various options by means of a USB
to the machine. Update processing begins. While processing
memory or USB cable.
takes place, "Firmware Update, now processing..." appears.
This is basically the same as SIM49-01, but differs in the following
points:
When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a sec-
tion other than the boot program for some reasons during firm-
ware update operation of other method than the CN update, this
method can be used to update the firmware.
If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, the
mSATA SSD must be replaced with a new one having the normal
boot program.
If the boot animation is not displayed, there is an abnormality in
4) When the firmware update is finished, "Firmware Update com- the boot program.
pleted. Please reboot the MFP." appears. Pressing the [Reboot]
If the boot animation is displayed but "Copying is enabled" is not
key, the machine will restart to complete the update. The browser
displayed on the copier basic menu, there is an abnormality in the
will shift to the following screen.
main program.
2) Firmware version check function

MX-6070N FIRMWARE UPDATE 8 – 2

 (The method to check the firmware version by using SIM22-5 is (2) Operating procedures
easier than this method. Therefore, it is not described in this man-
a. Firmware update function
ual.)
This function is used to revise the firmware by using the USB memory
3) ROM making function
for the SCN MFP PWB, the PCU PWB, the FAX PWB, and each
(This function is not used in the market, and not described in this option.
manual.)
It is basically same as SIM 49-01, but differs in the following points.
b. Purpose 1) The update target ROM is automatically selected.
This function is used in the following cases: 2) When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a sec-
1) When an error occurs during firmware update operation other tion other than the boot program for some reasons during firm-
than the CN update. ware update operation of other method than the CN update.
When the power is shut down or an error occurs in a section other If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, this
than the boot program for some reasons during firmware update method cannot be used. On that case, the mSATA SSD must be
operation of other method than the CN update, this method can replaced with a new one having the normal boot program.
be used to update the firmware. When the boot animation is displayed but "Copying is enabled" is not
If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, the displayed on the copier basic menu, there is an abnormality in the
mSATA SSD must be replaced with a new one having the normal main program (mSATA SSD).
boot program.
a-1. Necessary items
If an error occurs in the boot program, this method cannot be
1) mSATA SSD mounted on the SCN MFP PWB of the machine.
used. In such a case, the mSATA SSD must be replaced with a
new one having the normal boot program. 2) USB memory with the firmware file (SFU) saved in it.

c. DIP-SW used in the CN update mode

To enter the CN update mode, turn ON the UPDATE DIP-SW on the
Save the firmware file in the main directory or in a one-level lower
MFP PWB and boot the machine.
directory.
When terminating the CN update mode, reset UPDATE DIP-SW to
OFF (normal mode). a-2. Procedures
1) Turn OFF the power, and remove the cabinet and the MFP cover.
2) Turn ON the DIP SW of the SCN MFP PWB UP DATE. (Tilt it to
the PWB side.)
3) Install the USB memory into the USB port.
USB memory installing position

USB port

d. Keys used in the CN update mode

The following five keys are used for operations in the CN update
mode. Be careful that the functions of the keys differ those in the nor-
mal mode.
4) Turn ON the power.
=72? =$#%-? 5) Check to confirm that the machine starts booting. (It takes more
than ten seconds to display the menu.)

Update Program Init

Please wait

Version Check
=/'07?
Conf : 00050000
=&190? =1-?
Display when booting is completed
Key name Functions in the CN update mode
[OK] key Executes the selected function or item.
[MENU] key Selects a menu.
[BACK] key Selects a menu.
(Serves as a cancel key in the execution check screen.)
[UP] key Selects an item.
[DOWN] key Selects an item.
6) Select the firmware update mode.
Select the update mode with [MENU] key and [BACK] key.

MX-6070N FIRMWARE UPDATE 8 – 3

 Firm Update
From USB Memory
Display of the firmware update mode

7) Press [OK] key.

The firmware file saved in the USB memory is retrieved, and the
file selection menu is displayed.

Firm Update
> F xxxxxxxx.sfu
Display of file selection

8) Select the firmware file (SFU).

Select the target firmware file (SFU) with [UP] key and [DOWN]
key.
When [OK] key is pressed with a directory name (the head: "> D")
displayed, the menu goes to the one-stage lower directory.
When [BACK] key is pressed in the lower-stage directory, the
menu returns to the original upper directory.
9) Press [OK] key.
The selected firmware file (SFU) is read. It takes about one min-
ute.

Firm Update
Reading Data
Display of file reading

10) After completion of reading, the firmware update process is con-

tinued.

Firm Update IcuM

Writing Data
Display of the firmware update process

* The abbreviated name of the firmware which is under update

process is indicated on the right upper corner of the display.
* During the update process, the display may flash instanta-
neously. It is a normal operation.
11) Check the update result.
Use [UP] key and [DOWN] key to display the results of all the firm-
ware programs.

Firm Update IcuM Firm Update IcuM Firm Update IcuM

Result : OK Result : Not Update Result : NG

Display of the firmware update result

OK: Update is completed successfully.

NG: Update is failed.
Not Update: Update is not executed.
12) Turn OFF the power.
13) Turn OFF the DIP SW of the SCN MFP PWB UP DATE. (Set the
DIP-SW to the normal mode.)
14) Turn ON the power, and check to confirm that the machine boots
up normally.
Check to confirm that the boot animation is displayed.
Check to confirm that "Copying is enabled" is displayed on the
copier basic menu.
15) Check to confirm the version of each firmware with SIM22-5.
16) Attach the SCN MFP PWB cover and the cabinet.

MX-6070N FIRMWARE UPDATE 8 – 4

MX-6070N
[9] MAINTENANCE Service Manual

1. Works necessary when executing the maintenance

A. Counter check B. Counter reset
Before execution of the maintenance, execute SIM22 to check the When a part or consumable part is replaced with new one in the main-
counter values of the following counters to confirm consuming states tenance. Execute SIM24 reset the following counters.
of each section. 1) Maintenance counter
1) Each consumable part counter 2) Each consumable part counter
2) Each unit counter 3) Each unit counter
3) Trouble counter, JAM counter 4) Trouble counter, JAM counter

C. Firmware version check and update

Execute SIM22-5 to check the firmware version and update it as
needed.

2. Display of maintenance execution timing

The message of maintenance execution timing is displayed when each counter reaches the set value. The relations between the message and the
counters are shown below.

A. Maintenance counter
Display condition Print JOB Enable/
Display content
Sim26-38-A set value Counter name Counter value Disable
Maintenance required: TA 0 (Print continue) Maintenance counter (Total) When SIM21-1 set value is Enable
reached
1 (Print stop) When 90% of SIM21-1 set value
is reached
□Maintenance required: TA 1 (Print stop) When SIM21-1 set value is Disable
reached
Maintenance required: CA 0 (Print continue) Maintenance counter (Color) When SIM21-1 set value is Enable
reached
1 (Print stop) When 90% of SIM21-1 set value
is reached
□Maintenance required: CA 1 (Print stop) When SIM21-1 set value is Disable
reached
Maintenance required: AA 0 (Print continue) Both of Total and Color When SIM21-1 set value is Enable
reached
1 (Print stop) When 90% of SIM21-1 set value
is reached
□Maintenance required: AA 1 (Print stop) When SIM21-1 set value is Disable
reached

* After execution of maintenance, be sure to execute SIM24-4 to clear the maintenance counter (Total) and the maintenance counter (Color).

B. Primary transfer unit

Display condition Print JOB Enable/
Display content
Sim26-38-A set value Counter name Counter value Disable
Maintenance required: TK1 0 (Print continue) Primary transfer unit print counter When 300K is reached Enable

1 (Print stop)

* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the primary transfer unit print counter, the accumulated number of rotations counter
and the use day counter.

C. Secondary transfer unit

Display content Print JOB Enable/
Display content
Sim26-38-A set value Counter name Counter value Disable
Maintenance required: TK2 0 (Print continue) Secondary transfer unit print When 300K is reached Enable
counter
1 (Print stop)

* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the secondary transfer print counter, the accumulated number of rotations counter and
the use day counter.

MX-6070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 1
D. PTC unit
Display condition Print JOB Enable/
Display content
Sim26-38-A set value Counter name Counter value Disable
Maintenance required: TK3 0 (Print continue) PTC unit print counter When 300K is reached Enable

1 (Print stop)

* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the PTC unit print counter, accumulated number of rotations counter and the use day
counter.

E. Fusing unit
Display condition Print JOB Enable/
Display content
Sim26-38-A set value Counter name Counter value Disable
Maintenance required: FK1 0 (Print continue) Fusing belt print counter When 300K is reached Enable
1 (Print stop)
Maintenance required: FK2 0 (Print continue) Pressure roller print counter Enable
1 (Print stop)

* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the fusing roller counter, fusing belt counter, the accumulated rotation number counter
and the use day counter.

F. OPC drum
Display condition Print JOB Enable/
Display content
Sim26-38-A set value Counter name Counter value Disable
Maintenance required: DK 0 (Print continue) OPC drum print counter (K) When 285K is reached or Enable
OPC drum accumulated rotation When 1350K rotation is reached
1 (Print stop) number counter (K)
Maintenance required: D (C/M/Y) 0 (Print continue) OPC drum print counter (C/M/Y) When 230K is reached or Enable
OPC drum accumulated rotation When 1350K rotation is reached
1 (Print stop) number counter (C/M/Y)

* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear OPC drum print counter, the accumulated number of rotations counter and the use
day counter.

G. Developer
Display condition Print JOB Enable/
Display content
Sim26-38-A set value Counter name Counter value Disable
Maintenance required: VK 0 (Print continue) Developer print counter (K) When 570K is reached or Enable
DV unit accumulated number of When 2700K rotation is reached
1 (Print stop) rotations (K)
Maintenance required: V (C/M/Y) 0 (Print continue) Developer print counter (C/M/Y) When 460K is reached Enable
DV unit accumulated number of When 2700K rotation is reached
1 (Print stop) rotations (C/M/Y)

* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the developer print counter, the accumulated number of rotations counter and the use
day counter.

H. Waste toner box

Display condition
Display content Print JOB Enable/Disable
Counter name Counter value
Check the waste toner box After detection of near end Near end: Enable
End: Disable

* When the waste toner box is replaced with an empty one, the message disappears

I. Toner
Display condition Print JOB Enable/
Display content
Sim26-38-A set value Counter name Counter value Disable
(K/C/M/Y) Prepare a toner No relation Toner motor rotation time Specified time of rotations Enable
(Near near end)
Toner supply is low (K/C/M/Y) No relation Toner supply amount is decreasing Toner remaining sensor output Enable
(Near end) variation
Replace the toner cartridge (K) 0 (Print continue) The toner remaining counter from Specified toner remaining Disable
(End) 1 (Print stop) near end reaches the specified counter
value
Replace the toner cartridge (C/M/Y) 0 (Print continue) The toner remaining counter from Specified toner remaining Enable for
(End) 1 (Print stop) near end reaches the specified counter monochrome Disable
value for color

MX-6070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 2
3. Maintenance list
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate

Section/ every every

Work When Remarks: Refer to the Parts Guide
Unit work Name Unit name Part name 1350K 2700K
sequence calling Block / Item No.
sequence rotation rotation
3 Developing section Developing unit 1 Developer x x ▲ 2700K rotation or
(Monochrome) maximum printable number 570K
2 DV blade x x x Replace as needed
3 DV side seal F/R x x x
4 Toner filter x ▲ x
5 DV blade upper x x x Replace as needed
6 Bias pin x x x
Developing unit 1 Developer x x ▲ 2700k rotation or
(Color) maximum printable number 460K
2 DV seal x x x Replace as needed
3 DV side seal F/R x x x
4 Toner filter x ▲ x
5 DV Blade upper x x x Replace as needed
6 Bias pin x x x
4 OPC drum section OPC drum unit 1 Charger unit x ▲ ▲ 1350K rotation or
(Monochrome) 2 Drum x ▲ ▲ maximum printable number 285K
3 Cleaning blade x ▲ ▲
4 Toner reception sheet x x x Replace as needed
5 Side seal F/R x x x
OPC drum unit 1 Charger unit x ▲ ▲ 1350K rotation or
(Color) 2 Drum x ▲ ▲ maximum printable number 230K
3 Cleaning blade x ▲ ▲
4 Toner reception sheet x x x Replace as needed
5 Side seal F/R x x x

Section/ Work Remarks: Refer to the

When
Unit work Name Unit name seque Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Parts Guide
calling
sequence nce Block / Item No.
1 Document feed DSPF unit 1 Paper pickup roller       Replace at 100K of the
section 2 Paper feed roller       SPF paper feed counter
3 Separation roller       or 1 year of use
4 Torque limiter x x x x x x Replace at 800K of the
SPF paper feed counter
5 Transport roller 1      
6 Transport roller 2      
7 Registration roller      
8 Transport roller 3      
9 Transport roller 4      
10 Paper exit roller      
11 Discharge brush x x x x x x
12 Sensors x x x x x x
13 No.1 scanning plate      
14 No.2 scanning section,      
scanning glass
15 No.2 scanning section,      
white reference glass
16 Mirror      
17 Lens, CCD      
18 Lamp, Reflector       Blow air to clean LED
section
19 OC mat      
20 Gears x x x x x x
21 Belts x x x x x x

MX-6070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 3
 Section/ Work Remarks: Refer to the
When
Unit work Name Unit name seque Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Parts Guide
calling
sequence nce Block / Item No.
1 Document feed RSPF unit 1 Paper pickup roller       Replace at 100K of the
section 2 Paper feed roller       SPF paper feed counter
3 Separation roller       or 1 year of use. When
replacing the paper feed
roller, apply grease
(UKOG-0013QSZZ) to
the paper feed shaft
4 Torque limiter SPF x x x x x x Replace at 400K of the
5 Torque limiter pickup x x x x x x SPF paper feed counter
or 2 year of use
6 Discharge brush x x x x x x
7 Registration roller      
8 Transport roller 1      
9 Transport roller 2      
10 Paper exit roller      
11 Sensors x x x x x x
12 Scan plate      
13 Gears x x x x x x
14 Belts x x x x x x
15 OC mat      
2 Scanner Scanner 1 Drive belt x x x x x x
section unit 2 Drive wire x x x x x x
3 Sensors x x x x x x
4 Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ Apply grease
(UKOG-0158FCZZ)
5 Mirror      
6 Reflector      
7 Lamp      
8 Lens      
9 CCD      
10 Table glass      
11 SPF glass      
5 Transfer Primary 1 Separation pawl - x x x x x Replace as needed
section transfer unit 2 Primary transfer belt - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Replace at 300K or
2 years use
3 Primary transfer belt - x x x x x Replace as needed
drive gear
4 Primary transfer belt -      Clean with alcohol
drive roller
5 Primary transfer belt -     
follower roller
6 Primary transfer blade -     
backup roller
7 BK auxiliary roller -     
8 Y auxiliary roller -     
9 Pre-transfer roller -     
10 Primary transfer roller - x x x x x Replace as needed
11 Resist face stay cushion - x x x x x
12 Primary transfer blade - x x x x x
backup roller sheet
13 Primary transfer toner - x x x x x
reception sheet F/R
14 Cleaning roller - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Replace at same time
15 Cleaner sub blade B x x x x x Replace as needed
16 Cleaner side seal B F/R - x x x x x
17 Primary transfer belt - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Replace at same time
cleaner blade
18 Cleaner frame B sub unit - x x x x x
Secondary 1 Secondary transfer roller - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
transfer unit 2 Secondary transfer - x x x x x Replace as needed
separation plate
3 Paper guide      
4 Sensors x x x x x x
Other 1 PTC unit - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 PTC outer holder x      Alcohol cleaning
3 Image registration /      
Density sensor unit
6 LSU section LSU 1 Dust-proof glass      
Other 2 Cleaning base x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲

MX-6070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 4
 Section/ Work Remarks: Refer to the
When
Unit work Name Unit name seque Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Parts Guide
calling
sequence nce Block / Item No.
7 Manual paper Manual 1 Paper pickup roller x      Replace at 100K of
feed section paper feed 2 Paper feed roller x      manual paper feed
unit 3 Separation roller x      counter or 1 year of use
4 Torque limiter x x x x x x
5 Transport roller 11 x     
6 Sensors x x x x x x
8 Tray paper feed Tray paper 1 Paper pickup roller x      Replace at 200K of each
section feed unit 2 Paper feed roller x      paper feed counter or 1
3 Separation roller x      year of use
4 Torque limiter x x x x x x
5 Transport roller 3 x     
6 Transport roller 1 x     
7 Transport roller 2 x     
8 Sensors x x x x x x
9 Paper PS unit 1 Registration roller (idle) x     
registration 2 Registration roller (drive) x     
section/Paper 3 Transport roller 5 x     
exit section/ 4 Sensors x x x x x x
ADU section
Right door 5 Transport roller 9 x     
unit 6 Transport roller 10 x     
7 Transport roller 8 x     
8 Sensors x x x x x x
Fusing rear 9 Transport roller 7 x     
unit
Paper exit 10 Paper exit roller 2 x     
unit 11 Discharge brush x x x x x x
12 Sensors x x x x x x
Other 13 Paper exit roller 1 x     
14 Paper dust removing      
unit
— Paper guides      
10 Drive section Main drive 1 Gears (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease
unit 2 Shafts (grease) - x x x x x (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
3 Shaft earth section - x x x x x Apply grease
(conductive grease) (UKOG-0012QSZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
4 Belts - x x x x x
5 Sensors x x x x x x
Transport 6 Gears (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease
drive unit (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
7 Gears (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease
(UKOG-0299FCZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
8 Shafts (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease
(UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
9 Belts - x x x x x
10 Connection arm - x x x x x
Fusing 11 Gears (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease
drive unit (UKOG-0299FCZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
12 Gears (grease) Apply grease
13 Shafts (grease) (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
the specified position
when checking
14 Belts - x x x x x
Paper exit 15 Belts - x x x x x
drive unit

MX-6070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 5
 1 : ‘16/Sep.
Section/ Work Remarks: Refer to the
When
Unit work Name Unit name seque Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K Parts Guide
calling
sequence nce Block / Item No.
1 11 Fusing section Fusing unit 1 Fusing transport roller x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
lower
2 Gears x x x x x x
3 Fusing transport roller x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
upper
4 Pressure bearing x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
5 Separation plate x x x x x x
6 Pressure roller gear x x x x x x Replace as needed
7 Pressure roller bearing x x x x x x
8 Pressure roller x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Apply grease
(UKOG-0235FCZZ) to
the shaft section when
replacing and after
completion of
replacement, clean the
new pressure roller
surface with alcohol
9 Upper thermistor x x x x x x Replace as needed
10 Fusing belt unit x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
11 Lower thermistor x x x x x x Replace as needed
12 Main thermistor x x x x x x
13 Sub thermistor x x x x x x Replace as needed
14 Sensors x x x x x x
15 Paper guides      
12 Other Other 1 Ozone filter x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 Right cover filter x     
3 Front cover cushion x x x x x x Do not give damage to
the cushion when
cleaning the front cover
4 Toner cartridge K
5 Toner cartridge C
6 Toner cartridge M
7 Toner cartridge Y
8 Waste toner box Replaced by the user every full detection Replace at 50K

MX-6070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 6
A. Document feed section
(1) DSPF
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate

Work When Remarks: Refer to the Parts Guide

Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K
sequence calling Block / Item No.
1 Paper pickup roller       Replace at 100K of the SPF paper
2 Paper feed roller       feed counter or 1 year of use
3 Separation roller      
4 Torque limiter x x x x x x Replace at 800K of the SPF paper
feed counter
5 Transport roller 1      
6 Transport roller 2      
7 Registration roller      
8 Transport roller 3      
9 Transport roller 4      
10 Paper exit roller      
11 Discharge brush x x x x x x
12 Sensors x x x x x x
13 No.1 scanning plate      
14 No.2 scanning section, scanning glass      
15 No.2 scanning section, white reference glass      
16 Mirror      
17 Lens, CCD      
18 Lamp, Reflector       Blow air to clean LED section
19 OC mat      
20 Gears x x x x x x
21 Belts x x x x x x

MX-6070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 7
 12 21
2
1
3 12
5
12
20
4
6 21

20

7
13
12 12
8
12

10
17 11

19

16

18

15 14

MX-6070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 8
(2) RSPF
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate

Work When Remarks: Refer to the Parts Guide

Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K
sequence calling Block / Item No.
1 Paper pickup roller       Replace at 100K of the SPF paper
2 Paper feed roller       feed counter or 1 year of use. When
3 Separation roller       replacing the paper feed roller, apply
grease (UKOG-0013QSZZ) to the
paper feed shaft
4 Torque limiter SPF x x x x x x Replace at 400K of the SPF paper
5 Torque limiter pickup x x x x x x feed counter or 2 year of use
6 Discharge brush x x x x x x
7 Registration roller      
8 Transport roller 1      
9 Transport roller 2      
10 Paper exit roller      
11 Sensors x x x x x x
12 Scan plate      
13 Gears x x x x x x
14 Belts x x x x x x
15 OC mat      

11 14
5
11
1 13
2

11

14
11
7

12
9

10
6

3
4

15

MX-6070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 9
B. Scanner section
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate

Work When Remarks: Refer to the Parts Guide

Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K
sequence calling Block / Item No.
1 Drive belt x x x x x x
2 Drive wire x x x x x x
3 Sensors x x x x x x
4 Rails ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ Apply grease (UKOG-0158FCZZ)
5 Mirror      
6 Reflector      
7 Lamp      
8 Lens      
9 CCD      
10 Table glass      
11 SPF glass      

11

3
10

8
9
2
5

MX-6070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 10
C. Developer section
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
Monochrome

Work When every 1350K every 2700K Remarks: Refer to the Parts Guide
Part name
sequence calling rotation rotation Block / Item No.
1 Developer x x ▲ 2700K rotation or maximum printable number 570K
2 DV blade x x x Replace as needed
3 DV side seal F/R x x x
4 Toner filter x ▲ x
5 DV blade upper x x x Replace as needed
6 Bias pin x x x

Color

Work When every 1350K every 2700K Remarks: Refer to the Parts Guide
Part name
sequence calling rotation rotation Block / Item No.
1 Developer x x ▲ 2700K rotation or maximum printable number 460K
2 DV seal x x x Replace as needed
3 DV side seal F/R x x x
4 Toner filter x ▲ x
5 DV Blade upper x x x Replace as needed
6 Bias pin x x x

6
3
2

MX-6070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 11
D. OPC drum section
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
Monochrome

Work When every 1350K every 2700K Remarks: Refer to the Parts Guide
Part name
sequence calling rotation rotation Block / Item No.
1 Charger unit x ▲ ▲ 1350K rotation or maximum printable number 285K
2 Drum x ▲ ▲
3 Cleaning blade x ▲ ▲
4 Toner reception sheet x x x Replace as needed
5 Side seal F/R x x x

Color

Work When every 1350K every 2700K Remarks: Refer to the Parts Guide
Part name
sequence calling rotation rotation Block / Item No.
1 Charger unit x ▲ ▲ 1350K rotation or maximum printable number 230K
2 Drum x ▲ ▲
3 Cleaning blade x ▲ ▲
4 Toner reception sheet x x x Replace as needed
5 Side seal F/R x x x

MX-6070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 12
E. Transfer section
(1) Primary transfer section
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate

Work When Remarks: Refer to the Parts Guide

Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K
sequence calling Block / Item No.
1 Separation pawl - x x x x x Replace as needed
2 Primary transfer belt - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Replace at 300K or 2 years use
3 Primary transfer belt drive gear - x x x x x Replace as needed
4 Primary transfer belt drive roller -      Clean with alcohol
5 Primary transfer belt follower roller -     
6 Primary transfer blade backup roller -     
7 BK auxiliary roller -     
8 Y auxiliary roller -     
9 Pre-transfer roller -     
10 Primary transfer roller - x x x x x Replace as needed
11 Resist face stay cushion - x x x x x
12 Primary transfer blade backup roller sheet - x x x x x
13 Primary transfer toner reception sheet F/R - x x x x x
14 Cleaning roller - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Replace at same time
15 Cleaner sub blade B x x x x x Replace as needed
16 Cleaner side seal B F/R - x x x x x
17 Primary transfer belt cleaner blade - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Replace at same time
18 Cleaner frame B sub unit - x x x x x

15

14

8
16 6
12
13

5
17
11

2
16 3
18

13

7
4

10
9

MX-6070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 13
(2) Secondary transfer unit
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate

Work When Remarks: Refer to the Parts Guide

Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K
sequence calling Block / Item No.
1 Secondary transfer roller - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 Secondary transfer separation plate - x x x x x Replace as needed
3 Paper guide      
4 Sensors x x x x x x

2
1
4

MX-6070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 14
(3) Other
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate

Work When Remarks: Refer to the Parts Guide

Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K
sequence calling Block / Item No.
1 PTC unit - ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 PTC outer holder x      Alcohol cleaning
3 Image registration / Density sensor unit      

Note for cleaning the Image registration sensor, the Density sensor.
When in maintenance or in case of a service call, clean the image registration sensor and the density sensor with dry cloth and perform Sim44-2 and
46-74.

MX-6070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 15
F. LSU section
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate

Work When Remarks: Refer to the Parts Guide

Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K
sequence calling Block / Item No.
1 Dust-proof glass      
2 Cleaning base x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲

MX-6070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 16
G. Manual paper feed section
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate

Work When Remarks: Refer to the Parts Guide

Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K
sequence calling Block / Item No.
1 Paper pickup roller x      Replace at 100K of manual paper
2 Paper feed roller x      feed counter or 1 year of use
3 Separation roller x     
4 Torque limiter x x x x x x
5 Transport roller 11 x     
6 Sensors x x x x x x

1
2

5 6

MX-6070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 17
H. Tray paper feed section
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate

Work When Remarks: Refer to the Parts Guide

Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K
sequence calling Block / Item No.
1 Paper pickup roller x      Replace at 200K of each paper feed
2 Paper feed roller x      counter or 1 year of use
3 Separation roller x     
4 Torque limiter x x x x x x
5 Transport roller 3 x     
6 Transport roller 1 x     
7 Transport roller 2 x     
8 Sensors x x x x x x

8
5

8
7

6
8
4
3

MX-6070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 18
I. Paper transport section/paper exit section/ADU section
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate

Remarks: Refer to
Work When
Unit name Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K the Parts Guide
sequence calling
Block / Item No.
PS unit 1 Registration roller (idle) x     
2 Registration roller (drive) x     
3 Transport roller 5 x     
4 Sensors x x x x x x
Right door unit 5 Transport roller 9 x     
6 Transport roller 10 x     
7 Transport roller 8 x     
8 Sensors x x x x x x
Fusing rear unit 9 Transport roller 7 x     
Paper exit unit 10 Paper exit roller 2 x     
11 Discharge brush x x x x x x
12 Sensors x x x x x x
Other 13 Paper exit roller 1 x     
14 Paper dust removing unit      
— Paper guides      

12 12

7
13 12

11

8
9 5

2
10 1

14

MX-6070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 19
J. Drive section
(1) Main drive unit
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate

Work When Remarks: Refer to the Parts Guide

Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K
sequence calling Block / Item No.
1 Gears (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to
2 Shafts (grease) - x x x x x the specified position when checking
3 Shaft earth section (conductive grease) - x x x x x Apply grease (UKOG-0012QSZZ) to
the specified position when checking
4 Belts - x x x x x
5 Sensors x x x x x x

5
4 1
5

MX-6070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 20
(2) Transport drive unit / Fusing drive unit / Paper exit drive unit
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate

Work When Remarks: Refer to the Parts Guide

Unit name Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K
sequence calling Block / Item No.
Transport drive 6 Gears (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease
unit (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to the specified
position when checking
7 Gears (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease
(UKOG-0299FCZZ) to the specified
position when checking
8 Shafts (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease
(UKOG-0307FCZZ) to the specified
position when checking
9 Belts - x x x x x
10 Connection arm - x x x x x
Fusing drive 11 Gears (grease) - x x x x x Apply grease
unit (UKOG-0299FCZZ) to the specified
position when checking
12 Gears (grease) Apply grease
13 Shafts (grease) (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to the specified
position when checking
14 Belts - x x x x x
Paper exit drive 15 Belts - x x x x x
unit

MX-6070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 21
 15

13

14

11

12

9
10

7
7

6
8

MX-6070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 22
 1 : ‘16/Sep.
K. Fusing section
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate

Work When Remarks: Refer to the Parts Guide

Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K
sequence calling Block / Item No.
1 1 Fusing transport roller lower x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 Gears x x x x x x
3 Fusing transport roller upper x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
4 Pressure bearing x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
5 Separation plate x x x x x x
6 Pressure roller gear x x x x x x Replace as needed
7 Pressure roller bearing x x x x x x
8 Pressure roller x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ Apply grease (UKOG-0235FCZZ) to
the shaft section when replacing and
after completion of replacement,
clean the new pressure roller surface
with alcohol
9 Upper thermistor x x x x x x Replace as needed
10 Fusing belt unit x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
11 Lower thermistor x x x x x x Replace as needed
12 Main thermistor x x x x x x
13 Sub thermistor x x x x x x Replace as needed
14 Sensors x x x x x x
15 Paper guides      

MX-6070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 23
 1 : ‘16/Sep.

1 4
2
14

15
4

15

1 6
9

5
15
15

12

13

11

10

MX-6070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 24
L. Other
x: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity) : Clean ▲: Replace △ : Adjust ✩: Lubricate

Work When Remarks: Refer to the Parts Guide

Part name 300K 600K 900K 1200K 1500K
sequence calling Block / Item No.
1 Ozone filter x ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
2 Right cover filter x     
3 Front cover cushion x x x x x x Do not give damage to the cushion
when cleaning the front cover
4 Toner cartridge K
5 Toner cartridge C
6 Toner cartridge M
7 Toner cartridge Y
8 Waste toner box Replaced by the user every full detection Replace at 50K

7
6
5
4

1 3

MX-6070N MAINTENANCE 9 – 25
MX-6070N
[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Service
(1) Manual
Front cover
1) Remove the front cover.

1. Disassembly of Units
Ĭ
A. External view
Į
No. Name
1 Front cover
2 Front cover upper
3 MFPc cover
4 Rear cover upper
5 Left cover
Į
6 Rear cover
7 Right cover rear upper
8 Panel hinge section cover ĭ
9 Front cover upper right
10 Left cover upper rear
11 Right cover rear lower
12 Right front cover
į
13 Right cover front lower
ĭ
14 Upper cover front left
15 Upper cover front right
16 Upper cover left lower
17 Upper cover right (2) Front cover upper
1) Open the front cover.
2) Open the front cover upper and remove the boss of left side after
removing the boss of right side.

20°
15
14
17

Ĭ
2
8
9
1
ĭ
11

12 Į

13

(3) MFPc cover

1) Remove the rear cabinet cover.

4
16
7
ĭ
3
10
Ĭ
6 5

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 1

2) Remove the MFPc cover. 2) Pull out the handle and remove the left cover.

Ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ

Ĭ Ĭ

Ĭ
(6) Rear cover
Ĭ 1) Remove the rear cover.

(4) Rear cover upper

ĭ
1) Remove the MFPc cover.
2) Remove the rear cover upper.

Ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ

ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ Ĭ

(7) Right cover rear upper

1) Remove the MFPc cover.
2) Remove the rear cover upper.
3) Remove the rear cover.
4) Remove the right cover rear upper.

(5) Left cover

1) Pull out the tray, and open the front cover. Then, remove the
screw.
Ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 2

(8) Panel hinge section cover (11) Right cover rear lower
1) Remove the panel hinge section cover. 1) Open the right door and pull out the handle. Then, remove the
right cover rear bottom.

İ
Ĭ
į
ĭ

(12) Right front cover

1) Remove the Front cover upper.
2) Open the front cover.

(9) Front cover upper right

1) Open the front cover. Remove the front cover upper right.

Ĭ
ĭ
3) Open the right door.Remove the right front cover.

(10) Left cover upper rear ĭ

1) Remove the left cover. Į
2) Remove the rear cover. į Ĭ
3) Remove the left cover upper rear.
Į

Ĭ
Ĭ

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 3

(13) Right cover front lower (16) Upper cover left lower
1) Pull out the tray, and pull out the handle. Then, remove the right 1) Remove the upper cover left lower.
cover front bottom.

Ĭ
Į

Ĭ į Ĭ

(14) Upper cover front left

1) Remove the upper cover front left.

Ĭ
(17) Upper cover right
ĭ 1) Remove the upper cover right

Ĭ ĭ

(15) Upper cover front right

1) Remove the operation panel unit.
2) Remove the upper cover front right.

Ĭ
Į

ĭ
Ĭ

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 4

B. Operation panel section 3) Remove the front cover upper right.
4) Remove the two screws, harness and disconnect the connector.
No. Name Then, remove the operation panel unit.
1 Operation panel unit

Į
ĭ

Non keyboard model Keyboard standard model

(1) Operation panel unit

1) Remove the panel hinge section cover.
2) Remove the two screws.

When assembly, harness of

keyboard passing under
Ĭ panel harness and PWB.
Disassembly procedure of the connector.

ĬRemove the bar. ĭdisconnect

the connector.

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 5

Connecting procedure of the connector.
Caution: Be sure not to have the harness as shown by
Pinch the center position of the harness when insert. figure below.
Be sure not to have clearance gap after connector has been
inserted.
NG

Caution: Be sure to insert the connector as shown by the

figure below.
Hook the connector bar to the connector.

OK NG

Caution: connector direction

OK NG

Insert with terminal side is top.

Caution: Be sure not to have clearance gap after

connector has been inserted.

NG

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 6

C. Auto document feeder section
(RSPF and DSPF)
No. Name
1 DSPF unit
2 DSPF paper feed tray unit 3
3 RSPF unit
4 RSPF paper feed tray unit
5 RSPF paper transport unit

4 5

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 7

(1) DSPF unit 2) Remove the front cabinet.
1) Remove the rear cabinet cover.
2) Loosen the screw fixing the earth cable and remove the earth
cable. Then, disconnect the connector.

3) Remove the rear cabinet.

3) Remove the screws, and remove the DSPF unit from the
machine.

Ĭ
Ĭ

Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ

4) Disconnect the connector from the DSPF control PWB, and

remove the DSPF paper feed tray unit.

ĭ
(2) DSPF paper feed tray unit
1) Open the upper door unit, and remove the paper feed cover.
Į

Ĭ
ĭ ĭ
Į

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 8

(3) RSPF unit 2) Remove the front cabinet.
1) Remove the rear cabinet cover.
2) Loosen the screw fixing the earth cable and remove the earth
cable. Then, disconnect the connector. Ĭ

3) Remove the RSPF unit from the machine.

3) Remove the rear cabinet.

Ĭ
ĭ

(4) RSPF paper feed tray unit

1) Turn over the left upper corner of the OC mat. 4) Disconnect the connector from the RSPF driver PWB. Remove
the holder, and remove the RSPF paper feed tray unit.

Ĭ ĭ Į
į

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 9

(5) RSPF paper transport unit D. Scanner section
1) Remove the RSPF paper feed tray unit.
No. Name
2) Remove the earth wire. Disconnect the connector from the RSPF
1 Scanner unit
driver PWB.

Ĭ Į

3) Remove the RSPF paper transport unit.

(1) Scanner unit
1) Remove the DSPF/RSPF unit.
Ĭ 2) Remove the operation panel unit.
Ĭ
3) Remove the table glass and the SPF glass.
4) Remove the upper cover front left, upper cover front right, upper
cover right, rear cover upper and MFPC cover.
5) Disconnect the connector.

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 10

6) Remove the motion sensor PWB. *1

Unlocked (when removing FFC)

FFC can be removed by releasing the lever.

PWB

Į FFC

7) Disconnect the connector.

Connector lock lever position
(Unlocked state)

Locked (when connectiong FFC)

make sure FFC vertically inserted

8) Remove the scanner unit.

FFC is locked by raising the lever

after inserting FFC.
PWB

ĭ Ĭ FFC

Connector lock lever position

(Locked state)
Ĭ

*2

*1

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 11

*2 E. Waste toner collection section
No. Name
1 Waste toner box
Do not bend the reinforcing part when connecting the connector.

Unlocked (when removing FFC)

1
Slide the connector in the direction of
the arrow to unlock.

(1) Waste toner box

1) Open the front cover. Push the Waste toner lock lever to the
inside, and remove the waste toner box.

Pull out FFC in the direction of the arrow.

Locked (when connectiong FFC)

Insert FFC in the direction of the arrow,

with the reinforcing plate (Blue) being
placed at the right side.
make sure FFC vertically inserted

Slide the connector in the direction of

the arrow to lock.

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 12

F. Developing section 3) Check that the cam lock plate is aligned with the "O" mark posi-
tion.
No. Name 4) Turn the lock to release, and open the drum positioning plate.
1 Developing unit

ĭ
Ĭ

1
5) While pulling down the lever, pull out the developing unit to
remove.

When pulling out and pushing in the developing unit, put your
(1) Developing unit hand beneath the unit and slide it horizontally along the guide.
1) Remove the waste toner box. At the time, be careful not to touch the developing roller surface.
2) Disconnect the connector of the developing unit before opening Put it in the horizontal place.
the drum positioning plate.

make sure connector correctly inserted when connecting

OK NG

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 13

G. OPC drum section H. Transfer section
No. Name No. Name
1 OPC drum unit 1 Primary transfer unit
2 Primary transfer cleaner unit
3 Secondary transfer unit
4 PTC unit
5 Registration sensor unit

1
3
1 2

(1) OPC drum unit

1) Remove the waste toner box.
2) Open the drum positioning plate.
3) Remove the developing unit. (1) Primary transfer unit
4) While pulling up the lever, pull out the OPC drum to remove.
1) Remove the waste toner box.
2) Remove the front cover upper.
3) Open the drum positioning plate.
When pulling out and pushing in the OPC drum unit, put your
4) Open the right door.
hand beneath the unit and slide it horizontally along the guide on
5) Loosen the screw and pill out the primary transfer unit to the posi-
the right side.
tion slowly where it stops.
At the time, be careful not to touch the OPC drum surface.
6) Hold the handle (Green) on the right side of the primary transfer
unit and guide rail (plate) on the left side of the primary transfer
unit, and pull out the primary transfer unit slowly while lifting it
upward.

When removing the primary transfer unit, be sure to open the right
door in advance.

Be careful not to put foreign materials and touch on the primary

transfer belt.

lever

Ĭ Ĭ

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 14

(2) Primary transfer cleaner unit
1) Remove the primary transfer unit. Fix the cable position by band after installing
2) Turn the primary transfer unit and remove the screw. secondary transfer unit to the original position.
3) Remove the primary transfer cleaner unit.

band

Ĭ (4) PTC unit

Ĭ
1) Remove the waste toner box.
2) Open the drum positioning plate.
3) Remove the PTC unit.
Ĭ
Ĭ

Be careful not to put foreign materials on the wire and the plate.

(3) Secondary transfer unit

1) Open the right door.
2) Remove the spring from the right door unit and remove the sec-
ondary transfer unit while lifting it upward from the rear side.
Disconnect the connector from the Secondary transfer unit.

Be careful not to put foreign materials on the secondary transfer

roller.

Ĭ Ĭ

* Spring is removed from the right dorr, however,

the spring is not removed from the secondary transfer unit.

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 15

(5) Resist sensor unit (1) LSU unit
1) Remove the toner cartridge. 1) Remove the left cover.
2) Remove the waste toner box. 2) Disconnect the FFC and the connector. Then, remove the screw,
3) Remove the developing unit. and remove the LSU unit.
4) Remove the OPC drum unit.
5) Open the right door.
Ĭ
6) Remove the primary transfer unit.
7) Remove the upper frame cover.
8) Clean the resist sensor unit. Ĭ

Į
ĭ

Unlocked (when removing FFC)

I. LSU section
No. Name
1 LSU unit

FFC can be removed by releasing the lever.

Connector lock lever position

(Unlocked state)

FFC
PWB

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 16

 J. Manual paper feed section
Locked (when connectiong FFC)
No. Name
1 Manual paper feed tray
2 Manual paper feed unit

FFC is locked by lowering the lever

after inserting FFC.

Connector lock lever position

(Locked state)
FFC
2
PWB
* Insert the FFC and the connector straight until they stop.
* Insert the FFC alignment tab to the connector alignment guide. 1

FFC alignment tab (1) Manual paper feed tray

1) Remove the inner cover R upper.

NG: The FFC is not

OK connected straight.

ĭ Ĭ

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 17

2) Remove the ADU cabinet R upper. 5) Remove the multi-tray angle.

Ĭ
ĭ

ĭ ĭ

Ĭ
Ĭ Ĭ
Ĭ

6) Remove the manual paper tray fulcrum shaft, and remove the
3) Remove the right door lock pawl, and remove the ADU cabinet F. manual paper tray.

Ĭ
Į

ĭ Į
Į Ĭ

(2) Manual paper feed unit

1) Remove the manual paper feed tray.
4) Remove the connector, and remove the multi-tray supporting
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the manual paper feed
point cover.
unit.

ĭ
Ĭ

Į
Ĭ

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 18

K. Tray paper feed section 5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the tray paper feed unit.

No. Name
1 Paper feed tray
2 Tray paper feed unit

L. Paper transport/Paper exit/ADU section

2
1 No. Name
1 Paper dust removing unit
2 PS unit
3 Right door unit
4 Fusing rear unit
5 Paper exit unit

(1) Paper feed tray

1) Pull out the paper feed tray, and lift and remove it.

3
4

(2) Tray paper feed unit 1

2
1) Remove the paper feed tray.
2) Remove the right cover rear lower.
3) Remove the right cover front lower.
4) Remove the right door unit.

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 19

(1) Paper dust removing unit (3) Right door unit
1) Remove the waste toner box. 1) Remove the inner cover R upper.
2) Remove the paper dust cleaner unit.

ĭ Ĭ

(2) PS unit
2) Remove the FFC, and remove the right door open/close harness
1) Paper dust removing unit
holder.
2) Remove the waste toner box.
3) Remove the paper feed tray.
4) Remove the tray paper feed unit.
5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the PS unit.

Ĭ
Ĭ *1
*2

Į
į
ĭ Į

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 20

*1 3) Remove the right door.

Insert the FFC straight CAUTION :

until it stops. Check that the FFC
reinforce plate is parallel
to the connector.

The lock is released by pressing

the tab of the FFC connector with
the direction described by
the arrow.

*2

Ĭ Ĭ

* When the lock lever is lifted up,

be care ful not to damage (4) Fusing rear unit
the connector.
1) Remove the fusing unit.
2) Remove the fusing rear unit.Then disconnect the connector.
Lift up the lock lever
before inserting the FFC.
Į

Insert the FFC straight Pull down the lock lever

until it stops. and lock the part.

Ĭ
ĭ
CAUTION :
Check that the FFC reinforce
plate is parallel to the connector.

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 21

(5) Paper exit unit 6) Remove the harness from the wire saddle.
1) Remove the front cover upper right. Remove the harness from the rib.
2) Remove the paper exit unit. Remove the connector and the ground wire from the PCU PWB.
Then, open the PCU PWB fixing plate unit and the MC fixing plate
unit.

When the connector is attached, check that the connector is

attached firmly. (Check that the connector is attached straight.)
Be sure to clamp the harness when assembling.

Į
Wire Saddle Connector* Ground wire

Connector Rib

į
Ĭ

M. Drive section
No. Name
1 Main drive unit
2 Transport drive unit
3 Fusing drive unit
4 Paper exit drive unit
Disconnect connector*

OK NG

4 Ĭ
1
3 Į

į Į
2
ĭ

(1) Main drive unit

1) Remove the waste toner box.
2) Remove the developing unit.
3) Remove the OPC drum unit.
4) Remove the primary transfer unit. Ĭ
5) Remove the rear cover.

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 22

 NOTE: Be careful with the following points when the MC PWB is (2) Transport drive unit
attached. 1) Remove the rear cover.
• Check that each spring electrode is attached correctly. 2) Remove the connector and the ground wire from the PCU PWB.
• Check that each spring electrode is not bent or Then, open the PCU PWB fixing plate unit.
deformed.

7) Remove the main drive unit.

3) Remove the connector, the reuse band and the harness from the
transport drive unit.

Ĭ Ĭ
Ĭ

Ĭ Ĭ Ĭ

Connector (yellow) Connector (white)

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 23

4) Remove the transport drive unit. 5) Remove the fusing drive unit

Ĭ
Ĭ

Ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ

ĭ
Ĭ

Ĭ Ĭ

(4) Paper exit drive unit

(3) Fusing drive unit 1) Remove the rear cover.
1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the right cover rear upper.
2) Remove the right cover rear upper. 3) Remove the delivery fan cover.
3) Remove the connector and the ground wire from the PCU PWB.
Then, open the PCU PWB fixing plate unit.

ĭ ĭ

4) Remove the connector, the reuse band and the harness from the
paper exit drive unit.

4) Remove the connector and the reuse band from the fusing drive
unit.

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 24

5) Remove the paper exit drive unit. O. PWB section
No. Name
1 TC PWB
2 SCN-MFP PWB
Ĭ 3 PCU PWB
4 LSUcnt PWB
Ĭ
5 MC PWB
6 AC monitor PWB
ĭ 7 DC POWER PWB
Ĭ 8 AC PWB
Ĭ
9 HL PWB

N. Fusing section
No. Name
1 Fusing unit
7

2
5 6
1
3
4

9 8
1

(1) TC PWB
1) Remove the left cover.
2) Remove the TC PWB, and disconnect the connector.

(1) Fusing unit

1) Open the right door, and remove the fusing unit.

Ĭ
ĭ
Į

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 25

 Caution with replacing the high voltage TC PWB (2) SCN-MFP PWB
1) When the part is attached 1) Remove the MFPC cover.
Check the spring electrode on the main unit. 2) Remove the rear cover upper.
• Check that each spring electrode is attached correctly. 3) Remove the rear cover.
• Check that each spring electrode is not bent or deformed. 4) Remove the right cover rear upper.
5) Remove the left cover.
6) Remove the left cover upper rear.
7) Remove the connector and the FFC, and remove the MFPC PWB
fixing plate unit.

Be careful with the FFC which is attached on the rear side of the
MFPC PWB fixing plate unit.

2) The order for fixing to the main unit Ĭ

Ĭ

8) Remove the FFC cable.

Attach the PWB in order of 1 to 2. With this order, the remaining
resin boss is attached easily.

ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ Ĭ Ĭ Ĭ ĭ

3) Check the resin pawl on the main unit.

Fix the TC PWB with the pawls (5 places) correctly.

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 26

How to attach/remove the MFPC PWB FFC *2

*1
Do not bend the reinforcing part when connecting the connector.

*2
Unlocked (when removing FFC)

*1

*1

Unlocked (when removing FFC)

Slide the connector in the direction of

the arrow to unlock.

FFC can be removed by releasing the lever.

PWB

FFC
Pull out FFC in the direction of the arrow.

Locked (when connectiong FFC)

Connector lock lever position
(Unlocked state)

Locked (when connectiong FFC)

make sure FFC vertically inserted

Insert FFC in the direction of the arrow,

with the reinforcing plate (Blue) being
placed at the right side.

FFC is locked by raising the lever after inserting FFC.

PWB

FFC

Connector lock lever position

(Locked state)
Slide the connector in the direction of
the arrow to lock.

9) Take out 2 eeprom from the PWB and mount them onto the new
PWB.

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 27

(3) PCU PWB *2
1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Remove the connector and the FFC, and remove the PCU PWB
fixing plate unit. * When the lock lever is lifted up,
be care ful not to damage
the connector.

Ĭ Lift up the lock lever

before inserting the FFC.

Insert the FFC straight Pull down the lock lever

until it stops. and lock the part.

Ĭ
CAUTION :
Perform the following operations after replacing the PCU PWB. Check that the FFC reinforce
plate is parallel to the connector.
• Remove the fusing unit and turn ON the main power. Then,
leave the main unit for 10 seconds.
• Turn OFF the main power.
• Attach the fusing unit. 3) Take out the eeprom from the PWB and mount it onto the new
How to attach/remove the PCU PWB FFC PWB.
(4) LSUcnt PWB
*2 *1
1) Remove the connector and the harness.

*1

2) Remove the screw, and remove LSUcnt PWB with holding the
upper and lower edges.

Insert the FFC straight CAUTION :

until it stops. Check that the FFC
reinforce plate is parallel to
the connector.

The lock is released by pressing

the tab of the FFC connector with
Ĭ
the direction described by ĭ
the arrow.
Ĭ

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 28

 5) Disconnect the ground wire on the MC PWB.
Press the points shown figure below
when connecting connector.

(5) MC PWB
1) Remove the MFPC cover.
2) Remove the rear cover.
3) Disconnect the connector from the PCU PWB and open the MC
fixing plate unit.

6) Remove the 7 pawls, and remove the MC PWB.

Be sure to clamp the harness when assembling.

Ĭ ĭ

Rib

Ĭ
Caution with replacing the high voltage MC PWB

Ĭ 1) When the part is attached

Check the spring electrode on the main unit.
4) Disconnect the 3 harnesses on the MC PWB. • Check that each spring electrode is attached correctly.
• Check that each spring electrode is not bent or deformed.

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 29

2) Check the connection to the main unit (7) DC POWER PWB
Fix the MC PWB with the pawls (7 places) correctly. 1) Remove the AC monitor PWB.
2) Remove the connector, and remove the low voltage power unit.

Ĭ Ĭ Ĭ

Ĭ Ĭ

Ĭ Ĭ ĭ Ĭ

(8) AC PWB
1) Remove the MFPC cover.
2) Remove the rear cover.
3) Disconnect the connector from the PCU PWB and open the MC
fixing plate unit.

Ĭ ĭ

· The resin boss is gotten out correctly.

· The center screw of the MC PWB is fixed correctly.

(6) AC monitor PWB

1) Remove the MFPC PWB fixing plate unit.
2) Remove the connector, and remove the AC monitor PWB.

Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
4) Disconnect the all connectors from the AC PWB.

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 30

5) Remove the reuse band and the ground wire. 4) Remove the screws, and remove the HL PWB.
Remove the AC cord fixing plate unit.
Ĭ Ĭ Ĭ Ĭ

Ĭ ĭ Ĭ Ĭ
Į
Saddle for fixing the screw
į · Fix by the screw with the HL PWB.

Ĭ
Į

6) Remove the AC PWB.

Ĭ Ĭ ĭ

P. Filter section
Ĭ
No. Name
1 Ozone filter

Ĭ Ĭ
(9) HL PWB
1) Remove the rear cover.
2) Remove the connector and the ground wire from the PCU PWB.
Then, open the PCU PWB fixing plate unit and the MC fixing plate
unit.

Į 1

į Į
ĭ

Į
(1) Ozone filter
1) Remove the ozone filter cover, and remove the ozone filter.

3) Disconnect the connector from the HL PWB.

ĭ

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 31

2. Disassembly and assembly of each unit 3) Remove the harness from the clamp and band.

A. Operation panel section

(1) Operation panel unit Ĭ

Part No. Part name

a LCD
b Touch panel
c HOME PWB

ĭ
c

Be sure that no laxity of

the harness when assembly.

Caution of assembly
a. LCD
1) Remove the harness from the clamp.

2) Remove the cover and the screw then open the cover. Be sure to attach Banding band direction.
the lock lever as shown by
figure below.

ࢥ“PP

ĭ OK NG
Ĭ
ĭ ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 32

4) Remove the screw and the mylar. 6) Remove the pawl and LCD holder unit.

Ĭ
Ĭ

Ĭ
ĭ Į

5) Remove the connector and cable.

ĭ

7) Remove the pawl and open the LCD holder.

Unlocked condition Locked condition

Insert the connector with Be sure to lock.

unlocked condition.
İ

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 33

8) Remove the connector.
Harness fix by the tape with flat condition of the harness.

Harness do not place on the harness.

OK NG

Be sure to insert
the connector.

Lay low the bar.

OK NG Attaching reference

X
2.0mm 2.0mm

2.0mm
Y
2.0mm

Insert the terminal side is top.

Caution of assembly
9) Remove the LCD.
The harness should be placed on
the center position of the hole. LCD holder B

Be sure that no contortive of

the harness.

There should be no clearance gap

between the holder when attaching the tape.

LCD holder A

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 34

b. Touch panel (2) Operation panel unit (Keyboard standard model)
1) Remove the touch panel.
Part No. Part name
a Keyboard
0mm b LCD
Attaching
c Touch panel
reference
0.3mm d HOME PWB

0mm 0.3mm
Attaching reference d

a
b
Do not bend.

a. Keyboard
2) Remove the sheet.
1) Remove the harness from the clamp.

0.3mm
Attaching
reference
0mm 0.3mm 0mm
Attaching reference

2) Remove the cover and the screw then open the cover.
Attaching reference
0.3mm 0mm
0.3mm ĭ
Attaching
reference
0mm
Į
c. HOME PWB
1) Remove the pawl and HOME PWB.

Ĭ ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 35

3) Remove the harness from the clamp and band. 4) Remove the screw and the keyboard.

Ĭ
Ĭ

ĭ Ĭ

Į Be sure that no laxity of

the harness when
assembly. b. LCD
Pinch
1) Remove the screw and the mylar.

Caution of assembly Ĭ

Ĭ
ĭ

2) Remove the connector and cable.

Be sure to attach Banding band direction.

the lock lever as shown by
figure below.

ࢥ“PP

OK NG
Unlocked condition Locked condition

Insert the connector with Be sure to lock.

unlocked condition.

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 36

3) Remove the pawl and LCD holder unit. 5) Remove the connector.

ĭ
Be sure to insert
the connector.

Ĭ Lay low the bar.

OK NG

4) Remove the pawl and open the LCD holder.

į Insert the terminal side is top.

Į
Caution of assembly

The harness should be placed on

the center position of the hole. LCD holder B

Be sure that no contortive of

the harness.

ĭ There should be no clearance gap

between the holder when attaching the tape.

LCD holder A

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 37

 c. Touch panel
Harness fix by the tape with flat condition of the harness. 1) Remove the touch panel.

0mm
Attaching
reference
0.3mm

0mm 0.3mm
Attaching reference

Harness do not place on the harness.

OK NG
Do not bend.

2) Remove the sheet.

0.3mm
Attaching
reference
0mm 0.3mm 0mm
Attaching reference Attaching reference

:
2.0mm 2.0mm

2.0mm
;
2.0mm

Attaching reference
0.3mm 0mm
0.3mm
6) Remove the LCD. Attaching
reference
0mm

d. HOME PWB
1) Remove the pawl and HOME PWB.

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 38

B. Document feed section 2) Remove the front cabinet.

(1) DSPF unit

Part No. Part name

a Front cabinet ĭ
b Rear cabinet upper Į
c Upper door unit
d Paper feed unit
e Lamp unit
f Optical unit
g Delivery drive unit į IJ
Ĭ
h Paper feed drive unit
i DSPF control PWB

c b
İ

b. Rear cabinet upper

1) Open the upper door. Remove the screw and remove the rear
cabinet.

a
Į
Ĭ
h
d
g ĭ

f
i

e
Ĭ

Ĭ Ĭ
a. Front cabinet
1) Open the upper door, and remove the screw. c. Upper door unit
1) Remove the front cabinet.
2) Remove the spring, pressure release axis holder, screw and pres-
Ĭ
sure release link lever.

į ĭ

Ĭ
Į

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 39

3) Remove the rear cabinet upper. 4) Disconnect the connector. Open the wire saddle and remove the
4) Disconnect the connector. snap band.

5) Remove the resin E-ring, and remove the upper door unit.
Ĭ

5) Remove the screw, and remove the paper feed unit.

d. Paper feed unit

1) Remove the front cabinet.
2) Remove the rear cabinet upper.
3) Remove the screw and remove the paper feed cover.
e. Lamp unit
1) Remove the front cabinet.
2) Remove the rear cabinet upper.
3) Open the OC mat.
ĭ

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 40

4) Disconnect the connector for lamp unit from the control PWB. 7) Remove the screw and lamp unit.

5) Open the lower door and remove the screw, fulcrum plate, and
lower door. f. Optical unit
1) Remove the upper door.
2) Remove the lamp unit.
3) Remove the screws and paper guide.
ĭ Ĭ
Į

ĭ
į

6) Remove the screw, fulcrum plate, and white standard plate.

4) Remove the CCD FFC from the CCD PWB.

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 41

5) Remove the screw and cushion. Remove optics fixing plate and h. Paper feed drive unit
optical unit. 1) Remove the rear cabinet upper.
2) Disconnect the connectors. Remove the harness from the wire
saddle.

ĭ
Ĭ

ĭ
į

g. Delivery drive unit

1) Remove the rear cabinet upper.
2) Disconnect the connector and open the edge saddle. Remove the
snap band.
3) Remove resign E-ring, separation clutch and transport clutch.
NOTE: make sure that stopping section in the clutch is fit into the
plate during the assembly.

Į
Ĭ
į

ĭ ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ

3) Remove the screws and the drive unit.

When attaching the delivery drive unit, tighten the screw in the
order of (1) - (3).
4) Remove screws and the paper feed drive unit.
Į
Ĭ
į

Ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 42

h-1. Attachment of belts i. DSPF control PWB
1) Loosen the screw. Tighten the screw while applying tension. 1) Remove the rear cabinet upper.
2) Remove the rear cabinet lower.

Ĭ
ĭ

Ĭ
ĭ

2) Loosen the screw. Tighten the screw again after reapplying ten-
sion in the direction of the arrow. 3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screws. Remove the
DSPF control PWB.

Ĭ
ĭ

ĭ Ĭ
ĭ

Ĭ Ĭ

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 43

(2) RSPF unit 2) Remove the holder, paper pickup roller and paper feed roller

Part No. Part name

a Paper pickup roller
b Paper feed roller
c Separation roller
d Torque limiter
e Torque limiter pickup
f Discharge brush
g Registration roller
h OC mat

Į
b

g e ĭ
d
a
c

f Ĭ
į
h

c. Separation roller
d. Torque limiter
1) Open the paper feed unit and remove the cover
a. Paper pickup roller
b. Paper feed roller
1) Open the paper feed unit and remove the cover Į

2) Remove the E-ring, shaft, separation roller and the torque limiter

Ĭ Į

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 44

e. Torque limiter pickup g. Registration roller
1) Remove the one-way coupling, the belt, the pulley and the E-ring 1) Open the paper feed unit and clean the registration roller

Ĭ
ĭ
Į

h. OC mat
į 1) Open the RSPF unit and clean the OC mat

2) Pull out the shaft, remove bearing, holder and torque limiter
pickup

Į
į

f. Discharge brush
1) Open the document tray and remove the discharge brush

engraved mark reference

engraved 1mm 1mm
mark
reference
0mm
0.5mm

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 45

(3) RSPF transport unit C. Scanner section
Part No. Part name (1) Scanner unit
a Transport roller 1
Part No. Part name
b Transport roller 2
a Drive belt
c Paper exit roller
b Drive wire
d Scan plate
c Sensors
d Rails
e Mirror
f Reflector
d g Lamp
h Lens
c i CCD
j Table glass
a
k SPF glass

b
c

k
d
c
j
a. Transport roller 1
b. Transport roller 2
c. Paper exit roller a
d. Scan plate
1) Clean the transport roller 1, the transport roller 2, the paper exit b
roller and the scan plate
d

h
i
b
f

g
e
e

a. Drive belt
b. Drive wire
1) Remove the table glass.
2) Check the tension of the drive belt and the drive wire. Check to
confirm that the drive wire in the winding pulley is wound without
clearance.

OK NG

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 46

 d. Rails
1) Remove the table glass.
Wind the drive wire in the sequence of 1 to 7 as shown in the fig- 2) Grease each rail.
ure below and fix it.
When winding the drive wire around the pulley, shift the mirror unit
to the vicinity of the home position, and wind 7 turns as shown in
Be careful not to allow grease to come in contact with drive wires.
the figure, and fix the 8th turn with a screw. Then wind two turns
furthermore around the pulley. If grease contacts drive wires, clean wires thoroughly.

IJ
ı

į ĭ
İ
Ĭ

IJ
ı
1 7 8 9 10
į
İ
e. Mirror
ĭ f. Reflector
Ĭ g. Lamp
Į 10 9 8 7 1 1) Remove the table glass.
2) Clean the No. 2 mirror, and the No. 3 mirror.

c. Sensors
1) Clean the each sensor.

3) Clean the reflector, the scanner lamp, and the No. 1 mirror.

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 47

h. Lens D. Developing section
i. CCD (1) Developing unit
1) Remove the table glass.
2) Remove the dark box, and the cover. Part No. Part name
a Developer
b DV blade
Ĭ
c DV side seal FR
d Toner filter
e DV blade upper
ĭ Ĭ

c
e

3) Clean the lens, and the CCD.

a. Developer
1) Tilt the developing unit slightly toward the direction of arrow and
gently shake up a little.
*To prevent the developer spilling out of developing unit

j. Table glass
k. SPF glass
1) Remove the glass holder, the table glass, and the SPF glass.

į İ

Ĭ
ĭ
2) Remove the screw

2) Clean the both surfaces of the table glass, and the SPF glass.

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 48

3) Press both edges of the cover and remove it while rotating. 5) Loading developer to the developing unit

Be sure to shake the bag of developer thoroughly before pouring

into the developing unit

When pouring the developer into the unit, use care not to get
developer into the drive section

Do not touch the MG roller.

MG roller
6) Slightly tilt the developing unit. Load developer on lower side of
MG roller evenly on left and right.

4) While rotating the gear, dispose of developer

Do not tilt the developing unit after loading the developer.

7) Insert the pawls on the cover into the holes on DV-BOX at an
angle of 45 degrees.

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 49

8) Rotate and insert the cover. b. DV blade
1) Remove the screw

9) Check the mounting condition of the cover and tighten screws. 2) Pull the center section and remove the boss. Insert a flat-blade
screwdriver into the space (1) in the illustration below. Slide the
cover toward the front and remove the rear-side boss.
Since shoulder screws are used, do not tighten too firmly.
Tightening torque of the screw 0.5 - 0.6Nm
When removing the rear-side boss, press the cover gently to pre-
vent toner dispersion.
Į

The front-side boss and rear-side boss must be handled with care
to prevent fracturing.

Ĭ Make sure that bosses are

fit into holes.

į Press the cover toward

the direction of arrow Ĭ
after assembling.
The cover must be
ĭ Make sure pawls are seated securely.
inserted and secured.

3) Release the front-side boss while sliding the cover toward rear
Execute developer adjustment after replacement of the developer. side and remove the cover.
(Sim25-2)

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 50

4) Remove the DV blade c. DV side seal FR
1) Remove the DV side seal FR

When replacing the DV blade, affix the DV blade based on the ref-
erence position. When replacing the DV side seal FR, affix the seals based on the
reference position.

Before affixing new DV blade, make sure to remove any foreign

material and remaining adhesive from affixing surface completely. Before affixing new DV side seal FR, make sure to remove any
foreign material and remaining adhesive from affixing surface
completely.
Steady the DV blade after affixing the blade. (Make sure that the
sheet is seated securely.) DV side seal F DV side seal R

Make sure there are no crinkles on lead edge of the DV blade

after affixing the DV blade.

Reference position Reference position Reference position

Reference position
(Wall surface) (Edge face) (Edge face)
(Wall surface)
0mm 0.3mm 0.3mm 0mm 0.3mm 0.3mm 0mm

0mm
0.3mm 0.3mm

0mm 0mm
Reference position Reference position
(Steps) (Edge face)

2) Insert two front-side bosses into the holes on DV-BOX.

Insert one rear-side boss into the holes on DV-BOX while slightly
bending the cover.
Insert the boss on back side of the cover securely and tighten
Do not mistake for DV blade upper. screw.

DV blade. DV blade upper.

Į

Cut surface No cut surface

Ĭ ĭ

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 51

 3) Attach the filter cover.

Make sure a part of DV blade is placed on top of DV side seal FR. Put the hole through the boss.

DV blade is Side seal is

placed on top placed on top
Insert the ribs.

Insert the boss.

d. Toner filter Make sure to hook the filter cover

1) Uplift a knob on the filter cover (1), slide toward the direction of (2) with pawl and rib securely.
and remove the cover.
Hook the pawls.

e. DV blade upper
1) Remove the DV cover
2) Remove the DV blade upper

ĭ
When replacing the DV blade upper, affix it based on the refer-
ence position.
Ĭ

Before affixing new DV blade upper, make sure to remove any for-
eign material and remaining adhesive from affixing surface com-
pletely.

2) Remove the toner filter from the filter cover

Steady the DV blade upper after affixing the blade. (Make sure
Make sure to attach the filter in proper mounting direction for that the sheet is seated securely.)
replacement.

Wider in width
Make sure there are no crinkles on lead edge of the DV blade
upper after affixing the DV blade.

Reference
position
(Wall surface)
0mm

0mm 0.3mm 0.5mm

Reference position
(Wall surface)

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 52

 b. Drum
1) Remove the screw and pull out the shaft from the drum
Do not mistake for DV blade.

DV blade upper. DV blade.

No cut surface Cut surface

3) Attach the cover.

E. OPC drum section *If the drum shaft is hard to remove, insert a flat-blade screwdriver
(1) OPC drum unit between process frame and cutout on bearing to remove (as
shown in the illustration below).
Part No. Part name
a Charger unit
b Drum
c Cleaning blade
d Toner reception sheet
e Side seal FR
Cutout area

When inserting the drum shaft, make sure to insert the pin all the
c
way toward the direction of arrow (in the illustration below).

a. Charger unit
1) Uplift the lock lever and pull out the charger unit.

2) Remove the drum

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 53

When handling the drum, make sure to hold within 15 mm of both When the drum is removed perform the following procedures
edges or less.
1) After removing the drum, apply stearic acid powder (UKOG-
15 mm or less 15 mm or less 0312FCZZ) to the whole surface of the drum

Note for servicing the drums

(1) Prevent contamination
Note
• Be careful not to leave fingerprints or oil dirt on the drum surface
(keep the unit always oils and dust)
• When replacing the drum, cover the drum with the protection sheet
and hold the protection sheet. If it is required to hold the drum
2) After mounting the drum on drum frame, hold both edges of drum
directly, use enough care not to touch the cleaning blade area.
within 15 mm or less. Rotate the drum manually in the forward
15mm inside from both edges of the drum. (If a fingerprint or oily dirt
direction twice (toward the direction of arrow as shown in the illus-
is attached to the cleaning blade area of the OPC drum, the cleaning
tration below) and remove the stearic acid powder (UKOG-
blade may flip)
0312FCZZ) from drum surface.
Countermeasures
If a fingerprint is attached to the drum surface erroneously, perform the
following countermeasures
1) Use dry cloth to clean and remove the dirt
Check method
Check to confirm that the drum is free from fingerprints or oily dirt and
that the cleaning blade is completely cleaned by the following method
• Make a print of a half tone image on all the surface of A4 (11 x 8.5)
paper and check the printed paper for any abnormality in the image
(2) Prior exposure prevention
Note
• Avoid servicing in a place where there is strong light
• Do not expose the unit to light for a long time
• Cover the drum with light-blocking material (when using paper, use
about 10 sheets of paper to block light)
• Do not touch the drum surface except for the both ends (15
Countermeasures
mm) of the drum
If the drum is erroneously exposed to light too much (prior exposure)
• Any section of the drum may be touched from above the black
perform the following countermeasures
protect sheet, but do not touch too strongly
1) Print half tone image on the whole surface of A4 (11 x 8.5) paper
and check to confirm that there is no irregular density area in the
previously exposed section
2) If the drum is subject to stress by being exposed to strong light. It
may be recovered by leaving it in a dark and cool place. If it may
not be recovered replace it with a new one

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 54

c. Cleaning blade
1) Remove the pawls and the MC cover.

F side

Ĭ MC-HP lever

2) Remove the screw and the cleaning blade

Į

Do not touch the lead edge of the cleaning blade.

Pay attention to center section

hooked with a pawl.
When attaching the cleaning blade, tighten the screw in the order
of (1) - (3).

Ĭ
Followings must be observed while attaching the cover:
• (1) Insert the pawl on MC unit to the square hole on process
frame. ĭ
• (2) Insert the pawl into the hole securely until it clicks.
• (3) Insert the pawl on front side securely.
• (4) Check to confirm MC cover is smoothly moving after attach-
ing to the original position. Į

Į Steady the cover

from above.

F side

Make sure the pawl is

secured.

Inset the pawl

into the frame.

Insert the pawl to

the square hole.

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 55

d. Toner reception sheet F. Transfer section
1) Remove the toner reception sheet (1) Primary transfer unit

Part No. Part name

a Separation pawl
When replacing the toner reception sheet, affix the sheet based
b Primary transfer belt
on the reference position. Clean the affixing surface with alcohol.
c Primary transfer cleaner unit
d Primary transfer belt drive gear
e Primary transfer belt drive roller
f Primary transfer belt followed roller
g Primary transfer blade backup roller
h BK auxiliary roller
i Y auxiliary roller
j Pre-transfer roller
k Primary transfer roller
l Resist face stay cushion
m Primary transfer blade backup roller sheet
n Primary transfer toner reception sheet FR
Reference position
(Wall surface)
0mm 0.3mm ig
Reference 0mm m
n
position
f
(Steps)
0.3mm l
d

e. Side seal FR

1) Remove the side seal FR

n
b
When replacing the side seal FR, attach the cleaning blade first.
a
Then move the side seals toward front side and attach based on
the reference position. Clean the affixing surface with alcohol. h
k e
j

Before affixing new seal, make sure to remove any foreign mate- c
rial and remaining adhesive from affixing surface completely.
*The blade should not be put on top of the side seals while hold-
ing down the blade.
*The width of the clearance should be 0.3 mm or less.

a. Separation pawl
1) Remove the screw and paper guide

Reference position (Wall surface)

0mm After removing the paper guide, place it with the separation pawl
upward to prevent damage on the tip of the pawl.
When attaching the paper guide, handle it carefully not to scratch
0.3mm transfer belt with separation pawl.

0.3mm 0mm 0mm 0.3mm

Reference position (Contact point with the blade)

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 56

 2) Flip the unit upside down and remove screws.
3) Remove primary transfer cleaner unit

Ĭ
Ĭ

Ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ

4) Remove the spring

2) Place the paper guide with the separation pawl upward. Remove
a screw and detach the separation pawl from the paper guide.

ĭ
Ĭ

b. Primary transfer belt

c. Primary transfer cleaner unit
1) Remove the screw while Primary transfer cleaner unit in on top
and remove the rail.

Do not touch the belt.

Handle the belt carefully to avoid contact with floor.
Ĭ 5) Remove the screw

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 57

6) Insert a driver into the hole on the frame and set the unit upright. 9) Pull out the primary transfer belt slowly.

When attaching the belt,

place the lot number on
the edge of the belt on
rear side.

Caution for attachment

Do not place the belt on
flange on the roller.

7) Fold the primary transfer belt followed roller.

NOTE: Caution for attachment
Follow the steps below after replacing the primary transfer
belt.
1) Apply Y powder (CKOG-0345DS51) on entire surface of
the primary transfer belt with primary transfer cleaner unit
being removed.

2) Attach the primary transfer cleaner unit.

3) Manually rotate the primary transfer belt drive gear and
remove the powder applied on the primary transfer belt.
8) Remove the sub frame

Confirm proper rotation direction. Never rotate in inverse

direction.

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 58

d. Primary transfer belt drive gear i. Y auxiliary roller
1) Pull out the pin and remove the primary transfer belt drive gear j. Pre-transfer roller
1) Clean the Y auxiliary roller and Pre-transfer roller with alcohol.

Y auxiliary roller

Pre-transfer
roller

e. Primary transfer belt drive roller

f. Primary transfer belt followed roller k. Primary transfer roller
1) Clean the primary transfer belt drive roller and primary transfer 1) Remove the E-ring and primary transfer roller
belt followed roller with alcohol.

Primary transfer belt

followed roller

ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ
Primary transfer
belt drive roller

g. Primary transfer blade backup roller

h. BK auxiliary roller
1) Clean the Primary transfer blade backup roller and BK auxiliary l. Resist face stay cushion
roller with alcohol. 1) Remove the resist face stay cushion

When replacing the resist face stay cushion, attach the cushion
based on the reference position.

Before affixing new resist face stay cushion, make sure to remove
any foreign material and remaining adhesive from affixing surface
completely.

Primary transfer
blade backup roller

BK auxiliary roller

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 59

 2) Remove the primary transfer blade backup roller sheet

Affix the resist face stay cushion so that the cut surface
of the cushion will be placed along the marking-off line.
When replacing the primary transfer blade backup roller sheet,
affix the sheet based on the reference position.
Reference position
Marking-off line
0.3mm 0mm
Before affixing new primary transfer blade backup roller sheet,
make sure to remove any foreign material and remaining adhe-
sive from affixing surface completely.

Reference position Reference position

(Edge face) (Edge face)
Reference 0.3mm
0.3mm 0.3mm position
Marking-off line 0mm
0mm 0mm 0.3mm 0.3mm 0mm 0mm 0mm 0.3mm
Reference position(Edge face)

m. Primary transfer blade backup roller sheet

n. Primary transfer toner reception sheet FR
1) Remove the parts in the order of a screws, the grounding elec-
1) Remove the primary transfer toner reception sheet FR
trode for blade backup roller, and the frame.

Į
When replacing the primary transfer toner reception sheet FR,
affix the sheets based on the reference position.

Ĭ
Į į
ĭ Before affixing new primary transfer toner reception sheet FR,
make sure to remove any foreign material and remaining adhe-
sive from affixing surface completely.

Reference Reference
position position
Edge face Edge face
of the rib of the rib
Ensure that the grounding electrode is contacting 1.0mm 1.0mm
the upper surface of the shaft after attaching the
groounding electrode for blade backup roller.
0mm 0mm
0mm 0.3mm 0.3mm 0mm
Reference position Reference position
Wall surface Wall surface

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 60

(2) Primary transfer cleaner unit b. Cleaner sub blade B
1) Remove the cleaner sub blade B
Part No. Part name
a Cleaning roller
b Cleaner sub blade B
c Cleaner side seal B F/R Before replacing the cleaner sub blade B, affix the blade based on
d Primary transfer cleaner blade the reference position.
e Cleaner frame B sub unit

Before affixing new cleaner sub blade B, make sure to remove

b any foreign material and remaining adhesive from affixing surface
completely.
a

c
e

a. Cleaning roller
1) Remove the E-ring and cleaning roller

Ĭ Reference
position
Wall surface
0.3mm 0.3mm

ĭ 0mm 0mm
Reference position 0.3mm 0mm
Wall surface Reference position
Steps

c. Cleaner side seal B F/R

1) Remove the cleaner side seal B F/R.

When replacing the cleaner side seal B F/R, affix the seals based
on the reference position.

Do no place any part of the seals on top of the blade.

The seals should not get stuck at rubber section on the cleaner
blade.

Before affixing new cleaner side seal B F/R, make sure to remove
any foreign material and remaining adhesive from affixing surface
completely.

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 61

 d. Primary transfer cleaner blade
1) Remove the screw and primary transfer cleaner blade

Do not touch the edge of the cleaner blade.

Remove the mylar when replace cleaner blade with Primary trans-
fer blade kit.

0mm 0mm
Reference position
0.3mm Edge face 0.3mm Ĭ

push down ĭ
the cleaner blade

Reference position
Edge face of the blade
0.3mm 0mm 0.3mm 0mm Ĭ

(3) Secondary transfer unit

Part No. Part name

a Secondary transfer roller
b Paper guide
c Secondary transfer separation plate
d Sensors

※There is gap between the edge of

the cleaner blade and side seal
after pushing down the cleaner c
blade. a

※Check to confirm edge of cleaner

b
blade is smoothly moving.

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 62

a. Secondary transfer roller b. Paper guide
1) Remove the screw and the cover 1) Remove the plate

Remove the boss first.

2) Remove the secondary transfer roller sub unit

Remove the boss first.

2) Remove the sheet

When replacing the sheet, affix the sheet based on the reference
position.

Before affixing new sheet, make sure to remove any foreign mate-
rial and remaining adhesive from affixing surface completely.

3) Remove the E-ring and the secondary transfer roller

Reference position
Steps
0.5mm
ĭ
0mm

0mm 0.5mm
Reference position
Ĭ Wall surface

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 63

3) Remove the screw and the cover d. Sensors
1) Remove the E-ring, secondary transfer separation sensor cam,
pin, and bearing.
Ĭ

ĭ Ĭ

ĭ
Į
Ĭ

2) Remove the secondary transfer separation sensor cam and then

E-ring. Slide secondary transfer separation cam. Remove the par-
allel pin and then remove the secondary transfer separation cam
shaft sub assy.

c. Secondary transfer separation plate

1) Remove the secondary transfer separation plate

İ
Do not put any oil content etc. by directly touching separating
electrode connecting plate and secondary transfer separation
plate with your hand.

Make sure that (2) and Į

Ĭ (3) are contacting each
other for attachment.
į
ĭ ĭ
Ĭ

3) Remove the sensor

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 64

(4) PTC outer holder G. LSU section
1) Clean PTC outer holder with alcohol. (1) LSU unit

Part No. Part name

a Dust proof glass
b Cleaning base

(5) Registration sensor unit

Part No. Part name

a. Dust proof glass
a Registration sensor 1) Open the cover and remove the LSU cleaning bar.

2) Remove the waste toner box

3) Insert the LSU cleaning bar with a felt facing downward. Move the
a
bar a few times back and forth to clean the dust proof glass on
LSU.
a. Registration sensor
1) Remove the registration sensor

Ĭ ĭ

Ĭ ĭ

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 65

b. Cleaning base H. Manual paper feed section
1) Open the cover and remove the LSU cleaning bar.
(1) Manual paper feed unit

Part No. Part name

a Paper pickup roller
b Paper feed roller
c Separation roller
d Torque limiter
e Transport roller 11
f Sensors

d
a
b
e f

2) Remove the waste toner box

3) Remove the cleaning base from the waste toner box and attach it
to the LSU cleaning bar.

a. Paper pickup roller

b. Paper feed roller
1) Remove the cover

2) Uplift the pawl and detach the pickup roller. Remove the E-ring
and detach the paper feed roller.

The roller insert to the slit

when attaching the roller.

į
ĭ
Į

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 66

c. Separation roller e. Transport roller 11
1) Remove a screw and then detach the paper guide. Uplift the pawl 1) Remove the screw and the paper guide
and then detach the separation roller.

Fasten screws in the order of (1) and (2) for assembly. Clean the
transport roller 11.
ĭ
Ĭ

Ĭ
ĭ

į Į
Į

d. Torque limiter
1) Remove the screw and the frame

Fasten screws in the order of (1) and (2) for assembly. į

ĭ
į
Į İ
Ĭ f. Sensors
į 1) Remove the screw and the sensor

ı
ĭ

Insert ribs at
three sections
for assembly.

Attach the torque

limiter on this side
first for assembly.

2) Remove the E-ring and slide the holder and the bearing toward
the direction of arrow in the illustration below. Remove the shaft
and then remove the torque limiter.

Ĭ
2) Remove the arm
Ĭ į
ĭ Ĭ

Į ĭ
İ

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 67

3) Remove the tray I. Tray paper feed section
(1) Tray paper feed unit

Part No. Part name

a Paper pickup roller
b Paper feed roller
c Separation roller
d Torque limiter
e Transport roller 3
f Transport roller 1
g Transport roller 2
h Sensors

h
e
b

h
4) Remove the sensor

h
g
f
h
cd

a. Paper pickup roller

b. Paper feed roller
1) Remove the paper guide
5) Remove the screw, the tray and the sensor
Insert this part first
Ĭ for assembly.

Ĭ
ĭ

Insert the ribs at

nine sections for
assembly.

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 68

2) Remove the pawl and then remove the holder. e. Transport roller 3
f. Transport roller 1
1) Clean the transport roller 3 and transport roller 1

ĭ Ĭ

ĭ
3) Remove the paper pickup roller and the paper feed roller

g. Transport roller 2
1) Remove the screws and the paper guide. Clean transport roller 2.
Ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ

Ĭ ĭ

c. Separation roller
d. Torque limiter
Į
1) Remove the pawl, separation roller and then torque limiter.

Make sure the

ĭ earth plate is
contacting the
Į frame.

h. Sensors
1) Clean the each sensor.
Ĭ

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 69

J. Paper transport section / ADU section / Paper d. Sensor
exit section 1) Remove the screw and the sensor.

(1) PS unit

Part No. Part name

a Registration roller (idle)
b Registration roller (drive)
c Transport roller 5
d Sensor

a b

d
ĭ
Ĭ

(2) Right door unit

Part No. Part name

a Transport roller 9
b Transport roller 10
c Transport roller 8
c d sensor

a. Registration roller (idle)

b. Registration roller (drive)
1) Clean the registration roller (idle) and the registration roller (drive).
c

d
d

c. Transport roller 5
1) Clean the transport roller 5.

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 70

a. Transport roller 9 c. Transport roller 8
1) Open the door and clean the transport roller 9. 1) Remove the screw and cover.

Ĭ Ĭĭ

b. Transport roller 10
1) Remove the manual paper feed unit and clean the transport roller
10. 2) Clean the transport roller 8.

d. Sensor
1) Remove the secondary transfer unit.
2) Remove the screw and sensor.

ĭ Ĭ

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 71

3) Remove the screw and cover. (3) Fusing rear unit

Part No. Part name

a Transport roller 7

Ĭ
Ĭ
ĭ

4) Remove the screw and the sensor.

a. Transport roller 7
1) Clean the transport roller 7.

5) Remove the screw and the paper guide.

(4) Paper exit unit

Ĭ Part No. Part name
a Paper exit roller 2
b Discharge brush
c Sensor

ĭ
a
Ĭ

6) Remove the screw and sensor.

c

Ĭ
c

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 72

a. Paper exit roller 2 c. Sensor
1) Remove the screw and the paper guide. 1) Remove sensors (x3) from the paper guide.

2) Remove the sensor from the paper guide.

2) Clean the paper exit roller 2.

3) Remove the screw and shifter drive.

b. Discharge brush
1) Remove the screw, the earth plate and the discharge brush.

Ĭ
Ĭ

Make sure the plate is ĭ

contacting to the roller Ĭ

Į 4) Remove the sensor from the paper guide.

reference position edge face

0.3mm 0mm
reference 0mm
position
edge face 0.3mm

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 73

 1 : ‘16/Sep.
K. Fusing section a. Fusing transport roller lower
1) Clean the fusing transport roller lower
(1) Fusing unit

Part No. Part name

a Fusing transport roller lower
1 b Gears
c Fusing transport roller upper
d Pressure bearing
e Separation plate
f Pressure roller gear
g Pressure roller bearing
h Pressure roller
i Upper thermistor
j Fusing belt unit
k Lower thermistor
l Main thermistor
m Sub thermistor
n Sensors
o Paper guides

2) Remove the connector and detach the harness from the rib.
1 d
b
n
c Ĭ

o
d

o
a ĭ

o
o

3) Remove the spring and the cover

i f
NOTE: Do not break the pawls while removing (as shown in the
e red circles.).

l
Ĭ
m
ĭ

g
Ĭ
h

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 74

 1 : ‘16/Sep.
4) Open the lower paper guide and clean the upper paper guide , NOTE: When mounting the harnesses, make sure to wire the
lower paper guide and fusing transport roller upper. connectors so that the connector won’t protrude.
• Attach the connector in the direction shown in the illustration
below. Hook the connector rib to the holder rib to fix.
• Slide extra harness into the areas in the red circle.

holder rib

Connector rib

5) Remove the screws, harnesses, and then remove the paper

guide.

Ĭ
6) Remove the E ring, gear and bearing. 1

Metal side is placed

on the outer side.

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 75

 1 : ‘16/Sep.

1 7) Remove the E ring. shift the bearing and remove the fusing trans- 2) Remove the screw and the cover
port roller lower.

Ĭ Ĭ ĭ

ĭ ĭ
Ĭ

NOTE: Be sure to confirm that bearing should be fixed by the 1

hole of cover when the cover is installed.

b. Gears
1) Remove the screw and the cover

3) Remove the gears

Ĭ
ĭ

NOTE: When attaching the gear (3) shown in the illustration

above, make sure that resin side is placed on the outer
side.

resin side Metal side

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 76

 1 : ‘16/Sep.
1 c. Fusing transport roller upper 3) Remove the spring and shift the pressure bearing. 1
1) Remove the screws, paper guide, and then remove the springs.
NOTE: Make sure the paper guide does not contact with the sep-
aration plate.
When attaching the paper guide, fasten screws in the
order of (1)-(4) shown in the illustration below.

Į
į

ı ĭ

Ĭ İ Ĭ
ĭ

4) Hold the pressure bearing and remove the fusing transport roller
upper.

1 2) Remove the screw and earth plate. Pressure bearing

NOTE: Be sure to confirm that the edge of the fusing transport
roller upper and earth plate are contacted when assem-
bled.

d. Pressure bearing
1) Remove the pressure bearing and the spring.

Grease
UKOG-0012QSZZ

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 77

 1 : ‘16/Sep.
1 e. Separation plate f. Pressure roller gear
1) Remove the spring g. Pressure roller bearing
h. Pressure roller
Ĭ
1) Turn the fusing unit upside down. Remove the screws and then
remove the cover.

Ĭ Make sure the holder has been removed.

Ĭ
2) Disconnect the connectors and detach the harness from the rib.

Hold here with longnose pliers

for attachment and detachment.

2) Slide the holder to the right and left and remove from the boss.

Do not scratch, contaminate or deform the surface of separation

plate.

3) Attach the cover (without fastening screw).

NOTE: To protect the mylar sheet, make sure to keep attaching
ĭ the cover when not flipping the unit upside down.

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 78

4) Remove the screw and the holder 8) Remove the upper heater lamp and low heater lamp

9) Remove the spring

5) Remove the screw and the holder
Ĭ Ĭ

Ĭ
ĭ

6) Remove the screw and the holder

10) Remove the screw and the pressure roller unit

NOTE: Do not touch the thermostat and thermistor shown in the
ĭ red circle in the illustration below.

Ĭ
Ĭ

Ĭ
ĭ

7) Remove the screw and the holder

NOTE: Different screw is used for front and rear side. Make sure
to fasten proper screw on each side.

Front side Rear side

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 79

11) Remove the ring, the bearing and the lever j. Fusing belt unit
1) Remove the screw and the fusing belt unit
Front side When attaching fusing belt unit, fasten screws in the order of (1)-
(6) shown in the illustration below.

Į
ĭ

Ĭ IJ

Rib facing outward

12) Remove the ring, gear, bearing and the lever

Rear side
Insert this portion of the rib
to the U-shaped groove.
į

ĭ į Ĭ

Ĭ
Rib facing outward İ ĭ

Rib facing outward

ı Į

Attach the pressure roller without removing the protector sheet.

Remove the sheet after completing the assembly.
Apply grease (UKOG-0235FCZZ) when replacing the pressure
roller.
k. Lower thermistor
1) Remove the screw and the lower thermistor

Apply grease within 10 mm of the step Ĭ

and avoid U-shaped groove.
ĭ
10mm

Apply grease to these areas, thin and flat.

i. Upper thermistor
1) Remove the screw and the thermistor

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 80

l. Main thermistor 4) Remove the screw, the cover, the main thermistor and the sub
thermistor
m. Sub thermistor
1) Remove the screws. Then remove the paper guide and clean it.
Ĭ

Ĭ
Ĭ ĭ

ĭ
Ĭ
Į

2) Disconnect the connectors and detach the harness from the rib. Detach the pawls on the cover.

n. Sensors
1) Remove the sensor

3) Remove the screw and the plate

o. Paper guides
1) Clean the paper guide
ĭ

Ĭ
Do not deform the paper guide.

Detach the harness from

the square hole.

MX-6070N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 81

MX-6070N
[11] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS Service Manual

1. Operation panel section

A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram

OCSW
8
6
5
4

9
7

BKLT_EN 2

10

Signal name Name Function/Operation

BKLT_EN Backlight in LCD module Backlight for LCD module
OCSW Paper size detection trigger sensor Detects generation of the paper size detection trigger signal

No. Name Function/Operation

1 KEY PWB Outputs the key operation signal
2 HOME PWB Power switch, Buzzer, sound, power ON/OFF condition display LED, error display LED (red)
3 LVDS PWB Converts the display data signal to the LCD display signal from SCN-MFP control PWB and
controls the touch panel
4 LED PWB Display indication state of MFP
5 WIRELESS LAN PWB Connect the network by the wireless LAN
6 USB CN PWB Connect WIRELESS LAN PWB and SCN-MFP control PWB
7 USB I/F PWB USB interface
8 Document size detection PWB (Light emitting) Drives the LED for the document size detection
9 Document size detection PWB (Light receiving) Outputs the document size detection signal
10 MOTION SENSOR PWB Detects the approach of human in energy saving mode.and send signal to SCN-MFP control PWB

B. Operational descriptions
The operation panel unit is composed of the LCD unit, the LVDS PWB, the USB I/F PWB, and the KEY PWB. It displays the machine operation.
It is provided with the USB I/F which is used for the firmware update, USB print, and Scan to USB.
In addition, the USB I/F line is provided inside the operation panel to connect with the keyboard and the IC card reader.

A document size is detected by the document size detection PWB (light emitting) and the document size detection PWB (light receiving).
The detection timing of document size is determined according to the document size detection trigger sensor signal.

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 1

2. Scanner section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram

MHPS

6
CL_ON

7
8
MIM
3
4

5 1

Signal name Name Function/Operation

CL_ON Scanner lamp Radiates light onto a document for the CCD to scan the document image
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Detects the scanner home position
MIM Scan motor Drives the scanner unit (scan, return operations)

No. Name Function/Operation

1 CCD PWB Scan document images and performs A/D conversion of the scanning signal
2 SCN-MFP control PWB Controls image data (compression, decompression and filing) and controls the whole
machine.
Converts print data into image data.
3 LED DRIVER PWB Drives the scanner lamp
4 Lens Reduces a document image (light) and project it to the CCD.
5 1st mirror Leads a document image to the lens.
6 2nd mirror
7 3rd mirror
8 Reflector Converges the scanner lamp lights and radiates onto the document.

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 2

B. Operational descriptions
(1) General
This section performs the following operations.
1) Light is radiated onto the document by the scanner lamp and the
reflected image is scanned by the 3-line (RGB) CCD elements to

B
G
be converted into analog image signals.

R
2) The analog image signals are converted into 10-bit digital signals
by the A/D converter.
3) The digital image signals are sent to the SCN MFP PWB for
image processing.
(2) Detailed descriptions
a. Optical section drive
The optical section is driven as follows: The drive power is transmitted
from the scanner motor (MIM) through the belt to the drive pulley/wire, R
and the copy lamp unit and the mirror base which are attached to the
G
wire are driven.
B
The scanner motor (MIM) is controlled with the signals sent from the
SCN MFP PWB.
Image data of one line
b. Scanner lamp drive
The scanner lamp is driven by the scanner lamp drive voltage which is
generated by the scanner lamp drive PWB with the control signals
sent from the SCN MFP PWB.
c. Image scan and color separation R G B
Red component Green component Blue component
Light is radiated onto the document by the scanner lamp and the
image data image data image data
reflected image is scanned by the 3-line (RGB) CCD elements to be
converted into analog image signals.
The color components are extracted into R, G, and B by the three d. Image signal A/D conversion
kinds of CCD elements (R, G, and B). 1) Each image signal (analog) of R, G, and B is converted into a
The red CCD extracts the red component of an image, the green CCD 10bit digital signal by the A/D converter in the CCD PWB.
extracts the green component, and the blue CCD extracts the blue Each color pixel has 10bit information.
component. This operation is called color separation. 2) Each 10bit digital image signal of R, G, and B is outputted from
The CCD element is apparently seen as one unit, but it includes the the CCD PWB and sent to the SCN MFP PWB, where it is con-
three kinds of elements (R, G, and B). verted into an 8bit signal and sent to the MFP PWB.
The CCD element scans the document in the main scanning direction.
Scanning in the sub scanning direction is made by shifting the scanner
CCD PWB
unit with the scanner motor.
Analog process IC
The document images are optically reduced by the lens and reflected CCD
to the CCD. AFE ADC LVDS
(6 Lines) R
The scanning direction is 600dpi. G
B
Buffer TG

Timing
Generator

e. Zooming operation
Zooming in the sub scanning direction is performed by changing the
scanning speed in the sub scanning direction.
Zooming in the main scanning direction is not made optically, but per-
formed by the image process technology (software).

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 3

3. Manual paper feed section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram

CPFM

HPFC
MPUC

MPFS

2
4 MPFD

5 1 MPLD1
6
3
MPED MPWS

Signal name Name Function/Operation

CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section
HPFC Horizontal transport clutch (Paper feed tray 1, Controls ON/OFF of the transport roller (Paper feed tray 1, Manual paper feed tray)
Manual paper feed tray)
MPED Paper empty sensor (Manual paper feed tray) Detects presence of paper (Manual paper feed tray)
MPFD Paper feed sensor (Manual paper feed tray) Detects paper pass (Manual paper feed tray)
MPFS Paper feed solenoid (Manual paper feed tray) Controls the paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray)
MPLD1 Paper length sensor (Manual paper feed tray) Detects the paper length (Manual paper feed tray)
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch (Manual paper feed tray) Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the manual paper feed section (Manual paper feed
tray)
MPWS Paper width sensor (Manual paper feed tray) Detects the paper width (Manual paper feed tray)

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller
2 Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section
3 Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray) Separate paper to prevent double feeding
4 Transport roller 10 (Drive) Transports paper transported from manual paper tray to the transport roller 5
5 Transport roller 10 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the
transport roller to paper
6 Transport roller 4 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the
transport roller to paper

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 4

B. Operational descriptions
(1) Paper feed operation
The pickup roller moves up and down to press the paper surface, separating the paper on the top of the paper bundle and sending it to the paper feed
roller section.
The paper feed roller feeds paper to the transport section to prevent against double feed with the separation roller. The manual paper feed clutch con-
trols ON/OFF of the pickup roller and the paper feed roller. Paper is sent to the registration roller by the manual transport roller.

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 5

4. Tray paper feed section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram

CPFM
HPFC

CPFC1

9 C1PUC

C1LUD
3
7
5
C1PFD
8
C1PED 6
C1PFPD 4 DSW_C1

1
2

C1SS1
C1SS3 C1SS2
C1SS4
C1LUM

C1SPD

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 6

 Signal name Name Function/Operation
C1LUD Paper feed tray upper limit sensor (Paper feed tray Detects the upper limit of the paper lift up (Paper feed tray 1)
1)
C1LUM Paper tray lift motor (Paper feed tray 1) Lifts the lift plate of the paper feed tray (Paper feed tray 1)
C1PED Paper empty sensor (Paper feed tray 1) Detects paper empty (Paper feed tray 1)
C1PFD Paper transport sensor (Paper feed tray 1) Detects paper pass in the paper transport section (Paper feed tray 1)
C1PFPD Paper pass sensor (Paper feed tray 1) Detects paper pass in the paper transport section (Paper feed tray 1)
C1PUC Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1) Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the paper feed tray 1 section (Paper feed tray 1)
C1SPD Paper remaining quantity sensor (Paper feed tray 1) Detects the paper remaining quantity (Paper feed tray 1)
C1SS1-4 Tray 2 rear edge detection 1-4 Either of rear edge 1-4 of tray 2 is detected to detect tray insertion
CPFC1 Tray vertical transport clutch Controls the transport roller of the paper feed tray 1 section
CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section
DSW_C1 Transport cover open/close sensor (Paper feed tray Detects open/close of the transport section cover (Paper feed tray 1)
1)
HPFC Horizontal transport clutch (Paper feed tray 1, Controls ON/OFF of the transport roller (Paper feed tray 1, Manual paper feed tray)
Manual paper feed tray)

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the
transport roller to paper
2 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed tray to the transport roller 4
3 Paper pickup roller (Paper feed tray 1) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller
4 Separation roller (Paper feed tray 1) Separates paper to prevent double feeding
5 Paper feed roller (Paper feed tray 1) Feeds paper to the paper transport section
6 Transport roller 2 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the
transport roller to paper
7 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed tray 1 to the transport roller 3
8 Transport roller 3 Transports paper from the transport roller 2 to the transport roller 4
9 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 1 and 3 to the transport roller 5

B. Operational descriptions
(1) Paper feed front operation
• Set paper and insert the paper feed tray, and the pickup roller falls to turn ON the paper feed tray sensor.
• The lift-up motor drives the rotating plate to move it up.
• The paper upper limit sensor turns ON, and the rotation plate stops at the specified position.
(2) Paper feed operation
• When copy/print operation is started, the motor and the clutch are turned ON to rotate the pickup roller in the paper pickup timing, feeding paper.
• At the same time, the paper feed roller rotates to transport paper to the transport section. At that time, the separation roller rotates to prevent
against double feed of paper.
(3) Paper remaining detection
The notifying levels of paper remaining quantity are 4 steps in total; 3 steps of paper remaining quantity and 1 step of paper empty. The result is dis-
played.

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 7

(4) Paper remaining quantity detection method
• The paper remaining quantity is judged from the number of rotations of the remaining quantity sensor from starting the lift-up operation of the paper
feed tray to turning ON the upper limit sensor.

(Figure showing state transition of the remaining paper detection sensor during tray elevation and
changes in status according to the number of remaining sheets)

The no-paper detection sensor detects CPED

the state of no remaining paper. (paper sensor)
Turn plate
Remaining Paper
During no-paper detection Detection Actuator

CSPD
1/3 Field (remaining paper detection)
Sensor logic: Low

Remaining paper 1/3 position

2/3 Field
Sensor logic: Hi

Remaining paper 2/3 position

3/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low

Remaining paper 3/3 position

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 8

5. Paper registration section (Paper transport section)
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram

RRM

PFM

PPD2

Signal name Name Function/Operation

PFM Transport motor Drives the transport roller 5
PPD2 Paper transport sensor 2 Detects paper pass in the transport roller 5 and registration roller
RRM Registration motor Drives the registration roller (Controls the timing of the transfer image for the paper)

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Transport roller 5 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the
transport roller to paper
2 Transport roller 5 (Drive) Transports paper to the registration roller. Paper is buckled between the registration roller and
this roller to correct the paper skew and the relation between images and paper
3 Registration roller (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the registration roller to provide the transport power of the
transport roller to paper
4 Registration roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. Controls the transport timing of paper and adjusts
relative position between the images and paper

B. Operational descriptions
Paper is fed from each paper feed section and transported to the registration roller by the transport rollers. ON/OFF control of each transport roller is
made by the paper transport clutch. The registration roller controls the relative positions of transported paper and the transfer image. The registration
roller is driven by the transport motor. The relative positions of paper and the transfer image are determined by the ON timing of the transport motor.

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 9

6. Paper exit section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram

POFM2

6
5 POM SBM
TFD2

SHPOS
5

POD4

4 POD2
3

FUM
OSM
3

POGS

Signal name Name Function/Operation

FUM Fusing motor Drives the fusing section
OSM Offset motor Offsets (shifts) paper
POD2 Paper exit sensor 2 Detects paper transport to the lower paper exit tray
POD4 Paper exit sensor 4 Detects paper transport to the upper paper exit tray
POFM2 Paper exit cooling fan Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section
POGS ADU gate solenoid Controls the paper exit gate
POM Paper exit motor Drives the roller in the paper exit section
SBM Reverse motor Drives the transport roller in duplex mode
SHPOS Shifter home position sensor Detects the shifter home position
TFD2 Paper exit tray full sensor (Lower paper exit tray) Detects paper full in the lower paper exit tray

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Transport roller 7 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to paper
2 Transport roller 7 (Drive) Transports paper to the paper exit section
3 Paper exit roller 2 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and paper exit roller to provide the transport power of the paper exit roller to paper
4 Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) Transports paper to the lower paper exit tray
5 Paper exit roller 1 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and paper exit roller to provide the transport power of the paper exit roller to paper
6 Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper to the upper paper exit tray or switchback to the ADU section

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 10

B. Operational descriptions
• The paper transported from the fusing section is sent from transport roller 6 (which is driven by the ADU motor) to paper exit roller 1, and then dis-
charged to the inner tray.
• When the paper is discharged to the right tray: The paper is transported to paper exit roller 1, and the paper exit motor is reversed. Then the paper
is passed over the right paper exit gate through paper exit roller 2 to the right tray.

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 11

7. ADU section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram

2 ADUM1

DSW_ADU

APPD1
1 7

3
ADUM2

4
APPD2

Signal name Name Function/Operation

ADUM1 ADU motor 1 Drives the transport roller in the right door and right paper exit section
ADUM2 ADU motor 2 Drives the transport roller in the right door section
APPD1 ADU paper transport sensor 1 Detects paper entry and paper pass in the ADU section
APPD2 ADU paper transport sensor 2 Detects paper pass of the transport roller 8 in the ADU section
DSW_ADU ADU paper guide open/close sensor Detects open/close of the ADU paper guide

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Transport roller 8 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the paper exit roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to paper
2 Transport roller 8 (Drive) Transports paper to transport roller 9
3 Transport roller 9 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to paper
4 Transport roller 9 (Drive) Transports paper transported from the switchback section to the transport roller 10
5 Transport roller 10 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to paper
6 Transport roller 10 (Drive) Transports paper transported from transport roller 9 to the transport roller 5
7 RD I/F PWB Detects each sensor in the right door unit

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 12

B. Operational descriptions
• The paper transported from the fusing section is sent from transport roller 6 (which is driven by the ADU motor) to paper exit roller 1.
At that time, the paper passed under the gate.
• When POD1 detects the paper lead edge, the paper exit drive motor reverses.
• By reversion of the paper exit motor, the paper is sent to the ADU section. At that time, the paper passes over the ADU guide which fell by its own
weight.
• Transport rollers 7 and 8 are driven the ADU motor, and transport roller 9 by the transport motor. The paper is transported to the duplex paper feed
position.
• The paper is once stopped at the duplex paper feed position, and transported again to the inside of the machine.

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 13

8. LSU section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram

12
3
12
3
12
3
12
13 3
9
13

13
9
9
13

LSU_TH1
15

PGM 14

16 1
11
2
1 4
5
6 7 10

5
LSU_TH2

Signal name Name Function/Operation

LSU_TH1 LSU temperature sensor 1 Detects the LSU temperature
LSU_TH2 LSU temperature sensor 2 Detects the LSU temperature
PGM Polygon motor Scans laser beams

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Colimeter lens Forms laser beams.
2 f θ lens 1 Equalizes the laser beam dot intervals in the main scanning direction. (Corrects the laser dot
3 f θ lens 2 intervals on the OPC drum.)
4 1st Incident mirror Reflects laser beams to the OPC drum.

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 14

 No. Name Function/Operation
5 2nd,3rd Incident mirror Reflects laser beams to the OPC drum.
6 Incident CYL Leads laser beams to the Polygon motor.
7 Incident glass Prevents dust, toner, and foreign materials to polygon motor.
8 1st Outgoing mirror Reflects laser beams to the OPC drum.
9 last outgoing mirror Reflects laser beams to the OPC drum.
10 BD mirror Leads laser beams to the BD (Beam Detector).
11 Conversion lens for BD Converges laser beams and leads to the BD (Bean Detector).
12 Filter glass Prevents dust, toner, and foreign materials from entering the LSU.
13 Skew adjustment screw (C, M, Y, K) Adjusts the radiating angle of laser beams for the OPC drum. By turning this adjustment
screw, image skew can be adjusted.
14 BD PWB Detects laser and outputs the synchronous signal
15 LSU cnt PWB Controls the LSU
16 LD PWB Controls drive and power of laser diode

B. Operational descriptions
(1) General Main scanning direction
Image data sent from the image processing circuit are converted into
laser beams and radiated onto the OPC drum surface. The LSU unit is
REAR
composed of : (1) the optical elements from the laser to the polygon
mirror, (2) the primary system including the mirror which secures the Scanning
optical path, (3) the optical elements including the polygon mirror, and direction
(4) the scanning system including the mirror which secure the optical
path.
(2) Composition
Primary system

C
BK
Y
M

FRONT

Writing position on paper

Paper exit
direction REAR
Scanning
direction

Scanning system

FRONT

(3) Outline of LSU specifications

Process speed 283mm/sec

Resolution 1200dpi
Laser beam 4 beam
Polygon motor rotation speed 33425cpm
Laser power Max 0.275mW/1beam
Bearing type Oil bearing
Number of mirrors 6
Laser beam diameter 50 - 85 x 50 - 80m
Effective scan length 319mm
Laser wave length 780-800nm

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 15

9. OPC drum section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram

DHPD_Y
DM_M
DHPD_M
DL_Y DM_Y
DM_C
CCHPD_Y CCMD_Y DHPD_C
MC-Y
1 DL_M
CCM_Y DHPD_K

CCHPD_M CCMD_M
MC-M
1 DL_C
CCM_M DM_K

CCHPD_C CCMD_C
MC-C DL_K
1
CCM_C
GB
CCHPD_K CCMD_K
MC MC-K
1
CCM_K
3 2 GB

MC

3 2 GB

MC

3 2 GB

MC

3 2

Signal name Name Function/Operation

CCHPD_C Charger cleaner home position sensor (C) Detects the home position of the charger cleaner
CCHPD_K Charger cleaner home position sensor (K) Detects the home position of the charger cleaner
CCHPD_M Charger cleaner home position sensor (M) Detects the home position of the charger cleaner
CCHPD_Y Charger cleaner home position sensor (Y) Detects the home position of the charger cleaner
CCM_C Charger cleaning motor (C) Drives the charger cleaner
CCM_K Charger cleaning motor (K) Drives the charger cleaner
CCM_M Charger cleaning motor (M) Drives the charger cleaner
CCM_Y Charger cleaning motor (Y) Drives the charger cleaner
CCMD_C Charger cleaner shift sensor (C) Detects the shift distance of the charger cleaner
CCMD_K Charger cleaner shift sensor (K) Detects the shift distance of the charger cleaner
CCMD_M Charger cleaner shift sensor (M) Detects the shift distance of the charger cleaner
CCMD_Y Charger cleaner shift sensor (Y) Detects the shift distance of the charger cleaner
DHPD_C Drum phase sensor (C) Detects rotation and the phase of the OPC drum (C)
DHPD_K Drum phase sensor (K) Detects rotation and the phase of the OPC drum (K)
DHPD_M Drum phase sensor (M) Detects rotation and the phase of the OPC drum (M)
DHPD_Y Drum phase sensor (Y) Detects rotation and the phase of the OPC drum (Y)
DL_C Discharge lamp (C) Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum (C)
DL_K Discharge lamp (K) Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum (K)
DL_M Discharge lamp (M) Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum (M)
DL_Y Discharge lamp (Y) Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum (Y)
DM_C Drum motor (C) Drives the OPC drum/developing section (C)
DM_K Drum motor (K) Drives the OPC drum/developing section (K)
DM_M Drum motor (M) Drives the OPC drum/developing section (M)

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 16

 Signal name Name Function/Operation
DM_Y Drum motor (Y) Drives the OPC drum/developing section (Y)
GB (Y, M, C, K) Main charger grid voltage (K, M, C, Y) The OPC drum surface charging voltage is controlled.
MC (Y, M, C, K) Main charger (Y, M, C, K) The OPC drum surface is negatively charged.
MC-C Main charger applying voltage (C) The main charger is charged to generate negative electric charges.
MC-K Main charger applying voltage (K)
MC-M Main charger applying voltage (M)
MC-Y Main charger applying voltage (Y)

No. Name Function/Operation

1 OPC drum unit (Y, M, C, K) Latent electrostatic images are formed.
2 Cleaning blade (Y, M, C, K) Remaining toner on the OPC drum surface is cleaned.
3 Waste toner transport screw Waste toner in the OPC drum unit is transported to the waste toner collection section.

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 17

B. Operational descriptions
The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger,
then laser image beams are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the
laser (writing) unit to form electrostatic latent images.
1) The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger.

Aluminum
layer
CGL
CTL

OPC drum

Screen grid High voltage unit OPC drum rotation control

The OPC drum (K) is driven by the DM motor (DM_K), and the
rotation speed is monitored by the OPC drum phase sensor
(DHPD_K).
The color OPC drums (C, M, and Y) are driven by the DM motor
Main corona unit (DM_C/M/Y), and the rotation speed is monitored by the OPC
drum phase sensor (DHPD_C/M/Y).

The main charger grid is provided with the screen grid. The OPC Based on the signals monitored by the four sensors (DHPD_K/C/
M/Y), the rotation speeds of K OPC drum and the color OPC
drum is charged at a voltage virtually same as the voltage applied
to the screen grid. drums and the rotation phase are controlled.

2) Laser beams are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser 4) The whole surface of the OPC drum is discharged.
(writing) unit to form electrostatic latent images.
Aluminum Aluminum
layer layer
Aluminum CGL CGL
OPC drum layer CTL CTL
CGL
CTL

OPC drum
Lens

By radiating the discharge lamp light to the discharge lens, light is

Laser beams radiated through the lens to the OPC drum surface.
When the discharge lamp light is radiated to the OPC drum CGL,
When laser beams are radiated onto the CGL of the OPC drum, positive and negative charges are generated.
positive and negative charges are generated. Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the negative
Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the negative charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand, negative
charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand, negative charges are attracted to positive charges in the aluminum layer of
charges are attracted to positive charges in the aluminum layer of the OPC drum.
the OPC drum. Therefore, positive and negative charges are balanced out on the
Therefore, positive charges and negative charges are balanced OPC drum surface and in the aluminum layer, reducing positive
out on the OPC drum and in the aluminum layer, reducing positive and negative charged to decrease the surface voltage of the OPC
and negative charges to decrease the OPC drum surface voltage. drum.
Electric charges remain at a position where laser beam are not
radiated.
As a result, latent electrostatic images are formed on the OPC
drum surface.
3) After transfer operation, remaining toner is removed by the clean-
ing blade.
Toner removed from the OPC drum surface is transported to the
waste toner section by the waste toner transport screw.

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 18

10. Toner supply section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram

TNM_Y
TNHM_Y
CRUM-Y
TNM_M
TCED_Y TNHM_M
CRUM-M
TNM_C
TCED_M
TNHM_C
CRUM-C
TNM_K
TCED_C
TNHM_K
CRUM-K

TCED_K

2
1
2
1
2
1
2
TFSD_Y
1
TFSD_M

TFSD_C

TFSD_K

Signal name Name Function/Operation

CRUM-C CRUM-C Saves various data of the toner cartridge.
CRUM-K CRUM-K Saves various data of the toner cartridge.
CRUM-M CRUM-M Saves various data of the toner cartridge.
CRUM-Y CRUM-Y Saves various data of the toner cartridge.
TCED_C Toner cartridge ejector position sensor (C) Detects ejecting position of toner cartridge (C)
TCED_K Toner cartridge ejector position sensor (K) Detects ejecting position of toner cartridge (K)
TCED_M Toner cartridge ejector position sensor (M) Detects ejecting position of toner cartridge (M)
TCED_Y Toner cartridge ejector position sensor (Y) Detects ejecting position of toner cartridge (Y)

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 19

 Signal name Name Function/Operation
TFSD_C Toner remaining quantity sensor (C) Detects the remaining toner quantity in the hopper
TFSD_K Toner remaining quantity sensor (K) Detects the remaining toner quantity in the hopper
TFSD_M Toner remaining quantity sensor (M) Detects the remaining toner quantity in the hopper
TFSD_Y Toner remaining quantity sensor (Y) Detects the remaining toner quantity in the hopper
TNHM_C Toner hopper motor (C) Supplies toner from the hopper to the developer unit
TNHM_K Toner hopper motor (K) Supplies toner from the hopper to the developer unit
TNHM_M Toner hopper motor (M) Supplies toner from the hopper to the developer unit
TNHM_Y Toner hopper motor (Y) Supplies toner from the hopper to the developer unit
TNM_C Toner motor (C) Supplies toner from the toner cartridge to the hopper
TNM_K Toner motor (K) Supplies toner from the toner cartridge to the hopper
TNM_M Toner motor (M) Supplies toner from the toner cartridge to the hopper
TNM_Y Toner motor (Y) Supplies toner from the toner cartridge to the hopper

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Toner transport screw Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the hopper unit.
2 Toner stirring plate Moves toner to the toner transport screw to assist the toner transport operation.

B. Operational descriptions
Based on the print pixel count and the process control information, Yes/No of toner supply is judged.
When it is judged that toner level in hopper is decreasing, the toner motor is rotated to supply toner in the toner cartridge through the toner transport
screw to the hopper unit.

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 20

11. Developing section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram

DM_Y

DM_M

2
DM_C
1
DM_K
2
4
BS 1
2
4
BS 1
3
2
TCS_Y 4
BS 1
3

TCS_M 4
BS
3

TCS_C

TCS_K

Signal name Name Function/Operation

BS (K, M, C, Y) Developing bias voltage (K, M, C, Y) Voltage to form toner images on the OPC drum. Controls the developing density.
DM_C Drum motor (C) Drives the OPC drum/developing section (C)
DM_K Drum motor (K) Drives the OPC drum/developing section (K)
DM_M Drum motor (M) Drives the OPC drum/developing section (M)
DM_Y Drum motor (Y) Drives the OPC drum/developing section (Y)
TCS_C Toner sensor (C) Detects toner supply from the hopper
Detects the toner density (C)
TCS_K Toner sensor (K) Detects toner supply from the hopper
Detects the toner density (K)
TCS_M Toner sensor (M) Detects toner supply from the hopper
Detects the toner density (M)
TCS_Y Toner sensor (Y) Detects toner supply from the hopper
Detects the toner density (Y)

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Developing roller Attaches toner to electrostatic latent images on the OPC drum and forms toner images.
2 Stirring roller Stirs developer and toner to negatively charge toner.
3 Doctor Maintains the quantities of toner and developer on the DV roller at a constant levels.
4 Toner filter (K, M, C, Y) Prevents toner splash.

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 21

B. Operational descriptions
Toner is attached to electrostatic latent images formed on the OPC
drum surface by laser image beams to form toner images.

Toner and carrier in the developing unit are agitated and transported
by the mixing roller.
By stirring, toner and carrier are negatively charged by mechanical
friction.
The developing bias voltage (AC component and negative DC compo-
nent) is applied to the developing roller.
Negatively charged toner is attracted to the exposed section on the
OPC drum where the negative potential falls due to the developing
bias.
If the OPC drum is not exposed, the negative potential is higher than
the developing bias voltage, and toner is not attracted.

The toner sensor detects the toner supply state from the toner car-
tridge.
In this machine, the toner density is detected by the toner sensor, but
the toner supply operation is not controlled only by the toner density
detection result. The toner density control is performed according to
the process control data.

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 22

12. Transfer section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram

1
3

1TURC_1
4 1TUD_CL
1TURC_2
7 BTM
2
7
7 1TUD_K
1TC-K
7
2TC
FUM
REGS_R/PCS_R

10 REGS_F/PCS_F
12
1TC-Y PTC 2TURC
5 15
13
1TC-M
6
1TC-C
8
11 17
9 2TUD
2TPD

16
14

Signal name Name Function/Operation

1TC (CMY) Primary transfer voltage (CMY) Flows the transfer current to the primary transfer belt, and transfers toner images from the
OPC drum to the transfer belt.
1TC (K) Primary transfer voltage (K) Flows the transfer current to the primary transfer belt, and transfers toner images from the
OPC drum to the transfer belt.
1TUD_CL Transfer mode sensor (CL) Detects separation of the transfer belt and the transfer mode
(Detection is made by combination of 1TUD_CL/1TUD_K signals)
1TUD_K Transfer mode sensor (BK) Detects separation of the transfer belt and the transfer mode
(Detection is made by combination of 1TUD_CL/1TUD_K signals)
1TURC_1 Primary transfer separation clutch 1 Controls separation of the primary transfer unit
1TURC_2 Primary transfer separation clutch 2 Controls separation of the primary transfer unit
2TC Secondary transfer voltage Flows the transfer current to the primary transfer roller, and transfers toner images from the
primary transfer belt to paper.
2TPD Secondary transfer paper sensor Detects paper remained after recover from paper JAM
2TUD Secondary transfer position sensor Detects the position (separation) of the secondary transfer unit
2TURC Secondary transfer separation clutch Controls separation of the secondary transfer unit
BTM Transfer motor Drives the transfer section
FUM Fusing motor Drives the fusing section
PTC PTC voltage High voltage for PTC
REGS_F/ Image registration / Density sensor (F) Detects image color shift and the toner patch density
PCS_F
REGS_R/ Image registration / Density sensor (R) Detects image color shift and the toner patch density
PCS_R

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 23

 No. Name Function/Operation
1 Cleaning blade Cleans residual toner on the primary transfer belt.
2 Cleaning sub blade Prevent toner from cleaner unit.
3 Primary transfer waste toner transport screw Transports waste toner in the primary transfer cleaning unit to the waste toner collection
section.
4 Cleaning roller Stabilization of the cleaning performance.
5 Primary transfer blade backup roller Stabilization of the contact state of a blade and roller.
6 Primary transfer belt Transfers toner images of the OPC drum onto the transfer belt.
7 Primary transfer roller (K, C, M, Y) Applies a high positive voltage to the primary transfer belt.
8 Primary transfer belt drive roller Drives the transfer belt. A negative voltage is applied when in the transfer operation, and an
alternate high voltage (positive and negative) is applied when cleaning.
9 Pre-transfer roller Angle adjustment to the paper feed course of the transfer belt.
10 Primary transfer belt follower roller Transfer belt follower drive
11 BK auxiliary roller Stabilization of the contact state of BK drum and transfer belt.
12 Y auxiliary roller Stabilization of the contact state of Y drum and transfer belt.
13 Separation pawl Separates paper after transfer.
14 PTC unit Reduces positive charges on the primary transfer belt, and improves the transfer efficiency.
15 PTC cleaner Clean the PTC wire.
16 Secondary transfer roller Connects the secondary transfer roller to the GND and flows the transfer current.
17 Discharge brush Discharges the secondary transfer roller after transfer to neutralize it.

B. Operational descriptions
(1) Transfer, cleaning operation
Transfer operation

Primary transfer C. C. C. C.
output

C. C. Secondary
transfer output

Remaining toner removed from the primary transfer belt is transported

to the waste toner collection section by the waste toner transport
screw.
Secondary transfer cleaning
A high positive voltage is applied to the primary transfer belt to attach
unnecessary toner to the primary transfer belt, and it is cleaned by the
primary transfer belt cleaning.

PTC output C. C. C. C.

A high positive voltage is applied to the primary transfer roller to trans-

fer toner images from the OPC drum to the primary transfer belt.
Secondary transfer output
Negative electronic charges are generated by the PTC unit, supplying
negative charges to toner.
This operation improves the transfer efficiency in the secondary trans-
fer.
Then a high negative voltage is applied to the primary transfer drive
roller, to transfer toner images from the primary transfer belt to paper.
Primary transfer cleaning operation
The primary transfer belt is cleaned mechanically by the cleaning
blade.

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 24

Primary transfer belt mode select
There are three kinds of modes of the transfer belt: the free position,
the color print mode, and the monochrome print mode.

Mode select is made with the developing motor, the mode select
clutches 1TURC1 and 1TURC2.
When the roller separation clutch is turned ON, the transfer cam
rotates, and the primary transfer link in conjunction with the cam is
shifted in the arrow direction, separating the transfer roller.
The color transfer rollers (C, M, and Y) and the black transfer roller (K)
perform an independent separation operation, and the mode state is
detected by the combination of the transfer mode detector 1TUD_CL
and 1TUD_K signals.
To select the rotating direction of the mode select cam, two mode
select clutches 1TURC1 and 1TURC2 are used. b. Functions and operations of the black image density sensor
The two mode select clutches are used to select the mode in the short- and the image registration sensor R (REGS R) provided on the
est time. rear frame side
When the process control is performed with one sensor, the black
Transfer mode detector toner patch density is detected. When the image registration adjust-
Mode
1TUD_CL 1TUD_K ment is performed, the image registration shift on the rear frame side
Monochrome print mode ON ON is detected.
Color print mode OFF ON
Free position ON OFF

1TUD_CL 1TUD_K

Monochrome print mode

1TUD_CL 1TUD_K

Color print mode

1TUD_CL 1TUD_K

Free position

(2) Image density detection and registration detection

operation
The image density detection and the image registration detection are
performed the sensors which are provided separately on the front
frame side and the rear frame side.
a. Functions and operations of the color image density sensor
and the image registration sensor F (REGS F) provided on the
front frame side
When the process control is performed with one sensor, the color
toner patch density is detected. When the image registration adjust-
ment is performed, the image registration shift on the front frame side
is detected.
Before execution of the process control and the automatic registration
adjustment, the standard reflection plate is closed and the sensor sen-
sitivity adjustment is performed by using the standard reflection plate.

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 25

13. Waste toner collection section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram

CPFM

CPFC1
1 TNFD

Signal name Name Function/Operation

CPFC1 Tray vertical transport clutch Controls the transport roller of the paper feed tray 1 section
CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section
TNFD Waste toner full sensor Detects full of waste toner

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Waste toner transport screw Transports waste toner to the waste toner box.
2 Waste toner box Collects waste toner.

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 26

B. Operational descriptions
(1) Waste toner full detection operation
Waste toner generated in the OPC drum and the primary transfer
cleaning section is transported to the waste toner box by the waste
toner transport screw which is driven by the paper feed motor.
The toner collection box section is provided with the waste toner full
detection mechanism. When the waste toner quantity in the toner col-
lection box becomes full, the rotation load of the waste toner transport
screw increases and the waste toner transport screw drive coupler is
stranded to turn ON the waste toner full detector (TNFD).
When the waste toner full detector is turned ON continuously for 3 sec,
it is judged as near end, and the message is display to indicate that the
replacement of the toner collection box is approaching.

TNFD

TNFD (OFF) TNFD (ON)

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 27

14. Fusing section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram

FUFM

PRM

FUM
POD1

TH_US2

8
9 5
10
HLPCD
TH_UM

TH_US1
1
7 TH_LM
6
HL_UM/US 5
5
4
HL_LM
2
3

Signal name Name Function/Operation

FUFM Fusing cooling fan Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section
FUM Fusing motor Drives the fusing section
HL_LM Heater lamp (lower) Heats the pressure roller
HL_UM Heater lamp (Main) Heats the fusing roller and the fusing belt
HL_US Heater lamp (Sub) Heats the fusing roller and the fusing belt
HL_UW Heater lamp (upper assist) Heats the fusing roller and the fusing belt
HLPCD Fusing pressure sensor Detects the fusing pressure state
POD1 Paper exit sensor 1 Detects paper transport from the fusing section
PRM Fusing pressure control motor Controls ON/OFF of the fusing roller pressure
TH_LM Fusing temperature sensor Detects the surface temperature of the fusing roller (pressure)
TH_UM Fusing temperature sensor (main) Detects the surface temperature at the center of the fusing belt
TH_US1 Fusing temperature sensor (sub 1) Detects the surface temperature at the edge section of the fusing belt
TH_US2 Fusing temperature sensor (sub 2) Detects the surface temperature at the edge section of the fusing belt

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Fusing roller (Heat) Heats the fusing belt.
2 Fusing roller The cushion layer of the roller forms a wide nip between the fusing belt and Fusing roller
(Pressure).
3 Fusing roller (Pressure) Heats the paper surface to fuse toner on the paper.
4 Belt tension roller make tension of the fusing belt.
5 Discharge brush Discharges static electricity generated in the fusing section to the ground.
6 Separation plate Separates the whole surface of paper. (non-contact)
7 Fusing belt Heats the front surface of paper to fuse toner on the paper.
8 Transport roller Transports paper from fusing section to the paper exit section.
9 Transport roller Transports paper from fusing section to the paper exit section.
10 Pressure shaft Pressure fusing roller and pressure roller.

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 28

B. Operational descriptions
(1) Outline of operations Fusing roller (Pressure)
Fusing roller
This machine employs the fusing system by the belt.
The features of the belt-type fusing system are as follows: Fusing belt
1) Short warm-up time Fusing roller
2) Low power consumption (Heat)
3) Wide nip providing high fusing capability
(2) Heater lamp driving
The surface temperature of the fusing belt and the fusing roller (pres-
sure) detected by the fusing temperature sensor is sent to the PCU. If
the temperature is lower than the specified temperature, the heater
lamp lighting signal is sent from the PCU to the heater lamp drive cir-
cuit in the HL PWB.
When the power triac in the heater lamp drive circuit is turned ON, the
AC power is supplied to the heater lamp to light the lamp and heat the
fusing belt.
A thermostat is provided as a safety device against an abnormally high Fusing roller
temperature in the fusing belt and the fusing roller (pressure). Fusing roller
(Pressure)
When the thermostat is opened, the AC power supply to the heater
lamp is cut off.
The heater lamp is arranged to fusing roller (F1) and fusing roller (B).
In heater lamp (HL_UM/US), two lamps are integrated into one. Fusing belt
Heater lamp operations

Heater lamp Operation (4) Automatic pressure release system

Heater lamp Heats fusing roller (heat) and the fusing belt. Normally the upper and lower heat rollers are pressed. When, how-
(HL_UM) ever, the following conditions are satisfied, the pressure is released.
Heater lamp Heats fusing roller (heat) and the fusing belt. • When the machine shifts to the preheat mode.
(HL_US)
• When the machine shifts to the auto power shut off mode.
Heater lamp Heats fusing roller (pressure). Does not turn ON while
(HL_LM) heater lamp (HL_UM) and heater lamp (HL_LS) light • When the power switch of the operation panel is turned OFF.
up. • When in the envelope mode.
• When a jam occurs.
(3) Fusing operation
Color toner (Y, M, C, and K) on paper is heated and pressed by the a. Pressure release operation
fusing belt, fusing roller, and fusing roller (pressure) to be fused on The fusing pressure control motor (PRM) rotates to turn ON the fusing
paper. pressure detector (HLPCD) (H level). When the specified time passes
Toner in the four layers on the paper is fused by heating from up and after turning ON the fusing pressure detector (HLPCD) (H level) by
down and both sides. rotation of the fusing pressure control roller (PRM), the pressure
release motor stops to complete the pressure release operation.
The fusing belt, fusing roller which is provided with the sponge layer,
and fusing roller (pressure) realize the following operations.
1) The nip amount is increased and the heat capacity to paper is
increased.
2) By pressing with the flexible roller, toner of many layers can be HLPCD
fused without being deformed.
3) An even pressure is applied to rough surface of toner (due to the
multi-layer composition).

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 29

b. Pressure release operation
When the end user makes some operations or when the machine
receives the Job signal, the fusing pressure control motor (PRM)
rotates reversely to drive the pressure release lever to the pressing
state.
When the specified time passes from turning OFF the fusing pressure
detector (HLPCD), the pressure release motor stops to complete the
pressing operation.

HLPCD

When turning OFF the main power switch of the machine, be sure to
turn OFF the power switch of the operation panel and check to confirm
that the LCD display goes off before turning OFF the main power
switch.
If the main power switch is turned OFF with the LCD lighted, the power
is cut off before completion of the pressure release operation. If this
state is kept for a long time, the fusing roller may be deformed.

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 30

15. DSPF section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram
(1) Paper feed section

SPUFM

SPFC
SCOV

SPED1
SPPD1
SLUM
2 STUD 4

SPRDMD SPED2

STLD

1 SPWS
3

SPLS1
SPLS2

Signal name Name Function/Operation

SCOV Upper door open/close sensor Detects open/close of the upper door
SLUM Lift up motor Lifts up or moves down the document feed tray
SPED1 Document empty sensor Detects document empty in the document feed tray
SPED2 Document empty sensor Detects document empty in the document feed tray
SPFC Document feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the rollers in the document feed section
SPLS1 Document length detection short sensor Detects the document length of the document feed tray upper
SPLS2 Document length detection long sensor Detects the document length of the document feed tray upper
SPPD1 Document pass sensor 1 Detects pass of the document
SPRDMD Document random sensor Detects the document size in random document feed
SPUFM Transport motor Drives the transport roller
SPWS Document width sensor Detects the document width of the document feed tray upper
STLD Document feed tray lower limit sensor Detects the lower limit of the document feed tray
STUD Document feed tray upper limit sensor Detects the upper limit of the document feed tray

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Pickup roller Picks up document and feed it to the document feed roller
2 Document feed roller Perform the document feed operation of documents
3 Separation roller Separate a document to prevent against double feed
4 Torque limiter A fixed level of resistance is always provided for rotation of the separation roller to prevent
double feed.

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 31

(2) Upper transport section

SPUFM

STRC

4
STRRC

SPPD2

3 2

Signal name Name Function/Operation

SPPD2 Document pass sensor 2 Detects pass of the document
SPUFM Transport motor Drives the transport roller
STRC Transport roller 2 clutch Controls ON/OFF of the transport roller 2
STRRC Transport roller 1 clutch Controls ON/OFF of the transport roller 1

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports document from paper feed roller to transport roller 2
2 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the transport roller, and provides transport power of the
transport roller to document
3 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports document from transport roller to registration roller
4 Transport roller 2 (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the transport roller, and provides the transport power of
the transport roller to document

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 32

(3) Lower transport section

SPUFM

SRRC

SPPD3
2
SPPD5
SPPD4 3
1
5

SOCD
SLCOV

Signal name Name Function/Operation

SLCOV Lower door open/close sensor Detects open/close of the lower door
SOCD DSPF open/close sensor Detects open/close of the DSPF unit
SPPD3 Document pass sensor 3 Detects pass of the document
SPPD4 Document pass sensor 4 Detects pass of the document
SPPD5 Document pass sensor 5 Detects pass of the document
SPUFM Transport motor Drives the transport roller
SRRC Registration roller clutch Controls ON/OFF of registration roller

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Registration roller (Drive) Performs resist of document transport
2 Registration roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the registration roller, and provides transport power of the
registration roller to document
3 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports document from the No.1 scan section to the transport roller 4
4 Transport roller 3 (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the transport roller and provides transport power of the
transport roller to document
5 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports document from the transport roller 3 to the document exit roller
6 Transport roller 4 (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the transport roller and provides transport power of the
transport roller to document

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 33

(4) Optical section

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Reflector Converges lights from the copy lamp.
2 Mirror Sends the document image to the lens.
3 Lens Reduces the document image (light) and reflects it onto the CCD.
4 CCD PWB Scans document images and perform A/D conversion of the scanning signal
5 LED PWB Radiates light onto a document for the CCD to scan the document image

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 34

(5) Paper exit section

SPOM

SPOD

STMPS

Signal name Name Function/Operation

SPOD Document exit sensor Detects document exit of the document
SPOM Document exit motor Drives the document exit roller
STMPS Stamp solenoid Drives the stamp solenoid

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Document exit roller (Drive) Discharges document
2 Document exit roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the document exit roller and provides transport power of
the document exit roller to document

B. Operational descriptions
Document length sensor
Document size
(1) Document size detection SPLS1 SPLS2
Size detection on the document tray AB series A5 OFF OFF
B5 OFF OFF
The document size is detected by the DSPF document width sensor
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
(SPWS), and the document length is detected by the DSPF document
A4 OFF OFF
length sensors (SPLS1, SPLS2). The document size is judged from
B5R ON OFF
the document width and the document length as shown in the table
A4R ON OFF
below.
8.5" x 13" ON ON
When, however, documents of different sizes are mixed and set on the B4 ON ON
document tray, the largest size is detected. A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
8.5" x 14" ON ON
8.5" x 13.4" ON ON
8.5" x 13.5" ON ON

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 35

 Document length sensor
Document size
SPLS1 SPLS2
Inch series 8.5" x 5.5" OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5"R ON OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON
8.5" x 14" ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
8.5" x 13.4" ON ON

SPWS

SPLS1

SPLS2

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 36

16. RSPF section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram
(1) Paper feed section

SCOV
SPPD2 SPUM

SPPD1
1
SPED

SPWS

SPLS1
SPLS2

Signal name Name Function/Operation

SCOV Cover open/close sensor Detects open/close of the RSPF cover
SPED Document sensor Detects document empty in the RSPF paper feed tray
SPLS1 Paper size sensor 1 Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray
SPLS2 Paper size sensor 2 Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray
SPPD1 Document pass sensor 1 Detects paper feed and the document size in random paper feed
SPPD2 Document pass sensor 2 Detects paper pass
SPUM RSPF paper feed motor Feeds a document
SPWS Document width sensor Detects the document width of the document feed tray upper

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Pickup roller Picks up document and feed it to the document feed roller
2 Document feed roller Feeds a document to the transport section. Makes a buckle on paper between the registration
roller and this roller to correct the start position of document skew and document image scan
3 Separation roller Separates a document to prevent double-feeding

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 37

(2) Transport/paper exit section

SPFM
SRRC

SPRS

SPPD3

4 SPPD4

STMPS

SOCD
6

5
8
7

Signal name Name Function/Operation

SOCD RSPF open/close sensor Detects open/close of the RSPF unit
SPFM RSPF transport motor Transports a document
SPPD3 Document pass sensor 3 Detects paper pass
SPPD4 Document pass sensor 4 Detects paper exit and switchback
SPRS Paper exit roller solenoid Controls ON/OFF of the power of the paper exit roller
SRRC Registration roller clutch Controls the registration roller
STMPS Stamp solenoid Drives the finish stamp

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Registration roller (Drive) Transports a document to the transport roller 1 / Controls the transport timing of the document
and adjusts the document scanning timing
2 Registration roller (Idle) Apply a pressure to a document and the registration roller to provide the transport power of the
transport roller to the document
3 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports a document transported from the registration roller to the document scanning
section
4 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the
transport roller to the document
5 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports a document transported from the document scanning section to the paper exit
roller
6 Transport roller 2 (Idle) Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the
transport roller to the document
7 Paper exit roller (Drive) Discharges a document. Switchbacks the document and transports it to the registration roller
when scanning the back surface
8 Paper exit roller (Idle) Apply a pressure to a document and the paper exit roller to provide the transport power of the
paper exit roller to the document

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 38

B. Operational descriptions
(1) Document size detection The paper exit roller (drive pulley) is separated by the paper exit roller
Size detection on the document tray pressure control solenoid.
The document width is detected with the RSPF document width sen- When the read edge of the document passes the scanning section, the
sor (SPWS), and the document length is detected with the RSPF doc- both rollers are brought into close contact to supply the power for
ument length sensors (SPLS1, SPLS2). The document size is judged paper exit.
from the document width and the document length according to the
table below. When documents of different sizes are mixed and set on 1) Document set (Document empty sensor ON)
the document tray, the largest document size is detected.

Document length sensor

Document size
SPLS1 SPLS2
AB series A5 OFF OFF
B5 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
2) Paper feed start (1st sheet)
B5R ON OFF
The pick-up roller descends. (The paper feed motor is booted.)
A4R ON OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON (The transport motor is booted simultaneously.)
B4 ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
8.5" x 14" ON ON
8.5" x 13.4" ON ON
8.5" x 13.5" ON ON
Inch series 8.5" x 5.5" OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF 3) Registration operation (1st sheet)
A4 OFF OFF (Registration clutch ON)
11" x 8.5"R ON OFF (When a certain time passes after turning ON the registration
8.5" x 13" ON ON clutch, the paper feed motor is turned OFF.)
8.5" x 14" ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
8.5" x 13.4" ON ON

RSPF unit

4) Scanning start (1st sheet)

SPWS
SPLS1

SPLS2

5) Paper feed start (2nd sheet)

(2) RSPF paper feed and transport operations

a. Paper feed operation
The paper feed motor is turned ON and the power of the paper feed
motor is transmitted to the pickup roller and the paper feed roller.
The pickup roller descends to pickup the top document and feed it to 6) Scanning complete (1st sheet)/Registration operation (2nd sheet)
the paper feed roller. (When a certain time passes after turning ON the registration
The paper feed roller feeds a document to the transport section. clutch, the paper feed motor is turned OFF.)
At that time, the document is separated by the separation roller to pre-
vent double-feeding.
b. Single face scanning
The lead edge of the fed document is aligned (registration) by the reg-
istration roller, and passed through transport roller 1 to the document
scanning section, where images are scanned.
Then the document is passed through transport roller 2 to the paper
exit roller.
The rollers (the registration roller, transport rollers 1 and 2, the paper
exit roller) in the transport section are driven by the transport motor.

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 39

7) Scanning start (2nd sheet) During the time from when the document rear edge passes the scan-
ning section to when it is switch backed and send to the registration
roller section, the paper exit roller pressure release solenoid is turned
OFF to keep the paper exit roller (drive) and the paper exit roller (idle)
in contact.
1) Document set (Document empty sensor ON)

8) Paper exit complete (1st sheet)

2) Paper feed start (1st sheet)

Pick-up roller descending

9) Scanning complete (2nd sheet)

3) Registration operation (1st sheet, front surface)

10) Paper exit complete (2nd sheet)

4) Scanning start (1st sheet, front surface)

11) Pick-up roller lifting up

(After completion of a job, the paper feed motor is rotated 5) After completion of scanning, the reverse follower roller is
reversely at a low speed for a certain time to lift the pickup roller.) pressed. (Solenoid ON)

6) After stopping the operation, reversing is started.

c. Duplex scanning
Images on the document surface are scanned, and detection of the
rear edge of the document by sensor SPPD3 triggers the following.
That is, when the rear edge of the document passes the reverse gate,
the transport motor is reversed.
Due to the above operation, the paper exit roller is reversed to switch-
back the document, returning it to the registration roller section and
aligning (registration) the document. 7) After reversing, registration operation is executed.
Then the transport motor is rotated normally to transport the document
to the scanning section, scanning images on the back surface.
To reset the page order of the documents, the following operations are
made which are triggered by the detection of the rear edge of the doc-
ument. That is, when the rear edge of the document passes the
reverse gate, the transport motor is reversed.
Due to the above operation, the paper exit roller is reversed to switch-
back the document, returning it to the registration roller section and 8) After turning ON the PS clutch, the reverse follower roller pres-
aligning (registration) the document. sure is released.
Then the transport motor is rotated normally to transport the document
to the paper exit section and discharge it.
When a duplex document is scanned, the document lead edge section
and the rear edge section intersect. At that timing, the paper exit roller
pressure release solenoid is turned ON to make a gap between the
paper exit roller (drive) and the paper exit roller (idle).

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 40

9) Scanning start (First sheet, back surface) 16) After discharge (First sheet), the reverse follower roller pressure
is released.

10) After completion of scanning, the reverse follower roller is

pressed.
d. Stamp operation
1) Document set (Document empty sensor ON)

11) After stopping the operation, reversing is started. 2) Paper feed start (1st sheet)
Pick-up roller descending (The paper feed motor is booted.)
(The transport motor is booted simultaneously.)

12) After reversing, registration operation is executed.

3) Registration operation (1st sheet)

(Registration clutch ON)
(When a certain time passes after turning ON the registration
clutch, the paper feed motor is turned OFF.)

13) After turning ON the PS clutch, the reverse follower roller pres-
sure is released.

4) Scanning start (1st sheet)

14) Scanning start (Second sheet)

5) Scanning complete (1st sheet)

15) After passing the scanning section, the reverse follower roller is
pressed.

6) Stop at the stamp position/Stamp operation (1st sheet)

(Stamp solenoid ON)

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 41

7) Paper exit start (1st sheet)/Preliminary paper feed start (2nd
sheet)

8) Paper exit complete (1st sheet)

9) Stop at the stamp position/Stamp operation (2nd sheet)

(Stamp solenoid ON)

10) Paper exit start (2nd sheet)

11) Paper exit complete (2nd sheet)

12) Pick-up roller lifting up

(After completion of a job, the paper feed motor is rotated
reversely at a low speed for a certain time to lift the pickup roller.)

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 42

17. Fan and filter
The machine is provided with the following fan to discharge air from the process section and cool the fusing section and the power unit.

Signal name Name Function/Operation

FUFM Fusing cooling fan Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section
POFM2 Paper exit cooling fan Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section
PROFM1 Process fan motor 1 Discharges air and cools the process section
PROFM2 Process fan motor 2 Discharges air and cools the process section
PSFM Power cooling fan motor Cools the power unit
PSFM2 Power cooling fan motor 2 Cools the power unit
VFM Machine exhaust fan Discharges heat from the fusing section

The flow of air is as shown in the figure below.

PSFM2

PSFM

POFM2

VFM

FUFM

1
PROFM1

PROFM2

The machine is provided with the following filter to remove ozone generated in the process section.
Process fan motor 2 produces an air flow to generate a difference in the air pressure between inside outside of the developing unit, preventing toner
from splashing from the open port of the developing unit.
The toner filter prevents toner from leaking from the slit caused by this difference in air pressure.

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Toner filter Prevents toner splash
2 Ozone filter Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section

MX-6070N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 43

 1.
MX-6070N
'63) 81,7

633' 62&' 678' 63:6 63))$1 6/80 63)0

633' 6/&29 67/' 635'0' 63)& 6320 /(' 3:%

237,21
633' 63(' 63/6 675& &&' 3:%
67036

(1) MX-xx70 series

633' 63(' 63/6 6755&

0$,1 '5,9( 81,7

633' 632' 6&29 655&
Block diagram

'63)FQW 3:%
'0B. '0B& '0B0 '0B<
A. System block diagram

'+3'B. '+3'B& '+3'B0 '+3'B< 23(5$7,21 81,7

'/B. '/B& '/B0 '/B<
728&+ /&'
&&0B. &&0B& &&0B0 &&0B< 785&B
'9B. 81,7 '9B& 81,7 '9B. 81,7 '9B. 81,7
3$1(/
&&0'B. &&0'B& &&0'B0 &&0'B< 785&B 7&6B. 7&6B& 7&6B0 7&6B<
+20( .(< /9'6
3:% 3:% 237,21
&&+3'B. &&+3'B& &&+3'B0 &&+3'B< %70 '97<3B. '97<3B& '97<3B0 '97<3B<
)URQW 86% ,& &$5'
3:% 5HDGHU
3:55
'(5,9(5< 81,7 )86(5 81,7 3:%
[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION

6+326 32' :(%6 :(%(1' 710B. 710B& 710B0 710B< 86% &1 :LUH/HVV
)URQW /('B* 3:% /$1 3:%
260 32' 7(' 7+B80 32' 71+0B. 71+0B& 71+0B0 71+0B< 3:%
237,21
+/3&' 7)' 7+B86 +/B80 7)6'B. 7)6'B& 7)6'B0 7)6'B< +80$1 6(1625 86% &219 .(<
3:% 3:% %2$5'
350 )80 32)0 7+B/0 +/B86 7&('B. 7&('B& 7&('B0 7&('B< ͤ6,,&$㸸67'

721(5B. 81,7 721(5B& 81,7 721(5B0 81,7 721(5B< 81,7

)8)0 7+B68% +/B/0
&580B. &580B& &580B0 &580B<
32*6 +/B8: 31& $8',725
5(*,67 6(1625 81,7
237,21
5(*6B) 0&.0&&0&00&< ‫ٲ‬ &&' 3:%
237,21
0+36
3&6B) 3&8 3:%
3$3(5 3$66 81,7
‫ٲ‬      F SP /(' 3:%
0& 3:% 256B/('
5(*6B5
320 +3)& '6:B5 352)0 3'26 '&/+3      F SP 256B3'
3&6B5 /(' '5,9(5
3:%
550 33' '6:B) 352)0 ‫ٲ‬ 3'26 3'370 7&7&
2&6:
+/ 3:%
     F SP 0,0 237,21
3)0 78'B. '6:B)8 36)0 3'33' 3'33'
‫ٲ‬ 237,21
0)3& 3:% 730 3:%
7& 3:%
$& PRQLWRU 6&8
6%0 78'B&/ 71)' 36)0 3DSHU 3DVV ,) 3:%      F SP :+6&1
‫ ٲ‬3:% 3,& +''
 FR UH   *%
9)0 7+ +8'
237,21
1)& &$5'
5,*+7 '225 81,7 237,21 5HDGHU
237,21 237,21 ͤ-DSDQ RQO\

MX-6070N ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 – 1

5' ,) 3:% 7ULSOH &$66(77( '(6.
237,21 )$;
QG &$66(77( &2,1 237,21
ͤ-DSDQ㸸67' ),1,6+(5
)RUHLJQ㸸237,21
9(1'(5 $&5( 237,21
&3)' &3)0 &3)' &66
Service Manual

32' $'80 . )LQLVKHU

)$;
&/8' &66 &/8' &63' 237,21
. 6DGGOH )LQLVKHU
7)' $'80 $X WR 6 L ]H 237,21 ͤ-DSDQ RQO\
. )LQLVKHU
&3(' 'H WHF W &3(' &3)& . 6DGGOH )LQLVKHU
/&& )$;
3573' $'8*6 ‫ؼ‬$ Y D L O DE O H ,QQHU )LQLVKHU
7&
&3)3' &3)3' &38& /68 81,7
'6:B$'8 &63' :+B/&&
237,21 ͤ-DSDQ㸸67'
%' 3:%
73' '6:B& '6:B& &/80 ‫ٲ‬
'& 36
$33' &3)& :+
     F SP /68B7+
78' &386 ‫ٲ‬
‫ٲ‬
$33' 3$3(5 )((' 81,7
&38& 3$3(5 )((' 81,7
/68 &17
/' 3:% /68B7+
785& 3:%
 E H DP
&/80 ‫ٲ‬  E H DP
06: $& 3:% GS L
:+ 3:% GS L
     F SP
03/' 0386 '(6. :+B'(6.
3*0
03:6
$& ,1 :+6:
03)' 038&

03('
0$18$/ 3$3(5 )((' 81,7
 563) 81,7

633' 63:6 63/6 6356

633' 63(' 63/6 63)0

633' 62&' 655& 6380

237,21
633' 6&29
67036

0$,1 '5,9( 81,7

(2) MX-xx50 series

563) '5,9(5 3:%

'0B. '0B& '0B0 '0B<

'+3'B. '+3'B& '+3'B0 '+3'B< 23(5$7,21 81,7

'/B. '/B& '/B0 '/B<
728&+ /&'
&&0B. &&0B& &&0B0 &&0B< 785&B
'9B. 81,7 '9B& 81,7 '9B. 81,7 '9B. 81,7
3$1(/
&&0'B. &&0'B& &&0'B0 &&0'B< 785&B 7&6B. 7&6B& 7&6B0 7&6B<
+20( .(< /9'6
3:% 3:% 237,21
&&+3'B. &&+3'B& &&+3'B0 &&+3'B< %70 '97<3B. '97<3B& '97<3B0 '97<3B<
)URQW 86% ,& &$5'
3:% 5HDGHU
3:55
'(5,9(5< 81,7 )86(5 81,7 3:%
6+326 32' :(%6 :(%(1' 710B. 710B& 710B0 710B< 237,21
)URQW /('B* 86% &1 :LUH/HVV
260 32' 7(' 7+B80 32' 71+0B. 71+0B& 71+0B0 71+0B< 3:% 3:% /$1 3:%

+/3&' 7)' 7+B86 +/B80 7)6'B. 7)6'B& 7)6'B0 7)6'B<

350 )80 32)0 7+B/0 +/B86 7&('B. 7&('B& 7&('B0 7&('B<

721(5B. 81,7 721(5B& 81,7 721(5B0 81,7 721(5B< 81,7
)8)0 7+B68% +/B/0
&580B. &580B& &580B0 &580B<
32*6 +/B8: 31& $8',725
5(*,67 6(1625 81,7
237,21
5(*6B) 0&.0&&0&00&< ‫ٲ‬ &&' 3:%
237,21
0+36
3&6B) 3&8 3:%
3$3(5 3$66 81,7
‫ٲ‬      F SP /(' 3:%
0& 3:% 256B/('
5(*6B5
320 +3)& '6:B5 352)0 3'26 '&/+3      F SP 256B3'
3&6B5 /(' '5,9(5
3:%
550 33' '6:B) 352)0 ‫ٲ‬ 3'26 3'370 7&7&
2&6:
+/ 3:%
     F SP 0,0 237,21
3)0 78'B. '6:B)8 36)0 3'33' 3'33'
‫ٲ‬ 237,21
0)3& 3:% 730 3:%
7& 3:%
$& PRQLWRU 6&8
6%0 78'B&/ 71)' 36)0 3DSHU 3DVV ,) 3:%      F SP :+6&1
‫ ٲ‬3:% 3,& +''
 FR UH   *%
9)0 7+ +8'
237,21
1)& &$5'

MX-6070N ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 – 2

5,*+7 '225 81,7 237,21 5HDGHU
237,21 237,21 ͤ-DSDQ RQO\
5' ,) 3:% 7ULSOH &$66(77( '(6.
237,21 )$;
QG &$66(77( &2,1 237,21
ͤ-DSDQ㸸67' ),1,6+(5
)RUHLJQ㸸237,21
9(1'(5 $&5( 237,21
&3)' &3)0 &3)' &66
32' $'80 . )LQLVKHU
)$;
&/8' &66 &/8' &63' 237,21
. 6DGGOH )LQLVKHU
7)' $'80 $X WR 6 L ]H 237,21 ͤ-DSDQ RQO\
. )LQLVKHU
&3(' 'H WHF W &3(' &3)& . 6DGGOH )LQLVKHU
/&& )$;
3573' $'8*6 ‫ؼ‬$ Y D L O DE O H ,QQHU )LQLVKHU
7&
&3)3' &3)3' &38& /68 81,7
'6:B$'8 &63' :+B/&&
237,21 ͤ-DSDQ㸸67'
%' 3:%
73' '6:B& '6:B& &/80 ‫ٲ‬
'& 36
$33' &3)& :+
     F SP /68B7+
78' &386 ‫ٲ‬
‫ٲ‬
$33' 3$3(5 )((' 81,7
&38& 3$3(5 )((' 81,7
/68 &17
/' 3:% /68B7+
785& 3:%
 E H DP
&/80 ‫ٲ‬  E H DP
06: $& 3:% GS L
:+ 3:% GS L
     F SP
03/' 0386 '(6. :+B'(6.
3*0
03:6
$& ,1 :+6:
03)' 038&

03('
0$18$/ 3$3(5 )((' 81,7
 86%:,5(/(66
/$1 ,&&$5'
5($'(5
+XPDQ 2SW
.H\%RDUG
'HWHFW +20(/('
+''
32:(5B/('
8667'
6HQVRU +20(B/(' 32:(5B.(< /&' (82SW
86%+RVW
%X]]HU :8B.(< 7RXFK
67$7(B5('B/('
3DQHO 7<3($&1
+20(B.(< 3DQHO
67$7(B*5((1B/(' /9'6 )URQW

563)&1
'63)&1
6$7$
3DQHO&1 :LIL&1 86%&1
&1
&&'&1
6OLGH
''52Q%RDUG
6:
*%
‫*ق‬E>[@[SFV‫ك‬
B. SCN MFP PWB

6$7$ 7RXFK 86%+XE

JHQ 3DQHO 86%
''5
''5 &RQWUROOHU
)3'/,1. 0%
‫*ق‬E>[@[SFV‫ك‬

0ESV
5HFHLYHUELW

86%+RVW
$)(
/9'6

‫ق‬ELW

''5 86%,)
6',) 6$7$,)
,) +RVW

&18SGDWH
0ESV
''5

86%+RVW
/$1-$&.

/9'6/&'
5-
)3'/,1.
*ESV /&'&,)
*3,2 7UDQVPLWWHU
6FDQ'DWD
ELW *RUJRQ
(WKHU3+< *0,, )3'/,1.
(WKHU0$& 6&1,) %866:
* 5HFHLYHU
* $6,&
57/)* ELW
86%'HYLFH )3'/,1.
86% 0ESV 7UDQVPLWWHU $XGLWRU
86%,) /9'6/68
'HYLFH /68,)
'HYLFH 5HXV &1
7<3(%&1 /9'6
8$57FK $6,& 5HFHLYHU
8$57 /9'6/68&/. 6<1&
FK
,17 ,17
Q)$;B3,&B,17 FK 32)
,17 0RWRU
FK 0RWRU
,&FK 'ULYHU
,17 &RQWUROOHU 'ULYHU
:DNH8S 125)/$6+
&1
,17
FK 0%
,&FK
57& %DWWHU\ 3UJUDP
&RQWUROOHU
,& 65$0
,17 .+] 0E
FK ,&FK
&RQWUROOHU

&3/' 3,& 1RU)ODVK

(WKHU0$& 8$57 3&,H,) 3&,H,) /RFDO%XV 0E
* FK ODQH ODQH ,) 0LFRQ
/RFDO%XV

/('
'ULYHU
Q)$;B3,&B,17
&1
8$57 8$57
6HULDO&1 8$57FK &RQWUROO
3&,H[JHQ &38 0+3
5,&
*ESV &1
+6
8$57FK 8$57
6HULDO&1 $&5(2SW 'HEXJ
9HQGHU &1
3'
3&,H[JHQ $&5(3:% &1
*ESV 2SW
8$57
SLQ',3
62&.(7
86% ,&
1)& +RVW
2SW ((3520
7<3($&1 86%+RVW NE
0ESV

'3/9'6

86%,) 3&,H,) ,&FK SLQ',3 9*$&1

'', '', 9*$ ,&FK
+RVWFK ODQH &RQWUROOHU 62&.(7 'HEXJ
((3520
86%,) 'LVSOD\&RQWUROOHU ((3520 NE
+RVWFK NE

MX-6070N ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 – 3

/68&1
)$; )$;
-367' 86% ,&FK
&1
+6,& 730
63,
8$57 &1
86% /3&,)
8/3,
)$; ,&FK
)$;2SW 86%,)
QG
-3QG(; +RVWFK
&1 ,QWHO
8$57 ,&FK

[*HQ
)$;
)$;2SW 86%,)
UG 8$57
-3UG +RVWFK
&1 8$57 *3,2 &RQWUROO

'HEXJ 86%,) 3&8&1

8$57
&1 +RVW
FK
8$57
86%,) 8$57 'HEXJ
'HYLFH FK

69,' 30,&
0HPRU\ +' 6$7$,)
''5/ ,6 6'00&
&RQWUROOHU $XGLR FK

''5/RQERDUG 6$7$,) 30 30
FK FK FK
*% 8$57 63,

''5/ 6$7$ 63,)ODVK62,&

JHQ $QDORJ
'XDO 6: 0%
&KDQQHO ''5/RQERDUG %,26
*%
&1 6HULDO&1
'HEXJ

:ULWH
P6$7$ &1
*%
3URJUDP
32:(5&1
 '& %OXVKOHVV 0RWRU FRQWURO '& %OXVKOHVV 0RWRU FRQWURO '& %OXVKOHVV 0RWRU FRQWURO
2XWHU 5RWRU W\SH ,QQHU 5RWRU W\SH 2XWHU 5RWRU W\SH
((3520 'UXP 0RWRU '0B.& $'0 0RWRU $'80$'80 'UXP 0RWRU '0B0<
,& %86
5HVHW ,& )XVHU 0RWRU )80 6ZLWFK %DFN 0RWRU 6%0 %HOW 0RWRU %70
NELW 3DSHU 2XW 0RWRU 320 &DVVHWWH 3DSHU )HHG 0RWRU &3)0
C. PCU PWB

3DSHU )HHG 0RWRU 3)0

5HVLVW 0RWRU 550
'DWD%XV>@
/RDG FRQWURO 2XWSXW
)ODVK 520 &RLQ YHQGRU RSWLRQ
;WDO $GGUHVV%XV>@
0ELW
0+] /RDG FRQWURO 2XWSXW 6HQVRU ,QSXW
0&.  0&&
0& 3:% 0&0  0&< 785&B  785&B  &38&  &3)&  3'26  3'26  &66㹼  &66㹼 
65$0 +3)&  785&  0386  '96(7B.  '96(7B&  '96(7B0  '96(7B<
038&  :(%6  $'8*6 
'& 3RZHU 0ELW &38&  &3)&  &386  32*6
): ZLUHG
6HULDO
6XSSO\

&3/' 6HQVRU ,QSXW

&ORFN 71+0'B.  71+0'B&  71+0'B0  71+0'B< 
'97<36(/B.  '97<36(/B&  '97<36(/B0  '97<36(/B< 
:(%(1'  '+3'B0  '+3'B<  &66㹼
&&0'B.  &&0'B&  &&0'B0  &&0'B<
&&+3'B.  &&+3'B&  &&+3'B0  &&+3'B<

&3/'
0)3FQW 8$57
6&83,& &38 '& %UXVK 0RWRU FRQWURO
+6 &KDUJHU &OHDQHU 0RWRU &&0B.&0<
7RQHU +RSSHU 0RWRU 71+0B.&0<

6HULDO ,)
/68FQW &3/'
6WHSSLQJ 0RWRU FRQWURO
7RQHU 0RWRU 710B.&0<
3UHVVXUH 5HOHDVH 0RWRU 350
)$1 0RWRU FRQWURO 6KLIWHU 0RWRU 260
3DSHU 'HOLYHU\ XQLW 3DSHU 7UDQVSRUW 0RWRU 3'370
)XVHU 8QLW &RROLQJ )$1 )8)0
3DSHU 2XWSXW )$1  32)0
3RZHU 6XSSO\ )$1  36)0
3RZHU 6XSSO\ )$1  36)0

MX-6070N ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 – 4

8$57 '& %UXVK 0RWRU FRQWURO
/&& 0DFKLQH KHDW H[KDXVW )$1 9)0
&DVVHWWH /LIW 8S 0RWRU  &/80
30& $6,& &DVVHWWH /LIW 8S 0RWRU  &/80

8$57 6HQVRU ,QSXW

)LQLVKHU
3573'  71)'  &3('  &3(' 
&63'  &63'  '6:B)  '6:B)8 
'UXP /DPS )XVHU 8QLW +/ FRQWURO '6:B&  '6:B&  '6:B5  +/3&' 
'/B.&0< +/B80  86  /0  8: 03/'  03('  7)'  7)' 
$QDORJ ,QSXW 7('  33'  $33' 
$33'  6+326  &/8'  &/8' 
8$57 )XVH 7KHPLVWRU 7+B8086/0
'(6. 73'  78'  '+3'B.  '+3'B& 
7RQHU &RQW 6HQVRU 7&6B.&0<
&3)3'  &3)3'  &3)'  03)' 
3URFHVV &RQW 5HVLVW 6HQVHU ,& %86 &580 &3)'  32'  32'  32' 
5(*6B)5(*6B53&6B)3&6B5
&580B.&0< 32'  78'B.  78'B&/ 
7HPS+XP VHQVRU 7++8'B&/
3'33'  3'33'  '&/+3
0XOWLE\SDVV WUD\ ZLGWK VHQVRU 03:6
/68 7KHPLVWRU /68B7+7+
ZLUHG
6HULDO
7& 3:%

7&  7&
 '63)PRGHO
D. DSPF/RSPF PWB

㻼㼍㼓㼑
㻰㻿㻼㻲㼏㼚㼠㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻹㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥
㻯㻯㻰㻙㻾㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻾㻳㻮
㻟㻌㼘㼕㼚㼑㻌㼏㼛㼘㼛㼞㻌㻯㻯㻰 㻭㻲㻱 㼐㼍㼠㼍 㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻵㻯㻌㻾㼤
㻿㻯㻭㻺㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯 㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻵㻯㻌㼀㼄
㻔㻺㻱㼃㻌㧗ឤᗘရ㻕 㻛㼀㻳 㻟㻡㼎㼕㼠
㻔㻳㻻㻾㻳㻻㻺㻕 㻞㻤㼎㼕㼠

㻯㻸㻷

㻸㻰㻻㻌㻿㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚 㻯㻼㼁
㻴㻤㻿㻛㻞㻟㻣㻟 㻸㻰㻻㻌㻿㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚
㻔㼀㼛㻌㻭㻲㻱㻕㻌㻝㻚㻤㼂 㻸㻰㻻 㻟㻚㻟㼂

㻝㻞㼂
㻔㼀㼛
㻔㼀㼛㻌㻯㻯㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮㻕㻌㻝㻜㼂
㼛㻌㻯㻯㻰
㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮㻕㻕㻌㻝㻜㼂 㻸㻰㻻
㻿㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞

㻯㼘㼡㼠㼏㼔 㻝㻞㼂
㻯㼘㼡㼠㼏㼔 㻔㼀㼛㻌㻯㻯㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮㻕㻌㻡㻚㻟㼂 㻸㻰㻻
㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞
㻡㼂
㻔㼀㼛㻌㻯㻯㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮㻕㻌㻟㻚㻟㼂 㻸㻰㻻
㻿㼀㻹㻼㻿 㻿㻾㻭㻹
㻿㼀㻹㻼㻿 㻝㻹㼎 㻟㻚㻟㼂
㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞 㻔㼀㼛㻌㻿㻯㻭㻺㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻕㻌㻝㻚㻞㼂 㻸㻰㻻

㻟㻚㻟㼂 563)PRGHO
㻔㼀㼛㻌㻿㻯㻭㻺㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻘㻌㻼㼍㼓㼑㻌㻹㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻕㻌㻝㻚㻡㼂 㻰㻯㻰㻯
㻸㻱㻰
㻸㻱㻰 㻲㼘㼍㼟㼔㻾㻻㻹
㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞
㻤㻹㼎

MX-6070N ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 – 5

㻔㻻㼚㻙㼎㼛㼍㼞㼐㻕
㻯㻸㻷㻌㻿㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚
㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞
㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞
㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞 㻿㻯㻭㻺㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻌
㻲㼘㼍㼟㼔㻾㻻㻹 㻔㻔㼒㼛㼞㻌㻼㼍㼓㼑㻌㻹㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻕㻌
㼒㼛㼞㻌㻼㼍㼓㼓㼑㻌㻹㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻕 㻯㻸㻷
㻤㻹㼎 㻯㻼㼁㻌 㼓㼑㼚㼑㼞㼍㼠㼛㼞 㻾㻿㻼㻲㻙㼁㻺
㻰㻿㻼㻲 㻲㻭㻺 㻯㻸㻷
㻰㻿㻼㻲㻌㻲㻭㻺 㻔㻿㼔㼍㼞㼐㼕㼚㼓㻕 㻿㻯㻭㻺㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯 㻔㻝㻥㻚㻡㻣㻢㻹㻴㼦㻕
㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞 㻔㼒㼛㼞㻌㻌㼞㼑㼒㼑㼞㼑㼚㼏㼑㻕㻌

㻹㻲㻼㻯㻌㻌㻌㻼㼃㻮
E. LSU PWB

㼀㼔㼑㼞㼙㼕㼟㼠㼛㼞㻌㻻㼡㼠㼜㼡㼠㻌㻞 㼀㻴㻞 㼀㼔㼑㼞㼙㼕㼟㼠㼛㼞㻌

㻭㻹㻼
㻞

㼀㼔㼑㼞㼙㼕㼟㼠㼛㼞㻌㻻㼡㼠㼜㼡㼠 㼀㻴 㼀㼔㼑㼞㼙㼕㼟㼠㼛㼞㻌
㻭㻹㻼

㻿㻯㻸㻷㻛㼀㼄㻰㻛㻾㼄㻰 㻟
㻹㼕㼏㼞㼛㼃㼕㼞㼑㻌㻮㼁㻿 㻹㼕㼏㼞㼛㼃㼕㼞㼑
㻯㻿㻌㻷㻛㻯㻛㻹㻛㼅
㻯㼔㼕㼜㻌㼟㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠㻔㻸㻰㻰㻕 㻤 㻱㻱㻼㻾㻻㻹
㻯㻿㻌㻱㻱㻼㻙㻾㻻㻹㻌㻷㻛㻯㻛㻹㻛㼅
㻯㼔㼕㼜㻌㼟㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㻔㻱㻱㻼㻙㻾㻻㻹㻕 㻤 㽢㻤

㻴㼍㼞㼐㻌㻾㼑㼟㼑㼠 㻵㻰㼇㻜㻦㻜㼉
㻾㼑㼟㼑㼠㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠 㻾㼑㼟㼑㼠㻌㻵㻯
㼀㼛㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯 㻿㻯㻸㻛㻿㻰㻭㻛㼃㻼 㻵㻞㻯
㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘 㻵㻞㻯㻌㻮㼁㻿
㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻞㻛㻟㻛㻠 㻱㻱㻼㻾㻻㻹
㻶㻻㻮㻱㻺㻰㼋㻵㻺㼀㼋㼅 㻼㼛㼘㼥㼓㼛㼚
㻶㻻㻮㻱㻺㻰㼋㻵㻺㼀 㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘

㻼㻯㼁 㼚㻶㻻㻮㻱㻺㻰㼋㻵㻺㼀㼋㼅 㻼㻯㼁㻌㻵㻛㻲 㻲㻭㻺

㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㼚㻶㻻㻮㻱㻺㻰㼋㻵㻺㼀㼋㻹 㻾㼑㼓㼕㼟㼕㼠㼑㼞
㻶㻻㻮㻱㻺㻰㼋㻵㻺㼀㼋㻹 㻱㼠㼏㻚㻚㻚
㼚㻶㻻㻮㻱㻺㻰㼋㻵㻺㼀㼋㻯
㻶㻻㻮㻱㻺㻰㼋㻵㻺㼀㼋㻯
㼚㻶㻻㻮㻱㻺㻰㼋㻵㻺㼀㼋㻷
㻶㻻㻮㻱㻺㻰㼋㻵㻺㼀㼋㻷 㻸㻰㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㻿㻯㻷
㻟 㻾㻿㼂㼋㻰㻭㼀 㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘
㼀㻾㻭㻺㻿㼋㻾㻿㼀
㻰㻛㻭㻌㻵㻛㻲
㼀㼛㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯
㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻞㻛㻟㻛㻠 㻼㻠㼋㼅㼋㻭㻷㻝㻔㻱㻺㻮㻕
㼀㻾㻭㻺㻿㼋㻰㻭㼀
㻸㻿㼁㼋㻭㻿㻵㻯 㻼㻠㼋㼅㼋㻭㻷㻞㻔㻱㻺㻮㻕
㻞
㻯㼘㼛㼏㼗㻌㻿㼥㼚㼏㼔㼞㼛㼚㼛㼡㼟㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘
㻯㼛㼙㼙㼡㼚㼕㼏㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚 㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻝
㻲㼞㼛㼙㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯
㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻞㻛㻟㻛㻠 㻼㻟㼋㼅㼋㻭㻷㻝

㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㼀㼞㼕㼓㼓㼑㼞㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠 㻼㻯㼁㼋㼀㻾㻳 㼚㻼㻟㼋㼃㻭㻵㼀㼋㻭㻷㻝

㻸㻰㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㻿㼅㻿㼀㻱㻹㻌㻯㻷 䠄㻭㻼㻯㻌㻱㼠㼏㻚㻚㻚䠅
㻼㻟㼋㼅㼋㻭㻷㻞
Q96<1&B< 㻴㼛㼞㼕㼦㼛㼚㼠㼍㼘㻌㻿㼏㼍㼚 㼚㻼㻟㼋㼃㻭㻵㼀㼋㻭㻷㻞
㻛㼂㼑㼞㼠㼕㼏㼍㼘㻌㻿㼏㼍㼚 㻼㻜㻟㼋㻿㻱㻸
㻴㻿㼅㻺㻯㻛㻱㻯㻸㻷 㼀㼕㼙㼕㼚㼓㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘

㻮㻰
㻲㻼㻰㻙㻸㻵㻺㻷㻛㻾㼑㼏㼕㼢㼑㼞
㻟㻡䠖㻡 㻤 㻰㼀㼋㼅㻝㻗㻙 㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻭䠖㼅㻝㻌㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠
㻰㼀㼋㼅㻞㻗㻙 㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻮䠖㼅㻞㻌㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠
㻰㼀㼋㼅㻟㻗㻙 㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻯䠖㼅㻟㻌㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠
㻰㼀㼋㼅㻠㻗㻙 㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻰䠖㼅㻠㻌㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠㻌

㻻㻿㻯㻯㻸㻷㼋㻯 㻻㼟㼏㼕㼘㼘㼍㼠㼛㼞 㻯㻸㻷㼋㻯㼋㻱㻺

㻔㻯㻸㻷㻙㻯㻕

㻻㻿㻯㻯㻸㻷㼋㻹 㻻㼟㼏㼕㼘㼘㼍㼠㼛㼞 㻯㻸㻷㼋㻹㼋㻱㻺

㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㼀㼞㼕㼓㼓㼑㼞㻌㻯㼔㼍㼕㼚 㻔㻯㻸㻷㻙㻹㻕

㻻㻿㻯㻯㻸㻷㼋㻭 㻻㼟㼏㼕㼘㼘㼍㼠㼛㼞 㻯㻸㻷㼋㻭㼋㻱㻺

㻔㻯㻸㻷㻙㻭㻕

㻵㻰㼇㻜㻦㻝㼉
㻴㼍㼞㼐㻌㻾㼑㼟㼑㼠 㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㻿㻯㻸㻛㻿㻰㻭㻛㼃㻼 㻵㻞㻯㻌㻮㼁㻿 㻵㻞㻯
㻼㼛㼘㼥㼓㼛㼚
㻶㻻㻮㻱㻺㻰㼋㻵㻺㼀㼋㻹 㻱㻱㻼㻾㻻㻹
㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㻼㻯㼁㻌㻵㻛㻲
㻯㼘㼛㼏㼗㻌㻿㼥㼚㼏㼔㼞㼛㼚㼛㼡㼟㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘 㻲㻭㻺
㻯㼛㼙㼙㼡㼚㼕㼏㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚 㻾㼑㼓㼕㼟㼕㼠㼑㼞 㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㻿㻯㻷 㻱㼠㼏㻚㻚㻚
㻾㻿㼂㼋㻰㻭㼀
㼀㻾㻭㻺㻿㼋㻾㻿㼀
㻸㻰㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㼀㻾㻭㻺㻿㼋㻰㻭㼀
㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘
㻰㻛㻭㻌㻵㻛㻲 㻼㻠㼋㻹㼋㻭㻷㻝㻔㻱㻺㻮㻕
㻞
㻸㻿㼁㼋㻭㻿㻵㻯 㻼㻠㼋㻹㼋㻭㻷㻞㻔㻱㻺㻮㻕

㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻞
㻿㼅㻿㼀㻱㻹㻌㻯㻷
㻼㻟㼋㻹㼋㻭㻷㻝

㼚㻼㻟㼋㼃㻭㻵㼀㼋㻭㻷㻝
Q96<1&B0
㻸㻰㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘 㻼㻟㼋㻹㼋㻭㻷㻞
㻴㼛㼞㼕㼦㼛㼚㼠㼍㼘㻌㻿㼏㼍㼚
㻛㼂㼑㼞㼠㼕㼏㼍㼘㻌㻿㼏㼍㼚 䠄㻭㻼㻯㻌㻱㼠㼏㻚㻚㻚䠅
㼚㻼㻟㼋㼃㻭㻵㼀㼋㻭㻷㻞
㻴㻿㼅㻺㻯㻛㻱㻯㻸㻷 㼀㼕㼙㼕㼚㼓㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘 㻼㻜㻟㼋㻿㻱㻸

㻮㻰 㻹㻿㻱㼀㼋㻹㻛㼅 㻠
㻠 㼚㻵㻺㼀㻌㻿㼀 㻹㻛㼅
㻲㻼㻰㻙㻸㻵㻺㻷㻛㻾㼑㼏㼕㼢㼑㼞

㻟㻡䠖㻡 㻤 㻰㼀㼋㻹㻝㻗㻙 㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻭䠖㻹㻝㻌㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠
㻰㼀㼋㻹㻞㻗㻙 㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻮䠖㻹㻞㻌㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠
㻰㼀㼋㻹㻟㻗㻙 㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻯䠖㻹㻟㻌㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠
㻰㼀㼋㻹㻠㻗㻙 㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻰䠖㻹㻠㻌㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠

㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㼀㼞㼕㼓㼓㼑㼞㻌㻯㼔㼍㼕㼚

㻵㻰㼇㻝㻦㻜㼉
㻿㻯㻸㻛㻿㻰㻭㻛㼃㻼 㻵㻞㻯
㻵㻞㻯㻌㻮㼁㻿
㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘 㻱㻱㻼㻾㻻㻹
㻴㼍㼞㼐㻌㻾㼑㼟㼑㼠
㻼㼛㼘㼥㼓㼛㼚 㻿㻰㼋㻯㻸㻷
㻿㻰㼋㻯㻸㻷
㻶㻻㻮㻱㻺㻰㼋㻵㻺㼀㼋㻯 㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘 㻿㻰㻯㻸㻷㼋㻱㻺㻮 㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠
㻼㻯㼁㻌㻵㻛㻲 㻲㻭㻺
㻯㼘㼛㼏㼗㻌㻿㼥㼚㼏㼔㼞㼛㼚㼛㼡㼟㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘 㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㻯㼛㼙㼙㼡㼚㼕㼏㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚 㻾㼑㼓㼕㼟㼕㼠㼑㼞
㻿㻯㻷 㻱㼠㼏㻚㻚㻚 㻼㻠㼋㻯㼋㻭㻷㻝㻔㻱㻺㻮㻕 㻞
㻾㻿㼂㼋㻰㻭㼀 㻸㻰㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘 㻼㻠㼋㻯㼋㻭㻷㻞㻔㻱㻺㻮㻕
㼀㻾㻭㻺㻿㼋㻾㻿㼀

㼀㻾㻭㻺㻿㼋㻰㻭㼀 㻸㻰
㻼㻟㼋㻯㼋㻭㻷㻝
㻼㼃㻮
㼚㻼㻟㼋㼃㻭㻵㼀㼋㻭㻷㻝
㻼㻟㼋㻯㼋㻭㻷㻞
㻿㼅㻿㼀㻱㻹㻌㻯㻷
㻸㻿㼁㼋㻭㻿㻵㻯
㼚㻼㻟㼋㼃㻭㻵㼀㼋㻭㻷㻞
㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻟 㻼㻜㻟㼋㻿㻱㻸

Q96<1&B& 㻸㻰㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘 㻠 㼚㻵㻺㼀㻌㻿㼀 㻯㻛㻷

㻴㼛㼞㼕㼦㼛㼚㼠㼍㼘㻌㻿㼏㼍㼚 䠄㻭㻼㻯㻌㻱㼠㼏㻚㻚㻚䠅
㻛㼂㼑㼞㼠㼕㼏㼍㼘㻌㻿㼏㼍㼚 㼚㼚㻏㻼㻞㼋㻭㻷㻞
㻴㻿㼅㻺㻯㻛㻱㻯㻸㻷 㼀㼕㼙㼕㼚㼓㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘 㼚㼚㻏㻼㻝㼋㻭㻷㻞 㻟
㻏㻼㻜㼋㻝㼋㻭㻷㻞

㻮㻰 㻏㻼㻜㼋㻞㼋㻭㻷㻞 㼚㼚㻏㻼㻜㼋㻭㻷㻞
㻏㻼㻜㼋㻟㼋㻭㻷㻞
㻻㻚㻯㻚

㼚㻿㻱㻸㼋㻿㻴
㻻㻚㻯㻚
㻹㻲㻼㻯 㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘 㼚㻼㻞㼋㻸㼋㻭㻷㻞
㻲㻼㻰㻙㻸㻵㻺㻷㻛㻾㼑㼏㼕㼢㼑㼞

㻰㻛㻭㻌㻵㻛㻲 㼚㻼㻝㼋㻸㼋㻭㻷㻞
㼚㻼㻜㼋㻸㼋㻭㻷㻞
㻟㻡䠖㻡 㻤 㻰㼀㼋㻯㻝㻗㻙 㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻭䠖㻯㻝㻌㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠
㻰㼀㼋㻯㻞㻗㻙 㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻮䠖㻯㻞㻌㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠
㻰㼀㼋㻯㻟㻗㻙 㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻯䠖㻯㻟㻌㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠
㻰㼀㼋㻯㻠㻗㻙 㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻰䠖㻯㻠㻌㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠

㻻㻿㻯㻯㻸㻷㼋㻯

㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㼀㼞㼕㼓㼓㼑㼞㻌㻯㼔㼍㼕㼚 㻻㻿㻯㻯㻸㻷㼋㻹

㻻㻿㻯㻯㻸㻷㼋㻭

㻵㻰㼇㻝㻦㻝㼉 㻿㻯㻸㻛㻿㻰㻭㻛㼃㻼 㻵㻞㻯

㻵㻞㻯㻌㻮㼁㻿 㻱㻱㻼㻾㻻㻹
㻴㼍㼞㼐㻌㻾㼑㼟㼑㼠 㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘 㻼㻳㻹㼋㻯㻷
㻼㻳㻹㼋㻿㼀㻭㻾㼀
㻶㻻㻮㻱㻺㻰㼋㻵㻺㼀㼋㻷 䠄㻼㻳㻹㼋㻮㻾㻱㻭㻷䠅 㻟
㻼㻯㼁㻌㻵㻛㻲 㻼㼛㼘㼥㼓㼛㼚 㻻㻚㻯㻚 㻼㼛㼘㼥㼓㼛㼚
㻯㼘㼛㼏㼗㻌㻿㼥㼚㼏㼔㼞㼛㼚㼛㼡㼟㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘 㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘 㻼㻳㻹㼋㻸㻻㻯㻷 㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞
㻯㼛㼙㼙㼡㼚㼕㼏㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚 㻾㼑㼓㼕㼟㼕㼠㼑㼞
㻿㻯㻷 㻱㼠㼏㻚㻚㻚
㻾㻿㼂㼋㻰㻭㼀
㼀㻾㻭㻺㻿㼋㻾㻿㼀 㻲㻭㻺㼋㻼㼃㻹
㻲㻭㻺 㻻㻚㻯㻚 㻻㻚㻯㻚
㻸㻿㼁
㼀㻾㻭㻺㻿㼋㻰㻭㼀 㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘 㻲㻭㻺㻿㼀㻭㻮㻸㻱 㻲㻭㻺
㻯㻸㻷㼋㻯㼋㻱㻺
㻸㻿㼁㼋㻭㻿㻵㻯 㻯㻸㻷㼋㻹㼋㻱㻺
㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻠 㻯㻸㻷㼋㻭㼋㻱㻺
㻸㻰㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘 㻼㻠㼋㻷㼋㻭㻷㻝㻔㻱㻺㻮㻕
㻻㼟㼏㼕㼘㼘㼍㼠㼛㼞 6<6&/. 㻞
㻿㻛㻿 㻼㻠㼋㻷㼋㻭㻷㻞㻔㻱㻺㻮㻕
㻔㻿㼅㻿㼀㻱㻹㻌㻯㻸㻷㻕

㼀㼛㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯 㻼㻟㼋㻷㼋㻭㻷㻝
㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻝㻛㻞㻛㻟
㼚㻼㻟㼋㼃㻭㻵㼀㼋㻭㻷㻝

㻼㻟㼋㻷㼋㻭㻷㻞

㼚㻼㻟㼋㼃㻭㻵㼀㼋㻭㻷㻞
㻱㻯㻸㻷 (&/.
㻼㻜㻟㼋㻿㻱㻸
㻸㼂㻰㻿㻛㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞

㻴㻿㼅㻺㻯 +6<1& 㻹㻿㻱㼀㼋㻷㻛㻯 㻠

Q96<1&B.
㻠 㼂㻿㼅㻺㻯 㻳㻭㻵㻺㼋㻲㻵㼄
㻲㼞㼛㼙㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯
Q96<1&B<&0 㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻝㻛㻞㻛㻟 㼚㼚㻏㻼㻞㼋㻭㻷㻝
㻞
㻴㼛㼞㼕㼦㼛㼚㼠㼍㼘㻌㻿㼏㼍㼚 㼚㼚㻏㻼㻝㼋㻭㻷㻝
㻱㻯㻸㻷 (&/.
䠄㻭㻼㻯㻌㻱㼠㼏㻚㻚㻚䠅
㻛㼂㼑㼞㼠㼕㼏㼍㼘㻌㻿㼏㼍㼚
㼀㼕㼙㼕㼚㼓㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘 㼚㻿㻱㻸㼋㻿㻴
㻴㻿㼅㻺㻯 +6<1&

㻻㻚㻯㻚
㼚㻼㻞㼋㻸㼋㻭㻷㻝
㻲㻼㻰㻙㻸㻵㻺㻷㻛㻾㼑㼏㼕㼢㼑㼞

㼀㼛㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯 㻸㻰㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘 㼚㻼㻝㼋㻸㼋㻭㻷㻝

㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻝㻛㻞㻛㻟 㻏㻼㻜㼋㻝㼋㻭㻷㻝
㻏㻼㻜㼋㻞㼋㻭㻷㻝
㼚㻿㻱㻸㼋㻿㻴

㻻㻚㻯㻚
㼚㻼㻜㼋㻸㼋㻭㻷㻝
㻼㻜㻟㼋㻭㻰㻶
㻏㻼㻜㼋㻷㼋㻭㻷㻝
㻼㻜㻟㼋㻿㻱㻸
㼚㻿㻱㻸㼋㻭㻰㻶㼋㻷

㻏㻼㻜㼋㻯㼋㻭㻷㻝

㻏㻼㻜㼋㻹㼋㻭㻷㻝

㻏㻼㻜㼋㼅㼋㻭㻷㻝

㻿㻰㻯㻸㻷㼋㻱㻺㻮

㻠 㼚㻸㻰㻱㻾㻾 㼅㻛㻹㻛㻯㻛㻷

㻮㻰
㻮㻰

㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘
㻭㻿㻵㻯
㻰㻛㻭㻌㻵㻛㻲
㼀㼛㻌㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻝㻛㻞㻛㻟

㻟㻡䠖㻡 㻤 㻰㼀㼋㻷㻝㻗㻙 㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻭䠖㻷㻝㻌㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠
㻰㼀㼋㻷㻞㻗㻙 㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻮䠖㻷㻞㻌㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠
㻰㼀㼋㻷㻟㻗㻙 㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻯䠖㻷㻟㻌㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠
㻰㼀㼋㻷㻠㻗㻙 㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻰䠖㻷㻠㻌㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠
9,'(2,)B$&7

MX-6070N ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 – 6

 6 & 1 0 ) 3 &
'63)FQ W 6 FDQ % OR F N 5(86 $6 ,&
5 ['  27 27 7 ;'  5 [' 
& 38 5;' B 6&1 7 ;' B' 6 3 ) & 38
7 ['  5EJOKV +PX 27 1% 27 5 ['  7 ['  27 27 8$5 7 % B 7;' 
+6  7 ;' B 6&1 5;' B' 6 3 ) +6  5 ; ' B0 ) 3 & 5 % B 7 ;' B 6 &1
3 1% 5EJOKV +PX 5EJOKV +PX 27 1% 27 8$5 7 % B 5;' 
7 ; ' B0 ) 3 & 5 % B 5 ;' B 6 &1
3 27 32 5 7 &  32 5 7 $  27 1% 27 5EJOKV +PX 8 $ 5 7 % B 5 7 6 B1 
& 7 6 B 6&1 5 7 6B' 6 3 ) *25*21 & 7 6 B0 ) 3 & 5 % B 5 7 6 B 6 &1
5EJOKV +PX 1% 27 32 5 7 $  32 5 7 &  5EJOKV +PX 27 1% 27 8 $ 5 7 % B & 7 6 B1 
3&8 5 7 6 B 6&1 & 7 6B' 6 3 ) $6 ,& 5 7 6 B0 ) 3 & 5 % B & 7 6 B 6 &1
1% 5EJOKV +PX 1% 5EJOKV +PX
& 38
5 ['  27 27 8$5 7 % B 7;' 
+6   3 & 8 B 7 [' 5% B 7 ;' B 3 &8
7 ['  5EJOKV +PX 1% 27 8$5 7 % B 5;' 
 3 & 8 B 5 [' 5% B5;' B 3 &8
3 27 1% 27 5EJOKV +PX 8 $ 5 7 % B 5 7 6 B1 
 3&8B576 5% B5 7 6 B 3 &8
3 5EJOKV +PX 1% 27 8 $ 5 7 % B & 7 6 B1 
 3&8B& 76 5% B& 7 6 B 3 &8
1% 5EJOKV +PX

27 27 8$5 7 & B 7;'

5& B 7 ;' B 3 ,&
F. SERIAL COMMUNICATION

5EJOKV +PX 1% 27 8$5 7 & B 5;'

3 ,& ӓ Ҷ Ҿ ӡ 5& B5;' B 3 ,&
27 1% 5EJOKV +PX 325 7 &  
3 ,&  )  5& B& /5B 3 ,&
5EJOKV +PX 1% 27 325 7 &  
5& B 5 (4 B 3 ,&
1% 5EJOKV +PX
/68 )$;
7 ['  27 6 & , B' $ 7 B ,1 5 ['  27 27 8$5 7 % B 7;' 
 7 5$1 6 B'$ 7 5 6 9 B' $ 7 B ,1 ' $ 7 $ B 5 ;' 5% B 7;' B )$; '
5 ['  27 2& 5EJOKV +PX 5EJOKV +PX 6 & , B' $ 7 B2 8 7 5 $ &221 7 ['  27 27 8$5 7 % B 5;' 
569B' $7 7 5$1 6 B' $ 7 B2 & 38 ' $ 7 $ B 7 ;' 5% B 5;' B )$; '
6&.  5EJOKV +PX 5EJOKV +PX 2& 27 6& ,B& /. $6 ,& 5 ['  27 /9' 6 /9'6 27 8$5 7 % B 7;' 
6&. 6&. 5= $ / &0 ' B 5 ; ' 5 % B 7 ;' B ) $ ;  & 6
2& 5EJOKV +PX 5EJOKV +PX 7 ['  27 27 8$5 7 % B 5;' 
&0 ' B 7 ; ' 5 % B 5 ;' B ) $ ;  & 6

&76 27 27 27 8 $ 5 7 % B 5 7 6 B1 

'$7$B&76 5%B 57 6 B )$; '
576 27 1% 5EJOKV +PX 27 1% 5EJOKV +PX 8 $ 5 7 % B & 7 6 B1 
) ,1 '$7$B576 5%B &7 6 B )$; '
7 ['  27 27 5;' &76 27 5EJOKV +PX 1% 27 5EJOKV +PX 5EJOKV +PX 27 8 $ 5 7 % B 5 7 6 B1 
 7 [ ' B ) ,1 5;' &0 ' B & 7 6 5%B576B )$;&6
5 ['  27 27 1% 5EJOKV +PX 7 ;' & 38 576 27 1% 5EJOKV +PX 27 1% 5EJOKV +PX 8 $ 5 7 % B & 7 6 B1 
 5 [ ' B ) ,1 7;' &0 ' B 5 7 6 5%B&76B )$;&6
1% 1% 2& 5EJOKV +PX 1% 5EJOKV +PX 5EJOKV +PX

27 8$5 7 % B 7;' 

5% B 7;' B )$; '
27 8$5 7 % B 5;' 
5% B 5;' B )$; '
/9'6 27 8$5 7 % B 7;' 
'(6. 5 % B 7 ;' B ) $ ;  & 6
7 ['  27 27 27 5;' 27 8$5 7 % B 5;' 
 7 [' B' 6. 7 [' B' 6 . )$; 5 % B 5 ;' B ) $ ;  & 6
5 ['  27 27 1% 27 1% 7 ;'
5 [' B' 6. 5 [' B' 6 .
1% 27 1% 27 27 , 2 & 38 27 8 $ 5 7 % B 5 7 6 B1 
' 7 5 B' 6. ' 75B' 6.  6 DP H D V ) $ ;   5%B 57 6 B )$; '
27 27 1% 27 1% , 2 27 1% 5EJOKV +PX 8 $ 5 7 % B & 7 6 B1 
' 6 5 B' 6. ' 65B' 6. 5%B &7 6 B )$; '
1% 1% 5EJOKV +PX 5EJOKV +PX 27 8 $ 5 7 % B 5 7 6 B1 
5%B576B )$;&6
27 1% 5EJOKV +PX 8 $ 5 7 % B & 7 6 B1 
5%B&76B )$;&6
5EJOKV +PX 5EJOKV +PX

27 8$5 7 % B 7;' 

/&& 5% B 7;' B )$; '
7 ['  27 27 27 5;' 27 8$5 7 % B 5;' 
 7 [' B / && 7 [' B /& & 5% B 5;' B )$; '
5 ['  27 27 1% 27 1% 7 ;' /9'6 27 8$5 7 % B 7;' 
5 [' B / && 5 [' B /& & 5 % B 7 ;' B ) $ ;  & 6
1% 27 1% 27 27 , 2 & 38 27 8$5 7 % B 5;' 
' 7 5 B / & & ' 75B /&& )$; 5 % B 5 ;' B ) $ ;  & 6

MX-6070N ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 – 7

27 27 1% 27 1% , 2
' 6 5 B / & & ' 65B /&&
1% 1% 27 8 $ 5 7 % B 5 7 6 B1 
 6 DP H D V ) $ ;   5%B 57 6 B )$; '
27 1% 5EJOKV +PX 8 $ 5 7 % B & 7 6 B1 
& 3 /' 5%B &7 6 B )$; '
5EJOKV +PX 5EJOKV +PX 27 8 $ 5 7 % B 5 7 6 B1 
( 30    7    & 1 5%B576B )$;&6
* 3 ,2   27 1% 5EJOKV +PX 8 $ 5 7 % B & 7 6 B1 
5%B&76B )$;&6
* 3 ,2   5EJOKV +PX 5EJOKV +PX

27 8$5 7 % B 7;' 

5% B 7 ;' B 3& ,
8$5 7 % B 5;' 
5% B5;' B 3& ,
27 325 7 %  
& 3 /' 2S W LRQD O 5 % B * 32 B 5 7 6 B 3 & ,
27 325 7 %  
/ &0 ;2       + & 3& , 68 % 5% B* 3 , B &7 6 B 3& ,
325 7 $  27 325 7 % 
5% B' 7 5 B 3 & ,
325 7 $  27 325 7 % 
5% B' 6 5 B 3 & ,

27 8$5 7 % B 7;'  

5% B 7 ;' B 5 ,&
8$5 7 % B 5;'  
5% B5;' B 5 ,&
27 325 7 %  
2S W LRQD O 5% B5 7 6B5 ,&
325 7 %  
&R LQ 9 HQG R U  3& , 5% B& 7 6B5 ,&
325 7 % 
5% B' 7 5 B 5 ,&
27 325 7 % 
5% B' 6 5 B 5 ,&
 LIU JPN PWB FAX MAIN PWB
TEL/LIU Voltage
Silicon DAA Connector 3.3V 1.8V MDM3.3V
Regulator
Si3056 CHIP SET
G. FAX section

AFE_CLK
AFE_RES- STATUS LED_1

ASPCLK PROGRAM
ABITCLK 16bit
MJ1 ARXD
FLASH ROM
Si3019 Si3056 ATXD 16Mb
(LINE)
SPK(analog) STATUS LED_2
16bit (Not mount)
MODEM

Crystal
Resonator WORK
24.576MHz 16bit MEMORY RESET- 3.3V
RESET IC
SDRAM
64Mbit

+5V
MDM3.3V +3.3V
Filter
+5VA MFP IF
Speaker
16bit Connector
BZ

EN_SPKON- With secure

Speaker Power Volume EN_BZON- +1.2V locking
DCDC device
Connector Amplifier Change
S02B- VOLA SPI Flash
PASK VOLB +24V BM30B-
VOLC
SPI (Not mount)
SHLDS
VOLD Diag Soft +3.3V +5V
16Mbit DCDC
SPMUTE-

RGDT-(CI᳨ฟ) +5VS

MON_24V- +24V +24V

Detection
CI2- RES_FAX-

DATA_RXD_P
DATA_RXD
DATA_RXD_N
CI LVDS
CI- DATA_TXD_P
Detection DATA_TXD
DATA_TXD_N
FAX_CTS(D)-

FAX_RTS(D)-
CPU CMD_RXD_P
CMD_RXD
CMD_RXD_N
LVDS CMD_TXD_P
CMD_TXD
CMD_TXD_N

FAX_CTS(CS)-

MX-6070N ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 – 8

S relay
+5VS FAX_RTS(CS)-

FLVPP
MJ2
(TEL) MODEL ID voltage
level
OFF fock
detection MODEL ID2 voltage
level
EXHS- CNCT_FAX-
JTAG
JTAG Connector
14pin
SON1
UART (Not mount)
CID-
Download
Crystal Log
Resonator Connector
+24V (Not mount)
+12 䊼 13.333MHz
PICPGM_EN
PIC +12V +24
CI Fi䡈ter
microcomputer
CI Fi䡈ter UART

+5VS
SON2
WUP_FAX-

voltage TELID
1W┬䜶䝛䝰䞊䝗᫬ level
ືస voltage TELID2
level
 5 4 3 2 1
2.

㻰㻯㻌㻼㻻㼃㻱㻾㻌㻿㼁㻼㻼㻸㼅

F301
D D

9ROWDJH
&RQYHUVLRQ

+
&1 91
F101

~
~
-
㻺㻛㻲
DCCNT1
A. AC power line diagram
Power line diagram

F401

9ROWDJH
F102 &RQYHUVLRQ
9R
9/
$&3:% ):
*HQHUDWLQJ
&LUFXLW
&1 &1 MSW
F1 Pattern Gap Pattern Gap DCCNT2
AC IN
L

㻭㻯㻌㻹㻻㻺㻵㼀㻻㻾㻌㻼㼃㻮

+
F2 F1

~
~
N
Japan V_MON
Pattern Gap Pattern Gap

-
C 200V C

㻞㻠㼂㻞

㻳㻺㻰

WH-L WH-N

&1
&1 &1
RY1
㻴㻸㻌㻼㼃㻮

㼃㻴㻌㻼㼃㻮 &1 INT5V

L1
F3 F4

HL_PR
L2
5<
NC

NO
+24V

WH_CNT

B TD1 TD2 TD3 TD4 B

&1 &1 &1
T1 G T1 G T1 G T1 G

T2 4 SSR1 T2 4 SSR2 T2 4 SSR3 T2 4 SSR4

1 1 1 1
HLOUT_US HLOUT_UM HLOUT_UW HLOUT_LM

MX-6070N ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 – 9

WH-SW 2 GND 2 GND 2 GND 2 GND

6 6 6 6

㼐㼞㼍㼣㼑㼞

HL UW HL LM
HL US HL UM
DESK DESK DESK CS SCN
LCC HEATER HEATER HEATER HEATER HEATER
HEATER

10W 10W 10W 10W 10W

10W

7+(50267$776B/0
㻸㻯㻯㻔㻻㻼㼀㻵㻻㻺㻕 㻰㻱㻿㻷㻔㻻㻼㼀㻵㻻㻺㻕 㻯㻿 㻿㻯㻺㻌㼡㼚㼕㼠
A A

㼃㻭㻾㻹㻌㻴㻱㻭㼀㻱㻾㻌㻿㻱㼀㻌㻦㻌㻻㻼㼀㻵㻻㻺㻌㻌㻔㻶㼍㼜㼍㼚㻦㻿㼀㻰㻕 7+(50267$776B80

7+(50267$776B86

)86,1*81,7

5 4 3 2 1
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PCU PWB HL PWB 24V1

㻲㼁㻿㻱 1TC-K
INT5V 1TC-C
(2.0A)
1TC-M
DSW-R DSW-F 24V1 1TC-Y
㻲㼁㻿㻱
MC-K
(2.0A)
MC-C 2TC
5VN3 24V1 MC-M
㻼㼀㻯 MC-Y
5VN3 (2.0A) 24V1 DHV
SENSOR GB-K
GB-C
A
GB-M PTC A
GB-Y
24V1 24V1 RRM PFM CPFM FUM BTM DV-K VCASE
6.3A/250V 24V1 GND DV-C
DV-M
Inner brushless motor Outer brushless motor DV-Y

24V2 24V2
MC PWB TC PWB
6.3A/250V 㻲㼁㻿㻱 24V1 FFC
24V3 24V3 (2.5A) 24V3
㻲㼁㻿㻱
ADUM1 ADUM2
6.3A/250V (2.5A) RIGHT GND
5VN4 FFC
B. DC power line diagram

㻲㼁㻿㻱
DOOR Inner brushless motor Interlock Circuit
24V3 PWB
(1.5A) GND
CCM_K,CCM_C,CCM_M,CCM_Y
24V3 OSM,PRM,TNM_K,TNM_C,TNM_M,TNM_Y Stepping motor Brush motor
MOTOR C1LUM,TNHM_K,TNHM_C,TNHM_M,TNHM_Y MOTOR
12VPCU
24V2 5VL
SBM,POM Inner brushless motor
MOTOR DM_K,DM_C,DM_M,DM_Y Outer brushless motor ORS PD PWB
24V2
㻡㼂㻺 AC MONITOR 24V3
FW FW 24V2 24V2 24V2 PWB ORS LED PWB
5VN2 5VN2 GND PGM
P-GND P-GND 㻲㼁㻿㻱 24VPD
(2.5A) 3.3VPCU 3.3VPCU 5V_LD MIM
P-GND P-GND
BD Stepping motor
LSU FFC
GND GND CNT 24VPD 24VPD
QUAD 㻲㼁㻿㻱 LEDPWB
D-GND D-GND PWB LD GND (1.5A)
Model LED DRIVER PWB
DC 10V
B
POWER 12VPCU 5.3V
CCD-F B

SUPPLY GND 12VPCU 12VPCU 24VPD PWB

㻰㻯㻙㻰㻯
UN 24VPD 24VPD 3.3V 1.8V
㻸㻰㻻
5VN (5VN1) 㻲㻱㼀 㻲㼁㻿㻱
GND
5VL (2.0A) GND
5VN 5VL
OCSW
㻲㻱㼀 10V 10V FFC
3.3VPCU 㻸㻰㻻 5VL
5VL (3.3VPCU) 5.3V 5.3V
㻰㻯㻙㻰㻯
㻸㻰㻻
MHPS
P-GND 3.3V 3.3V
GND GND 㻸㻰㻻
GND
24V4 24V4 5VO_Duty 5VO_Duty DSPF Model
6.3A/250V DSPF CNT
24V3 24VPD 24VPD
PWB 10V
CLUTCH
24V5 12VPCU 12VPCU 10V 5.3V CCD-R
24V3 㻸㻰㻻
3.3V
PWB 1.8V
6.3A/250V
24V4
SOLENOID 5VL 5VL 㻸㻰㻻
5.3V 㻸㻰㻻
㻼㼀㻯
GND
24V3 3.3VL (2.0A) 3.3VL 3.3VL 3.3V
24V3 㻸㻰㻻
FAN 㻰㻯㻙㻰㻯
1.2V 5VO 5VO FFC
㻸㻰㻻 2SWLRQ
5VO_Duty 5VO_Duty 24VPD
1.5V 㻲㼁㻿㻱
㻰㻯㻙㻰㻯 GND GND (0.8A) SOLENOID
24V3 24V3 24VPD
㻲㼁㻿㻱 CLUTCH
5VL AUDITOR (1.0A)

(SCN CNT) 24VPD

MOTOR
5VO_Duty
2SWLRQ SPOM,SLUM Stepping motor
5VO 㻲㻱㼀
(MFPC) 24VPD
C C

5VL 5VO
SPFM
NFC or Outer brushless motor
㻲㼁㻿㻱 USB SPFFAN
㻼㼀㻯
24VPD
5VL 5VL (1.5A) Rear USB
(1.1A)

MX-6070N ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 – 10

(3.0A) 48V
5VL 5VL USB IC CARD 㻲㼁㻿㻱 㻰㻯㻙㻰㻯 LED DSPF PWB
㻼㻵㻯
㻼㼀㻯 READER
(1.1A)

USB WIRELESS 24VPD 24VPD

RSPF Model
DCCNT1 MOTOR
㻼㼀㻯 LAN SPUM,SPFM Stepping motor
5VL
(1.1A) 2SWLRQ
DCCNT2 5VO 24VPD
USB
SOLENOID 2SWLRQ
P-GND P-GND 㻼㼀㻯 FRONT USB 5VO_Duty RSPF 24VPD
(1.1A) CLUTCH/SOLENOID
㻲㼁㻿㻱 DRIVER
D-GND D-GND GND
(1.5A) 5VL
D-GND D-GND 㻼㼀㻯 HUMAN SENSOR PWB PWB
(1.1A)
3KRHQL[67'
24V4 USB
㻼㼀㻯
MOTOR USB
5VN (1.1A)
PDPTM Stepping motor
PAPER
24V3 PASS Un 24V3 6.3V KEYBOARD
24V4 㻰㻯㻙㻰㻯 LCD UN
P-GND DESK 5VL 3.3VL
5VN 2SWLRQ 㻲㼁㻿㻱 㻸㻰㻻 8667'
D-GND 2SWLRQ (1.5A) 5VO 5VO
5VL HOME PWB 27+(52SWLRQ
GND LVDS
24V4 HDD PWB OPE Un
P-GND FFC
5VN LCC
D D-GND 5VL D

ACRE 5VO 5VO

㻲㼁㻿㻱 TEL LIU1
(1.0A) 5VL 5VL 3.3VFAX
2SWLRQ 2SWLRQ 㻲㼁㻿㻱
24V4 (3.0A) 24V3 3.3VFAX 24V3
㻲㼁㻿㻱
GND 㻰㻯㻙㻰㻯
5V (7.0A) P-GND GND -DSDQ67'
㻰㻯㻙㻰㻯 㻲㼁㻿㻱 D-GND 24V4 㻲㼁㻿㻱
24V4 㻲㼁㻿㻱 FAX MAIN1
(3.0A) P-GND (6.0A) P-GND (4.0A) 2YHUVHDV2SWLRQ
5VN D-GND
㻲㼁㻿㻱 5VO 5VO
(2.0A)
3K_FINISHER D-GND 㻲㼁㻿㻱 TEL LIU
(1.0A) 5VL 5VL 3.3VFAX
INNER 㻲㼁㻿㻱 2&3
(3.0A) 24V3 3.3VFAX 24V3
FINISHER 1K_FINISHER GND 㻰㻯㻙㻰㻯
2SWLRQ GND
MFPC-SCN PWB FAX MAIN2&3
2SWLRQ 2SWLRQ 2SWLRQ
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 3.

LVDS PWB HOME PWB

SCN MFPC PWB CN3 CN1
1 1
GND GND
2 2
CN5 YP_Y1 YP_Y1 CN2
3 3
CN33 CN1 XP_X1 XP_X1
1 1 4 4 1
GND GND YN_Y2 YN_Y2 Y1
2 2 1 40 5 5 2
SATA_TXP SATA_TXP GND GND XN_X2 XN_X2 X1 TOUCH
3 3 2 39 6 6 3
SATA_TXN SATA_TXN GND GND HOME_LED HOME_LED Y2
4 4 3 38 7 7 4
GND GND GND GND NHM_KEY NHM_KEY X2
5 5 4 37 8 8
SATA_RXN SATA_RXN PVCCEN PVCCEN NWU_KEY NWU_KEY
6 6 5 36 9 9 IMSA-9617S-04Y801 PANEL
SATA_RXP SATA_RXP 24V_OPE 24V WU_LED WU_LED
7 7 6 35 10 10
GND GND 24V_OPE 24V 5VO_FUSE 5VO
SATA 7pin 7 34 11 11
24V_OPE 24V GND GND
IMSA-9813B-07Y901 8 33
5V_OPE 5VLS_OPE_FUSE GHR-11V-S GHR-11V-S
9 32 BM11B-GHS-TBT(LF)(SN)
CN6 5V_OPE 5VLS_OPE_FUSE SM11B-GHS-TBT(LF)(SN)
1 10 31
3.3V 5V_OPE 5VLS_OPE_FUSE
2 1 11 30
3.3V DGND 5V_OPE 5VLS_OPE_FUSE
3 2 12 29
HDD 3.3V 5VHD GND GND
4 3 13 28
DGND DGND HOME_LED HOME_LED
5 PAP-03V-S 14 27
DGND nHM_KEY nHM_KEY
6 B03B-PASK-1(LF)(SN) 15 26
DGND nWU_KEY nWU_KEY
7 16 25
+5VHD WU_LED WU_LED CN5 CN5
8 17 24
+5VHD XN_X2 XN_X2
9 18 23 41 40
+5VHD YN_Y2 YN_Y2 B_3R3V_LCD B_3R3V_LCD
10 19 22 40 39
DGND XP_X1 XP_X1 B_3R3V_LCD B_3R3V_LCD
11 20 21 39 38
Actual wiring chart

DGND YP_Y1 YP_Y1 B_3R3V_LCD B_3R3V_LCD

12 21 20 38 37
DGND GND GND B_3R3V_LCD B_3R3V_LCD
13 22 19 37 36
12V LCD_DATA3+ LCD_DATA3+ NC NC
14 23 18 36 35
12V LCD_DATA3- LCD_DATA3- NC(CLKEDID) NC(CLKEDID)
15 24 17 35 34
A. Operation panel, HDD, FAX

12V GND GND NC(DATAEDID) NC(DATAEDID)

25 16 34 33
LCD_CLK+ LCD_CLK+ D0- D0-
SATA SIGNAL&POWER 26 15 33 32
LCD_CLK- LCD_CLK- D0+ D0+
27 14 32 31
GND GND GND GND
28 13 31 30
LCD_DATA2+ LCD_DATA2+ D1- D1-
29 12 30 29
LCD_DATA2- LCD_DATA2- D1+ D1+
30 11 29 28
GND GND GND GND
Japan only 31 10 28 27
LCD_DATA1+ LCD_DATA1+ D2- D2-
32 9 27 26
FAX MAIN PWB LCD_DATA1- LCD_DATA1- D2+ D2+
33 8 26 25
GND GND GND GND
34 7 25 24
LCD_DATA0+ LCD_DATA0+ CLK- CLK-
35 6 24 23
LCD_DATA0- LCD_DATA0- CLK+ CLK+
36 5 23 22
GND GND GND GND
37 4 22 21
CN3 CN44 LCD_DISP LCD_DISP NC(D3-) D3-
38 3 21 20
CCFT(PWM) CCFT(PWM) NC(D3+) D3+
30 1 39 2 20 19
CN4 GND GND 5VO 5VO GND GND
29 2 40 1 19 18
+3.3V_F +3.3V_F GND GND NC NC
1 28 3 18 17 LCD
SP+ +3.3V_F +3.3V_F NC NC
2 27 4 FH41-40S-0.5SH 17 16
Speaker SP- FAXD_TXD_N FAXD_TXD_N FH48-40S-0.5SV GND GND
26 5 16 15
PAP-02V-S NCNCT_FAX NCNCT_FAX NC NC
S02B-PASK-2 25 6 15 14
FAXD_TXD_P FAXD_TXD_P NC NC
(LF)(SN) 24 7 MX-6070N,MX-5070N,MX-4070N,MX-3570N, 14 13
+5V_(OFF) +5V_(OFF) GND GND
23 8 13 12
FAXCS_TXD_P FAXCS_TXD_P GND GND
22 9 12 11
NRES_FAX NRES_FAX GND GND
21 10 MX-3070N,MX-6170FN,MX-5170FN,MX-4170FN 11 10
FAXCS_TXD_N FAXCS_TXD_N GND GND
20 11 10 9
GND GND GND GND
19 12 9 8
FAXD_RXD_N FAXD_RXD_N GND GND
18 13 8 7
NFAX_WUP NFAX_WUP GND GND
17 14 7 6
FAXD_RXD_P FAXD_RXD_P CCFT CCFT
16 15 6 5
+5V_(OFF) 5V_(OFF) CN1 EN EN
15 16 5 4
FAXCS_RXD_P FAXCS_RXD_P 1 GND GND
14 17 5VL 4 3
GND GND 2 PIR VLED VLED
13 18 GND 3 2
FAXCS_RXD_N FAXCS_RXD_N 3 VLED VLED
12 19 NHDS 2 1
GND GND CN30 VLED VLED
11 20 (Motion sensor) 1
NFAXD_RTS NFAXD_RTS GHR-03V-S SM03B-GHS-TB(LF)(SN) NC
10 21 15 20455-040E-#2
FLVPP FLVPP 5VL
9 22 14 FI-RNE41SZ-HF(FI-RE41S-HF)
NFAXD_CTS NFAXD_CTS HDS_LED
8 23 13
+5V_A +5V_A NHDS
7 24 12
NFAXCS_RTS NFAXCS_RTS GND
6 25 11
+24V +24V GND
5 26 10
NFAXCS_CTS NFAXCS_CTS GND
4 27 9
+3.3V_F +3.3V_F 5VL
LIU PWB 3 28 8
+3.3V_F +3.3V_F 5VL
2 29 7
GND GND 5VL
1 30 6
PGND PGND 5VL
5
SHLDP-30V-S-1(B) SHLDP-30V-S-1(B) ERROR_RED_LED
BM30B-SHLDS-G-TFT(LF)(SN) BM30B-SHLDS-G-TFT 4
POW_LED
3
MJ1 NPOW_SW
2
CN2 CN6 BZR
1
- GND
1 1 GHR-15V-S
- +24V-1 +24V-1 BU07P-TZ-S(LF)(SN)
1 2 2 BM15B-GHS-TBT(LF)(SN)
L1 AG PGND-1
2 3 3 1 7 1
TO LINE L2 +24V-2 +24V-2 NPOW_SW NPOW_SW
4 4 2 6 2
- AG PGND-2 POW_LED POW_LED
5 5 3 5 3
- 150VON 150VON ERORR_RED_LED ERORR_RED_LED PWR PWB
6 6 4 4 4
CION CION BZR BZR
MJ-62J-RD315 7 7 CN21 5 3 5
MSGMUTE MSGMUTE GND GND
8 8 1 6 2
HS1- HS1- VBUS DATA_LED_GREEN GHR-05V-S
9 9 2 7 1 BM05B-GHS-TBT(LF)(SN)
HS2- HS2- D- DGND
10 10 USB2.0 3
CI- CI- D+ CZHR-07V-S CZHR-07V-Y
11 11 4
EXHS- EXHS- GND
12 12 (HOST)
SON1 SON1
13 13
MJ2 SON2 SON2 UAR27-4K5J00 CN25
14 14
ECON ECON
15 15 1
- MRON MRON VBUS3
16 16 CN18 2 1
- TELID TELID D3- DATA_LED_GREEN
1 17 17 1 3 2
TEL1 CI2- CI2- VBUS D3+ NC
TO EX TEL 2 18 18 2 4 3
TEL2 NC NC D- DGND3 DGND LED PWB
19 19 USB2.0 3 5
- TELID2 TELID2 D+ SHELD3 GHR-03V-S
20 20 4 6 BM03B-GHS-TBT(LF)(SN)
- NC NC GND DATA_LED_GREEN
21 21 (DEVICE) 7

MX-6070N ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 – 11

GND GND DGND
MJ-62J-RD315 22 22 8
+3.3V +3.3V UBR23-4K2200 VBUS2
23 23 9
GND GND D2-
24 24 10
+5VS +5VS CN17 D2+
25 25 11
GND GND 1 DGND2 CN3
26 26 TRP1+ 12
SI3_RES- SI3_RES- 2 SHIELD2
27 27 TRP1- GHR-12V-S 6 6 6
SPK SPK 3 VBUS4 VBUS
28 28 BM12B-GHS-TBT(LF)(SN) 5 5 5

Board to Board
MDM_ATXD ATXD TRP2+ D4- D+
29 29 4 4 4 4
MDM_ARXD ARXD TRP3+ D4+ D- KB3
30 30 5 3 3 3
MDM_ABITCLK ABITCLK TRP3- DGND4 GND
31 31 LAN 6 2 2 2
MDM_ASPCLK ASPCLK TRP2- SHELD4 GND KEYBOARD
CN1 32 32 7 SRA-21T-4 1 1 1
RGDT- RGDT- TRP4+ FGND P-GND
1 33 33 8 P-GND
TX+ MDM_CLK MDM_CLK TRP4-
2 34 34 PALR-06V PAP-06V-S GHR-06V-S SM06B-GHS-TB(LF)(SN)
RX+ AFE_RES- AFE_RES-
TO HANDSET 3 35 35 24-010139U13-1
RX- BBITCLK BBITCLK
4 36 36
TX- BSPCLK BSPCLK
5 37 37
(JAPAN ONLY) DG BTXD BTXD CN3
6 38 38
RHS- BRXD BRXD CN4
39 39 6
HDMUTE HDMUTE VBUS2
MD-S6100-90 40 40 5 1
RHS- RHS- D2- VBUS
4 2
D2+ D-
TX25-40P-12ST-H1E TX24-40R-10ST-H1E 3 3
SRA-01T-3.2 DGND2 D+
CN50 USB PWB 2 4
CN1 CN2 SHIELD2 GND
1 1
3R3V 5 1 1 FGND
2 VBUS VBUS UAR27-4K5J00
DSR 4 VBUS_WLAN 2 2 PHR-6 S6B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
3 D- D- FGND
RXD CN26 3 D-_WLAN 3 3
4 D+ D+
WIFI
CTS 1 2 D+_WLAN 4 4
5 GND GND
RTS VBUS_WLAN 2 1 DGND_WLAN
FRONT USB PWB
232C 6 D-_WLAN SHIELD_WLAN
TXD 3 UAR27-4K5J00 UAR27-4K5J00 CN1
7 D+_WLAN
IC㺔㺎㺢㺼㺶㺎㺞㺼㺎
DTR 4 PAP-05V-S 1 CN2
8 DGND_WLAN NC
GND 5 2 1 1
SHIELD_WLAN VBUS4 VBUS VBUS
6 3 2 2 (ᾏእ)
BM08B-GHS-TBT(LF)(SN) VBUS4 D4- D- D-
7 4 3 3
D4- D4+ D+ D+
8 5 4 4
D4+ DGND4 GND GND
9 6
DGND4 SHIELD4
CN15 10 UAR27-4K5J00 UAR27-4K5J00
SHIELD4
1 GHR-10V-S CZHR-06V-Y BM06B-CZSS-1-TF(LF)(SN)
3R3V BM10B-GHS-TBT(LF)(SN)
2
DSR
3
RXD
4
CTS BU06P-TZ-S(LF)(SN) BU06P-TZ-S(LF)(SN)
5
RTS 1 6 6 1
232C 6 NC
TXD 2 NC 5 5 2
7 5V
DTR 3 VBUS4 4 4 3
8 D-
GND 4 D4- 3 3 4
IC㺔㺎㺢㺼㺶㺎㺞㺼㺎
D+
5 D4+ 2 2 5
BM08B-GHS-TBT(LF)(SN) D-GND
6 DGND4 1 1 6
SHIELD4 F-GND (᪥ᮏ)
CZHR-06V-Y CZHR-06V-S CZHR-06V-Y CZHR-06V-S
 B. LSU
PCU PWB
CN11 CN1
A-12 1 DGND
(NC)
A-11 2 NPCU_TRG
DGND CN49
A-10 3 JOBEND_INT
CN4
NPCU_TRG
A-9 4 NRSV_DAT 1 1 DGND
JOBEND_INT DGND
A-8 5 NSCK_LSU 2 2 CH0_N
NRSV_DAT CH0_N
A-7 6 NTRANS_DAT 3 3 CH0_P
NSCK_LSU CH0_P
A-6 7 NTRANS_RST 4 4 DGND
NTRANS_DAT DGND
A-5 8 LSUASIC_RST 5 5 CH1_N
NTRANS_RST CH1_N
A-4 9 TH2_LSU 6 6 CH1_P
LSUASIC_RST CH1_P
A-3 10 TH1_LSU 7 7 DGND
TH2_LSU DGND
A-2 11 DGND 8 8 CH2_N
TH1_LSU CH2_N
A-1 9 9 CH2_P
DGND 11CZ-6Y CH2_P
B11B-CZHK-B-1(LF)(SN)(V) 10 10 DGND
12CZ-6Y DGND
11 11 CLK_N
CLK_N
CN2 12 12 CLK_P
CLK_P
1 13 13 DGND
BEAMDETECT DGND
B-12 2 14 14 CH3_N
SCL_LDD NC CH3_N
B-11 3 15 15 CH3_P
SDA_LDD NC CH3_P
B-10 4 16 16 DGND
3.3VN 3.3VN DGND
B-9 5 17 17 CH4_N
DGND DGND CH4_N
B-8 6 18 18 CH4_P
5VN 5VN CH4_P
B-7 7 19 19 DGND
DGND DGND DGND
B-6 8 20 20 VSYNC_K
5VN 5VN VSYNC_K
B-5 9 21 21 VSYNC_C
DGND DGND VSYNC_C
B-4 10 24V 22 22
24V2 VSYNC_M VSYNC_M
B-3 11 PGND 23 23
PGND VSYNC_Y VSYNC_Y
B-2 12 24V 24 24
24V2 DGND DGND
B-1 13 PGND 25 25
PGND ECLK_LSU_N DGND(ECLK_LSU_N)
26 26
12CZ-6H 13CZ-6Y ECLK_LSU_P ECLK_LSU(_P)
B24B-CZWHK-V-B-1(LF)(SN) B13B-CZHK-B-1(LF)(SN)(V) 27 27
CZWH-24V-S DGND DGND
28 28
HSYNC_LSU_P HSYNC_LSU(_P)
29 29
CN13 HSYNC_LSU_N DGND(HSYNC_LSU_N)
CN3 30 30
DGND DGND
18 1 NJOBEND_INT_Y
NJOBEND_INT_Y
17 2 NJOBEND_INT_M FH41-30S-0.5SH(05) FH48-30S-0.5SV
NJOBEND_INT_M
16 3 NJOBEND_INT_C
NJOBEND_INT_C
15 4 NJOBEND_INT_K
NJOBEND_INT_K
14 5 3.3VN
3.3VN
13 6 DGND
DGND
12 7 5VN
5VN
11 8 DGND
DGND
10 9 5VN
5VN
9 10 DGND
DGND
8
AK_CS_C2 10CZ-6Y
7
AK_CS_EEP_C2
6
B10B-CZHK-B-1(LF)(SN)(V)
Scan MFPC PWB
AK_CS_K2
5
AK_CS_EEP_K2
4
AK_CS_Y2
3
AK_CS_EEP_Y2
2 CN2
AK_CS_M2
1 1
AK_CS_EEP_M2 AK_CS_C2
2 AK_CS_EEP_C2
B18B-CZHK-B-1(LF)(SN) 18CZ-6Y 3 AK_CS_K2
4 AK_CS_EEP_K2
5 AK_CS_Y2
6 AK_CS_EEP_Y2
7 AK_CS_M2
8 AK_CS_EEP_M2
LD PWB LSU Control PWB
08CZ-6Y B08B-CZHK-B-1(LF)(SN)(V)

CN12 CN5
1 DGND 1 1 DGND
AK_CS_C1 12 AK_CS_C1
2 #P0_K_AK1 61 TH1 2 2 TH1 61 #P0_K_AK1
AK_CS_EEP_C1 11 AK_CS_EEP_C1
3 DGND 62 TH2 3 3 TH2 62 DGND
AK_CS_K1 10 AK_CS_K1
4 +3.3V 63 DGND 4 4 DGND 63 +3.3V
AK_CS_EEP_K1 9 AK_CS_EEP_K1
5 WP_Y 64 NBD 5 5 NBD 64 WP_Y
AK_CS_Y1 8 AK_CS_Y1
6 SCL_Y 65 DGND 6 6 DGND 65 SCL_Y
AK_CS_EEP_Y1 7 AK_CS_EEP_Y1
7 SDA_Y 66 +24V 7 7 +24V 66 SDA_Y
AK_CS_M1 6 AK_CS_M1
8 WP_M 67 +24V 8 8 +24V 67 WP_M
AK_CS_EEP_M1 5 AK_CS_EEP_M1
9 SCL_M 68 +24V 9 9 +24V 68 SCL_M
AK_RXD 4 AK_RXD
10 SDA_M 69 PGND 10 10 PGND 69 SDA_M
AK_TXD 3 AK_TXD
11 WP_C 70 PGND 11 11 PGND 70 WP_C
AK_SCLK 2 AK_SCLK
12 SCL_C 71 PGND 12 12 PGND 71 SCL_C
GND 1 GND
SDA_C 72 NPOLY_START 13 13 NPOLY_START 72 SDA_C
B12B-CZHK-B-1(LF)(SN) 12CZ-6Y 12CZ-6Y B12B-CZHK-B-1(LF)(SN)(V) WP_K 73 NPOLY_LOCK 14 14 NPOLY_LOCK 73 WP_K
SCL_K 74 NPOLY_CK 15 15 NPOLY_CK 74 SCL_K
SDA_K 75 DGND 16 16 DGND 75 SDA_K
DGND 76 FAN_24V 17 17 FAN_24V 76 DGND

MX-6070N ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 – 12

DGND 77 NFANRDY 18 18 NFANRDY 77 DGND
+5V_LD 78 PGND 19 19 PGND 78 +5V_LD
DGND 79 #P2_AK2 20 20 #P2_AK2 79 DGND
CN1 CN4 +5V_LD 80 #P1_AK2 21 21 #P1_AK2 80 +5V_LD
5 1 DGND 81 #P0_AK2 22 22 #P0_AK2 81 DGND
+5VD +5VD
4 2 +5V_LD 82 SDCLK 23 23 SDCLK 82 +5V_LD
GND GND
3 3 DGND 83 P4_C_AK2 24 24 P4_C_AK2 83 DGND
BD BD
2 4 #P0_C_AK1 84 P3_C_AK2 25 25 P3_C_AK2 84 #P0_C_AK1
BD PWB GND GND
1 5 #P2_AK1 85 NINT_C_AK2 26 26 NINT_C_AK2 85 #P2_AK1
TH1 TH1
6 #P1_AK1 86 MSET_C_AK2 27 27 MSET_C_AK2 86 #P1_AK1
05CK-6H-PC or 05KR-6H-PC GND
S5B-PH-K-S 7 #P0_M_AK1 87 P4_C_AK1 28 28 P4_C_AK1 87 #P0_M_AK1
TH2
07CK-6H-PC or 07KR-6H-PC DT_C3+ 88 P3_C_AK1 29 29 P3_C_AK1 88 DT_C3+
S7B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN) DT_C3- 89 NINT_C_AK1 30 30 NINT_C_AK1 89 DT_C3-
DT_C4+ 90 NLDERR_C 31 31 NLDERR_C 90 DT_C4+
DT_C4- 91 MSET_C_AK1 32 32 MSET_C_AK1 91 DT_C4-
CN1 DT_C1+ 92 P4_K_AK2 33 33 P4_K_AK2 92 DT_C1+
3 DT_C1- 93 P3_K_AK2 34 34 P3_K_AK2 93 DT_C1-
NC
2 DT_C2+ 94 NINT_K_AK2 35 35 NINT_K_AK2 94 DT_C2+
GND
1 DT_C2- 95 MSET_K_AK2 36 36 MSET_K_AK2 95 DT_C2-
TH1
96 37 P4_K_AK1 96
LSU Thermistor PWB
S3B-PH-K-S
03CK-6H-PC or 03KR-6H-PC DT_K4+
DT_K4- 97
P4_K_AK1
P3_K_AK1
37
38 38 P3_K_AK1 97
DT_K4+
DT_K4-
DT_K3+ 98 NINT_K_AK1 39 39 NINT_K_AK1 98 DT_K3+
DT_K3- 99 NLDERR_K 40 40 NLDERR_K 99 DT_K3-
DT_K2+ 100 MSET_K_AK1 41 41 MSET_K_AK1 100 DT_K2+
CN1 DT_K2- 101 P4_Y_AK1 42 42 P4_Y_AK1 101 DT_K2-
Board to Board

3 CN1 DT_K1+ 102 P3_Y_AK1 43 43 P3_Y_AK1 102 DT_K1+

NC
2 3 DT_K1- 103 NINT_Y_AK1 44 44 NINT_Y_AK1 103 DT_K1-
GND PGND
1 2 DT_Y1+ 104 MSET_Y_AK1 45 45 MSET_Y_AK1 104 DT_Y1+
LSU Thermistor PWB TH2 NFANRDY
03CK-6H-PC or 03KR-6H-PC 1 DT_Y1- 105 P4_Y_AK2 46 46 P4_Y_AK2 105 DT_Y1-
24V
S3B-PH-K-S DT_Y2+ 106 P3_Y_AK2 47 47 P3_Y_AK2 106 DT_Y2+
S3B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN) DT_Y2- 107 NINT_Y_AK2 48 48 NINT_Y_AK2 107 DT_Y2-
DT_Y3+ 108 NLDERR_Y 49 49 NLDERR_Y 108 DT_Y3+
DT_Y3- 109 MSET_Y_AK2 50 50 MSET_Y_AK2 109 DT_Y3-
DT_Y4+ 110 P4_M_AK2 51 51 P4_M_AK2 110 DT_Y4+
DT_Y4- 111 P3_M_AK2 52 52 P3_M_AK2 111 DT_Y4-
DT_M3+ 112 NINT_M_AK2 53 53 NINT_M_AK2 112 DT_M3+
DT_M3- 113 MSET_M_AK2 54 54 MSET_M_AK2 113 DT_M3-
DT_M4+ 114 P4_M_AK1 55 55 P4_M_AK1 114 DT_M4+
CN3 DT_M4- 115 P3_M_AK1 56 56 P3_M_AK1 115 DT_M4-
1 5 DT_M1+ 116 NINT_M_AK1 57 57 NINT_M_AK1 116 DT_M1+
NPOLY_CK NPOLY_CK
2 4 DT_M1- 117 NLDERR_M 58 58 NLDERR_M 117 DT_M1-
NPOLY_LOCK NPOLY_LOCK
3 3 DT_M2+ 118 MSET_M_AK1 59 59 MSET_M_AK1 118 DT_M2+
NPOLY_START NPOLY_START
4 2 DT_M2- 119 DGND 60 60 DGND 119 DT_M2-
PGND PGND
PGM 5 1 #P0_Y_AK1 120 120 #P0_Y_AK1
24V 24V
292172-5 05XR-6H-P 05CZ-6Y S05B-CZHK-B-1(LF)(SN)
 CN34
GND 50 50 GND
GND 49 49 GND
GND 48 48 GND
GND 47 47 GND
GND 46 46 GND
GND 45 45 GND
GND 44 44 GND
GND 43 43 GND
GND 42 42 GND
C. Scanner

GND 41 41 GND
CN_AFE_SDO 40 40 CN_AFE_SDO
AFE_SDI 39 39 AFE_SDIO
AFE_SCLK 38 38 AFE_SCLK
AFE_CS 37 37 AFE_CS
RES_CCDAD 36 36 RES_CCDAD
GND 35 35 GND
A3.3V 34 34 A3.3V
A3.3V 33 33 A3.3V
A3.3V 32 32 A3.3V
A3.3V 31 31 A3.3V
A3.3V 30 30 A3.3V
A3.3V 29 29 A3.3V
GND 28 28 GND
A5V 27 27 A5V
A5V 26 26 A5V
A5V 25 25 A5V
GND 24 24 GND
A10V 23 23 A10V
A10V 22 22 A10V
GND 21 21 GND
CN_TA_N 20 20 CN_TA_N
CN_TA_P 19 19 CN_TA_P
GND 18 18 GND
CN_TB_N 17 17 CN_TB_N
CN_TB_P 16 16 CN_TB_P
GND 15 15 GND
CN_TC_N 14 14 CN_TC_N
CN_TC_P 13 13 CN_TC_P
GND 12 12 GND
CN_TCLK_N 11 11 CN_TCLK_N
CN_TCLK_P 10 10 CN_TCLK_P
GND 9 9 GND
CN_TD_N 8 8 CN_TD_N
CN_TD_P 7 7 CN_TD_P
GND 6 6 GND
CN_TE_N 5 5 CN_TE_N
CN_TE_P 4 4 CN_TE_P
CCD_SEL2 3 3 CCD_SEL2
CCD_SEL1 2 2 CCD_SEL1
GND 1 1 GND
FH48-50S-0.5SV FH48-50S-0.5SV
MX-xx50/xx60 series
CCD PWB
SCN MFPC PWB
Scanner motor LED DRIVER PWB LED PWB
CN42 6 1 CN2
1 5 2 MIM_XB 1
MIM_XB 3 (NC) CN1 LED_ANODE 1 LED_ANODE
MIM_B 2 4 GND 2 2 GND
3 3 4 MIM_B 1 3
MIM_A 5 MIM_A +24VPD LED_CATHODE/ 3 LED_CATHODE/
MIM_XA 4 2 MIM 2 +24VPD LED_ANODE/ 4 GHR-03V-S
1 6 (NC) 3 5
MIM_XA LAMP_ON/OFF GND
B04B-CZHK-B-1 4 GND LED_CATHODE 6
04CZ-6Y 06CK-6H-PC S6B-PH-K-S 5 GND
GHR-03V-S
5597-05APB7
CN28 Scanner home position sensor LED PWB
MHPS 3 1 MHPS 1 LED_ANODE
GND 2 2 GND 2 GND
5V_MHPS 1 3 +5V 3 LED_CATHODE/
CN43 MHPS
1 03CZ-6Y 03XR-6H-P GHR-03V-S
CN_AU_PNC B03B-CZHK-B-1
2 CN_AU_COPY
3 CN_AU_CA
4 CN_AU_READY
5 CN_AU_AUD
6 5V
7 GND
8 24V LED DRIVER PWB

MX-6070N ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 – 13

9
10
CN_COL CN2
LED PWB
CN_AU_TC CN38 CN1
11 24V IDRV1 1 1 IDRV1
12 CN_AU_NPNC-A 24V 5 1 +24VPD IDRV2 2 2 IDRV2
13 GND 24V 4 2 +24VPD IDRV3 3 3 IDRV3
CL_ON 3 3 LAMP_ON/OFF IDRV4 4 4 IDRV4
PHR-13 2 4 5 5
B13B-PH-K-S GND GND IDRV5 IDRV5
GND 1 5 GND IDRV6 6 6 IDRV6
VOUT 7 7 VIN
5597-05CPB7F 5597-05APB7 PHR-7 PHR-7
S7B-PH-K-S S7B-PH-K-S

Original cover SW
1 OCSW
SCN41 2 GND
OCSW 1 3 5VN+R OCSW
5V_OCSW 2 179228-3
GND 3
24V 4
MX-xx70 series
/SIZE_LED1 5
/SIZE_LED2 6
PHR-6
B6B-PH-K-S ORS-LED PWB
1 +24V
2 CN_NSIZE_LED1
3 CN_NSIZE_LED2
4 GND
SRA-21T-4
CN39 ORS-PD PWB
PDSEL0 1 1 PDSEL0
PDSEL1 2 2 PDSEL1
PDSEL2 3 3 PDSEL2
5V 4 4 5V
PD 5 5 PD
GND 6 6 GND
NC 7 PHR-6
B6B-PH-K-S
B7B-PH-K-S PHR-7
 MC cleaner home position detect K
CCHPD_K 1
GND 2
CCHPD_K 5VN+R 3
03XR-6Y-P

MC cleaner home position detect C

CCHPD_C 1
GND 2 PCU PWB
CCHPD_C 5VN+R 3
03XR-6Y-P

MC cleaner home position detect M

CCHPD_M 1
GND 2
CCHPD_M 5VN+R 3
Paper feed rear sensor
03XR-6Y-P 1 C1 PFPD
2 GND
3 5VN+R
MC cleaner home position detect Y CN23 03XR-6H-P
C1 PFPD
CCHPD_Y 1 A-12 CCHPD_K
GND 2 A-11 GND
3 A-10 BU17P-TZ-S(LF)(SN)
CCHPD_Y 5VN+R 5VN+R Cassette paper out sensor
03XR-6Y-P A-9 1 17
CCHPD_C CN21 C1PFPD
A-8 GND 2 GND 16 1 5VN
MC cleaner detect Y A-7 5VN+R C1 PFPD 15 3 5VN+R 15 2 C1PFD
CCMD_Y 1 A-6 CCHPD_M GND 14 4 NC 14 3 GND
2 A-5 13 5 13
GND
3 A-4
GND 5VN+R
12 6
5VN
12
03XR-6H-P
C1 PFD
CCMD_Y 5VN+R 5VN+R 5VN C1 PFD
03XR-6H-P A-3 11 7 11
CCHPD_Y C1PFD GND Cassette upper limit sensor
A-2 GND GND 10 8 (NC) 10
MC cleaner detect M A-1 5VN+R C1 LUD 9 9 C1 LUD 9 1 C1 LUD
CCMD_M 1 12CZ-6Y GND 8 10 GND 8 2 GND
GND 2 5VN+R 7 11 5VN+R 7 3 5VN+R
3 6 12 6
CCMD_M 5VN+R
03XR-6H-P B-12 CCMD_Y
C1 PED
5 13
C1 PED
5
03XR-6H-P
C1 LUD
GND GND
B-11 GND 5VN+R 4 14 5VN+R 4
MC cleaner detect C B-10 5VN+R DSW_C1 3 15 DSW_C1 3
CCMD_C 1 B-9 CCMD_M GND 2 16 GND 2 Cassette paper existence sensor
GND 2 B-8 GND 5VN+R 1 17 5VN+R 1 1 C1 PED
5VN+R 3 B-7 5VN+R 2 GND
CCMD_C 03XR-6H-P 15CZ-6H 17CZ-6H 17CZ-6H
B-6 CCMD_C B15B-CZHK-B-1(LF)(SN) 3 5VN+R
RC13a RC13b C1 PED
B-5 GND 03XR-6H-P
MC cleaner detect K B-4 5VN+R
D. Paper feed, CSS1, Process, DV

CCMD_K 1 B-3 CCMD_K

GND 2 B-2 GND
CCMD_K 5VN+R 3 B-1 5VN+R Right lower door open/close switch
03XR-6H-P 12CZ-6H 1 DSW_C1
CZWH-24V-S B24B-CZWHK-V-B-1(LF)(SN) 2 GND
3 5VN+R DSW_C1
MC cleaner motor K BU02P-TR-P-H 03XR-6H-P
+ 1
CCM_K_A 2
- 2
CCM_K_B 1
CCM_K 02CK-6H-P
PHNR-02-H Japan : Standard
MC cleaner motor C BU02P-TR-P-H
+ 1
CCM_C_A 2 BU02P-TR-P-H(D)(LF)(SN) Other than Japan : Option CN5
- 2
CCM_C_B 1
CCM_C 02CK-6H-P 2 24V3 1 2 24V3
PHNR-02-H 1 WH_CNT 2 1 WH_CNT
MC cleaner motor M BU02P-TR-P-H
02CK-6H-P PHNR-02-H
WH PWB
+ 1 CN22 PAP-02V-S B02B-PASK-1
CCM_M_A 2 RC72a RC72b
- 16
2 CCM_M_B 1 CCM_K_A
CCM_M 02CK-6H-P 15 CCM_K_B
PHNR-02-H 14 CCM_C_A
MC cleaner motor Y BU02P-TR-P-H 13 CCM_C_B
Cassette existence sensor
+ 1 12 6
CCM_Y_A 2 CCM_M_A C1 SS4
- 11 5
2 CCM_Y_B 1 CCM_M_B C1 SS3
CCM_Y 02CK-6H-P 10 CCM_Y_A 4 C1 SS2
PHNR-02-H 9 CCM_Y_B 3 C1 SS1
8 GND 2 GND
C1 SS
Discharge lamp K 7 DL_K 1 GND
GND 3 6 GND
2 5 06CK-6H-P B6B-PH-K-S
NC DL_C CN20
DL_K 1 4 GND
DL_K 03CK-6H-P 3 A-17
DL_M (NC) CN5
2 GND 24V3 A-16
Discharge lamp C 1 DL_Y WH_CNT A-15 1 NC
GND 3 16CZ-6Y C1 SS4 A-14 2 HL_PR
NC 2 B16B-CZHK-B-1(LF)(SN) C1 SS3 A-13 3 HL_OUT_UM
DL_C 1 C1 SS2 A-12 4 HL_OUT_LM
DL_C 03CK-6H-P C1 SS1 A-11 5 HL_OUT_UW
GND A-10 6
Discharge lamp M HL_OUT_US HL PWB
HL_PR A-9 7 D-GND
GND 3 HLOUT_UM A-8 8 INT5V
NC 2 HLOUT_LM A-7
DL_M 1 HLOUT_UW A-6 08CK-6H-PC B8B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
03CK-6H-P
DL_M HLOUT_US A-5
A-4
Discharge lamp Y GND Lift up motor
INT5V A-3
GND 3 C1 LUM A-2 2 C1 LUM
NC 2 P-GND A-1 1 P-GND
DL_Y 1
DL_Y 03CK-6H-P 17CZ-6Y S2B-PH-K-S
C1 LUM
02CK-6H-P
8-292155-2 292254-2 DSW_F
DSW_F B-17 1 DSW_F(5V) 2 1 DSW_F(5V) 2 1 DSW_F(5V)
Vertical transport clutch DSW_R_OUT B-16 2 DSW_R_OUT 1 2 DSW_R_OUT 1
CPFC1 1 DSW_R_IN B-15 PS-110 DSW_F1

MX-6070N ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 – 14

24V3 2 5VN B-14 02XR-6H-P 02XR-6H-P 02XR-6H-P 179228-2
CPFC1 TNFD B-13 RC62a RC62b
02CZ-6Y BU07P-TZ-S B-12 1
GND DSW_R_OUT
7 DVTYP_K 1 5VN+R B-11
Toner control sensor K 6 DVTYPSEL_K 2 5VN B-10 PS-110 DSW_F2
TSG_K 1 5 TSG_K 3 CN24 PPD2 B-9
2 4 4 A-16 B-8 BU02P-TZ-S(LF)(SN) 8-292155-2
5VN 5VN CPFC1 GND
TCS_K 3 3 TCS_K 5 A-15 24V3 C1 SPD B-7 1 DSW_R_IN 2 1 DSW_R_IN 2 1 DSW_R_IN
TCS_K GND 4 2 GND 6 A-14 DVTYP_K GND B-6 2 5VN 1 2 5VN 1
ZHR-4 1 GND 7 A-13 DVTYPSEL_K 5VN+R B-5 PS-110 DSW_R1
A-12 B-4 02CZ-6H 02CZ-6Y 02XR-6H-P 179228-2
TSG_K PROFM2_LD RC64a RC64b RC75a RC75b
CZHR-07V-Y 07CZ-6H A-11 B-3
5VN GND
IFDK IFDK A-10 B-2 1
TCS_K PROFM2_CNT 5VN
A-9 GND PROFM2_V B-1
BU07P-TZ-S A-8 17CZ-6H PS-110 DSW_R2
GND
7 DVTYP_C 1 A-7 DVTYP_C B34B-CZWHK CZWH-34V-S
Toner control sensor C 6 DVTYPSEL_C 2 A-6 DVTYPSEL_C -V-B-1(LF)(SN) 8-292155-2
DSW_R
TSG_C 1 5 TSG_C 3 A-5 TSG_C
5VN 2 4 5VN 4 A-4 5VN 1 DSW_R_IN 2
TCS_C 3 3 TCS_C 5 A-3 TCS_C 2 5VN 1
TCS_C GND 4 2 GND 6 A-2 GND 02XR-6H-P
ZHR-4 1 7 A-1 RC63a 02XR-6H-P
GND GND RC63b
16CZ-6Y
CZHR-07V-Y 07CZ-6H
IFDC IFDC Waste toner full sensor
BU07P-TZ-S
7 1 B-16 1 TNFD
DVTYP_Y DVTYP_Y 2 GND
Toner control sensor Y 6 DVTYPSEL_Y 2 B-15 DVTYPSEL_Y
5 3 B-14 3 5VN+R
TSG_Y 1 TSG_Y TSG_Y 8-292155-6
TNFD
5VN 2 4 5VN 4 B-13 5VN 1 6 03XR-6H-P
TCS_Y 3 3 TCS_Y 5 B-12 TCS_Y TNFD
2 6 B-11 2 GND 5
TCS_Y GND 4 GND GND 3 4 292254-3 Resist sensor
ZHR-4 1 GND 7 B-10 GND 5VN+R
B-9 4 5VN 3 1 5VN 3 1 5VN
DVTYP_M 5 2 2 2
CZHR-07V-Y 07CZ-6H B-8 DVTYPSEL_M PPD2 PPD2 2 PPD2
IFDY IFDY B-7 6 GND 1 3 GND 1 3 GND
TSG_M PPD2
B-6 5VN 06XR-6H-P 06XR-6H-P
BU07P-TZ-S B-5 03XR-6H-P 8-292112-3 8-292112-3
TCS_M RC11a RC11b
7 DVTYP_M 1 B-4 GND
Toner control sensor M 6 DVTYPSEL_M 2 B-3 GND
Cassette remain sensor
TSG_M 1 5 TSG_M 3 B-2 C1 PUC 1 C1 SPD
5VN 2 4 5VN 4 B-1 24V3 2 GND
TCS_M 3 3 TCS_M 5 16CZ-6H 3 5VN+R C1 SPD
TCS_M GND 4 2 GND 6 CZWH-32V-S B32B-CZWHK-V-B-1(LF)(SN)
ZHR-4 1 7 03XR-6H-P
GND
CZHR-07V-Y 07CZ-6H 8-292155-4 Process FAN2
Paper feed clutch IFDM IFDM 1 PROFM2_LD 4
C1 PUC 1 2 GND 3
24V3 2 3 PROFM2_CNT 2
C1 PUC 4 PROFM2_V 1 PROFM2
02CZ-6H
04XR-6H-P 179228-4
 1次転写ﾎﾟｼﾞｼｮﾝBK BU03P-TZ-S(LF)(SN)
1 3 1
1TUD_K 1TUD_K
1TUD_K 2 2 2
GND GND
3 1 3
5VN+R 5VN+R
VHPSG2A241+-1 03XR-6H-P 03CZ-6Y 03CZ-6H
RC40b RC40a

ﾄﾅｰｶｰﾄﾘｯｼﾞｴｼﾞｪｸﾀｰ位置検知K
1
TCED_K
TCED_K 2 PCU PWB
GND
3
5VN+R BU07P-TZ-S(LF)(SN)
VHPSG2A241+-1 179228-3 7 1
TCED_K
6 2
クラムK GND
5 3
5VN+R
1 4 4
CRM_K_DT CRM_K_DT 292254-3 電源冷却FAN
2 3 5
CRM_K_CK CRM_K_CK 3
CRUM_K 3 2 6 1
5VN 5VN PSFM1_LD 2
4 1 7 2 PSFM
GND GND CN6 GND 1
3
CPWBS2120FCG1 TSHR-04V-K 07CZ-6H PSFM1_V
CZHR-07V-S A-17
IFCK 1TUD_K 03XR-6H-P 179228-3 NFANP0135FCPZ
IFCK A-16
ﾄﾅｰｶｰﾄﾘｯｼﾞｴｼﾞｪｸﾀｰ位置検知C GND
A-15
5VN+R ﾄﾅｰﾓｰﾀｰK
1 A-14
TCED_C TCED_K
TCED_C 2 A-13
GND GND 6
3 A-12 1
5VN+R BU07P-TZ-S(LF)(SN) 5VN+R CN7 5 TNM_K_A
A-11 2
VHPSG2A241+-1 179228-3 CRM_K_DT 4 TNM_K_B
7 1 A-10 A-15 3 TNM_K
TCED_C CRM_K_CK PSFM1_LD 3 24V3
6 2 A-9 A-14 4
クラムC GND 5VN GND 2 24V3
5 3 A-8 A-13 5
5VN+R GND PCU6A PSFM1_V 1 TNM_K_XA
1 4 4 A-7 A-12 6
CRM_C_DT CRM_C_DT TCED_C TNM_K_A TNM_K_XB
2 3 5 A-6 A-11
CRM_C_CK CRM_C_CK GND TNM_K_B B6B-PH-K-S
CRUM_C 3 2 6 A-5 A-10
5VN 5VN 5VN+R 24V3 06CK-6H-PC RMOTS1016FCPZ
4 1 7 A-4 A-9
GND GND CRM_C_DT 24V3 ﾄﾅｰﾓｰﾀｰC
A-3 A-8
CPWBS2120FCG1 TSHR-04V-K 07CZ-6H CRM_C_CK PCU7A TNM_K_XA
CZHR-07V-S A-2 A-7
IFCC 5VN TNM_K_XB 6
A-1 A-6 1
IFCC GND TNM_C_A 5 TNM_C_A
A-5 2
ﾄﾅｰｶｰﾄﾘｯｼﾞｴｼﾞｪｸﾀｰ位置検知Y 17CZ-6Y TNM_C_B 4 TNM_C_B
A-4 3 TNM_C
24V3 3 24V3
1 A-3 4
TCED_Y 24V3 2 24V3
TCED_Y 2 B-17 A-2 5
GND TCED_Y TNM_C_XA 1 TNM_C_XA
3 B-16 A-1 6
5VN+R BU07P-TZ-S(LF)(SN) GND TNM_C_XB TNM_C_XB
B-15
VHPSG2A241+-1 179228-3 5VN+R 15CZ-6Y B6B-PH-K-S
7 1 B-14
TCED_Y CRM_Y_DT 06CK-6H-PC RMOTS1016FCPZ
6 2 B-13
クラムY GND CRM_Y_CK ﾄﾅｰﾓｰﾀｰY
5 3 B-12 B-15
5VN+R 5VN TNM_Y_A
1 4 4 B-11 B-14
CRM_Y_DT CRM_Y_DT GND TNM_Y_B
E. Toner motor, Paper transport drive

2 3 5 B-10 B-13 1 6
CRM_Y_CK CRM_Y_CK TCED_M PCU6B 24V3 5 TNM_Y_A
CRUM_Y 3 2 6 B-9 B-12 2
5VN 5VN GND 24V3 4 TNM_Y_B
4 1 7 B-8 B-11 3
GND GND 5VN+R TNM_Y_XA 3 24V3
B-7 B-10 4 TNM_Y
CPWBS2120FCG1 TSHR-04V-K 07CZ-6H CRM_M_DT TNM_Y_XB 2 24V3
B-6 B-9 5
CZHR-07V-S IFCY CRM_M_CK TNM_M_A 1 TNM_Y_XA
B-5 B-8 6
IFCY 5VN TNM_M_B TNM_Y_XB
B-4 B-7
ﾄﾅｰｶｰﾄﾘｯｼﾞｴｼﾞｪｸﾀｰ位置検知M GND PCU7B 24V3 B6B-PH-K-S
B-3 B-6
1TUD_CL 24V3 06CK-6H-PC RMOTS1016FCPZ
1 B-2 B-5
TCED_M GND TNM_M_XA ﾄﾅｰﾓｰﾀｰM
TCED_M 2 B-1 B-4
GND 5VN+R TNM_M_XB
3 B-3
5VN+R BU07P-TZ-S(LF)(SN) 17CZ-6H B34B-CZWHK-V-B-1(LF)(SN) PSFM2_LD 6
B-2 1
VHPSG2A241+-1 179228-3 CZWH-34V-S GND 5 TNM_M_A
7 1 B-1 2
TCED_M PSFM2_V 4 TNM_M_B
6 2 3 TNM_M
クラムM GND B30B-CZWHK-V-B-1(LF)(SN) 15CZ-6H 3 24V3
5 3 4
5VN+R CZWH-30V-S 2 24V3
1 4 4 5
CRM_M_DT CRM_M_DT 1 TNM_M_XA
2 3 5 6
CRM_M_CK CRM_M_CK TNM_M_XB
CRUM_M 3 2 6
5VN 5VN B6B-PH-K-S
4 1 7
GND GND 06CK-6H-PC RMOTS1016FCPZ
CPWBS2120FCG1 TSHR-04V-K 07CZ-6H
CZHR-07V-S
IFCM
IFCM
BU03P-TZ-S(LF)(SN) 292254-3 電源冷却FAN2
1 3 1 3
PSFM2_LD PSFM2_LD 2
2 2 2 PSFM2
GND GND 1
3 1 3
1次転写ﾎﾟｼﾞｼｮﾝCL BU03P-TZ-S(LF)(SN) PSFM2_V PSFM2_V

1 3 1 03CZ-6H 03CZ-6Y 03XR-6H-P 179228-3 NFANP0135FCPZ

1TUD_CL 1TUD_CL RC83a RC83b
1TUD_CL 2 2 2
GND GND
3 1 3
5VN+R 5VN+R PS前ﾓｰﾀｰ
VHPSG2A241+-1 03XR-6H-P 03CZ-6Y 03CZ-6H
RC41b RC41a 1
24V1(INT)
2
GND
3
PFM_BR
4 PFM
PWM
5
トナー残量検知センサー K 292254-3 CW/CCW
6
5VN
1 3 1 7
5VN 5VN ENC_B
TFSD_K 2 2 2 8
TFSD_K TFSD_K ENC_A
3 1 3
GND GND 08CZ-6Y S08B-CZHK-B-1
LG2A13NL1 179228-3 179228-3 03XR-6H-P RMOTP1065FCPZ
IFTK
トナー残量検知センサー C 292254-3 2次TC離接ｸﾗｯﾁ
1 3 1 1
5VN 5VN 2TURC
TFSD_C 2 2 2 CN25 2 2TURC
TFSD_C TFSD_C 24V3
3 1 3
GND GND A-14
(NC) 02CZ-6Y PCLC-0373FCZZ
A-13
LG2A13NL1 179228-3 179228-3 03XR-6H-P CN5 24V1(INT)
A-12
IFTC A-12 GND 水平搬送ｸﾗｯﾁ
5VN A-11

MX-6070N ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 – 15

トナー残量検知センサー M 292254-3 A-11 PFM_BRAKE 1
TFSD_K A-10 HPFC
1 3 1 A-10 PWM 2 HPFC
5VN 5VN GND A-9 24V3
TFSD_M 2 2 2 A-9 5VN
TFSD_M TFSD_M 5VN A-8
3 1 3 A-8 ENC_B 02CZ-6Y PCLC-0038QSZ1
GND GND TFSD_C PCU25A A-7
A-7 PCU5A ENC_A
GND A-6
LG2A13NL1 179228-3 179228-3 03XR-6H-P A-6 2TURC 手差給紙ｸﾗｯﾁ
5VN A-5
IFTM A-5 24V3 1
TFSD_M A-4 MPUC
トナー残量検知センサー Y 292254-3 A-4 HPFC 2
GND A-3 24V3 MPUC
1 3 1 A-3 24V3
5VN 5VN 5VN A-2
2 2 2 A-2 MPUC 02CZ-6Y PCLC-0039QSZ1
TFSD_Y TFSD_Y TFSD_Y TFSD_Y A-1
3 1 3 A-1 24V3
GND GND GND
14CZ-6Y
LG2A13NL1 179228-3 179228-3 03XR-6H-P 12CZ-6Y
PSﾓｰﾀｰ
IFTY
B-12
DSW_FU B-14 1
B-11 24V1(INT) 24V1(INT)
GND B-13 2
前ﾄﾞｱ上開閉検知 BU03P-TR-P-H(D)(LF)(SN) B-10 GND GND
5VN+R B-12 3
1 3 1 B-9 RRM_BRAKE RRM_D
DSW_FU DSW_FU (NC) B-11 4 RRM
DSW_FU 2 2 2 B-8 PWM PWM
GND GND TNHM_Y B-10 5
3 1 3 B-7 CW/CCW CW/CCW
5VN+R 5VN+R P-GND B-9 6
B-6 PCU5B 5VN 5VN
TNHM_M B-8 7
VHPSG2A241+-1 03XR-6H-P 03CK-6H-PC 03CK-6H-PC B-5 ENC_B ENC_B
P-GND B-7 8
RC59b RC59a B-4 ENC_A ENC_A
TNHM_C B-6
B-3 PCU25B 24V1(INT) 08CZ-6Y S08B-CZHK-B-1
P-GND B-5
B-2 GND RMOTP1065FCPZ
TNHM_K B-4
中間ﾎｯﾊﾟｰﾓｰﾀｰY B-1 CPFM_CK
P-GND B-3
2 1 CPFM_D
TNHM_Y 1 B-2 給紙ﾓｰﾀｰ
2 12CZ-6H B24B-CZWHK-V-B-1(LF)(SN) CW/CCW
TNHM_Y P-GND B-1 BU06P-TZ-S(LF)(SN) 1
CZWH-24V-S CPFM_LD 24V1(INT)
1 6 2
S2B-PH-K-S 24V1(INT) GND
B28B-CZWHK-V-B-1(LF)(SN) 14CZ-6H 2 5 3
QPWBF2169FC24 02CK-6H-PC GND (NC)
CZWH-28V-S 3 4 4
CPFM_CK CPFM_CK CPFM
4 3 5
中間ﾎｯﾊﾟｰﾓｰﾀｰM CPFM_D CPFM_D
5 2 6
2 1 CW/CCW CW/CCW
TNHM_M 1 6 1 7
TNHM_M 2 CPFM_LD CPFM_LD
P-GND
06CZ-6H 06CZ-6H 07XR-6H-P 292132-7
S2B-PH-K-S
RC70a RC70b RMOTP1045FCP1
QPWBF2169FC24 02CK-6H-PC

中間ﾎｯﾊﾟｰﾓｰﾀｰC
2 1
TNHM_C 1
TNHM_C 2 CN4 定着FAN
P-GND
1
S2B-PH-K-S P4 FUFM_V
2 FUFM
QPWBF2169FC24 02CK-6H-PC FUFM_LD
3
GND
中間ﾎｯﾊﾟｰﾓｰﾀｰK 292132-3 179228-3 NFANP0134FCPZ
2 1
TNHM_K 1
TNHM_K 2
P-GND
S2B-PH-K-S
QPWBF2169FC24 02CK-6H-PC
 BU06P-TZ-S
MX-TR19(OPTION) Right delivery sensor
1 POD3 6 1 POD3
2 GND 5 2 GND
3 5VN+R 4 3 5VN+R POD3
4 TFD3 3 03XR-6H-P
5 GND 2
6 1 Right delivery full sensor
5VN+R
1 TFD3
06CZ-6H 06CZ-6Y 2
RC38b GND
3 5VN+R TFD3
Right door PWB 03XR-6H-P

BU05P-TZ-S MX-TR19 Right delivery tray paper existence sensor

1 PRTPD 5 1 PRTPD
2 GND 4 2 GND
3 5VO+R 3 3 5VO+R
CN3 PRTPD
4 ADUGS 2 03XR-6H-P
POD3 19 5 1
18 24V3
GND
17 05CZ-6H 05CZ-6Y 8-292155-2 ADU gate solenoid
5VN+R
16 RC39b 1 2
TFD3 ADUGS
GND 15 2 1
14 24V3 ADUGS
5VN+R
PRTPD 13
02XR-6H-P 179228-2
GND 12
CN27 CN2
5VO+R 11
30 1 MPUS 10 ADU motor upper
/MPUS 2 ADUGS
VCC_MPWS 29 VCC_MPWS 9
3 24V3
F. Right door, Manual paper feed

MPWS 28 MPWS 8 1
4 24V1 24V1
MPLD1 27 MPLD1 7 2
5 GND GND
MPFD 26 MPFD 6 3
25 6 ADUM_H_D PFM_D
2TUD 2TUD PWM 5 4 PWM
24 7 MPED 4 5
MPED CW/CCW CW/CCW
23 8 2TPD 3 6 ADM_H
2TPD 5VN 5VN
22 9 ADUM_L_D 2 7
ADUML_BRAKE ENC_B ENC_B
21 10 ADUM_L_PWM 1 8
ADUML_PWM ENC_A ENC_A
20 11 ADUM_L_ENC_B 19CZ-6Y 08CZ-6Y
ADUML_ENC_B
19 12 ADUM_L_ENC_A S08B-CZHK-B-1
ADUML_ENC_A B19B-CZHK-B-1
18 13 APPD1
APPD1
17 14 DSW_ADU
DSW_ADU
16 15 APPD2 ADU paper exit sensor
APPD2
15 16 LPPD1 1
(NC)LPPD1 APPD2
14 17 PRTPD 2
PRTPD GND
13 18 5VO+R 3
5VO+R 5VN+R APPD2
12 19 POD3 03XR-6H-P
POD3
11 20 TFD3 CN4
TFD3
10 21 ADUGS 9
/ADUGS APPD2
9 22 5VN 8
5VN GND
5VN 8 23 5VN 7 ADU open/close switch
7 24 5VN+R
5VN 5VN DSW_ADU 6 1 DSW_ADU
ADUMH_BRAKE 6 25 5
ADUM_H_D GND 2 GND
ADUMH_PWM 5 26 4
ADUM_H_PWM 5VN+R 3 5VN+R DSW_ADU
ADUMH_CW/CCW 4 27 3
ADUM_H_CW/CCW APPD1 03XR-6H-P
ADUMH_ENC_B 3 28 2
ADUM_H_ENC_B GND
ADUMH_ENC_A 2 29 1
ADUM_H_ENC_A 5VN+R
GND 1 30 ADU paper enter sensor
GND
09CZ-6Y 1
B09B-CZHK-B-1 APPD1
11600S-30 11600S-30A-GFN4 2 GND
3 5VN+R APPD1
03XR-6H-P
PCU PWB
Multi manual paper feed pick up solenoid
CN28 CN1 1 MPFS 1
24V1(INT) 10 1 2 24V3 2
24V1(INT)
24V1(INT) 9 2 02XR-6H-P 179228-2 MPFS
24V1(INT) BU08P-TZ-S
24V1(INT) 8 3 8-292155-2
7 24V1(INT)
GND 4 1 MPFS 8
6 GND
GND 5 2 7 Multi manual paper feed paper enter sensor
GND 24V3

MX-6070N ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 – 16

GND 5 6 3 6
GND MPFD 1 MPFD
GND 4 7 4 5
GND GND 2 GND
GND 3 8 5 4
GND 5VN+R 3 5VN+R MPFD
24V3 2 9 6 3 03XR-6H-P
24V3 MPED
24V3 1 10 7 2
24V3 GND
8 1 Multi manual paper feed paper existence sensor
CN6 5VN+R
00 6208 510 110 000+ 00 6208 510 110 000+ 1 MPED
20 08CZ-6H 08CZ-6Y
MPFS 2 GND
24V3 19 3 5VN+R MPED
MPFD 18
17 03XR-6H-P
GND
5VN+R 16
15 Multi manual paper feed paper width sensor
MPED
GND 14 1 3 VCC_MPWS
13 BU06P-TZ-S
5VN+R 2 2 MPWS
VCC_MPWS 12 1 VCC_MPWS 6 3 1 GND MPWS
MPWS 11 2 MPWS 5 03CK-6H-PC
GND 10 3 GND 4
MPLD1 9 4 MPLD1 3
8 5 2 Multi manual paper feed paper length sensor
GND GND
5VN+R 7 6 5VN+R 1 1 MPLD1
2TUD 6 06CZ-6Y 2 GND
5 06CZ-6H 3
ADU motor lower GND 5VN+R
MPLD1
CN5 5VN+R 4
3 03XR-6H-P
24V1 8 1 2TPD
24V1 2
GND 7 2 GND
GND 1 2nd transfer position sensor
PFM_D 6 3 5VN+R
ADUM_L_D 1
PWM 5 4 20CZ-6Y BU06P-TZ-S 2TUD
PWM B20B-CZHK-B-1 2
CW/CCW 4 5 GND
NC(CW/CCW) 1 6 3 2TUD
ADM_L 5VN 3 6 2TUD 5VN+R
5VN 2 5 03XR-6H-P
ENC_B 2 7 GND
ENC_B 3 4
ENC_A 1 8 5VN+R
ENC_A 4 3
2TPD 2nd transfer position rear side paper sensor
S08B-CZHK-B-1 08CZ-6Y 08CZ-6Y 5 GND 2
B08B-CZHK-B-1 6 1 1
5VN+R 2TPD
2 GND
06CZ-6Y 06CZ-6H 3 2TPD
5VN+R
03XR-6H-P
 PCU PWB

292254-6 ｼﾌﾀｰﾓｰﾀｰ
1 6
NC 5
2
24V3_OSM 4
3
/OSM_A 3
4 OSM
/OSM_B 2
5
/OSM_XA 1
6
BU11P-TZ-S(LF)(SN) /OSM_XB

1 11 06XR-6H-P RMOTS1067FCPZ
24V3_OSM 179228-6
2 10
/OSM_A
3 9
/OSM_B
4 8
/OSM_XA ｼﾌﾀｰﾎｰﾑﾎﾟｼﾞｼｮﾝ検知
5 7
/OSM_XB
6 6 1
SHPOS SHPOS
7 5 2 SHPOS
GND GND
8 4 3
5VN+R 5VN+R
9 3
POD2
G. Paper exit, Main drive

CN30 10 2 03XR-6H-P VHPSG2A241+-1

GND
A-16 11 1
24V3_OSM 5VN+R 排紙検知
A-15
/OSM_A 11CZ-6H 11CZ-6Y
A-14 1
/OSM_B RC5a RC5b POD2
A-13 2 POD2
/OSM_XA GND
A-12 3
/OSM_XB 5VN+R
A-11
SHPOS
A-10 03XR-6H-P VHPSG2A241+-1
GND
A-9
PCU30 5VN+R
A-8
POD2
A-7
GND BU04P-TZ-S(LF)(SN) 排紙FAN2
A-6
5VN+R 4
A-5 1 4 4
POFM2_CNT POFM2_CNT POFM2_LD 3
A-4 2 3 3
GND GND GND 2
A-3 3 2 2 POFM2
POFM2_LD POFM2_LD POFM2_CNT 1
A-2 4 1 1
POFM2_V POFM2_V POFM2_V
A-1
(NC) 04CZ-6H CZHR-04V-Y SMR-04V-N SMP-04V-NC NFANP0108FCPZ
16CZ-6Y RC9a RC9b

B-16
24V2 反転ﾓｰﾀｰ
B-15
GND
B-14
SBM_BRAKE
B-13 1
PWM 24V2
B-12 2
CW/CCW GND
B-11 3
ﾄﾞﾗﾑﾓｰﾀｰC 5VN SBM_BR
B-10 4 SBM
ENC_B PWM
1 B-9 5
24V2 ENC_A CW/CCW
2 B-8 6
GND 24V2 5VN
3 B-7 7
(NC) PCU30 GND ENC_B
DM_C 4 B-6 8
DM_C_CK POM_BRAKE ENC_A
5 B-5
DM_C_D PWM
6 B-4 S08B-CZHK-B-1
CW/CCW CW/CCW
7 B-3 08CZ-6H RMOTP1065FCPZ
DM_C_LD 5VN
B-2
CN9 ENC_B
292132-7 B-1
ENC_A
RMOTP1064FCPZ 07XR-6H-P A-14
離接ｸﾗｯﾁ1 24V2 16CZ-6H
A-13 B32B-CZWHK-V-B-1(LF)(SN)
GND CZWH-32V-S 排紙ﾓｰﾀｰ
1 A-12
1TURC_1 24V2
1TURC_1 2 A-11
24V3 GND
A-10 1
DM_C_CK 24V2
PCLC-0039QSZ1 02CZ-6Y A-9 2
DM_C_D GND
A-8 3
離接ｸﾗｯﾁ2 CW/CCW POM_BR
A-7 4 POM
DM_C_LD PCU9 PWM
1 A-6 5
1TURC_2 (NC) CW/CCW
1TURC_2 2 A-5 6
24V3 (NC) 5VN
A-4 7
1TURC_1 ENC_B
PCLC-0039QSZ1 02CZ-6Y A-3 8
24V3 ENC_A
A-2
C位相検知 1TURC_2
A-1 S08B-CZHK-B-1
24V3
1 08CZ-6H RMOTP1065FCPZ
DHPD_C 14CZ-6Y
DHPD_C 2
GND
3
5VN+R
B-14
DHPD_C
VHPSG2A241+-1 03XR-6H-P B-13
GND
B-12
BK位相検知 5VN+R
B-11
DHPD_K
1 B-10
DHPD_K GND
DHPD_K 2 B-9
GND 5VN+R
3 B-8
5VN+R 24V1(INT) PCU9 BU02P-TZ-S(LF)(SN) 292254-2 2bin排紙切替えｹﾞｰﾄｿﾚﾉｲﾄﾞ
B-7
GND 2
VHPSG2A241+-1 03XR-6H-P B-6 1 2 1
24V1(INT) 24V3 24V2 1
B-5 2 1 2 POGS
ﾄﾞﾗﾑﾓｰﾀｰK GND POGS POGS
B-4
DM_K_CK 02CZ-6Y CZHR-02V-S 179228-2
1 B-3 179228-2 RPLU-0379FCZZ
24V1(INT) DM_K_D RC60a RC60b
2 B-2
GND CW/CCW
3 B-1
(NC) DM_K_LD 上段排紙検知
DM_K 4
DM_K_CK 14CZ-6H CN29
5 B28B-CZWHK-V-B-1(LF)(SN) 1
DM_K_D CZWH-28V-S POD4
6 A-12 2 POD4
CW/CCW (NC) GND

MX-6070N ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 – 17

7 A-11 3
DM_K_LD 24V3 BU09P-TZ-S(LF)(SN) 5VN+R
A-10
292132-7 /POGS
A-9 1 9 03XR-6H-P VHPSG2A241+-1
POD4 POD4
RMOTP1064FCPZ 07XR-6H-P A-8 2 8
GND GND 上段排紙用紙有無検知
A-7 3 7
M位相検知 5VN+R 5VN+R
A-6 4 6 1
PCU29 TED4 TED4 TED4
1 A-5 5 5 2 TED4
DHPD_M GND GND GND
DHPD_M 2 A-4 6 4 3
GND 5VO+R 5VO+R 5VO+R
3 A-3 7 3
5VN+R TFD2 TFD2
A-2 8 2 03XR-6H-P VHPSG2A241+-1
GND GND
VHPSG2A241+-1 03XR-6H-P A-1 9 1
5VN+R 5VN+R 満杯検知
Y位相検知 CN8 12CZ-6Y 09CZ-6H 09CZ-6Y 1
RC7a RC7b TFD2
1 A-12 2 TFD2
DHPD_Y DHPD_M GND
DHPD_Y 2 A-11 B-12 3
GND GND 24V1(INT) 5VN+R
3 A-10 B-11
5VN+R 5VN+R GND
A-9 B-10 03XR-6H-P VHPSG2A241+-1
DHPD_Y FUM_CK
VHPSG2A241+-1 03XR-6H-P A-8 B-9
ﾍﾞﾙﾄﾓｰﾀｰ GND PCU8 FUM_D
A-7 B-8
5VN+R CW/CCW
1 A-6 B-7
24V1(INT) 24V1(INT) PCU29 FUM_LD 定着ﾓｰﾀｰ
2 A-5 B-6
GND GND PRM_A
3 A-4 B-5 1
(NC) BTM_CK PRM_B 24V1(INT)
BTM 4 A-3 B-4 2
BTM_CK BTM_D 24V3 GND
5 A-2 B-3 3
BTM_D CW/CCW 24V3 (NC)
6 A-1 B-2 4 FUM
CW/CCW BTM_LD PRM_XA FUM_CK
7 B-1 5
BTM_LD 12CZ-6Y PRM_XB FUM_D
6
12CZ-6H CW/CCW
292132-7 B24B-CZWHK-V-B-1(LF)(SN) 7
CZWH-24V-S FUM_LD
RMOTP1064FCPZ 07XR-6H-P
07XR-6H-P 292132-7
ﾄﾞﾗﾑﾓｰﾀｰY RMOTP1045FCP1
1 B-12
24V2 24V2
2 B-11
GND GND
3 B-10
(NC) DM_Y_CK 定着圧解ﾓｰﾀｰ
DM_Y 4 B-9
DM_Y_CK DM_Y_D 8-292155-6
5 B-8
DM_Y_D CW/CCW PCU8 6
6 B-7 1 6 1
CW/CCW DM_Y_LD PRM_A 5 PRM_A
7 B-6 2 5 2
DM_Y_LD 24V2 PRM_B 4 PRM_B
B-5 3 4 3 PRM
GND 24V3 3 24V2
292132-7 B-4 4 3 4
DM_M_CK 24V3 2 24V2
RMOTP1064FCPZ 07XR-6H-P B-3 5 2 5
DM_M_D PRM_XA 1 PRM_XA
B-2 6 1 6
ﾄﾞﾗﾑﾓｰﾀｰM CW/CCW PRM_XB PRM_XB
B-1
DM_M_LD 06XR-6H-P 06XR-6H-P 06CK-6H-PC
1 B6B-PH-K-S
24V2 12CZ-6H RC71a RC71b
2 B24B-CZWHK-V-B-1(LF)(SN) RMOTS1066FCPZ
GND CZWH-24V-S
3
(NC)
DM_M 4
DM_M_CK
5
DM_M_D
6
CW/CCW
7
DM_M_LD

292132-7
RMOTP1064FCPZ 07XR-6H-P
 CN102
1
DCCNT1(NRY)
2
DC102 NC
3
DCCNT2(NOFF)

B03B-PASK-1 PAP-03V-S CN1

1 MFP43
NOFF_CNT
2
NRY_CNT
PAP-02V-S B02B-PASK-1(LF)(SN)

CN101
1
D-GND
2
D-GND
3
D-GND
4
5VO CN48
5
H. Power supply

DC101 5VL
6 7
5VL DGND
7 6
5VL DGND
5
VHR-7N 5VO
B7P-VH-B 4
5VL MFP41
3
5VL
2
24VN
1
PGND
VHR-7N B7P-VH(LF)(SN)

CN104
SCN MFPC PWB
DC PWB 1
NC(24V1)
2
24V1
3 PCU PWB
24V2
4
24V3
5
24V3
6
DC104 24V4
7
24V5

B7P-VH-B VHR-7N CN3

B-1
12VN
B-2
5VN
B-3
CN103 CN1 CN2 3.3VN
B-4
3.3VN
1 9 17 B-5
FW 24V4(OP) 12VN GND MFP15B
2 8 16 B-6
P-GND PGND(OP) 5VN GND
3 7 15 B-7
P-GND 24V1(INT) 3.3VN TED4
4 6 14 B-8
P-GND 24V2 3.3VN RY_CNT
5 5 13 B-9
NC(P-GND) PGND GND TXD_PCU_LOG
6 4 12
DC103 P-GND 24V3(12V_PCU) PCU1 GND 09CZ-6H
7 3 11
P-GND DGND TED4_OUT
8 2 10
NC(P-GND) 5VL(5VN,3.3V) RY_CNT
1 9
VHR-8N FW TXD_PCU_LOG
B8P-VH-B 8 A-1
VHR-9N PCU_TXD PCU_TXD
B9P-VH(LF)(SN) 7 A-2
PCU2 PCU_RES PCU_RES
6 A-3
PCU_RXD PCU_RXD
5 A-4
PCU_NPOF PCU_NPOF
4 A-5
PCU_DSR PCU_DSR
3 A-6
PCU_PRTPD PCU_PRTPD
2 A-7
PCU_DTR PCU_DTR MFP15A
1 A-8
+5VO_DUTY +5VO_DUTY
A-9
17CZ-6Y RXD_PCU_LOG
B17B-CZHK-B-1(LF)(SN)
09CZ-6Y B18B-CZWHK-B-1
CZWH-18V-S
SRA-51T-4 SRA-51T-4

GND GND

AC MONITOR PWB
CN104 BU03P-TZ-S(LF)(SN) CN2
3 1 3 1
24V 24V 24V
2 2 2 2
PCU104 V_MON V_MON V_MON HL2
1 3 1 3
GND GND GND

B03B-CZHK-B-1(LF)(SN) 03CZ-6Y 03CZ-6Y 03CZ-6Y 03CZ-6Y B03B-CZHK-B-1(LF)(SN)

RC82a RC82b
CN1 CN1
1 1
N_DC N_IN
2 2
DC1 NC (NC) HL2
3 1 1 3
L_DC ← L_IN L_IN
HL PWB CN4 (14page)
B2P3-VH-B VHR-3N SLP-01V SLR-01VF VHR-3N B2P3-VH (LF)(SN)
RC84a RC84b

CN6
1

MX-6070N ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 – 18

L-HLIN
2
HL6 NC
3
N-HLIN

B2P3-VH-R VHR-3N-R
1 1
WH-N(DESK1)
2 2
FGND → 1段/2段/3段/ﾀﾝﾃﾞﾑDESK （OPTION)
3 3
WH-L(DESK1)
SRA-21T-4
HL PWB CN1 FGND ELR-03V
1 1 RC77a
L_HL LIVE
2
HL1 NC WH PWB
3 PS-250(WH)
N_HL
MSW1
B03P-VL(WH) VLP-03V 1
NEUTRAL CN4
PS-250(WH) CN5 1 1 1 1 1
WH-N(DESK1) WH-N(DESK1) WH-N(DESK1)
MSW2 2 2 2 2 2 WH-CS1
1 NC WH-L(DESK1) WH-L(DESK1)
PCU PWB CN20 (6page or 7page) WH_CNT 3
← 2 WH-L(DESK1) ELR-02VF ELP-02V ELR-02V
24V3 WH6 ELP-02V
B2P3-VH VHR-3N RC76a RC76b RC78a RC78b
B02B-PASK-1 WH5
PAP-02V-S
1
CN2 NEUTRAL

AC PWB 1 PS-250(RD)
NEUTRAL_OUT
2 MSW3
(NC)
3 1 1
AC2 LIVE_OUT LIVE L-WH
CN1 VLP-03V CN2
B03P-VL PS-250(RD) PS-187
1 MSW4 1
LIVE_IN WHSW1
2 WH3 L WH
NC 2
3 AC1 CN3 NC
NEUTRAL_IN 3
L WH-SW
1
LIVE_WH VHR-3N-R
B03P-VL 2 B2P3-VH-R
(NC)
3 1
AC3 NEUTRAL_WH L-WH
SRA-51T-4
G20 B2P3-VH-BK VHR-3N-BK PS-187
JP/EX100
CN1 WHSW2
1
WH-L
2
NC CN3
3
WH-N
1 1 1
CN1 VHR-3N-BK WH-N(SCAN) WH-N(SCAN)
B2P3-VH-BK 2 2 2 WH-SCN
WH1 NC WH-L(SCAN)
1 1 3
LIVE IN LIVE_IN WH-L(SCAN)
2 2 ELR-02V ELP-02V
FGND NC AC1 VHR-3N
3 3 B2P3-VH RC27a RC27b
NEUTRAL IN NEUTRAL_IN WH4
B03P-VL
INLET

SRA-51T-4
EX200 G20
 MC PWB
FPS-187
Spring 1
MC-K
F.G.
I. Fusing
FPS-187
Spring 1 SRA-21T-3
MC-C
1 1 1 1
FPS-187 N-HL(LM) HL-LM L-HL(LM)

Spring 1 HL PWB SLP-01V SLR-01VF SLP-01V SLR-01VF

MC-M
CN2
FPS-187 1 1 1 HL-UM 1 1
1 N-HL(US) 2 2 N-HL(UM) 2 2 L-HL(UW) 2 D1.25-M3(Ni)
TS-L D1.25-M3(Ni)
Spring MC-Y (NC) L-HL(US)
3 3 N-HL(UW) 3 HL-UW 3 3 GND2 GND1
N-HL(UM) N-HL(US) L-HL(UM)
B03P-VL-K VLP-03V-BK YLR-03VF YLP-03V HL-US VLP-03V VLR-03V
TS-M
1 1
2 L-HL(UM) 2 TS-S
CN3 3 L-HL(US/UW/LM) 3
1 4 L-HL(US/UW/LM) 4
N-HL(UW) 2 L-HL(UM)
Jumper wire (NC) 3
N-HL(LM) YLR-04VF YLP-04V
CN1
Spring GB-K 1 B2P3-VH-B VHR-3N 1 1
24V1 2 2 N-HL(UW) 2
Jumper wire 24V1 3 3 N-HL(US) 3
GND 4 CN4 4 N-HL(LM) 4
Spring GB-C /HV_DATA L-HL(UM)
5 1 5 5
/HV_CLK 6 L-HL(US/UW/LM) 2 6 L-HL(US/UW/LM) 6
/HV_LD1 (NC) N-HL(UM)
Process Jumper wire
/HV_LD2
7
L-HL(UM)
3
19R-RWZV-K2GG-P6(LF)(SN) 19P-RWZV-K4GG-P6(LF)(SN)
8
Spring GB-M HV_REM
unit 9 B03P-VL-RD VLP-03V-R
DV_REM 10 1
Jumper wire MC_K_ERR 11 2 WEBEND
MC_CMY_ERR 3 GND
Spring GB-Y 5VN+R
B11B-CZHK-B-1(LF)(SN) 11CZ-6Y
179228-3
AC MONITOR PWB CN1
Thermistor sub2_2
3 3
2 GND
2
Jumper wire 1 TH_SUB2_2
1
TH_SUB2_2_CS TH_US1
Spring DV-K SMP-03V-BC SMR-03V-B
Jumper wire
Spring DV-C 1 9 Thermistor main
2 WEBEND 8 3 3
Jumper wire 3 GND 7 2
GND
2
4 5VN+R 6 1
TH_UM
1
Spring DV-M 5 GND 5 TH_UM_CS TH_UM
6 TH_SUB2_2 4
TH_SUB2_2_CS SMP-03V-BC SMR-03V-B
Jumper wire 7 3
8 GND 2
Spring DV-Y 9 TH_UM 1
PCU PWB TH_UM_CS
09CZ-6Y RCZR-09V-PS Lower thermistor
2 2
GND
1 1
TH_LM TH_LM
1 10 SMP-02V-BC SMR-02V-B
2 NC 9
3 GND 8 Thermistor sub
4 TH_LM 7 2 2
CN3 GND GND
5 6 1 1
TH_US TH_US
A-18 6 5 TH_US2
CN10 WEBEND A-17 7 WEBS 4
GND 24V3 SMP-02V-BC SMR-02V-B
A-15 A-16 8 3
A-14 24V1(INT) 5VN+R A-15 9 POD1 2
A-13 24V1(INT) GND A-14 10 GND 1
Temperature-humidity sensor A-12 GND TH_SUB2_2 A-13 5VN+R 2
/HV_DATA TH_SUB2_2_CS RCZR-10V-PS WEBS
4 A-11 A-12 10CZ-6Y 1
TH_CL /HV_CLK GND 24V3
3 A-10 A-11
GND 2 A-9 /HV_LD1 TH_UM A-10
HUD_CL /HV_LD2 TH_UM_CS SMP-02V-BC
1 A-8 A-9
5VN HV_REM GND
TH/HUD A-7
DV_REM TH_LM
A-8
04CK-6H-P A-6 A-7 Fusing rear sensor
A-5 MC_K_ERR GND A-6 1
A-4 MC_CMY_ERR TH_US A-5 POD1
2
A-3 TH_CL WEBS A-4 GND
3
A-2 GND 24V3 A-3 5VN+R POD1
Cooling fan 8-292155-3 A-1 HUD_CL POD1 A-2 179228-3
1 5VN GND A-1
VFM_LD 15CZ-6Y 5VN+R
2 18CZ-6Y
GND 3
VFM VFM_V B-15
(NC)

MX-6070N ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 – 19

179228-3 03XR-6H-P B-14
B-13 VFM_LD B-18 Process fan 1
B-12 GND (NC) B-17 1 4 1 1
B-11 VFM_V PROFM1_V B-16 2 PROFM1_V 3 2 PROFM1_V 2
B-10 GND PROFM1_CNT B-15 3 PROFM1_CNT 2 3 PROFM1_CNT 3
B-9 1TC_O-ERR GND B-14 4 GND 1 4 GND 4 PROFM1
B-8 1TC_S-ERR PROFM1_LD B-13 PROFM1_LD PROFM1_LD
B-7 2TC_ERR 5VN B-12
PTC_ERR GND SMR-04V-N SMP-04V-NC
B-6 B-11
B-5 HV_REM REGS_R_LED B-10
TC PWB B-4 /TC_LD REGS_R B-9 Resist sensor (Rear)
B-3 /TC_CLK PCS_R B-8
B-2 /TC_DATA 5VN B-7 1
Jumper wire B-1 GND GND B-6 2 5VN
24V1(INT) REGS_F_LED B-5 3 GND
Spring 15CZ-6H REGS_F REGS_R_LED
1TC-K CZWH-30V-S B30B-CZWHK-V-B-1(LF)(SN) PCS_F
B-4 4
REGS_R
B-3 5 REGS_R/PCS_R
Jumper wire HLPCD B-2 PCS_R
GND B-1 05XR-6H-P
Spring 1TC-C 5VN+R
CN1 18CZ-6H
B36B-CZWHK-V-B-1(LF)(SN) CZWH-36V-S
Jumper wire
NC(1TC_O-ERR)
1 Resist sensor (Front)
Spring 2
1TC-M 1TC_ERR 3 1
2TC_ERR 4 5VN
2
Jumper wire PTC_ERR 5 GND
3
HV_REM 6 REGS_F_LED
Spring 4
1TC-Y /TC_LD 7 REGS_F
5 REGS_F/PCS_F
/TC_CLK 8 PCS_F
/TC_DATA 9 05XR-6H-P
GND 10
24V1
10CZ-6Y
B10B-CZHK-B-1(LF)(SN)
TC unit PS-187 Fusing roller pressure release sensor
Spring 1 1
2TC 2 HLPCD
3 GND
PS-187 5VN+R HLPCD
03XR-6H-P
Spring 1
PTC
Jumper wire
Spring VCASE
Jumper wire
F.G.
Spring DHV SRA-21T-3
 DSPF document upper limit sensor
3
5V_SPED1
2
GND
CN40 CN5 CN4 CN1 1
CCN10 SPED1 SPED1
1 1 1 1 03XR-6H-P
GND GND GND GND A-1
2 2 2 2 5V_SPED1
GND GND AFE_SDO AFE_SDO A-2
3 3 3 3 GND
24V 24V AFE_SDIO AFE_SDIO A-3 DSPF document random sensor
4 4 4 4 D_SPED1
24V 24V AFE_SCLK AFE_SCLK
J. DSPF
A-4 3
5 5 5 5 5V_SPRDMD 5V_SPRDMD
24V 24V RES_CCDAD RES_CCDAD A-5 2
6 6 6 6 GND GND
24V 24V CCD_SEL CCD_SEL A-6 1
7 7 7 7 D_RANDOM SPRDMD
12V 12V GND GND
5V
8 8
5V A3.3V
8 8
A3.3V
/D_SPFC
A-7
A-8
03XR-6H-P
SPRDMD
9 9 9 9 +24V
5VO 5VO A3.3V A3.3V A-9
10 10 10 10 (NC)
5VO_DUTY 5V_SPF A3.3V A3.3V DSPF document feed clutch
11 11 11 11 09CZ-6Y
3.3V 3.3V A3.3V A3.3V 2
12 12 12 12 /D_SPFC
3.3V 3.3V A3.3V A3.3V 1
13 13 13 13 +24V
GND GND GND GND 02CZ-6H
14 14 14 14
GND GND A5V
15 15
A5V
SPFC
PHDR-14VS-2 PHDR-14VS-2 A5V A5V
B14B-PHDSS-B B14B-PHDSS-B 16 16
A5V A5V DSPF upper door open/close sensor
17 17
GND GND 3
18 18 5V_SCOV
CN35 CN6 A10V A10V 2
19 19 GND
A10V A10V 1
1 1 20 20 CCN10 SCOV
NCTS_SCN NRTS_DSPF GND GND
GND
2 2
GND TA_N
21 21
TA_N B-1
03XR-6H-P
SCOV
3 3 22 22 5V_SCOV
NRTS_SCN NCTS_DSPF TA_P TA_P B-2
4 4 23 23 GND
DSDATA_3P DSDATA_3P GND GND B-3 DSPF document feed tray upper limit sensor
5 5 24 24 D_SCOV
RXD_SCN TXD_DSPF TB_N TB_N B-4 3
6 6 25 25 5V_STUD 5V_STUD
DSDATA_3N DSDATA_3N TB_P TB_P B-5 2
7 7 26 26 GND GND
TXD_SCN RXD_DSPF GND GND B-6 1
8 8 27 27 D_STUD STUD
GND GND TC_N TC_N
GND
9 9
GND TC_P
28 28
TC_P
5V_SPPD1
B-7
B-8
03XR-6H-P
STUD
10 10 29 29 GND
DSCLK_P DSCLK_P GND GND B-9
11 11 30 30 D_SPPD1
DSPF_INT DSPF_INT TCLK_N TCLK_N DSPF document pass sensor 1
12 12 31 31 09CZ-6H
DSCLK_N DSCLK_N TCLK_P TCLK_P 3
13 13 32 32 B18B-CZWHK-B-1 CZWH-18V-S 5V_SPPD1
GND GND GND GND 2
14 14 33 33 GND
GND GND TD_N TD_N 1
15 15 34 34 SPPD1
RES RES TD_P TD_P
DSDATA_2P
16 16
DSDATA_2P GND
35 35
GND
03XR-6H-P
SPPD1
17 17 36 36
DSPFUP DSPFUP TE_N TE_N
18 18 37 37
DSDATA_2N DSDATA_2N TE_P TE_P
19 19 38 38
TXD_DSPF_LOG D_CPU_TXD GND GND
20 20 39 39
GND GND AFE_CS AFE_CS
21 21 40 40
SPED SPED GND GND 292254-3 DSPF document pass sensor 2
22 22
DSDATA_1P DSDATA_1P
23 23 FH48-40S-0.5SV FH48-40S-0.5SV 3 1 3
GND NLVDS_STBY GND GND
24 24 2 2 2
DSDATA_1N DSDATA_1N SPPD2 SPPD2
25 25 1 3 1
NC/(RXD_DSPF_LOG) D_CPU_RXD 5V_SPPD2 5V_SPPD2 SPPD2
26 26 03XR-6H-P
GND GND CN1001 DSPF cooling fan motor
27 27 03XR-6H-P 173977-3
NPOF NPOF
28 28 1
DSDATA_0P
29 29
DSDATA_0P SPFFAN_+V
2
DSPF CCD PWB DSPF document pass sensor 3
GND GND SPFFAN_GND CN1
30 30 3 3
DSDATA_0N DSDATA_0N SPFFAN_SIG SPFFAN 5V_SPPD3
A-1 2
PHDR-30VS-1 PHDR-30VS-1 292132-3 179227-1 GND GND
B30B-PHDSS-B B30B-PHDSS-B A-2 1
SPPD2 SPPD3
A-3
5V_SPPD2
A-4
03XR-6H-P
SPPD3
5V_SPPD3
A-5
SCN MFPC PWB GND
SAA-21T-3.5L SRA-21T-4 A-6 DSPF document pass sensor 4
SPPD3
A-7 3
5V_SPPD4 5V_SPPD4
A-8 2
DSPF document feed tray lower limit sensor CCN13 GND GND
A-9 1
SPPD4 SPPD4
3 A-1 A-10
5V_STLD
2 A-2
5V_STLD 5V_SPPD5
A-11
03XR-6H-P
SPPD4
GND GND GND
1 A-3 A-12
STLD STLD D_STLD SPPD5
03XR-6H-P A-4 A-13
5V_SPF 5V_SLCOV
A-5 A-14
GND GND BU03P-TR-P-H DSPF document pass sensor 5
A-6 A-15
DSPF document empty detector D_SPED2 SLCOV
A-7 3 1 3
(NC) 15CZ-6Y 5V_SPPD5 5V_SPPD5
3 A-8 2 2 2
5V_SPF (NC) GND GND
2 08CZ-6Y 1 3 1
GND SPPD5 SPPD5 SPPD5
1 03XR-6H-P
SPED2 SPED2
03XR-6H-P 03CK-6H-PC 03KR-6H-PC

DSPF lower door open/close sensor

2
Stamp solenoid OPTION 292254-4 CCN13 GND
1
ROCD
1 4 B-1 02XR-6H-P SLCOV
+24V +24V
2 3 B-2
/D_STMPS /D_STMPS
3 2 B-3 DSPF open/close sensor
D_STSET D_STSET
STMPS 4 1 B-4 3
GND GND 5V_SOCD
B-5 2
5V_SPOD GND
179228-4 04XR-6H-P B-6 1
GND SOCD SOCD
IF00a IF00b B-7 03XR-6H-P
D_SPOD
B-8 DSPF Control PWB
(NC)
DSPF document exit detector
3 08CZ-6H DSPF transport roller clutch
5V_SPOD B16B-CZWHK-B-1
2 2
GND /D_STRC
1 1
SPOD D_SPOD +24V
03XR-6H-P B-1 02CZ-6H STRC
5V_SOCD

MX-6070N ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 – 20

B-2
GND
B-3
SOCD
B-4 DSPF document exit motor
/D_STRC
B-5
+24V
B-6 7
SPUFM_LD SPUFM_LD
B-7 6
SPUFM_CW SPUFM_CW
B-8 5
SPUFM_BRAKE SPUFM_BRAKE
SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3 B-9 4
SPUFM_CLK SPUFM_CLK
B-10 3
PGND (NC) SPUFM
B-11 2
+24V PGND
DSPF lift-up motor B-12 1
CCN8 /D_STRRC +24V
B-13 07XR-6H-P
+24V
1 B-14 292132-7
/D_LUMBOUT /D_LUMBOUT /D_SRRC
2 B-15
/D_LUMAOUT /D_LUMAOUT +24V
3
D_LUMBOUT D_LUMBOUT 15CZ-6H
4 DSPF No.1 registration roller clutch
SLUM D_LUMAOUT D_LUMAOUT B30B-CZWHK-V-B-1 CZWH-30V-S
5 2
+24V +24V /D_STRRC
PHR-5 1
+24V
B5B-PH-K-S 02CZ-6H STRRC
DSPF No.2 registration roller clutch
DSPF document exit motor 2
/D_SRRC
CCN9 1
+24V
1 1 02CZ-6H SRRC
/D_SPUMBOUT /D_SPOMBOUT
2 2
/D_SPUMAOUT /D_SPOMAOUT
3 3
D_SPUMBOUT D_SPOMBOUT
SPOM 4 4
D_SPUMAOUT D_SPOMAOUT
PHR-4 PHR-4 RSPF document length sensor(short)
B4B-PH-K-S
3
5V_SPLS1
2
GND
1
CCN12 D_SPLS1 SPLS1
03XR-6H-P
1
5V_SPLS1
2
CN1 CN7 GND BU03P-TR-P-H DSPF document width sensor
3
D_SPLS1
1 7 7 4 3 1 3
DRV6 DRV6 GND GND GND
2 6 6 5 2 2 2
DRV5 DRV5 D_SPWS D_SPWS D_SPWS
3 5 5 6 1 3 1
DRV4 DRV4 +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V SPWS
4 4 4 7
DRV3 DRV3 5V_SPLS2
LED PWB 5 3 3 8 03CK-6H-PC PHNR-03-H
DRV2 DRV2 GND
6 2 2 9
DRV1 DRV1 D_SPLS2
7 1 1
LED_POWER LED_POWER 09CZ-6Y RSPF document length sensor(long)
07CK-6H-PC 07CZ-6H B09B-CZHK-B-1(LF)(SN)
S7B-PH-K-S 3
B07B-CZHK-B-1 5V_SPLS2
2
GND
1
D_SPLS2 SPLS2
03XR-6H-P
 Paper exit roller pressure control solenoid
1 1
+24VPD SPRS
2 2
SPRS/ SPRS
SMP-02V-NC SMR-02V-N
SCN MFPC PWB RSPF Driver PWB Registration roller clutch
K. RSPF
1
CN36 CN1 CN6 2
1 5 1 CZHR-02V-S SRRC
SPPD1 SPPD1 24V
2 7 2
SPPD2 SPPD2 /SPRS
3 17 3
SPFM_CLK SPFM_CLK 24V RSPF paper feed motor
4 25 4
SPFM_M0 SPFM_M0 /SRRC
5 27 5 4
(NC) SPFM_M1 SPUM OUT_A SPUM OUT_A
6 19 6 2
SPFM_M1 SPFM_ENB SPUM OUT_/A SPUM OUT_/A
7 21 7 3
SPFM_ENB SPFM_CWCCW SPUM OUT_/B SPUM OUT_/B
8 26 8 5
SPFM_CWCCW SPUM_M0 SPUM OUT_B SPUM OUT_B SPUM
9 20 9 PHR-6
SPUM_M0 SPUM_ENB SPFM OUT_A
10 18 10
SPUM_ENB SPUM_CLK SPFM OUT_/A
11 22 11
SPUM_CLK SPUM_CWCCW SPFM OUT_/B
12 28 12
SPUM_CWCCW SPRS SPFM OUT_B RSPF transport motor
13 30 PHR-12
SPRS STMPS
14 29 4
STMPS SRRC SPFM OUT_A
15 16 2
SRRC SPWS SPFM OUT_/A
16 6 B12B-PH-K-S 3
(SRVC) SEL_A SPFM OUT_/B
17 8 5 SPFM
SPWS SEL_B SPFM OUT_B
18 10 PHR-6
SEL_A SEL_C
19 12
SEL_B SEL_OUT
20 24
SEL_C SPUM_CNT
21 23
SEL_OUT SPFM_CNT CN4 BU06P-TZ-S(LF)(SN) Document transport sensor 3
22 9
SPUM_CNT SPPD3
23 11 6 1 6 1
SPFM_CNT SPPD4 SPPD3 SPPD3 SPPD3
24 4 5 2 5 2
SPPD3 5VO_DUTY GND GND GND
25 2 4 3 4 3
SPPD4 GND 5V_SPPD3 5V_SPPD3 5V_SPPD3 SPPD3
26 14 3 4 3 03XR-6H-P
(RSPF_SEL) SPED SOCD SOCD
27 1 2 5 2
GND GND GND GND
28 33 1 6 1
SPED GND 5V_SOCD 5V_SOCD RSPF open/close sensor
31 06CZ-6Y 06CZ-6H 06CZ-6H
PHDR-28VS-1 24V GND1 GND1
32 1
24V SOCD
15 2
5V GND
13 B6B-CZHK-B-1 SRA-21T-4 3
B28B-PHDSS-B 5VO SRA-21T-4 5V_SOCD SOCD
3 03XR-6H-P
3.3V
34
GND
CN40 PHDR-34VS-1
1
GND
2 B34B-PHDSS-B GND1 GND1
GND
3
24V
4
24V SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4
5
24V
6 RSPF cover open/close sensor
24V
7 1
12V SCOV
8 2
5V GND
9 3
5VO 5V_SOCV SCOV
10 03XR-6H-P
5VO_DUTY
11
3.3V CN3
12
3.3V
13 12 Document sensor
GND SCOV
14 11 1
GND GND SPED
PHDR-14VS-2 10 2
GND1 5V_SOCV GND2
GND1 9 3
B14B-PHDSS-B SPED +5V SPED SPED
8 03XR-6H-P
SRA-21T-3 SAA-21T-3.5L GND
7
5VO_SPED
6
SPPD1 Document transport sensor 1
5
GND
4 1
5V_SPPD1 SPPD1
3 2
SPPD2 GND
2 3
GND 5V_SPPD1 SPPD1
1 03XR-6H-P
5V_SPPD2
12CZ-6Y
Document transport sensor 2
B12B-CZHK-B-1 1
SPPD2
2
GND
3
5V_SPPD2 SPPD2
03XR-6H-P
GND1 GND1

SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4

MX-6070N ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 – 21

GND1 GND1

SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4 GND1 GND1

CN5 SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4 Document transport sensor 4

7 1
SPPD4 SPPD4
6 2
GND GND
5 3
5V_SPPD4 5V_SPPD4 SPPD4
4 03XR-6H-P
GND
3
STMPU GND1
2 GND1
/STMPS 292254-4
1
24V_STMPS
07CZ-6Y 1 4 SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4
GND Stamp solenoid
2 3
STMPU
3 2
/STMPS
B7B-CZHK-B-1 4 1
24V_STMPS
04XR-6H-P 179228-4 STMPS
Paper size sensor 1
1
SPLS1
2
GND
3
5V_SPLS1 SPLS1
03XR-6H-P
CN2
9
SPLS1
8
GND
7 Paper size sensor 2
5V_SPLS1
6 1
SPLS2 SPLS2
5 2
GND GND
4 3
5V_SPLS2 5V_SPLS2 SPLS2
3 03XR-6H-P
GND
2
SPWS
1
3.3V Document size sensor
09CZ-6Y
1
GND
2
SPWS
B9B-CZHK-B-1 3
3.3V SPWS
03CZ-6Y
 1
1 L. Option

PCU PWB SCN MFPC PWB

: ‘16/Sep.

CN16
10 CN13
GND(OP) CN18
9
RES_FIN 1
8 12 GND
24V4(OP) (NC) 2
7 11 +3.3V_F
DSR_FIN /TRC_DSK 3
6 10 +3.3V_F
GND GND(OP) 4
5 9 △1 FAXD_TXD_N
DTR_FIN RES_DSK 5
4 8 NCNCT_FAX
5VN PCU16 24V4(OP) 6
3 7 2 段/3 段/ ﾀﾝﾃﾞﾑDESK FAXD_TXD_P
RXD_FIN PCU18 DSR_DSK 7
2 6 +5V_(OFF)
FINISHER /TRC_FIN(NC) GND 8
1 5 FAXCS_TXD_P
TXD_FIN DTR_DSK 9
4 NRES_FAX
GND 10
B10B-PUDSS-1(LF)(SN) 3 FAXCS_TXD_N
RXD_DSK 11
2 GND
CN31 5VN 12
1 FAXD_RXD_N
PCU31 TXD_DSK 13
1 NFAX_WUP
24V4 PUDP-12V-S 14
2 B12B-PUDSS-1(LF)(SN) △1 FAXD_RXD_P
PGND CN11 15
5V_(OFF) FAX PWB
1 16
B2P-VH DGND FAXCS_RXD_P
12 17
REUS_PCIE1_RX0P GND △1
13 18
REUS_PCIE1_RX0N FAXCS_RXD_N
21 19 海外：1 回線
PLD_GPO_ACRERST GND
22 20
PLD_GPO_ACREPCIERST NFAXD_RTS 国内：2 回線
25 21
5VLS FLVPP
26 22
5VLS MFP13 NFAXD_CTS
△1 CN17 27 23
5VLS +5V_A
28 24
40 5VLS NFAXCS_RTS
RES_LCC △1 29 25
39 5VLS +24V
(NC) 30 26
38 5VLS NFAXCS_CTS
GND 42 ACRE 27
37 REUS_PCIE1_TX0N +3.3V_F
/TRC_LCC ACRE PWB 43 28
36 REUS_PCIE1_TX0P +3.3V_F
DSR_LCC 48 29
35 ACRE_REFCLKP GND
GND(OP) 49 30
34 ACRE_REFCLKN PGND
DTR_LCC 51
33 RB_GPI_ACREOPT_INSERT
24V4(OP) 53 BM30B-SHLDS-G-TFT
32 R_3R3V_ECO
RXD_LCC 55
31 DGND
GND

Board to Board
56 △1
30 DGND CN12
TXD_LCC 57
29 DGND
5VN 58 1
28 DGND GND
C2 SSSET_M 59 2
27 DGND +3.3V_F
5VN 60 3
26 DGND +3.3V_F
C2 SSSET_D 4
25 FAXD_TXD_N
5VN+R 9828S-60Y909 5
24 NCNCT_FAX
C2 SPD 6
23 FAXD_TXD_P
/DSW_C2 7
22 +5V_(OFF)
C2 SS4 2CS/LCC 8
21 FAXCS_TXD_P
5VN+R 9
20 NRES_FAX
C2 SS3 10
19 FAXCS_TXD_N
5VN+R 11
18 GND
P15 C2 SS2 12
17 FAXD_RXD_N
5VN+R 13
1 16 NFAX_WUP
GND C2 SS1 14
2 15 FAXD_RXD_P
△1 GND 5VN+R 15
3 14 5V_(OFF)
12V GND 16
4 13 FAXCS_RXD_P FAX PWB
24V4(OP) PCU17 C2 PFPD 17
5 12 GND
PDCF-V C2 LUM 18
6 11 FAXCS_RXD_N
5V C2 PFD 19 △1
7 10 GND
PDCF-VL GND 20
8 9 NFAXD_RTS 国内：3 回線
MODE0 C2 PED 21
9 8 FLVPP
FAN_LD 24V3 22
10 7 NFAXD_CTS
MODE1 C2 LUD 23
11 6 MFP14 +5V_A
ｲﾝﾅ-UN PPD1 /CPFC2 24
12 5 △1 NFAXCS_RTS
CW/CCW GND CN24 25
13 4 +24V
PPD2 24V3 1 26
14 3 LPC_CLK1_TPM NFAXCS_CTS
CLK 24V3 2 27
15 2 GND +3.3V_F
DSW1 /C2 PUC 3 28
16 1 LPC_FRAME_N +3.3V_F
ENABLE /C2 PUS 4 29
17 BT_GPI_TPM_SEL GND
DSW2 PUDP-40V-S 5 30
18 PMC_PLTRST_N PGND
VREF-SEL B40B-PUDSS-1(LF)(SN) 6
19 BP_V3P3A_S3
DCLHP 7 BM30B-SHLDS-G-TFT

MX-6070N ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 – 22

20 LPC_LAD3
DCLSET 8
PHDR-20VS-2
△1 LPC_LAD2
9
B20B-PUDSS-1(LF)(SN) B_3R3V_ECO
10 LPC
LPC_LAD1
TPM PWB 11
LPC_LAD0
12
GND
13
LPC_CLKRUN_N
14
PMC_SUS_STAT
CN19 15
BP_V1P8S_ECO
16
16 BP_V1P8A_S3
/CV_SIZE3
Board to Board

17
15 GND
/CV_SIZE2 18
14 LPC_SERIRQ_TPM_18
/CV_SIZE1 19
13 UART_TXD_DEBUG
/CV_SIZE0 20
12 UART_RXD_DEBUG
5VN
11
/CV_DUPLEX HIF3FC-20PA-2.54DSA(71)
10
/CV_COLOR0
9
/CV_STAPLE COIN VENDER
8
/CV_COLOR1
7
PCU19 /CV_CLCOPY
6
/CV_CA
5
/CV_START
4
/CV_COUNT
3
/CV_COPY
2
P-GND
1
24V3

B16B-PNDZS-1(LF)(SN)
MX-6070N
[13] OTHERS Service Manual

1. TOOL LIST
Name PARTS CODE NOTE
Y toner powder CKOG-0345DS51 Primary transfer belt
Conductive grease (FLOIL GE-676) UKOG-0012QSZZ For shaft
Grease (FLOIL GP-501MR) UKOG-0013QSZZ Paper feed roller shaft
Grease (MOLYKOTE X5-6020) UKOG-0158FCZZ Scanner rail
Gray test chart UKOG-0162FCZZ
Grease (JFE552) UKOG-0235FCZZ
Grease (HANARL FL-955R) UKOG-0299FCZZ
Grease (FLOIL G-313S) UKOG-0307FCZZ
Stearic acid powder UKOG-0312FCZZ OPC drum
Color copy test chart UKOG-0326FCZZ / UKOG-0326FC11
Shading adjustment sheet UKOG-0333FCZZ DSPF
Scanner adjustment chart UKOG-0356FCZZ

2. VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING

A. HDD / mSATA SSD memory contents No. File system Stored data
Print share stored data
(1) HDD data contents
S-8 Universal Print share file management information
(database)
No. File system Stored data
S-9 Universal Work area for OCR
L-1 Not available ICU firmware
Work area for application (user file used in USB
I-1 Image data Image data (ERDH + document filing) S-10 Universal
direct print)
I-2 Image data Image data (temporary storage)
S-11 Universal eOSA application file
I-3 Image data Image data (user watermark / stamp)
S-12 Universal User file saved in the SMB server
I-4 Image data FAX / internet FAX receive images
Address book, account information
L-2 Not available System storage data S-13 Universal User data of set value etc which must not be
S-1 Universal System storage data (for backup) erased when installing the DSK
Download font
User profile (2) mSATA SSD data contents
S-2 Universal User macro
Key operation storage data No. File system Stored data
Database system file ICU firmware
S-3 Universal System log L-101 Universal Log data
Document filing (database) Snapshot
S-4 Universal Job log (database) Font
Job log completion list Web help
S-101 Universal
Address book (database) Spdl
Account management information (database) Option font ROM
Paper property information (database) e-manual data
S-5 Universal Billing account information (database) S-102 Universal Watermark data
Indivisual setting information for direct web OCR dictionary data
browsing S-103 Universal Backup data
Cookie file for OSA application S-104 Universal System storage data
S-6 Universal Database file L-101 Image data FAX / internet FAX receive images (backup)
S-7 Universal Spool area for printer L-102 Not available swap area

3. Necessary steps when replacing the PWB, HDD and the mSATA SSD
A. SCN MFP PWB replacement procedure (work flow)

Registered user information will not be recovered if the SCN MFP PWB is affected by U2-05 trouble. (*1)
1) Attach the EEPROM, mSATA SSD etc. of the SCN MFP PWB on the service parts SCN MFP PWB and install it to the main unit.

Ground your body with grounding band during the work.

2) When U2 trouble occurs, use SIM16 to cancel it.
3) Set as follows after restarting the main unit.
At this timing, F6-21 may occur. Whether it may occur or not, go to execute procedure 1.
(1) Set the appropriate country code by Sim66-02 (clear the software switches related to FAX).

Make sure to execute even if the fax option is not installed on the machine.

MX-6070N OTHERS 13 – 1
B. Procedures necessary for HDD replacement
Note for HDD replacement
• Data of the following list are saved in the HDD of the complex machine. If the HDD operates normally and data backup is possible before replace-
ment, perform data backup and then replace the HDD.
• If the HDD does not operate normally, data cannot be backed up.
• The HDD replacement procedures with a broken HDD differs from that with a normal HDD.
Contents of this chapter
• HDD storage data and backup
• Replacement procedures when HDD storage data can be backed up
• Replacement procedures when HDD storage data cannot be backed up due to breakdown of HDD
(1) HDD storage data and backup
Some HDD storage data can be backed up, and some other data cannot. Some HDD storage data can be reinstalled, and some other storage data
cannot.
If the HDD operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the HDD referring to the HDD
storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the HDD.
a. HDD storage data list

Before installation After installation Enable/ Enable/

Data reinstall Reinstall
No. Data kind (When shipping (After use by Disable of Backup means Disable of
procedures operator
from the factory) users) data backup data reinstall
1 Address book Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service or
Device cloning / Device cloning / User
Storage backup Storage backup
2 Image send series Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service or
registration data (Sender’s Device cloning / Device cloning / User
information, meta data, etc.) Storage backup Storage backup
3 User authentication Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 Service
Account management Device cloning /
Storage backup
4 Japanese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
(Learning)
5 Chinese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
(Learning)
6 JOB LOG Not available Available Enable Perform with Disable —
WEB PAGE.
7 JOB completion list Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
8 New N/A (FSS) information Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
9 User font (Added) Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with Service or
WEB PAGE. User
10 User macro Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with
WEB PAGE.
11 Document filing Not available Available Enable Perform with Enable Perform with
WEB PAGE. WEB PAGE.
12 Some of system setting data Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service or
Device cloning / Device cloning / User
Storage backup Storage backup
13 User color profile Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with Service or
WEB PAGE. User
14 Cookie file for OSA Not available Available Disable Disable Service
application
15 eOSA application file Not available Installation of Disable Enable Reinstallation of Service
application application
16 User file saved in the SMB Not available Available Disable Disable Service
server (NAS)
17 paper property information Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service or
Device cloning Device cloning User
18 Billing account information Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service or
Device cloning / Device cloning / User
Storage backup Storage backup
19 Print share stored data Not available Available Disable Not available Disable — —

MX-6070N OTHERS 13 – 2
(2) Replacement procedures when HDD data can be (3) Replacement procedures when the HDD storage data
backed up cannot be backed up due to breakdown
a. Work contents and procedures a. Display when HDD breakdown
When a trouble occurs in the HDD, the error code display of E7-03 is
When a new HDD
popped up.
(blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD
Procedures used, or when a HDD which is (used in the same In this case, the main power must be turned OFF and the HDD must
normal but a program error model) is used * be replaced.
occurs in it is used.
b. Work contents and procedures
Step 1 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement.
(Servicing) When a new HDD
Use SIM56-2 or the device cloning, or the storage backup (blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD
function to backup the data. (Back up the data to the USB Procedures used, or when a HDD which is (used in the same
memory.) normal but a program error model) is used *
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 1, 2, 3 occurs in it is used.
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User
Step 1 Install a HDD to the machine, Install a HDD to the
authentication data))
and boot the complex machine. machine, and boot the
Step 2 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement. (User or  Formatting is automatically complex machine.
servicing) performed.
Back up the data to PC with Web page.
Step 2 The trouble code, U2-05,
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 6, 11 (JOB
is displayed.  Cancel
LOG data, Document filing data))
with SIM16.
Step 3 When there are some FAX or Internet Fax data, use SIM66-62
Step 3 Since a blank HDD is Use Sim62-1 to format the
to backup the image data from the mSATA SSD to the USB
automatically formatted, there is HDD.
memory. (The backup image data are of PDF file type, and
no need to perform formatting
cannot be restored to the machine. The backup data are given
procedure with SIM.
to the user.)
Step 4 When there are some FAX or Internet Fax data, use SIM66-62
Step 4 Replace the HDD.
to backup the image data from the mSATA SSD to the USB
Step 5 Boot the complex machine. Boot the complex memory. (The backup image data are of PDF file type, and
 Formatting is automatically machine. cannot be restored to the machine. The backup data are given
performed. to the user.)
Step 6 The trouble code, U2-05, Step 5 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The memory
is displayed.  Cancel is cleared in order to keep compliance between the HDD data
with SIM16. and the image related memory and to prevent malfunctions.
Step 7 Since a blank HDD is Use SIM62-1 to format the (The memory must be cleared not only in the FAX model but
automatically formatted, there is HDD. in the scanner and the Internet Fax models.)
no need to perform formatting
procedure with SIM. With the above procedures, the HDD is reset to the state of factory
Step 8 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The memory shipping.
is cleared in order to keep compliance between the HDD data
and the image related memory and to prevent malfunctions.
(The memory must be cleared not only in the FAX model but in
the scanner and the Internet Fax models.)
Step 11 Import the data backed up in Step 1.
Use SIM56-2, or the device cloning, or the storage backup to
import.
(Import enable data: HDD storage data list No. 1, 2, 3
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User
authentication data))
Step 12 Import the data backed up with the Web page function in Step
2.
Import enable data: Document filing data, User font, Use
macro
(The JOB LOG data can be backed up but cannot be
imported.)

MX-6070N OTHERS 13 – 3
C. Procedures necessary for mSATA SSD replacement
(1) mSATA SSD data and backup
Some mSATA SSD storage data can be backed up, and some other cannot. Some mSATA SSD storage data can be reinstalled, and some other can-
not.
If the mSATA SSD operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the mSATA SSD refer-
ring to the storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the mSATA SSD.

(2) mSATA SSD storage data list

Before installation After installation Enable/ Enable/

Data reinstall Reinstall
No. Data kind (When shipping (After use by Disable of Backup means Disable of
procedures operator
from the factory) users) data backup data reinstall
1 ICU firmware/ Available Available Disable --- Enable SIM49-01 Service
Snapshot
2 font Available Available Disable --- Enable SIM49-01 Service
web help
spdl
3 Option FontROM Available Available Disable --- Enable SIM49-01 Service
4 e-Manual Available Available Disable --- Enable SIM49-03 Service
5 Watermark Available Available Disable --- Enable SIM49-05 Service
6 OCR dictionary data Available Available Disable --- Enable SIM49-06 Service
7 Backup data Not available Available Disable --- Disable --- ---
8 System setting value data file Available Available Enable SIM56-02/ Enable SIM56-02/ Service or
Device cloning / Device cloning / User
Storage backup Storage backup
9 FAX/I-FAX reception image Not available Available Enable SIM66-62 Disable --- ---
data (backup)

Procedures
Step1 Use SIM56-2 to back up the mSATA SSD data to the USB
flash drive.
Step2 Back up the mSATA SSD data by the device cloning function
when the operation panel screen is customized.
Step3 Replace the mSATA SSD with a new one.
Step4 Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
Step5 Use SIM56-02 to restore the data backed up in procedure 1).
Step6 Restore the data backed up in procedure 2) by using the
device cloning function.

MX-6070N OTHERS 13 – 4
LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWB’s of this model employs lead-free solder. The “LF” marks indicated on the PWB’s and the Service Manual mean “Lead-Free” solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.

Example:

<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>

Solder composition Solder composition Solder composition code

code (Refer to the Sn-Ag-Cu a
Lead-Free table at the right.)
Sn-Ag-Bi
b
Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu

a
Sn-Zn-Bi z
5mm Sn-In-Ag-Bi i
Sn-Cu-Ni n
Sn-Ag-Sb s
Bi-Sn-Ag-P p
Bi-Sn-Ag

(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD

When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread.
Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident.
Since the melting-point of lead-free solder thread is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the
exclusive-use soldering iron is recommended.

(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK

Since the melting-point of lead-freeCOPYRIGHT © XXXX
solder is about 220°C, which BYSHARP
is about CORPORATION
40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering
capacity is inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land
separation or may exceed the heat-resistive temperature ALLofRIGHTS
components. Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when
RESERVED.
completion of soldering is confirmed.
Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently.
If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron
tip after completion of soldering work. No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in
If the soldering iron tip is discolored black during soldering work, clean and file the tip with steel wool or a fine filer.
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
prior written permission of the publisher.
 CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT
(Danish) ADVARSEL !
Lithiumbatteri – Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English) Caution !
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturer’s instructions.
(Finnish) VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French) ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’ il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du
même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par
le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish) VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German) Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien dürfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.

CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL

(For USA, CANADA)
“BATTERY DISPOSAL”
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY
(MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY
THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE
BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR
LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION
ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.

“TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGÉES”

CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE
MÉMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANÈSE)
QUI DOIT ÊTRE TRAITÉE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA
PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE
AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES
INFORMATIONS SUR LES MÉTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET
DE TRAITEMENT.
 COPYRIGHT © 2016 BY SHARP CORPORATION
All rights reserved.
Produced in Japan for electronic Distribution
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,
electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise
without prior written permission of the publisher.

Trademark acknowledgements
x Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® 98, Windows® Me, Windows NT® 4.0,
Windows® 2000, Windows® XP, Windows® Vista, Windows® 7, Windows® 8,
Windows® 8.1, Windows® Server 2003, Windows® Server 2008,
Windows® Server 2012 and Internet Explorer®
are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A.
and other countries.
x PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
x Macintosh, Mac OS, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, Laser Writer, and Safari are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Apple Inc.
x IBM, PC/AT, and Power PC are trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation.
x Acrobat® Reader Copyright® Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated.
x PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
x Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.
x All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.

SHARP CORPORATION
Business Solutions BU

First edition: April 2016

Latest edition: September 2016